03 TT - High Resistance

MASTER PLANNING & INFRASTRUCTURE CONSULTANCY SERVICES
FOR
GEWAN ISLAND
PK2 - INFRASTRUCTURE WORKS
(DESIGN DEVELOPMENT)
VOLUME 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Gewan Island PK2 - Infrastructure Works
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 1 GENERAL
Part 1 Introduction
Part 2 Use and Maintenance of the Site
Part 3 Site Access and Entry onto the Site
Part 4 Protection
Part 5 Interference
Part 6 Project Meetings
Part 7 Submittals
Part 8 Building Demolition
Part 9 Materials
Part 10 Occupational Health and Safety
Part 11 Engineer’s Site Facilities
Part 12 Contractor’s Site Facilities
Part 13 Setting Out of the Works
Part 14 Temporary Works and Equipment
Part 15 Temporary Controls
Part 16 Traffic Diversions
Part 17 Project Co-ordination
Part 18 Other Contractors
Part 19 Regulatory Requirements
Part 20 Clearance of the Site
Part 21 Final Inspection and Handover Procedures
Part 22 New Technologies and Innovations
Part 23 Design and Supervision Consultant Quality Requirement
Part 24 Construction Dewatering
SECTION 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

Part 1 General
Part 2 Submittals
Part 3 Contractor’s Quality Personnel
Part 4 Document and Data Control
Part 5 Quality Records
Part 6 Quality Audits
Part 7 Inspection And Test
Part 8 Materials
Part 9 Nonconformance Monitoring
Part 10 Laboratories
Part 11 Site Meetings And Reports
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 10

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-TOC-PMC-01 REV 0
© Copyright protected
Part 12 Failure By The Contractor To Meet Acceptable Quality Performance

Part 13 Suspension of Work
Part 14 APPENDIX A – Sampling and Testing Frequencies
Part 15 APPENDIX B – Templates
(Contractors Project Quality Plan Template, Contractors Inspection
And Test Plan Template, and Quality Non-conformance Template)
SECTION 3 GROUND INVESTIGATION

Part 1 General
Part 2 Boreholes
Part 3 Pits and Trenches
Part 4 Soil Sampling
Part 5 in-Situ Testing, Instrumentation and Monitoring
Part 6 Laboratory Testing
SECTION 4 FOUNDATIONS AND RETAINING STRUCTURES

Part 1 General Requirements for Piling Work
Part 2 Concrete Works for Piling
Part 3 Shadow Foundations
Part 4 Deep Foundations
Part 5 Retaining Structures
SECTION 5 CONCRETE
Part 1 General
Part 2 Aggregates
Part 3 Cementitious Materials
Part 4 Water
Part 5 Admixtures
Part 6 Property Requirements
Part 7 Concrete Plants
Part 8 Transportation and Placing Of Concrete
Part 9 Formwork
Part 10 Curing
Part 11 Reinforcement
Part 12 Joints
Part 13 Inspection and Testing Of Hardened Concrete
Part 14 Protective Treatments for Concrete
Part 15 Hot Weather Concreting
Part 16 Miscellaneous
Part 17 Structural Precast Concrete
Part 18 Prestressed Concrete
Part 19 Testing of Water Retaining Structures

Part 20 Personnel Qualifications and Certification
SECTION 6 ROADWORKS
Part 1 General
Part 2 Site Clearance
Part 3 Earthworks
Part 4 Unbound Pavement Materials
Part 5 Asphalt Works
Part 6 Concrete Road Pavements
Part 7 Asphalt Plants
Part 8 Recycled and Stabilised Road Materials
Part 9 Recycled Aggregate for Roadworks
Part 10 Vehicle Crash Barriers
Part 11 Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas
Part 12 Fencing
Part 13 Traffic Signs, Markings and Studs
Part 14 Works in Relation To Services
Part 15 Road Lighting
Part 16 Traffic Signals
Part 17 Road Drainage
Part 18 Geosynthetics
Part 19 Miscellaneous
Part 20 Reinforced Earth Structures
SECTION 7 GREEN CONSTRUCTIONS

Part 1 Introduction
Part 2 Global Sustainability Assessment System - GSAS
Part 3 Energy
Part 4 Water [W]
Part 5 Indoor Environment
Part 6 Cultural and Economic Value
SECTION 8 DRAINAGE WORKS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Earthworks
Part 3 Pipes and Fittings Materials
Part 4 Pipeline Installation
Part 5 Valves, Penstocks and Appurtenances
Part 6 Miscellaneous Metal Works
Part 7 Miscellaneous GRP Works
Part 8 Protective Coatings and Painting
Part 9 Trenchless Pipeline Construction

Part 10 Pipelines Cleaning and Inspection Survey

Part 11 Sewer Rehabilitation
Part 12 Vacuum Sewerage System
SECTION 9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Part 1 General
Part 2 Submersible Pumps
Part 3 Centrifugal Pumps (Dry Well)
Part 4 Centrifugal Pumps (Split Casing)
Part 5 Archimedian Screw Pumps
Part 6 Surge Control System
Part 7 Lifting Equipment
Part 8 Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
Part 9 Odour Control Equipment-Carbon Type
Part 10 Odour Control Equipment-Scrubber Type
Part 11 Screening Equipment
Part 12 Grit Removal Equipment
Part 13 Aeration Equipment
Part 14 Air Blowers and Compressors
Part 15 Settlement Tank Equipment
Part 16 Tertiary Treatment Granular Filters
Part 17 Sludge Thickening and Dewatering Equipment
Part 18 Mixers and Stirrers
Part 19 Chlorination Plant Equipment
Part 20 Washwater Systems
Part 21 Miscellaneous Equipment
Part 22 Ventilation Systems
SECTION 10 INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

Part 1 General
Part 2 Telemetry/SCADA
Part 3 Primary Elements
Part 4 Panel Mounted and Miscellaneous Instruments
Part 5 Control Panels and Control Room Hardware
SECTION 11 HEALTH & SAFETY

Part 1 Regulatory Document
Part 2 Safety and Accident Prevention Management / Administration
System (SAMAS)
SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDINGS

Part 1 General

Part 2 Excavations
Part 3 Filling
Part 4 Utility Trenches
Part 5 Installation of Protective Membranes
SECTION 13 MASONRY
Part 1 General
Part 2 Mortar and Grout
Part 3 Accessories
Part 4 Unit Masonry
Part 5 Masonry Laying
SECTION 14 ROOFING
Part 1 General
Part 2 Membrane Roofing
Part 3 Metal and Plastic Roofing
Part 4 Roof and Deck Insulation
Part 5 Roofing Tiles
SECTION 15 INSULATION OF BUILDINGS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Building Insulation
Part 3 Cold Stores
SECTION 16 STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Materials
Part 3 Drawings
Part 4 Fabrication
Part 5 Welding
Part 6 Bolting
Part 7 Accuracy of Fabrication
Part 8 Erection
Part 9 Accuracy of Erected Steelwork
Part 10 Protective Treatment
SECTION 17 METALWORK
Part 1 General
Part 2 Materials Classification
Part 3 Metal Doors and Windows
Part 4 Architectural Metal Work

Part 5 Light Metal Support and Cladding Support

Part 6 Workmanship
SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY

Part 1 General
Part 2 Wood Treatment
Part 3 Structural Timber (Rough Carpentry)
Part 4 Architectural Timber (Finished Carpentry, Millwork)
Part 5 Joinery
Part 6 Fasteners and Adhesives
Part 7 Ironmongery (Hardware)
SECTION 19 PLUMBING WORK

Part 1 General
Part 2 Water Distribution
Part 3 Plumbing Pipework in Trenches
Part 4 Cold Water Storage
Part 5 Hot Water Storage
Part 6 Commissioning of Systems
Part 7 Plumbing for Gases
SECTION 20 DRAINAGE WORKS FOR BUILDINGS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Internal Drainage Works
Part 3 External Drainage Works
Part 4 Drainage Pipes in Trenches
Part 5 Structures Related To Drainage Work
Part 6 Surface Water Drainage
Part 7 Commissioning Of Systems
SECTION 21 ELECTRICAL WORKS

Part 1 General Provisions for Electrical Installation
Part 2 MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s)
Part 3 Protective Devices
Part 4 Motor Starters
Part 5 Variable Speed Controllers
Part 6 Cables and Small Wiring
Part 7 Conduits and Conduit Boxes
Part 8 Trunking
Part 9 Cable Trays
Part 10 Wiring Accessories and General Power
Part 11 Light Fittings
Part 12 Emergency Lighting

Part 13 Telephone Installations

Part 14 Structured Cabling Systems
Part 15 Electric Motors
Part 16 Power Factor Correction Capacitors
Part 17 Standby Diesel Generator Set
Part 18 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems
Part 19 Sound and Call Systems
Part 20 Elevators/Escalators
Part 21 Lightning Protection
Part 22 Earthing and Bonding
Part 23 Inspection and Testing
Part 24 Documentation Format
Part 25 Electrical Identification
Part 26 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Part 27 Battery and Battery Charger
Part 28 Small Enclosures
Part 29 Underfloor Ducts
Part 30 Duct Bank and Manholes
Part 31 Power Distribution Transformers
Part 32 11 kv Switchgear
Part 33 Actuators
Part 34 HV Variable Frequency Drive
Part 35 11 KV 3 Core XLPE Cables
Part 38 Builder’s Work
Part 45 Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)
Part 46 Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)
Part 47 Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)
Part 48 Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA)
Part 49 Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)
Part 50 Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems
Part 51 Data Communications
Part 52 Computers & Related Peripherals
Part 53 Video Surveillance
Part 54 Parking Control Equipment
SECTION 22 AIR CONDITIONING, REFRIGERATION AND

VENTILATION
Part 1 General
Part 2 Central Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Equipment
Part 3 Unitary Equipment
Part 4 Air Handling Equipment
Part 5 Chilled Water Pipework

Part 6 Ductwork and Air-Side Equipment

Part 7 Thermal Insulation
Part 8 Exhaust Fans
Part 9 Accessories
SECTION 23 FIRE FIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
Part 3 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm Systems
Part 4 Fire Fighting System
Part 5 Testing and Commissioning
SECTION 24 FINISHES TO BUILDINGS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Lath and Plaster
Part 3 Dry Lining (Wall Board)
Part 4 Special Wall Surfaces
Part 5 Tiles
Part 6 Terrazzo
Part 7 Stone Flooring
Part 8 Unit Masonry Flooring
Part 9 Floor Screeds and Treatments
Part 10 Joints, Caulking and Sealants
Part 11 Recessed Duct Covers
Part 12 Carpeting
Part 13 Other Floor Coverings
Part 14 Ceilings
Part 17 Raised Access Floors
SECTION 25 GLASS AND GLAZING

Part 1 General
Part 2 Glass
Part 3 Workmanship
Part 4 Glazed Curtain Walling System
SECTION 26 PAINTING AND DECORATING

Part 1 General
Part 2 Surface Preparation for Painting
Part 3 Primers, Paints and Coatings
Part 4 Wall Coverings of Decorative Papers/Fabrics

SECTION 27 EXTERNAL WORKS

Part 1 General
Part 2 Block Paved Areas
Part 3 Fences and Gates
Part 4 Fountains and Aquatic Features
Part 5 Site Furniture
Part 6 Flag Poles
Part 7 Protective or Shade Cover Systems
Part 8 Play Field and Park Equipment
Part 9 Miscellaneous Other External Works
SECTION 28 LANDSCAPING
Part 1 Landscape Planting
Part 2 Landscape Irrigation System
Part 3 Play Equipment General Specification
SECTION 29 RAILWAYS
Part 1 Design Related Issues Aspects
Part 2 Site Clearance
Part 3 Geotechnical Specifications
Part 4 Tunnel
Part 5 Cut and cover Structure
Part 6 Earthworks and Roadworks
Part 7 Concrete Structures
Part 8 Steel Structures
Part 9 Drainage
Part 10 Railway Track
Part 11 Monitoring and Instrumentation
Part 12 Survey and Setting Out
SECTION 31 FITTINGS
Part 2 Materials and Products
SECTION 34 SIGNAGE
Part 2 Products
Part 3 Execution
SECTION 35 FABRICATED STRUCTURES

Part 1 General
Part 2 Products

SECTION 36 PIPEWORK FOR DISTRICT COOLING DISTRIBUTION

NETWORK
Part 1 Manufacture of Carbon Steel Pipe
Part 2 Coating and Insulation of Chilled Water Pipe
Part 3 Welding of Chilled Water Pipe
Part 4 Installation of Chilled Water Pipe
SECTION 80 PNEUMATIC SOLID WASTE COLLECTION NETWORK

AND STATIONS
Part 1 GENERAL
Part 2 COLLECTION STATION EQUIPMENT
Part 3 TRANSPORT PIPE NET - MILD STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Part 4 FEEDER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
Part 5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SECTION 312319 DEWATERING

Part 1 General
Part 2 Products
Part 3 Execution

1. INTRODUCTION
All work to be executed under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with the Qatar
Construction Specification (QCS2014) latest edition amended, amplified and complemented
with the following General Amendments to Specifications.
In the case of any ambiguity or discrepancy the provisions of the General Amendments to
Specification or Special Specification shall prevail over the provisions of the Government
published specifications. In case of discrepancy between the provisions of the General
Amendments to Specification and Special Specification, the more stringent will prevail.
or
In the case of any ambiguity or discrepancy within or between any documentation forming
part of Project Specifications, the ambiguity or discrepancy shall be determined and resolved
by the Public Works Authority’s Representative, at his absolute discretion.
The term “Engineer” shall mean “Employer’s Representative” wherever used in the
Specifications.
INTRODUCTION Page 1 of 1
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-PMC-01 REV 0
SECTION 05
CONCRETE
The following clauses amend or replace the corresponding referenced clauses in Section 5
of Qatar Construction Specification QCS2014, or are additional clauses, as appropriate.
Concrete works shall be designed and constructed in accordance with Contract documents,
ACI 318M-14, Qatar Construction Standards (QCS 2014) and project specifications.
PART 2 - AGGREGATES
2.1.4 Source Approval
9 Obtain each type of aggregate from one source. Gabbro aggregates could be used in
concrete mixes.
Table 2.1 Modify the Following
10 Flakiness index shall be 25% max for coarse aggregate for use in structural concrete
when tested according to EN 933-3 and BS 812 standards.
Add Elongation index: test method to BS 812, permissible limits for coarse aggregate to
be 25%.
2.4 Fine Aggregate for concrete and Mortar
Modify item 2
2 The gradation of fine aggregate shall also be in accordance with ASTM C33/C33M.
PART 3 - CEMENT
3.2 SOURCE APPROVAL
Add the Following:
6 Obtain type or class of cement from single source and same manufacturer's plant.
3.4 QUALITY AND TESTING
Add the Following:
CONCRETE S5 - Page 1 of 10
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-ST-01 REV 0
3 For massive concrete structures, the heat of hydration when using cement that meets
the specified requirements shall not exceed 260 kj/Kg after 7 days when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 186.
4 The cement shall have a minimum clinker content of 95%.
5 Cyclopean concrete shall be made with sulphate resisting ordinary cement to ASTM
C 150 type V or equivalent with 28 days compressive strength (Cubic): 20MPa.
Plums used in cyclopean concrete shall consist of non-reactive broken stone spalls or
boulders ranging in size from 200mm to 300mm. They shall be free from sharp or
angular edges and shall not form more than 30% of the total volume of concrete.
They shall be evenly graded and shall be soaked in water prior to incorporation in the
mix. Plums shall be evenly distributed in the concrete mix with a minimum cover of
100mm.
6 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Types I, II and V or BS EN 197-1 Type CEM I

42.5 N.
a- Triple Blend Cement: Moderately Sulfate Resisting Cement, ASTM C150

Type II or Cement Type CEM I 42.5N to BS EN 197-1 standard with C3A content
ranging from 5% to 8% for all reinforced concrete elements in contact with soil.
Silica fume (5% to 10% of cementitious weight in combination with either Fly ash
(25% to 35% of cementitious weight) or GGBS (50% to 60% of cementitious weight)
shall be added to the Concrete mix to ensure the required durability and heat of
hydration requirements.
b- Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150 Type I or BS EN 197-

1 Type CEM I 42.5N shall be used for superstructure concrete elements.
Cementitious additives such as Fly ash or GGBS, in combination with silica fume,
may be necessary to be added to the concrete mix to achieve the specified strength
and permeability test requirements and/or to meet the heat of hydration requirements
for massive/thick concrete elements.
c- Sulphate resisting cement to ASTM C150 TYPE V or BS EN 197-1 Type

CEM I 42.5N/SR3 (C3A content lower than 3%) shall be used in plain substructure
concrete and in concrete in contact with sewage.
PART 4 - WATER
4.3 TESTING AND SAMPLING
Table 4.2: The maximum chloride and sulfate content values for reinforced concrete shall be
adjusted as follow:
a- Chloride (Cl) shall not exceed 500 ppm for all types of concrete
b- Sulfates (SO4) shall be limited to 1000 ppm.
PART 5 - ADMIXTURES
5.2.1 General
8 Third generation admixture, Polycarboxylate Ether shall be used in the concrete

mixes including microsilica or if self-compacting concrete is required.
9 Obtain each admixture from the same manufacturer.
PART 6 - PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
6.2.2 Add Item 6:
6. The exposure of substructure concrete is classified as:

X5 “Extreme”/S2.
6.4 Grades of Concrete
Table 6.4 “Concrete grades composition requirements” as follows:
- Concrete grades B15 and B20 be read C15 & C20, with minimum cementitious
content of 260 kg/m3 and Maximum water: cementitious ratio of 0.6.
- Superstructure concrete: Minimum Cementitious Content of 380 kg/m3 and
maximum W/C ratio of 0.4.
- Substructure concrete: Minimum Cementitious Content of 380 kg/m3 and maximum
W/C ratio of 0.35.
- Blinding Concrete: Minimum Cementitious Content of 300 kg/m3 and maximum
W/C ratio of 0.55.
Add the following notes under the Table:

- The concrete compressive strength class for reinforced substructure and
superstructure concrete elements shall be C50 (compressive strength of the cube to
be at least 50MPa at the age of 28 days).
- The concrete compressive strength class for blinding/plain concrete shall be C35
(compressive strength of the cube to be at least 35MPa at the age of 28 days).
- Triple Blend Cement shall be used for substructure concrete mixes.
6.6 Design of Concrete Mixes
Add the following:
8 Concrete Grade is the characteristic strength at 28 days, at which not more than 5%
of the cubes can be expected to fail.
9 Third generation admixture, Polycarboxylate Ether, shall be used in the concrete mix
containing microsilica to ensure the required workability or if self-compacting
concrete is required.
10 The concrete mix for substructure concrete elements shall meet the permeability
requirements of “ High Durability” included under Table 6.9.
11 The concrete mix for the superstructure concrete elements shall be tested for all
specified permeability test requirements under table 6.9 and the below limits shall
not be exceeded:
- Water Penetration of 15 mm as per BS EN 12390-8;

- Resistance to Chloride ion Penetration (RCP) of 1500 coulombs as per ASTM C
1202;
- Chloride Migration of 3.0 x 10-12 m2/s as per NT Build 492;
- Water Absorption of 2% as per BS 1881: Part 122.
6.6.1 Concrete
Replace the third sentence of Item 3 “Mass Concrete” by the following:
3 a) “The maximum allowable differential temperature between the interior and the
exterior
of the mass concrete element shall not exceed 20°C for gabbro aggregates and 25°C for
limestone aggregates.”
8 No-fines concrete and pervious concrete.

Delete this Sub-Clause 6.6.1 (8).
Add 13 as follows:
The slump of concrete to be in the range of 160mm to 200mm. The slump for concrete for
vertical elements shall be in the range of 200mm±20mm with minimum slump not less than
150mm after one hour of concrete placement.
PART 8 - TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING OF CONCRETE
8.1.3 Submittals
Replace item 1 and 2 by the following:
2 A method statement shall be submitted for approval for major concrete placements,
which shall address.
(a) The planned rate of placing

(b) Number of batching plants and locations with respect to site
(c) Number of trucks
(d) Number and positioning of pumps

(e) Pour sequence
(f) Quality control measures
(g) Spare equipment
(h) Any other factors that might affect the placing of concrete.
The method statement should be submitted at least three days in advance of the
planned pour. If required by the Engineer, or any other concerned party a prepour
planning meeting may be arranged with representatives from the ready-mix supplier,
Contractor and Engineer.
8.2.2 Pumped Concrete
Replace item 3 and 5 by the following:
5 Where concrete is conveyed by chuting or pumping the plant shall be of a size and
design to ensure continuous flow in the chute or pipe. The slope of the chute and the
pressure of the pump shall allow the concrete to flow without the use of any water
additional to that approved by the Engineer to produce the required consistency and
without segregation of the ingredients. The delivery end of the chute or pipe shall be
thoroughly flushed with water before and after each working period and kept clean.
The water used for this purpose shall be discharged outside and away from any
permanent works. The surface of the chute shall be smooth enough to prevent
disintegration of fresh concrete.
PART 10 - CURING
10.1.3 Submittals
Add the following:
2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the proposed method of
curing thick concrete members, including method of controlling internal differential
thermal strains by preventing the concrete from experiencing excessive temperature
differential between the internal concrete and the surfaces.
10.2.1 General
2 Special attention shall be given to the curing of vertical and overhanging surfaces to
ensure satisfactory curing. Special care should be given for curing concrete members
of a concrete mix containing fly ash, silica flume or any other pozzolans.
PART 11 - REINFORCEMENT
11.2.1 Reinforcing Bars

Item 1:
- Amend bullet (iii): The maximum carbon content of ASTM A615/A615M steel shall
be 0.3%
11.3.2 Sampling
Delete Item No. 5 "Where epoxy coated ……………. the batch number".
11.6 PROTECTIVE COATINGS TO REINFORCEMENT
Delete Clause 11.6 entirely (11.6, 11.6.2, 11.6.3 and 11.6.4).
PART 14 – Protective treatments for concrete
14.3.3 Waterproofing Membrane
Table 14.1
Amend the following:
Minimum thickness: to be 1.5mm instead of 1.0mm.
The following part shall be added to “section 5 – Part 14” of Qatar Construction specification
QCS 2014.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
A. GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes crystalline waterproofing.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

1- Include construction details, material descriptions and installation instructions.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Applicator.

B. Product Certificates: For each product of waterproofing, patching and plugging
material, signed by manufacturers
C. Product Test Reports: For each product formulation, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has completed crystalline

waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and whose work has resulted in application with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to
demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Build mockup of typical vertical and horizontal surfaces 1.0 sq. m in size.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain crystalline waterproofing products and materials through
one source from a single manufacturer.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit crystalline waterproofing to be performed according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts,
drains, and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been
completed. Proceed only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including
honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free
of forming materials, including reveal inserts.
C. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is
maintained at 4.4 deg C or above during work and cure period, and space is well
ventilated and kept free of water.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by Applicator and countersigned by

Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements or that fails to perform as required, and to maintain watertight
conditions within specified warranty period. Warranty includes responsibility for

removing and replacing construction and other work that conceals crystalline
waterproofing.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Prepackaged, gray or white-colored proprietary blend of

portland cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with
water and applied, penetrates into concrete and concrete unit masonry and reacts
chemically with the byproducts of cement hydration in the presence of water to
develop crystalline growth within substrate capillaries to produce an impervious,
dense, waterproof substrate; with properties complying with or exceeding the criteria
specified below.
1. Water Permeability: Maximum Zero for water at 9 m when tested according
to COE CRD C48.
2. Compressive Strength: minimum 32 MPa at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
3. Flexural Strength: minimum 4 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 348.
4. Bond Strength: 5 MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Ready-mixed cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar

for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections with
properties meeting or exceeding the following:
2. Flexural Strength: minimum 5 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 348.
3. Shrinkage: Minus 0.01 percent at 28 days and plus 0.07 percent at 90 days
when tested according to ASTM C 596.
B. Plugging Compound: Cementitious, ready-mixed, efflorescence-free, surface
waterproofing compound with hydrophobic properties that requires only the addition
of water, and is resistant to water and moisture but is vapor permeable for all standard
applications (vertical, overhead and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular
traffic); with properties meeting or exceeding the following criteria:
4. Permeability: maximum Zero for water of 9 m when tested according to
COE CRD C48.
6. Flexural Strength: minimum 5MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 348.
7. Bond Strength: 2 MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.
C. Water: Potable.
2.3 MIXES
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to water according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical mixer or by hand
to required consistency.
C. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for suitable
conditions where waterproofing is to be applied.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Notify Engineer in writing of active leaks or defects that would affect system
performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect other work from dripping or splatter from crystalline waterproofing during
application. Provide temporary enclosure to confine operation, to prevent polluting
the air, and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for
application.
C. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or
annular spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between
pipes and pipe sleeves.
D. Stop active water leaks with plugging and patching compounds according to
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound.
1. At holes and cracks 1.6 mm wide or larger in substrate, remove loosened
chips and cut reveal with sides perpendicular to surface, not tapered, and
minimum 25 mm deep. Fill reveal with patching compound flush with
surface.
F. Surface Preparation: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease,
oils, paint, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing
bonds to surfaces.
1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
a. Scratch- and Float-Finished Concrete: Etch with 10 percent muriatic
acid solution according to ASTM D 4260.
b. Smooth-Formed and Trowel-Finished Concrete: Prepare by
mechanical abrading or abrasive-blast cleaning according to
ASTM D 4259.
2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for

application and curing.
3. Saturate surface with water for several hours and maintain damp condition
until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water.
4. Apply waterproofing to surfaces, and extend waterproofing onto adjacent
surfaces as follows:
a. Onto columns integral with treated walls.
b. Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a
distance of 600 mm for cast-in-place concrete and 1200 mm for
masonry.
c. Onto exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns, for a
height of 300 mm, where floors, but not walls, are treated.
d. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pipe
trenches,]pipe chases, pits, sumps, and similar offsets and features.
3. Number of Coats: Two coats.
4. Application Method: Apply to ensure that each coat fills voids and is in full
contact with substrate or previous coat.
5. Dampen surface between coats.
B. Final Coat Finish: Smooth.
C. Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for three days immediately after final coat has
set, followed by air drying, unless otherwise recommended in writing by
manufacturer
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

test and inspect completed application of waterproofing.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
SECTION 06
ROAD WORKS
The following clauses amend, replace the corresponding referenced clauses in Section 6 of
QCS (2014), or are additional clauses, as indicated.
PART 3 – EARTHWORKS
3.3 MATERIALS
3.3.2 Unsuitable Material
Add new item (f) as follows:
(f) A-6, and A-7 soil (AASHTO M-145)
3.3.3 Fill Material
Modify items 4 as follows:
4 The maximum nominal particle size of fill material shall not be more than ½ the
layer thickness unless the material is classified as rock as per this part of the
specification and the placing and compaction are carried out according to the
requirements for rock fills.
Add new item 8 as follows:
8 4-day soaked C.B.R. should not be less than 15% (AASHTO T-193) in accordance
with AASHTO T-180 Method D.
3.3.7 Improved Subgrade Layer
1 Improved Subgrade Layer: the 500 mm of compacted selected material forming the
layer below the aggregate sub-base course or the capillary break layer. The
improved subgrade gradation and physical properties should conform to the
requirements for the selected fill layer. The CBR for the improved subgrade layer
should be greater or equal to 15% when compacted to 100% MDD.
3.6 FILLING GENERAL
3.6.1 General
ROADWORKS S6 - Page 1 of 13
Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-GE-01 REV 0
6 the top 200 mm depth of selected fill material shall be compacted to a minimum
98% maximum dry density in accordance with AASHTO T-180D.
3.6.5 Rock fill
8 The material used in rockfill embankments shall consist predominantly of rock

fragments of such size that the material can be placed in layers of the thickness
prescribed conforming to the requirements stated in Table 3.1
Table 3.1: ROCK SUITABLE FOR EMBANKMENT
1. Maximum particle size ........1/2 loose layer thickness

2. Passing 0.42mm (Sieve # 40) ........25% maximum
3. Uniformity coefficient, Cu.......5 minimum, where Cu = D60/D10
D60 = the Particle size at which 60% passes in weight on the GSD
D10 = the Particle size at which 10% passes in weight on the GSD
3.6.6 Compaction
Modify item 7 as follows:
7 Filling shall be in layers not exceeding 200 mm compacted thicknesses.
PART 4 – UNBOUND PAVEMENT MATERIALS
4.1.3 Definitions
Modify items 6 as follows:
6. Road base: the compacted selected material forming the layer between the
subbase or subgrade and base course or the bituminous wearing course.
Modify item7 as follows:
7. Base course: the compacted selected material forming the layer between the sub-base
and the bituminous wearing course.
4.2.4 Fine Aggregate
2 Fine aggregate shall contain a maximum of 5% clay content at any stage of

construction when tested in the Hydrometer Test in accordance with AASHTO
T88.
4.2.5 Coarse Aggregate
Modify item 1 & 5 as follows:
1 Coarse aggregate (retained on the 4.75mm sieve) shall consist of crushed stone or
crushed gravel with a minimum of 90% by weight having at least one fractured
face.
5 Coarse aggregate material shall not show signs of disintegration and the percentage
loss in weight after 5 cycles shall not exceed 12% in the case of the sodium
sulphate test and 18% in the case of the magnesium sulphate test when tested as per
ASTM C88.
4.6 SPREADING AND COMPACTION
11 Material shall be spread to a thickness that would result in layers not more than
200mm thick after compaction. Where the finished compacted thickness exceeds
200mm placing shall be executed in composite layers each layer not exceeding 200mm
in compacted thickness as directed by Engineer.
4.9.3 Gradation
Add item 4 as follows:
4 Gradation testing shall be carried out when materials change (for each source).
Add new section 4.9.6 & 4.10 as follows:
4.9.6 CBR
1 The improved subgrade layer or the aggregate base course shall be tested for
acceptance in accordance with CML 10-97 and BS 1377 to attain the required
CBR. Four (4) tests shall be carried out unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
4.10 CONSTRUCTION OF TRIAL SECTIONS
1 The Contractor shall lay and compact trial sections of varying thickness of
aggregate base course. Trial sections shall be at approved locations or close to the
site and to the dimensions proposed by the contractor and approved by the engineer
or as otherwise directed by Engineer. Each trial section shall be laid using the same
materials, mix proportions, mixing, spreading and compaction equipment, and
construction procedures, proposed for use in the Works.
2 The objectives of these trials shall be to determine the adequacy of the Contractor's
equipment, the loose depth measurements that will result in the specified
compacted layer depths, the field moisture content for compaction, and the
relationship between the number of compaction passes and the resulting density of
the aggregate base course material.
Add new Part 20: Reinforced Earth Structures.
Part 20 REINFORCED EARTH STRUCTURES
1. SCOPE
A. These Works shall consist of designing, furnishing all materials including

precast concrete facing panels and reinforcing strips or grids, constructing, erecting
and finishing reinforced earth embankment, including excavation and backfilling for
foundations.
B. Systems for construction of reinforced earth embankments involve the use of

reinforcing synthetic tie strip made of polyester (PET) core wrapped in polyethylene
(PE) sheath. The systems are protected by Patent Rights and the Contractor shall be
responsible for making his own arrangements to secure the supplies and services
needed in respect of the system proposed for use in the Works from the patentee or his
licensees through suitable Legal Agreement. A full copy of such Agreement shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
B.1 Performance Requirements
Design of reinforced earth structure is based on products indicated. If comparable products

of other manufacturers are proposed, provide engineering design for proposed products,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
All design and construction works shall be carried out generally in accordance with
FHWA-NHI-10-024 & 025 and as specified herein.
All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the appropriate ASTM or
AASHTO Standards current at the time of tender.
All elements of reinforced earth structure shall be protected from long term corrosion due
to aggressive exposure conditions.
The Contractor shall provide complete set of signed drawings ‘issued for construction’,
calculations for internal and external structure stability and specifications of materials and
methods for the proposed wall system for the approval of the Engineer. This submission
shall take place at least 90 days prior to the ordering of manufactured materials.
B.2 Submittals
 Qualification Data:- For qualified professional engineer and testing agency
 Product certificates:- For retaining wall units and soil reinforcement from
manufacturer
 Product test Reports:- Based on evaluation of compressive tests performed by

qualified testing agency, for retaining wall units and soil reinforcement
 Preconstruction test reports
 Source quality-control reports
 Field quality control reports
 Design calculations
 Specification of materials
 Signed drawings
2 MATERIALS
A. Concrete and Reinforcement
A.1 All concrete used in concrete facings and elsewhere shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5: Concrete of QCS 2014.
A.2 Concrete for the facing panels shall conform to Class 400/20 unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings.
A.3 Steel reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of Section 5: Concrte and
Part 11: Reinforcement of QCS 2014.
B. Precast Concrete Facing Panels
B.1 Casting: All reinforcing steel and inserts, including connection hardware, PVC
tubes, tie strips, lifting and handling devices, etc., shall be set in place to the dimensions
and tolerances shown on the Drawings. Panels shall be cast on a flat level area with the
exposed face cast against a correctly dimensioned and approved form.
B.2 Each panel shall be identified by lightly marking in the fresh concrete on the rear
face the date of casting, panel type and any other information required by the Engineer.
B.3 Curing: Panels shall be cured in accordance with the requirements of Section 5:
Concrete of QCS 2014 and shall continue as necessary beyond 7 days until the concrete
develops the specified compressive strength.
B.4 Removal of Forms: Forms shall remain in place until they can be removed without
damaging the panels in any way.
B.5 Concrete Finish: The front face of each panel shall have the finish as specified in
the plans or as approved by the Engineer.
B.6 Cap units: : Provide cap units of same shape as other units with smooth, as-cast top
surfaces without holes or lugs
B.7 Special Units: Provide corner units, end units, and other shapes as needed to
produce segmental retaining walls of dimensions and profiles indicated and to provide
texture on exposed surfaces [matching face].
B.8 Test Panels: The Contractor shall construct and submit at least 3 test panels. The
materials, including formwork, used in construction of all test panels shall be as for those
proposed for use in the Works. The test panel finish shall be approved by the Engineer
prior to production of any panels for incorporation in the Works. The rear face of each
panel shall have a dense, rough texture without honeycombed areas. The approved panels
shall remain available on Site throughout the duration of the Contract.
B.9 Tolerances: Thickness shall be within 15 mm of the specified value. Length and
breadth of panels shall be within 5 mm of the specified values. Diagonal measurements
shall not differ by more than 10 mm. The front face shall have a tolerance in any direction
of 5 mm measured by a 1.5 m long straightedge.
B.10 Testing Generally: Sampling and testing for compressive strength shall conform to
Section 5: Concrete.
B.11 Additional Compressive Tests: Additional testing for compressive strength shall
confirm to Section 5: Concrete of QCS 2014. Panels with defects that indicate imperfect
molding, honeycombing, or open texture concrete, or that do not correspond with the
quality of the approved test panel will be rejected.
B.12 Handling, Storage, and Transporting: All units shall be handled, stored and
transported in such a manner as to eliminate the danger of chipping, cracking, fracture and
excessive bending stresses. Units in transport or in storage shall be supported on firm
blockings located adjacent to the tie strips. Connecting pins and tie strips shall be protected
from bending and damage at all times.
C. Reinforcing Geosynthetic Strip (Polyester)
C.1 General: Shapes and dimensions of these elements shall be conforming to

dimensions and tolerances shown on the Drawings.
C.2 Manufacture: Synthetic reinforcing strips should be made up of high tenacity
polyester yarn tendon running parallel and bundled together in a polyethylene sheath.
C.3 Mechanical Properties: The Strip shall have a short term strength ranging between
45kN to 100 kN, determined from tensile testing at 20 degrees C under a constant rate of
extension of 50 mm/minute. For each batch of reinforcing material delivered to Site, or at
such other times as may be required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a test
certificate from an approved independent testing laboratory confirming that the required
strength characteristics have been met.
C.4 Physical Properties: It shall be immune to attack from ultra-violet light for a
minimum period of 3 years and shall be immune to attack from all chemicals naturally
found in soils and to biological attack from micro-organisms. The Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer with the manufacturer's warranty to this effect. The minimum strip width
shall be 90 mm. Methods of joining reinforcing material shall be approved and in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C.5 Upon manufacture, the reinforcing elements shall be placed in approved wrapping
material which shall prevent ultra-violet light from reaching the reinforcing elements. The
reinforcing elements shall be identified with their date of manufacture. Upon delivery to
Site the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of the manufacturer's certificates
clearly stating the dates of manufacture of the reinforcing elements. No reinforcing
elements shall be incorporated into the Works if at the time of proposed incorporation the
elements are more than three years old.
C.6 Alternative Soil Reinforcement Types: Alternative types of soil reinforcement may
be submitted for approval. The following details shall be provided:
- The coefficient of friction between the reinforcing material and the fill
- An evaluation of the long term and short term tensile properties of
reinforcement
- Resistance to mechanical damage
- Load/strain characteristics
- Resistance to abrasion
- Resistance to ultra-violet light
- Effects of temperature
- Connections between facing panels and reinforcing material and between one
section of reinforcing material and another
- Site damage trials
- Any special fill properties required, including grading limits, angle of internal
friction and cohesive strength
- Methods of tightening the reinforcement before placing fill
- Proposed sequence of placing fill
- Estimate of movement of panels during construction
- Tolerance on the finished line of the wall
- Assessment of the durability of reinforcement with respect to chemical and
biological attack and design life
- Any other information required by the Engineer
D. Fasteners
The Contractor shall submit for approval the following details for all types of fasteners
proposed for use in the Works:
- Materials used and national standards under which they are manufactured
- Long term and short term tensile and shear properties of the materials
- Resistance to mechanical damage
- Load/strain characteristics
- Resistance to abrasion
- Resistance to ultra-violet light
- Effects of temperature
- Proposed method of installation
- Assessment of material's durability with respect to chemical and biological
attack and design life
- Any other information required by the Engineer
E. Backfill for Reinforced Earth Structure
E.1 General: Backfill shall not contain chalk, unburnt colliery shale, pulverized full ash,
material from swamps, marshes or bogs, organic or other materials which, in the opinion of
the Engineer, would result in the structure becoming unfit for its intended use.
E.2 Frictional Fill: This material shall contain a maximum of 10% passing the
0.075 mm (No.200) sieve.
Gradation Requirements: Backfill material shall conform to the following gradations:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
125 mm (5 in.) 100
90 mm (3-1/2 in.) 85 - 100
9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 25 - 100
0.600 mm (No. 30) 10 - 65
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0 - 10
F. Drainage System
F.1 General: A minimum of 300 mm thick drainage layer shall be provided between the
face panel and backfill as shown in the Drawings. If geotextiles are not used, the drainage
layer thickness shall be increased to a minimum of 600mm subjected to Engineer’s
approval.
F.2 Drainage Fill: Aggregate Material for use in Drainage fill shall be Rapid Draining
crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel conforming to the properties provided as
below.
Properties of Rapid Draining Materials for use in Drainage Blanket
Property Range
Permeability in m/day 300 - 1500
Effective Porosity 0.25
% Fractured Faces (COE Method) Min. 75%
Cu (D60/D10) > 3.5
L.A. Abrasion < 40
California Bearing Ratio (CBR) > 30%
The gradation of the Rapid Draining Material for use in Drainage fill shall be as
provided as below:
Gradation of Rapid Draining Materials for use in Drainage Blanket
Sieve Designation (mm) Percent Passing

38.0 (1-1/2 in.) 100
25.0 (1 in.) 70 – 100
19.0 (3/4 in.) 55 – 100
12.5 (1/2 in.) 40 – 80
9.5 (3/8 in.) 30 – 65
4.75 (No. 4) 10 – 50
2.4 (No. 8) 0 – 25
1.2 (No. 16) 0–5
F.3 Subdrainage Pipe and Filter Fabric: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall
conform to (ASTM D 3034), (ASTM F 949), (ASTM F 758, Type PS 46).
Filter fabric: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage

applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent.
Apparent Opening Size: (0.3 mm) ASTM D 4751

Minimum Grab Tensile Strength: (490 N); ASTM D 4632.
Tear Strength: (178 N); ASTM D 4533.
Water Flow Rate: (1001/sec/m2); ASTM D4491
G. Alternative Facing Panels and Reinforcing Elements
G.1 Materials for use as facing units or as reinforcing elements, other than those
detailed above, may be submitted for approval. Full details shall be given in respect of their
mechanical, physical, chemical, electro-chemical and other properties together with any
other information relating to these materials required by the Engineer. It shall be
demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the use of these alternative materials
in the Works would not result in the Works becoming unfit for their intended use.
G.2 Where alternative materials for the reinforcing elements are proposed (other than
galvanized steel or polymer grid) the properties of backfill material, reinforcing elements
and test procedures shall be as described in the British Department of Transport
Memorandum No. BE 3/78, unless otherwise approved.
G.3 Where metal connections are proposed in association with reinforcing polymer
grids, the properties and testing of such connections shall also be as described in
Memorandum BE 3/78.
H. Coping
H.1 The coping is used to tie in the top of the wall panels and to provide a smooth
finish to the wall top.
H.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all the details of the coping for
approval.
H.3 Coping can be cast-in-place or prefabricated segments.
H.4 In case the MSE wall proposed by the Contractor comprises a precast coping, the
top of the wall must be smooth and free of steps or irregularities. To accomplish this, level-
up concrete shall be cast on top of the facing units to receive the precast coping.
3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Excavation
A.1 Excavation Works shall be carried out in conformity with the requirements of
Section 6 :Road Works and Part 3: Earth Works of QCS 2014 ". Limits and construction
stages shall be as shown on the Drawings.
B. Foundation Preparation
B.1 The foundation shall be graded level for a width equal to or exceeding the length of
reinforcing strips, or as shown on the Drawings. Prior to wall construction, the foundation
shall be fully compacted with a smooth wheel vibratory roller and shall meet the
requirements of compaction as specified in Section 6:Road Works and Part 3: Earth Works
of QCS 2014. Any foundation soils found to be unsuitable shall be removed and replaced
in accordance with the procedures in Section 6:Road Works and Part 3: Earth Works of
QCS 2014.
B.2 Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, a PCC concrete
levelling pad shall be placed beneath the concrete facing panels.
B.3 The reinforced wall shall have stone pitching at bottom, up to a height of 2.0 m
higher than the expected flood water level, where applicable.
B.4 The design shall address the climatic and soil conditions existing in the area and
provide a minimum design life of 100 years.
C. Erection
C.1 Facing panels shall be erected to the lines and levels as shown on the Drawings.
Panels shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts in the sequence shown on the
Drawings, as backfilling proceeds.
C.2 Panels shall be maintained in position by means of temporary wooden wedges

placed in the joint at the junction of the 2 adjacent panels on the external side of the wall.
Wedges shall be kept in place for the 3 top rows of panels during construction. As
construction proceeds and a fourth row is erected, the lowest row of wedges shall be
removed. This procedure shall be repeated as the wall is erected.
C.3 Vertical and horizontal alignment tolerance shall not exceed 25 mm when measured
with a 3 m straightedge. The maximum offset in any panel joint shall be 25 mm.
D. Placement of Backfill for Reinforced Earth Structure
D.1 Placement of fill shall follow closely behind erection of each lift of facing panels.
Fill shall be placed, spread, leveled and compacted in horizontal layers of thickness
appropriate to the compaction plant used but in any event not exceeding 0.3m.
D.2 Placing and compaction shall be carried out so that all layers of reinforcing strip
will be fixed at the required levels on top of compacted fill. Reinforcing layers shall be
placed at the levels and alignments shown on the Drawings.
D.3 The reinforcing strip and connections shall be handled and installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, copies of which shall be
submitted to the Engineer before commencement of these Works.
D.4 Placing, spreading, leveling and compacting backfill shall proceed in a direction
parallel to the facing panels, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, and shall be
executed in stages to alternate with the placing and fixing of the reinforcing layers and the
facing panels. Reinforcing elements and facing shall not be damaged or displaced during
backfilling operations.
D.5 Backfilling operations shall be so organized that machines or vehicles do not pass
over the reinforcing elements. All construction equipment weighing more than 1,000 kg
and all vehicles shall be kept at least 2 m away from the facing at all times.
D.6 Backfilling within 2 m of the face of the wall shall be compacted by means of
approved vibrating equipment, consisting of a vibro-tamper, or vibrating plate compactor
weighing 1,000 kg, or a vibrating roller weighing not more than 1,000 kg and not more
than 13 kg/cm width of drum.
D.7 The rear of the wall shall be adequately supported by temporary shoring unless the
Works are phased to ensure that placement of backfill material follows closely behind
erection of the panels.
D.8 Backfill outside roadway embankment areas shall be compacted to 90%

AASHTO T180 maximum density. Backfill within roadway embankment areas shall be
compacted to 95% AASHTO T180 maximum density, except for backfill in subgrade
zones which shall be compacted to 100% AASHTO T180 maximum density. Compaction
shall be accomplished without disturbance to, or distortion of, face panels or reinforcing
layers.
D.9 The reinforcing strip shall not contain any cuts, kinks, twists, blisters or other
defects which, in the opinion of the Engineer, would render it unsuitable for its intended
use.
D.10 At the end of each day's operations, the Contractor shall shape the last level of
backfill to permit runoff of rainwater away from the wall face.
SECTION 12
EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDINGS
– Earthworks Related to Buildings of QCS 2014 (Qatar Construction Specification), or are
additional clauses, as appropriate.
PART 2 – EXCAVATION
2.2 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
Replace entire clause 1 with the following clause
1 Prior to commencing any structural excavation work which is 1.5m or greater in

depth, the Contractor shall design an excavation support system where the soil
conditions do not allow for vertical excavation or no enough setback space is
available for open excavation.
Add the following clauses at the end of this section
7 The Contractor shall design, provide, install, monitor, and maintain at the
Contractor’s sole risk and responsibility, excavation support and protection systems
capable of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and supporting sidewalls of
excavations.
(a) Work includes removing when no longer needed.
(b) Install and remove without damaging existing structures, utilities, pavements,
and other facilities adjacent to excavations.
8 Install excavation support and protection systems as excavation works proceed, in a

manner acceptable to the Engineer.
(a) Locate clear of permanent construction to permit access for subsequent

construction operations and inspections.
(b) Trim excavation as required and fill voids behind with soil, and compact.
9 Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress
and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or
other evidence of movement to ensure excavation support and protection remains
stable.
10 Promptly repair or replace as directed and approved by the Engineer, adjacent work,
structures, utilities, pavements and other facilities, damaged or displaced by
installing or removing excavation support and protection systems.
EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDINGS S12 - Page 1 of 6

11 The used excavation side support system must form a full cut-off for water seepage
through the excavation sides.
12 The Contractor shall carry out the works in accordance with a detailed method
statement that must be approved by the Engineer before work commencement.
2.2.2 Removal of water
Replace the entire clauses 1 and 2 with the following clause
1 At locations where the excavation extends below the groundwater table, a dewatering
system is to be provided to lower the groundwater below the excavation level. The
ground water table should be lowered at least 0.5m below the bottom of excavation
within the site limits of each phase during all stages of construction.
2 The Contractor shall design, provide, test, operate, monitor, and maintain a
dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water
flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades,
and ensure erosion is controlled, stability of excavations and constructed slopes is
maintained, and the flooding of excavation and damage to structures are prevented.
The Contractor shall remove the dewatering system from Project site on completion
of dewatering works after obtaining the Engineer’s approval.
2.2.5 Unsound Materials
Delete entire clause 1
Add the following clauses:
1 The excavation level should be thoroughly inspected. Weak silty, or any other
inferior materials encountered at the bottom of the excavation should be removed
and replaced by cyclopean concrete up to the excavation level.
Add new Sub-Clause 2.2.9 as follows:
2.2.9 Cavity Remediation

1 The Contractor shall perform probing for cavity detection beneath shallow
foundations, whenever existence of cavities within foundation bedrock is suspected.
2 Upon the Engineer’s request, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval a detailed Method statement including detailed procedures for probing,
cavity treatment, and full descriptions of the procedures, equipment, materials to be
used, along with material test reports, and quality control.
3 Prior to commencement of works, the ground within the footprint of the probe zone
shall be excavated to the foundation level.
4 After completion of treatment works at site, the Contractor shall submit complete
reports of the probing and treatment that include actual locations of cavity/slump

zone, summary of drilling records with rate of drilling, anomalies, full details of
materials used, and pumping pressure.
5 Grout Mix: The Contractor shall submit his proposed grout mix designs (there can
be more than one mix design if different grouting techniques are adopted) for the
approval of the Engineer. Field trials shall also be carried out at locations approved
by the Engineer to demonstrate that the Criteria of Acceptance is achieved and to
confirm the grouting termination criteria.
Chemicals like retarder have to be used if the injection time will be long and to
prevent clogging of pipe during injection. However, any chemicals to be used shall
be agreed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall carry out trial mix at site to justify the workability and strength
of the proposed grout mix.
The Contractor shall submit his proposed slump for the Engineer’s approval. In
general the slump shall be tested on site for each batch of mix. 28-day compressive
strength of grout mix shall not be less than of 10.0 MPa (Cube Strength).
6 Execution:
A. Cavities at the Foundation level:
If the Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, or cavities exposed at
foundation level exist, the Contractor shall over excavate and clean cavities then
replace with lean concrete fill with 28-day compressive strength of 20 MPa (Cube
Strength), and as directed.
B. Unexposed Cavities below shallow foundations:
a. The cavity detection by probing shall be performed under the shallow
foundation (raft) embedded in the Simsima limestone formation. The
depth of the probe shall be 10 to 15 m into rock (depending on the
depth of the identified anomaly in the geophysical survey). If a cavity
is encountered during probe drilling, then it shall be filled with
concrete or grout, as specified.
b. The depth of the probes into limestone bedrock shall be at least as

stated above if no cavity is encountered, and shall be extended into
limestone by 5m below the last cavity encountered (unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer).
c. Four additional probe drilling shall be performed whenever probe
drilling records reveals the existence of a cavity and/or whenever the
volume of injected grout exceeds 2.5 times the theoretical volume of
the drilled hole. The aim of these additional probes is to determine the
extent of a detected cavity and allow its treatment. The four additional

probes shall be performed at 2.5m from the probe in which a cavity is

detected.
d. The diameter of the drill hole shall be large enough to allow grouting
to be carried out immediately after reaching the required level without
having to re-drill the hole after probing of cavities. The diameter of
the drillhole shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. If treatment of slump zone and cavity is not required, the
drill hole shall be properly backfilled with cement-grout (W/C = 0.6)
or low strength sand-cement grout to the existing ground level.
e. Grout Injection Rates: Generally the Contractor shall adopt slower
pumping rates in order to maximize grout intake and to ensure against
occurrence of hydraulic fracturing. Subject to site trials demonstrating
that the Criteria of Acceptance otherwise be achieved, the pumping or
grout injection rate shall be less than 0.03 m3 per minute or other
approved rate. However, the Contractor should make sure that the
grout would not set in the pumping pipe before completing the
injection into slump zone or cavity.
f. Grout treatment termination criteria shall be agreed upon with the
Engineer after doing field trials for ground treatment.
C. Criteria for acceptance of grout treatment:
a. Acceptance Criteria for treated Zone: The grout treatment shall be
considered successful if the results, obtained from additional probes
carried out through the treated zone, confirm that the voids have been
filled. The probes required to confirm that the acceptance criteria has
been achieved shall be carried out 7 days after completion of grouting
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
b. Grouting shall be repeated until compliance with the Criteria of
Acceptance.
c. All boreholes and probes shall be grouted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer immediately on completion.
7 Surface monitoring
The Contractor shall undertake continuous surface monitoring for settlement or
heave over the designated treatment area and beyond over the period of drilling and
treatment.
Add new Sub-Clause 2.2.10 as follows:
2.2.10 Anti-Termite Treatment
1 Apply chemical termite treatment of the soil using an EPA-Registered termiticide,

complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous

solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for

application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration
allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
2 Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor shall be provided

certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment,
will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or
damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace
damage caused by termite infestation.
3 Warranty Period: ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
4 Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs
before construction.
5 Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment
effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except
previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied
before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide
manufacturer.
6 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements,
interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation,
and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.
7 Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity

required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified
concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to
the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated
zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment
evenly.
(a) Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab

construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an
overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are
placed.
(b) Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of
foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing
pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers,
piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to
bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
(c) Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously

indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches,
and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete
platform and porches are on fill or ground.

(d) Masonry: Treat voids.
(e) Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
8 Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until
completely dry.
9 Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted
until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-
Registered Label instructions.
10 Post warning signs in areas of application.
11 Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,

landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF PART 2

SECTION 13
MASONRY
General:
- Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014) shall be the basis of the

Architectural Specifications unless otherwise indicated hereunder.
- Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
- Edition date of indicated Standards and Codes shall be the latest edition in force at
the time of contract award.
- Acoustic requirements shall comply with Project Acoustic Requirements.
- Comply with all relevant requirements of Qatar Civil Defence.
- The following clauses amend the corresponding referenced clauses in Section 13 of
QCS, or are additional clauses, as appropriate.
PART 2 – MORTAR AND GROUT
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
2.2.2 Cement
1 Plasticizers: to BS EN 934-3.
2 Cement, unless otherwise specified, is to be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN
197-1.
2.2.3 Aggregates:
1 Sand for mortar shall be clean and finely graded to BS EN 13139. Aggregate for
Grout shall be according to BS EN 12620. Maximum size of Course Aggregate
shall be 10 mm.
2.2.4 Water:
1 Water to be clean, free from silt, organic matter, alkali, salts and other deleterious
impurities. Obtain approval of source of supply. Test to BS EN 1008.
2.5 GROUTS
2.5.1 General Requirements
1 Binding Material: Ordinary Portland cement. Do not use lime.

2 Minimum cement content shall be: 300 kg/m3.
3 Aggregates: Aggregate for grout shall be to BS EN 12620. Maximum size of
coarse aggregates shall be 10mm.
MASONRY S13 - Page 1 of 3

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-AR-01 REV 0
4 Compressive Strength: Minimum 17.5 MPa at 28 days when tested to BS EN

12390-3.
PART 3 – ACCESSORIES
3.2 ANCHORS AND TIE SYSTEMS
3.2.1 Anchors at Head Walls and Partitions
3.3 CONTROL JOINTS
3.3.1 Movement Joints: Where indicated on drawings.
3.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
3.4.1 Reinforcement for Concrete Block Masonry
1 Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
PART 4 – UNIT MASONRY
4.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
4.4.1 Concrete Blocks
1 Concrete Blocks are to be made according to BS EN 771-3, tested according to

BS EN 772-2 and BS 6073-2. Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength as follow:
(a) Solid Block: Where indicated, not less than 10.5N/ mm².
(b) Hollow Blocks: Not less than 7.5N/mm². For any cladding on hollow
block compressive strength shall not be less than that of solid block.
(c) Size: As indicated.
4.4.2 Performance Requirements
1 Concrete Masonry Block walls or partitions should satisfy the Project

Requirements and the Performance Requirements, indicated.

PART 5 – MASONRY LAYING
5.1.2 References
1 BS EN 1996 Design of Masonry Structures. Design Considerations, selection of

materials and execution of masonry.
5.12 CAVITY WALLS
5.12.1 Insulation
1. Unfaced Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: Unfaced rigid

rockwool insulation to be according to ASTM C 612.
Man: Ecomax.
Man: Rockwool
Man: Fibrex Insulations Inc.
Man: Owens Corning.
Man: Thermafiber. (http://www.thermafiber.com/)
Man: USG Interiors, Inc
or other equal and approved

SECTION 14
ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
General:
- Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014) shall be the basis of the

Architectural Specifications unless otherwise indicated hereunder.
PART 2 – MEMBRANE ROOFING
2.6 SINGLE LAYER MEMBRANE
2.6.1 General Requirements:
1 Single Layer Elastomeric Sheet: vulcanized ethylene propylene diene monomer

(EPDM) roof membrane, to ASTM D 4637 1.52 mm thick.
2 Elastomeric Flashing Membrane: uncured flashing membrane.
3 Separating Sheet: polyethylene sheet 300 microns thick (1200 gauge):
4 Metal Flashings: to BS EN 485-1>4 or ASTM B 209M.
Man: Carlisle Syntec Inc.

Ref: Sure-Seal EPDM
Man: Firestone Building products Co.

Ref: Rubbergard EPDM membrane
Man: GAF Materials Corporation.
or other equal and approved.
2.7 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANES
2.7.1 General: liquid membrane waterproofing under wet area floor finishes
1 Positive-Side, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: For Vertical Walls in

Wet Areas.
ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING S14 - Page 1 of 3

2 Single Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM

C 836 and with
manufacturer's written physical requirements and recommendations.
Man: Laticrete (http://www.laticrete.com/)

Ref: Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane
Man: Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-525

Man: United Coatings; Elastall 1000.

2.9 PERMEABLE FILTER MEMBRANE
1 Filter Membrane: Vapour permeable geotextile made from non-woven,

thermally bonded continuous polypropylene filaments, to resist Soil Chemicals,
mildew, insects and is non-biodegradable.
Man: DuPont de Nemours International S A

Ref: Typar SF 37 for roofs, (125 g/m2)
Ref: Typar SF56, for planting boxes, (180 g/m2)
Man: Terram Ltd

Ref: Terram 1000/uv for roofs (125 g/m2)
Ref: Terram 1500/uv, for planting boxes, (180 g/m2)
Man: Bitumat
1.11.2 Insulation
1 Protection Fabric: polypropylene non-woven needle-punched fabric which is

stabilized to resist soil chemicals, mildew, insects and is non-biodegradable.
2 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
Man: Dow Chemical Company (The).
Type VII, 414-kPa minimum compressive strength.

PART 4 – ROOF INSULATION
4.3 PROTECTION OF INVERTED ROOFING
1 Concrete Roof Tiles and Fittings: to BS EN 1339, precast, hydraulically pressed

concrete tiles and fittings, to sizes as shown on Drawings, loose laid, highly
reflective color to be White or to be selected by the Engineer.
2 Roof Tile Supports: circular moulded neoprene pads with raised spacing ribs and
levelling pads.
Man: Wegu Canada

Man: Compriband Ltd.
Ref: Terring
Man: Envirospec, Inc.
Ref: Pave-El
3 Ballast: washed round gravel, size 16 - 32 mm with finer aggregate screened off.
4 Filter Membrane: lay on clean, dry smooth base with adjacent sheets lapped in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4.4.2 Roof Insulation
1 Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Complying with SASO GSO BS

4841-1 and ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or Class 2, with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E
84.
Man: Dow Chemical Company

Ref: Roofmate

SECTION 15
THERMAL INSULATION OF BUILDINGS
General:
- Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014) shall be the basis of the Architectural
Specifications unless otherwise indicated hereunder.
PART 2 – BUILDING INSULATION
2.2 THERMAL INSULATION
2.2.1 Minimum Envelope Performance Requirements
Area Required Required Resulting U- SC

minimum maximum value
Insulation Thermal
thickness Conductivity
(mm) for Insulation
Glass of the - - 1.9 W/m2.K 0.28
Assembly glazing
with frame
2.3 ACOUSTICAL CONTROL FOR WALLS AND CEILING: Where indicated

and to comply with Acoustic Report.
2.3.1 References
1 Refer to Acoustic Report.
2.4 INSULATION MATERIAL TYPES
2.4.2 Rockwool-Fibre Board Insulation:
1 Unfaced Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: Unfaced rigid

rockwool insulation to be according to ASTM C 612, maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 15 and 0, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
THERMAL INSULATION OF BUILDINGS S15 - Page 1 of 2

combustion characteristics; and of the following nominal density and thermal

resistivity:
2 Faced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612- Type

IVA (boards with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface
with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced
with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder
membrane on 1 face.
Man.: Ecomax.
Man.: Rockwool
Man.: Fibrex Insulations Inc.
Man.: Owens Corning.
Man.: Thermafiber. (http://www.thermafiber.com/)
Man.: USG Interiors, Inc
Or other equal and approved
2.4.3 Foam-Plastic Board Insulation
1 Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Complying with SASO GSO BS

4841-1 and ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or Class 2, with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E
84.
Man: Dow Chemical Company

Ref:Wallmate
THERMAL INSULATION OF BUILDINGS S15 - Page 2 of 2

SECTION 17
METALWORK
General:
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1 Structural Load:
Wind Performance:
Applicable Standard QCS 2014 – ASCE 7-05

Basic Wind speed: 85 mph (3 seconds gust)
Exposure Type : D
Importance Factor: 1
Seismic Performance :

Site Class : C
Seismic Design Criteria : Ss = 0.09g, S1 = 0.045g
Importance Factor : 1
PART 2 - MATERIAL TYPES AND FINISHES
2.3 ALUMINIUM FINISHES
2.3.2 Finishes for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys
1 Super Durable Polyester Powder Coating (PE-SDF)
METALWORK S17 - Page 1 of 4

PART 3 - METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS
3.5 STEEL DOORS AND WINDOWS:
3.5.2.1 Steel Doors and Frames:
1 Steel Door Frames to comply with the general requirements of BS 1245.

2 Flush Steel Doors: 43 mm thick steel hollow doors to BS 6510, made of pre-
galvanized sheet steel to BS EN 10143 or ASTM A653 and cold rolled mild steel
sections to BS 2994, hot dip galvanised to BS 729 with coating thickness 180
g/m2.
3 Louvered Steel Doors: 45 mm thick steel hollow doors to BS 6510 or SDI A250.8
to the thickness indicated on drawings, made of pre-galvanised sheet steel to BS
EN 10143 and cold rolled mild steel sections to BS EN 10162, hot dip galvanised
to BS EN 14.
3.7 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS
1 Made of interlocking slats cold rolled from structural-quality, cold-rolled steel

sheets galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 and BS EN 10143.
3.8 DEMOUNTABLE WALL PARTITION
1 Shall be Aluminium with fire rating as indicated
3.9 DEMOUNTABLE RAMP
1 Demountable Type: Metal, as indicated

2 Load on Ramp: Shall withstand minimum 4500 kgs of load
PART 4 - ARCHITECTURAL METAL WORK
4.2 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTERS
1 Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated based on QCS 2014/ASCE 7-05:
(a) Seismic loads: As indicated in Part 1 General Notes.

(b) Wind loads: As indicated in Part 1 General Notes.
4.2.2 Balustrades and Rails
1 Galvanised steel posts and rails are to be fabricated from ASTM A53/ A53M,
Type S, Grade B Schedule 40 pipes.

Man: R & B Wagner Inc.
4.3 SUNDRY ITEMS
4.3.2 Access Hatch
1 Watertight Aluminum Floor Door: Single or Double-leaf opening. Extruded-

aluminum gutter frame with DN 40 drainage coupling and 6.4-mm- thick,
diamond-pattern, aluminum tread plate door; watertight; loading capacity to
support 14.4-kN/sq. m pedestrian live load.
Man: Bilco http://www.bilco.com/
4.3.3 Access Ladder
1 Access ladders shall be to BS 4211, mild steel with galvanized finish,

consisting of flat bar stringers and round single bar rungs, with safety cage,
unless otherwise indicated in drawings.
4.3.4 Sun Control Devices
1 Provide sunshades of shape and size as indicated in drawing, made of

Aluminium extrusion ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5 with a minimum wall
thickness of 2.0 mm.
4.3.5 Sand Trap Louvers
1 Fixed vertical blade type a minimum of 300 mm deep. Louvers shall be fabricated
from extruded aluminium members. An indoor screen construction as specified
shall be provided on the inside of each louver.
Man: Construction Specialties
4.4 Aluminium Composite Panels
1 Performance Requirements:
Wind Performance:

Basic Wind speed: 85 mph (3 seconds gust)

Exposure Type : D
Seismic Performance :

Site Class : C
Seismic Design Criteria : Ss = 0.09g, S1 = 0.045g
Importance Factor : 1
2 Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.50-mm- thick, coil-

coated aluminum sheet facings.
(a) Panel Thickness: 4 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

(b) Core: Non-combustible, Fire retardant core.
(c) Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
(d) Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from material compatible with
panel facing.
Man: 3A Composites USA, Inc.

Man: Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond
Man: CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System.
Man: Citadel Architectural Products, Inc.
Man: Firestone Metal Products, LLC; UNA-FAB
Man: Protean Construction Products, Inc.; ACM 100.
4.5 TRENCH COVER:

1 Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate trench cover made from 8 mm thick
galvanized chequered steel plate with steel angle frame to BS 4 and BS EN 10056-
1 hot dip galvanized. Provide with neoprene sealing strips on underside of cover,
stainless steel locking screws and keyholes, removable cover supports and lugs on
frame for building in.

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL WORKS
The QCS (Qatar Construction Specification) is the specification for this project. The
following clauses and/or parts delete, amend or replace the corresponding referenced
clauses in Section 21 of QCS 2014, or are additional clauses, as appropriate. These
specifications shall be read and construed together with the QCS 2014.
PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
1.1 General
1.1.1 Scope
Delete Sub-Clause 1.1.1-1 and replace with the following new Sub-Clause
1 The electrical Installation Contractor herein referred to as the “Contractor” within this
part and all other electrical parts of the various electrical Sections 21 and 23 of these
specifications shall carry out all electrical works complete in accordance with the
requirements of the Project Documentation.
Delete Sub-Clause 1.1.1-2 (b) and replace with the following new Sub-Clauses
(b) Builder’s work in connection with the Electrical Installations, including

supply, necessary inserts, sleeves, fire sealants, etc. and making good after.
1.1.2 Regulations
Delete Sub-Clause 1.1.2-2 (g) and replace with the following
(g) Rules of the Qatar Civil Defence Department for Fire Alarm Installations and
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (for points not included in local
regulations)
1.1.7 As Built Drawings
Delete Sub-Clause 1.1.7-1 and replace with the following sub-clause
1 Contractor shall provide the as built model and/or drawings, as approved by the
Engineer, in Revit and/or DXF format or AutoCAD DWG format, either in floppy
diskettes or in CD-ROM, as per the Project Documentation requirement. The model /
drawings shall be submitted not later than 2 months after completion of the Project, or
putting into operation, whichever is earlier. An addition, 3 sets of hard copy of all
relevant drawings, which will be required for operation and maintenance, shall be
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION S21P1 - Page 1 of 9

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-EL-01 REV 0
supplied in bound book forms immediately after the commissioning of the Project.
The quality of these drawings shall be consistent with the standard of QGEWC. Diary
sheets for Work completed shall not be authorised until such records have been
presented to the Engineer and accepted.
Add to Clause 1.1.7 the following
3 Contractor to coordinate with the Engineer regarding the software version to be

used for the above submittals.
1.1.10 Equipment and Materials Approval
1 Approval of materials and equipment shall be based on latest manufacturer’s

published data. Component parts are to be the product of a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise approved and provided that components made by other manufacturers are
of a standard design and are interchangeable.
6 All material shall be represented by a Local agent and should be registered with the
ministry of Commerce and industry and agency certificate shall be furnished. They
must have the facilities available for servicing the equipment and are maintaining
adequate stocks of spares.
7 Contractor to confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in the
work prior to submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or materials cease
to be available, submit alternative items of equal quality and type for approval.
8 Contractor to confirm that proposed equipment and material characteristics where

required are compatible with the requirements of the Local Power Authority or other
authorities having jurisdiction and are acceptable to them. Inform the Engineer of any
modifications necessary to comply with the Local Power Authority's requirements.
9 Listing of approved manufacturers in the Specification does not necessarily constitute

approval of their standard products as equal to those specified. Ascertain that listed
manufacturers are able to supply equipment and material in conformity with the
Specification.
10 Equipment generally is to be supplied in complete factory assembled units ready for

installation on site. Disassembly necessary for transportation or other purposes is to
be arranged to limit site work to simple re-assembly and inter-wiring of control and
power cabling.
11 Equipment and materials are to be stored in an approved location, under cover, free
from humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment sensitive to heat and humidity is
to be kept in climatically conditioned areas until installed and handed over.

12 The Employer reserves the right to operate operable defective equipment during the
Defects Liability Period until it can be removed from service for repair or replacement.
13 Approved Equal Manufacturers: The acceptance of an “approved equal” Manufacturer

shall be totally left to the discretion of the Engineer. The rejection of any submitted
“approved equal” Manufacturer shall not entail any cost or time consequences of any
sort.
14 Selected Manufacturer shall provide sufficient evidence to have at least 3 years of

successful experience in Qatar and to have an authorized dealer with suitable capacity
for back up service in Qatar unless otherwise specified in each specific part.
1.1.17 Equipment duties &
Rating Delete Sub-Clause
1.1.17-2
3 Degree of protection for all electrical equipment shall be as follows, unless otherwise
specifically specified in other parts of this Specification:
IP 54, for indoor

equipment
IP 55, for outdoor equipment

IP 68, for submersible equipment
1.1.20 Segregation of Services
Delete Sub-Clause 1.1.20-3 and replace with the following new Sub-Clause:
3 Unless specifically indicated otherwise, normal, emergency and life safety low
voltage cables and wiring shall be segregated throughout the installation generally
in the following manner:
(a) Armoured and sheathed cables: Where more than one tray has been specified or
is necessary to accommodate the number of cables on a run, segregation shall be
achieved by dedicating each tray either to normal or emergency & life safety
services.
(b) Insulated conductors: Insulated conductor circuits shall be segregated for
normal, emergency and life safety throughout by enclosing in separate conduits,
trunking or trunking compartments.
5 Other low current systems

(a) Keep the minimum distances required by the standards between Low Voltage
(LV) power and low current systems. In all cases, 300mm are to be observed as
a minimum between LV and low current services.
1.1.21 Electricity Supply
1 The Local Power Authority will provide incoming power supply and connection at
11kV or 415V to the location as shown on the Drawings. 11kV & 415V switchgears,
11kV & 415V cables, and transformers, in addition to other ancillary equipment and
requirements shall be supplied and installed by a sub-contractor approved by
Kahramaa. The nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution shall be as
follows:
(a) MV Supply: 11kV, 3 phase, 3 wire

(b) LV Supply: 3 phase + Neutral, 4 wire, 415 V, 50 Hz supply of adequate
capacity
(c) Voltage: +/- 6 %
(d) Frequency: +/- 0.1 Hz (short term +/- 0.15 Hz for a duration of only a few
seconds)
2 Phase rotation of supply to relevant local and BS Standards
1.1.22 Polarity
Add to Clause 1.1.22
4 In all cases, Contractor to check with QGEWC for the phase colours to be adopted
throughout the installation, prior to purchasing any related equipment, accessory or
material.
1.1.23 Safety Interlocks
2 Interlocks shall be preventive and not corrective. Contractor shall carry out necessary
coordination with local authorities to ensure all interlocks required by the Standards
and QGEWC especially those required between the MV switchgear, transformers and
LV switchgears, are provided.

1.1.24 Spare Parts
Rename Sub-clause 1.1.24-2 as “LV Distribution Boards – LV”
3 Sub-Main Distribution Boards, Switchboards, Motor Control Centres, Motor Control

Panels and Distribution boards:
(a) 5% spare combination magnetic motor starters

(b) 5% spare circuit breakers for each rating of each MCCB
(c) 5% spare HRC fuses for each rating
(d) 5% spare of load break switch (isolators) of each size
(e) 5% spare of current operated ELCB of each size
Add to Sub-Clause 1.1.24 the following new Sub-Clauses 1.1.24-9 and 1.1.24-10
9 In case of contradiction with other parts of the specifications, the most stringent Spare
Parts shall be applicable.
10 The requirements for Spare Parts and Tools shall consider any special tools required
for operation and maintenance of each system and all its components and for any other
major piece of equipment.
Add Clause 1.1.28 Special Requirements for Electronic Equipment
1 Electronic components of communication systems, security systems and special

systems and electronic components forming part of the power generation and
distribution system are to be solid-state integrated construction, unless otherwise
approved.
2 Manufacturer is to indicate maximum and minimum ambient temperatures acceptable

for the equipment to operate continuously and normally and beyond which electronic
components may suffer permanent damage. Contractor is to coordinate the air
conditioning requirements for the rooms where the equipment is located. Inform the
Engineer of any special requirements or discrepancies for a decision.
3 Alternative Electronic Equipment may be submitted for approval, provided such

equipment meets or exceeds the functional capabilities and/or performance parameters
of the equipment specified. Proposals for alternative equipment will be considered
only if accompanied by the following information:
(a) List of operational characteristics and performance parameters

(b) List of differences in operation and performance between proposed and
specified equipment
(c) List of changes required and resulting implications
(d) Drawings indicating changes required to system wiring
(e) Statement of advantages of proposed equipment over that specified.

4 Solid State Equipment, under normal conditions, of operation is to withstand any

surges, which might be produced by sudden mains or standby power switching
operations. Protective devices are to be provided to protect against surges, failure of
output stages due to open circuit, short- circuit or mismatch. Comply with IEC
standards. System/equipment which may be adversely affected by short duration
power blackouts shall be capable of riding through such a disturbance by having an
internal battery back up to the memory / microprocessor, etc.
5 Indicator Lights other than LV pilot lamps are to be light emitting diodes (LEDs).
6 Electromagnetic Relays and control/small power transformers are to be designed to

withstand the 500 V a.c. test voltage between winding and winding or winding and
core.
7 Dust Covers, easily removable for inspection and servicing, are to be provided for all
relays and sensitive elements.
8 Outdoor Equipment is to be designed for maximum ambient temperature in direct

sun and is to be protected/enclosed, as applicable, against dust and weather
conditions.
9 Contractor to carry out field investigations and tests to determine possible

interference from outside sources. Design electronic equipment to ensure trouble-
free operation.
10 Power Supply Units for low current systems which are fed from the LV supply are to
be independently fused on the live conductor and are to have front panel mains
indicator light, on/off switch and standard cartridge type fuse holder. Blown fuse
indicator lamp is to be provided when fuse does not have an indicator.
Add Clause 1.1.29 Calculations
1 Calculations: Submit for approval the manufacturer/supplier calculations for the

following systems:
(a) Indoor and outdoor, normal and emergency lighting distribution, with necessary
supporting documents and photometric data of the lighting fixtures proposed and
approved by the Contractor.
(b) Circuit Breakers selectivity and discrimination calculation study for a full
selective and discriminated distribution scheme.
(c) Voltage drop and short circuit calculations after verification of cable and breaker
sizes.
(d) Battery bank calculations to fulfill the specification requirements provided for
the specific equipment.
(e) Rating / derating calculations for the specified equipment.
(f) Any required calculation necessary to define component/equipment sizes for the
proper operation of the electrical and low current and telecommunication
systems, and to confirm compliance with specified Regulations and Standards.

(g) Coordination Study: Carry out a short circuit and protection coordination study
considering the DC offset value in the system, for the electrical distribution
network, and submit to Engineer for approval.
(h) Motor acceleration study when required
(i) Transformer sizing calculation based on the approved material submittal
considering the motor starting.
(j) Generator sizing calculation based on the approved material submittal
considering the motor starting currents.
(k) CT/VT selection study.
Add Clause 1.1.30 Start-up, Testing + Balancing
1 As a minimum, systems and equipment are to have initial start-up procedures and
basic commissioning performed by the installing contractors’ and manufacturers’
technicians.

Additionally they are to be witness tested and verified to be in proper working order
by the installing contractors and manufacturers of the equipment, prior to final
commissioning.
2 Prior to property opening, all equipment shall be cleaned and required preventative
maintenance shall be performed.
3 The fire alarm system is to be fully tested and verified by the equipment supplier and
by an independent testing and verification company. All points and programs are to
be tested and verified. The system, when 100% complete and commissioned, shall
undergo a 72-hour full automatic test period under the supervision of the property’s
Director of Engineering, during which all devices are to operate trouble free with no
failures. Should any failures occur during the test period then repairs shall be made
and a new 72 hour test period begun. Upon completion of the successful test the system
shall be deemed acceptable.
4 The independent testing company that prepared the coordination study of the electrical
distribution system to verify that protective devices are set in accordance with the
study.
5 Independent testing company to high potential (hipot) test medium voltage cables prior
to their being energized. Cables not meeting minimum specified insulation resistance
to be replaced and retested. Copy of test report to be submitted to Engineer.
6 After the completion of the installation of switchgear, LV distribution boards,

transformers, motor control centres/panels, transfer switches, Sub-main distribution
boards, distribution boards, disconnects and other electrical installations, an infrared
scan shall be performed prior to turning over to the Owner. The testing shall include
provision of a detailed report, including infrared photographs, description of faults and
recommendations.
7 The security systems, telecommunication systems and network cabling system shall
be tested and certified as per respective sections of the Design Standards.
Add Clause 1.1.31 Commissioning
1 General
The objectives of the commissioning process are to:
(a) Support quality management through verification of the performance of building

components and systems and ensure that such performance meets the design
intent and the requirements of the Design Standards.
(b) Ensure that procedures for the design, start-up, testing, verification and
balancing of the systems and equipment are properly implemented.
(c) Demonstrate proper operation of each system and equipment.
(d) Coordinate training and instruction of end users on systems and equipment
operation and maintenance procedures and ensure that full documentation is
provided.

(e) Provide quality assurance and ensure that a quality facility is provided.
(f) Certify in writing that the commissioning process has been completed for each
system and equipment, complete with full documentation including test results
data, observations and certificates of approvals.
(g) Preparation of Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manuals and as-built record
documents.
(h) Preparation of System Operation Manuals (SOMs) describing the operation of
the systems and for use in future re-commissioning of the systems.
Add Clause 1.1.32 Warranties
1 Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the

manufacturer (including his agreement to replace promptly, defective equipment
or parts thereof, as instructed by the Engineer) covering materials and
workmanship for the period stated in the Specification, starting at substantial
completion. Assign the benefits of such warranty to the Employer.
2 The warranty is to include for repair and/or replacement of any defects that appear
in the electrical work at no additional expense to the Owner. Furthermore, the
warranty is to cover costs incurred in making the defective work good after,
including repair or replacement of building finishes, other materials, or damage to
other equipment caused by such defects, or by subsequent replacement and repairs.
Add Clause 1.1.33 Availability of spare parts and forward compatibility
1 Ensure supplied products are the latest technology available in the market at time
of execution. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the
manufacturer that the spare parts of the system to be installed shall be made
available upon request for at least 10 years from the date of substantial
completion.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 2 - LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (FBA’s)
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
Delete Sub-Clause 2.1.1-2 – Part 7 and replace with the following
Part 7 Conduit and Conduit boxes
2.1.3 References
Delete the following in sub-clause 2.1.3-1 and replace by the following
Delete New
BS 37 Pt. 1 BS EN 62053
BS 142 BS60255
BS 4794, Pt. 2 BS EN 60947
BS 5685 BS EN 62053
BS 7626 BS EN 61869
BS 7354 BS EN 61439
BS EN 6094 BS EN 61439
IEC 185 IEC 60044-1
IEC 337-2 IEC 60947-5
IEC 51 IEC 60051
IEC 521 IEC 62052
IEC 157-1 IEC 60947-2
IEC 408 IEC 60947-3
IEC 529 IEC 60529
IEC 408 IEC 60947
BS EN 61557-8
BS EN 61558-2-15
BS EN 61558-2-1
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (FBA’s) S21P2 - Page 1 of 21

2.1.4 Submissions
Add the following to Sub-Clause 2.1.4-2
(d) Submit for approval detailed description of LV distribution boards including

all components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating
compliance with the Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article,
equipment characteristics, details of construction, operating data,
dimensions and weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous items including
incoming and outgoing feeder terminal arrangement, connections at busbars,
isolating, earthing, interlocks, control devices, indicating and metering
instruments etc. Boards are to be factory assembled and tested and shipped
as complete package (s).
(e) Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range, features and
characteristics, short- circuit ratings, time-current curves etc.
(f) Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-
fault currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based
on specific coordination curves of protective devices used and specific
calculated prospective short-circuit currents at various points.
(g) Test methods on site and references, including testing equipment for
microprocessor controlled trip units.
(h) Details of base foundation for outdoor feeder pillars: Submit details to verify
clearances, spaces and installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting
construction.
(i) Sub-main/Sub distribution boards and distribution boards Schedules: For

installation in panelboards submit final versions after load balancing.
Add the following new Sub-Clauses 2.1.4-3, 4, 5 and 6
3 Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
(a) Test procedures used.

(b) Test results that comply with requirements.
(c) Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
4 Manufacturer’s field service report.
5 Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final main LV

distribution board load connections have been made, for record.
6 Maintenance Data: For main LV distribution boards and components to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified
in Division 1 include the following:

(a) Routine maintenance requirements for main LV distribution boards and all
installed components.
(b) Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
(c) Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
2.1.5 Quality Assurance
1 All Assemblies are to be manufactured by international manufacturers. Local

manufacturers must be listed as approved by QGEWC and holding a certificate of
approved panel assembler from the original international manufacturers.
Manufacturers must have a previous record of satisfactory service in Qatar for at
least 3 years.
Delete the following in Sub-Clause 2.1.5-2 and replace with the following (except for
2.1.5-2 (c))
Delete “Motor Control Centres” and replace with “Factory built

Assemblies”. Delete “and refurbished”.
Add to Sub-Clause 2.1.5-2 the following

(l) Inspection trips to be held in the factories for all assemblies, upon
Engineer’s request.
Add the following new Sub-Clause 2.1.6:
2.1.6 Coordination Study
1 Contractor to submit a coordination study along with setting of protective devices

for overload, short-circuit and earth-fault currents as coordinated with upstream and
downstream systems based on specific coordination curves of protective devices
used and specific calculated prospective short-circuit currents at various points. The
coordination shall be fully detailed to show the short circuit currents at each FBA
location. The study shall show that the protective devices provided do ensure the
proper protection and coordination. Any breakers not satisfying the study shall be
replaced by proper ones to ensure proper system operation. The coordination study
has to be associated with a coordination study for earth fault currents through out the
system to ensure proper selection of earth fault setting for all breakers to ensure
discrimination and proper protection of all system components.
Add the following new Sub-Clauses 2.1.7 and 2.1.8:

2.1.7 Warranty
1 Manufacturers Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer

agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this
section during the specified warranty period
(a) Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
2.1.8 Extra Materials
1 Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency

replacement and/or one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the
following:
(a) One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable
(consumable) contact set.
(b) One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated
circuit breaker.
(c) Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches,
and similar devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
2 Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as
appropriate for type of switchgear supplied.
2.2 PRODUCTS
Add the following new clause
2.2.0 General
1 All LV main, sub-main/Sub, and final branch distribution boards in addition to

MCC/MCPs, that are located in sprinklered rooms, shall be provided with drip
shields or made sprinkler-proof by
some equivalent means. Final adopted method shall be submitted for Engineer’s
review and approval prior to ordering or installation of any equipment.
2 Surge protection devices shall be provided at boards in accordance with BS

EN62305 Standard and QGEWC Specifications and as detailed under Specification
Section 21, Part 21 “Lightning Protection”.
2.2.1 Cubicle Switchboards
In Sub-Clause 2.2.1 replace the word “MCC” by “Cubicle Switchboards”, except

in Sub-Clause 2.2.1-1(h) and 2.2.1-1(i)

Add to sub-clause 2.2.1-1 the following
(y) Generally: Main LV distribution boards (MDB) shall be dead-front type,

metal enclosed, multi-cubicle, floor mounted, free standing, with 1000V
rated insulation voltage, and 600 V rated operational voltage, with fully
withdrawable and motorized main breaker and withdrawable or fixed
outgoing breakers sections, manually or electrically operated, as shown on
the Drawings, with matching vertical sections to form a continuous integral
and rigid structure. Outgoing sections shall be of equal width. All
components are to be suitably rated for continuous operation at 50 deg. C
(122 deg. F).
(z) Coordinate with Building Management System (BMS) supplier and provide
all necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, RS232, Ethernet connection,
etc, with cabling, necessary for the functions specified in the BMS schedules
and/or shown on the Drawings where applicable.
(aa) Meters where provided shall be capable of connection to BMS where

applicable.
Coordinate with BMS supplier for proper interfacing.
Delete Sub-Clause 2.2.1-2 (a) and replace with the following
(a) Unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation, main FBA

switchboards (MDB) and MCC for general purpose indoor uses shall be
constructed to comply with the requirements of IEC 61439 – Form 3b Type
2 conform to BS EN 61439-2:2011
Delete Sub-Clause 2.2.1-1-1-w (i) and replace with the following
(i) Clear floor space of at least 1800 mm shall be provided in front of the cubicle
switchboard panels from the free edge of the doors in the open position.
Clear floor space of 800mm shall be provided behind the cubicle
switchboard panels when the doors are in the open position. The clear floor
space behind the MCC is not required when a true front access assembly is
provided.
Delete Sub-Clause 2.2.1-1-1-w (ii) and replace with the following
(ii) In order to provide an unobstructed exit route a clear path of not less than
800mm shall be provided at each end of the cubicle switchboard panels.
Delete Sub-Clause 2.2.1-1-1-w (v)
Add to sub-clause 2.2.1-2 the following:
(sss) Rigidly framed and bolted, with electro-galvanized sheet steel enclosures,
minimum thickness as specified under 2.2.1-2.c above, phosphatized,

primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with thermal polymerized
polyester epoxy powder coating, grey colour (RAL 7032) from outside and
inside with white colour, to approval. Switchgear is to be vermin, dust and
rodent proof, IP42 protection to IEC 60529 for indoor installations and
IP55 protection for outdoor installations or installations in wet areas, with
adequate lifting means and base frames and capable of being moved into
position and directly bolted to floor without additional sills.
(ttt) Main LV Distribution Board Type: Switchboard(s) are to be of the

following type(s):
i. Form 3b, type 2 to IEC 61439 and in accordance with QGEWC

requirements.
ii. Accessibility: Front and rear accessible.
iii. Alignment: Front and rear aligned.
iv. Incoming breaker: Withdrawable, motorized power air circuit

breaker (PACB).
v. Outgoing breakers: Withdrawable ACB or Fixed MCCB type,

unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Access to the internal
components of any compartments must be feasible by isolating its
particular switch. The hinged doors shall be mechanical;
interlocked with the switch in such a manner that the door can be
opened only in the “OFF” position. All breakers with frame above
630 A shall be withdrawable ACB type.
(uuu) The switchgear shall be provided with suitable cable glands to suit the type,
size and number of cables as indicated on the drawings.
(vvv) Ventilation: Compartments are to be ventilated, by approved methods

complying with the Standards.
(www) Main LV distribution boards are to have a short circuit withstand current
greater than the prospective fault level at the location and for a minimum
of 3 sec, and for a minimum of 44 kA for 3 sec when the supply transformer
rating is equal to 800kVA and above. For transformer rating of 630kVA
and less, a minimum short circuit withstand current for main LV
distribution board shall be 25 kA for 3 sec as stipulated in QGEWC
regulations. The switchboard shall be designed to minimize the risks
associated with the propagation of an internal arc fault of 85 kA for 0.3 sec
as a minimum. All boards shall comply with IEC 61641 for internal arcs.
Breakers for LVs are specified under Section 21 Part 3 “Protective
Devices”.
(xxx) All ACBs to be category B. The whole installation to be fully rated for
prospective fault at the location and selectively coordinated.

(yyy) Fastenings between structural members are to be bolted.
(zzz) Extension of structure and busbars is to be possible at either end of

switchboard. The electrical installation is to be fully rated for prospective
faults at the location and selectively coordinated.
(aaaa) Arrangement is to permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to

enter enclosure as indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective
terminals without inconvenience to installation or maintenance.
(bbbb) Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment are to

be provided for extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from
enclosures as appropriate for type of switchgear.
(cccc) Spare Position shall be fully equipped enclosure with switchgear. Space
position shall be fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear.
(dddd) Main incomer shall be provided with surge protectors as per QGEWC
specification.
(eeee) Fully withdrawable metal enclosed circuit breaker section is to consist of

compartmented unit(s), stationary part with rear busbar and cable
connection compartments and front draw-out circuit breaker assembly.
Partitions between sections are to be bolted steel plate and partitions
between compartments are to be tough solid insulating removable bolted
barriers. Each unit is to have hinged lockable front door with grip-handle
and door mounted instrumentation. Shutters to be provided to ensure full
protection against live contact.
(ffff) Draw-out circuit breaker assembly is to have disconnecting contacts,

wheels and interlocks to prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit
breaker unless in the open position, and to prevent closing circuit breaker
while racking into any of the three positions (connect, test, disconnect).
Racking mechanism and rail assembly are to be approved worm and lever
mechanism. It is to be possible to close the unit door with breaker in any
of the three positions and when removed. External position indicator is to
be provided. Fixed disconnecting primary contacts are to be accessible and
replaceable from front and are to be silver plated copper. Moving primary
disconnect contacts are to consist of self-aligning, silver plated, spring
pressure, finger-cluster, copper contact fitted on line and load studs of
circuit breaker.
(gggg) Main circuit breaker section is to individually accommodate main circuit

breaker, main cable entry with terminal fitting assembly and metering
compartment. Where placed against a wall, accessibility is to be possible
from front and sides or only from front of section.
(hhhh) Pull Sections: An additional cable pull section is to be provided, depending

on actual configuration shown on the Drawings, and subject to the

Engineer’s approval.
(iiii) Front and rear accessible, front and rear aligned, individually mounted
fixed MCCB distribution sections as basic construction for Form 3
switchboards, are to be compartmentalized construction, consisting of
front modular circuit breaker compartments, busbar system compartments
and rear cable termination compartments (as per the form type selected),
with insulating barriers between front compartments and busbar
compartments and between rear compartments and busbar compartment
(removable for maintenance). MCCBs are to be closely coupled to busbars
(to minimize chances of bus-side faults), and to rear cable terminals,
through compatibly frame-sized insulated connectors. MCCB modules are
to be covered on the front, by recessed frame-type bolted covers, 1.5 mm
minimum thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides and rear
are to be covered with removable screw-on plates having formed edges all
around.
(jjjj) The LV shall be provided with power factor correction as shown on the
drawings to achieve QGEWC regulation requirements.
(o) Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC
sheathed for multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon
rubber insulated cables are to be used in proximity to higher temperature
components and as flexible cable. All control wiring shall be neatly bunched
and wrapped in PVC spiral wrap with flexible connection.
(p) Ferrules: Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at
each termination.
(q) All control wiring shall be terminated in approved quality control terminals
from reputed international manufacturers. Terminals shall be screwed type
tinned copper. Blocks shall be with halogen free non-corrosive, self-
extinguishing type material suitable for high temperature as per IEC 60216.
Delete Sub-Clause 2.2.1-7-(a) and replace with the following new Sub-Clause:
(a) Busbars shall be sized to the main circuit breaker frame size derated for 50
deg. C (122 deg. F) indoor ambient, and braced for a symmetrical rms short
circuit duty equal to or higher than main circuit breaker interrupting duty,
for a minimum of 3 seconds. Busbars are to be tinned copper hard drawn,
high conductivity 99.9% purity, suitably sleeved for phase identification to

BS standards. It shall be of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to

allowable equipment temperature ratings, above average ambient
temperature of 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) outside enclosure, and not exceeding
IEC 61439-1&-2 limits. Connections and buswork are to be bolted with
copper alloy hardware and are to be accessible for inspection and
maintenance. Contact surfaces are to be electro-silver plated. Tinning of
busbars to be done after cutting/punching/drilling.
Add to Sub-Clause 2.2.1-7 the following:
(s) Connections from busbar to switchgear are to be rated to carry full

continuous current rating of switchgear frame and are to be insulated.
(t) Full size neutral is to be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus is to be
insulated and separate from earth bus.
(u) Earth bus is to extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in
accordance with the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main
earthing lugs (1 at each end), and required number of feeder protective earth
connectors.
2.2.1-8 Instruments
Delete Sub-Clause 2.2.1-8 (a) (i) – Point 7 and replace by the following:
 Three ammeters shall be provided to read the current of each phase.
Add to Sub-Clause 2.2.1-8 the following Sub-Clause:
(e) Addressable Communication Card is to be provided, capable of

communicating all data specified under (a), (b), (c) and (d), monitoring and
control, with the BMS system (where applicable) as described in detail
hereafter
(f) The switchboard electronic meters shall be microprocessor based and shall
have a data port to enable the exchange of data between the Management
Level Network and the meter. Meters shall monitor all incomers of all
MDBs. Additionally there shall be hardwired interfaces between the BMS
(where applicable) and the low voltage distribution boards as detailed below.
(g) The interface between the meter and the Management Level Network shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the
meter to the Management Level network:
i. RMS Current per phase.
ii. RMS Voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral.
iii. Current demand.

iv. Peak current.

v. Watt-hours, three phase total.
vi. Watts per phase and three-phase total.
vii. KVA per phase and three-phase total.
viii. Watt demand.
ix. KVA demand.
x. KVAR per phase and three-phase total.
xi. KVAR demand.
xii. Power factor per phase and three-phase total.
xiii. Power factor average.
xiv. Peak readings for watts, KVA and KVAR.
xv. KVARH Lag.
xvi. KVARH Lead.
xvii. Frequency.
xviii. Any other information available from the metering system as
selected by the Employer.
2.2.2 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS / CENTERS (MCP/MCC)

(f) Unless specified otherwise in the Project Documentation, MCCs shall be
constructed to comply with the requirements of IEC 61439 Form 3b Type 2
and conform to GAMBICA Association standards.
(g) MCPs shall be constructed to comply with the requirements of IEC 61439
Form 2a, wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type, with ratings of main
breaker and busbars up to 400A.
(h) MCPs/MCCs shall be designed, manufactured and tested to IP54 protection
in compliance with the requirements of IEC 60529, with dip proof top
protection.
(i) MCP construction shall be hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with one
coat etch primer and one coat stove enamel internally and externally for
cabinet/box; suitable for mechanical impact resistance of IK10 to IEC 62262
for enclosures protection degree IP 54 and higher. Test certificates for
mechanical impact shall be submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure
thickness shall not be less than 1.5mm
(j) MCCs shall be designed and type tested to withstand a fault current of 44 kA
for 3 seconds symmetrical as a minimum, and should withstand the fault
current at the point of application if larger than the above figure. Additionally
the MCCs shall be type tested for safe containment of an internal arcing fault,
and establish that the enclosure of MCCs together with internal partitions
and/or barriers withstands the pressure and temperature arising from internal
arcing with short circuit current and thus provides protection for persons in
front of or within the close proximity of the MCCs in the event of internal

arcing.
(k) MCPs shall be designed and type tested to withstand a fault current of 16 kA
for 3 seconds symmetrical as a minimum, and should withstand the fault
current at the point of application if larger than the above figure.
(l) MCP/MCC busbars shall be site rated to same rating of main circuit breaker
frame size as a minimum unless otherwise shown on drawings, and braced
for a symmetrical rmsshort-circuit duty as specified. Busbars shall be
copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable equipment
temperature ratings, and not exceeding IEC 61439-1&-2 limits. Connections
and buswork shall be bolted with compatible hardware material as per
manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be accessible for inspection and
maintenance. Contact surfaces shall be properly tin or Electro-silver plated
as necessary
(m) Test certificates must show that the neutral bar has been tested with the full
fault current and for the full time specified.
(n) MCPs/MCCs shall be designed to operate satisfactorily in an ambient air
temperature of +50° C and RH exceeding 90%.
(o) Unless otherwise specified temperature up to +70° C and RH up to 100%
shall apply during transport, storage and installation. Equipment subjected
to these extreme service conditions without being operated shall not suffer
irreversible damage when operated under normal specified conditions.
(p) The temperature rise in MCPs/MCCs shall not be allowed to damage the
components, connectors, wires, terminals etc. With the equipment in normal
service condition, no live part shall become subjected to high temperature
causing overheating that increases the risk of internal arcing accidents.
Busbars shall be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to
allowable equipment temperature ratings, and not exceeding IEC 61439-1&-
2 limits. Connections and buswork shall be bolted with compatible hardware
material as per manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be accessible for
inspection and maintenance. Contact surfaces shall be properly tin or
Electro-silver plated as necessary.
(q) The MCCs shall be designed to minimize the risks associated with the
propagation of an internal arc fault of 85 kA for 0.3 sec as a minimum. Motor
control center shall be tested in accordance with IEC 61641 for internal arc
protection.
(r) The clearances and creepage distances in the MCCs shall be based on rated
impulse withstand voltage in accordance with BS EN 61439 to ensure that
the equipment designed is capable of withstanding the specified voltage
without failure under specified test conditions. The equipped MCC must
confirm to the clearance and creepage distances and withstand voltages
explicitly by taking into account the specified service conditions.
(s) The maximum height of assemblies shall be 2400 mm above the finished
floor level.
(t) Site consideration including safety and maintenance shall be taken into
account in the design of assemblies. These considerations shall include:

(i) Clear floor space of at least 900 mm shall be provided in front of the
MCP/MCC from the free edge of the doors in the open position.
(ii) In order to provide an unobstructed exit route a clear path of not less
than 900 mm shall be provided at each end of the MCP/MCC.
(iii) Provision of sufficient space to allow for doors to open fully without
fouling other items of equipment or other open doors.
(iv) Limiting the size and weight of assembly sections to those imposed
by transportation, site access and permitted levels of site floor
loading.
(u) All cubicles shall be provided with a means of ensuring that equipment can
be adequately isolated for maintenance purposes without interrupting
essential loads which may continue to operate whilst maintenance is being
undertaken.
(v) Doors and covers giving access to potentially live conductors shall be
provided with prominent warning labels, in English and Arabic.
(w) No components shall be located within the assembly at a height greater than
2000 mm or less than 500 mm above finished floor level.
(x) It shall be possible to replace and maintain any component without first
removing other components.
(y) Unless specified otherwise control supplies shall be 110V a.c. derived from
a transformer within each compartment fused on its primary circuit. Neutral
shall be earthed with a removable link. Transformer shall be rated for at least
150% of the maximum loading for long service life.
(z) Each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed compartment
heater rated 110 Volts AC. Apart from those in motor starter compartments
the heaters shall be controlled by means of individual “OFF/AUTO”
switches. Auto operation shall be by means of adjustable panel mounted
humidistat covering the range of humidity envisaged.
(aa) MCCs shall be designed for ready extension at each end.
(bb) All cable entries shall be affected using brass cable glands to IP rating
as specified. (cc) All cable glands shall be provided with earth tags.
(dd) Contractor shall provide proper interface with BMS where applicable and as
required in the mechanical specifications and/or shown on drawings.
Contractor to coordinate with BMS provider for proper interface.
Delete sub-clause 2.2.3 (parts 3, and 4) and replace with the following new sub-
clauses
2.2.3 Sub-Main Distribution Boards (SMDB’s) and Sub-Distribution Boards

(SDB’s)

3 Sub-main distribution boards/Sub-Distribution Boards shall be totally enclosed,

dead front type, protection code IP 31 for indoor installations, IP54 for installations
in wet areas and IP 55 for outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 60529, and
shall be factory designed and assembled.
4 Type: General purpose type or industrial suitable for relevant ambient conditions,
flush self standing and or surface mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising
box, trim, or trim and door to approved manufacturer's standards and sizes.
Enclosure shall be subjected to 1000- hour salt spread test.
5 SMDBs/SDBs shall be manufactured to BS EN 61439, factory assembled and

certified by an authorising testing body.
6 Construction: Box, trim and doors, where required, are to be electro-galvanized

sheet steel of gages not less than specified and in accordance with the standards.
Welded joints are to be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to conform
to the standards, adequate for the utilized cables/wires subject to the Engineers’
approval and in no case less than 100 mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have pre-
designed angles or threaded end studs to support and adjust mounting of interior
panelboard assembly.
7 Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus
compartments, to form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by
quarter-turn clamps engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange
of box is not acceptable). Screws where used are to be oval-head, countersunk and
flush. Trims for flush mounted panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by
at least 20 mm. Trims for surface mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to
form flush fit to box.
8 Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination
cylinder lock and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and
multiple point latch mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.
9 Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments, maximum demand indicators (MDI) on incomer.
10 Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat,
acid and alkali solvents, grease, aging and corrosion and of standard grey RAL 7032
outside and white inside colour to the approval of the Engineer.
11 Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, are to

be provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without
doors are specified. Directories are to be typed to identify panelboards and clearly
indicate circuit number and description of load.
12 Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, suitable for mechanical
impact IK10 to IEC 62262, fully weatherproofed (IP 55), without knockouts, but
with removable sealed/gasketed bottom gland plates and gasketed doors.

13 Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of
bakelite or Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.
14 Glands: Cable glands used for armoured cables are to be of brass compression type,
complying with BS 6121 and BS EN 50262: Part 1, with earth tag and PVC shroud.
15 Operating dollies of all circuit breakers/isolators to be door interlocked and it shall

be possible to defeat the interlock by means of a tool.
16 Busbars
(a) Type: One piece, 98 percent pure electrolytic high conductivity copper, tinned,
based on total maximum operating temperature of 90 deg. C (194 deg. F) at
any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted or clamped contact
surfaces are to have maximum current density not exceeding requirements of
the approved standards. Aluminium is not to be used for busbars or panelboard
parts.
(b) Design: Shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that branch circuit devices
can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without
additional machining, drilling or tapping. Busing is to be full size without
reduction. Busing and blank plates are to allow installation of future circuit
devices, where indicated on the Drawings. SMDB’s/SDB’s shall be provided
with 4 poles vertical busbars/risers.
(c) Rating: Busbar rating shall be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame size.
Where no main circuit breaker is required, busbars shall have main lugs or
disconnect switch, with nominal rating equal to 1.25 times the up stream circuit
breaker trip rating, and as shown on the drawings.
(d) Unless otherwise stated in the particular specification or drawings, the short
circuit duty shall be minimum 25 kA for 3 sec. and it shall also carry at least
125 percent of the maximum short circuit level at point of application for 3
seconds, without showing any signs of degradation.
17 Terminals and connections are to be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure type.

Screws and bolts used for making copper/copper connections are to be hard copper
alloy with lock washers (riveted bus connections are not acceptable).
18 Neutral bar is to be solid fully rated and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One
solder-less box type set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each
branch circuit and one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw
for main incoming neutral wire.
19 Earthing bar is to be copper on the full length switch board, brazed to panelboard
cabinet, with bolted pressure connector for main conductor and one set screw-type
tunnel terminal for each outgoing conductor, to provide secure and reliable contact
with all metal parts and enclosure.

20 Neutral bar is to be sized as the phase bus bars. Earthing bar is to be half size the
phase busbars. Protection is to be fully rated throughout the systems.
21 Three ammeters with dead pointer to indicate the maximum reading and one 0-500
Volt voltmeter with Off/ph-ph/ph-N selector switch, for incoming supply.
22 All breakers shall be of the MCCB type except for those of frame above 630A which
shall be of the ACB type.
23 All MCCBs of rating 100 Amps and above shall have adjustable thermal and
magnetic facilities. Refer to Section 21 Part 3 “Protective Devices” for MCCB
specification of SMDBs/SDBs.
24 SMDB/SDB TYPE 1: to be form 2b to IEC 61439, and have a rated insulation

voltage of 750 V and with 8 kV impulse withstand voltage, free standing , with
doors (unless otherwise shown on the Drawings), suitable for ratings of main
breaker (or MCS on main incoming as shown on the drawings) and busbars ranging
from 630 A to 1250 A, 3-phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire where specifically indicated),
suitably and orderly arranged for any selected combination of branch MCCBs
ranging from 150/160 A to 630 A frame size and short-circuit interrupting ratings
as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers smaller than 250 A frame size, where
indicated, may be grouped on an integral sub-assembly mounted to main chassis.
25 SMDB/SDB TYPE 2: to be Form 2a to IEC 61439, and have a rated insulation

voltage of 690 V and with 8 kV impulse withstand voltage. Sub-main distribution
board shall be recessed or surface mounted type, as shown on the Drawings,
complete with trim and door, adjustable trim fixation for flush panels, and with
ratings of main circuit breaker (or MCS on main incoming as shown on the
drawings) and busbars up to 400 A, 3-phase, 4-wire, with 2 or 3-pole branch circuit
breakers, 100 A or 150/160 A or 250 A frame size.
26 Construction: Sheet steel, for cabinet/box; suitable for mechanical impact resistance
of IK10 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree IP54 and higher and IK08 to
IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree lower than IP54. Test certificates for
mechanical impact shall be submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure thickness
shall not be less than 1.5mm. Fronts shall be single or twin covers to shield circuit
breakers, terminals and live ends.
27 Interior of sub-main/Sub distribution board is to be pan assembly consisting of

galvanized sheet steel chassis with minimum 2 mm thick, folded, flanged and
reinforced, with busbars vertically arranged and mounted on molded insulators.
28 Molded insulators are to have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and
insulation grade of
3.5 kV for one minute.
29 Circuit breakers are to be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit
breakers) and bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus connectors.

Delete sub-clause 2.2.4 and replace with the following new sub-clause
2.2.4 Final Branch Distribution Boards (DB) - Type MCB
1 Arrangement: Comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with unified

profile and base, and one main circuit breaker or switch as shown on drawings.
Single and multi-pole circuit breakers or other devices are to occupy modular
spaces. Accommodation of contactors and split-bus arrangement or other devices is
not to change regularity of standard box width.
2 Indoor Enclosure: Sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and minimum
1.5 mm thick for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim are to be
adjustable to allow for misalignment between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces
(gutters) are to be at least 100 mm wide. Larger gutters are to be provided where
tap-off insulated split connectors are required. Knockouts are to be provided in top
or bottom of enclosures and are to provide a neat and uniform conduit/cable terminal
arrangement.
3 Type: Rated insulation voltage rating of 690V
4 Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid

construction, attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings,
and provided with DIN rails in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical
arrangement for TPN panels. Assembly shall be complete with neutral terminal
block, earthing bar and one piece insulated bolt- on/comb-type phase busbar.
Busbars shall be single-phase or 3-phase with spade connectors for fixing by
tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation shall be high thermal rating,
capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second without
overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards. Distribution Boards
shall comply with IEC 61439-3.
5 SPN type distribution boards are to be suitable for 240V maximum service voltage,
single- phase and neutral, with MCB’s on branch circuits and main incoming (or
Molded Case Switch (MCS) on main incoming as shown on the drawings) of the
miniature type.
6 SPN type main circuit breaker or isolator is to be double-pole, with/without RCBO

as shown on the Schedules.
7 Single-pole and double-pole MCB’s for 240V service, are to have trip ratings
between 6A and 50A, with interrupting capacities as required in the Schedules.
8 TPN type distribution boards are to be suitable for up to 415V A.C. maximum
service voltage, 3 phase and neutral, with MCB’s on branch circuits and 3 or 4 pole
MCCB or MCS main incoming, as specified or shown on the Drawings.
9 Triple pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6A and 125A,
with IC as required in the Schedules.

10 TPN type distribution board main incoming shall be MCCB or MCS as shown on
the drawings, 100A or 160A frame size as shown on the Drawings, with trip range
from 32 A to 160A, with/without RCBO as shown on the Drawings.
11 Distribution boards are to be protected against earth fault current, in addition to over
current and short circuit protection, on each outgoing circuit, in accordance with the
Regulations.
12 All panels shall comply with IEC 60641 for internal arcs (minimum time to be
specified by Consultants).
13 Unless otherwise stated in the particular specification or drawings, all final branch
Distribution Boards (MCB type) shall be rated for a minimum short circuit rating of
10 KA and type test certificate furnished.
Add the following Sub-Clause
2.2.5 Final Branch Distribution Boards (DB) - Type MCCB
1 Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 690V as a minimum. Single-phase and neutral
(SPN) or 3- phase and neutral (TPN), with bolted 1, 2, or 3-pole MCCBs on branch
circuits and 2, 3 or 4-pole MCCB on main incoming.
2 Branch circuit breakers shall be 1, 2 or 3-pole, rated 100 A frame size, with trip
ratings between 15 A and 100 A.
3 Main incoming circuit breaker shall be 100 A or 160 A frame size as shown on the
drawings, with trip ratings and fully rated non-current limiting interrupting
capacities, with or without residual current device (RCBO) as indicated on the
Drawings.
4 Assembly: Busbars shall be rigidly fixed on molded insulators to back pan in vertical
arrangement. Branch circuit breakers shall be bolted in twin arrangement to rigid
copper cross and center bus connectors. Back pan assembly shall be removable and
fixed to four threaded studs integral with cabinet.
2.2.6 FEEDER PILLARS
1 Low voltage feeder pillars shall comply with IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-5.
2 Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 690V as a minimum. 3-phase and neutral
(TPN), with bolted 1, or 3-pole MCCBs on outgoings and 3-pole MCCB on main
incoming.

3 Construction: the feeder pillar shall be totally enclosed, dead front type, fully self-
contained, dust-proof, weather proof and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to
dust, rain and sunlight with IP55 degree of protection to IEC 60529.
4 Cabinets: Reinforced free standing structure with high mechanical impact resistance
IK10 to IEC 62262, manufactured from 2 mm nominal thickness galvanized sheet
steel, electrostatically powder coated and corrosion resistant internally and
externally. Feeder pillars shall be provided with bolted reinforcement corner
construction and shall be of the dwarf type with a bolting down root for mounting
on a pre-formed concrete base suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables from
below ground level directly buried or in a duct system. Feeder pillars shall have
suitable extension cable box for cable entry from below. Cabinets shall have two
hinged lockable opening doors to provide full front access to the cabinet and shall
be sized according to the equipment being installed. The roof of the cabinet shall be
slanted and shall have water drip edges.
5 Lighting Contactors: 2 or 3-pole, Electro-magnetic type, class AC 5a for discharge

lamps or AC 5b for tungsten halogen lamps to IEC 60947-4, and rated not less than
the frame size of the upstream protective device. Contacts shall be double break,
silver cadmium plated, having self- cleaning wiping action. Control shall be
provided by phase-neutral (maximum 230 V) split-coil, for on/off activation by local
and/or by remote direct-wired, on/off push buttons. Contactor shall be mechanically
latched. Control circuit shall be fused. Auxiliaries shall include local pilot light,
parallel remote indicating circuit, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.
6 Internal Cabling: PVC/PVC single core 600/1000 volt grade with copper conductors
and rated as required taking into account manufacturers recommended temperature
and bunching derating factors. All internal wiring shall be suitably laced or clipped.
7 Control: LV panel circuits serving the street and outdoor lighting shall be supplied
through triple pole contactors which shall be photo-electric, timer controlled along
with BMS control where applicable and shown on the Drawings. The contactors
shall be operated through either timer or photoelectric cell or remote signal from
BMS. An over-ride facility shall be provided for maintenance.
8 The photo-electric relays shall be solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry
contacts rated
to operate connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, with light level
monitoring ranging from 0 to 37000 lux, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn-off
levels and with time delay to prevent false operation. Relays shall have weather tight
housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield and ice
preventer. Relays shall be adjusted to switch on lights when the daylight illumination
reduces to 70 lux, unless otherwise required by the Engineer.
9 Timers shall be solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display and have
the following features:
(a) Astronomic dial.
(b) Two contacts, rated 30-A unless otherwise indicated.

(c) Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2-A unless otherwise indicated.
10 Feeder pillars shall have a 50 mm x 6 mm full length high conductivity copper main
earth bar for grounding purposes complete with test.
11 A distribution diagram shall be permanently fixed to the inside of the door showing
all circuit connections, MCCB ratings, cable sizes and references, etc.
12 Feeder pillars shall be vandal proof and secured against unauthorized access by
means of wedge locks protected by brass plugs and operated by a special key as
approved by the Engineer or as required by the local authority.
13 Feeder pillars’ final finish and final color shall be approved by the Engineer and
shall have color similar to that of power distribution boards.
14 Feeder pillars used for external lighting or combined external lighting and power
distribution shall have single or multi split bus arrangement as shown on the
Drawings with uncontrolled bus section to provide necessary power supply through
single pole MCCBs for internal lighting, socket outlets and lighting control system.
15 Feeder pillars used for external lighting shall be provided with compact fluorescent
lamp for integrated internal inspection lighting with wire guard and adequate cord
length and two weather proof socket outlets type.
16 Busbars shall be fully insulated, rated 1.25 the main incoming moulded case circuit
breaker frame size at 50 degrees C.
17 Feeder pillars shall be equipped with the following:
(a) Three ammeters each fitted with maximum demand indicator with the
associated current transformers.
(b) Voltmeter with selector switch and protection fuse.
(c) Kwh meter, current transformers and accessories with a glass window to be
mounted on the feeder pillar cabinet inside special enclosure to local authority
specifications and approval.
18 Equipment, busbars, conductors within the pillar shall be fully insulated such that
there are no exposed live parts of connections.
19 Metering Instruments:
(a) Instruments shall be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush
installation. Scales and markings shall be protected and sealed. Accuracy of
instruments shall be within 2% unless otherwise specified.
(b) Voltmeters shall be the moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range
1.25 times nominal system voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
(c) Voltmeter selector switch shall be 7-position rotary type.
(d) Ammeters shall be moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2
times nominal circuit amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.

(e) Ammeter selector switch shall be 4-position rotary type.

(f) Current transformer shall be of the indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5
A. Rated primary current, core size and accuracy shall be determined in
accordance with nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level and
burden.
(g) Voltage transformer (VT) shall be provided where required, complete with
primary and secondary fuses and disconnecting device.
20 Wiring shall comply with the following:
(a) Wiring shall be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards with
suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
Connections shall be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal
exposed.
(b) Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. shall be connected,
by bare copper conductor not less than 2.5 mm² section, to nearest earthing
bar.
(c) Control wiring shall be copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and
PVC sheathed for multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon
rubber insulated cables shall be used in proximity to higher temperature
components and as flexible cable.
(d) Wires shall be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
21 Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp shall be provided
in switchboard, controlled by thermostat and/or humidistat where this is required by
Local Authorities.
22 Schematic and wiring diagram shall be provided suitably located within each
cubicle.
2.2.7 MANUFACTURERS
1 Approved Manufacturers for Main Distribution Boards: Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
(a) ABB (Germany/Italy)

(b) Cutler – Hammer / Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)
(c) G.E. (U.S.A.)
(d) Schneider Electric (France)
(e) Siemens (Germany)
(f) Schneider Electric / Square D (U.S.A)
2 Approved Manufacturers for Sub-Main Distribution Boards/Sub-Distribution

Boards and Final Branch Distribution Boards: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
(a) Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)

(b) General Electric Co (U.S.A.)
(c) Schneider Electric (France)
(d) Siemens - ITE (Germany or USA)
(e) Schneider Electric / Square D Co. (USA)
(f) ABB (Germany/Italy)
3 Approved Manufacturers for Motor Control Centers/Motor Control Panels:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following or approved equal:
(a) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Co. (U.S.A.)

(b) Cutler Hammer/Eaton Corp. (U.S.A.)
(c) General Electric (U.S.A.)
(d) Moeller/Eaton corp. (Germany)
(e) Schneider Electric (France)
(f) Siemens (Germany)
(g) Schneider Electric / Square D Co. (U.S.A.)
(h) ABB (Germany/Italy)
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 3 - PROTECTIVE DEVICES
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.4 Standards
Delete Sub-Clause 3.1.4 and replace with the following new Sub-Clause
The following standards shall be compiled with:
BS88-2 Low-
voltage fuses BS EN 60255, IEC 60255
Electrical
Relays
BS EN 60269, IEC 60269 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000VAC
and 1500
V AC
BS EN 60898, IEC 60947 Miniature and Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers BSEN 60947, IEC 60947 Low Voltage circuit breakers
BS EN 61008-1 Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral
overcurrent protection for household and similar uses
(RCCBs). General rules
BS EN 61810-1 Electromechanical elementary relays. General and safety
requirements
Add the following Sub-Clauses 3.1.8, 3.1.9, and 3.1.10
3.1.8 Warranty

PROTECTIVE DEVICES S21P3 - Page 1 of 5


following:
(a) One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable
(consumable) contact set.
(b) One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated
circuit breaker.
(c) Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches,
and similar devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
inspection and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as
appropriate for type of switchgear supplied.
3.2 PRODUCTS
3.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

7 Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case to IEC 60947-2,

suitable for installation inside switchboards.
Add to Sub-Clause 3.2.2 the following:
16 Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the

drawings, moulded case circuit breakers of final branch circuit distribution boards
(DBs) are to be thermal magnetic type, while moulded case circuit breakers of sub-
main distribution boards (SMDBs) are to be thermal-magnetic for frame sizes up
to 160A and electronic type for higher frames.
17 Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: are to have bi-metallic inverse time
delay overcurrent element for small overloads and instantaneous magnetic over-
current trip element for operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole.
Circuit breakers rated 150/160A frame sizes are to have adjustable instantaneous
trips.
18 Deration: Thermal and electronic over-current trips shall be ambient temperature

derated at
50 deg. C. In case of adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment shall not
exceed maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings.
19 Electronic Trips Units: shall have solid state trip units with long time delay setting
range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating with adjustable time

delay up to 24 seconds, short time delay range 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating
with maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous protection
adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip units shall be
insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -
20 and +55 deg. C. Earth fault protection shall be provided or built into trip unit
where specified or shown on drawings, and shall be adjustable between 0.2 and
0.6 normal phase current pick-up with maximum time delay of 0.2 seconds, and
shall be suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button shall
be provided on cover for testing the trip unit.
20 Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free

operation so that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under
manual or automatic operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver alloy with
approved arc-quenching devices of metallic grid construction.
21 Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload
element is set to operate.
22 Circuit breaker ratings are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with
continuous duty at site conditions 690 V rated insulation voltage, and with frame
size and interrupting capacity to IEC 60947-2, sequence II (rated service short-
circuit breaking capacity), and maximum trip rating as shown on the Drawings.
Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are to meet IEC 60947-
2 test sequence I, II, III and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B (with
intended short time withstand capability) for breakers 400A and above, and
utilization category A for breakers below 400A.
23 Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker
which corresponds with its maximum trip range listed below and which is to be
related to minimum acceptable short-circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully
rated interrupting duties: normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L),
as specified. Select the adequate frame size for a fully rated protection at point of
application.
24 Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly
indicated by the handle between on and off positions.
25 Interchangeable Trips: Thermal magnetic circuit breakers of 150/160 A frame size

shall have interchangeable trip units.
26 Sealing: Non-interchangeable trip circuit breakers shall have sealed covers. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trips shall have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
28 Accessories: Circuit breaker design shall allow addition of open / close electrical
motor operator, control and interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-
trip coils, alarm and auxiliary switches, padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and
the like.

29 MCCBs located inside main LV switchboards (LVs) shall additionally comply

with the following:
Generally are to be electronic solid-state trip type. All circuit breakers

i.
are to be 3- pole unless otherwise shown on drawings
ii. MCCB shall be of such a design to accept various types of remote and
automatic control devices for operation under a control/logic system
and/or the BMS.
3.2.3 Miniature Circuit Breakers

1 These shall be Type C for general purpose uses, suitable for the load they feed,
and shall have a minimum short circuit rating as the rating indicated for the
distribution board, unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation.
Add the following new Sub-Clause
6 MCBs are to be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up to 70 degree

C within panelboard enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and are to be constructed
from high quality, high temperature, molded insulating materials. Guaranteed
duties and characteristics are to be submitted.
7 MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and suitable
for mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
3.2.5 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB)

2 The ELCB shall also provide high degree of protection against earth leakage, fire
and electric shock. It shall withstand at least the minimum short circuit rating
specified in the project documents. The breakers shall comply with BS EN 61008-1
and the recommended specification CEE 227 of the IEC on rules of approval of
electrical equipment.
5 The breakers shall be mounted in the sub-main distribution board/distribution board

enclosure.

3.2.12 Protection Relays

1 Protection relays shall comply with BS EN 60225, BS EN 61810-1 and IEC 60255.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 4 - MOTOR STARTERS
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.2 References
The following standards shall be followed
BS EN 60947-4 Contactors and motor Starters

BS EN 60947, IEC 60947 Low Voltage switchgear and control gear
BS EN 61439, IEC 61439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control gear
assembly BS EN 60073 Coding of indicating devices and actuators by colour
and
supplementary means
Add the following Sub-Clauses 4.1.3 and 4.1.4:
4.1.3 Warranty
1 Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer

1 Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents.
(a) Spare Indicating Lights: Furnish 6 of each type required.

(b) Control Fuses: Furnish 10% of the total quantity of each rating used, with a
minimum of one per type.
MOTOR STARTERS S21P4 - Page 1 of 2

4.2 PRODUCTS
4.2.1 Starters
Delete Sub-Clause 4.2.1-2 and replace with the following new Sub-Clause.
2 Starters shall be in accordance with the current QGEWC regulations.
Delete Sub-Clause 4.2.1-3-(a).
Delete Sub-Clause 4.2.1-5-(a) and replace with the following new Sub-Clause
(a) 3 no. ammeters, 96 X 96, with 240° scale fitted with suppressed scale to read
motor running and starting current, with an adjustable red pointer to indicate
full load current. The scale range shall be such that normal full load current
gives approximately 60% full scale deflection.
Add the following new Clause 4.2.5
4.2.5 Combination Starters Switch Disconnectors
1 Components to comprise magnetic starter, switch disconnector and short circuit

protection devices required by the Standards, in approved sheet metal enclosure
to suit application.
2 Switch disconnector operating mechanism: quick make, quick break, with external
operating handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover necessitating
disconnecting switch to be in OFF position for access to inside of enclosure.
Means are to be provided for by passing interlocks. Position of isolating switch to
be clearly indicated on cover.
3 Short circuit protection gear to be moulded case circuit breakers of appropriate
current interrupting capacity.
4 Operation of circuit breaker to be possible from outside of enclosure. Position of
breaker ON/OFF/TRIPPED to be clearly indicated by position of handle.
END OF PART
MOTOR STARTERS S21P4 - Page 2 of 2

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 5 - VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
Add the following to Sub-Clause 5.1.1:
19 All VFD starters located more than 40m away from the equipment shall be
equipped with (dv/dt) filter to overcome the VFD cable length limitations, or as
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer
Delete Sub-Clause 5.1.4 and replace with the following new Sub-Clause:
5.1.4 Warranty
agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section
during the specified warranty period
(a) Warranty Period: a minimum of five years from the date of commissioning by
the manufacturer with a minimum of 1 year from date of substantial
completion.
Add the following new Sub-Clauses 5.1.5

1 Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
(b) Spare Indicating Lights: Furnish 6 of each type required.
(c) Control Fuses: Furnish 10% of the total quantity of each rating used, with a
minimum of one per type.
5.2 PRODUCTS
5.2.5 Communication Interface

Delete Sub Clause 5.2.5-2 and replace with the following new Sub Clause
2 VFD shall be equipped with field-bus module for remote control, monitor and display
VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS S21P5 - Page 1 of 2

VFD status, alarms and energy usage from the BMS/SCADA where applicable.
Coordinate with BMS/ SCADA for the interface protocol to be adapted and provide the
necessary adapter modules accordingly.
5.2.7 Protection Features
Add the following new items Sub Clause 5.2.7-1
(j) Protection against input power under-voltage (for non-emergency motors

only), overvoltage, and phase loss
(k) Protect VFD from sustained power of phase loss. Under-voltage trip activates
automatically when line voltage drops more than 10 percent below rated input
voltage.
(l) Automatically reset faults due to under-voltage, over-voltage, phase loss, or
over- temperature
(m) Controller capable of operating without a motor or any other equipment

connected to the drive output to facilitate start-up and troubleshooting
5.2.9 Drive Enclosures
Delete Sub Clause 5.2.9-2 and replace with the following new Sub Claus
2 VFD enclosure shall be IP 54 to IEC 60529 with inlet air filters. Drive shall be
mounted on a floor stand.
Add the following new Sub-Clauses 5.2.10
5.2.10 VFD Interface Features

1 Door mounted Hand/Off/Auto selector switch to start and stop the VFD. In the Auto
position, the VFD will start/stop from the controller. In the Hand position, the VFD
will run regardless of the remote contact position.
2 Manual speed control capability.
3 Local/Remote selector switch. In the Remote position, motor speed is determined by
the follower signal. In the local position, motor speed is determined by the manual
speed control.
4 Power/On light to indicate that the VFD has tripped on a fault condition.
5 Digital meter with selector switch to indicate percent speed and percent load.
6 A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Run mode.
7 A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Fault mode.
8 A 0 to 10 V output signal to vary in direct proportion to the controller's speed.
9 VFD to have terminal strip and N.C. safety contacts such as freeze status, smoke
alarms, etc. VFD to safety shut down in drive or bypass mode when contacts open.
END OF PART
VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS S21P5 - Page 2 of 2

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 6 - CABLES AND SMALL WIRING
6.1 General
1 Cables and wires shall comply with the following standards as appropriate:
 BS EN 10257: Part 1: Zinc or zinc alloy coated non-alloy steel wire, for
armoring either power cables or telecommunication cables, land cables.
 BS 5467: Specification for 600/1000V and 1900/3300V armored cables having
thermosetting insulation.
 BS 6121: Mechanical cable glands.
 BS EN 60228: Conductors of insulated cab.
 IEC 60189-2: Cables in pairs, triples, quads, quintuples for inside installations.
 IEC 60227: Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 V, for electric power, lighting and internal wiring
 IEC 60228: Conductors of insulated cables.
 IEC 60287: Calculation of the current rating of cables (100 percent load factor).
 IEC 60502-1: Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated
voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV.
 IEC 60885: Electrical test methods for electric cables.
 ISO9000: Quality Management and Assurance Standards.
 IEC 61034: Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined
conditions.
 IEC 60754: Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from cables.
 IEC 60332: Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions.
6.2 PRODUCTS
6.2.2 Cables
Add to Sub-Clause 6.2.2-8 the following sub-clauses
CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-EL-01 REV 0 S21P6 - Page 1 of 4
(c) Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FRE on the drawings, similar to Prysmian
- Type FP 100, or approved equal): Single core stranded plain annealed copper
conductors to IEC 60228, fire resistant insulation to IEC 60331 and Low Smoke Zero
Halogen (LS0H) composite sheath to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-
1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant
properties. Cable shall comply with BS EN 50363 and rated 450/750 V for sizes up to
10 mm2 and 600/100 V for sizes greater than 10mm2, capable of accepting voltage
surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 90 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB
and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall
have green/yellow striped color and shall be used as earth conductor for fire resistant
feeders.
(d) Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR1 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian -
Type FP 100 , or approved equal): Single core stranded plain annealed copper
conductors to IEC 60228, fire resistant insulation category CWZ to BS 6387 for sizes
up to 6 mm2, PH120 classified to BS EN 50200, and 120 minutes rating when tested
in accordance with BS 8434-2 when tested in 20 mm rigid steel conduit and Low
Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) composite sheath to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS
EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame
retardant properties. Cable shall comply with BS EN 50363 and rated 450/750 V,
capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 90
deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing
on cable sheath. Cable shall be used as branch circuits installed in steel conduits for
use in central battery system, smoke curtains and other similar loads where shown on
the drawings.
(e) Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR3 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian -
Type FP 200 Gold, or approved equal) : Multi core solid or stranded plain annealed
copper conductors to IEC 60228 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation,
galvanized steel wire armored, category CWZ to BS 6387, PH60 classified to BS EN
50200, and 30 minutes rating when tested with additional water spray in accordance
BS EN 50200 Annex E and complying with BS EN 50363, laminated aluminum screen
and LS0H composite sheath with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire to IEC
61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 &
3 (category C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall be rated 300/500 V, capable
of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 70 deg. C.
Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable
sheath. Cable shall be used for fire alarm, voice evacuation installations, branch
circuits in central battery system (where not installed in steel conduit) and other loads
requiring category 1 circuits in accordance with BS 8519 including buildings with
evacuation time not exceeding 30 minutes unless otherwise specified under fire alarm
section and where shown on the drawings.
(f) Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR4 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian -
Type FP Plus, or approved equal) : Multi core plain annealed copper conductors to
IEC 60228 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation, galvanized steel wire
armored, category CWZ to BS 6387, PH 120 classified to BS EN 50200, and 120
minutes rating when tested in accordance with BS 8434- 2 and complying with BS EN
50363, laminated aluminum screen bonded to the sheath and LS0H composite sheath
with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS

EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame
retardant properties. Cable shall be rated 300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage
surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB
and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall
be used for fire alarm, voice evacuation installations, emergency voice communication
systems, branch circuits in central battery system (where not installed in steel conduit)
and other loads requiring category 2&3 circuits in accordance with BS 8519 including
buildings with evacuation time higher than 30 minutes, such as high assembly and
high rise buildings unless otherwise specified under fire alarm section and where
shown on the drawings.
(g) Fire resistant LS0H Cable 600/1000 V, (abbreviated as FR5 on the drawings, similar
to Prysmian
- Type FP-400, or approved equal): Multi core plain copper stranded circular or shaped
conductor (sizes up to 400mm2) complying with IEC 60228 with fire resistant
insulation category CWZ to BS 6387, category F2 to BS 7846, PH60 classified to BS
EN 50200 and 30 minutes rating when tested with additional water spray in accordance
with BS EN 50200 Annex E and complying with BS EN 50363 operating conductor
temperature 90ºC, single galvanized steel wire armour and extruded low smoke zero
halogen (LS0H) over sheath wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1.
Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant properties.
Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable
sheath. Cable shall be used for feeders of the fire pumps, smoke and pressurizing fans,
fire fighting elevators and other firefighting and life safety loads requiring category 1
circuits in accordance with BS 8519 including buildings with evacuation time not
exceeding 30 minutes and where shown on the drawings.
(h) Fire resistant LS0H Cable 600/1000 V, (abbreviated as FR6 on the drawings, similar
to Prysmian
- Type FP-600S, or approved equal): Multi core plain copper stranded circular or
shaped conductor (sizes up to 400 mm2) complying with IEC 60228 with fire resistant
insulation category F120 to BS 7846 and tested in accordance with BS 8491 and
complying with BS EN 50363 operating conductor temperature 90ºC, single
galvanized steel wire armour and extruded low smoke zero halogen (LS0H) over
sheath wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply
with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall be
LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable
shall be used for feeders of the fire pumps, smoke and pressurizing fans, fire fighting
elevators and other firefighting and life safety loads requiring category 2&3 circuits
in accordance with BS 8519 including buildings with evacuation time higher than 30
minutes, such as high assembly and high rise buildings and where shown on the
drawings.
Add to Sub-Clause 6.2.2 the following sub-clauses 17, 18 and19:
17. Low Smoke and Fume (LSF, Low Smoke Zero halogen – LS0H) cables:
600/1000 V grade, copper conductor, compacted, insulated with extruded
material to IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen acid
gas content and IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity of evolved gas. Cores and
cross sectional area shall be as shown on the Drawings. Phases shall be color

coded in conformity with the Standards, and overall cable sheath shall be
extruded black LS0H material. Cables shall comply with IEC 60331 and IEC
60332.
18. Multi-Core Dual Shielded XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (minimum 0.6/1 kV)
for Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): To have stranded copper conductors,
class 5 to IEC 60228, compacted, adequately thick XLPE insulated, for
conductor temperature of 90 deg. C. An overall tinned copper braided screen in
conjunction with an aluminium/polymer tape shield shall be provided to achieve
transfer impedance not exceeding 100 mOhm/m in the frequency range up to 100
MHz calculated in accordance with IEC 61196-1 or ANSI/NEMA WC 61. Cable
shall have a flame retardant LS0H over-sheath as shown on the drawings, LS0H
over- sheath shall comply with IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1
for halogen acid gas content and IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity of evolved
gas, color black. Each feeder shall be provided with 3 nos. symmetrically
arranged grounding conductors except for feeders less than 16 mm2 which shall
be four core having the fourth core acting as a ground conductor. Cables shall be
used with variable frequency drive applications. Cable length shall not exceed 40
m unless proper common mode, (dv/dt), or sinus filters are specified in the VFD,
or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer. Cables shall comply with IEC 60092 or IEEE 1580, IEC 60502-1, IEC
60332-3, and IEC 60811.
19. VFD Cables Feeding Life Safety Equipment: Class 2 to IEC 60228, fire
resistant type to IEC 60331-21 with LS0H over sheath to IEC 61034 for low
smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen acid gas content and IEC 60754-2
for degree of acidity of evolved gas.
6.3 INSTALLATION
6.3.1 General
(x) All cables shall be neatly run in all situations. Where two or more
cables are to be installed, cable tray must be provided.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 7 - CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.3 Description
Delete Sub-Clause 7.1.3.2-e (iii) and replace with the following:
(iii) Where installed above false ceilings and used as an air plenum: Light gauge
galvanised steel (EMT) throughout the circuit.
7.2 PRODUCTS
7.2.2 Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings
Delete Sub-Clause 7.2.2-1 (b) and replace with the following:
(b) Conduits shall not be less than 20 mm internal diameter size, unless otherwise
indicated, and shall be complete with all necessary threaded fittings, couplings and
connecting devices having galvanized equivalent finish.
END OF PART
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES 21P7 - Page 1 of 1

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 9 – CABLE TRAYS
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.2 References
Delete the following in sub-clause 9.1.2.1 and replace by the following
Delete New
BS 729 BS EN ISO 1461
9.2 PRODUCTS
9.2.1 General
Delete Sub-Clauses 9.2.1-5 and add the following new Sub-Clause
5 Cable Tray system shall conform to requirements as specified in BS standards, or
other equivalent standards as applicable.
9.2.2 Materials
Delete Sub-Clause 9.2.2-1 and replace with the following:
1 The whole of the tray work, trays, fittings, supports shall be of mild steel hot dipped
galvanized after manufacture to BS standards. The thickness of the protective sheath
on any element shall not be less than 55 microns. Additional stove-hardened epoxy
coating is to be factory applied after the hot-dip galvanization process, to give better
resistance and durability.
Delete Sub-Clauses 9.2.2-12, 15, 16, 17, 18
9.3 INSTALLATION
9.3.1 Installation
CABLE TRAYS S21P9 - Page 1 of 2

Delete Sub-Clause 9.3.1-4 and replace with the following:
4 15 % spare capacity shall be maintained once all cables have been installed on trays.
Double banking of cables shall not be permitted. Space between adjacent cables
shall be not less than the radius of the bigger cable.
END OF PART
CABLE TRAYS S21P9 - Page 2 of 2

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 10 - WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER
Delete New
BS 88 BS 88-2
BS 800 BS EN 55014-1
BS 3456 BS EN 60335
BS 3676 BS EN 60669
BS 4343 BS EN 60309-1
BS 5419 BS EN 60947-3
Add to Sub-Clause 10.1.4 the following Sub-clause

2 Contractor shall submit samples of all selected devices (at his own cost) for
Engineer’s and ID review during the construction process.
10.2 PRODUCTS
10.2.1 General
Add to Sub-Clause 10.2.1 the following Sub-clauses
3 All plates’ finishes shall be subject to ID/Architect approval prior to ordering any
material.
4 In general wiring devices shall be of the antibacterial type as shown in
below wiring accessories tables.
10.2.2 Outlet Boxes
Delete Sub-Clause 10.2.2.1 header and replace with “Metallic
Outlet boxes” Add to Clause 10.2.2 the following:
3 Floor Boxes
(a) Type FB1: Flush floor mounting floor box, watertight, steel or cast iron with
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER S21P10 - Page 1 of 5

corrosion resistant finish, adjustable mounting, standard duty, factory drilled

and tapped for required conduit sizes, with brushed finish free from
markings other than required for mounting screws. Floor box includes two
duplex socket outlets type (R01) fed from normal power supply, and
provision for four RJ45 outlets.
Manufacturer: Similar to “Legrand screed floor system” or approved equal.
(b) Type FB2:Flush floor box, watertight, steel or cast iron with corrosion
resistant finish, adjustable mounting, standard duty, factory drilled and
tapped for required conduit sizes, with brushed finish free from markings
other than required for mounting screws.
Floor box includes one duplex socket outlets type (R01) fed from normal
power supply, and provision for two RJ45 outlets.
Manufacturer: Similar to “Legrand screed floor system” or approved equal.
10.2.3 Switche
s 10.2.3-3
Switch Plates
Add to Sub-Clause 10.2.3-3 the following new Sub-Clauses
(b) Switches are to be selected in accordance with the following table. Noteworthy here
that manufacturer series reference is provided for guidance and other equal and
approved products may be submitted:
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION LOCATION
Similar to S1, but with metal clad finish Technical areas,

S2 Manufacturer: “Legrand – Synergy metalclad” electrical/telecom rooms,
or approved equal stores, parking and as
shown on drawings
S5 Similar to S2 but weather proof type, IP56. Indoor wet areas and as
shown on drawings.

Double Pole Switch: Rated 20 A (unless

otherwise shown on the drawings), 250 V
a.c., tumbler operated, to IEC 60669-1, with
molded white plastic plate, marked (etched)
with equipment controlled (i.e. fan, air
S20 conditioner, water heater) and with red neon As shown on the drawings.
pilot light for "on" position. Switch is to be
mounted to flush or surface box, as required
or as shown on the Drawings, and provided
with cord outlet and cord extension to
equipment controlled.
Manufacturer: “Legrand Synergy” or approved
equal.
10.2.5 Socket Outlets
Add the following new Sub-Clauses
6 Socket Outlets are to be selected in accordance with the following table. Noteworthy
here that manufacturer series reference is provided for guidance and other equal and
approved products may be submitted:

To BS 1363, polarized, grounding type, with
three rectangular pin-holes (two poles and Technical areas,
earth), rated 13 A, 250 V, switched, with electrical/telecom rooms,
R01 robust shutter mechanism operated by earth and as shown on drawings.
pin, white plastic finish cover plate.
Manufacturer: “Legrand – Synergy 7300 65”
or approved equal
Similar to R01, but with metal clad finish Technical areas,

R02 Manufacturer: “Legrand – Synergy metalclad” electrical/telecom rooms,
or approved equal and as shown on drawings.
Similar to R01, but in red color for socket
R03 outlets fed from UPS. Technical areas,
electrical/telecom rooms,
and as shown on drawings.
Similar to R02, but in red color for socket Technical areas,
outlets fed from UPS. electrical/telecom rooms,
R04 and as shown on drawings.
Similar to R01, but socket outlet to exposed as shown on drawings.

R05 type. Manufacturer: “Legrand – Plexo” or
approved equal.

Similar to R01, but with LED power indicator. Ooreedo room and as shown
R06 Manufacturer: “Legrand – Synergy metalclad” on drawings.
or approved equal
To BS 1363, polarized, grounding type, with FM200 CLOSET
three rectangular pin-holes (two poles and
R07 earth), rated 15 A, 250 V, switched, with
robust shutter mechanism operated by earth
Manufacturer: “Legrand – Synergy” or
approved equal
To BS 1363, polarized, grounding type, with
three rectangular pin-holes (two poles and Vacuum station
R08 earth), rated 15 A, 250 V, switched, with
robust shutter mechanism operated by earth
Manufacturer: “Legrand – Synergy” or
approved equal
Industrial socket outlet, single phase, three

R41 As shown on drawings.
wire, 32 A, 250 V. , Manufacturer: “MK
commando” or approved equal
Industrial socket outlet, single phase, three

R42 wire, 16 A, 250 V. Manufacturer: “MK As shown on drawings.
commando” or approved equal
Industrial socket outlet, 3 phase, 32A,

R43 3P+N+E, As shown on drawings.
415 V. Manufacturer: “MK commando”
or approved equal
Industrial socket outlet, 3 phase, 16A,
R44 3P+N+E, 415 V. As shown on drawings.
Manufacturer: “MK commando” or
approved equal
10.2.9 Fused Connection

Units Add to Clause 10.2.9
the following
6 The cover plate specification of the fused connection units shall in general be the
same as the finishes used for the small power and switches wiring devices.

Add Clause 10.2.13 Data/Telephone OUTLETS
(a) The cover plate specification of the low current devices shall in general be the
same as the finishes used for the small power and switches wiring devices.
Add Clause 10.2.14 PLUGS
1 Type: Compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact
resistant molded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins
and cord grip and of shapes Providing Easy Hand-Grip for Removal.
2 Quantity: Supply number equal to 20% of total number of each type of socket
outlet supplied.
3 Fuses for standard British type sockets are to be standard 13 A cartridge fuses
fitted in plug.
Add Clause 10.2.15 Door Entrance Systems
1 Door Bell Push Button: Momentary contact, low voltage, with illuminated label
holder under glassene, flush box and stainless steel plate, and electronic
microphone for two-way communication.
2 Chime: Electronic, with built-in double-wound transformer, 8V - 12V secondary

protected by fuses; primary voltage to correspond with building power supply
voltage at location.
3 Chime is to be two-tone, double insulated, 80 dB at 1-m distance, adjustable

output. It is to be possible to operate chime by 9 V alkaline battery.
4 Wiring: Minimum 1 mm2, PVC insulated copper conductor, run in separate

conduit from all other services. Multi-core cable to each apartment is to be
supplied as required by system.
5 Multi push button outdoor station is to comprise flush wall box, anodized
aluminum front plate gasket to box, with number of push buttons and
corresponding illuminated labels shown on the Drawings, and with electronic
microphone unit (talk and listen), amplifier, transformer and power package with
output at ]12 V d.c. operated from building power supply.
6 Indoor Apartment Receiver Unit: Wall mounted, with built-in chime, intercom
handset, door release push button, and push-to-talk button.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 11 - LIGHT FITTINGS
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Add to Clause 11.1.2 the following Sub-clauses:
2 Fixture Design and Standards: The Specifications and Drawings are a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless
otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturer's standard series, designed and
manufactured for the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with
the Schedule of Lighting Fixtures and complying with IEC 60598 and BS EN 55015.
3 FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed

and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global
4 Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessory
components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for their indicated
use and installation conditions on Project.
(a) Special Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures for use in damp or wet locations,
underwater, and recessed in combustible construction that are specifically listed
and labeled for such use.
(b) The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
5 Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ceiling system and other
items, including work of other trades, required to be mounted on ceiling or in
ceiling space.
11.1.3 REFERENCES
Delete New
BS 800 BS EN 55014-1
BS 3677 BS EN 60188
LIGHT FITTINGS S21P11 - Page 1 of 20

BS 4533 BS EN 60598
BS 5225 BS EN 13032
BS 60400 BS EN 60400
Add the following sub-clause 11.1.3-2:
2 For LED fixture comply with the following standards:
(a) LED Fixtures:
i. IEC 60598 “Luminaires”.
ii. IES LM-79-08 “Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric

Measurements of Solid- State Lighting Products”.
iii. IES LM-80-08 “Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of

LED Light Sources”.
iv. IES TM-21-11 “Projecting Long Term Maintenance of LED Light

Sources”.
v. EN 55015 “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance

Characteristics of Electrical Lighting and Similar Equipment”.
vi. IEC 62471 “Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems”.
(b) LED Drivers:
i. IEC 61347-1 “Lamp Controlgear - Part 1: General and Safety

Requirements”.
ii. IEC 61347-2-13 “Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-13: Particular Requirements

for D.C. or
A.C. Supplied Electronic Controlgear for LED Modules”.
iii. IEC 62384 “DC or AC Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED
Modules - Performance Requirements”.
iv. IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits

- Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current ≤ 16
A per Phase)”.
v. EN 55015 “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance

Characteristics of Electrical Lighting and Similar Equipment”.
vi. IEC 61547 “Equipment for General Lighting Purposes - EMC

Immunity Requirements”.

11.1.4 SUBMITTALS
Add to Clause 11.1.4.1 the following Sub-clauses
4 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections. Fixture cutsheet should also be submitted for
review along with a sample, at the cost of the Contractor including shipping. Any
LED fixture substitution will only be accepted if a physical working sample is
submitted to the Engineer’s office for review.
5 Samples: Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required,
together with color and texture samples of each fixture
6 Dimming Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast

certifying that ballasts are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with
which they are used
7 Addressable Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast

certifying that ballasts are compatible with the central battery systems and
equipment with which they are used.
8 Compatibility Confirmation: Signed by manufacturers of lighting fixture, lamp and

controlgear/driver respectively clearly assuring compatibility with each other’s
equipment.
9 Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, and special dimming ballasts (if
applicable). Arrange Product Data for fixtures in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features and accessories and the following:

(a) Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures.

(b) Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of independent
laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps.
10 Photometric data for lighting calculations provided as IES or LDT format including
polar light distribution curves, coefficient of utilization, glare classification,
efficiency, depreciation factors etc.
11 Certified results of accredited manufacturers’ laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps
for photometric performance.
12 For LEDs: Photometric test reports from accredited manufacturer’s laboratories

shall be submitted verifying the luminaire photometric characteristic; the testing
shall conform to LM-79- 08 or similar and approved international equivalent
standard. Report shall include laboratory name, report number, date, luminaire
catalogue number, luminaire, light source specifications, etc.
13 Life, output (lumens, Color temperature, and CRI) and energy efficiency data for
lamps.
14 Battery and Charger Data: For self-contained emergency lighting fixtures.
15 Photo biological risk assessment for LED fixtures.
16 Test Certificates: Submit certificates demonstrating LED fixtures compliance with

the referenced standards. Include the following as a minimum:
(a) Degree of Protection to IEC 60529.

(b) Humidity Proof to IEC 60598.
(c) Insulation resistance and electric strength to IEC 60598.
(d) Color rendering for LED fixtures to IES LM 79-08.
(e) LED fixtures lifetime to IES LM-80-08 and IES TM-21-11.
(f) Efficacy to IES LM-79-08.
17 Submit shop drawings for equipment and accessories specified herein and on the
Lighting Fixture Schedule. Include photometric data, ballast and lamp information
for all luminaries. Shop Drawings detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating
dimensions, weights, method of field assembly, components, features, and
accessories.
18 Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for control system showing both factory-installed
and field- installed wiring for specific system of this Project, and differentiating
between factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
19 Product certificates signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that their

products comply with specified requirements.
20 Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the

manufacturer, supplier/manufacture’s authorized representative and the Contractor.

Compliance statements signed by the supplier and the Contractor only are not
acceptable.
21 Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results specified in Part 11.3 of this
Section.
22 Maintenance data for fixtures to include in the operation and maintenance manual.
23 Contractor to submit lighting calculations based on approved calculation software

and demonstrate to the Engineer that proposed fixtures provide the required
illumination levels set by the Standards.
24 Installation instructions.
25 As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of

installed lighting.
Add to Clause 11.1 the following Sub-clauses
11.1.5 Warranty

section during the specified warranty period except for LED fixtures and lamps
where the warranty shall clearly reflect that any defective LED fixture and / or
lamp during the specified warranty period will be replaced.
2 Unless otherwise noted, warrant fluorescent lamps and associated standard ballasts
for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion of Works.
3 Warrant LED fixtures for a minimum period of five (5) years from the date of
substantial completion of Works. Include personnel, equipment and labor for
replacing lamps and ballasts that become defective within the Warranty Period. The
warranty shall clearly indicate that there is no limitation on the luminaire operating
profile.
4 Electronic Ballasts: Standard five (5) year full replacement parts and labor included
warranty.
11.1.6 Coordination
1 Design Layout: Fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of
specified fixtures to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected
ceiling plans shall be checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to
structural members, ducts, pipes, other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where
required. Certain fixtures are shown in provisional positions, pending preparation of
final equipment layout drawings. Such fixtures shall be located in coordination with
final equipment layout so that illumination is as intended by the design.

2 Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of

lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction.
3 Coordinate with dimming controls and other lighting control systems and
components specified in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible
components. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of
specified functions.
1 Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
(a) Fixtures: 1 for every 50 installed, but not less than 1 of each type.
(b) Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
(c) Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating
installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
(d) Ballasts, control gear, driver and transformers: 1 for every 100 of each type
and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
(e) Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
11.2 PRODUCTS
Delete Sub-Clauses 11.2.1 & 11.2.2 and replace with the following new Sub-Clause
11.2.1 Lamps
1 Straight Tubular Fluorescent Lamps – Type TL5: High efficiency fluorescent lamps
with a diameter of 16mm shall be used as shown on drawings (and as specified in
the lighting fixtures description). Efficiency shall be over as high as 104 lumens per
Watt. Lumen maintenance of 92% at 10000 burning hours should be achievable
using the appropriate electronic ballast. The lamp should last 20000 burning hours
at a 3 hours switching cycle if operated on HF warm-start ballasts. The lamps should
ignite at from -15 deg C to +50 deg C ambient temperature. Color of light is to be
3500K unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. With a Color
Rendering Index of 85, lamp lumens shall be as follows:
1,200 lumens for 14 W lamps

Contractor to supply fluorescent from the same point of manufacturing and that
were manufactured within a three-month period from each other.

2 Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Single ended, 4-pin high efficiency compact lamp,
operating with electronic ballast. Guaranteed rated life shall be above 10000 hours
and luminous output above the following:
900 lumens for 13 W lamps

3 Metal Halide Lamps up to 150 W: Single ended, compact ceramic metal-halide

lamp, high efficiency with stable color over life time and excellent color rendering
characteristics with UV filter quartz and 2-pin base [G8.5, G12 or GU6.5]. Lamps
shall be to IEC 61167. Guaranteed average life shall not be less than 10000 hours
and luminous outputs, after 100 hours burning, shall be above the following:
1700 lumens for 20 W lamps.

Permissible base temperature shall not be greater than 250 deg. C, and maximum
bulb temperature not greater than 550 deg. C.
11.2.2 Luminaires
1 General:
(a) Generally: Construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the
Regulations and Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired
entirely at factory. Manufacturer's name, factory inspection stamp and official
quality label is to be fixed to each fixture supplied.
(b) Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires): Manufacturer's standard, as given in Lighting

Fixture Schedules shown on the Drawings, or approved equal.
(c) Control gears and transformers shall be compatible with the specified lighting
control system.
(d) Sheet Steel Housings: Not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker when required
by the Specification or the Standards.
(e) Sheet Steel Reflectors: Not less than 0.5 mm thick.
(f) Aluminum Reflectors: Not less than 99.5% purity and not less than 0.7 mm
thick, unless otherwise approved.
(g) Fabrication: Metalwork is to be mitered, welded and ground smooth without

tool marks or burrs. Flat metal parts are to be stiffened by forming grooves and
edges during fabrication. Metal parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
(h) Rust-Proof Ferrous Base: Ferrous metal parts are to be bonderized (treated
with corrosion resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-
inhibiting prime coat before application of final finish.
(i) Finish For Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: Approved baked enamel paint.
Paint color on fixture frames and trims are to be as specified or as selected by
Engineer.
(j) Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: White baked enamel paint having
reflection factor not less than 85 percent. Mirror reflectors, where specified,
are to be highly polished, anodized aluminum with reflection factors not less
than 97 percent.
(k) Mechanical Resistance of Finish: After finish has been applied on steel
surfaces and cured, it is to withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing
signs of cracking, peeling or loosening from base metal.
(l) Resistance of Finish to Ultra-Violet: Withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultra-

violet RS lamp placed 100 mm from surface without dis-coloring, hardening
or warping, and is to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.
(m) Heat Resistance: Finishes, wires and accessories inside fixtures are to be
certified materials to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered
in the fixtures (105 deg. C (221 deg. F) at least).
(n) Wiring inside Fixtures: Not less than 1.5 mm² or as specified, heat resistant
wires and insulated for 240 V applications. Insulation is to have acceptable
characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside fixtures (105 degrees C
at least). Wiring is to be terminated on screw type, fixed, insulating, and
ceramic heat resistant (105 degrees C (221 deg. F) at least) terminal blocks.
(o) Hinges: Fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have
concealed hinges and catches, and stainless steel retaining clips. Other
alternative equally durable products may be submitted for approval.
(p) Suspension Aligners: Provided for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and
horizontal alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm.
(q) Recessed Fixtures: Constructed to fit into suspended ceilings without

distorting fixture or ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or
concrete ceilings.
(r) Recessed down light fixtures shall be provided with “trims” to architectural
approval and shall not have visible fixing screws or clips.

(s) Outdoor Fixtures: Non-ferrous metal or specially moulded material for

outdoor use.
(t) Removal of parts for maintenance is to be possible without removing fixture

housing.
(u) All control gear shall be suitable for an ambient of 50 deg C (122 deg. F) and
shall be from internationally reputed manufacturers.
(v) All fixtures shall be clearly labeled by manufacturer, clearly stating "MAKE",
"MODEL" and country of manufacturer.
(w) Connector adaptor to be provided with each fitting male/female
(x) All luminaires shall be certified by the manufacturer for use in an ambient
temperature of 50°C.
2 Fluorescent Fixtures
(b) Lamp Holders Generally: IEC 60400, heavy duty, moulded white plastic with
non- corroding spring contacts.
(c) Lamp Holders for Industrial Fittings: Spring loaded turret type, heavy duty,
dust protected.
(d) Ballast Rating: ballast is to be manufactured and certified for the specific lamp
it controls and for operation from nominal power supply, with voltage and
frequency equal to nominal voltage and frequency of distribution network.
(e) Ballasts Generally: To IEC 60921, IEC 61347-2-8 and IEC 61347-2-11. Only
single or two-lamp ballasts shall be used in any one fixture. Two-lamp ballasts
shall be lead-lag, series type. Equipment shall be enclosed in sheet steel casing
with corrosion and heat resistant finish.
(f) Ballast thermosetting compound shall not soften, liquify or support

combustion under any operating condition or upon ballast failure, and shall fill
ballast enclosure and dampen vibrations. Temperature rise, under normal
operating conditions, shall not exceed 55 deg. C above maximum ambient
temperature of 50 deg. C.
(g) Ballast Protection: Each ballast shall have one-time external fuse and fuse
holder rated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in addition to
internal thermal protection.
(h) Ballast Type: Preheated, warm rapid start, electronic or dimming type, as
stated in fixture description and as shown on the Drawings, power factor
corrected to above 0.9, having manufacturer's lowest case temperature. Sound

rating shall not exceed level given in the Standards.
(i) Remote Ballasts are to be furnished in rated enclosures ready for mounting and
connection. Enclosures, with more than one ballast, are to be furnished pre-
wired. Provide acoustically isolated mounts for remote ballasts and ballast
enclosures to assure quiet operation.
(j) Capacitors: To IEC 61048, IEC 61049, having snap-type connectors and
fastening, bolt type M8, for fixing to fixture.
(k) Starters, if required, shall comply with IEC 60155, and shall be selected in
conjunction with respective ballast and lamp.
(l) The electronic ballast must be earthed (protection class I)
(m) Electronic ballasts shall be used in conjunction with tubular and compact
fluorescent fixtures. Ballast shall consist of electronic integrated circuit design,
warm / rapid start, operating at 20 to 60 kHz, with Energy Efficiency Index
EEI=A1 for dimmable light fittings and EEI=A2 for non dimmable ones,
power factor corrected to above 0.9. Ballast shall comply with IEC 61347-1
and IEC 61347-2-3 and shall meet the limits of main harmonic content as
defined in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with radio interference suppression
limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of IEC 61547.
(n) Electronic ballasts shall be designed and constructed to maintain a case

temperature not greater than 90° C when operated at a room ambient of 50° C
when tested in accordance with applicable standards. Ballasts shall be as
manufactured by Osram, Lutron, Philips, Helvar, Universal Lighting
Technologies or other equal and approved, with service life in excess of 10,000
hours. Use the most efficient combination of four, three, two and/or single
lamp ballasts as recommended by the manufacturer and subject to the
(o) Electronic ballast sound rating: all ballasts shall be the manufacturer's best
(quietest) sound rating, with the rating clearly indicated on the ballast case.
Ballasts found by the Engineer to be unduly noisy shall be replaced without
charge prior to acceptance of the job.
(p) Electronic ballasts shall be designed for the specified power supply voltage
and frequency. Ballasts shall be firmly fixed in the lighting fixtures to prevent
vibrations
(q) Louvers shall be provided with disconnectable earthing links to luminaire

body.
(r) Louvers shall be provided with strengthened, easily positionable “snap-into-

place” clips or clamps to fix to the luminaire body.
(s) Louvers shall be provided with a clear coating to prevent scratches to the

louver when cleaning during routine maintenance. This coating shall be

certified to be “non-peeling” and shall not cause discoloring.
(t) All louvers shall be provided with protective film after manufacture, which
shall be easily removable when louver is fixed in position after installation at
site.
(u) Diffusers may be heat tempered, borosilicate glass or prismatic acrylic

certified to be non- inflammable and non-toxic in case of a fire condition.
3 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lighting fixtures
(a) Light emitting diode shall be a solid state device embodying a p-n junction,
emitting optical radiation when excited by an electric current. It shall be part
of the LED module which is supplied as a light source. Output color
consistency shall be guaranteed and have a Color Rendering Index (CRI)
greater than 80 measured in accordance with IES LM-79-08, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings.
(b) LED fixtures shall comply with IEC 60598.
(c) LEDs shall have an efficacy of 90 lumens per watt as a minimum measured in
accordance with IES LM-79-08, Approved Method: Electrical and
Photometric Measurement of Solid-State Lighting Products.
(d) LED luminaires shall have a measured efficacy of 75 lumen per watt at
ambient temperature 50° C, thermal test is to be conducted to verify the
luminaire efficacy.
(e) Guaranteed rated life (L80B50) shall not be less than 50,000 hours and 35,000
hours at 25 deg. C and 35 deg. C respectively for interior lighting fixtures and
50,000 hours at 50 deg. C for exterior lighting fixtures, as per IES LM-80-08,
Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources and
IES TM-21-11, Projecting Long Term Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
(f) Luminaires guaranteed lifetime shall cover all fixtures components including
lamp, fixture and drivers.
(g) LED luminaires shall be suitable for 24/7 continuous operation at 50 deg. C with
no negative effect on the luminaire life time and / or performance in terms of
color temperature and lumen output.
(h) LEDs shall comply with Photo-biological Safety of lamps and lamp systems in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 62471. Provide a test report to prove
the fixture is classed as “Exempt” or “Risk Group 1”.
(i) Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse for
indoor luminaires and five-step maximum for outdoor luminaires to ensure color
consistency among luminaires, unless more stringent requirements are indicated
on Drawings.
(j) EMI/RFI shall meet EN 55015 requirements.
(k) The maximum percentage of direct up-light from the outdoor luminaires shall
be as CIE 126-1997.
(l) Housing, for non-linear luminaires, shall incorporate an adequate heat sink, the
design of the heat sinks shall be such that there is a direct thermal path from the
LED junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal transfer effect
throughout the life of the luminaire which ensures the overall fittings and the

LEDs are kept relatively cool and any heat generated throughout the life of the
strip at the specified ambient temperature doesn’t affect the guaranteed life time
and / or luminaire performance.
(m) Linear LED lighting strips shall comply with the following in addition to the
general requirements listed above:
i. Linear LED strips shall be provided in flexible lengths as required by the
installation conditions.
ii. Linear LED lighting strips characteristics in terms of IP rating shall suit
the area of installation and as shown on Drawings.
iii. Linear LED lighting strips characteristics in terms of flexibility shall suit
the method of installation (curved or linear) and as shown on Drawings.
iv. Linear LED construction shall be properly designed to ensure adequate
heat dissipation from the LED junctions to the atmosphere to ensure that
the overall strip is kept relatively cool and any heat generated
throughout the life of the strip at the specified ambient temperature
doesn’t affect the guaranteed life time and / or luminaire performance.
v. Linear LED strip channels/profiles degree of protection shall match the
specified IP rating and shall ensure proper heat dissipation throughout
the life of the strip such that the guaranteed life time is not affected.
vi. Linear LED strip power rating (W/m) shall be within 10% of the
specified value.
vii. Maximum strip length connected to each LED driver shall be as per
manufacturer’s recommendation considering the distance from fixture,
power and wire cross section.
(n) Electronic LED Drivers: high efficiency, high power factor, suitable for
operation at the ambient conditions specified for the project. Driver shall have
constant output current or constant output voltage over the whole wattage range
independent of mains supply fluctuations as shown on drawings and sufficient
for operating the number and wattage of LEDs connected. Guaranteed rated life
of the driver shall be 50,000 hours as a minimum.
(o) LED drivers shall have electrical insulation between primary and secondary
sides. Secondary cables from the driver to LED modules shall be provided by
the LED supplier. Maximum length between driver and LED module shall be as
per manufacturer’s recommendations.
(p) LED driver shall be protected against electric shock, accidental contact with live
parts, short circuit, overload, over temperature where the output current is
reduced if the temperature limit is exceeded.
(q) In case LED luminaire internal temperature monitoring is required then the LED
driver shall be provided with the possibility to connect a temperature sensor to
monitor the LED temperature and protect the LED modules against thermal
damage.
(r) Dimmable driver, where required, shall be compatible with the dimming system
used.
(s) Drivers shall be compatible with the lighting control system used.
(t) LED driver shall be provided with constant light output function, where required
on Drawings, in order to maintain the light output of the LED by increasing the
LED driving current over the lifetime.
(u) LED driver shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC 62384
and shall meet the limits of main harmonic content as defined in IEC 61000-3-

2 and comply with radio interference suppression limits defined in BS EN 55015

and immunity requirements of IEC 61547.
4 EXIT and Safety Luminaires
(a) Refer to Schedule of Luminaires for additional light requirements.
(b) Exit and safety luminaires shall comply with latest requirements of BS 5266,
BS EN 1838 and NFPA - 101, UL Standard 924, local authority having
jurisdiction and local Energy Efficiency Standards. Comply with language
directions and pictograms as per QCD requirements.
(c) Exact finishes must be coordinated and approved by the Engineer and Interior
Designer.
(d) Whenever the main lighting fixtures are used as emergency lighting,
Contractor shall ensure coordination between both manufacturers for
compatibility and addressability of the system.
(e) All exit and safety luminaires shall have a monitoring component with easy
accessible addressing module. All luminaires with high frequency ballasts
shall have a built-in or separate monitoring facility.
(f)Whenever the main lighting fixtures are used as emergency lighting,

Contractor shall ensure coordination between both manufacturers for
compatibility and addressability of the system.
5 Self-Contained Emergency Fixtures
(a) Self-contained emergency lighting fixtures shall be equipped with integrated

sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium battery, consist of
converter/inverter devices to provide 3 hours operation under mains failure,
unless the main supply is restored prior to this.
(b) Charger shall be fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed
power transfer relay.
(c) Fixtures shall be equipped with a self-diagnostics auto device with LED test
indicator.
(d) Lamps’ mercury content shall be coordinated with battery kit manufacturer to
ensure that no steering effect (dark rings) exist during operation in emergency
mode.
(e) Luminaries with self-contained battery packs shall be connected to the ‘’live
side’’ of the local lighting circuit and lamps shall operate automatically under
mains failure conditions.
(f) Units shall have the capability of sustaining high temperature so that they can

be accommodated in fittings with high internal temperatures. However, if the

internal temperature of the fittings exceeds 50°C, the battery unit shall be
mounted remote to the luminaries. In the case of remote mounting, a purpose
made remote mounting box shall be provided.
(g) Key operated switches shall be provided, at the locations indicated on the
Project Drawings, for all self contained emergency pack unit luminaries, to
control the operation of the luminaries manually for testing purposes. Test key
switches shall be clearly labelled “Emergency Lighting”.
6 Low Voltage Transformers
(a) For fixtures with remote transformers, the Contractor is to verify wire size of
secondary conductors from transformers to luminaires. Wire size shall be
sufficient to limit voltage drop to a minimum of 11.5 Volts at the fixture for a
12 Volt system and 22.8 Volts at the fixture for a 24 Volt system.
(b) Contractor to coordinate transformer locations, if required, with Engineer or

Interior Designer prior to installation.
11.2.3 Street Lighting control system
(a) Remote outdoor lighting management will be provided in order to allow

fixtures to be remotely accessed and viewed in real time. These can be
switched or dimmed to directly reduce energy use and to collect performance
data, this also can prevent light pollution.
(b) With remote central management it is possible to provide operation and
maintenance savings through reductions in the need to visit lighting points or
scout for failures. This reduction in demand on resources can be achieved
through reduced use of service vehicles as a result of checking failures or
adapting lighting remotely to events or weather conditions without the need
to attend site.
(c) The lighting control system workstation with necessary software shall be
proposed in CCTV control room.
(d) The lamp level smart controller will be installed on column which will
monitor and gather all information about the lighting fixture and perform
on/off operation as per requirement and command.
(e) There are Remote terminal units or gateways will be either part of feeder
pillar or located near feeder pillar and receives all software commands and
consequently manages the lamp controller and also gather information,
monitor and control the lighting fixtures. RTU basically includes necessary
controlling devices like data concentrator, electric network analyzer,
intelligent communicator etc.
(f) Remote terminal unit/ gateway communicate with control desk via IP base
communication through fiber optic cables.

Add to Clause 11.3 the following Sub-clauses:
11.3.3 Installation of Luminaires
1 Provide luminaires as scheduled in the issued documents, complete with lamps as

scheduled and as specified herein.
2 Thoroughly review ceiling types, finishes and construction details before placing
luminaire orders, and ensure that required mounting assemblies, frames, rings and
similar features are included. Confirm colors and finishes with Consultant prior to
ordering.
3 Install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at uniform
heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Make final height
adjustment after installation.
4 Ensure that luminaire is positioned so that it can be removed and re-fixed without
having to disturb other equipment.
5 Include for assembly and mounting of luminaires and lamps, complete with wiring,
connections, fittings, hangers, aligners, box covers and accessories required for a
complete, safe and fully operational assembly.
6 Fixture Support: Provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets
and flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details
of hangers etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures
mounted on outlet boxes to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when
required, for proper installation. Provide one point of support in addition to the
outlet box fixture stud for individually mounted fixtures longer than 600 mm.
7 Stem Hangers: Provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures.
Stems shall have suspension aligners and shall be of suitable length for suspending
fixtures at required height.
8 Suspended Ceilings: If ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures

without strain or deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure.
9 Solid Ceilings: Coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture

dimensions and structural elements.
10 Where down lights are fixed into suspended ceilings, the upper surface of the
ceiling shall be provided with a suitable metal plate of minimum 1.2 mm
thickness on which the luminaire-fixing clamp shall rest. This is to avoid the
clamp from damaging the ceiling surface.
11 Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not
exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast
manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.
12 Continuous Rows: Arrange fixtures so that individual fixture can be removed

without dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between

fixtures.
13 Cover Plates: Install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or
structure when left unused.
14 Flush Recessed Fixtures: Install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture
and between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
15 Ventilation: Keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by

the design of the fixture. Ensure that the final circuit connection is adequately
protected against heat transfer from fixtures.
16 Earth metal frames as described Section 21 Part 22.
17 Tightness: Ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when
installed, and completely weatherproof for installations subject to weather
conditions. Installation of fitting and termination of circuit wiring should not
invalidate the ingress protection rating.
18 Lamps for Permanent Installation: Place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to
hand-over and when instructed by Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service shall
not be used for final lamping of fixtures.
19 Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according
to manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install
lamps in each fixture.
20 Wing nuts, bolts, or screws on adjustable fixtures should be tightened following

final adjustment of fixtures.
21 Use cloth gloves when handling reflector cones, louvers, glass, sconces and all
exposed surfaces of fixtures.
22 Install fixtures in lay in ceiling in center of tile unless dimensioned otherwise on

Reflected Ceiling Plans.
23 All lamps and lighting fixtures shall be installed by authorized electrical technicians
wearing protective hand gloves
24 Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
- Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 150 mm from fixture corners.
- Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each
fixture corner
25 Provide spacers for fixtures mounted on low density ceiling material.
26 Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures in plaster or gypboard ceilings.

27 Install fixtures in and on acoustical tile ceilings in alignment with tile joints.
28 Prepare fixtures, trim and poles and standards required to be painted.
29 Outlet boxes locations on drawings are diagrammatic only. Position outlet boxes to
coincide with suspension hangers and knockouts.
30 Wiring shall be protected with tape or tubing at all points where abrasion may occur.
Wiring shall be concealed within the fixture construction except where design or
mounting dictates otherwise.
31 Minimize splices. Make splices with approved mechanical insulated steel spring
type connectors, suitable for temperature and voltage conditions to which splices
are to be subjected.
32 Carefully coordinate the luminaire installation with the work of other trades to
ensure that the necessary recessing depths and mounting spaces are provided.
33 Install luminaires in accordance with applicable architectural drawing reflected

ceiling plans and/or wall elevations and/or field instructions issued by Engineer.
Confirm luminaire locations prior to roughing in. In equipment rooms, shafts and
similar secondary areas, install luminaires after the mechanical and other major
work is roughed in and adjust luminaire locations as required.
34 If requested, demonstrate the operation of special applications of luminaires such as

building floodlights and other decorative luminaires, and adjust their locations
within a reasonable distance to obtain the effects desired.
35 Align and position all adjustable luminaires, and ensure that luminaires with
adjustable lamp holders are properly positioned to correspond to the lamps
specified.
36 Comply with the requirements of local authorities regarding support of luminaires

in suspended ceilings.
37 All lamps shall be new and intact when the project is complete and ready for
acceptance.
38 Include a full lamp listing in the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.
39 Secure grade mounted building floodlighting luminaires to concrete pads set flush
with finished grade level.
40 Provide remote ballasts for luminaires as scheduled. Secure in place where shown,
and connect complete.
41 Where the specifications call for field verification, the Contractor shall make field
verification measurements in a timely manner as to not cause those lighting fixtures
to be delivered to the jobsite late and affect other trades or delay the completion of

construction. No substitutions will be allowed due to lead time difficulties arising

out of the late ordering of light fixtures.
42 Contractor to coordinate with Interior Designer in regards to the painting of the

white flanges of the recessed light fixtures within this project. Contractor to paint
the flanges of light fixtures after the removal of the trims completely from the
ceiling. The trims are not to be re-installed until the flanges are fully dry.
43 Contractor to notify Engineer immediately if fixture placement is in conflict with a
structural beam, mechanical duct, plumbing pipe, a space above ceiling is not
sufficient, or any other reason that a fixture cannot be located where it is
dimensioned or shown on the construction documents. Contractor is to move
fixture, if necessary, where Engineer decides.
44 Exterior type luminaires to be secured to concrete bases as detailed. Co-ordinate all

required excavation, concrete, formwork, backfilling, anchor bolt templates and any
necessary installation/mounting hardware. Refer to Architectural Specifications for
respective work requirements. Co-ordinate work to ensure proper positioning of
anchor bolts in concrete. Provide for anchor bolt covers.
11.3.4 Adjustment and Cleaning

1 Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable fixtures to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal
occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.
Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
2 Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods

and materials recommended by manufacturer.
11.3.5 Installation of Outdoor Lighting Controls
1 Provide a photocell and time switch as required to control designated lighting.
2 Connect the lighting circuits to photocell and to the relay/contactor which will be
located adjacent the panel board.
3 Provide interface, wiring in conduit, connections, etc., as required to monitor the

photocell control of lighting through the building management system (BMS) of
Mechanical Division.
4 When lighting control work is complete, test operation of the control system and
adjust as required.
11.3.6 Installation of Emergency Lighting
1 Comply with local codes and standards in providing emergency lighting as required
for building.
2 Engage manufacturer’s trained technician to inspect installation, provide start-up,

test, adjust as required and certify battery units.
3 When installation of emergency lighting battery units are complete, test each unit,
measure lighting levels, adjust as required, and certify in writing to the Engineer
that the units are complete, have been tested, adjusted, and are in proper operating
condition. Test and demonstrate duration of battery time under full load conditions
and measure lighting levels. Coordinate and arrange for local governing building
inspector approvals. Arrange for manufacturer’s representative to perform on site
testing including all preceding described testing and verification work.
Manufacturer shall be responsible for recording light level readings on a record set
of floor plans, calculating light level readings, and issuing a letter, (including light
level readings), to the Engineer stating that the emergency lighting levels meet the
requirements of the local Building Code and local authority requirements. The
Employer and Engineer shall witness testing at times acceptable to Employer and
Engineer. Advise Engineer minimum 10 days prior to propose testing.
11.3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
1 Visual Inspection: Check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and

nameplates etc.
2 Illumination Measurements: Taken at selected locations, to determine level and

uniformity.
3 Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and

regulation equipment.
4 Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
5 Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
6 Provide instruments to make and record test results.
7 Tests: As follows:
- Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
- Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to
demonstrate proper operation.
- Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
- Report results in writing.
8 Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat

procedure until units operate properly.
9 Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.

11.3.8 STARTUP SERVICE
1 Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to
occupancy by Employer. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps
intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 16 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
Delete the sub-clause 16.1.3-1 and replace by the following
1 Comply with the latest edition of the following:
(a) IEC 60831-1&-2, IEC 60871-1&-2 and IEC 60931-1&-2.
(b) IEEE 18 and NEMA CP 1
(c) QGEWC regulations
Add the following new Sub-Clauses 16.1.8 and 16.1.9:
16.1.8 Warranty


following:
(a) Three sets of each type and rating of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control
switches, and similar devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
16.2 PRODUCTS
16.2.1 General
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS S21P16 - Page 1 of 3

4 Configuration:
System shall include integrally mounted, factory-wired major components including

the following:
(a) Incoming line section including main disconnect switch.

(b) In-rush reactor section.
(c) Multiple-fused capacitor banks.
(d) Multiple vacuum load interrupter switches.
(e) Control cabinet.
(f) Power-factor meter.
Add to Clause 16.2.2-10 the following

(c) The anti-harmonic Reactors shall be provided in series with the capacitors and
properly tuned to limit the harmonic currents in order to avoid over loading the
capacitors. The reactor rating shall not exceed 7% of the capacitors to be
protected.
Add the following new Clause to 16.2.2
11 The capacitors must comply with the latest QGEWC regulations

Add the following new Clause
1 Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any value

between unity and
0.90 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on circuits being
corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10
seconds, operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit.
Contactors are opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power
factor closer to the target setting. Switch only one capacitor bank at a time.
2 Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls include an under-voltage relay that

interrupts capacitor switching for power supply interruptions longer than 15ms.
"Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel permit manual
sequencing of capacitor switching.
3 Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the
capacitor application.
4 Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor,

interconnecting wiring, and capacitors.
5 Inductors: Iron-core-type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching

surges to within contactor ratings.
6 Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the

maximum fault current to which they may be exposed.
7 Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel.
8 Buses: Plated copper, braced to withstand the maximum fault current to which it
may be exposed.
9 Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with
controls or main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.
10 Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure.

(a) Indicated target and actual power factors.
(b) Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
(c) Mounting: Flush or semi-flush in unit door
11 Current Transformer: Type and configuration to suit sensing and mounting

conditions.
12 Power-Factor Meter: Switchboard type, mounted in the enclosure door, with 0.5
lagging to 0.5 leading scale and accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent.
13 Main Circuit Breaker / Disconnect Switch: Operable from outside the enclosure to
disconnect the unit with an operating handle that can be padlocked.
Add the following new Clause
16.4 FIELD TESTS
16.4.1 Field Tests

1 The PFCC assembly shall be tested at site during commissioning. Indicate and
interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and shall be
verified with the actual requirements and QGEWC regulations. Modifications if
any shall be carried-out at no extra cost to the owner.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
The QCS (Qatar Construction Specification) is the specification for this project. The following
clauses and/or parts delete, amend or replace the corresponding referenced clauses in Section
21 of QCS 2014, or are additional clauses, as appropriate. These specifications shall be read
and construed together with the QCS 2014.
PART 17 – STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET
17.1 GENERAL
17.1.2 Description of Work
Delete Clause 17.1.2-1 and replace with the following Clause:
1 The Contractor shall supply, install, commission, test and handover in good operable manner
including one year guarantee and maintenance of 415 V mains failure, standby diesel
generator set, as per the Project Documentation. The set shall be arranged for either
automatic or manual start on mains failure, as indicated on the Project Drawings. The set
shall be complete with diesel engine, generator, exhaust system, start-up system, control
panel, batteries, starting motor, built-in air cooled radiator, air inlet and outlet attenuators,
daily fuel storage tank, fuel transfer pumps, earthing, manually operated overhead hoist,
synchronizing boards, automatic transfer switches, and all other accessories and
auxiliaries as specified and mentioned in the BOQ. The works shall also include the
following connections and interfaces:
- Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers,

Ethernet connection, etc. as detailed in the BMS schedules/specification and /or
- Connection to fire alarm control panel including interface elements such as relays,
transducers, etc, as detailed in the fire alarm specification and/or shown on the
drawing.
17.1.3 References
Delete the following in sub-clause 17.1.3 and replace by the following
Delete New
BS 5514 BS ISO 3046
For Generator breaker specifications, refer to section 21 part 3.

DIESEL GENERATOR SET S21P17 - Page 1 of 13

6 Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with ISO 3046, ISO 8528, IEC
60034, IEC 60085 and CISPR, or equivalent NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and DIN Standards
and recommendations of ABGSM (Association of British Set Manufacturers) where such
standards meet with or supersede the ISO and IEC Standards.
7 Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
8 Factory witness test for the generator sets shall be witnessed by the Engineer and Client.
Witness test is to include complete routine and function testing. Test procedure and
program are to be submitted for approval prior to test conduction. Factory witness test
shall include for business class air tickets, five stars Hotel full accommodation,
transportation and all test expenses for two persons from the Engineer’s/ Employer’s side.
17.1.5 Submittals
Add the following new Sub-Clauses (h to v) to Clause 17.1.5-2
(h) General description and characteristics of engine- generating sets, standards with
which components comply, site rating and overload capability, overall efficiency, and
fuel and lubricant consumption at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% of rated load.
(i) Description and operating criteria of engine; type, model, manufacturer, fuel and
lubricating oil types and specific consumption, starting conditions and starting
periods from cold to full- load pick-up, governor and response characteristics due to
sudden load changes, super- charger, fuel injection system, cooling system and
radiator, air filters, fuel filters, oil filters and pumps.
(j) Description and operating criteria of generator, exciter and voltage regulator, with
loading response and short-circuit characteristics, insulation, cooling and
accessories.
(k) Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and other
components specified, weights and forces, mounting methods, vibration protection
etc.
(l) Battery type, make, charge/discharge characteristics, capacity and constructional

features.
(m) Battery charger, method of charging, equalizing and trickle charging.
(n) Daily fuel tanks, pipes and accessories; materials and construction.
(o) Exhaust system and silencers; materials and construction.
(p) Control instruments, protection, alarms, cut-outs, indicating lamps, indicating

instruments and all other devices or components.
(q) Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
(r) Automatic transfer switch and control gear.

(s) Synchronization system where specified for two or more sets are in parallel,
including technical data, instruments, governor and voltage regulation, with
characteristic curves etc.
(t) Calculation of noise levels in dBA at typical points within engine room and at
various locations inside and outside.
(u) Description and operation of the control of the motorized C.B. of the synchronizing
panel with ATS, including a load shedding program to be fully adaptable to client
requirements.
(v) Calculation of static pressure on radiator fan including indication of Manufacturer’s

required
C.F.M. and fan static pressure.
Add the following new Clauses 17.1.5-3 to 17.1.5-6 to Clause 17.1.5
3 Routine Tests and Factory Test Reports: Fully assembled plant or equipment is to be
tested at the factory, before shipping. Complete performance tests are to be carried out
under site simulated conditions, in accordance with the Standards and as described in the
Specification, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
4 Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection
records relative to compliance with performance requirements.
5 Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Demonstrate compliance with specified

requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
6 Sound measurement test report.
Add the following new Sub-Clauses 17.1.7, 17.1.8 and 17.1.9
1 Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation
of the plant. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation together
with current prices. Pack with protective covering for storage and identify with labels
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer. Provide a test for tools and instruments for the Engineer’s approval.
17.1.8 Warranty

agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section
during the specified warranty period
(a) Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion, and as stated above.
17.1.9 Maintenance Service
1 Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months'

full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the generator Installer.
Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper generator
operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture
and installation of original equipment.
(a) Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal

working hours.
(b) Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
(i) Response Time: 2 hours or less.
17.2 PRODUCTS
17.2.1 Diesel Generator Set
Delete Sub-Clause 17.2.1-2(a) & (b) and replace with the following Sub-Clauses
(a) The Diesel Generator Set output shall be design for standby rating as specified
elsewhere. Detailed design calculations for Engine, Alternator, Cooling system,
battery, etc shall be provided for Engineer’s approval for the proposed Diesel
Generator set.
(b) The rated output shall be as specified elsewhere or as indicated on the drawings,
415/240 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire and 50 Hz or different voltage level as indicated
elsewhere in the Contract specifications (690 V or 3.3 KV). The rated output shall
mean the net full continuous derated output in Qatar at an ambient temperature up
to 50°C at a relative humidity of 95%.
Add to Sub-Clause 17.2.1-2 the following new Sub-Clauses:
(c) Equipment ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings or the next higher standard
ratings provided by the manufacturer. Ratings are to be net standby, limited time
running power (LTP), excluding fan and any auxiliaries, auxiliary drives and losses,
delivered at specified frequency, voltage and power factor and under worst climatic
conditions on site.
(d) Performance Class to be in accordance to IS0 8528-1 or to NFPA 110, as required
by the local Civil Defence Authorities:
- Class G2 (20 percent) voltage drop (free drop at 100 percent loading)

Delete Sub-Clause 17.2.1-3(a) and replace with the following Sub-Clause
(a) The diesel engine shall be of the stationary heavy duty, turbo charged
compression/ignition, multi cylinder 4 stroke operation. The steel base frame shall be
provided with spring type vibration isolators. The engine shall be able to deliver full
load (load being mixed, steady and inductive) in 10 seconds time after start. The
engine speed shall not exceed 1500
r.p.m. The transient voltage variation is not to exceed 20% (For class G2) under any
step- load application for which the system is intended, up to full rated load,
recovering within +/- 2% within a few cycles. The engine construction shall be in
such a way as to allow for dismantling of any engine component for inspection or
repair without undue complication
i.e. without dismantling of other non-defective parts. The crank case shall be provided
with inspection windows.
Delete Sub-Clause 17.2.1-3(c)(i) and replace with the following Sub-Clause
(i) Radiator : built-in type with sufficient capacity to dissipate the total joules per hour
rejected by the engine cooling system at 100 % full load
Add to Sub-Clause 17.2.1-3(d)(i) the following new sub-clause:
- Engine shall be designed for operating with locally available diesel fuel, and have
documentation to verify this.
Delete Sub-Clause 17.2.1-3(d) (iii)
Delete Sub-Clause 17.2.1-3(f)(i) and replace with the following Sub-Clause:
(i) Exhaust pipes shall be of Schedule 40 black steel with minimum 2 hours fire
rating and of adequate size to ensure that back pressure does not exceed
the value specified by the manufacturer.
Add to Sub-Clause 17.2.1-3(f) the following new sub-clause:
(viii) Provide cleanouts at each change of direction of the exhaust pipe.
Add to Sub-Clause 17.2.1-3(g) the following
(iv) Provide adequate Soot filters. Contractor to submit characteristics,

calculations and details for Engineer approval.
Delete Sub-Clause 17.2.1-4 (d) and replace with the following Sub-Clause:
(d) the alternator unit shall be capable of delivering net specified rated output as
specified earlier. The rotor shall be capable of withstanding an over-speed test of
20% for 2 minutes
Add to Clause 17.2.1 the following new clause
6 Noise Reduction is to be achieved by approved methods at source of noise, inside the

room as well as at air inlet and outlet attenuators, with an overall sound level not
exceeding 55 dB(A) at 1 m in any direction outside the room and 90 dB(A) at 1m from
the enclosure of outdoor package generator , and maintaining the related various
frequencies in accordance with ISO Standards. Contractor to achieve noise reduction as
stipulated in the acoustic specification and report, and by using the required materials.
Add to Clause 17.2.2 the following new clause
3 Malfunction of any component of the engine, generator, fuel delivery system, or transfer
mechanisms should be annunciated on the fire alarm system annunciators as a trouble
condition.
17.2.3 Automatic Transfer Switch (A.T.S)
Delete Sub-Clause 17.2.3(1) and replace with the following Sub-Clause:
1 The ATS shall consist of 4 pole, 3 phase, break before make except for the neutral,
rated as shown on the drawings in accordance with QGEWC regulations, and
conforming to IEC 60947-6-1 or UL 1008 and to applicable standards.
Add the following Sub-clauses 17.2.3.2 (a) to (d)
(a) Manual Bypass Switches to combine manual and automatic transfer

operation with a drawout isolation system. Bypass switch is to consist of
non-automatic Kirk-key interlocked switches or circuit breakers, fully
rated, manually operated and rated for same loads as automatic transfer
switch.
(b) Bypass switch is to provide bypass to either normal or emergency source
by use of a selector switch and a permanently mounted external lever,
mechanically interlocked to prevent paralleling of sources.
(c) An engine start switch is to be provided to allow generator set to be started
when bypass is on emergency sources
(d) Bypass switch is to be of the make-before-break type. A dead source
lockout is to prevent any possibility of bypassing the load to an
unenergized source.
17.2.4 System Operation and

Performance Add to Clause 17.2.4 the
following
6 Automatic step loading system is to be provided for sequential application of emergency

loads with an adjustable (0-60 sec) time delay between each two steps. The system is to
comprise all necessary control equipment including under and over voltage sensing
relays, time delay relays, interface devices and wiring with respective circuit breakers.
Upon starting of the generator, the “Life safety” load is to be fed as a priority. Contractor
is to submit step loading schedule to the Engineer approval.
7 Load Shedding: An automatic microprocessor based load shedding system is to be

provided for load connection / disconnection according to load priorities and generator
power availability as described on the drawings.
8 Contractor to ensure proper interfaces for connection to BMS. Refer to Mechanical

Specifications for the monitored points via the BMS.
9 Contractor to provide a generator status indicator panel as required by NFPA. Panel to be

installed inside the related security monitoring room or other room subject to engineer
approval.
Add Sub-Clause 17.2.13: Outdoor Generator-Set Enclosure
1 Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 160

km/h. multiple panels are lockable and provide adequate access to components
requiring maintenance. Panels are removable by one person without tools. Instruments
and control are mounted within enclosure.
2 Description: Prefabricated or pre-engineered walk-in enclosure with the following

features:
(a) Construction: Galvanized steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed

housing erected on concrete foundation, corrosion proof and painted against all
weather conditions with life guarantee of 10 years minimum.
(b) Full accessibility to all parts of the complete set.
(c) Structural Design and Anchorage: Adequate to resist loads imposed by 160
km/h wind. In addition to other structural loads, including roof, seismic, and
auxiliary loads, are as indicated.
(d) Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled to prevent condensation.
(e) Louvers: Equipped with insect/rodent screen and filter arranged to permit air
circulation when engine is not running while excluding exterior dust and
rodents.
(f) Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
(g) Two-coats enamel finish over cleaned and primed surfaces.

(h) Ventilation: Louvers equipped with insect/rodent screen and filter

arranged to permit air circulation while excluding exterior dust and
rodents.
(i) Thermal Insulation: As required to maintain winter interior temperature

within limits required by components.
(j) Finish: Two-coat enamel finish over cleaned and primed surfaces.
3 Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
4 Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise

of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of
rated load for two hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in
system service conditions.
5 Louvers: shall prevent entry of rain and snow.
6 Automatic Dampers: dampers, if used, shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat

loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.
7 Interior Lights: With switch. Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within

housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for
external circuit supply.
8 Convenience Outlets: Factory wired. Arrange for external circuit supply.
Add Sub-Clause 17.2.14: Exchange of Information Between the Generator

Controllers and the BMS Management Level Network
1 The emergency generator shall have a microprocessor based monitoring and control
system with a data port to enable the exchange of information with the Management
level Network.
2 The generator controller shall exchange information with the Management Level
Network in a BACnet/IP format. BACnet Object format shall meet the requirements
of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135 in all respects. If the information is not available as
BACnet Objects provide a gateway and connect the gateway to the data port at the
generator controller. The gateway shall enable the transfer of information to and
from the Management Level Network as BACnet Objects meeting the requirements
of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135.
3 The BACnet port of the gateway or generator controller, as applicable, shall be

connected into the Management Level Network under the BMS scope of work.
Provide all necessary information to enable this function to be performed.
4 The IDs for the BACnet Objects that are to be transferred from the Management
Level Network to the generator controller shall be made available under the BMS
scope of work. Map the points into the generator controller.

5 Provide the IDs for the BACnet Objects that are to be transferred from the generator
controller to the Management Level Network and all other relevant information.
6 The digital communications interface between the emergency generator monitoring

and control system and the Management level Network shall enable, at minimum,
the following monitoring information to be transferred to the Management Level
Network:
(a) Generator set summary alarm (if available at the generator control centre the
BMS subcontractor may alternatively monitor this point via a volt free
contact)
(b) Generator set engine oil pressure
(c) Generator set high water temperature
(d) Generator set low/high fuel level of daytank
(e) Generator set low/high fuel level of main fuel tank
(f) Generator set battery voltage
(g) Generator set overcrank alarm
(h) Generator set
overspeed alarm (i)High oil
temperature
(j) Low fuel pressure alarm
(k) Generator set winding
temperature alarm (l)Generator set
bearing temperature alarm
(m) Generator set engine run status
(n) Low coolant level alarm
(o) Generator set loss of field alarm
(p) Engine fail to start alarm
(q) Generator failure shutdown
(r) Any generator pre-warning/shutdown condition
(s) All transfer switches status’
(t) Fuel oil transfer pump failure
(u) Fuel tank leaking
(v) Engine speed
(w) Flue gas temperature
(x) Phase-to-phase and phase-to neutral voltages
(y) Phase-to-phase currents
(z) Neutral
current (aa)
Frequency
(bb) Load
(kW)
(cc) Demand
(kVA) (dd)
Power factor
(ee) kWh
supplied (ff)
Hours
run
(gg) Load shed priority signal

(hh) Any other information available from the diesel generator controller as selected
by the Employer.
7 Refer to the mechanical BMS specification. Where reference is made herein to the
BMS scope of work it shall be the scope of work as detailed in that Section.
8 The generator controller shall send a message to the BMS on a scheduled basis. The
BMS shall generate an alarm if the message is not received or if the message is not
decipherable. This watchdog function must operate at a frequency that detects a
communications failure within a maximum of 15 seconds. Diagnostic software shall
be provided that will indicate where in the communications chain between the two
systems a failure occurred.
9 Provide all necessary documentation regarding the BACnet Objects that are to be
transferred to the Management Level Network. The documentation shall be of such
a standard that complete interoperability can be obtained between the systems
without a requirement for additional information.
10 Coordinate the work through the mechanical Contractor so as to ensure that all
requirements of the above are attained and so as to ensure that all appropriate
generator systems’ related data is available in a BACnet Object form to any Thin
Client workstation communicating with the Management Level Network and which
is associated with the terminal servers.
11 The rate of transfer of information between the generator controller and the BMS
shall be such that an event monitored on or initiated by the generator controller is
communicated to the BMS within 2 seconds and vice versa. Information requested
from the generator controller by an operator at a Thin Client workstation shall be
provided within 4 seconds.
12 All parties associated with the exchange of data between the generator controller and
the Management Level Network shall coordinate their work so as to ensure that the
intent and requirements of these specifications and the BMS specifications are
attained.
Add Sub-Clause 17.2.15: Manufacturers
17.2.15 Manufacturers
1 Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following or approved equal:
(a) Caterpillar (U.S.A.)

(b) Cummins (Onan) (U.S.A./ U.K.)
(c) Deutz (Germany)
(d) Kohler (U.S.A.)

(e) M.T.U. (Germany)

(f) MAN-B&W (Germany)
(g) Volvo (Sweden)
(h) Wartsila (Finland)
(i) Perkins (UK)
(j) Pet bow (UK)
17.3 INSTALLATION
Delete clause 17.2.9 and replace with the following new clause:
17.2.9 Site Quality Control
1 Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any loss or damage
to Engineer.
2 Supervised adjusting and pretesting: under supervision of factory-authorized service
representative, pretest all system functions, operations, and protective features.
Provide all instruments and equipment required for tests. Adjust to ensure operation
is according to Specifications. Load system using a variable resistive and reactive
load bank to be provided during testing only simulating kW, and power factor of
loads for which unit is rated.
3 Tests: provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
tests listed below according to manufacturer's recommendations upon completion of
installation of system. Use instruments bearing records of calibration within the last
12 months, traceable to approved standards, and adequate for making positive
observation of test results. Include the following tests:
(a) Insulation Tests: test generator windings using 500 V d.c. for units rated up to
250 volts and 1000 V d.c. for units rated between 250 and 600 volts. Verify
minimum insulation resistance is 25 megaohms for units up to 250 volts, and
100 megaohms for units 251 to 600 volts. Verify by dielectric absorption test
that polarization index levels are according to manufacturer's industry
standards approved
(b) Battery Tests: measure charging voltage and voltages between available
battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check
electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact
integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load
test for the battery. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of battery
after discharge. Verify measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
(c) Battery Charger Tests: verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing
and float- charging conditions.
(d) System Integrity Tests: methodically verify proper installation, connection,
and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during
system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
(e) Simulation of malfunctions to verify proper operation of local and remote
protective, alarm, and monitoring devices.
(f) Load Test: use variable load bank capable of simulating kVA, kW, and power
factor of load for which unit is rated. Run unit at 25, 50, and 75 percent of rated

capacity for 30 minutes each, and at 100 percent for 3 hours immediately
followed by 10 % overload test for 30 minutes. Make the 100-percent load run
at 80 percent power factor. Record voltage, frequency, load current, battery-
charging current, power output, oil pressure, and coolant temperature
periodically during the test.
(g) Vibration Baseline Test: measure amplitude for nominal frequency and for
frequencies 5, 10, 15, and 20 percent above and below nominal at each main
bearing cap. Vibration levels not exceeding those specified in NEMA MG1,
"Motors and Generators," are acceptable.
(h) Exhaust System Back-Pressure Test: use a manometer with a scale exceeding
40 inches of water. Connect to the exhaust line close to the engine exhaust
manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's
published allowable limits for the engine.
(i) Exhaust Emissions Test: conform to applicable government test criteria.
(j) Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: use recording oscilloscope to
measure voltage and frequency transients for 50-percent and 100-percent step-
load increases and decreases and verify that performance is as specified.
(k) Harmonic Content Tests: measure harmonic content of input and output
current under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that
harmonic content is within specified limits.
(l) Efficiency Tests: perform at 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of rated load.
4 Earthing resistance tests if any are to be carried out to verify specified requirements.
5 Load Banks: If actual loads are not made available at time of acceptance testing,
provide load banks to carry out complete test cycle of the system under loading and
switching conditions necessary to prove compliance with the Specification.
6 Piping System: Using carbon dioxide or nitrogen from pressurized cylinder, test
each system to
1.5 times normal operating pressure. Do not subject equipment, apparatus or to
pressure exceeding prescribed test pressure obtained from nameplate data or from
manufacturers' published data. Apply tests before connecting piping to equipment.
Remove or disconnect and blank off relief valves, instruments and devices that might
be damaged by test pressure. Maintain test pressure on system for 24 hours during
which time there is to be no noticeable drop in pressure. Check for leaks using soap
solution. Isolate source of pressure during testing.
7 Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
8 Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.
9 Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings
and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.
Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of
tests.

10 Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to
applicable standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results.
Make calibration records available for examination on request.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 18 – UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
The provision of QCS Part 18 of Section 21 is considered deleted and replaced by the
following requirements
18.1 GENERAL
18.1.1 SCOPE
1 This part specifies the requirements for Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems.
18.1.2 DESCRIPTION
1 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems (UPS) shall be provided as specified.
2 This Section includes, on-line, static-type, continuous duty, solid state, double
conversion uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system installation and static
transfer switch, comprising the following:
(a) Complete rectifier/charger-battery-inverter system with automatic static

switch and maintenance by-pass circuit,
(b) Input harmonic filter
(c) Output isolation transformer
(d) Power conditioner
(e) Input isolation transformer
(f) Interplant power and control cabling,
(g) Connection of normal a.c. power from assigned terminals/switch/circuit

breaker, as shown on the Drawings,
(h) Earthing system.
S21P18 - Page 1 of 19
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
(i) Connection to BMS system, where applicable, for full monitoring,

including proper interface digital software link for remote monitoring from
BMS for the points specified in this Section and as detailed in BMS
schedules and /or shown on the Drawings as a minimum
18.1.3 REFERENCES
1 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems shall be provided in accordance with

latest International Standards referred to therein.
2 Installation shall comply with the following standards:

(a) IEC 62040-1,2&3 “Uninterruptible Power Systems”.
(b) IEC 61000-3-4 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-4:
Limits - Limitation of emission of harmonic currents in low-voltage
power supply systems for equipment with rated current greater than 16
A”.
(c) IEC 61000-4 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Testing and
Measurement Techniques”.
(d) IEEE 485 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries
for Stationary Applications”.
(e) IEC 62310 “Static Transfer Systems”.
(f) IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-4:
Limits - Limitation of emission of harmonic currents in low-voltage
power supply systems for equipment with rated current greater than 16
A”.
(g) IEC 61000-3-3 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limits
- Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public
low-voltage supply systems, for equipment with rated current ≤16 A per
phase and not subject to conditional connection”.
(h) IEC 61000-6-2 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2:
Generic standards - Immunity for industrial environments”.
(i) IEC 61000-6-3 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-3:
Generic standards - Emission standard for residential, commercial and
light-industrial environments”
3 Materials and components shall be manufacturer's latest design, and Standards

used shall be approved prior to manufacture.
18.1.4 SUBMITTALS
1 Equipment Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including,
but not limited to, the following: manufacturers' catalogues, detailed description,
compliance with the Standards, dimensions and weights, system operation,
operating characteristics, methods of operation, protective and control
provisions, heat losses, ambient conditions and limitations on electronic
components, inverter cut-off voltage, battery calculation to IEEE 485, etc.
beyond which such components may suffer partial or permanent damage.
S21P18 - Page 2 of 19
2 Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but
not limited to, the following:
(a) Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control
and indicating devices and instruments, exact dimensions and weights,
cabling etc.
(b) One-line diagram with ratings of each piece of equipment, cabling,

grounding etc.
(c) Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and the like.
(d) Installation and mounting details.
(e) Batteries arrangement and mounting details.

manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
4 Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply

with requirements.
5 Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article
6 Test Certificates: Submit type test and routine test certificates. System shall
undergo a functional and load test program approved by the Engineer, and shall
undergo a minimum 8 hours 'burn-in' test, under site simulated conditions, prior
to shipment.
7 Field Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance
requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do
not agree.
8 Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in maintenance manuals specified.

Include the following and to the satisfaction of Employer’s requirements:
(a) Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being

stored at Project site for ready access.
(b) Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and
abnormal conditions.
1 Manufacturer’s Certification: The manufacturer shall be specialized in

manufacturing of on line, double conversion three phase UPS modules specified
in this document with a minimum of twenty years documented worldwide
S21P18 - Page 3 of 19
experience and shall have a nationwide first party service organization. The
manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall design to internationally
accepted standard.
2 Factory Testing: Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a

documented test procedure to test all functions of the UPS modules and batteries
(via a discharge test), when supplied by the UPS manufacturer and guarantee
compliance with the specification. The manufacturer shall provide a copy of the
test report upon request. Tests shall comply with IEC 62040-3 and include but
not necessarily limited to the following:
(a) Light load test.
(b) AC input failure test.
(c) AC input return test.
(d) Transfer test.
(e) Full load test.
(f) UPS efficiency test.
(g) Unbalanced load test.
(h) Balanced load test.
(i) Short-circuit test.
(j) Harmonic components test.
3 Materials and Assemblies: All materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be
new, of current manufacture, and have not been in prior service, except as
required during factory testing. All active electronic devices shall be solid state
and not exceed the manufacturers recommended specified tolerances for
temperature or current to ensure maximum reliability. All semiconductor devices
shall be sealed. All relays shall be provided with dust covers. The manufacturer
shall conduct inspection on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final
products.
4 Factory Tests: Design tests (type tests), special tests, and routine tests to conform
to referenced standards.
5 Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized

representative of UPS manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of
units required for this Project.
6 Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer

has a locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon
S21P18 - Page 4 of 19
for professional advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can
immediately supply spare parts to support day to day and emergency
maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy the Engineer may disqualify a
manufacturer.
7 Materials and components shall be manufacturer's latest design, and Standards

used shall be approved prior to manufacture
8 Temperature Limits within which equipment is to be designed to operate are zero

to +40 deg. C at 100% rated output. Equipment is to be capable of operating
under up to 55 deg. C ambient conditions with derating factor of 1.25% per deg.
C over 40 deg. C.
9 Test Certificates: submit type test and routine test certificates. System is to
undergo a functional and load test program approved by the Engineer, and is to
undergo a minimum 72 hours 'burn-in' test, under site simulated conditions, prior
to shipment.
18.1.6 WARRANTY
1 Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the
manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment
specified in this section during the specified warranty period
(a) Warranty Period: Provide 1 year warranty from date of substantial

completion for all equipment specified in this Section. Batteries warranty
shall be for 10 years.
18.1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1 Spare Parts: Provide and deliver to client stores manufacturer's recommended

spare parts for one year operation of UPS system. Spare parts shall include as a
minimum complete set of fuses for all types and ratings along with cooling fans.
2 Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for five years operation together with
current prices.
3 Tools and Instruments: provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
18.1.8 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
1 Factory testing units of at least one UPS system of each rating to be supplied shall
be witnessed by the Engineer. Selection of UPS system for witness test shall be
randomly carried out by the Engineer. Witness test shall include complete
routine and function testing on all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and
program shall be submitted for approval prior to test conduction. Factory witness
test shall include for business class air tickets, five stars Hotel full
accommodation, transportation and all test expenses for two persons from the
S21P18 - Page 5 of 19
Engineer’s/ Employer’s side.
18.1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
1 Maintenance Contract: provide an annual maintenance contract for 1 year,

available after substantial completion of the work, covering routine service and
emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply of necessary
standard spare parts.
2 Provide quarterly preventive maintenance and testing during normal working

hours of all UPS electronics and battery systems.
3 Submit quarterly test reports indicating operating conditions of all components.
18.2 PRODUCTS
18.2.1 GENERAL
1 Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission Uninterruptible Power

Supply Systems as specified.
2 The product selected and proposed shall include manufacturer’s instructions that
indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by the product
testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
18.2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1 System: UPS system shall be online, continuous duty, double conversion, class
VFI-SS-111 to IEC 62040-3.
2 System is to be of the latest technology, programmable type, microprocessor

based with CPU and memory capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status
change, etc. The UPS shall permit setting parameters for the environment and
type of usage to be specified by the Engineer. UPS shall be of the self-diagnostic
type, equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system operation. The
self-test shall identify the parts of the UPS requiring repair in case of a fault. The
system shall be provided with multi-password levels to limit access to software
and data.
3 General: system is to be interposed between normal a.c. power supply and

critical load, to secure a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-
up for the following durations (based on full UPS load) in case of failure of
normal a.c. supply and maintain output voltage, frequency and phase deviation
within specified tolerances:
(a) 15 min. back-up time for server, telecom equipment, computer and
general building equipment.
S21P18 - Page 6 of 19
(b) 60 min. back-up time for CCTV system.
4 System shall be 100% fully rated, single, dual or “n+1” multi-unit parallel
redundant for number and capacity as shown on drawings; which implies
complete UPS unit(s) with two sets of battery strings operating in parallel for
each unit for ratings up to 80 kVA and two to four sets of battery strings in
parallel for each unit for ratings above 80 kVA unless otherwise recommended
by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. UPS shall be maintained
(continuously supplying load through the inverter), with automatic no-break
transfer to or retransfer from alternate source (bypass) in case of failure or
overload on rectifier- battery-inverter system. System shall employ decentralized
bypass technique so that each UPS unit shall be provided with its own static
bypass transfer switch. Each UPS unit shall be provided with its own master
controller. Master and slave configuration is not acceptable.
5 Normal a.c. Power Supply will be available from one protected source fed from
either normal a.c. network or from alternate a.c. normal supply and in-house
stand-by diesel generator set as shown on the Drawings. Characteristics of output
of generator set and UPS system are to be coordinated for best results. Study
and advise on special requirements of generator characteristic output and
stability.
6 Redundant Systems: Systems: have parallel units interconnected so that normal

AC power feeds two or more inverters in parallel, to give required power output
at critical load. Load sharing circuits shall ensure real and reactive load sharing
and provide reverse power protection between parallel units. Full rated capacity
of UPS, in case of failure of one of the rectifiers or one of the inverter units shall
be equally shared by other healthy units without overloading these units or
disturbing operation.
7 Separate filters shall be provided for each rectifier/charger unit separately to

limit the THD to less than 7% this applies for all load currents from 25 to 100%
of full load.
8 Noise level of complete assembly is not to exceed 65 dB(A) for UPSs up to

125kVA, 70 dB(A) for UPSs up to 220kVA or 70-75 dB(A) for UPSs up to
500kVA measured at 1.0 m distance anywhere within UPS room.
9 System Overall Efficiency is not to be less than 92 % at full load and 90% at half
load for (10-40) kVA system, and 93% at full load and 91% at half load for (60-
500) kVA system.
18.2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
1 Under Normal Conditions inverter(s) are to be synchronized and phase locked

to normal
a.c. supply. Upon loss of normal a.c. supply, battery is to continue supply of no-
break power to inverters, which then free-run on self- generated UPS frequency
reference. Upon restoration of normal a.c. supply, inverters are to re-synchronize
to a.c. line, gradually (at slew rate), if frequency and voltage deviation of normal
S21P18 - Page 7 of 19
a.c. supply is within preset limits specified.
2 Automatic Transfer to Bypass: static transfer switch is to automatically transfer

critical (100%) load from inverter to by-pass source (which is normal a.c.
supply) if:
(a) Inverter output voltage characteristics fall outside specified limits,
(b) Critical load exceeds overload rating of UPS,
(c) Over-temperature is sensed,
(d) Manual (push button) command is given.
Transfer to by-pass mode is to be inhibited, and an alarm initiated if voltage,

frequency and/or phase shift of bypass power is outside acceptable
tolerances.
3 Re-Transfer to Inverter: re-transfer of critical load from auto by-pass source to

inverter (UPS mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:
(a) Inverter output voltage characteristics return to within specified tolerances,
(b) Original load current reduces to within rated full load capacity of UPS,
(c) Re-transfer selector switch is in automatic position.
4 Lock-Out Feature is to inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside

preset tolerances or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase
locked or if UPS output is not restored to normal conditions.
5 Normal Power Restored: When normal power is restored following an outage,

rectifier/charger shall initially draw no power except for transformer in-rush
current and shall gradually continue providing power to the inverter and
recharging the battery. After approximately 15 seconds (walk-in time), input
power requirements shall rise to power level to drive critical load and recharge
battery.
6 Automatic Restart: When normal power is restored to normal conditions

following an outage and after a complete battery discharge, the UPS shall
automatically restart and resume supplying power to the connected load via the
inverter
7 Provide maintenance disconnecting switch fully rated to carry the full load input
current of the UPS.
S21P18 - Page 8 of 19
18.2.4 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
1 RECTIFIER/CHARGER INPUT:
(a) Nominal input voltage : 415 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50
Hz
(b) Voltage input variation : +10%, -15% from nominal
(c) Frequency : +/-5% from nominal

(d) Transformer exciting less than 600%
current In Rush : nominal current
(e) Power factor : 0.9 lagging at full load
and nominal input
voltage
(f) Total harmonic feedback : maximum 7 % (total)
(g) Current limiting : 115% max. of that required
to operate inverters and
charge
battery at full rated load,
adjustment possible
between
100% and 125%
(h) Walk-in current in rush : 25% to 100% FLC in 15 seconds
(i) Active Harmonic filter : to be provided
2 RECTIFIER/CHARGER OUTPUT:
(a) Float and equalize operation adjustable, automatic, compatible

: with battery
(b) Regulation : +/-1% max. from 0-100% load
(c) Ripple : +/-2% rms. (0 to 100% resistive load
3 STATIC INVERTERS:
(a) Net system power As shown on drawings with

load power output rating, nominal : factor 0.8-lag.
(b) Nominal output voltage: : 415 V a.c., 50 Hz, 3-phase,

4-wire, adjustable +/-5% of nominal
(c) Output voltage regulation:
(i) balanced load : +/- 2% (0 - 100% load)
S21P18 - Page 9 of 19
(ii) unbalanced load

(3-phase output only) : +/- 3% (at 100% unbalance)
(d) Phase displacement (for : 120 deg. (+/-5 deg.)

3-phase output system only) at 100% load unbalance
(e) Output voltage waveform : 5% max. total harmonic

3% max. single harmonic
(f) Frequency stability : normally synchornized to input

line frequency over
+/- 10 % adjustable
range; free running at
+/-0.5% over full
battery voltage
variation, load and
p.f. range; slew rate
not to exceed 0.1
Hz/sec
(g) Dynamic output voltage +/- 10% max. recovering

tolerance sudden full load application or to within 1% in less
than removal : 100 milliseconds
(h) Over-load rating : 125% for 10

minutes
150% for 60
seconds
1000% for 5
cycles 105%
continuous.
(i) Load crest factor without derating (Ipk/Irms):3:1
4 AUTOMATIC STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH:
(a) Transfer time : 150 micro-second (overlapping) maximum
(b) Total
sensing
and
transfer/ret
ransfer
time : 2 milliseconds, maximum
(c) Retransfer mode : automatic/inhibit (selectable)
(d) Retransfer delay : 2 - 32 sec. in auto mode (selectable)
S21P18 - Page 10 of 19
(e) Transfer point : +/-10% of nominal output voltage

(adjustable)
(f) Retransfer point : +/-5% of nominal output voltage (adjustable)
(g) Transfer inhibit point : +/-20% of nominal output voltage

(adjustable)
(h) Bypass circuit shall be provided with backfeed protection to IEC 62040-1
through internal backfeed contactor to prevent feedback to the mains from
the inverter in case of mains failure and a fault in bypass circuit
18.2.5 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
1 Materials and Parts: Electronic devices shall be solid state, hermetically sealed.
Indicator lights shall be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions
shall be seen by operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors.
Power connections and remote alarm and control wiring shall be accessible at
terminal boards. Power semi- conductors shall be fused. Metal surfaces
including copper and aluminium heat sinks and busbars shall be treated with
permanent protective coating. Electro-mechanical power devices and relays
shall be vacuum impregnated, insulated for maximum operating voltage
conditions, and enclosed in dust-tight enclosures. Cables shall be fire resistant
high temperature grade.
2 UPS shall be provided with a socket connection for a serial interface to be linked
to a portable PC, to a modem or to the BMS system for communication with the
UPS. It shall enable interrogation of the UPS about status, faults, data stored,
reprogramming, etc.
3 Housing: equipment is to be housed in a free-standing, well ventilated, totally

enclosed modular assembly with front accessible lockable doors, giving easy
access for maintenance, inspection and adjustments, and with provisions for
handling and lifting during and after installation. Enclosures are to be suitable
for industrial, tropical environments; protection IP21 to IEC 60947-1 and IEC
60529, of galvanized sheet steel construction treated against corrosion and with
light grey RAL7032 baked paint or epoxy finish to approved standard.
4 Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made
of bakelite or Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.
5 Sub-Assemblies and components are to be mounted on pull- out and/or swing-

out trays, of the plug-in type where possible. Where it is not possible to mount
components in pull-out or swing-out trays, they are to be easily accessible inside
the enclosure. Assemblies shall be replaceable without requiring any
adjustments or settings in the UPS.
6 Ventilation: an integral, forced-air, cooling system is to be provided in each UPS
S21P18 - Page 11 of 19
module to remove dissipated heat efficiently, and ensure components operate

within environmental ratings. Air is to enter bottom of cabinet through
replaceable filters, and exhaust through the top. At least two fans are to be
provided for ventilating each enclosure. No degradation of performance is to
occur in the event of a single fan failure. Temperature sensors, mounted on
semi-conductor heat sinks, are to initiate alarm if maximum working temperature
is exceeded.
7 Rectifier/Charger Unit is to employ IGBT technology and shall have mainline

circuit breaker, and shall be automatic with soft start-up (walk-in) feature, using
IGBT with vector control design or silicon controlled rectifiers (SCR) with
control logic circuitry to control firing angles to SCR to suit power output
requirements and protect against primary power surges, lightning transients,
under-voltage and over-voltage conditions. Output shall be passed through LC
filters to DC bus. The rectifier shall provide high quality DC power and shall
have a sinusoidal input AC current on each phase with low harmonic content,
limiting THD on the UPS input. Rectifier assembly shall be constructed of
modular design to facilitate rapid maintenance.
8 Rectifier/charger unit shall be microprocessor based and capable of supplying

full load power to inverter, and to charge the battery from a discharge condition
to 90% charge within ten to twelve hours, and maintain full charge at floating
voltage until next operation. The rectifier/battery charger shall employ input AC
current limiting as well as battery charge current limiting for battery protection.
Charger current shall be voltage regulated and current limited. The control of the
optimum charging method shall be completely controlled by the charger’s
microprocessor.
9 Inverter shall employ IGBT technology in three leg, vector control or high
frequency switching and real time control technique, and complete with output
transformer and filters. Inverter start-up shall be automatic, to reach full voltage
within milliseconds and deliver power to the load within 2 seconds. Inverter shall
start at any load including short-circuit. Inverter shall be provided with an
inverter output transformer. For UPS ratings 200kVA and below transformer-
less technique may be used, subject to Engineer’s approval.
10 Inverter oscillator shall operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within
specified tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase-locking to
normal power supply frequency. When inverter is phase-locked to normal power
supply, and latter fails, oscillator shall automatically revert to free running state
(quartz oscillator) and maintain specified limits.
11 Modular UPS system where shown on the Drawings shall consist of multiple
units with equal capacities, each not exceeding 50 kVA, connected in parallel
architecture and share one common frame or more according to the required
number of modules, each frame shall have common input and output busses and
separate battery system consisting of two parallel strings as a minimum. Modular
UPS system shall be online, double conversion, IGBT rectifier, IGBT inverter
with transformerless technique. The modular UPS system shall have the
S21P18 - Page 12 of 19
following features as a minimum:
(a) Each module shall be provided with fully rated static and maintenance
bypass.
(b) The modular system shall be expandable by adding modules without
shutting down the system (hot pluggable).
(c) Modules shall be replaceable without shutting down the system during the
replacement process (hot swappable).
(d) The modular system shall not have a single point of failure. Fault on any
of the modules shall not affect the whole system.
(e) Sufficient space for the number modules for future expansion shall be
provided as shown on the Drawings.
(f) Redundancy, if required on the Drawings, shall be achieved by adding a
number of modules with total power capacity shown on the Drawings.
(g) Battery capacity shall be expandable by adding independent battery strings
to cater for the increase in the system power. Adding battery strings shall
be done without shutting down the system
12 Automatic static bypass transfer switch shall be continuously rated at full load
(100% FL), hybrid type (make-before-break), solid state transfer device with
logic thyristor assembly isolatable or completely removable for maintenance.
When signal to close switch is initiated, thyristors shall instantaneously conduct
power to prevent deviations and breaks in load voltage outside specified
tolerances.
13 Maintenance By-Pass Switching: Manual (make-before- break) by-pass switch

shall allow load to be transferred to by-pass source without interruption of
output, and provide isolation of UPS and static switch during maintenance. Test
position shall permit testing of static switch while load is being fed from bypass
power circuit. Transfer inhibited warning circuit shall be provided to give an
alarm indication in case by-pass supply is beyond acceptable tolerances.
14 Rectifier input and bypass isolating transformers shall be provided for all UPS
ratings 80 kVA and above
15 UPS inverter output, IGBT rectifier input and bypass input transformers shall be
two-winding type.
16 Transformers shall be galvanically isolated dry-type, Class H insulated, with

metallic electrostatic shielding, and high efficiency (98% or higher) type.
Transformers shall be installed either within the UPS enclosure or in a separate
enclosure as applicable and approved by engineer.
17 Protection: UPS modules shall have built-in or inherent electronic current-

limiting protection against permanent self damage effective down to short-
circuits. Fast acting, current limiting devices shall protect against failure of any
solid state component. Internal failure in any UPS module shall cause immediate
isolation from input and output by operation of static interrupters or causing shut
down of faulty module. Protection shall be provided against, but is not limited
S21P18 - Page 13 of 19
to, the following:
(a) Input over and under voltage and power line surges,
(b) Output over voltage and voltage surges,
(c) Sudden abnormal changes in output load conditions,
(d) Short-circuits at output terminals,
(e) Inverter and rectifier overcurrent,
(f) Auxiliary control circuit overcurrent.
18 UPS Bypass and Output Neutral: is to be designed to continuously carry twice

the full load phase current.
19 Input Filter Disconnection: UPS control system is to disconnect the input filters
in case of interruption of utility power supply failure while the UPS is operating
at light loads (less than 25%).
20 Battery: High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear
plastic encased, sealed lead- acid (gas recombination) type cells with
automatically re-closing explosion proof safety vents. Electrolyte specific
gravity shall not exceed 1.25 when fully charged at 25 deg. C. Ampere-hour
rating shall be sufficient for emergency period specified with all inverters
operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.75 V per
cell. Cells shall be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life shall
not be less than 10 years, with a capacity drop down to not less than 80% under
normal expected service.
21 Battery Cabinet: shall be factory assembled from UPS manufacturer, of welded

construction and formed from heavy gauge steel with added supports to retain
cabinet squareness and integrity during harsh shipping and handling conditions,
Adjustable battery rails or trays shall be provided to allow for multiple battery
configurations and facilitate battery upgrades in the future, Heavy duty polyester
strapping material shall be used to tie down batteries, Cabling shall be routed
down the sides of the cabinet, away from the front of the batteries allowing full
access for easy maintenance, series wiring shall be routed efficiently and neatly
with tier to tier jumpers located at front batteries allowing for safe and easy
maintenance, Cabinets shall be top coated with a hybrid epoxy-polyester powder
coat and oven cured for a chip and corrosion resistant long lasting finish, All
circuit breakers used on the cabinets shall be rated to 600 VDC. Each battery
string shall be provided with its own circuit breaker for the individual string fault
protection and disconnecting means. Battery cabinet enclosure degree of
protection shall be IP 20.
S21P18 - Page 14 of 19
22 Battery checking system shall be provided for each UPS to check the battery
continuity and improve life time through regular automatic test and
measurements for battery status, voltage and current. System shall provide a
predictive and automatic diagnostics of battery health, optimize the recharge
time and provide an advance warning about the end of battery life upon detection
of a weak / defective battery.
23 The battery cells age, at the time of delivery into site, shall be less than three
months.
24 Battery calculations according to IEEE 485 shall be carried out by UPS supplier
and submitted for approval, based on the following:
(a) Nominal active power factor of not less than 0.8 Lag.
(b) Temperature factor for operation at 25 Deg C.
(c) Aging factor of 1.25.
(d) Design margin factor of 1.15.
(e) Recharge time up to 90% of its capacity within 10 to 12 hours.
25 Mimic Panel: UPS assembly is to include a mimic diagram with digital and LED
displays, indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.
26 Local Panel Instruments are to include at least the following (digital readings):
(a) Inverter input voltmeter, measuring d.c. bus volts,
(b) Battery current: measuring charge / discharge currents,

(c) A.C. voltmeter to measure inverter output voltage, normal supply voltage
or system output,
(d) UPS output ammeter and frequency meter
(e) Remaining battery backup time.
(f) Input voltages.
(g) Input current.
(h) Total power
(i) Total harmonic distortion on input feedback current (THDi).
(j) Total harmonic distortion on input voltage (THDv)
27 Local Panel Indicators are to include at least the following:
(a) System on battery supply,
(b) Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output

and normal
S21P18 - Page 15 of 19
a.c. supply input,
(c) Static switch on normal a.c. supply (bypass mode),
(d) Static switch inhibited,
(e) Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for

transformers, rectifier/charger and inverter (alarm to automatically
transfer load to by-pass circuit),
(f) Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified

rating failure of any stage, d.c. bus earth fault, and inverter output earth
fault.
28 Local Built-In Controls are to include at least the following:
(a) Inverter on/off,
(b) Battery input circuit breaker,
(c) Auto/manual reset-test switch,
(d) Manual reset switch,
(e) Hybrid switch transfer test push-button,
(f) Re-transfer auto/inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of

load to inverter after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-
transfer of load to inverter until hybrid switch is in auto-mode,
(g) Battery automatic/equalize recharge timer, 0 - 30 hours adjustable, with

automatic/boost/equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel
only and to be used only with manufacturer's recommendation for type of
battery specified),
(h) Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices

(accessible to maintenance personnel only),
(i) Indicator test/reset switch,
(j) Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only),
(k) Alarm test-accept-reset.
29 Local Built-In Alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if

required, are to include at least the following:
(a) Fan failure: alarm only,
S21P18 - Page 16 of 19
(b) Over temperature: alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a
safe preset period,
(c) D.C. volts out of limits: alarm with indication,
(d) Fuse failure: alarm,
(e) Battery on load/disconnected: alarm only,
(f) Overloads: alarm only with a trip command if prolonged, for each
rectifier/inverter unit,
(g) Normal A.C. supply failure: alarm only,
(h) Hybrid switch operation to by-pass mode: alarm only,
(i) Low and high output voltage: alarm only.
30 Input active harmonic filter shall be provided to limit input current harmonic
distortion to less than 7% THD at all load currents from 0 to 100% of full load
and improve power factor to not less than 0.9. The input filter shall be mounted
inside the UPS cabinet or in a separate enclosure.
18.3 INSTALLATION
18.3.1 GENERAL
1 Equipment Bases: ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
installation of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for
fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
2 Built-In Items: ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves
for passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations,
bases or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are
properly installed.
3 Tools: use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for

installations, particularly in making connections and adjustments.
4 Earthing: provide direct interference free earthing circuit in accordance with Part
22 of the Specification.
5 Supervision: carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a

qualified technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and
putting into satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the
factory.
S21P18 - Page 17 of 19
18.3.2 BATTERY EQUALIZATION
1 Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Record individual-cell voltages.
18.3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1 Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to

manufacturer's written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition
and performance of each component of the UPS:
(a) Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:
(i) Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.

(ii) Component type and labeling verification.
(iii) Ratings of installed components.
(b) Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective
and alarm functions.
(c) Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.
2 Power Supply Output Disturbance: Provide microprocessor based instrument,

and monitor and record power supply output disturbance of voltage and
frequency. Instrument details are to be submitted for approval.
3 Test Periods are to be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by Engineer,

to verify and obtain realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and
switching conditions within the criteria specified.
4 Data logging is to include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes
and spike bursts, drop-outs, high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and
storage on cassette tape for subsequent re-entry into instrument's memory for
display or print-out.
5 Tests are to include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload
condition, and measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave
shape, and harmonic content and frequency stability.
6 Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.
7 Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests

and inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and
other test and inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.
18.3.4 CLEANING
1 On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other

spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original
S21P18 - Page 18 of 19
finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended

by manufacturer.
18.3.5 ADJUSTING
1 After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match
original finish.
18.3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's

maintenance personnel. Include a minimum of 8 hours of training in operation
and maintenance. Provide both classroom training and hands-on equipment
operation.
2 Schedule training with the Employer with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF PART
S21P18 - Page 19 of 19
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 21 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION
following requirements.
21.1 GENERAL
21.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract apply to this Section.
21.1.2 SUMMARY
1 This Section includes lightning protection for buildings and associated structures
and includes requirements for lightning protection systems components
including, but not limited to, the following:
(a) Air Termination Network.

(b) Connections to reinforcing bars of structures.
(c) Earth Termination Network.
(d) Bonding.
(e) Surge Protection Device (SPD).
(f) Exothermic Welding.
(g) Accessories.
2 Related Sections include the following:
(a) Part 1 General Provisions for Electrical Installations

(b) Part 2 LV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s)
(c) Part 7 Conduits and Conduit Boxes
(d) Part 9 Cable Trays
(e) Part 6 Cables and Small Wiring
21.1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 Product Data (for lightning protection):
LIGHTNING PROTECTION S21P21 - Page 1 of 15

a. Submit data for air terminals, fasteners, test links earth point and rods,
connectors, wall inserts and bolts and any accessories forming part of the
lightning protective system.
2 Product Data: (For each type of SDP products):
(a) Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
(b) Copy of type test certificate in accordance with IEC 61643.
3 Shop Drawings: Detail the lightning protection system, including air-terminal

locations, conductor routing and connections, and bonding and earthing locations
and provisions. Include indications for use of raceway and sleeves, and data on
how concealment requirements will be met.
4 Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate nature of soil, special earthing

arrangements, date and particulars of additives to soil or in bore-holes if used,
test conditions and results obtained.
5 Records: Submit the following:
(c) Actual layout and components of the system.

(d) Nature of soil and characteristics and any special earthing arrangement.
(e) Test conditions and results.

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects/engineers and owners, and other information specified or required by
Engineer.
7 Energy coordination study between SPDs installed at different levels.
8 Field quality-control reports.
9 Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
10 Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals and to the

satisfaction of Employer’ requirements.
1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in

installing lightning protection systems similar in material, design and extent to
those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in installations with
a record of successful in-service performance.

2 Standards: Comply with the following standards::
a. IEC 62305 "Protection against Lightning".
b. IEC 62561 "Lightning Protection System
Components". c. IEC 61643-11.
d. BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations –
Latest Edition). e. IEC 61000-6-3.
3 Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of

surge protective devices, of types and capacities required, and whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
As an alternative, SPDs in compliance with UL 1449 may be

considered subject to Engineer’s approval.
21.1.5 COORDINATION
1 Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building

systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and
building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection
components, and building finishes.
21.1.6 TERMS USED
1 The following terms used on Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and
may be used interchangeably:
(a) "Earth" and "Ground".

(b) "Earthing" and "Grounding".
21.1.7 Warranty

(a) Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion. (5 years

extended warranty for the corrosion of external materials)

21.2 PRODUCTS
21.2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1 Provide lightning protection system materials and components that comply with
IEC 62561 and with approved manufacturer's standard design, in accordance
with published product information and the Standards specified in this Section.
2 Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, conductor straps,

fasteners, earthing plates, earthing rods, rod clamps, splicers and other
components required for a complete system that meets the Standards specified in
this Section.
3 Roof Conductors: 70 mm2 soft drawn stranded copper cable covered with PVC
of approved color or bare, high conductivity, annealed copper strip, 25 x 3 mm
4 Earth Rod: 17 mm diameter high strength, low carbon steel core of high tensile
strength (600 N/mm2), with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper molecularly bonded
into steel core, 0.25 mm minimum thickness.
(a) Driving Head: High strength steel.

(b) Couplings: Long length silicon bronze, internally threaded.
(c) Threads: Rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of copper and strength.
(d) Minimum Length of Rod: 2.4 m, extendible as necessary.
5 Inspection (Earth) Pit: Precast concrete construction of dimensions shown on

Drawings, with heavy duty cover and brass plate engraved 'Earth Pit Below' inset
in cover.
(a) Provide one pit for each earth rod.
6 Bonding Conductors: High conductivity, bare annealed copper tape, 20 x 3 mm

minimum dimensions, or 50 mm2 soft drawn stranded copper cable covered with
PVC of approved color.
7 Accessories: Supports, joints, fasteners, clamps, bonds, test links, etc., are to be
copper or copper alloy and specially manufactured for the purpose. Clamps and
connectors are to be specifically designed and sized for clamping and connecting
to the various shapes and surfaces of bonded metalwork. Provide bimetallic
connectors between different materials. Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws
and bolts will not be accepted on copper installations.
8 Flexible Bonding Straps: Flexible annealed copper braid, 20 x 3 mm, suitable for
bonding flat surfaces, cut to length required and with drilled flat terminals for
bolted connections. Provide special bimetallic alloy terminals for joining to
aluminum conductive parts.
9 Surge Protection Device (SPD): containing at least one non-linear component

intended to limit transient overvoltages and divert surge currents.

21.2.2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
1 Flat Concrete Roofed Buildings Air Termination Network: Provide horizontal

conductors around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges of roofs that
are higher than adjacent parts, unless they fall in zone of protection of a higher
conductor. Install horizontal conductors in a mesh of proper size for the
protection level required, as shown on drawings. Join all elements of lightning
protective system together. Additionally, provide air termination horizontal
loops around building façade for structures above 60m and 120m as per the
standard requirement or as shown on drawings; bonded to steel reinforcement
and exposed metal parts as specified and required by the standard.
2 Use Air Rods (Finials/Terminals) in the air termination network, dimensions

as per the code requirements; as necessary and/or shown on drawings.
3 Down Conductors: Connect air termination network to earth via steel

reinforcement of concrete structure, at the positions shown on Drawings
and in conformity with specified Standards for down conductors. Ensure
good contact between reinforcing bars during construction, by fixing the
bars with tying wire, for both vertical to vertical bars, and horizontal to
vertical bars.
4 Earth Termination: Provide exposed earth bonding points, inset into concrete
base of every column above earth level, bonded internally to reinforcing bars and
externally to the earth electrode (refer to Part 22 "Earthing and Bonding").
Securely bond earth bonding points to reinforcing bars using bar clamps, and
provide high quality copper terminal plate with at least 4 threaded studs for
bonding and for isolating foundation system for testing.
5 Provide reference earth electrode for testing purposes. It shall be possible to

completely isolate this electrode from the earth termination network for testing
footing/earth ring resistance at various positions. This electrode shall be provided
in an earth pit with special marking.
6 Bonding: Bond all metalwork in or on outside of structure to the lightning

protection system roof conductors or to exposed earthing points bonded to
reinforcing bars in the structure. Metalwork includes but is not necessarily
limited to: water pipes, tanks, sign structure, communication supports, metal
sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations, vents, exterior metal
staircases, metal window frames, vent pipes, doors or door frames and main
earthing terminal or bar of electrical installations.
7 Bond metal leaving or entering a structure (having system continuity such as

water piping, etc.), as follows:
(a) As directly as possible to the earth termination.

(b) Near point at which service enters or leaves the structure.
(c) At nearest earth point or at nearest main earthing terminal or bar of
protective earthing system.

If direct bonding is not acceptable by authorities and/or parties concerned,

SPDs shall be used
8 Under no circumstances shall lightning protection electrodes be connected to any

QGEWC earthing electrodes. A minimum distance of 7 meters shall be provided
between any lightning earth electrode and a QGEWC earth electrodes.
21.2.3 SURGE PROTECTION
1 DEFINITIONS
a. In: Nominal discharge current.
b. Iimp: Impulse current.
c. Imax: Maximum discharge current.
d. Icw: Combination wave generator short-circuit current.
e. Uc: Maximum continuous operating voltage.
f. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant

non-ohmic current-voltage characteristic.
g. GDT: Gas discharge tube.
h. SAD: Silicon avalanche diode.
i. SPD: Surge protective device.
j. TOV: Temporary overvoltage.
k. Up: Voltage protection level.
l. Uoc: Open circuit voltage.
m. UT: Temporary overvoltage test value.
2 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS
a. Maximum continuous operating voltage (Uc) of the SPD shall be equal to

110% of the nominal system voltage as a minimum or the next higher
rating to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary r.m.s
overvoltage (swell conditions), unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
b. The SPD shall be suitable for a supply main’s frequency between 47 Hz

and 63 Hz.

c. All installed SPDs shall be connected in common mode to eliminate

overvoltage between each phase and earth and between neutral and
earth, unless otherwise specified.
d. SPDs shall have the following features and accessories:

1) Integral or external fused-disconnect switch. Fuses shall be
current limiting type to IEC 60269 with short circuit
interrupting capacity 120 kA as a minimum.
2) Indicator light display for protection status and end of life.
3) Control interface: SPD shall be equipped with field-bus
module for monitoring and displaying the SPD status and
alarms from the BMS/SCADA. Coordinate with
BMS/SCADA for the interface protocol to be adapted and
provide the necessary adapter modules accordingly.
4) Surge counter.
e. SPDs shall comply with IEC 61000-6-3 For EMC.
f. SPDs installed adjacent to the protected equipment shall have

galvanized and electrostatic painted enclosure with IP 54 degree of
protection to IEC 60529 and provided with suitable DIN rails for SPD
and fused-disconnect switch fixation, unless otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
g. Generally, SPDs shall be installed as follows, unless otherwise specified

or shown on the Drawings:
1) Class I+II SPDs shall be installed at:
a) Incomer(s) of all LV(s).
b) Incomer(s) of ELV(s) / Synchronization switchboards.
c) Incomer of all MCC(s) fed directly from transformer.
d) Utility incomer of ATS(s) fed directly from transformer.
2) Class I SPDs shall be installed at:
a) Roof mounted / outdoor equipment control
panel, unless otherwise recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
3) Class II SPDs shall be installed at:
a) Sub-Main Distribution Boards.
b) Utility incomer of ATS(s) fed from main
distribution board / distribution panels.
c) Incomer of MCCs / MCPs fed from main
distribution board / distribution panels.
d) Foundation distribution cabinets for data centers.
4) Class III SPDs shall be installed at:
a) Power distribution units for data centers.
b) Final circuit distribution boards feeding sensitive
equipment.
c) Outdoor luminaires installed at high masts and
street lighting poles, unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer.

h. All SPDs shall be installed within or adjacent to the protected equipment

within a distance not exceeding 10 m. Where distance between two
consecutive SPDs is less than 10 m, the downstream SPD is not required.
i. SPD’s test requirements shall be compliant with:

a) IEC 61643-11 for power systems,
b) IEC 61643-21 for telecommunication and signaling
systems
j. Selection and installation of a coordinated SPD protection to comply with:

a) IEC 61643-12 and IEC 60364-5-53 for
protection of power systems,
b) IEC 61643-22 for protection of telecommunications
and signaling systems
3 COMBINED CLASS I + II OR TYPE 1 HYBRID SURGE PROTECTIVE

DEVICES
a. Combined surge protective devices shall utilize MOV and GDT

technologies and shall provide common mode and differential mode
protection to eliminate overvoltage between each phase and neutral and
between neutral and earth.
b. Class I + II surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or

c. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, combined Class I + Class II.
d. SPD shall be tested for Iimp simulated with 10/350 microseconds

waveform, with the following parameters for common mode: Iimp 100 kA
within 50 micro seconds, charge
(Q) 50 As within 5 ms and energy (W/R) 2500 kJ/Ohm within 5 ms, unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
e. SPD shall be tested for Iimp simulated with 10/350 microseconds

waveform, with the following parameters for differential mode: Iimp 25 kA
within 50 micro seconds, charge
(Q) 25 As within 5 ms and energy (W/R) 2500 kJ/Ohm within 5 ms, unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
f. Voltage protection level (Up) shall not exceed 1500 V.
g. Short Circuit Withstand Capability: 25 kArms (55 kApeak) as a minimum.
h. Common Mode Nominal Discharge Current (In): 100 kA with 8/20

microseconds waveform unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

i. Differential Mode Nominal Discharge Current (In): 25 kA with 8/20

microseconds waveform unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
j. Common Mode Maximum Discharge Current (Imax): 100 kA with 8/20

microseconds waveform.
k. Differential Mode Maximum Discharge Current (Imax): 100 kA with 8/20

microseconds waveform.
l. SPDs temporary overvoltage withstand shall comply with IEC 61643-11

requirements.
m. As an alternative to combined Class I+II SPD, hybrid surge protective

devices may be used. Hybrid SPDs shall be constructed using a primary
and secondary stage hybrid transient suppression system separated by
suitable line inductive impedance to ANSI/UL 1449. The primary stage
shall utilize SAD technology, while the secondary stage shall be
constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules utilizing MOV
technology and tested for manufacturing defects. The SAD module shall
not be self-sacrificing to protect the system; rather it shall provide
immediate transition to the secondary stage when subjected to potentially
harmful levels. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner
that ensures surge current sharing.
4 CLASS I SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
a. Class I surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology.
b. Class I surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or

c. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Class I.
d. SPD shall be tested for Iimp simulated with 10/350 microseconds

waveform, with the following parameters: Iimp 25 kA within 50 micro
seconds, charge (Q) 12.5 As within 5 ms and energy (W/R) 156 kJ/Ohm
within 5 ms.
e. Voltage protection level (Up) shall not exceed 2500 V.
f. Short Circuit Withstand Capability: 100 kArms (220 kApeak) as a minimum.
g. Nominal Discharge Current (In): 25 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform.
h. SPDs temporary overvoltage withstand shall comply with IEC

61643-11 requirements.

5 CLASS II SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
a. Class II surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology.
b. Class II surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or

c. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Class II.
d. SPD shall be tested with simulated 8/20 microseconds waveform, with In

12.5 kA.
f. Short Circuit Withstand Capability: 50 kArms as a minimum.
g. Maximum Discharge Current (Imax): 25 kA with 8/20 microseconds

waveform.

6 CLASS III SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
a. Class III surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology and shall
provide common mode and differential mode protection to eliminate
overvoltage between each phase and neutral and between neutral and earth.
b. Class III surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or

c. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Class III.
d. SPD shall be tested with a simulated combination wave of 8/20

microseconds waveform for short circuit current and 1.2/50 microseconds
waveform for open circuit voltage with Uoc 6 kV.
f. Short Circuit Withstand Capability: 6 kArms as a minimum.
g. Nominal Discharge Current (In): 3 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform.

7 IDENTIFICATION

a. The following information shall be provided by the manufacturer on the

nameplate as a minimum:
1) Manufacturer’s name and model number.
2) Maximum continuous operating voltage.
3) SPD class and discharge parameters for each mode of
protection declared by the manufacturer:
a) Class I+II, Iimp in kA and In in kA.

b) Class I and Iimp in kA.
c) Class II and In in kA.
d) Class III and Uoc in Kv
4) Nominal discharge current.

5) Voltage protection level.
6) Identification of terminals.
7) Compliance standards.
21.2.4 INSTALLATION
1 Install lightning protection components and systems according to IEC 62305.
2 Comply with IEC 61643-11 and BS 7671.
3 Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to earth connections.
Avoid sharp bends and narrow loops.
4 Conceal the following conductors:
(a) System conductors.

(b) Down conductors.
(c) Interior conductors.
(d) Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 60
m of building.
(e) Notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before
concealing lightning protection components.
5 Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all

conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components.
6 Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection

loop conductors to earthed metal bodies of building at 20m intervals.
7 Joints and Bonds: Clean and treat contact surfaces with non-corrosive compound.
Protect joints between dissimilar metals from moisture by inert, tenacious
material, and with overlapping joints not less than 30 mm long. Provide as few
joints and bonds as possible and make mechanically and electrically effective by
clamping, bolting or exothermic welding. Cross-sectional areas of joints and
bonds are not to be less than that of main conductor.

8 Bond exposed metal parts of structure to lightning protective system if clearance

between any element of lightning system and metal part is less than 1800 mm or
the distance allowed by the specified Standard, whichever is smaller.
9 Inspection (Earth) Pit: Extend 150 mm below top of earth rod. Cover earth rod
connector with suitable protective compound, which can be easily removed for
inspection. Connector is not to be covered with backfill material and is to remain
clean.
10 For equipment installed at the roof / outdoor, coordinate with the equipment
manufacturer for surge protection requirements according to the
recommendations of the equipment manufacturer.
11 Leads / wires shall be routed through the shortest straight parallel path. Wires
shall be twisted type to reduce conductor’s inductance.
12 Install SPDs such that the total SPD lead length(s) and size(s) along with the
distance between the SPD and the protected equipment does not exceed the
values required by IEC 60364-5-53 or recommended by manufacturer for proper
operation whichever is more stringent.
13 Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.
14 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,

according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values and / or
recommendations. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in applicable Standards.
15 Wiring:
a. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 21 Part 6 "Cables and
small wiring."
b. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 21 Part 6 "Cables and small
wing."
21.2.5 CORROSION PROTECTION
1 Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate
corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded
from junction of such materials.
2 Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause

deterioration or corrosion of conductors.

1 Periodic Inspections: Perform periodic inspections during installation of

lightning protection systems and at Substantial Completion.
2 Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-
authorized service representative:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with

Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
c. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's

written installation requirements.
3 Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
4 Prepare test and inspection reports.
21.2.7 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:
1 Test and commission the system in accordance with BS EN 62305, BS 7430

and as specified. Record all test measurements.
2 Continuity tests and earthing tests shall be undertaken to the satisfaction of the
Engineer when the installation has been completed.
21.2.8 STARTUP SERVICE
1 Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2 Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment

with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance
tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.
3 Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.
END OF PART

17-SECTION
21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 22 - EARTHING AND BONDING
22.1 GENERAL
22.1.1 Description of Work
1 Complete installations to earth every source of energy and to provide

protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based on the TN-S system
arrangement, including:
(a) MV switchgear earthing according to QGEWC requirements

(b) Transformer neutral earthing
(c) MV main earthing terminals or bars
(d) Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment
(e) Extraneous conductive parts
(f) Standby generators neutral earthing
(g) Low current and communication systems
22.1.2 Regulations and Standards
(a) Carry out work in accordance with the latest edition of the following:
(a) IEC 60364-1, IEC 60364-51, IEC 60364-5-55 and IEC 60364-4-41:
Electrical
Installations in Buildings.
(b) BS 7430: Code of Practice for Earthing
(c) Latest edition IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations in Buildings –
London.
(d) TIA J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
requirements for telecommunications.
(e) Local KAHRAMAA Regulations
(b) Comply with IEC 62305 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.
S21P22 - Page 1 of 11
EARTHING AND BONDING
22.1.3 Definitions of Terms
1 Used on the drawings and in the specification are as follows:
(a) EARTH: conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any
point is conventionally taken as zero
(b) EARTH ELECTRODE: conductor or group of conductors in initial
contact with, and providing electrical connection to, Earth
(c) EXPOSED CONDUCTIVE PART: any part which can be readily
touched and which is not a live part, but which may become live under
fault conditions
(d) EXTRANEOUS CONDUCTIVE PART: any conductive part not forming
part of the electrical installation such as structural metalwork of a
building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes, heating tubes etc. and non-
electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators, cooking
ranges, metal sinks etc. and non-insulating floors and walls
(e) PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR: conductor used for some measure of
protection against electric shock and intended for connecting together any
of the following parts:
i. Exposed conductive parts

ii. Extraneous conductive parts
iii. Earth electrode(s)
iv. Main earthing terminal or bar(s)
v. Earthed point of the source(s)
(f) ELECTRICALLY INDEPENDENT EARTH ELECTRODES: earth

electrodes located at such distance from one another that maximum current
likely to flow through one of them does not significantly affect the potential
of the other(s)
(g) MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL OR BAR: the terminal or bar provided
for the connection of protective conductors, including equipotential
bonding and functional earthing conductors if any to the means of earthing
(h) EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING: electrical connection to put exposed and
extraneous conductive parts at a substantially equal potential
(i) EARTHING CONDUCTOR: protective conductor connecting main
earthing terminal or bar of an installation to earth electrode or to other
means of earthing
22.1.4 Equipment Data
1 Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not limited to,
manufacturer's catalogues for earth rods, connecting clamps, earthing
conductors, protective conductors, bonding conductors, connectors and other
accessories, exothermic welding kits and tools etc., and samples of conductors as
requested
S21P22 - Page 2 of 11
22.1.5 Shop and Construction Drawings
1 Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
(a) Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-

section, depth of laying and covering
(b) Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and
connections.
(c) Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors
(d) Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms,
switchgear, distribution panelboards, IT rooms and related UPS, special
rooms, etc., indicating fittings used, insulation, plates and marking,
passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves, grooves,
niches etc., giving sizes and dimensions of component parts.
22.2 PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
22.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) Component Parts of earthing system are to include the following:
(a) Earth electrode (rods, tapes etc.)

(b) Main earthing terminals or bars
(c) Earthing conductors
(d) Protective conductors
(e) Equipotential bonding conductors
(f) Electrically independent earth electrodes for special systems
(g) Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other
materials.
(b) Provide two separate earthing networks for main supply (authority) and lightning
system, consisting of bonding earthing networks of all individual services. In no
circumstances shall lightening protection earth rods be connected to main supply
earthing electrode. A minimum distance of separation of 7 meters shall be
provided in every case between lightening earth electrodes and main supply earth
electrode. The resistance to earth should, in this case be the lowest value needed
for any of the individual services. Combined resistance to ground of main supply
earthing network is not to exceed 1 Ohm while for lightning earthing network is
not to exceed 10 Ohm.
(c) Earth electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried
earthing tape or cable; distance between two rods is not to be less than twice the
length of one rod driven depth.
(d) Ring type earth electrode consisting of earthing conductors, in a closed loop,
buried in exterior wall foundations underneath the water-proofing, or
alternatively buried at a depth of
0.5 m and a distance of about 1 m around external walls, or as shown on the
S21P22 - Page 3 of 11
Drawings. Connect all earthing conductors to this ring. Insulated connection

flags into the building, of same material as earthing conductors, at locations
specified underneath are to terminate into bolt-type earth points (studs) or test-
links for connection of main earth bar(s). Additional earth rods connecting with
the earth ring are to be provided, as necessary, to bring down earth electrode
resistance to the specified value.
(e) Alternative Earth Electrode: other types of earth electrode may be used, after
approval, including:
(a) Cast iron pipes with special surround material

(b) Copper plate(s)
(c) Tape mats (strips).
(f) Main earthing bar is to be provided at point of service entrance or medium

voltage, transformer, generator, low voltage, low current, and mechanical
distribution rooms; as described in the Specification or shown on the Drawings.
Connect all earthing conductors, protective conductors and bonding conductors
to the main earthing bar. Provide two insulated main earthing conductors, one at
each end of the bar, connected via testing joints to the earth electrode at two
separate earth pits. Conductor is to be sized to carry maximum earth fault current
of system at point of application with final conductor temperature not exceeding
160 deg. C for 1 second for medium voltage systems and 0.4 seconds for low
voltage systems. Main earthing conductors for main supply earthing system are
to be minimum 120 mm2 or as shown on drawings. Main earthing conductors for
lightning system are to be minimum 95mm2 or as shown on drawings.
(g) Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each
main earthing conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
(h) Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective
conductor is common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective
conductor is to be the largest of the conductor sizes.
(a) Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with Table 54.7 of IEE Wiring

Regulations (BS 7671).
(i) Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the
like. Where armoured cable is specified and armour is steel, it may be used as a
protective conductor, if approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.
(j) Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective conductor

from one piece of equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed
conductive parts of equipment are not to be used as protective conductors, but
are to be connected by bolted clamp type connectors and/or brazing to continuous
protective conductors which are to be insulated by moulded materials.
(k) Ensure by calculation that Earth Fault Loop Impedance values for final circuits
are to satisfy the requirements of BS 7671 regulations.
S21P22 - Page 4 of 11
(l) Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts

of the building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and
ducting, metallic conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armour to nearest
earthing terminals by equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of
protective bonding conductor shall not be less than half of the protective
conductor connected to respective earthing terminal with a minimum of 4-mm2.
(m) Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any
other metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding
conductors to main earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short
as practicable between point of entry/exit of services and main earthing bar.
Where meters are installed, bonding is to be made on the premise side of the
meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be less than half that of the earthing
conductor connected thereto, and minimum 6 mm2.
(n) Identification: Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and

every bonding conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in
accordance with the Regulations, as follows:
a) SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE.
(o) Identification: Protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by

combination of green-and-yellow colors of insulation or by painting bar
conductors with these colors, as approved.
(p) Identification: Source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) is to be

identified along its entire length by continuous black insulation labelled 'neutral
earthing'.
22.2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1 Buried Earth Conductors for main supply (authority) earthing: Bare annealed
copper strip conductors 30 x 4 mm, or annealed stranded copper conductors 120
mm2 cross-section, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2 Buried Earth Conductors for Lightning system: Bare annealed copper strip
conductors 25 x 4 mm, or annealed stranded copper conductors 95 mm2 cross-
section, unless otherwise indicated on drawings
3 Earthing Conductors: Insulated or bare copper conductor as described above.
S21P22 - Page 5 of 11
4 Protective Conductors: Single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated

cables, having rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be
a conductor forming part of a multi-core cable, color coded.
5 Protective Bonding Conductors: Bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded

copper cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described
in Article "General Requirements" hereof.
6 Power Systems (transformer, medium voltage switchgear, generator, and main

distribution board) Main Earthing Bar: Consisting of hard drawn copper bar, 50
x 6 mm, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Earth bar is to be labeled 'Main
Earth Bar' and is to be drilled, for connection of conductors, at a spacing not less
than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with copper alloy bolts, nuts and washers and
wall mounting insulators.
7 Telecommunication Systems Main Earthing Bar: similar to above but with

minimum dimensions 100 x 6 mm for the main grounding busbar of the main
telecommunication room, and 50 x6 mm for equipment rooms grounding
busbars.
22.2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS AND EARTHING ACCESSORIES
1 Copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with

points of connection, and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity.
2 Bolted Connectors and Clamps: Bolted-pressure-type connectors and clamps, or

compression type. Bolts, nuts and washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze
or copper silicon alloys.
3 Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per

22.2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
1 Ground Rod: 16-mm diameter high strength, low carbon steel core of high tensile
strength (600 N/mm2), with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper molecularly bonded
into steel core, 0.25 mm minimum thickness. Driving head is to be high strength
steel. Couplings are to be long length silicon bronze, internally threaded. Threads
are to be rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of copper and strength. Earth
rod is to be complete with couplings, head and bolted connector of sufficient size,
and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables terminated thereto.
(a) Minimum Length of Rod: 2.4 m, extendible as necessary to obtain

required earth resistance.
2 Tape Mats (Earth Lattice): Where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth
S21P22 - Page 6 of 11
electrode is to consist of parallel and perpendicular copper strips, spacing interval

as shown on drawings, burial depth 0.6m minimum, welded together by
exothermic welds to form a 600 x 600 x 3 mm (6x6 matrix) grid. Tape is to be
25 x 3 mm strip conductor.
3 Earth Pit: Precast, square or circular section concrete handhole (minimum 450
mm internal diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 150 mm
below top of earth rod. Earth pit is to be provided for each earth rod where
connected to an earthing conductor. Cover is to have inset brass plate with
inscription 'Earth Pit - Do Not Remove'.
22.3 EXECUTION
22.3.1 TRANSFORMER SUBSTATION EARTHING
1 Medium Voltage (MV) switchgear is to have a separate main earthing bar

connected to MV switchgear room earth bar by two insulated earthing conductors
not less than 120mm2, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2 LV switchgear (main distribution board) is to have separate main earthing bar
connected to LV room earth bar by two insulated earthing conductors not less
than 120 mm2, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
3 Transformer room is to have a separate MV main earthing bar, to which the

transformer earthing terminal is to be connected by insulated copper earthing
conductor not less than 120mm2, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
4 Transformer neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing

conductor (color black) to dedicated earth pit. Neutral earthing conductor is to be
sized for maximum earth fault current for 1 second with final conductor
temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C or sized not less than 120 mm2 for
transformer ratings below 500 kVA and 300 mm2 for higher ratings unless
otherwise indicated on drawings. Where a neutral is directly connected to earth
electrode, an insulated disconnecting device is to be provided at the transformer.
5 Lightning arresters are to be directly connected to earth electrode, following the

shortest path. Each lightning arrester is to be connected at a dedicated earth rod,
unless otherwise shown on drawings.
22.3.2 EARTHING OF MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS,

LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
1 Distribution, lighting and power panelboards are to be connected by protective

conductors run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals
in panelboards with respective main distribution board earthing bar.
2 Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the
branch circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to
which socket outlet terminal is to be connected.
S21P22 - Page 7 of 11
3 Final Ring Sub-Circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit is to

be in the form of a ring having both ends connected to earth terminal at origin of
circuit in panelboard.
4 Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations,

such as switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by
protective earth conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
22.3.3 GENERATOR PLANT EARTHING
1 Generator room is to have a separate main earthing bar, to which the generator
earthing terminal is to be connected by insulated copper conductor of cross
section not less than 120 mm2, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. The
generator neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor
through the neutral earthing link or device to dedicated earth pit. Neutral earthing
conductor is to be suitably sized to carry maximum earth fault current for time it
takes the system protection to operate with final conductor temperature not
exceeding 160 deg. C, but not less than 120 mm2 for generator ratings below 500
kVA and 300 mm2 for higher ratings, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
2 Switchgear (ATS) and Control Gear: Earthing terminals or bars of switchgear

and control gear are to be connected by separate protective conductors to
respective normal and emergency main distribution board earth bars.
3 Extraneous conductive parts including steel frames, battery racks, day-tank,

pumps and piping are to be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main
earth bar in compliance with bonding regulations.
22.3.4 MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY
1 Mechanical room is to have separate earthing bar(s) or loop conveniently located,

and connected by earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor
control centre at its earthing bar, and to motors, switches and other electrical
equipment etc. at their earthing terminals, using copper conductor with half size
of the protective earth conductor and not less than 6 mm2, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings. Conductors are to be securely fixed, recessed in floor
grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar or loop is to
be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
2 Earthing bar (40 x 4 mm) is to be connected by two insulated earthing conductors,

one at each end of the bar, through testing joints to the earth electrode at two
separate earth pits, or to the main LV earth bar. Earthing conductors are to be
minimum 70 mm2 or as shown on drawings.
S21P22 - Page 8 of 11
3 Motor and other equipment earth terminals are to be connected also by protective
earth conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control
centre, panel or distribution unit.
22.3.5 ROAD & EXTERIOR LIGHTING
1 Earthing Cables: separate protective earthing cables for lighting column circuits
are to be run with power circuit, terminated at LV supply position in lighting
control panel and looped into column earthing terminals. The last column is to
be bonded via an earthing bolt to a single 16 mm diameter copper covered steel
rod, 2.4 m, extendible as necessary, driven into ground adjacent to column.
Bonding is to be 16 mm2 stranded bare copper conductor, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings.
2 Connections between rods and earthing conductors are to be made by the

Cadweld process producing a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for
connection to removable items of equipment only.
22.3.6 SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
1 Signal and communication systems room is to have separate earthing bar

conveniently located, and connected by two insulated earthing conductors, one
at each end of the bar, through testing joints to the earth electrode at two separate
earth pits. Earthing conductors are to be minimum 70 mm2 or as shown on
drawings.
2 Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding

required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with
requirements in TIA/ATIS J- STD-607-A.
(a) For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems,
provide 16mm2 minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway
from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal
cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings or recommended by system provider.
(b) Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate
grounding conductor on a grounding bus.
(c) Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding
terminal.
(d) A signal reference grid shall be provided in the server room.
22.3.7 INSTALLATION
1 Continuity: Ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and

mechanically secure.
S21P22 - Page 9 of 11
2 Earth Rods: While siting earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with
individual rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater
than 1 m horizontally from foundations of buildings. Where rock is encountered,
a hole of sufficient size is to be drilled before lowering the rod. Conductive filler
such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal filler that will not corrode is to be
provided around the rod.
3 Buried earthing conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.5 m from
ground surface.
4 Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main
earthing terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) fastened to
building structure by approved supports and extending 0.2 m above level, and
are to be protected against mechanical damage and corrosion.
5 Protective Conductors: Separate protective conductors, which are not part of a

cable, are to be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit
conductors.
6 Protective Bonding: Remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar

coating at threads, contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made
by fittings designed to make secure bonds.
22.3.8 CONNECTIONS
1 Protection against Corrosion: Protect bolted connections against corrosion either

by filling with Vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and
proper capping.
2 Connections: Earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth

connection is permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to
be employed.
3 Connections: Where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made,

use bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous
paint or compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
4 Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating
improper cleaning are not acceptable.
5 Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals
according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in applicable
Standards.
S21P22 - Page 10 of 11
1 Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and

checked against specified resistance.
2 Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values,

notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground
resistance.
3 Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.
4 Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against
calculated impedance figures.
5 Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.
22.3.10 GRADING AND PLANTING
1 Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this

Section. Re-establish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been
removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore
areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to
their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod,
sprig, and mulch. Comply with landscaping specification. Maintain restored
surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
END OF PART
S21P22 - Page 11 of 11
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL WORKS
PART 30– DUCTBANK AND MANHOLES
31.1 GENERAL
1 Materials and Workmanship, unless otherwise specified, are to be in accordance

with the relevant requirements of the Specification for Structural and Architectural
work.
2 Description of Work: cable and duct trenches, equipment foundations, bases and
supports, ducts and duct banks, earth pits, chases, holes and the like, sleeves, bolts,
brackets and fixings including grouting.
3 Confirm locations and dimensions of all builder’s work required for electrical work.
Submit shop and construction drawings or other data to the Engineer for checking
before proceeding with the work.
4 Agree precise locations of routes for services below ground with the Engineer, set
out clearly and accurately and locate with temporary marker posts.
31.2 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

31.2.1 Components
1 Un-Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) ducts for outdoor power, lighting,

telecom, ELV, security cable installations are to be non-sparking type, suitable for
direct burial in ground, minimum tensile strength 500 kg/cm2, impact strength 5
kg/cm2, supplied in standard 6m lengths, with one end of each length tapered. Ducts
are to be nominal size shown on the drawings, with minimum wall thickness 2.2mm
for 50 mm, 3.2 mm for 100 mm ducts and 4.7 mm for 150 mm ducts.
2 Duct supports are to be pre-formed, non-metallic of approved type. Supports

containing metal are to have the metal non-continuous and not forming a magnetic
loop in any manner.
3 Covers for trenches in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or
shown on the Drawings, are to be flanged chequered steel plates with angle or
channel-section frames, suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and
finished with zinc chromate primer and two coats grey enamel.
4 Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations are to be
galvanized steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic
S21P30 - Page 1 of 4
DUCTBANK AND MANHOLES
inserts and lead anchors are not acceptable unless approved for specific light duty
installations.
31.2.2 Composite Construction
1 Equipment Foundations and Bases are to be constructed of reinforced concrete, as

approved by the Engineer after submission of design calculations. Dimensions,
levels and surface finishes are to be suitable for equipment installed, as shown on
the Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
2 Concrete Envelope for Duct Banks for power distribution systems,outdoor lighting
, telecom, ELV and security cable installations crossing water, gas and sewage
mains, under roadways and where required or shown on the Drawings, is to be
reinforced concrete Class B using sulphate-resisting Portland cement.
Reinforcement is to consist of 12 mm diameter longitudinal bars at approximately
300 mm centres along bottom and sides of duct bank with 10 mm diameter U-
shaped transversal bars at 400 mm centres. Length of concrete envelope is to extend
at least 300 mm beyond each side of crossing etc.
31.3 WORKMANSHIP
31.3.1 Generally
1 Cable Trenches width is to be as small as practicable with sides vertical. Remove

mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots from trench bottom and trim level.
Inform the Engineer in advance to give him reasonable opportunity to inspect trench
for each section of the work.
2 Directly Buried PVC Cable Ducts:
a. Lay and joint ducts to required line and level on sand bed, cover with sand
and backfill trench to ground level with excavated soil, free from stones and
other debris, well compact in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick.
b. Lay approved concrete tiles to fully cover cable duct, extending minimum
50mm beyond sides of duct and placed 300 mm below ground level.
c. Provide warning tape or galvanized steel mesh along duct runs at a depth 200
mm below ground level.
3 Underground Cable Duct Assemblies:
a. Form duct assembly to required line and level, using duct supports spaced to
prevent sagging of ducts and breaking of couplings and watertight seals, and
secured with cords (not tie wires) where necessary.
b. Provide 1% slope to duct banks for draining to exterior manhole, handhole or

other location as instructed.
c. Join ducts using waterproof cement, to manufacturer’s recommendations, to

give waterproof and sand-proof joint with at least 80mm overlap.
d. Provide 3 mm galvanized steel wire inside empty ducts, for future pulling of
cables, extending 1m beyond ducts banks at both ends and securely fixed to
wooden bungs sealing the duct.
4 Ducts ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be neatly cut and reamed and
set behind chamfered precast concrete duct end blocks or terminated with
appropriate bell-mouth bushing set in concrete wall. Ducts not ending in cable
manholes or handholes are to be properly capped.
5 Conduits and ducts, active or spare, at entry into building or manhole, are to be
completely sealed with approved plastic moulds or wooden bungs to prevent entry
of rodents, gas and vapour.
6 Sleeves or ducts in equipment foundations are to be provided, whether shown on

the Drawings or not, and in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. Obtain approval of sleeve or duct
installation prior to concreting.
7 Support Frames for Switchgear/Switchboards located over cable trenches, where

shown on the Drawings or required by equipment design, are to be installed prior
to concreting.
8 Drilling for anchor bolts is to be carried out using appropriate electric drills and in
approved positions.
9 Holes and chases in in-situ concrete are to be cast in. Do not cut hardened concrete
or drill holes larger than 10 mm diameter without prior approval.
10 Do not cut or drill precast concrete without prior approval.
11 Do not cut or drill structural steel work without prior approval.
12 Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:
a. Size of holes : 300 mm square
b. Depth of vertical chases : 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls,
1/3 leaf thickness
c. Depth of horizontal chases : 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.
13 Cutting masonry:
a. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.
b. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spalling, cracking or other damage to

surrounding structure.
c. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified

dimensions.
d. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only. Do not set
back to back; offset by a distance not less than wall thickness.
14 Submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts etc. which exceed 460 mm
width.
31.3.2 Inspection And Cleaning
1 Directly buried ducts and underground duct assemblies are to be inspected in the
presence of the Engineer, before backfilling or concreting. Steel mandrel or other
approved device, diameter equal to 90% of inside diameter of duct and 500 mm
long, is to be pulled through entire run of duct and is to pass through without getting
stuck. Ducts which do not allow mandrel to be pulled through are to be repaired or
replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2 Clean ducts with stiff bristle brush pulled through each duct prior to pulling in
cables.
31.4 SLEEVES OR DUCTS IN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS
Provide sleeves or ducts in equipment foundations, whether or not shown on

Drawings, in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer. Obtain approval of sleeve or duct installation prior to
pouring concrete.
31.5 ENDS OF DUCTS
1 Ducts ending in cable manholes or handholds are to be neatly cut and reamed and
appropriate bell-mouth bushing set in concrete wall. Ducts not ending in cable
manholes or handholds are to be properly capped.
2 Sealing Ends Of Ducts: Completely seal conduits and ducts, active or spare, at
entry into buildings or manholes, with approved plastic molds or wooden bungs to
prevent entry of rodents, gas and vapor.
3 To provide Polypropylene ropes (4mm or larger diameter) through each of all spare
ducts (end to end) to facilitate future installation
END OF PART
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 31 – POWER DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
31.1 GENERAL

Contract, apply to this Section.
31.1.2 SUMMARY
a. This Section includes distribution step down transformers with medium-voltage

and/or low voltage primaries and secondaries as specified.
b. Related Sections include the following:
a. Section 21: Part 1 "General Provisions for Electrical Installation".

b. Section 21: Part 22 "Earthing and Bonding".
c. Section 21: Part 35 "11 KV 3 Core XLPE Cables".
c. Necessary interfaces for connection to BMS system where applicable,

including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as specified and
/or shown on the Drawings.
31.1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 Product Data: Include full technical data on features, components, ratings, and
performance for each type of transformer specified. Include core material, grade,
lamination thickness, flux density, winding material, and current density.
Additionally, Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views. Show
POWER DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS S21P31 - Page 1 of 10

minimum clearances and installed devices and features. Submit Manufacturers'

catalogues.
2 Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and
connecting field- installed wiring.

manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
4 Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the

products furnished comply with requirements.
5 Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the
relevant IEC Standards.
6 Routine Tests: Each transformer unit is to undergo routine tests at the

manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine
test reports, prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and
guaranteed rating of equipment under site conditions.
7 Special Tests: Factory special tests shall include noise level, temperature
rise, impulse withstand on one transformer of each rating to be delivered.
a. Plans and elevations, with dimensions and weights.
b. Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
c. One-line diagram of power system.
d. Schematic diagram indicating the secondary wiring of transformer

mechanical protection and the control circuit of cooling fans (if
any).
e. Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.
9 Sound-Level Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's sound-level tests

applicable to equipment for this Project.
10 Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
11 Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals.

1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing

transformers similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
2 Standards: Equipment, component parts, and installation are to comply with the
following Standards:
a. QGEWC Specifications and requirements.
b. Common clauses for MV switchgear and control gear standards: IEC

62271-1.
c. Power transformers: IEC 60076 (all parts).
d. Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V: IEC 60137.
e. Material thermal class insulation: IEC 60085.
f. For transformer characteristics: BS EN 50541-1.
g. Neutral Earthing Resistor: IEEE standard 32.
31.1.5 WARRANTY

a. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
31.1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1 Temporary Heating: For indoor, dry-type transformers, apply temporary heat

according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each
ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized
and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and
humidity.
31.1.7 COORDINATION
1 Coordinate with local Authorities for the installation
2 Coordinate layout and installation of transformers with other construction.
3 Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases.

1 Spare parts: provide spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer including

but not limited to the items below, for one year maintenance, as expected under
local conditions, and to allow for emergency replacement due to accidental
breakage or failure. Spare parts shall include but not limited to the following:
a. Spare parts for dry type transformers with quantity greater than two shall
include but not limited to fan, fan controller and temperature monitoring
unit with a quantity of two percent of total number of transformers, with
minimum one unit each.
2 Tools and Instruments: provide tools instruments required for normal

routine inspection, testing, operation and maintenance as recommended by
the manufacturer.
3 Provide complete price list of spare parts adequate for five years operation as
expected under local conditions.
1 Factory testing units for one unit of each rating of the dry type transformers to
be supplied shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Selection of transformers for
witness test shall be randomly carried out by the Engineer and shall cover all
ratings to be delivered. Witness test shall include complete routine and function
testing in addition to the special tests specified above. Test procedure and
program shall be submitted for approval prior to test conduction, by at least 14
days. Allow for two persons visit to cover all types of tests including business
class air tickets, five stars Hotel full accommodation, transportation and all test
expenses.
31.2 PRODUCTS
31.2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1 Approved Manufacturers of Distribution Transformers: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
a. A.B.B. (Spain)
b. Schneider Electric / France Transfo (France)
c. Schneider Electric / Areva (Turkey)
d. Schneider Electric / Square D. (U.S.A.)
e. G.E. (U.S.A.)
f. Eaton / Cutler Hammer Corp. (U.S.A)

g. SGB (Germany)
h. Pauwels/Crompton Greaves Ltd. (Belgium / U.S.A.)
i. Siemens (Germany)
31.2.2 DRY TYPE CAST RESIN POWER TRANSFORMER
2 Type: 3-phase, indoor type, step down, two winding, low loss, solventless cast
epoxy resin, with minimum class F insulation on inner LV and MV windings, rated
for continuous operation under worst site ambient conditions at full load, and
complying with IEC 60076-11. Winding temperature rise shall not exceed 90 deg.
C over an average ambient of 40 deg. C for class F insulation. Transformer core
shall be constructed from high grade, non-aging “Cold Rolled Grain Oriented”
silicon steel laminations with suitable grade to fulfill the losses and noise levels
specified below.
3 Transformer no load and load losses shall not exceed BS EN 50541-1 values for
class B0Bk.
4 Windings: Medium and low voltage windings shall be copper, unless otherwise
approved.
5 Winding current densities at rated normal and short circuit conditions shall be
submitted for approval. Normal densities shall not exceed 1.8 A/mm2 for Copper
winding, unless otherwise submitted by manufacturer and approved by engineer.
6 Insulation and Encapsulation: Humidity resistant, explosion and fire-resistant,

self- extinguishing, tropicalized, giving non-toxic gases in the event of fire. To
fulfill environmental, climate and fire classes of E2, C2 and F1 respectively to IEC
60076-11 / BS EN 50541-1.
7 Tapping shall be provided on MV side by means of re-connectable links (off-

circuit), giving +/- 2.5% and +/-5% tapping on transformers for each primary
voltage rating.
8 Rubber sound isolation pads are to be provided between core and coil assemblies,
and between base and housing.
9 Mounting and Handling: Transformer base and structure are to have lifting hooks
or lugs, towing and lashing eyes or lugs and provision for roller wheels.
10 Temperature monitoring is to be provided by externally mounted tripping units

giving alarm and trip at two stages with about 20 deg. C temperature difference,
actuated by three embedded thermistor sensors in LV windings (hot-spot).
11 Terminals: Arranged as described herein and/or as shown on the Drawings, and

are to be compatible for copper cable termination.

12 Housing: Sheet steel construction, IP 21 with provision of fans for indoor

installation.
13 Noise Level: A weighted sound power (LWA) level calculated in accordance

with IEC 60076-
10 (with fans off) shall not exceed BS EN 50541-1 values for the specified
classes in paragraph 31.2.2.2 above.
14 Noise level for transformers with fans: the sound power level with all fans in
operation shall not exceed 6 dB additional to the specified limits.
15 Enclosure’s earthing bolt(s) or copper pad(s) shall be provided on main frame of

transformer for earthing of transformer’s housing and core.
16 LV star neutral point shall be connected to a separate earthing terminal fixed to

but insulated from the enclosure and shall be labeled with the same.
17 Characteristics:
a. Rated Power (net de-rated): as shown on the drawings.
b. Frequency: 50 Hz.
c. Rated Voltage:
- MV Side: 11 kV.
- LV Side: 433 V.
a. Highest Voltage:
- MV Side: 17.5 kV.
- LV Side: 1.1 kV.
d. Winding Connections: Dyn11 with neutral insulated and brought out.
e. Impedance Voltage at Rated Current: 4 % for transformer rating of
500KVA, 6% for transformer rating of 1000KVA and 1600KVA.
f. Rated Power Frequency Withstand-Voltage: 28 kV.
g. Lightning Impulse Withstand-Voltage: 75 kV.
h. Short-Circuit Apparent Power of the System at Location: 500 MVA.
i. Duration of Short-Circuit-Withstand: 2 seconds.
j. Terminal Connection System:
- MV Side: enclosed flanged terminal box, with split cable glands and
removable nonmagnetic plates with adequate thickness and rigidity
to support cables. Cable entry shall be from bottom.
- LV Side: enclosed flanged terminal box, with split cable glands and
removable insulating/nonmagnetic plates with adequate thickness
and rigidity to support cables or busway adapter with flanged
enclosure to suit arrangements. Cable/busway entry shall be as
shown on drawings.
18 Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made
of bakelite or Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.
19 Accessories are to include the following:

j. Digital protective unit for transformer monitoring and protection against
winding temperature and contacts for fan controller operation with display
for indication of winding temperature values and alarm / trip status, 2 N.O.

contacts for winding temperature alarm and trip the upstream medium
voltage switchgear circuit breaker flag relays, with data link interface port
for connection to BMS where applicable, along with necessary winding
temperature sensors (at least one 3-wire PT100 / RTD 200 or equivalent
per phase) and interface with fan control and protection system.
k. Earthing switch, fault-making type, on HV side of housing, interlocked
with door, visible from outside the enclosure, with trip contact for tripping
HV circuit breaker before closing earthing switch.
l. Four re-orientable roller rim wheels and attachment accessories.
20 Surge arresters: Provide surge arresters as specified under Section 2 Part

“Medium Voltage Switchgear”, on MV side of transformers, unless surge
arrestors are located on the switchgear in the Drawings or it is agreed with the
Engineer to provide the arresters on the outgoing MV circuit breaker cubicle of
transformer for the cases where the distance between medium voltage switchgear
and transformer is not exceeding 15m. The contractor is responsible for the
coordination between the medium voltage switchgear and transformer suppliers.
31.3 EXECUTION
31.3.1 INSTALLATION
a. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and
components may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as
approved, provided the required functions and operations are accomplished;
follow the identification of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease
checking and building maintenance procedures.
b. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
c. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
d. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves
bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and
that they are properly installed.
e. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and
level, before grouting in holding-down bolts.
f. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.

g. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
Authorities requirements.
h. Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in Section 21 – Part 22

“Earthing and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
i. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets,

and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
31.3.2 IDENTIFICATION
1 Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Section 21 – Part 1.
31.3.3 CONNECTIONS
1 Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's

published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
1 Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to
Engineer.
2 Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections,

including current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and
relays.
3 Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out

and record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
4 Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and

manufacturer's tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and
is suitable for energizing.
5 Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a

dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
6 Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test

commencement.
7 Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective

materials and installation.
8 Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to

a. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical

integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping
bracing has been removed. Include internal inspection through access
panels and covers for dry-type transformers.
b. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to
manufacturer's published torque values.
c. Insulation Resistance: Perform meg-ohmmeter tests of primary and
secondary winding to winding and winding to ground.
d. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes.
e. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation
from 20 deg C standard.
f. Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured
ratios deviating more than 0.5 percent from calculated or measured ratio
for an adjacent coil is not acceptable.
g. Winding Resistance: Measure for windings at nominal tap setting.
Measured resistance, deviating more than 1 percent, from that of adjacent
windings, is not acceptable.
h. Liquid-Filled Transformer, Insulation Power-Factor Test: Determine
overall dielectric loss and power factor for windings' insulation. Limit test
voltage to line-to-ground voltage of windings being tested.
i. Functional test of all protective devices.
9 Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's

data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers
meet specified requirements.
31.3.5 GROUNDING
1 Comply with Section 21 – Part 22 "Earthing and Bonding" for materials and
installation requirements.
31.3.6 CLEANING
1 On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original
finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.

31.3.7 ADJUSTING
1 After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match
original finish.
2 Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization

equipment throughout normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and
secondary voltages and tap settings and submit with test results.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 32 – 11KV SWITCHGEAR
32.1 GENERAL

Contract and Section 21 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
32.1.2 SUMMARY
1 This Section includes medium voltage switchgear (11 kV) and associated
auxiliary equipment.
2 Description of Work: medium voltage (MV) switchgear installations comprise the

following:
a. Indoor withdrawable metal clad (LSC2B) MV switchgear.

b. Protective relays
c. Control power supply.
d. Metering instruments
e. Multifunction metering, protection and control units.
f. Equipment supports.
g. Earthing of switchgear.
h. Ancillary work.
i. Connection to BMS/SCADA system of electrical power supply network,
including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc…
Related Sections include the following:
a. Section 21: Part 1 "General Provisions for Electrical Installation".

b. Section 21: Part 22 "Earthing and Bonding".
11KV SWITCHGEAR S21P32 - Page 1 of 24

c. Section 21: Part 35 "11 KV 3 Core XLPE Cables".
32.1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but
a. Manufacturers' catalogues, detailed description of construction, provisions

for extension, compliance with the Standards, dimensions and weights,
operating characteristics, operating curves and error curves (VT, CT) for
all switchgear, control gear, protective gear, metering gear etc.
b. Details of miscellaneous items including pilot lights, cabling or wiring,

incoming and outgoing feeder terminal fittings, supports, labels,
interlocks, bracing etc.
a. Plans and elevations, with indication of switchgear mounted components,
dimensions and weights.
b. Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
c. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear
and busbars and types and locations of protective gear (relays, metering
instruments, CTs, VTs), detailed wiring diagrams of control, metering and
protection functions, etc.
d. Schematic and elementary diagrams of control circuits.
e. Block diagrams for BMS/SCADA interface points.
f. Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.

g. Physical arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, instrument
transformers, busbars, connections etc.
h. Dimensions and weights of control power supply and other auxiliary
equipment or components.
i. Calculation of current and voltage transformers characteristics to verify
their suitability for proper unsaturated operation under site fault condition
and their adequacy for relay/wires/metering requirements.
3 Point-wise compliance statement to the Specifications, duly signed by

Manufacturer and the Contractor.
4 Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to equipment

manufacture:
a. Schedule of selected circuit breakers, relays and control gear, with
complete identification of each component and its characteristics.
5 Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the
relevant IEC Standards, including the following:
b. Impulse withstand-voltage tests
a. Power frequency withstand-voltage tests.

b. Temperature-rise tests.
c. Short time current tests.
d. Verification of making and breaking capacity.
e. Mechanical endurance/operation tests.
f. Verification of degrees of protection for persons against contact with live
and moving parts.
g. Internal arc tests.
h. Protection degree test to IEC 60529.
6 Routine Tests: Each complete switchgear unit is to undergo routine tests at the
manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine
test reports, prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and
guaranteed rating of equipment under site conditions.

Article.
9 Maintenance Data: For switchgear to include in the maintenance manuals.
10 Submit a list of spare parts and tools required for 5 years of operation as
expected under local conditions. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit
prices, and source of supply.
11 Coordination Study: Submit protection coordination study, including pick-up

settings and time- grading, together with time-current curves, equipment damage
curves and range of adjustments etc. as required to coordinate with upstream and
downstream protective devices of the complete system based on coordination
curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective short circuit
currents at various points.
1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing

switchgear similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
2 Standards: Equipment, component parts, and installation are to be in full

compliance with QGEWC Specifications and requirements, and subject to their
approvals.
3 Standards: Equipment and component parts shall comply with the following
Standards:
a. Common Clauses for MV Switchgear and Control Gear Standards: IEC

62271-1.
b. A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages

above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV: IEC 62271-200.
c. MV A.C. Circuit Breakers: IEC 62271-100.
d. Insulation Coordination: IEC 60071.
e. MV A.C. switch-fuse combinations: IEC 62271-105.
f. A.C. Disconnectors (isolators) and Earthing Switches: IEC 62271-102.
g. MV Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV and less than 52 kV: IEC
62271-103.
h. Surge Arrestors: IEC 60099.
i. Metering and Protective Current Transformers (CTs): IEC 61869-2.
j. Metering and Protective voltage Transformers (VTs): IEC 61869-3.
k. Relays: IEC 60255.
l. Reading Instruments: IEC 60051.
m. Watt-Hour Meters: IEC 62052-11, 62053-11, 62053-22 & 60051.
n. Power Transformers: IEC 60076.
o. Sulfur Hexa-Fluoride: IEC 60376.
p. Fuses: IEC 60282-1.
q. Climate Conditions: IEC 60721-3-3 & 60721-3-4.
32.1.5 WARRANTY

a. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

1 Store so condensation will not form on or in switchgear.
2 Apply temporary heat where required to obtain suitable service conditions.
3 Handle switchgear using factory-installed lifting provisions.
32.1.7 COORDINATION
1 Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear with other construction and room
dimensions. Advise the Engineer in case of conflict.
2 Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases.
3 Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1 Spare Parts: Provide spare parts, as recommended by the manufacturer, for one
year maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for emergency
replacement due to accidental breakage or failure. Spare parts are to include, but
are not limited to, the following:
a. Two sets of each type of lamp, fuse, auxiliary switch, trip coil, control
switch, selector switch, neon indicator and the like.
b. Complete set of main contacts of each rating.
c. Complete set of breaker/switch auxiliary contacts.
d. Complete mechanism of breaker/switch of each type.
e. Drive motor of each type.
inspection, testing, operation and maintenance including levering crank, manual
charging handle, manual shutter operator, testing jumpers and MV test bushings,
set of rail extensions, digital micro ohm-meter, set of mobile lifting and handling
equipment etc. as necessary for the type of switchgear.
1 Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed
by the Engineer. Witness test shall include complete routine and function testing
on all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for
approval prior to test conduction. Factory witness test shall include for business
class air tickets, five stars Hotel full accommodation, transportation and all test
expenses for two persons from the Engineer’s/ Employer’s side.

32.2 PRODUCTS
1 Busbars: Air-insulated, high conductivity, electrolytic copper, modular, designed

to withstand worst short-circuit conditions without allowing permissible
temperature rise at ambient conditions to be exceeded, in accordance with the
Standards. Busbar connection from one unit of switchgear to another is to be
expansion/contraction compensated, plated and bolted. Bolted or clamped contact
surfaces shall be properly tin or electro-silver plated as necessary. Busbar supports
are to be flame-retardant, track-resistant, glass polyester, porcelain or equally
reliable fiberglass reinforced epoxy to approved standards.
2 Busbars: shall be tin-plated and insulated either with epoxy insulation applied
by the fluid-dip process or heat shrinkable insulating sleeves. Busbar
connections shall be insulated with easily installed, performed vinyl boots,
secured by nylon hardware.
3 Earth Bus: Copper of not less than minimum size required by the Standards,
designed to withstand worst earth- fault current of power system without showing
any signs of thermal or mechanical damage or degradation. Earth bus is to extend
full length of switchgear.
4 Power Cable Terminations: Fixed bolted type, unless otherwise specified,

complete with standard fittings and accessories for connection of incoming and
outgoing cables. Cable compartment is to be designed to permit cables to enter
enclosure and connect at respective terminals from below, or as shown on the
Drawings. Terminations are to include appropriate sealing ends, fittings and
accessories for type of cable used, including stress cones or other stress relieving
accessories, heat shrinkable sleeving, end boxes or end bushings and fittings of
any kind necessary to support and protect specified cable ends.
5 Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall
be made of Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support
cables.
6 Switchgear to be provided with Local/Remote selector switch for controlling the

switchgear either from local or remotely via BMS/SCADA system.
7 Potential Indicators: Neon indicators are to be provided at front of each switchgear

unit, one per phase, using capacitive potential divider to indicate voltage state on
cable terminals.
8 The primary windings of VTs are to be protected by a HRC fuses.
9 The secondary windings of VTs are to be protected by MCBs located at the LV

compartment. Each MCB is to be equipped with necessary auxiliary contacts for
alarm, interlock, BMS/SCADA interface, etc. applications.

10 All secondary circuits are to be wire with PVC insulated flexible 750V copper
wires, with a minimum cross section of 1.5mm2 for control, alarms, signaling
etc..., and 2.5mm2 and 4mm2 for voltage and current circuits respectively.
11 The secondary circuits of the current transformers are to be connected to terminal

blocks located inside the LV compartment. These terminal blocks are to be
equipped with suitable shorting facilities.
12 DC supplies to each cubicle are to be protected by suitable MCBs equipped with

necessary auxiliary contacts to give alarms in case of MCB trips.
13 Interlocks are to be provided on switchgear so that:
a. Circuit breaker cannot be isolated, earthed or put into service position

when closed.
b. Access to cable compartments cannot be made unless earthing switch is
closed.
c. Earthing switch cannot be opened unless cable compartment is closed.
14 Keys and padlocks are to be provided for manually interlocking two or more units
if required. Electrical and mechanical interlocks are to be provided for automatic
safe and functional operation of the system as shown on the Drawings/Schedules.
15 Earthing facilities are to be provided for earthing and/or short-circuiting the feeder
at its terminals through built-in, safety-interlocked, quick-make earthing switch,
without use of loose attachments.
16 Metal cases of instruments and control devices are to be connected by PVC

insulated copper conductors of not less than 2.5mm2 cross-section to nearest earth
bar.
17 Ferrules: Cable and wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved
type at each termination. Color coding is to be as required by the Regulations and
the applicable Section of the Specification.
18 Test terminal blocks are to be provided inside insulating covered bases for
instruments, instrument transformers, relays etc. in LV compartments.
19 Components are to be interchangeable when of same rating and function.
20 Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures and structure are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with two coats of
baked enamel, color standard gray (RAL 7033) unless otherwise approved. Finish
is to be vermin and fungus proof and suitable for worst climatic conditions on site.
21 MV Switchgear Ratings:
a. Rated Voltage: 12 kV.

b. Nominal Service Voltage: 11 kV.

c. Rated Frequency: 50 Hz.

d. Rated One Minute Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (rms) to Earth
and Between Phases: 28 kV.
e. Rated Impulse Withstand-Voltage (1.2/50 micro-sec) (peak): 75 kV.
f. Rated Normal Current of Busbars: as shown on the drawings and
specified under "MV Switchgear Assemblies" hereof.
g. Rated Short Time Withstand-Current: 25 kA for 3 second as a minimum
or as shown on drawings.
h. Rated Peak Withstand-Current: 63 kA.
i. Passive internal arc classification for metal clad LSC2B switchgear is
designated as follows:
Classification IAC AFLR
Internal arc 25 kA 3 s
j. For metal clad switchgear LSC2B, in addition to passive arc protection
specified above, provide active internal arc protection through fiber optic
detectors to monitor arc flashes in all compartments, current increase
monitoring on main incoming, arc flash and current input / output sensors
units and arc detection master unit for power supply interruption when both
arc flash and current increase signals are detected simultaneously and with
response time not exceeding 10 msec. The arc protection shall operate such
that if fault occurs in main bus, incoming, bus tie sections or feeder breaker
compartment, the supply to the faulted incomer or bus shall be interrupted
and a trip signal shall be sent to the bus tie breaker. Furthermore, if fault
occurs in feeder cable compartment, the respective feeder breaker shall be
tripped.
a. Arc detection master unit shall be provided for each switchgear. It
shall interface with all arc flash and current input / output sensors
through communication network to perform the active arc protection
of the switchgear. The unit shall have a disturbance recording facility
and fault analysis of the arc events. The unit shall be provided with
necessary processor, memory, built in battery, key function buttons
and a 5 inches screen as a minimum that displays, captures and
historical logs of location, time and date of arc events.
22 Auxiliary Power Supply Rating:
a. Rated Supply Voltage of Closing and Opening Devices and Auxiliary

Circuits: 110
d.c. V.
23 Switchgear should be in full compliance with QGEWC/Kahramaa requirements

and subject to their approval.
32.2.2 WITHDRAWABLE METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
1 Type: For installation indoor categorized (LSC2B-PM), four compartments with

metallic partitions comprising air insulated single busbar system, horizontally
isolated, withdrawable circuit breakers, floor mounted, free standing, modular

design of matching units to form a continuous integral metal-clad switchgear

assembly extendable at either end.
2 Degree of Protection: Switchgear is to have a degree of protection against contact

with live parts or contact with movable parts and against external effects of IP 4X
in connected position according to IEC 62271-1and IEC 60529, when in the
connected position.
3 Construction: Each switchgear unit shall be divided into main switchgear

compartment, busbar compartment, cable compartment and LV compartment and
shall comprise withdrawable part and stationary part. Compartments are to have
bolted, interconnected and earthed metal partitions. Enclosures, structure and
partitions are to be galvanized steel.
4 Withdrawable part is to comprise circuit breaker with operating and control

mechanism, isolating contacts and front shield completing the compartment
enclosure, all mounted on one metal truck or carriage, provided with racking
mechanism to allow for moving the withdrawable part between connected,
disconnected/test (control circuits are connected) and removed positions. Isolating
contacts are to be self-aligning, pressure type, silver plated copper, fully shrouded,
and visible when in disconnected position.
5 Stationary part is to comprise the various compartments and required fixed

components of the unit, with all operating, monitoring, setting and adjusting
devices, protective relays, key interlocking and padlocking devices accessible to
operator at front panel.
6 Front panel is to include open and closed indicating lamps, on and off circuit
breaker control switch, mimic diagram, pad lockable earthing switch handle with
indications of position and direction of rotation, and potential indicators, as a
general requirement for all units. Particulars of additional components, relays and
indicating instruments are specified under article Switchgear Assemblies hereof or
are shown on the Drawings.
a. A mimic diagram shall be provided on the front of the cubicles. The
mimic shall indicate bussing, connections, switching devices, earth
switches and voltage transformers as per the single line diagram. The
mimic shall be painted or made of black colored plastic strips, 1/2 in
wide, fastened flat against the panel face according to manufacturer’s
standards."
7 Metal safety shutters are to automatically close isolator spouts in fixed

compartment when withdrawable part is in disconnected position. Shutters are to
be double latched for extra safety, pad lockable, painted red and with the word
BUSBARS marked in white on front of busbar shutters and painted yellow with
the word CABLE marked in white on cable end shutters.
8 Metal Truck: unless a circuit breaker is provided with a self truck, each switchgear
room shall be provided with a 4-wheel type, with handle for racking and locking
breaker into in-service or disconnected positions. Truck is to be of self-aligning

design running on fixed steel rails, continuously earthed.
9 Interlocks: In addition to those specified in Paragraph "General Requirements"

hereof, interlocks are also to be provided to:
a. Discharge the stored energy mechanism of a circuit breaker upon

insertion or withdrawal from service position.
b. Prevent disconnecting auxiliary circuits while circuit breaker is in service
position.
c. Prevent moving breaker into service position whilst auxiliary circuits are
not connected and/or earthing switch closed.
d. Prevent complete withdrawal of circuit breaker whilst auxiliary circuits are
connected.
e. Prevent closing of earthing switch when circuit breaker is between
disconnected and service position.
f. Prevent transition from test position to either disconnect or service
position while the breaker is closed.
g. It shall not be possible to operate the busbar-earthing device if any of the
circuit breakers associated with the busbar to be earthed is in the normal
service position.
h. Circuit breaker shall be mechanically prevented from being inserted into
the service position when the busbar earth switch of the associated busbar
is closed.
10 Access to LV and auxiliary wiring is to be from front of unit for control, protection,
test terminal blocks and associated connections. Multi-pin, disconnectable, lock-
in type plug and socket arrangement is to be provided between withdrawable and
fixed parts of switchgear.
11 Anti-Condensation heaters with thermostat, switch and pilot lamp, and of rating
recommended by manufacturer are to be provided in each section of switchgear
assembly.
12 Wiring diagram, suitably protected and located inside LV compartment of each

unit, is to indicate all data and components related to the particular unit and its
external circuitry.
13 Insulating Mat: Anti-slip, synthetic, insulating, rubber mat, minimum 5 mm thick

and 900 mm wide, with heavy canvas lining on lower face, is to be provided for
full length in front of switchgear assembly.
14 Busbar earthing is to be provided by means of manufacturer's pre-designed, truck-

mounted transferable unit.
15 Voltage transformers and auxiliary control power transformers with current

limiting fuses are to be provided on withdrawable trucks, unless otherwise
specified or shown on the Drawings.
16 Provide trip circuit supervision for all cubicles. Provide trip indicating lamps.

17 11 kV Switchgear shall be of the extendible type, ready for future simple addition
of switchgear when required in the other project phases. Control, monitoring and
metering functions shall be based on industry standard non-proprietary protocol
enabling communication with other systems (such as Modbus, Profibus, etc.).
32.2.3 MV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1 The circuit breakers shall be of the Vacuum type. Closing mechanisms shall be
operated by motor charged springs with release mechanisms as specified.
Operating mechanisms shall have a proven operational endurance equivalent to
the mechanical life of the circuit breaking unit and consistent with a low
maintenance requirement. Surge suppresser / arrester are to be used on each main
and outgoing feeder breaker.
2 The circuit breakers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 62271-100 and
62271-200. All circuit breakers having the same rating are to be identical in
arrangement and shall be interchangeable. The circuit breakers shall be covered by
test certificates issued by a recognized testing station or certified by an
independent authority.
3 The Circuit Breaker shall be suitable for Auto-reclosing duty. The requirement of
simultaneity of poles (Pole discrepancies) during closing and opening operation
shall comply with clause 5.101 of IEC 62271-100.
4 Adequate external clearances and surface creepage distance shall be provided to

ensure satisfactory performance under service condition.
5 The interrupting chambers of circuit breakers shall be of robust manufacture to

withstand the internal pressure produced when clearing rated short-circuit currents.
The maximum total break time from trip initiation to final arc extinction shall be
less than 60m.sec.
6 The circuit breakers shall be complete with high integrity operating and isolating
mechanisms, primary and secondary disconnecting devices, auxiliary contacts,
manual tripping facilities, operations counter, mechanical position indicator,
control wiring, auxiliary relays and contractors as required.
7 Unless otherwise indicated, the category of circuit breaker shall be M2, E2, C2 as
defined by IEC 62271-100 and shall have been tested accordingly. The Circuit
Breaker shall also have been tested for inductive current switching in compliance
to IEC 61233 with maximum overvoltage factor of 2.2 p.u. on any switching duty.
8 The circuit breaker shall have been type tested for capacitive current switching in
accordance with IEC 62271-100.
9 Particulars: In addition to the ratings specified in paragraph "MV Switchgear

Ratings" above, circuit breakers are to have the following ratings:

a. Rated normal current: As shown on the drawings

b. Rated Short-Circuit Breaking Current at Nominal Service Voltage and 30
% Percentage D.C. Component in Accordance with IEC 62271-100: 25
kA.
c. Rated Short-Circuit Making Current (peak): 63 kA
d. Rated duty operating sequence: O-3 min – CO - 3 min.-CO
e. Rated Transient Recovery Voltage (TRV) for Terminal Faults (peak) not
exceeding:
20.6 kV otherwise, surge arrester shall be used on each main and outgoing
feeder.
f. Rated Cable Charging Breaking Current: 25kA.
g. Rated (single) Capacitor Breaking Current: 400 A minimum.
10 Operating Mechanism: mechanically and electrically trip- free, stored energy,

spring loaded, manually charged by lever or hand-crank, electrically charged by
suitably rated universal motor, and capable of one complete off-on-off cycle in
case of loss of control power. The operating mechanism shall include anti-
pumping device and incorporate manual trip facility fitted with a guard. It shall be
possible to manually discharge the springs. Circuit breaker shall have electrical
close solenoid and one trip coil, mechanical on and off status indicator, mechanical
and electrical on/off push buttons, mechanical indication of spring charged, non-
resettable operation counter and auxiliary contacts to satisfy all functions specified
or shown on the Drawings. Five N.C. and five N.O. spare auxiliary contacts for
future use shall be provided in addition to those required different applications. All
spare auxiliary contacts shall be wired to terminal blocks inside the LV
compartment marked as spare. Auxiliary relays shall be provided where
insufficient auxiliary contacts are available. Insertion of manual spring charging
lever or hand- crank shall automatically disconnect the motor.
11 Automatic tripping is to be by indirect auxiliary power through CT operated

protective relays.
12 The tripping, closing and auxiliary functions shall be capable of operating at

control voltages between 85 per cent and 110 per cent of the rated values.
13 Interchangeability: circuit breakers of different current ratings are not to be

interchangeable. Circuit breakers of same current rating are to be wired alike and
interchangeable.
14 Mechanical endurances of circuit breakers is to be class M2 according to IEC

62271-100.
32.2.4 PROTECTIVE RELAYS, DEVICES AND AUXILIARIES
1 Protective Relays: Digital, programmable, Solid state, static, sealed type, having
high immunity to electric field, with modular design, suitable for operation at 55
deg. C ambient temperature, mounted in dust-tight steel enclosures with cover,
with self supervision system test buttons for testing without removing from case,
and built in self regulated power supply unit and installed where shown on the

Drawings. Adjustments and settings are to be accessible and visible from front of
relay.
2 Protective Relay: shall be supplied with DC power from the switchgear power
supply, and to be provided with a pilot LED which shall be lit under healthy
operating conditions. Relay shall be provided with a self supervision system which
upon power supply interruption or a fault condition shall switch off the LED and
to initiate an alarm. The rated current and voltage for current & voltage sensing
relays shall match that of the corresponding current and voltage transformers of
the switchgear respectively. The continuous rating of the output contacts shall not
be less than 5A
3 Interference and test voltages of the solid state relays are to be as follows:
a. Insulation test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and the relay
frame work as per IEC 60255-5: 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.
b. Impulse test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and the relay
frame work as per IEC 60255-3: 5 kV, 1.2/50 micro sec.
c. High frequency test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and the
relay framework as per IEC 60255-6: 2.5 kV, 1MHZ.
d. Spark interference test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and
the relay framework as per SS346 15 03 class 3: 4-8 kV.
4 Over Current Relay: 3 phase, non-directional, solid state type with two setting
stages as follows:
e. Low setting stage for overload protection with current setting range of 50
% to 250 % of rated current and adjustable definite time and inverse time
operation modes as per IEC 60255-151.
f. High setting stage (instantaneous) for short circuit protection with current
setting range up to 4000% of rated current.
g. For transformer protection the time and instantaneous units shall not
operate on inrush or due to harmonic currents during transformer
energization or on system faults. Separate additional harmonic restraint
relays may have to be provided, if required based on the transformer
manufacturer's data.
5 Directional Over Current Relay: 3 phase, directional, solid state type for overload
protection with current setting range of 50 % to 250 % of rated current in steps of
5%, and adjustable definite time and inverse time operation modes as per IEC
60255-151.
6 Earth fault relay, non-directional, solid state type with two setting stages as
follows:
a. Low setting stage of 10 % to 80 % of rated current and adjustable definite

time and inverse time operation modes as per IEC 60255-151.
b. High setting stage (instantaneous) with current setting range up to 1000%
of rated current.

7 Restricted earth fault relay, on secondary of distribution transformers and

generators having a solidly grounded neutral, where specified or indicated on the
Drawings, shall be high impedance, instantaneous differential type, current
calibrated from 1% - 20% of phase current.
8 Differential relay protection is required to be provided for 11 kV busbars.
9 Under-Voltage and Over Voltage Relays: three or Single phase, solid state definite
time type with the following setting ranges:
a. Under Voltage Relay: 60 % to 90 % of rated voltage and 0.2 to 6 sec time

delay.
b. Over Voltage Relay: 80 % to 130 % of rated voltage and 0.2 to 6 sec time
delay.
10 Under-Voltage and Phase-Sequence Relays: Under-voltage relay is to be time-

delay type, with selectable time/voltage characteristics 0.1 - 1.0 seconds for
settings between 60% and 90% of normal voltage, sensed at VT secondary.
Combined under-voltage and phase- sequence relays shall be provided where
specified or shown on the Drawings. Phase- sequence relay is to prevent operation
(closing) of respective circuit breaker in case of nonconformance of phase
rotation.
11 Each relay shall be provided with an interface data link (IEC 61850 or
equivalent) and adequate number of contacts for tripping annunciation, and
interface with BMS/ SCADA functions.
12 Auxiliary Relay: Suitably rated with sufficient number of N.O. and N.C. contacts
for operation in conjunction with protective relays or control/interlocking
requirements. Relay is to have two
N.O. and two N.C. spare contacts.
13 Surge Arresters on the main incoming feeders: Gapless, metal oxide, heavy duty
type, silicon polymer housing with the following characteristics:
a. Arrester rated voltage: 12 kV

b. Maximum continuous operating voltage Uc: 10.2 kV
c. Nominal discharge current (8/20 micro sec peak): 10 kA
d. Energy input capacity: 3.5 kJ/k
V
Surge arresters shall be vertical, free standing, explosion-proof type, with

pressure-relief device and discharge counter. Submit complete data and
characteristics in accordance with IEC 60099 testing requirements and
procedures.
14 Surge Arresters on Outgoing Circuit Breakers: Where specified or shown on the

Drawings, surge arresters shall be gap-less, metal oxide, heavy duty type, silicon
polymer housing with the following characteristics:

a. Arrester Rated Voltage: 10 kV

b. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (Uc): 8.4 kV
c. Nominal Discharge Current (8/20 micro-sec peak): 10 kA
d. Energy Input Capacity: 3.5 kJ/k
V
e. Line discharge class (IEC 60099-4): 2
f. TOV capability (with prior energy input) > 1.25*Uc
Surge arresters shall be vertical, free standing, explosion-proof type. Submit

complete data and characteristics in accordance with IEC 60099 testing
requirements and procedures.
15 Control power supply is to be a complete system, including main LV switch,

battery charger, batteries, racks and connectors, factory assembled and completely
pre-wired to minimize field installation.
16 Provide 25 % spare circuit breakers for the DC distribution boards.
17 Provide anti-condensation heaters and hygrostat.
18 Batteries: Nickel Cadmium type, of capacity sufficient to supply all MV

switchgear auxiliary loads, relays, coils, lamps, alarms etc. for 8 hours, to close all
circuit breakers in rapid succession, and trip all circuit breakers simultaneously
with the charger off. Battery is to be heavy-duty type with transparent containers,
maximum and minimum electrolyte level indicators and alarm initiating relay in
case of D.C. output failure. Battery calculation shall be submitted according to
IEEE 1115 based on simultaneous trip of all circuit breakers in T1 (1 minute)
period, continuous load in T2 (478 minutes) period, and successive close of all
circuit breakers in T3 (1 minute) period. Batteries shall be sized for nominal
system voltage +10% - 15%. Calculation shall consider the following factors:
a. 1.15 design margin.
b. 1.25 aging factor.
19 Battery Racks: Generously dimensioned termite resistant hardware with

electrolyte resistant paint finish, or square sectioned steel tubes treated with
electrolyte resistant extruded coating. Fittings and connectors are to be approved
and certified electrolyte resisting and corrosion proof materials.
20 Battery Charger: Automatic voltage controlled, solid state type, suitable for float
and boost charging, returning batteries to 90% full charge within 4 hours after full
discharge, plus full duty cycle required of batteries. Charger is to operate from 240
V supply, 50 Hz, three or single- phase, giving specified D.C. output and having
minimum range of adjustment of 100%
- 125% float voltage and 110% - 135% boost voltage. Ripple is not to exceed 1%
of nominal output voltage. Output voltage regulation tolerance shall be +/- 1%.
Output transient response shall be +/- 5% maximum of the DC voltage setting for
100% step load changes with recovery time of 500 m sec to steady state. Charger

is to be rated 125% of its nominal full load and is to have its own automatic control
against overcharging and overload protection. Charger is to have a.c. voltmeter,
D.C. voltmeter, D.C. ammeter, main incoming circuit breaker, pilot lights on a.c.
input and D.C. output, and earth fault detector with alarm indication. Battery
charger sizing calculations shall consider the following:
a. 1.1 design margin.
b. 1.4 battery inefficiency factor.
21 Chargers shall be provided with the following indications and alarm facility:
a. Indicating lamps for AC supply to rectifier

b. Indicating lamps for DC supply to rectifier
c. Indicating lamps for float and boost charging operation
d. Alarm on charger and mains failure
22 Battery Charger Type: Dual charger-type, parallel redundant, with each module
capable of carrying the full load requirements of the system.
23 Load test on DC system shall be carried out.
32.2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS - INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1 Provide metering Instruments and instrument transformers as specified and/or

2 Metering instruments and instrument transformers are to comply with the

Local Power Authority's requirements.
3 Instruments Generally: Housed in enameled, square steel cases for switchboard

flush installation, size 144 x 144 mm with 5 mm frontal, protected and sealed white
background dials with black pointers (in general) and anti- parallax shadow-proof
glass covers. Accuracy of instruments is to be class 1.5 unless otherwise specified.
Moving parts are to be damped, revolving on hard-stone bases, with zero
adjustment screw.
4 A.C. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, operating from VT secondaries, and with the
following characteristics:
a. Measuring Range: 0-15 kV with red line marked on nominal voltage, 90

degrees decimal scale.
b. Overload Factor: 1.2 times rated voltage continuous and twice rated
voltage for 1 minute.

5 D.C. Voltmeters: Moving coil type, with the following characteristics:
a. Measuring Range: 0-140 V.

b. Overload Factor: 1.2 times rated voltage continuous and twice rated
voltage for 1 minute.
6 Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position, rotary type, with cam-operated contacts,

permitting line- to-line and line- to-neutral voltage readings, and with off
position.
7 AC Ammeters: Moving iron type, operating from CT secondary, and with the
following characteristics:
a. Measuring Range :1.25 CT primary amps,90 degrees decimal scale

b. Overload Capacity: 1.2 times measuring range continuous, twice
measuring range for 2 minutes, and fifty times measuring range for 1
second.
8 D.C. Ammeters: Moving coil type, with the following characteristics:
a. Measuring Range: 0-220 A.

b. Overload Capacity: Ten times measuring range for 5 seconds.
9 Power Factor Meters: Totally enclosed, 3-phase, electro- dynamic type, with
cross-coil meter movement and accuracy of 1% from at least 20% - 100% rated
current at rated voltage.
a. Measuring Range: 0.1 conductive-unity-0.1 capacitive
10 Watt-meters: Totally enclosed, 3-phase, electro-dynamic type, with overload

factor of 1.2 times continuous.
a. Measuring range: 0 kW & 300 kW
11 Watt-Hour Meters: 3-phase, to IEC 62052-11, 62053-11, 62053-22 and IEC

60051, unless otherwise required by the Local Power Authority, for operation
from 5A CT secondaries.
12 Frequency Meters: Vibration (reed) type, rated frequency 50 Hz, class 1, rated
frequency range 45-55 Hz, and unaffected by voltage variations of +/-20%.
13 Current Transformers (CTs): Indoor dry type (cast- resin), with the following
characteristics:
a. Metering (general): Class 1.0, 5 A secondary and/or as shown on drawing

b. Protection Class: 5P10, 5 A secondary and/or as shown on drawing
c. Continuous rating Factor: 1.2.
d. Troid current transformer enclosing the three phase conductors shall be
provided for zero sequence earth fault protection where required on

drawings.
e. Tariff Kilowatt-Hour-Metering: Class 0.5, 5 A secondary (check with
power authority).
f. Current transformers for all types of differential and restricted earth fault
protection shall be class X to IEC 61869-2.
g. Characteristic of CT including knee point voltage (Vk), maximum
magnetizing / exciting current (Imag @ Vk) and CT secondary resistance
(Rct) shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval by the Contractor as part
of his CT calculation.
Rated primary current, core size and accuracy limit factors are to be determined in
accordance with nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
CT is to perform under specified conditions without exceeding accuracy limit.
Submit error curves for approval. Thermal short-circuit rating is to be the same as
specified for the MV switchgear with dynamic short-circuit rating of 2.5 times
thermal rating.
14 Voltage Transformers (VTs): Magnetic, single-phase, indoor, dry type (cast-

resin), with the following characteristics:
a. Rated Voltage:
- Primary: 11/SQRT 3 kV.
- Star Secondary: 110/SQRT 3 V.
- Open Delta Secondary: 110/3 V.
b. Accuracy Class: 3P/1.0.
c. Rated Voltage Factor: 1.2 continuous, 1.9 for 30 seconds.
Check associated burden and ensure VT can perform satisfactorily under specified
conditions. Submit error curves for approval.
32.2.6 MV SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES
1 MV switchgear assembly is to comprise the following
a. Reference: as shown on Drawings
b. MV Switchgear Type: Metal-clad withdrawable
c. MV Switchgear Assembly is to comprise the following:

- Incoming feeders from Kahramaa 11KV network as shown on
drawings.
- Tie breakers along the busbar, between the bus sections as shown on
drawings.
- Outgoing feeder units as shown on the drawings.
- Auxiliary power unit(s).

2 Incoming feeder unit from Kahramaa 11KV network, is to comprise the following:
a. Set of copper busbars, As shown on the drawings

b. Withdrawable MV circuit breaker, As shown on the drawings
c. Earthing switch
d. 3 CTs for ammeters, ratio 400/5 A
e. 3 CTs for protection, ratio 400/5 A
f. 3 ammeters, measuring range 0-500A
g. 1 Watthour/watthour demand meter (15 min. demand interval)
h. 1 IDMT relay, extremely inverse
i. Withdrawable VT unit comprising three single phase VT’s (Y-Y) with set
of fuses 0.3A.
j. 1 Voltmeter with selector switch
k. Additional relays:
- Under/over voltage relay
- Negative phase sequence.
- Over/Under frequency relay
- Phase sequence/phase failure (47)
- Reverse power
- Lock-out relay
l. Set of cable terminations and accessories for incoming cables and
outgoing cables to Kahramaa requirements
m. Set of voltage indicators using capacitive voltage dividers
n. Set of surge arrestors
o. Set of short circuit passage indicators to locate damaged sections of the
network
p. Key locks
q. Electrical and mechanical interlocking components to allow only two out
of three breakers to close (e.g. for two incoming and bus coupler).
3 Outgoing feeder unit to transformer is to comprise the following:

b. Withdrawable circuit breaker, As shown on the drawings
c. 3 CTs for ammeters, ratio 400/5 A
d. 3 CTs for protection, ratio 400/5 A
e. 3 ammeters, measuring range 0-500A
f. 1 IDMT relay, extremely inverse
g. Set of voltage indicators using capacitive voltage dividers.
h. Shunt trip coil, operated by restricted earth fault protection on transformer
secondary.
i. Lock-out key and padlocks
j. set of cable terminations and accessories
4 Bus-coupler unit is to comprise the following:
a. Set of copper busbars, rated as shown on the drawings

b. withdrawable circuit breaker, rated as shown on the drawings
c. 3 CTs for protection, ratio 400/5A
d. IDMT relay, very inverse characteristic
e. Interlocks
- Electrical interlocking with feeder 1 and feeder 2.

- Key interlocks with f1and f2.

- Mechanical interlocking with f1 and f2.
f. Two sets of isolatable VTs with hbc fuses; one on each side of bus section.
g. One voltmeter with selector switch, one each side of bus section CB.
5 Instrument and metering unit is to comply with the Local Power Authority's
requirements for consumer metering and is to comprise the following:

b. Withdrawable VT unit comprising three single phase VTs (Y-Y) with set
of fuses 0.3 A, for protection
c. three CTs for consumer metering (as required by power authority)
d. LV terminal blocks and protective fuses or C.B.
e. One 3 phase active power meter, balanced or out-of-balance phases (type
Cyd) with point indicator (as required by power authority)
f. One 3 phase reactive power meter, with same characteristics but without
the point indicator. (as required by power authority)
g. One voltmeter with selector switch.
6 Auxiliary LV Power Unit: 15 kVA, and to comprise the following:

a. Set of copper busbars.
b. Withdrawable auxiliary control power transformer unit.
c. Built-in set of protective fuses (high and low voltage sides).
d. LV terminal block, of plug-in type.
32.2.7 MICROPROCESSOR BASED METERING AND MONITORING UNIT
1 General: A microprocessor based metering unit is to be provided on the incoming

and/or outgoing feeder panels of the MV switchgear as specified in items of
Paragraph "MV Switchgear assemblies" above and/or as shown on the drawings.
Unit shall be capable of monitoring and displaying the functions listed below and
the capability to communicate data.
2 Direct reading metered values are to be displayed by the unit as follows:
a. AC amperes in each phase, +/-0.5% accuracy

b. AC voltage, phase to phase, phase to neutral, +/-0.5% accuracy
c. Megawatts, +/-1% accuracy
d. Megavars, +/-1% accuracy
e. Megavoltamperes, +/-1% accuracy
f. Power factor, +/-2% accuracy
g. Frequency, +/-0.1 Hz accuracy
h. Megawatt demand (5,10,15,30 minute interval field programmable), +/-1%
accuracy
i. Megawatt , megavars and VA hours, +/-1%
accuracy j. %THD , +/- 1%

3 Unit shall be provided with an interface data link (IEC 61850 or equivalent) for
connection with BMS/SCADA systems.
4 Trip and/or Alarm: Device is to trip and/or alarm on the following conditions as
a. Voltage phase loss, if any phase RMS is less than 50% of the nominal line
voltage.
b. Current phase loss, if the smallest phase is less than 1/16 of the largest
phase value.
c. Line voltage phase unbalance, programmable from 5 to 40% of nominal
in 5% increments.
d. Voltage phase reversal
e. Over-voltage, programmable from 105 to 140% in 5% increments
f. Under-voltage, programmable from 95 to 60% in 5% increments
5 Device is to have a time delay for the trip and/or alarm settings for over-voltage,
under- voltage and phase unbalance. Delay is to range from 0 to 8 seconds in 1-
second intervals.
6 Display screen and LEDs are to indicate both trip and alarm conditions. Cause of
a trip or alarm is to be indicated on the display window. Device is also to signify
reverse power flow, negative power factor and negative kVAR. Unit is to trip in
the event of an internal malfunction.
7 Control power shall be drawn from the monitored incoming AC line terminal
connections. Device is to have non-volatile memory and not require battery
backup. In the event of a power failure, the device is to retain preset parameters.
8 Unit shall allow user to disable undesired values or functions and to later reactivate
them if required. In the event of trip or alarm condition, a built-in reset button is
to allow a manual reset of the unit. Unit is also to be capable of being remotely
reset via its communication port.
9 Addressable communication card is to be provided, capable of transmitting all
data, including trip data, over the local area network/Ethernet to the BMS/SCADA
Management Level Network.
32.3 EXECUTION
32.3.1 INSTALLATION
1 Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and
components may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as
approved, provided the required functions and operations are accomplished;
follow the identification of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease
checking and building maintenance procedures.
2 Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for

3 Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
4 Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves
bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and
that they are properly installed.
5 Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and
level, before grouting in holding-down bolts.
6 Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
7 Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
A's requirements.
8 Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in Section 21 - Part 22

"Earthing and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
9 Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets,

and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
1 Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as

specified in Part 1 of Section 21.
2 Diagram and Instructions: Frame under clear acrylic plastic on the front of
switchgear.
a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including

control and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
b. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating
instructions, for a copy of the maintenance manual.
c. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
components, and major loads.
32.3.3 CONNECTIONS
1 Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's

published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

1 Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to the
Engineer.
2 Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness and as recommended

by the manufacturer and check phasing of buses, contact alignment and
clearances.
3 Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections,

including current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and
relays.
4 Before energization carry out at least the following tests:
a. Insulation resistance on busbars (with circuit breakers in disconnected

position), circuit breakers, bushings and insulators, feeder terminals etc.,
using at least a 5 kV megger for MV circuits and a 1000 V megger on all
control and protection circuits, with relays, lamps and the like components
disconnected, to ensure satisfactory insulation resistance as recommended
by the Standards and approved practices.
b. Medium voltage tests on busbars, circuit breakers in disconnected position,
switches, VTs and insulators, by applying MV a.c. test voltage between
phases and phase to earth at 80% of the IEC voltage withstand test for 1-
minute.
c. Resistance across closed contacts of circuit breakers using appropriate
micro-ohm meter.
d. Polarity check and ratio tests for CTs.
e. Calibration checks and adjustment for ammeters and voltmeters.
f. Primary and/or secondary injection tests to check relay operation, using
appropriate test sets, followed by tripping of circuit-breaker once only,
through its protective relay circuit.
g. Functional test of circuit breakers, switches, earth switches, interlocking,
protection, alarms, interface with BMS/SCADA system, etc.
h. CT transformation ratio.
i. VT polarity test.
j. VT transformation ratio.
5 Cables: With circuit breaker in disconnected position, ensure that MV testing of

feeder cable and respective termination is carried out as required under cable
tests.
6 After energization carry out inspection and checking as follows:
a. Breakers are to be closed, one at a time, with as little load on the feeder as
possible; check meters as load is increased and any indication of
overheating detected by appropriate instruments or sensors.
b. Open and withdraw circuit breaker after a prolonged test run, inspect and
check circuit breaker conditions, isolating contacts, contacts on all

instruments and control switches, connections at terminal blocks etc.,

busbar connections and busbars for any indication of overheating; check
for loose connections and bolts etc. and finally re-apply megger tests to
ensure same quality of insulation as before energization.
c. Close circuit breaker slowly, while in the disconnected position and
inspect contacts and/or contact movement and compare with design
figures.
7 Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out

and record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
32.3.5 CLEANING
1 Inspect interior and exterior of installed switchgear. Remove paint-splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match
original finish.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 35 - 11 KV 3 CORE XLPE CABLES
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 35 – 11 KV 3 core XLPE cables
including its associated table of contents and new clauses as follows:
35.1 GENERAL

Contract and Section 21 Specification parts, apply to this part.
35.1.2 SUMMARY
1 This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for
high voltage electrical distribution systems above 1000V rating.
2 Related Sections include the following:
a Section 21: Part 1 "General Provisions for Electrical Installation".
35.1.3 SUBMITTALS
1 Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:
2 Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying

capacities, derating factors for grouping and temperature.
3 Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
4 Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
11 KV 3 CORE XLPE CABLES S21P35 - Page 1 of 9

5 Samples of each cable and, if requested by the Engineer, other accessories.
7 Exact routing layouts, showing coordination between various trades.
8 Details of supports and fixings for trays and cables.
9 Details of connections to transformers, switchgear, etc.
10 Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings
at enclosures.
11 Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin
issued by manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition,
Standards to which it complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to
comply with the test requirements of the relevant standard to which the cable is
manufactured.
12 Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers

qualifications prior to work commencing on site.
13 Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables and accessories certifying

that the products furnished comply with requirements.

Article.
16 Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of cables and accessories with

requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
17 Maintenance Data: For cables and accessories to include in the maintenance

manuals.
18 Include periodic tests of cables in service.
1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to

install, splice, and terminate high voltage cable.
2 Standards: Cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved Standards,
and are to bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are

manufactured. Cables not having this identification will be rejected.
3 Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance

with the Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of
installation. No change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless
warranted by special conditions and approved by the Engineer. Check various
loads and current carrying capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency
of sizes indicated to Engineer.
1 Deliver high voltage cable on factory reels complying with applicable Standard.
2 Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a dry location. Protect from weather,
fumes, water, debris, etc.
35.1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1 Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated:
2 Notify Engineer at least 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
3 Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
35.2 PRODUCTS
1 Nominal system voltage, phase to phase

= 11 kV Um=12kV
2 The cables shall be in conformity with IEC 60502 Part 2, and subsequent
amendments, except as may be otherwise stated in this standard. The general
classification of cables is mentioned below.
a. 3 (three) cores of stranded compacted copper conductor circular in shape.

b. A semi-conducting shield extruded directly over each core, for the purpose
of stress control.
c. XLPE core insulation, circular in section and of a thickness appropriate to
the intended system voltage.
d. Each core insulation layer to be covered with an extruded semiconducting
XLPE compound shield for the purpose of stress control. The compound

shield shall be covered with a metallic screen for the purpose of equalizing
potential on the semi- conducting screen and each core shall be capable of
carrying full earth fault current. Copper binder tapes shall be provided on
individual screen and overall three cores.
e. The cores shall be laid up with metallic screens in contact with each other
and interstice solidly extruded and surrounded by an extruded inner
covering.
f. The whole shall be surrounded by armour of galvanised round steel wires
along with helical steel tape, two water blocking tapes one each, over and
under the armour layer.
3 The above requirement is supplemented by further requirements stated later in this

specification.
4 Cables should be in full compliance with Kahramaa requirements specified under

“electricity networks affairs - specification no. ep-ms-p4/s3-030 version #4 Rev -
0/2010 - 11kV 3 core XLPE cables”.
35.2.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1 The following is a description of the prevailing climatic conditions, and of the

electrical characteristics of the Distribution System.
a. Climatic Conditions
i. Altitude: Low lying, generally close to sea level with no point

exceeding 100 meters above sea level.
ii. Maximum air temperature : 50°C (46°C typical)
iii. Minimum air temperature : 0°C (10°C typical)
iv. Mean maximum summer Air temperature: 45°C typical.
v. Mean maximum exposed Sunlight temperature: 75°C.
vi. Solar radiation – peak: 1030/W/sq.m.
vii. Humidity: 100% humidity is common throughout the year, and
may occur at temperatures in excess of 30°C.
viii. Rainfall: Very low on average.
ix. General atmospheric conditions: may be described as a hot
atmosphere containing very fine, highly penetrating dust particles.
x. Ground temperature at one meter depth in summer: 35°C, and
never falls to 0°C.
xi. General Ground Conditions: Very dry, limestone type, with
typical thermal conductivity 2.0 to 4.0°C m/W. Very wet, high
salt content, very corrosive.
b. System:
i. 11kV system has three phase and an earth.
ii. Nominal voltage : 11kV
iii. Maximum voltage : 12kV
iv. Maximum symmetrical Fault level : 31.5kA
v. Limited earth fault current through earthing transformer: 4.5 kA.

vi. Frequency : 50 Hz
vii. Impulse : 75 kV
35.2.3 SHORT CIRCUIT RATINGS:
CABLE SIZE SHORT CIRCUIT RATING FOR

(mm2) 1SEC. (KA)
300 Not less than 42.5
70 Not less than 10
35.2.4 CABLE CONSTRUCTION - DETAILS
1 Conductors: Plain, stranded, compacted copper conductor with 100 %

conductivity, clean smooth surface and free from any foreign particles, circular in
shape in accordance with IEC 60228. Standard sizes are 70, 95, 185, 240 & 300
square mm.
2 Conductor Screening: Extruded semi-conducting compound firmly bound to the

insulation which not to be effected by bending, pulling or short circuit and shall
adhere to conductor surface not into the conductor.
3 Insulation:
a. Extruded solid dielectric: Designation XLPE -IEC 60502

b. Highest rated temperature 90oC - IEC 60502
c. Insulation thickness, as appropriate to applied voltage - IEC 60502.
4 Insulation Screening: A layer of extruded semi-conducting material of the generic

type ‘easy strip’. This is of a type in which the layer can be removed by hand
peeling, after application of a simple tool, if needed. This will leave the underlying
XLPE insulation undisturbed. Where such a tool is needed, for instance a knife
with depth of cut limitation; this will be supplied in quantities at a sample ratio of
10% of the number of joints supplied.
Each core shall be overlaid with a metallic screen, where such is necessary to
equalize potential along the semi-conducting screen, to ensure correct stress
control. Each such screen shall be capable of supporting individually an earth fault
current of 4500 amps for 1 second. The screen will take the form of copper wires
with a copper binder tape.
To equalize the earth fault current between the screen cores, an overall copper
binder tape of thickness not less than 0.3 mm shall be provided around all three
cores. Suitable core identification, means shall be provided for core identification

either by color or number. A suitably marked helical tape over each insulated core
will suffice for this purpose.
5 Inner Covering and Fillers: The inner covering shall be extruded. The interstice of
the laid up cores shall be solidly extruded. The material to be used shall meet the
operating temperature and design temperature conditions and of a thickness in
accordance with IEC 60502 and compatible with insulating material. The material
should be fire retardant and comprises of anti-aging components.
6 Armour: This shall meet the screening requirements of IEC 60502. It will comprise
of galvanized, round steel wires, of thickness in conformity with IEC 60502, and
laid with no discernible gaps. An open helix consisting of galvanized steel tape of
minimum nominal thickness 0.3 mm may be provided over round steel wire armor.
Galvanizing of the wires shall be in conformity with BS EN 10257. Two
swallowable water blocking tapes shall be provided one each, over and under the
armor layer. These tapes shall be capable of absorbing water and remain dry by
forming into gel. The purpose of which is to inhibit flow of water in the event of
penetration of the over-sheath, or inflow from a faulty joint. The material shall be
chemically inactive with the components with which it is in contact, both with and
without the presence of water. It shall be solid at the working temperature of the
adjoining components.
7 Oversheath: PVC extruded directly over the armor and water inhibitor (water
blocking tape). The material should be fire retardant, UV resistance, anti-aging
components and high resistant to soil. It shall be type ST2 in accordance with IEC
60502 and IEC 60332-1. Thickness shall be in compliance with the above
standard. It shall be RED in color, and embossed with the following legends:
a. KAHRAMAA
b. 11,000 V XLPE
c. CABLE SIZE & NUMBER OF CORES
d. STANDARD NO.
e. YEAR OF MANUFACTURE
f. NAME OF MANUFACTURER
g. RUNNING SERIAL (at interval of 1 meter)
8 Where Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) cable is required on the drawings,
bedding and outer sheath shall be made of LS0H material to IEC 61034 for low
smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen acid gas content and IEC 60754-2 for
degree of acidity of evolved gas.
35.2.5 CABLE DRUMS
1 All cables shall be supplied on cable drums with a maximum diameter of 2.55m
and a maximum width of 1.28 m. No drums with cable shall weight more than 7.5
tones. In addition the lengths of cables on the drums shall be in accordance with
the Schedule of Quantities.

2 Cable drums shall be stoutly constructed of wood and supported with steel tie bars
and shall be fully lagged and bonded. On each flange of each drum a steel plate
complete with Tubular Steel insert shall be fitted to accept 1 x 4 inch (100mm)
spindle to be used during cable installation. The steel plate shall be a minimum of
400mm x 400mm x 5mm thick, welded to the tubular insert. The plates shall be
fixed with 6 bolts through the flange.
3 All drums shall be painted and engraved with:

a. Manufacturers Name
b. Year of manufacture of cable
c. Drum number
d. Size, number of cores and voltage of the cable, including the term "Cross
Linked Polyethylene (XLPE)".
e. The length of cable in the drum with sequential starting & end number.
f. “KAHRAMAA”.
g. The Contract No.
4 The nominal length to be as stated in the schedule below:
CABLE SIZE LENGTHS PER DRUM

(mm2) (m)
3c x 300 250
3c x 240 250
3c x 185 300
3c x 95 500
3c x 70 500
5 A tolerance of ± 5% on the length of cable per drum shall be allowed.
35.3 EXECUTION
35.3.1 EXAMINATION
1 Examine raceways to receive high voltage cables for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cables.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
35.3.2 INSTALLATION
1 Install cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2 Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant
where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do
not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall
pressure values.
3 Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable

grips that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling
attachment to cable.
4 Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural
members, and follow surface contours where possible.
5 Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
6 Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped 75-mm bed of clean sand at
bottom of trench. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping from those items
by a minimum of 100 mm of tamped earth. Install permanent markers at ends of
cable runs, changes in direction, and buried splices.
7 Install "buried cable" warning tape 305 mm above cables.
8 In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables
around walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals
adequate to prevent sag.
9 Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements using approved fire-
stopping material according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems".
10 Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
35.3.3 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING
1 Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's
lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes,
handholes or manholes.
2 Recommendations: Through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly
in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct
specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and
bonds as applicable.
3 Jointing: Qualifications of operatives are to be submitted to Engineer prior to work
commencing on site. Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless
contrary to cable manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable
terminations and through-joints are to be submitted to the Engineer prior to
commencing work on site. Samples are to be constructed in the presence of the
Engineer and are to be available for test and inspection in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
4 Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of HV cables.
5 Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and
white spirit or equal approved.
6 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in
accordance with manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and
terminals to comply with international standards.

1 Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the
Regulations and Standards.
2 Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV
test equipment as necessary for testing HV installations. Use 1000 V megger on
installations with nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V, and 5000 V megger
on MV installations (up to 13.8 kV) for initial checks.
3 Testing: On installation of high voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has
been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
4 MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C. output voltage and ampere
range sufficient to test HV cables. Cables are to be laid in position (trench or duct
bank), jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with ends free of equipment
and clear of ground.
5 MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied between core under test and
the screen in steps, pausing one minute or more each step (first step being the A.C.
rms rated voltage of the cable, followed by two equal steps) up to maximum test
voltage. At each step, and for the last 5-15 minutes duration at maximum test
voltage, the ammeter (normally a micro-ammeter) is to be monitored closely and
recorded. If, except as voltage is increased, the current starts to increase, test is to
be stopped and the installation inspected and tested for the fault.
6 MV Cable Testing: Each cable/core is to be tested independently. Maximum D.C.
test voltage for grounded neutral system is to be 3 times rated A.C. rms voltage of
cable.
7 MV Cable Testing: Alternative test is to apply A.C. rms voltage up to 1.5 times
A.C. rms rating of cable (26 kV for 17.5 kV cable), applied for 15 minutes, by an
approved A.C. test set. Readings are to be within same range and in accordance
with IEC 60502.
8 Correct malfunctioning cables and accessories at Project site, where possible, and
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units
and retest.
35.3.5 PROTECTION
1 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer, to prevent entrance of moisture into the cables and to
ensure high voltage cables are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF PART

SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL
WORKS
PART 38 – BUILDER’S WORK
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 38 – Builder’s Work including its
associated table of contents and new clauses as follows:
38.1 GENERAL
1 Materials and Workmanship, unless otherwise specified, are to be in accordance

with the relevant requirements of the Specification for Structural and
Architectural work.
2 Description of Work: cable and duct trenches, equipment foundations, bases and
supports, ducts and duct banks, earth pits, chases, holes and the like, sleeves,
bolts, brackets and fixings including grouting.
3 Confirm locations and dimensions of all builder’s work required for electrical
work. Submit shop and construction drawings or other data to the Engineer for
checking before proceeding with the work.
4 Agree precise locations of routes for services below ground with the Engineer,
set out clearly and accurately and locate with temporary marker posts.
38.2 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

38.2.1 Components
1 Un-Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) ducts for outdoor power and lighting
cable installations are to be non-sparking type, suitable for direct burial in
ground, minimum tensile strength 500 kg/cm2, impact strength 5 kg/cm2,
supplied in standard 6m lengths, with one end of each length tapered. Ducts are
to be nominal size shown on the drawings, with minimum wall thickness 3.2 mm
for 100 mm ducts and 4.7 mm for 150 mm ducts.
2 Duct supports are to be pre-formed, non-metallic of approved type. Supports

containing metal are to have the metal non-continuous and not forming a
magnetic loop in any manner.
BUILDER’S WORK S21P38 - Page 1 of 4

3 Covers for trenches in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified
or shown on the Drawings, are to be flanged chequered steel plates with angle or
channel-section frames, suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and
finished with zinc chromate primer and two coats grey enamel.
4 Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations are to
be galvanized steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material.
Plastic inserts and lead anchors are not acceptable unless approved for specific
light duty installations.
38.2.2 Composite Construction
1 Equipment Foundations and Bases are to be constructed of reinforced concrete,

as approved by the Engineer after submission of design calculations.
Dimensions, levels and surface finishes are to be suitable for equipment installed,
as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings.
2 Concrete Envelope for Duct Banks for power distribution systems and outdoor
lighting cable installations crossing water, gas and sewage mains, under
roadways and where required or shown on the Drawings, is to be reinforced
concrete Class B using sulphate-resisting Portland cement. Reinforcement is to
consist of 12 mm diameter longitudinal bars at approximately 300 mm centres
along bottom and sides of duct bank with 10 mm diameter U-shaped transversal
bars at 400 mm centres. Length of concrete envelope is to extend at least 300 mm
beyond each side of crossing etc.
38.3 WORKMANSHIP
38.3.1 Generally
1 Cable Trenches width is to be as small as practicable with sides vertical. Remove

mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots from trench bottom and trim level.
Inform the Engineer in advance to give him reasonable opportunity to inspect
trench for each section of the work.
2 Directly Buried PVC Cable Ducts:
a. Lay and joint ducts to required line and level on sand bed, cover with sand
and backfill trench to ground level with excavated soil, free from stones
and other debris, well compact in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick.
b. Lay approved concrete tiles to fully cover cable duct, extending minimum
50mm beyond sides of duct and placed 300 mm below ground level.
c. Provide warning tape or galvanized steel mesh along duct runs at a depth
200 mm below ground level.

3 Underground Cable Duct Assemblies:
a. Form duct assembly to required line and level, using duct supports spaced
to prevent sagging of ducts and breaking of couplings and watertight seals,
and secured with cords (not tie wires) where necessary.
b. Provide 1% slope to duct banks for draining to exterior manhole, handhole

or other location as instructed.
c. Join ducts using waterproof cement, to manufacturer’s recommendations,

to give waterproof and sand-proof joint with at least 80mm overlap.
d. Provide 3 mm galvanized steel wire inside empty ducts, for future pulling
of cables, extending 1m beyond ducts banks at both ends and securely fixed
to wooden bungs sealing the duct.
4 Ducts ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be neatly cut and reamed and
appropriate bell- mouth bushing set in concrete wall. Ducts not ending in cable
manholes or handholes are to be properly capped.
5 Conduits and ducts, active or spare, at entry into building or manhole, are to be
completely sealed with approved plastic moulds or wooden bungs to prevent
entry of rodents, gas and vapour.
6 Sleeves or ducts in equipment foundations are to be provided, whether shown on

the Drawings or not, and in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. Obtain approval of sleeve or duct
installation prior to concreting.
7 Support Frames for Switchgear/Switchboards located over cable trenches,

where shown on the Drawings or required by equipment design, are to be
installed prior to concreting.
8 Drilling for anchor bolts is to be carried out using appropriate electric drills and
in approved positions.
9 Holes and chases in in-situ concrete are to be cast in. Do not cut hardened
concrete or drill holes larger than 10 mm diameter without prior approval.
10 Do not cut or drill precast concrete without prior approval.
11 Do not cut or drill structural steel work without prior approval.

12 Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:
a. Size of holes : 300 mm square
b. Depth of vertical chases : 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls,
1/3 leaf thickness
c. Depth of horizontal chases : 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.
13 Cutting masonry:
a. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.
b. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spalling, cracking or other damage to

surrounding structure.
c. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified

dimensions.
d. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only. Do not
set back to back; offset by a distance not less than wall thickness.
14 Submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts etc. which exceed 460 mm
width.
38.3.2 Inspection And Cleaning
1 Directly buried ducts and underground duct assemblies are to be inspected in the
presence of the Engineer, before backfilling or concreting. Steel mandrel or other
approved device, diameter equal to 90% of inside diameter of duct and 500 mm
long, is to be pulled through entire run of duct and is to pass through without
getting stuck. Ducts which do not allow mandrel to be pulled through are to be
repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Clean ducts with stiff bristle brush pulled through each duct prior to pulling in
cables.
END OF PART

SECTION 21 - ELECTRICAL WORKS
PART 45 - COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA)
45.1 GENERAL
1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular
Conditions and Project General Specification Parts, apply to this Part.
2 All the requirements presented in this Specification “Common Clauses for

Structured Cabling (TIA)” shall be complimentary to and shall apply to the
following Specification Parts except where a particular Specification Part calls for
otherwise. In this case, the individual Specification Part shall have precedence:
(a) Section 21 Part 46 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).

(b) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
(c) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(d) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
45.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part includes general communications design requirements, administration topics,

and installation for Information and Communication Infrastructure Technologies
(ICT) cabling infrastructure.
2 Related Parts:
(a) Section 24 Part 10 – Joints, Caulking and Sealants.

(b) Section 21 Part 1 – General Provisions for Electrical Installation.
(c) Section 21 Part 7 – Conduits and Conduit Boxes.
(d) Section 21 Part 9 - Cable Trays.
(e) Section 21 Part 10 – Wiring Accessories and General Power.
(f) Section 21 Part 22 – Earthing and Bonding.
(g) Section 21 Part 46 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
(h) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
(i) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(j) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) S21P45 - Page 1 of 26

45.1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1 The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless
identified by a specific edition date.
2 The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.
3 Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards,

manufacturer’s instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean
reference to the latest printed edition of each.
4 Conflicts
(a) Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which

material or construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement
of the reference standards, immediately inform the Engineer in writing.
Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the materials and perform the
work as though called for to minimum code standards.
5 Codes and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply
with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following
references:
(a) ANSI/TIA-568-C, Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring

Standard.
(i) ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises.
(ii) ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard.
(iii) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications
Cabling and Components Standards.
(iv) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
(v) ANSI/TIA-568-C.4, Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components
Standard.
(b) ANSI/TIA-569-D, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

(c) ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for Commercial
Telecommunications Infrastructure.
(d) ANSI/TIA-607-B, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding
(Earthing) for Customer Premises
(e) ANSI/TIA-758-B, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard.
(f) EIA/TIA-492AAAD, Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser- Optimized, 50-
µm Core Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class la Graded-Index
Multimode Optical Fibers; Suitable for manufacturing OM4 Cabled Optical
Fiber.

(g) EIA/TIA-492AAAC, Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser-Optimized 50-

µm Core Diameter/125- µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index
Multimode Optical Fibers.
(h) EIA/TIA-492CAAB, Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-
Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers with Low Water Peak.
(i) ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and
Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling.
(j) BICSI: Comply with the most current editions of the following BICSI
manuals:
(i) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) –

Volumes 1 & 2.
(ii) Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual
(ITSIMM).
(iii) Outside Plant Design Reference Manual.
(iv) Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual.
(k) Local regulations and standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have
precedence over the Standards.
6 Regulations and Standards: Alternatives
(a) Contractor may propose –at time of bid submission - materials and systems
that comply with alternative International Standards; for example European
Standards (rather than North American Standards).
(b) Alternative Standards may be considered when proposed in writing complete

with written manufacturers’ specifications and associated revised Drawings.
(c) Procedure for Alternatives
(i) Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance

of proposed material with Contract Documents as far as System
Performance, Safety and Efficiency are concerned.
(ii) Include in each request:

 Product identification, manufacturer’s name and address.
 Product Data: Description, performance and test data, reference
standards, finishes and colors.
 Complete and accurate drawings indicating construction
revisions required (if any) to accommodate the alternative
Standards.
 Data relating to changes required in construction schedule.
 Cost comparison between specified and proposed systems.
(d) Contractor shall not proceed with the works based on the Proposed
Alternative Standards without a signed approval by the Employer. The
Employer will be the final judge of acceptability, with review by the
Employer and the distribution of the acceptance by the Engineer.

45.1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1 Definitions
(a) Distributor: A collection of components used to connect cables (for example,

patch panels, patch cords).
(b) Floor Distributor (FD): A distributor used to connect building backbone

cabling subsystem, other cabling subsystems and active equipment
(International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).)
(c) Telecommunications Room (TR): An enclosed space for housing

telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The
room is the recognized cross-connect between the backbone cable and the
horizontal cabling.
(d) Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications): An entrance to the building for

both private and public network service cables (including wireless) including
the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the equipment room.
(e) Equipment Room (ER) (Telecommunications): An environmentally

controlled centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves
the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct
from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity (e.g.
PBXs, Servers, A/V services, CCTV, Door Entry Controllers, etc). ER’s are
likely to be larger than Telecommunication Rooms, requiring a more detailed
specification, and are often referred to as Main Communications Room
(MTR).
(f) Pathway: A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of
telecommunications cable.
(g) Permanent Link (PL): the transmission path of the installed cabling including
the horizontal cable (Copper or optical fiber) and the connecting hardware
(RJ45 or optical fiber connectors in both the patch panel and the outlet) and
an optional intermediate Consolidation point (CP).
(h) Channel: the transmission path between active equipment connected together.
A typical channel consists of the permanent link of the subsystem together
with the work area and equipment patch cords.
(i) “FTTO” switch known also as “Fiber To The Office” switch: in a Centralized
Premises Cabling System, a “Micro Switch” is used at the Work Area or
Office, as the active element that provides copper access for the terminal
devices (computers, VOIP telephone sets, etc.) on a flexible basis.
2 Abbreviations
(a) BD: Building Distributor also referred to as IC
(b) BEF: Building Entrance Facility
(c) CD: Campus Distributor also referred to as MC
(d) COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf

(e) EMI: Electromagnetic Interference

(f) ENI: External Network Interface
(g) ER: Equipment Room
(h) FD: Floor Distributor also referred to as HC
(i) FTTO: Fiber-To-The-Office
(j) HC: Horizontal Cross-Connect
(k) IC: Intermediate Cross-Connect
(l) ICT: Information and Communications Technology
(m) ID: Intermediate Distributor
(n) LDP: Local Distribution Point
(o) IDC: Insulation Displacement Connector
(p) LAN: Local Area Network
(q) MC: Main Cross-Connect
(r) MD: Main Distributor
(s) MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one
location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.
(t) OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
(u) RFI: Radio Frequency Interference
(v) TEB: Telecommunication Earth Bar.
(w) TR: Telecommunications Room
(x) UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
(y) WA: Work Area
(z) WAP: Wireless Access Point
(aa) ZD: Zone Distributor
45.1.5 SCOPE OF WORK
1 This part establishes a communications infrastructure to be used as signal pathways

for voice, video and high-speed data transmission. Contractor shall:
(a) Comply with all project Specifications documents and the following
requirements for a complete project installation.
(b) Provide a structured cabling system as described hereafter that includes, but
is not limited to, supplying, installing, labeling and testing of: campus
backbone, building backbone and horizontal cabling subsystems, cable
connectors, communications outlets and terminations, and equipment
racks/cabinets for networking hardware and patch panels.
(c) Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation
described herein. All requirements and specifications will be enforced.
(d) Cable pathways and runs to individual outlets are not shown in their entirety,
but shall be provided as if shown in their entirety.
(e) Verify that conduit routing does not cause cabling to exceed specified length.
(f) Follow industry standard installation procedures for communications cable to
assure that the mechanical and electrical transmission characteristics of this
cable plant and equipment are maintained.
2 Works of this part cover a complete installation of both permanent and channel
links for a data, voice and video communications network utilizing copper and fiber
transmission media. The Contractor shall:

(a) Provide and install Innerduct, rated appropriately for the fiber optic backbone
installation environment – whether outdoor or indoor.
(b) Provide, install, terminate, test, label and document all campus backbone,
building backbone and horizontal cables.
(c) Provide and place all termination devices such as modular patch panels,
termination blocks, telecommunication outlets (jacks and plates), phone
jacks, fiber optic distribution panels, bulkheads, connectors, and fiber optic
fan out kits.
(d) Provide in quantities specified or deemed appropriate interconnect
components such as copper patch cords, fiber optic patch cables and data
station cables.
(e) Verify lengths and counts of twisted pair and optical fiber patch cords with
the Engineer and/or Employer prior to purchase.
(f) Provide and place horizontal and vertical cable support devices such as rack
and wall-mounted horizontal and vertical cable management, cable runway,
telecommunications cable runway, and all required mounting hardware,
unless otherwise noted.
(g) Provide and install all equipment mounting racks, cabinets and/or brackets.
(h) Provide and install approved firestopping systems in all communication pass-
throughs, conduits and cable trays, and ceiling, wall and floor penetrations in
coordination with other trades.
(i) Provide all appropriate consumable items, fittings and accessories, whether
or not specified, as required for a complete installation and a proper, safe and
reliable operation of the system.
(j) Provide grounding and bonding in telecommunications rooms.
(k) Handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts (along with current unit
prices) for all major components in the system for two (2) years fault-free
operation.
(l) Handover manufacturer’s recommended test equipment and tools (along with
current unit prices) required for system maintenance.
(m) Provide complete documentation and demonstration of works.
(n) Complete all punch list deficiencies within 10 working days.
(o) Provide indexed and organized complete Test Results of all copper and fiber
optic cables and their components.
(p) Provide submittals as outlined in Article “SUBMITTALS” below.
(q) Conduct a final document handover meeting with Employer and Engineer to
review, discuss and educate the Employer on the test results and As-Built
Drawings.
(r) Provide a Manufacturer’s Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance
Warranty for this wiring system.
45.1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS
1 The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and
miscellaneous items that will be installed during the course of the installation
process. Such items may not be indicated in the documents. Contractor shall
coordinate with the Employer and his suppliers when considering:

(a) Provision and installation of phone systems, computer hardware,

racks/cabinets and related networking software and equipment.
(b) Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
(c) Provision and installation of multi-port routers and UPS in communications
rooms.
(d) Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the
main building earth electrode system.
(e) Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility
outlets.
(f) Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
(g) Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental
control sensors.
(h) Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit
sleeves, and penetrations in walls and floors.
2 Accordingly, Contractor shall:
(a) Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, contractors, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project
implementation, equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
(b) Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
(c) Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to
accommodate and optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with
other systems.
45.1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY
1 The Contractor shall respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of the
Employer, his employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to the
extent necessary, consistent with the legal responsibilities of the Employer policies.
2 Contractor shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by the requirements to

keep confidential all information concerning bid documents and this Project.
1 The objective of this Project is to provide a complete communications structured

cabling infrastructure system installation including, but not limited to: fiber optic
backbone, horizontal cabling with associated terminations, mounting equipment,
cable pathway and management systems, testing and other items/materials, as
specified in drawings, these specifications, and Contract Documents.
2 The Structured Cabling Solution shall be designed and installed to provide the
telecommunications infrastructure (patch panels, frames, patch cords, cables,
faceplates and outlets) necessary to build a uniform premises distribution system,
which will function for a multimedia communications solution as described here
below.

3 The Structured Cabling Solution shall use Category 6A components and optical
fiber backbone as described in Section 21 Parts “Communications Backbone
Cabling (TIA)” and “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)” and shall be
capable of supporting current and future services that require 500MHz or more
signaling as specified by ANSI/TIA-568-C, performance limits for channel,
permanent link and twisted-pair cable for Category 6A. These include but are not
limited to:
(a) IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)

(b) IEEE 802.11 (Wireless LAN)
(c) Building Security and Access
(d) Analogue telephone
(e) Digital telephone
(f) Facsimile
(g) Security Cameras
(h) Modems
(i) Digital and Analogue video
(j) Composite baseband video and audio
(k) Broadband Video
(l) RGB baseband video
(m) Digital and Analogue Audio
4 The Structured Cabling Solution shall be designed and installed to enable flexible
point to point patching of the telecommunications services to allow for simple
Moves, Adds & Changes, (MAC’s) without frequent rewiring of locations.
5 The communications channel shall be capable of supporting the provision of power

to the Data Terminal Equipment as specified in IEEE 802.3at “Power over
Ethernet” standard.
45.1.9 SUBMITTALS
1 The Contractor shall not perform any part of the work requiring submittal and
review of shop drawings, product data, or samples until Employer has approved the
respective submittal. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals:
(a) Product data: For each type of product.
(b) Shop drawings.
(c) Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including:
(i) Cross-connects,
(ii) Patch panels,
(iii) Patch cords.
(d) Cross-connects and patch panels: Detail mounting assemblies, and show
elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

(e) Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
(i) System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in

software and format selected by Employer.
2 Submittals shall comply with the Project General requirements including but not
limited to Parts related to “Submittal Procedures”, “Closeout Procedures” and
“Record (As-Built) Documents”.
3 The Contractor shall provide a copy of the certified test data sheet, available from
the delivering distribution warehouse for either a full run or cut piece from the
master reel of the fiber optic cable to be installed
(a) The certified test data sheet shall include the master reel number, cable
description, a passing test result with details, test equipment description, date
certified, and a certificate of compliance stamp, and shall be included in the
Project Record Documents as a component of the final deliverables submittal
package.
4 The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation from the certifying
manufacturer showing that the Project is registered and qualified for the System
Assurance Warranty. All subsequent works shall be in accordance with approved
submittals.
5 The Contractor shall deliver his Warranty towards System Installation and
Workmanship.
6 The Contractor shall deliver Manufacturer’s signed Extended Product Warranty of

installed cabling system to include all components that comprise the complete
cabling system. Delivery to be effected within two weeks of the time of final
Acceptance. Failure of any component to pass system component tests shall be
promptly corrected, repaired or replaced to meet Standards compliance. Contractor
shall coordinate with the Manufacturer for warranty paperwork and procedures
prior to the start of the work.
7 The Contractor’s BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer

(RCDD) shall review, approve and stamp all documents prior to submitting. He
shall also warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements
specified herein upon completion of all work.
8 Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and

terminal equipment, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
9 Contractor shall submit the required Field Test Reports in the format and media
specified, upon completion of testing the installed system.
10 Cable Testing Plan:
(a) The Contractor shall provide a complete and detailed test plan for approval
of the cabling system specified herein, including a complete list of test
equipment for copper and fiber optic components and accessories prior to

beginning cable testing. The following minimal items shall be submitted for
review:
(i) All testing methods that clearly describe procedures and methods.
(ii) Product data for test equipment
(iii) Certifications and qualifications of all persons conducting the testing.
(iv) Calibration certificates indicating that equipment calibration meets the
appropriate performance Level of ANSI/TIA-1152 by a qualified
testing agency and that equipment has been calibrated at least once in
the year prior to the testing date.
(v) Examples of test reports, including all graphs, tables, and charts
necessary for display of testing results.
(b) The works shall include validation, and testing. Employer will require that
the telecommunications cabling system installed by the Contractor be fully
certified to meet all necessary requirements to be compliant with referenced
IEEE and TIA specifications and Manufacturer’s warranty.
(c) The Contractor shall determine the source/cause of test failure readings and
correct malfunctioning component and/or workmanship within each channel
or permanent link and retest to demonstrate compliance until corrected failure
produces a passing result.
11 Cable Testing Reports: The Contractor shall submit cable test reports of performed
tests as follows:
(a) The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the media and its components fully
comply with the requirements specified herein.
(b) Three sets of electronic and hardcopy versions of test reports shall be
submitted together and clearly identified with cable identification.
(c) Cable inventory data shall be submitted for all fiber optic and copper cabling
and termination equipment. Submit data electronically on CD-ROM, listing
products furnished, including:
(i) Manufacturer's name.

(ii) Manufacturer's part numbers.
(iii) Cable numbers.
(iv) Location and riser assignments.
(v) Product Data.
12 Samples
(a) For workstation outlet connectors, jack assemblies, housings and faceplates
for color selection and evaluation of technical specifications and
requirements. , the Contractor shall confirm with Engineer and Employer for
color and finish before purchasing materials

(a) Faceplates shall match the faceplates of electrical wiring devices in terms of
brand, color, and material type. Coordinate with Section 21 Part “Wiring
Accessories and General Power”.
13 Product Data: For each type of product.
(i) Submit catalogue cut-sheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and
complete model number for each product specified. Model number
shall be marked with an arrow or underlined to indicate exact selection.
(ii) Identify applicable specification section reference for each product

performance for each component specified for approval prior to
purchase and installation.
(iii) Submit point-by-point compliance statement to the specification, with

necessary supporting documents.
14 Shop Drawings
(a) Shop drawings submittals to cover as minimum plan views and elevations of
all work to be installed, diagrams showing room layouts, rack layouts
(including elevations), riser layouts, etc..
(b) The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Employer /
Engineer. The Engineer’s approval of such drawings or schedules shall not
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or
specifications, unless he has in writing called the Engineer’s attention to such
deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from
responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules.
15 Qualifications
(a) The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with
the requirements described in Article “QUALITY ASSURANCE”, included
with, and at the time of, bid submittal.
16 Seismic Qualification Certificates: For control consoles, equipment cabinets and

racks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
(a) Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
(b) Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
(c) Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
17 Closeout Submittals: (Record Documents):
(a) The Contractor shall submit Record Documents for products and systems
including but not limited to:

(i) Schematic network diagrams.

(ii) Parts lists.
(iii) Manufacturers' information on all system components.
(iv) Recommended list of spare parts and components to be stocked at
Project site.
(v) Test Reports.
(vi) Training Manuals
(vii) Warranties.
(viii) Software Service Agreements.
(ix) Record (As-Built) Drawings.
(b) Record (As-Built) drawings shall include the components and cable numbers
labeled in accordance with Section 21 Part “Identification for
Communications Systems (TIA)”.
(c) The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the Project
identified in, but not limited to, addendum, change notices, site instructions
or deviations resulting from site conditions. Contractor shall:
(i) Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of networking

components, showing:
 All communications data/voice/video outlet locations complete

with outlet/cable labeling.
 Cable routing paths of communications cables to identified
infrastructure pathways.
 All rack and cabinet locations and labeling thereof.
 One-line diagram of equipment/device interconnecting
data/voice/video cabling of the data, voice and video systems.
 Standard or typical installation details of installations unique to
Employer’s requirements.
 Graphical symbols and component identification on detail
drawings should use commonly understood, unique and
unambiguous symbols (an example of such a system is IEC
60617) - to the approval of the Engineer.
18 Operations and Maintenance Manuals to include:
(a) Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain
detailed operation and control of the equipment.
(b) A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
(c) Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
(d) Installation and maintenance instructions.
(e) Safety precautions.
(f) Diagrams and illustrations.
(g) Testing methods.
(h) Performance data.
(i) Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers, list of special tools and
instruments indicating sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and
name of servicing organization.

(j) List of qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the

equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.
1 Regulatory Requirements
(a) Contractor shall supply all telecommunication cabling permits required by

appropriate local governing agency.
(b) Contractor shall be licensed as required by local governing agency for
telecommunications cabling systems.
2 Key Personnel
(a) Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the
business of the application, installation and testing of the specified
telecommunications systems and equipment. Each of the key personnel shall
demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems
within the past 3 years.
(b) More than one key person may be required for this work, depending on the
key roles to be filled such as:
(i) Layout Supervisor: for supervision of preparation of Shop Drawings.

(ii) Installation Supervision: for supervision of installation. He shall be
present at all times when work of this Part is performed at Project site.
(iii) Field Inspector: for performing the on-site inspection.
(c) Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of
its components shall have a minimum of 3 years’ experience in the
installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components.
They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each
equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test
the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a
maximum of five successful telecommunications system installations for
each of the key personnel.
(d) Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful
system installations provided that they are equivalent in system size and in
construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this
Project. Include specific experience in installing and testing
telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least
two (2) project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and
copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing
telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as
successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at
least two years prior to commencing the corresponding work for the Project.
(e) Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed
installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point

of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone

number, and generally, the referenced project description including system
size and construction complexity.
3 Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI

on staff.
(a) Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the

direct supervision of RCDD/NTS.
(b) Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of
Commercial Installer, Level 2, who shall be present at all times when Work
of this Part is performed at Project site.
(c) Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as Commercial Installer,
Level 2 to perform the on-site inspection.
4 Other Installer Qualifications: Submit written proof that the following experience
requirements are being met:
(a) The Contractor shall be manufacturer’s Certified Installer, able to provide the
“Extended Product Warranty” on the Cabling System covering products,
performance and applications assurance. Contractor shall adhere to the
industry standard engineering, installation and testing procedures and shall
utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in
implementing this Project.
(b) All members of the installation team shall be certified by the Manufacturer
as having completed the necessary training to complete their part of the
installation and are capable of performing an installation that falls under
Manufacturer’s guidelines necessary to obtain the Manufacturer’s System
Assurance Warranty. Resumes of the entire team shall be provided along with
documentation of completed training courses.
(c) All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge and compliance
with all relevant BICSI, TIA, UL, and NEC methods, standards and codes.
(d) Contracting firm shall have installed similar-sized systems in at least ten (10)
other projects in the last five years prior to commencing the corresponding
work for the Project and be regularly engaged in the business of installation
of the types of systems specified in this Specification. Certification shall
include, but shall not be limited to, items such as name and location of project
contacts and numbers, total built-up area, total number of cables/drops, types
of media, etc.
5 Testing Agency Qualifications:
(a) Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: certified by a qualified independent

testing agency to supervise on-site testing.

6 Certifications
(a) Contractor shall submit an up-to-date and valid certification verifying

qualifications of the Contractor and installer proposed key personnel to
perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission.
(b) Contractor shall submit evidence of compliance with these requirements prior
to beginning work on the Project.
7 Administrative Requirements and Coordination: The Contractor shall:
(a) Designate a Project Manager who will be recognized as the single point of
contact. The Project manager shall oversee all work performed to ensure
compliance with specifications as outlined in bid documents to ensure a
quality and on time installation within project schedule. He will attend project
meetings with the Engineer, the Employer and other Contractors.
(b) Coordinate work of this Part with Employer’s telephone system

specifications, LAN, workstations, equipment suppliers, and installers.
(c) Coordinate installation work with other disciplines (examples include ceiling
grid, HVAC, electrical, etc.) to resolve procedures and installation for cable
trays and cable bundle pathways. The goal of this coordination will be to
establish priority pathways for critical data/voice/video network cable
infrastructure, materials, associated hardware, as well as mitigate delays to
the project and to allow service access for communications and HVAC
components.
(d) Exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and

installation interfaces. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute
record to other participants, Employer and Engineer.
(e) Adjust arrangement and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and
cross-connect blocks in equipment rooms and racks to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and space requirements of any Service Provider
equipment, telephone system, and LAN equipment. Tasks shall be
coordinated with Employer, and other trades’ installation Representatives.
Specifically, coordinate with Telecom Service Provider(s) to fully implement
Telecom connectivity.
(f) Confirm exact locations and method of mounting outlets where installed in
modular furniture. Follow furniture manufacturers’ written instructions for
installing cable and devices in modular partitions, modular furniture, floor
boxes and power poles. Wiring locations noted in plans along walls for
modular furniture are approximate and will have to be determined by
Contractor at time of installation. Field condition adjustments for installation
may have to be made and coordination efforts with the electrical installations
for pathway must take place early on in the Project to comply with maximum
requirements of pathway fill factors taking into consideration the adopted
expansion capability of the system:

(i) 40% conduit fill factor and
(ii) 25% containment (cable tray, trunking, duct,..) fill factor.
(g) When specified or requested by Employer, furnish tools, testing instruments

and extra materials that match specified products and that are factory
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
8 Pre-Installation Meetings - Contractor shall:
(a) Attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to

beginning any work of this Part.
(i) Agenda: Ask and clarify questions in writing related to works to be

performed, scheduling, coordination, etc. with Engineer and/or
Employer.
(ii) Attendance: Contractor’s designated Project Manager shall attend
meetings arranged by the Engineer, Employer or other parties affected
by work of this Part.
9 Product Standards
(a) Source Limitations: Obtain system components from one manufacturer who
shall assume responsibility for system components and for their
compatibility.
(b) Equipment and materials shall be standard Commercial-Off-The-Shelf

(COTS) products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of
telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer’s latest
standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to commencing
the corresponding work for the Project.
(c) All equipment and brands proposed by the Contractor shall be fully in line
with the Hotel Operator standards, guidelines, and requirements.
(d) Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes
equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.
(e) All material and equipment shall be readily available through manufacturers
and/or distributors.
(f) All equipment shall be standard catalogued items of the manufacturer and
shall be supplied complete with any optional items required for proper
installation.
(g) Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated
system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future
performance and backward compatibility.

(h) Backward Compatibility: The provided solution shall be backward

compatible with lower category ratings such that if higher category
components are used with lower class and/or category components, the basic
link and channel measures shall meet or exceed the lower channel’s specified
parameters.
(i) Component Compliance: The provided solution’s components shall each

meet the minimum transmission specifications listed herein such that each
individual component will meet or exceed the specifications for permanent
link and channel, regardless of the fact that tests for link and channel
ultimately meet required specifications.
10 Equipment Country of Origin
(a) Equipment Country of Origin (manufacturing country) shall be indicated in

the proposal at time of bid submission.
45.1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1 Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
(a) Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strands end to end.
Use optical loss test set.
(b) Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain
reflectometer (OTDR) to verify the cable length and locate cable defects,
splices, and connector; including the loss value of each.
(c) Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
(d) Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.
45.1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1 For Project environmental conditions, refer to Section 21 Part “General Provisions

for Electrical Installation”.
2 Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the ambient environmental
temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered at the installed
location. For devices located in harsh environments such as interior uncontrolled or
exterior environments, the Contractor shall provide the necessary housings or
enclosures to ensure proper equipment operation and performance.
3 Continuous operating ranges of temperature and humidity within Communications

Rooms shall be maintained as specified in TIA-569. Refer to Section 21, Part
“Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.
4 After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices,

Contractor shall inspect exposed finish. Contractor shall remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris. If applicable, the Contractor shall repair damaged finishes,
including scratches and abrasions.

5 Contractor shall provide daily a clean work environment, free from trash/rubbish
accumulated during and after cabling installation.
6 Contractor shall keep all liquids (drinks, sodas, etc.) off finished floors, carpets, and
tiles. If any liquid or other detriment (cuts, soils, stains, etc.) damages the above
finishes, Contractor shall provide professional services to clean or repair
scratched/soiled finishes, at Contractor’s expense.
7 Expansion Capability:
(a) Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare capacity at all levels of the system
including ports in patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space
in cable pathways, ducts and backboard layouts to accommodate 25% future
increase in distribution and active workstations.
8 Power Supply
(a) Power supply shall be supplied or derived from the voltage system described
below, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
(b) Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution system (AC voltage
/ No. of Phases / Frequency / Earthing system) shall be as per local country
standard. For details, refer to Section 21 Part “General Provision of Electrical
Installations”.
45.1.13 WARRANTY
1 Contractor shall provide:
(a) A minimum of two (2) years Warranty on installation and workmanship plus
(b) An “Extended Product Warranty” and “System Assurance Warranty” for this
wiring system signed by both Contractor and Manufacturer and shall commit
to make available local support for the product and system during the
Warranty period.
2 The “Extended Product Warranty” shall apply to all passive structured cabling
system components and shall cover the replacement or repair of defective products
and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective products for a minimum
of twenty (20) years.
3 The “System Assurance Warranty” provides a complete system and product

warranty that will be transferred to the end-user, ensuring the structured cabling
system will be free of defects in materials and workmanship, will meet or exceed
applicable performance requirements defined in the most current version of the
Information Technology Generic Cabling Standards selected for this Project end-
to-end channel performance, and support all current and future network
applications for a minimum of twenty (20) years.

4 System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and

subsequent inspection, the Employer shall be provided with a “numbered
certificate”, from the manufacturer, registering the installation.
5 Warranty work on the Certified System shall be authorized by the Manufacturer

and shall be performed by a factory certified installer of system components.
6 Warranty periods shall commence on date of Taking Over of the System.
45.1.14 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT
1 Support Availability: The Contractor shall commit to make available local support
for the products and system during the Warranty, Defects Liability and Extended
Product Warranty periods.
2 The manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a service center

capable of providing training, spare parts and emergency maintenance and repairs
for overall system at Project site with four (4) hours' maximum response time.
3 Software Service Agreement
(a) Technical Support: Provide software support for two years following the
issuance of the Defects Liability Certificate.
(b) Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion.

Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years
from date of Project Completion. Upgrading software shall include Operating
System. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.
(i) Provide 30 days' notice to Employer to allow scheduling and access to

system and to allow Employer to upgrade computer equipment if
necessary.
45.1.15 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL
1 Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major
components in the system for two years fault free operation.
2 However, a minimum of amount of spare parts shall be included in the deliverables

irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation – as detailed in the respective
Specification Part listed under “Related Documents” above for particular product
requirements.
3 The manufacturer shall guarantee the flow and availability of the spare parts
without a major design change for at least ten years’ period from date of System
Acceptance by Employer.

4 Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine
inspection and maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for
equipment supplied.
45.2 PRODUCTS
45.2.1 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1 Seismic Performance: Supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equip-
ment cabinets and racks, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to UBC1997 Seismic Zone 1.
(a) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
45.2.2 MANUFCATURERS
1 Refer to Specifications Sections listed under Article 45.1.1 “Related Documents”

above for available manufacturers.
45.3 INSTALLATION
45.3.1 EXAMINATION
1 Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the Works and the
conditions under which the Works would be performed. Contractor shall remedy
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the works. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2 Before construction works commence, visit the site and identify the exact routing
for all cable pathways and equipment placement. Verify all dimensions, locating
the works and their relation to existing works, all existing conditions and their
relation to the works and all obstructions and conditions, etc. affecting the
completion and proper execution of the works as indicated in the project drawings
and specifications.
3 All equipment locations shall be coordinated with Engineer, other trades and
existing conditions to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment
maintenance and inspections.
4 Install cabling and equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement

of equipment components. Provide easy, safe and code mandated clearances at
equipment racks and enclosures, and other equipment requiring maintenance and
operation. Coordinate with the Engineer the exact location and mounting height of
all equipment in finished areas, such as equipment racks, cabinets, termination

equipment, communication and electrical devices. As much as practical, connect

equipment for ease of disconnecting, with a minimum of interference with other
installations.
45.3.2 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
1 Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
works.
2 Established Dimensions: Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture

locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
45.3.3 PREPARATION
1 Contractor’s on-site supervisor shall review, approve and stamp all shop drawings,
coordination drawings, As-Built Drawings and submittal documents.
2 Pre-installation inspection
(a) The Contractor shall visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping
cartons to detect possible cable damage incurred during shipping and
transport. Visibly damaged goods are not acceptable and shall be replaced
by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
3 Coordination with Employer’s Maintenance Personnel
(a) The Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer’s Maintenance Personnel
who would be in charge of system operation and maintenance after Taking
Over, by engaging them in follow up of system installation and testing.
Acquaintance with the system during various phases of construction will help
ensure a more effective training.
45.3.4 INSTALLATION
1 General
(a) Contractor shall install works following specifications, drawings,

manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittal data.
(b) Allowable cable bend radius and pull tension:
(i) In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or

excessive pull tension during installation. Refer to cable manufacturer's
bend radius recommendations for the maximum allowable limits.

(ii) After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned
free of lubricant residue. Use only lubricants specifically designed for
cable installation.
2 Pull Strings
(a) Horizontal Cable

(i) The Contractor shall
 Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits

with cable installed as part of this Contract.
 Pull string shall have a rated average breaking strength as per
manufacturer's design installation guidelines.
 Data and video cables can be pulled in tandem with pull strings.
During pulling sessions, pull strings must move freely to prevent
cable jacket/cable damage.
3 Pathway Fill
(a) Reference manufacturer's design installation guidelines manual to achieve the

specified fill factor for various types of pathway: conduits, cable trays,
trunking, etc.
4 Separation / Segregation of Services:
(a) Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569 for separating unshielded copper
voice, video and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment.
(b) Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic

raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be
as follows:
(i) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 127

mm (5 inches).
(ii) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 300
mm (12 inches).
(iii) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 610
mm (24 inches).
(c) Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways

and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
(i) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 64 mm

(2-1/2 inches).
mm (6 inches).
mm (12 inches).

(d) Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways

and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic
conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
(i) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.

mm (3 inches).
mm (6 inches).
(e) Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and

Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 1200 mm (48
inches).
(f) Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A

minimum of 127 mm (5 inches).
5 Firestopping Procedures
(a) Comply with requirements in Section 24 Part "Joints, Caulking and Sealants."
(b) Comply with TIA-569, Annex A, "Firestopping."
(c) Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
(d) Contractor shall:

(i) Install and seal penetrations (conduit, sleeves, slots, chases) into or
through fire-rated barriers created by or made for or on the behalf of
the Contractor to prevent the passage of smoke, fire or water through
the penetrations. All through-penetrations in a fire rated surface require
a sleeve, regardless of penetration diameter or penetrating cable count.
(ii) Provide approved fire-resistant materials to restore originally-designed
fire- ratings to all wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations used in the
distribution and installation for communications cabling system.
Coordinate firestopping procedures and materials with other trades.
(iii) Provide and install intumescent mechanical systems in floor chases in
an approved fashion in all openings.
(iv) Provide and install firestop in an approved manner in all openings
where there are penetrations through walls.
(v) Supply Employer with training manuals with instructions on methods
of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases.
(vi) Provide manufacturer recommended firestopping material for rated
protection for any given barrier for written approval prior to purchase
and installation.
 The material shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be

listed for intended use, and shall meet building fire strategic code
and regulation for fire stopping measures.
 The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly
distinguishable from other materials, adhere to itself, and

maintain the characteristics for which it is designed to allow for

the removal and/or addition of communication cables without the
necessity of drilling holes in the material.
 The material shall maintain/establish the fire-rated integrity of
the wall/barrier that has been penetrated.
(vii) Design fire barriers to facilitate their refurbishment following cable

installation.
(viii) Ensure that cables passing through fire barriers are segregated and
appropriate fire-stopping techniques applied to minimize disruption to
the fire barriers during any subsequent installation (or removal) of
cables
6 Grounding
(a) Comply with Section 21 Part "Earthing and Bonding ".

(b) Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, Chapter "Grounding, Bonding,
and Electrical Protection".
(c) Comply with ANSI/TIA-607.
7 Labeling
(a) Comply with Section 21 Part “Identification for Communications Systems

(TIA)”.
1 Site Tests
(a) Upon completion of the communications infrastructure systems, including all

pathways and grounding, the Contractor shall test the system.
(b) When the Contractor has completed his own system tests and when the
system record documents, including drawings, operation and maintenance
manuals are complete, the Engineer and Employer are to be notified that the
system fulfills the specifications and is ready for acceptance testing.
(c) The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests
on site for each individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been
correctly installed and adjusted on a location-by-location basis and that the
sub-system performs in every respect in accordance with the Specifications.
(d) The tests shall be performed by the Contractor. Employer and Engineer
reserve the right to be present during any or all testing.
(i) Cables and termination modules shall be affixed, mounted or installed

to the designed/specified permanent location prior to testing.

(ii) Any removal and reinstallation of any component in a circuit, including

faceplates, shall require retesting of that circuit and any other disturbed
or affected circuits.
(iii) Cable and jack shall be affixed, mounted or installed to the designed or
specified permanent location prior to testing. Any removal and
reinstallation of any component in the circuit shall require retesting of
that circuit.
(iv) Approved instruments, apparatus, services shall be utilized by qualified
personnel.
(v) If tests fail, Contractor shall correct as required to produce a legitimate
passing test.
(e) These specifications will be strictly enforced. The Contractor must verify
that the requirements of the specifications are fully met through testing with
an approved tester (rated for testing the cable type in use), and documentation
as specified herein. This includes confirmation of requirements by
demonstration, testing and inspection. Demonstration shall be provided at
final walk-through in soft copy and printed test data.
(f) Notification of the likelihood of a cable exceeding standardized lengths must

be made prior to installation of the cable.
(g) In order to provide a reliable training, Employer’s maintenance personnel

involved in the training program and of this system could be involved in the
follow up of system installation. The Contractor shall provide an installation
agenda to the Employer and confirm with him any coordination with assigned
trainees.
(h) Third-Party testing
(i) Third-Party testing of the completed cable infrastructure is an

Employer option that can be implemented and completed after all
Contractor testing is complete and submitted, and Contractor certifies
that cable plant meets or exceeds test result requirements as specified
in ANSI/TIA-568. Third-Party testing can be implemented at the
Employer’s discretion to independently confirm the submitted
Contractor’s standards-compliant testing results.
(ii) Third-Party shall pick a random sample of 20% of total installed cable
plant. Prior to testing, this party shall develop and submit a test
schedule for approval by Employer.
(iii) Third-Party testing processes shall adhere to the testing protocols
delineated in this Part.
(iv) All confirmed failures shall be promptly corrected by Contractor and
retested and Third-Party under the same testing protocols and
guidelines.
(i) Contractor shall complete all work and documentation according to

manufacturer guidelines to ensure manufacturer’s warranty remains in effect.
Contractor shall obtain certificates from manufacturer attesting to warranty

being in effect and include certificates with other deliverables due at the
completion of the Project.
45.3.6 CLEANING
1 Work areas shall be kept in a broom clean condition throughout the duration of the
installation process.
2 Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing materials,
and debris from each area where work has been completed unless designated for
storage.
3 The Contractor shall damp clean all surfaces prior to final acceptance by Employer.
1 Train Employer's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations,

including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in
failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when
extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. Include training in cabling
administration software.
END OF PART 45

PART 46 – IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA)
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 46 – Identification for Communications
Systems (TIA) including its new clauses as follows:
46.1 GENERAL
2 All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Part shall be
complimentary to and shall apply to this Specification “Identification for
Communications Systems (TIA)” except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this
case, this Specification “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)” shall
have precedence:
(a) Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
46.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part includes requirements for the identification of the various components of the
telecommunications infrastructure and pathway system for the Project.
2 Work covered by this Part shall consist of furnishing labor, equipment, materials
and software necessary for the labeling of the telecommunications infrastructure as
described on the Drawings and/or required by these Specifications.
3 Related Parts:
(a) Section 24 Part 10- Joints, Caulking and Sealants

(b) Section 26 Part related to Painting and Decorating.
(c) Section 21 Part 7 – Conduits and Conduit boxes.
(e) Section 21 Part 22 - Earthing and Bonding.
(f) Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
(g) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
(h) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(i) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
1 Refer to Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA) S21P46 - Page 1 of 7

2 Other Standards relevant to identification include:
(a) ANSI/TIA 606-B, Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure.
(b) ANSI/UL 969, Marking and Labeling Systems.
46.1.8 SUBMITTALS
1 Refer to Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
46.1.12 WARRANTY

46.2 PRODUCTS
1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but not limited
to:
(a) iTRACS (a CommScope company)

(b) Telesoft Solutions.
(c) Panduit
(d) Or approved equal
46.2.2 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1 Documentation: Document physical characteristics by recording the network and

connections between equipment and cable.
2 Presentation of Data: Information shall be presented in database view, schematic

plans, and technical drawings.
(a) Microsoft Visio Professional or AutoCAD drawing software shall be used as

drawing and schematic plans software.
3 System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices:
(a) Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer.
(b) Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.
46.2.3 LABELING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 All components of the telecommunications infrastructure and pathway system shall

be labeled according to the applicable Standard and the adopted ‘System
Administration Scheme’ described herein and in coordination with the Employer
and Engineer, including but not limited to:
(i) Copper and fiber optic cables and patch cords.

(ii) Workstation outlets faceplates and Individual outlet connectors.
(iii) Termination panels, blocks, trays.

(iv) Telecommunications Room entry and exit pathways.

(v) Racks, cabinets, and equipment.
(vi) Fiber optic on either side of the splice closure.
(vii) Grounding and bonding system for telecommunications.
(viii) OSP manholes / pull boxes covers.
(ix) Telecommunications cable tray and conduit pathways.
2 All labels shall be machine-manufactured by a labeling machine. Handwritten

labels will not be accepted for final labeling.
3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire, understand, and utilize the

Employer’s labeling scheme for all components of the voice/data communications
system.
4 Labels shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements
of ANSI/UL969. “Marking and Labeling Systems”.
(a) The size, color, and contrast of all labels should be selected to ensure that the
identifiers are easily read.
(b) Labels should be visible during the installation of and normal maintenance of
the infrastructure.
5 Labels should be resistant to the environmental conditions at the point of

installation (such as moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light), and should have a design
life equal to or greater than that of the labeled component.
6 Labels shall be accessible and, where necessary, able to be modified.
7 Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine

printed with alphanumeric cable designations.
8 Flat-surface labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth labels, machine printed with

alphanumeric designations.
9 Where insert type labels are used, provide clear plastic cover over label.
10 Outside plant labels shall be engraved, totally waterproof even when submerged.
Provide plastic warning tape for underground utilities as described in Section 21
Part “General Provision of Electrical Installation”.
46.3 INSTALLATION
46.3.1 EXAMINATION
1 Check actual site conditions prior to start of any work. Ensure all preceding trade
work associated with the telecommunications system is accurate and complete
before proceeding with installation or use of products specified in this Part.

46.3.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SCHEME
1 Comply with ANSI/TIA-606 and Employer’s labeling system for system

administration scheme.
2 Identify system components, wiring, and cabling.
(a) Identify distributors, racks, rack-mounted equipment, bonding conductors,

backbone cabling subsystems, horizontal cabling subsystem, patch cables,
access points and earth busbars.
(b) Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service
backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
(c) For installations outside buildings, label cables, jointing chambers and
cabinets with a unique identifier to enable tracing in both directions.
(d) Labeling of optical fiber installations should be such that the polarization of
duplex optical fiber connections is known and consistent throughout the
installation.
3 ANSI/TIA-606 Administration Scheme
(a) Administration Class: 3.
(b) Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with
ANSI/TIA-606 for Class 3 level of administration, including patch cords and
similar wiring accessories and all optional identification requirements of this
Standard.
4 Using cable management system software specified in Clause 2 of this Part, develop
a complete and accurate set of Cabling Administration Drawings for system
identification, testing, and management. Use unique alphanumeric designation for
each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects.
At Contract completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built
conditions.
5 Comply with requirements in Section 26 Part "Painting and Decorating" for

painting backboards. For fire-resistant or fire retardant plywood, do not paint over
manufacturer's label.
6 Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring
closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and
destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic
copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
7 Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling

administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for
telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and
cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, patch cords, work areas
and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment

grounding conductors. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and

format selected by Employer.
8 Cable and Wire Identification:
(a) Label each cable within 100 mm (4 inches) of each termination and tap, where
it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as
indicated.
(b) Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays: Label each cable at intervals not
exceeding 4.5 m (15 feet).
(c) Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
(i) Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips,

and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or
cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and
number of particular device as shown.
(ii) Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
(d) Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring

Closets: Label each connector patch cord, and each discrete unit of cable-
terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used
for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks
and plugs of each service.
(e) Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA
(Multiuser Telecommunications Outlet Assembly) to the Work Area. These
cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.
(f) Patch cords shall be labeled on each end specifying the source and destination
of the cord.
(g) Long cable runs in underground ducts shall be labeled at 50 meters intervals.
9 Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font
color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in
ANSI/TIA-606.
(a) Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester labels that flex as cables are bent.
(b) Label each component with a machine-generated label where it is accessible

for administration.
(c) Contractor to coordinate specific ceiling tile (false ceiling panel) or location
identification for overhead Wireless Access Point (WAP) connectivity.
Ceiling tile below WAP outlet shall be “tagged” with a discrete identification
method to aid in future locating by Employer. Review with Employer and
Engineer for more information.

46.3.3 RE-INSTALLATION
1 No additional burden to the Employer regarding costs, network down-time and/or

end user interruption shall result from the re-installation of specified components.
Scheduling for re-installation work shall be coordinated, in writing, with the
Employer prior to beginning the work.
46.3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
1 Contractor shall provide documentation of all telecommunications system

components under this Part utilized throughout the Project site for review and
reference by the Employer and Engineer. Refer to Section 21 Part 45 “Common
Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
2 Contractor shall submit all As-Built drawings required prior to acceptance by the
Employer.
3 Contractor to submit for PC-based, cabling administration system - as detailed in

Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”:
(a) Software and Firmware Operational Documentation.
(b) Software Service Agreement.
END OF PART 46

PART 47 – COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA)

Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 47 – Communications Equipment Room
Fittings (TIA) including its new clauses as follows:
47.1 GENERAL
2 All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Part shall be
complimentary to and shall apply to this Specification “Communications
Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)” except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this
case, this Specification “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)” shall
have precedence:
47.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part Includes:
(a) Telecommunications mounting elements.

(b) Backboards.
(c) Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets.
(d) Rack mounted power protection, power strips and rack mounted UPS.
2 Related Parts:
(a) Section 18 Part 4 -Architectural Timbers

(b) Section 24 Part 10 - Joints, Caulking and Sealants
(c) Section 26 Part – Painting and Decorating.
(d) Section 21 Part 1 – General Provisions for Electrical Installation.
(e) Section 21 Part 7 – Conduits and Conduit boxes.
(f) Section 21 Part 9 - Cable Trays.
(g) Section 21 Part 22 - Earthing and Bonding.
(h) Section 21 Part 39 – Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits.
(i) Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
(j) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
(k) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(l) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) S21P47 - Page 1 of 12

47.1.3 REFERENCE STANADARDS
2 Definitions
(a) RMU: Rack Mounting Unit spaces (also denoted as RU) under the TIA/ECA-
310-E Universal hole pattern of 16 mm-16mm-13mm (5/8”-5/8”-1/2”).
(b) PUE: Power Usage Effectiveness is a metric used to determine the energy
efficiency of a data center. PUE is determined by dividing the amount of
power entering a data center by the power used to run the computer
infrastructure within it.
2 Coordinate layout and installation of equipment with Employer's communications

and LAN equipment and service Suppliers. Coordinate Service Entrance
arrangement with Telecom Utility Authorities or Service Provider(s).
47.1.8 COMMUNICATIONS ROOMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 Communications rooms must be dedicated to designated equipment and services

only:
(a) Space shall not be used for storage of equipment not related to designated
equipment and services.
(b) Hazardous or corrosive materials shall not be stored in the space.
(c) Piping, ductwork and distribution of power, not related to designated
equipment and services shall not pass through or be located within the space.
2 Each communication room shall be equipped with fire detection, fire-extinguishing

system and prevention devices as shown on Drawings.

3 Contractor shall ensure that foreign piping such as water pipes, HVAC ducts, and
other unrelated systems utilized for or containing liquids, or gases are not installed
or do not pass through telecommunication rooms. Sprinkler piping shall not pass
through the telecommunications space to serve other areas. Sprinkler piping
serving only telecommunications spaces shall not be considered foreign to the
telecommunications installation.
4 A minimum of two walls shall be covered with AC-grade plywood backboards

starting from 300 mm AFF (smooth side to interior of room mounted vertically),
capable of supporting mounted hardware and equipment. Fire-treatment
verification stamps on plywood shall be left unpainted to be readable.
5 Communications room walls shall extend from floor slab to ceiling deck, with a
clear height not less than that shown on Drawings and with no drop ceilings (false
ceilings) installed to allow the installation of high-level or ceiling-mounted pathway
systems.
6 Cable trays or ladder racks shall be used to distribute cables between rooms through
finished wall penetrations.
7 All penetrations through fire-rated building elements (walls and floors) shall be
sealed with an approved fire-stopping system. Riser openings, sleeves, cables,
conduits, cable trays, and raceways, etc. shall be properly fire stopped.
8 Floors shall have anti-static properties.
9 Communications rooms shall have only one lockable entrance door, with
dimensions as shown on Drawings but not less than 1000mm wide and 2100mm in
height, that opens towards the outside of the room, and does not open into another
room.
(a) Doors shall be provided with a lockset for the appropriate technology key
with pinned hinges and anti-pry guards.
(b) Door shall not have a door sill.
10 Environmental Conditions:
(a) Install monitoring sensors with dedicated environmental controls operating
24 hours a day, 365 days a year in the communications rooms.
(b) Provide ventilation in the communications rooms to dissipate heat generated
by active equipment.
(c) Provide continuous operating ranges of temperature and humidity as given
by:
(i) ANSI/TIA-569. The components and protection must be selected and

implemented so that the performance requirements set for permanent
links are met in the circumstances referred to in the reference Standard.
11 Floor loading capacity
(a) Floor loading capacity shall be sufficient to bear both the distributed and
concentrated load of the installed equipment with associated cabling and

media. The minimum distributed floor loading capacity shall be based on

room function and types of racks and cabinets housed by the room.
12 Plumbing:
(a) If fire suppression is used, install wire cages on sprinkler heads to prevent
accidental operation.
(b) Do not place sprinkler heads directly over equipment or cabling.
(c) Drainage troughs are recommended under sprinkler pipes to prevent leakage
onto equipment.
13 Electrical:
(a) One manufacturer's product is recommended for each type of installation.

Mixing of different manufacturer products for one item shall not be
acceptable.
(b) No electrical feeders/branch circuits shall be placed in or run through any
communications room except as required to service those rooms.
(c) The Contractor shall provide uniform illumination of at least 500 lux , 1
meter AFF using luminaires located a minimum of 2.6 meters AFF.
(i) Light fixtures in communications rooms are to be positioned for

maximum illumination. Do not install over cable tray, ladder rack, or
19" standing racks.
(ii) Provide enough socket outlets to support equipment and service.
Coordinate power requirements of active equipment with electrical
design.
14 Labeling
(a) Refer to Section 21 Part “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
47.1.9 SUBMITTALS

47.1.13 WARRANTY
2 Furnish the following extra materials, as a minimum, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents, irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation:
(a) Racks: 2% of each type.

(b) Cabinet: 2% of each type.
47.2 PRODUCTS

to:
(a) Chatsworth Products, Inc.

(b) Ortronics.
(c) Rittal.
(d) Middle Atlantic.
(e) Pentair.
(f) Schroff GmbH (Pentair subsidiary)
(g) Legrand
(h) Schneider Electric
(i) Or approved equal
47.2.3 BACKBOARDS
1 Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, void free, (19 x 1200 x 2400) mm

(3/4 x 48 x 96 inches) (depth x width x height). Comply with requirements for
plywood backing panels specified in Section 18 Part "Architectural Timbers."

2 The plywood shall be painted with a minimum of two coats of white fire retardant
paint on all six sides.
47.2.4 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABINETS
1 General Requirements:
(a) Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel and / or aluminium units

designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with
dimensions of units to be supported.
(b) Module Dimensions: Width compatible with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E
standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm) panel mounting.
(c) Permanent rack mount unit markings shall be provided in the mounting rails
showing the position of each of the rack mount unit (RMU or RU) spaces.
(d) Shelves: fully ventilated and designed to install on front and rear 19” EIA
square hole mounting rails, sliding with adjustable shelf mounting brackets
that adapt to various rail depths.
(e) All racks and cabinets shall be provided with vertical and horizontal cable
management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug and
power strips.
(f) Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
(g) Power supply should be made available for each rack as such: a minimum of
two separate dedicated electrical circuits, drop-down pendants and
terminated by socket outlets of the twist-lock type or IEC 60309
(Commando) type unless otherwise specified.
(h) Where indicated on the schematic layouts & drawings, the cabinets/racks
shall be equipped with a UPS, sufficient for the load of the devices mounted
in the cabinets/racks.
(i) Arrangement: The overall equipment arrangement of servers and racks
should be configured to work in conjunction with the cooling system to
provide a low PUE for low energy operation. Coordinate with Mechanical
Department for system requirements.
(j) Thermal Management Systems including “Air Containment Systems” should
be well integrated into the HVAC system design. Coordinate with
Mechanical Department for system requirements.
2 Modular Freestanding Server Cabinets, steel or aluminum:
(a) Removable and lockable side panels.

(b) Solid top panel.
(c) Hinged and lockable full perforated metal (mesh) front door.
(i) High flow vented door offering around an 80% free area.
(d) Hinged and lockable split perforated metal (mesh) rear door.
(i) High flow vented door offering around an 80% free area.
(e) Adjustable feet for leveling.

(f) Supports internal baffles to control front-to-rear airflow.
(g) Cable access provisions in the roof and base.

(h) Grounding bus bar.

(i) Back-mounted fan with filter.
(j) Module Dimensions:
(i) 800 mm (width) x 800 to 1200 mm (depth) in increments of 25mm
(0.98”), compatible with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E standard, 19-inch
(482.6-mm) panel mounting, 2 m high, 42 RU mounting space.
(ii) Dimensions shall be coordinated with the actual selected active and
passive equipment.
(k) Equipment load bearing capacity: not less than 1134 kg (2500 lb) static load
when the load is evenly distributed.
(l) Adjustable mounting rails that slide front to rear for greater space utilization.
(m) The fastening system used to mount equipment and telecommunications
components shall be through ECA TIA/ECA-310-E Universal hole pattern
threaded screws or square punched rail holes to accept cage nut hardware.
(n) Two vertical power strips, extending the full height of the cabinet.
(o) Where indicated on the schematic layouts & drawings, the cabinets shall be
equipped with a UPS, sufficient for the load of the devices mounted in the
cabinets.
(p) Vertical cable manager.
(q) All cabinets keyed alike.
3 Modular Freestanding Network Cabinets, steel or aluminum:
(a) Removable and lockable side panels.
(b) Rear active ventilation: front to rear:

(i) Solid top panel.
(ii) Hinged and lockable full perforated metal (mesh) front door.
(iii)Hinged and lockable split solid metal rear door fitted with ventilation
fans and filters.
(c) Top active ventilation: front to top:

(i) Top-mounted ventilation fan(s) with filters.
(ii) Hinged and lockable perforated metal (mesh) front door.
(iii)Hinged and lockable solid rear door.
(d) Adjustable feet for leveling.

(e) Cable access provisions in the roof and base.
(f) Grounding bus bar.
(g) Module Dimensions:
(i) 800 mm (width) x 800 to 1200 mm (depth) adjustable in increments of
25mm (0.98”), compatible with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E standard, 19-
inch (482.6-mm) panel mounting, 2 m high, 42 RU mounting space.
(ii) Dimensions shall be coordinated with the actual selected active and
passive equipment.
(h) Equipment load bearing capacity: not less than 1134 kg (2500 lb) static load
(i) Adjustable mounting rails that slide front to rear for greater space utilization.

(j) The fastening system used to mount equipment and telecommunications

components shall be through TIA/ECA-310-E Universal hole pattern
threaded screws or square punched rail holes to accept cage nut hardware.
(k) Vertical power strip, extending the full height of the cabinet.
(l) Where indicated on the schematic layouts & drawings, the cabinets shall be
cabinets.
(m) All cabinets keyed alike.
4 Modular Wall Cabinets:
(a) Wall mounting.

(b) Steel or aluminum construction.
(c) Treated to resist corrosion.
(d) Lockable front plexiglass door.
(e) Louvered side panels.
(f) Vented top panels.
(g) Cable access provisions top and bottom.
(h) Equipment load bearing capacity: not less than 91 kg (200 lb) static load
(i) Adjustable mounting rails that slide front to rear for greater space utilization.
(j) Grounding lug.
(k) Module Dimensions:
(i) Compatible with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm)
panel mounting.
(ii) Height: 26 RU.
(iii) 600 mm (width) x 600 mm (depth).
(l) The cabinet shall have a rear panel fixed to the wall, and the cabinet shall be
able to swing open from right or left to provide access to the rear of the
cabinet.
(m) Fan.
(n) Power strip.
(o) Where indicated on the schematic layouts & drawings, the cabinets shall be
cabinets.
(p) All cabinets keyed alike.
5 Cable Management for Equipment Frames:
(a) Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.

(b) Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
(c) Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with
covers.
(d) Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with
a minimum height of two rack units each.

47.2.5 CABINET/RACK MOUNTED UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES

(UPS)
1 Provide rack mounted UPS units for telecommunication/security active equipment.
2 UPS shall be online, double conversion type providing sufficient protection from
power anomalies through internal batteries or extended batteries, as required for a
duration of 15 minutes in the event of AC Power failure.(for rack serving MOI
network, the duration of the UPS shall be considered 60 minutes instead of 15
minutes)
3 UPS shall comply with: EN 62040-1 and EN 62040-2.
4 Technical Characteristics:
(a) Rating: Sufficient rating for the severed load in the cabinet/rack, but not less
than 1.5 kVA.
(b) Nominal input voltage: 230 VAC, single phase. Configurable to 220 VAC.
(c) Input connection: IEC 60320-C14 standard power inlet, cord connected with
3 m line cord.
(d) Efficiency at full load: not less than 94%, at 0.9 power factor.
(e) Output connection shall have a minimum of four (4) socket outlets,
conforming to IEC 60320-C13 and one (1) socket outlets, conforming to IEC
60320-C19.
(f) Automatic bypass.
(g) Battery: maintenance-free sealed valve regulated, lead acid with suspended
electrolyte in a leak-proof enclosure.
(h) Replacement battery: hot-swappable internal battery.
(i) Communications ports: serial RS-232 and USB.
(j) Equipment shall have LED status display with load and battery bar-graphs
with specific display for “On Line”, “On Battery”, and “Replace Battery and
Overload” conditions.
5 Provide rack mounting hardware for mounting in 19 inches equipment racks.
6 Equip the UPS with an SNMP Management Card; and connect the UPS SNMP
Management Card to the Management VLAN.
(a) Provide shutdown connections from the UPS for graceful power down in the
event of extended power failure.
(b) The UPS shall include, but shall not be limited to the following features:
(c) Protection switch: to automatically protect the UPS unit and associated
equipment connected to it, by transferring to “bypass mode” or shutdown in
case of overheating.
(d) Over voltage protection.
(e) Over load protection.
(f) Trickle charge unit: capable of maintaining a suitable internal battery charge
without damaging the batteries.
(g) Proper ventilation: not to override the cabinets' ventilation system.

(h) Power transfer from AC input: accomplished without interruption to the

communications link or subsystem being fed. This change of state shall
generate visual and audible alarms in UPS supervision system.
(i) Electrical supervision: audible and visual, locally and remotely to
annunciating panel(s) via direct connection for trouble indication.
7 Surge Protection Device (SPD) selected in accordance with IEC 62305 and IEC
61643-21 as part of a coordinated set of SPD’s for the building. Refer to Division
2 Section “Surge Protective Devices”.
47.2.6 POWER STRIPS
1 Power Strips in free-standing cabinets:
(a) Vertical mounting.

(b) A minimum of Eight front facing and Eight rear facing, 32 Amp, 240V AC,
50Hz socket outlets complying with IEC 60320-C13 Standard.
(c) LED indicator lights for power status.
(d) Cord connected with 3 m line cord and IEC 60320-C14 standard power inlet.
(e) Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position with cover that
prevents accidental shut-off.
(f) Retain subparagraph below if power strips contain surge protection.
(g) Surge Protection Device (SPD) selected in accordance with IEC 62305 and
IEC 61643-21 as part of a coordinated set of SPD’s for the building. Refer to
Section 21 Part “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits”.
2 Power Strips in wall-mounted cabinets:
(a) Horizontal, rack-mounting.

(b) A minimum of Six front facing 32 Amp, 240V AC, 50Hz socket outlets
complying with IEC 60320-C13 Standard.
(c) LED indicator lights for power status.
(d) Cord connected with line cord and IEC 60320-C14 standard power inlet.
(e) Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position with cover that
prevents accidental shut-off.
(f) Surge Protection Device (SPD) selected in accordance with IEC 62305 and
IEC 61643-21 as part of a coordinated set of SPD’s for the building. Refer to
Section 21 Part “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits”.
47.2.7 GROUNDING
1 Comply with requirements in Section 21 Part “Earthing and Bonding ".
2 Comply with ANSI/TIA-607.

47.2.8 LABELING
1 Comply with Section 21 Part “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
2 Comply with ANSI//TIA-606.
47.3 INSTALLATION
47.3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
1 Contact telecommunications Service Provider and arrange for installation of

demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and an enclosure when so directed
by the Service Provider.
2 For materials and installation requirements for underground pathways, comply with
requirements in Section 21 Part:
(a) “Conduits and Conduit boxes ".
47.3.2 INSTALLATION
47.3.3 FIRESTOPPING
2 Comply with requirements in Section 24 Part "Joints, Caulking and Sealants ".
47.3.4 GROUNDING
1 Comply with Section 21 Part “Earthing and Bonding”.
2 Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, Chapter "Grounding, Bonding, and

Electrical Protection".
1 Comply with requirements specified in Section 21 Part "Identification for

Communications Systems (TIA)."
2 Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI//TIA-606.

3 Comply with requirements in Section 26 Part "Painting and Decorating" for

painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's
label.
END OF PART 47

PART 48 – COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA)
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 48 – Communications Backbone Cabling
(TIA) including its new clauses as follows:
48.1 GENERAL
2 All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be
complimentary to and shall apply to this Specification “Communications Backbone
Cabling (TIA)” except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this
Specification “Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA)” shall have precedence:
48.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part Includes:
(a) Pathways.
(b) Twisted Pair (balanced) cabling.
(c) Optical fiber cabling.
(d) Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
2 Related Parts:
(a) Section 24 Part 10 - Joints, Caulking and Sealants.
(b) Section 21 Part 1 – General Provisions of Electrical Installations.
(c) Section 21 Part 7 – Conduits and Conduit boxes
(d) Section 21 Part 9 - Cable Trays
(g) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
(h) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(i) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) S21P48 - Page 1 of 14

2 Definitions
(a) Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and

their interconnection or cross-connection
3 Abbreviations
(a) EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

(b) IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
(c) ISP: Inside Plant.
(d) LAN: Local area network.
(e) LOMMF: Laser Optimized Multimode Fiber.
(f) LSZH/LS0H: Low Smoke Zero Halogen.
(g) OSP: Outside Plant.
(h) SMF: Single-mode Fiber.
(i) UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
(j) F/UTP: Screened Unshielded twisted pair (also known as FTP).
(k) U/FTP: Un-screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as STP).
(l) S/FTP: Screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as S-STP).
48.1.8 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION
1 Backbone cabling system for a generic Information and Communication

Technology (ICT) cabling system shall include two subsystems: “Campus
Backbone” and “Building Backbone” as described in Section 21 Part “Common
Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
2 Each cabling subsystem consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-
connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-
to-backbone cross-connection.

3 Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in equipment rooms or at entrance

facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.
48.1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1 General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with both

environmental and transmission performance criteria stated in Section 21 Part
“Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)” in accordance with ANSI/TIA
568-C, when tested according to test procedures of the relevant Standards.
2 Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH/LS0H) cables shall comply with the following
standards:
(a) Flame retardant: IEC 60332-1.

(b) Halogen-free according to:
(i) IEC 60754-1 for amount of halogen acid gas.
(ii) IEC 60754-2 for corrosiveness of combustion gases according to
(degree of acidity).
(c) Low smoke density according to IEC 61034-2.
48.1.10 SUBMITTALS
2 Cable Pulling Plan: The Contractor shall submit a cable pulling plan, as follows:
(a) Indicate the installed backbone conduit layout in schematic format, including
junction boxes and distances between junction boxes.
(b) Indicate contents of each conduit.
(c) Indicate the cable pulling calculations, conduit fill ratios and actual cable runs
and tensions.
(d) Include detail and schedule showing the construction sequence of
communications rooms.
(e) Installation of cabling shall not commence prior to approval of the pulling
plan and calculations by the Engineer.
3 Splice Plan: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended
cable splice points, mounting method and equipment list.
4 Cable Testing Plan: The Contractor shall provide a test plan for media testing as
described in "Field Quality Control" Article of this Part prior to beginning cable
testing.
5 Cable Testing Reports: The Contractor shall submit cable test reports in accordance
with "Field Quality Control" Article of this Part.

2 Cable splicing personnel shall have a minimum of three years splicing experience
and shall have completed a minimum of three major splicing projects.
1 Refer to Section 21 Part Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
48.1.14 WARRANTY
describing contents, irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation:
(a) Patch-Panel Units: 2% of each type.

(b) Connecting Blocks: 2% of each type.
(c) Patch Cords: 2% of each type.
(d) Fiber Optic Cables: 2% of each type.
(e) Twisted Pair Cables: 2% of each type.
48.2 PRODUCTS
1 Available Manufacturers for balanced twisted pair and fiber optic backbone cables
and cables hardware: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but not limited
to:

(a) Systimax (USA).

(b) AMP Netconnect (USA)
(c) Corning (USA).
(d) Belden (USA).
(e) Siemon (USA).
(f) Panduit (USA).
(g) Or Approved Equal
48.2.2 PATHWAYS
1 Comply with requirements in Section 21 Parts:
(a) "Conduits and Conduit Boxes”.

(b) “Cable Trays ".
2 Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 21 Part "Conduits and
Conduit Boxes”.
3 Comply with requirements in ANSI/TIA-569.
48.2.3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
1 Optical Fiber Cable - For Indoor Use: Laser Optimized Multi-Mode,

nonconductive, thermoplastic tight buffered, optical fiber cable.
(a) Optical fiber cables shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and
inclusions to meet the electrical, mechanical, and environmental
requirements of this specification and performance parameters of Fiber Optic
Cable Category listed below so as to support and exceed the transmission
performance defined by ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 for the designated cable type:
(i) Category OM4 (50/125 micrometer LOMMF) (TIA 492AAAD).
(b) Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties – for indoor cables.
(c) Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
(i) Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) cables.
2 Optical Fiber Cable - For Outdoor Use: Single Mode, nonconductive, conductive,
gel-filled loose tube, optical fiber cable.
(i) Category OS2 (TIA 492CAAB).

(b) Comply with ICEA S-87-640 for mechanical properties – for outdoor cables.
3 Jacket
(a) Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to
ANSI/TIA-568-C.3.
(b) Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular
intervals not to exceed 1000 mm.
4 Number of Fiber Strands / Cores
(a) The number of fiber strands shown on Drawings for various applications is
indicative only. Contractor shall ensure that the number of strands provided
is at least the maximum between:
(i) The number of strands indicated on the drawings
(ii) The number of strands required for the system with 50% spare.
48.2.4 SINGLE-MODE OPTICAL FIBER CABLE – CATEGORY OS2
1 All backbone single-mode optical fiber cables shall be capable of Ethernet signal
transmission at:
(a) 100 Gb/s up to 40,000 meters in the 1550nm operating window.

(b) 100 Gb/s up to 10,000 meters in the 1310nm operating window.
(c) 40 Gb/s up to 10,000 meters in the 1310nm operating window.
(d) 10 Gb/s up to 10,000 meters in the 1310nm operating window.
2 Maximum attenuation for a single-mode cable shall be no greater than 0.4dB/km

and 0.3dB/km using 1310nm and 1550nm wavelengths respectively.
3 All optical fibers inside each individual cable shall be usable to the fullest capacity
specified by the manufacturer and shall meet required specifications at all times.
4 All single-mode optical fiber cable jackets shall have: the industry standard yellow
colored jacket for ISP cables, black colored polyethylene jacket for OSP cables.
5 The optical fiber cables shall be rated per the installation environment as required
by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction and National Fire Codes. Select an
appropriate cable construction, including external jacket properties, when installing
optical fiber cables in aerial, outdoor, underground and corrosive environments.
6 All single mode fiber optic cables shall meet or exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.3
compliant network cable-testing device certification by an independent laboratory,
for verification of performance.
7 Accessory Products: Provide any accessory products related to the optical fiber
backbone cabling required to provide a complete and functional infrastructure
system.

48.2.5 LASER-OPTIMIZED MULTIMODE OPTICAL FIBER CABLE –

CATEGORY OM4
1 All backbone LOMMF cables category OM4 shall be capable of Ethernet signal
transmission at 40/100 Gb/s up to 150 meters, 10 Gb/s up to 550 meters at 4700
MHz.km modal bandwidth at 850 nm; and at 500 MHz.km modal bandwidth at
1300 nm; while allowing the use of low-cost, 850 nm Vertical Cavity Surface
Emitting Laser (VCSEL).
3 All 50/125 m multi-mode optical fiber cable jackets shall have the industry
standard aqua colored jacket for ISP cables.
5 All multi-mode fiber optic cables shall meet or exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.3

system.
48.2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
1 Optical Fiber Patch Bays (Panels)
(a) Optical fiber patch bay housings shall be provided for cross-connecting or
inter-connecting purposes between OSP, ISP, and/or distribution cables and
the active network electronic switches.
(b) All optical fiber termination panels shall be complete factory-provided
assemblies that contain termination panels, factory-polished "pig tails",
internal bend radius components and splice shelves that are provided in a
housing which includes an accessible rear access hatch.
(c) Optical fiber termination panels shall be suitable for installation in ECA
TIA/ECA-310-E standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm) racks.
(d) All connections between the horizontal and backbone optical fibers to the
factory-provided "pig tails" within the termination shelves shall be made with
a computer controlled, direct core, 3-axis electronic alignment, LED screen,
push button controlled fusion splicing machine and protected by heat shrink
fusion splice protection sleeves installed by an integrated heater within the
same fusion splice machine.

(e) All optical fiber patch panel trays and associated bulkhead inserts shall have
factory numerical labeling included in the design and presentation to the user
side of the panel.
(f) The optical fiber patch panel bulkheads that house the terminating modules
for the optical fiber backbone cabling and any station optical fiber cabling
shall accept connectors on the end of each factory-terminated pigtail
assembly.
(g) The connectors shall conform to the requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.3
for “Connecting Hardware Requirements” for performance parameters and
shall have the same manufacturer, cable type, and connector and polish as
noted above for the respective fiber optic cable (single-mode/multi-mode).
2 Patch Cords
(a) Factory-made, dual-fiber optic cables in lengths that are appropriate for
patching from network equipment ports to the optical fiber patch panels ports
within the telecom spaces.
(b) Patch cords shall conform to the requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 for
“Connecting Hardware Requirements” for standard performance parameters
and shall have the same manufacturer, cable type, and connector and polish
as noted above for the respective fiber optic cable (single-mode/multi-mode).
(c) Jackets of patch cords shall have the industry standard aqua colored jacket
for multi-mode cables and yellow colored jacket for single-mode cables.
3 Horizontal cable manager:
(a) Selected to match the patch panel capacity, with finish similar to the patch
panels.
(b) The cable guides shall ensure proper bending radius of patch cords.
(c) With cover, which opens up 180° up or down.
(d) The finish shall be designed to reduce fingerprints and smudges.
4 Cable Connecting Hardware:
(a) Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS)

specifications. and ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 for “Connecting Hardware
Requirements”.
(b) Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not
more than 0.75 dB at all wavelengths.
48.2.7 OPTICAL FIBER FUSION SPLICING DEVICE
1 The fusion device shall be portable, fully automatic and compact.
2 Splicer electrodes shall contain an arc-stabilizing feature to prevent spontaneous

position shift of the arc emission zone to reduce the average splice loss by up to
50% and also the standard deviation compared to standard electrodes. The splicer
shall require minimal maintenance, allowing up to 7000 splices between cleanings.

3 Procedures such as pre-alignment, cleaning, gap-setting, cleave angle monitoring,

core-to-core alignment and glass fusion shall be microprocessor-controlled.
Multiple splice programs with individual parameter settings shall be selectable,
with seven pre-set single-mode and two multimode programs.
4 Course pre-alignment shall be performed automatically; therefore, accurate manual

pre-alignment of the fibers shall not be necessary. Precise pre-alignment in z-axis
shall be automatically performed with two-step motors. Fine positioning and final
alignment of the fibers in three (x, y and z) directions shall be automatically
performed with piezo-ceramic actuators, which have a positioning resolution better
than 0.1 m.
5 Upon completion of the splice, the splice loss shall be evaluated automatically. The
splice loss value shall be displayed on the LCD display in decibels (dB).
48.2.8 GROUNDING
1 Comply with requirements in Section 21 Part "Earthing and Bonding" for

grounding conductors and connectors.
48.2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
1 Comply with Section 21 Part "Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)."
2 Comply with ANSI/TIA-606 and ANSI/UL 969.
48.3 INSTALLATION
1 Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided
by the telecommunications Service Provider.
48.3.2 WIRING METHODS AND PATHWAYS
1 Comply with Section 21 Part "Conduits and Conduit boxes."
2 Comply with Section 21 Part "Cable Trays."
3 Install LSZH cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings
4 Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.

5 Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures.
Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
6 Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks
specified in Section 21 Part "Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)".
Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
7 Comply with ANSI/TIA-569 for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number
of bends between pull points.
8 Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
9 Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:
(a) Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece
of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.
(b) Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these
positions.
(c) Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.
(d) Extend conduits 76 mm (3 inches) above finished floor.
(e) Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding
conductor to grounding system.
48.3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
(a) Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.1.

(b) Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
(c) Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
(d) Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements.
Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and
patch panels.
(e) Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not
exceeding 760 mm (30 inches) and not more than 150 mm (6 inches) from
cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
(f) Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to
prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by
manufacturer.
(g) Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified
in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing
bars and distribution spools.
(h) Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not
splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard
cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

(i) In the communications equipment room, install a 3-m (10-foot) long service
loop on each end of cable.
(j) Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor
cable pull tensions.
2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Installation:

(b) Do not untwist balanced twisted pair cables more than 12 mm (1/2 inch) from
the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
(c) Verify lengths and counts of balanced twisted pair patch cords with the
Engineer and/or Employer prior to purchase.
3 Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

(b) Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet
mounted.
(c) Install all patch cords with proper attention paid to bend radii.
(d) Verify lengths and counts of optical fiber patch cords with the Engineer
and/or Employer prior to purchase.
4 Open-Cable Installation:
(a) Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in

telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection
equipment.
(b) Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
5 Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:
(a) Install LSZH rated cable only.

(b) Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor
areas.
(c) Coil cable 1800 mm (6 feet) long not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in
diameter below each feed point.
6 Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
7 Separation from EMI Sources:
(a) Refer to Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
(b) Comply with BICSI TDMM and ANSI/TIA-569 recommendations for

separating metallic communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment.

48.3.4 FIRESTOPPING
2 Comply with requirements in Section 24 part "Joints, Caulking and Sealants."
3 Comply with ANSI/TIA-569, Annex A, "Firestopping."
4 Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
48.3.5 GROUNDING
1 Refer to Section 21 Part “Earthing and Bonding”.
2 Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical

Protection" Chapter.
1 Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 21 part

"Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)".
2 Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI/TIA-606.
1 Comply with requirements in Section 21 Part "Identification for Communications

Systems (TIA)" for cable and asset management software.
48.3.8 FUSION SPLICING DEVICE
1 Check actual site conditions prior to start of any work. Ensure all preceding trade
works associated with the telecommunications system are accurate and complete
before proceeding with installation or use of products specified in this Part.
2 Follow manufacturer’s instructions at all times when operating the optical fiber
fusion splicing device. Pay particular attention to cleanliness and axis alignment.
3 Utilize the integrated tensile testing function of the splicing device after each splice
to analyze the strength of the fiber optic joint. Comply with manufacturer’s
recommendations for tensile testing load to be applied. Any splice failing the tensile
test shall be re-spliced immediately.

1 Refer to Section 21 Part "Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
2 Tests and Inspections:
(a) Visually inspect balanced twisted pair cables and optical fiber cables jacket
materials for third party testing certification markings. Inspect cabling
terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-
coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance
with ANSI/TIA-568-C.1.
(b) Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,
equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
(c) Test twisted pair copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens,
intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of
shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not
cross-connection.
(i) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in

ANSI/EIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that meets the
the year prior to the testing date. Use only test cords and adapters that
are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
(d) Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
(i) Conduct the tests in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 for

compliance with the relevant specified limits or the applicable
application-specific standard.
(ii) Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment
manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
(iii) Test for
 Link End-to-End Attenuation.

 Continuity and maintenance of polarity.
 Length.
 Propagation delay.
 Optical attenuation of link, 2 x wavelengths, 2 x direction.
 Where results exceed the power loss budget, the link shall be
investigated with an OTDR to determine the location of the faulty
component
3 Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be
transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and
submitted.
4 Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements.

5 End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
END OF PART 48

PART 49 – COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA)
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 49 – Communications Horizontal Cabling
(TIA) including its new clauses as follows:
49.1 GENERAL
complimentary to and shall apply to this Specification “Communications
Horizontal Cabling (TIA)” except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case,
this Specification “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)” shall have
precedence:
49.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part Includes:
(a) Pathways.
(b) Twisted Pair (Balanced) cabling.
(c) Optical fiber cabling.
(d) Consolidation Points.
(e) Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.
(f) Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
(g) Telecommunications outlets/connectors.
2 Related Parts:
(a) Section 24 Part 10 - Joints, Caulking and Sealants.

(b) Section 21 Part 1 – General Provisions for Electrical Installation.
(c) Section 21 Part 7 – Conduits and Conduit boxes
(d) Section 21 Part 9 - Cable Trays
(e) Section 21 Part 10 - Wiring Accessories and General Power
(f) Section 21 Part 22 - Earthing and Bonding.
(g) Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) S21P49 - Page 1 of 14

1 Refer to Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)””.
2 Definitions
(a) Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and
their interconnection or cross-connection.
(b) Work Area: building space where the occupants interact with terminal
equipment.
(c) Equipment outlet (EO) or Telecommunications outlet (TO): fixed connecting
device where the horizontal cabling terminates. The telecommunications
outlet provides the interface to the Work Area cabling.
3 Abbreviations
(a) EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

(b) IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
(c) LAN: Local area network.
(d) LSZH/LS0H: Low Smoke Zero Halogen.
(e) UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
(f) LOMMF: Laser Optimized Multimode Fiber.
(g) F/UTP: Screened Unshielded twisted pair (also known as FTP).
(h) U/FTP: Un-screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as STP).
(i) S/FTP: Screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as S-STP).
2 Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Employer’s

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
3 Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with locations of power

socket outlets at each Work Area.

49.1.8 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
1 Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting
signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-
connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its
connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing
protocols.
(a) ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications

outlet/connectors be installed for each work area.
(b) Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or
consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the
telecommunications outlet/connector.
(c) Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
(d) Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.
2 A Work Area is approximately 9.3 sq. m (100 sq. ft.), and includes the components
that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station
equipment.
3 The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 90 m (295 feet). This maximum
allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 4.9 m (16 feet) to
the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.
1 General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with both

environmental and transmission performance criteria stated in Section 21 Part
“Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)” in accordance with ANSI/TIA
568-C, when tested according to test procedures of the relevant Standards.
1 Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH/LS0H) cables shall comply with the following
standards:
(a) Flame retardant: IEC 60332-1.
(b) Halogen-free according to:
(i) IEC 60754-1 for amount of halogen acid gas.
(ii) IEC 60754-2 for corrosiveness of combustion gases according to
(c) Low smoke density according to IEC 61034-2.
49.1.10 SUBMITTALS
2 Cable Pulling Plan: The Contractor shall submit a cable pulling plan, as follows:
(a) Indicate the installed conduit layout in schematic format, including junction
boxes and distances between junction boxes.
(b) Indicate contents of each conduit.

(c) Indicate the cable pulling calculations, conduit fill ratios and actual cable runs
and tensions.
(d) Include detail and schedule showing the construction sequence of
communications rooms.
(e) Installation of cabling shall not commence prior to approval of the pulling
plan and calculations by the Engineer.
3 Splice Plan: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended
cable splice points, mounting method and equipment list.
4 Cable Testing Plan: The Contractor shall provide a test plan for media testing as
described in the Article "Field Quality Control" of this Part prior to beginning cable
testing.
5 Cable Testing Reports: The Contractor shall submit cable test reports in accordance
with the "Field Quality Control" Article of this Part.
2 Cable splicing personnel shall have a minimum of three years splicing experience
and shall have completed a minimum of three major splicing projects.
49.1.14 WARRANTY

describing contents, irrespective of manufacturer’s recommendation:
(a) Patch-Panel Units: 2 % of each type.

(b) Connecting Blocks: 2 % of each type.
(c) Device Plates: 2 % of each type.
(d) Multiuser Telecommunications Outlet Assemblies: 2 % of each type.
(e) Consolidation Points: 2 % of each type.
(f) Patch Cords: 2 % of each type.
(g) Fiber Optic Cables: 2 % of each type.
(h) Twisted Pair Cables: 2 % of each type.
49.2 PRODUCTS
1 Available Manufacturers for balanced twisted pair and fiber optic horizontal cables
and cables hardware: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
to:
(a) Systimax (USA).
(b) AMP Netconnect (USA)
(c) Corning (USA).
(d) Belden (USA).
(e) Siemon (USA).
(f) Panduit (USA).
(g) Or approved equal
49.2.2 PATHWAYS
1 Comply with requirements in Section 21 Parts:

(a) "Conduits and Conduit Boxes”.
(b) “Cable Trays ".
2 Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 21 Part "Conduits and
Conduit Boxes”.
3 Comply with requirements of ANSI/TIA-569.
49.2.3 TWISTED PAIR (BALANCED) CABLE
1 General Requirements
(a) Balanced cables shall be rated per the installation environment as required by
the local Authority Having Jurisdiction and National Fire Codes. Select an
appropriate cable construction, including insulation, screen and external

jacket properties, when installing Twisted Pair cables in harsh and corrosive
environments.
(b) Horizontal cables that are exposed to moisture shall contain moisture-
blocking materials to prevent moisture damage to cable performance.
(c) Accessory Products: Provide any accessory products related to the Twisted
Pair copper cabling required to provide a complete and functional
infrastructure system.
2 Horizontal balanced cables shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and

inclusions to meet the electrical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of
this specification and performance parameters of Category 6A balanced cables so
as to support and exceed the transmission performance of Category 6A as specified
in ANSI/TIA-568-C.
(a) Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

(b) Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications.
(c) Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Category 6A.
(d) Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction
as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
3 U/UTP (UTP) Cable Description: 100-ohm, 23 AWG copper conductor, four-pair

UTP (unshielded twisted pair cable), HDPE insulation and covered with a blue
color, thermoplastic jacket.
4 S/FTP (S-STP) Cable Description: 100-ohm, 23 AWG copper conductor, four-pair

S-STP, Screened Shielded twisted pair Cable (braided screened overall,
individually foil shielded twisted pairs cable), foam skin PE insulation and covered
with a blue color, thermoplastic sheath and provided with a drain wire. Used in
areas subject to EMI.
49.2.4 BALANCED CABLE HARDWARE
1 General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with ANSI/TIA-

568-C.2 for “Connecting Hardware Requirements”, IDC type, with modules
designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting
hardware of same category or higher.
2 Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6A. Provide blocks for the number
of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector
bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
3 Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type
connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

(a) Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of
indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified
expansion criteria.
4 Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position RJ45 modular

receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.
5 Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair copper conductor cables in lengths to suit

application and routing requirements]; [thermoplastic jacket, terminated with 8-
position RJ45 modular plug at each end.
(a) Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
(b) Patch cables shall be performance and impedance matched with respective
horizontal cables and provided by the same manufacturer of the horizontal
cable.
(c) Exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Category 6A transmission performance.
(d) Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots.
6 Horizontal cable manager:

(a) 1RU/2 RU cable manager, selected to match the patch panel capacity, with
finish similar to the patch panels.
(b) The cable guides shall ensure proper bending radius of patch cords.
(c) With cover, which opens up 180° up or down.
(d) The finish shall be designed to reduce fingerprints and smudges.
49.2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
1 Optical Fiber Cable - For Indoor Use: Laser Optimized Multi-Mode,

nonconductive, thermoplastic sheath, tight buffered, optical fiber cable.
(i) Category OM4 (50/125 micrometer LOMMF) (TIA 492AAAD).
(b) Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties – for indoor cables.
(c) Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
2 Jacket
(a) Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to
ANSI/TIA-568-C.3.
(b) Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular
intervals not to exceed 1000 mm.

3 Number of Fiber Strands / Cores
(a) The number of fiber strands shown on Drawings for various applications is
indicative only. Contractor shall ensure that the number of strands provided
is at least the maximum between:
(i) The number of strands indicated on the drawings
(ii) The number of strands required for the system with 50% spare.
49.2.6 LASER-OPTIMIZED MULTIMODE OPTICAL FIBER CABLE –

CATEGORY OM4
1 All horizontal LOMMF cables Category OM4 shall be capable of Ethernet signal
transmission at 40/100 Gb/s up to 150 meters, 10 Gb/s up to 550 meters at 4700
MHz.km modal bandwidth at 850 nm; and at 500 MHz.km modal bandwidth at
1300 nm; while allowing the use of low-cost, 850 nm Vertical Cavity Surface
Emitting Laser (VCSEL).
3 All 50/125 m multi-mode optical fiber cable jackets shall have the industry
standard aqua colored jacket for ISP cables.
5 All multi-mode fiber optic cables shall meet or exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.3

system.
49.2.7 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
1 Optical Fiber Patch Bays (Panels)
(a) Optical fiber patch bay housings shall be provided for cross-connecting or
inter-connecting purposes between OSP, ISP, and/or distribution cables and
the active network electronic switches.
(b) All optical fiber termination panels shall be complete factory-provided
assemblies that contain termination panels, factory-polished "pig tails",
internal bend radius components and splice shelves that are provided in a
housing which includes an accessible rear access hatch.
(c) Optical fiber termination panels shall be suitable for installation in ECA
TIA/ECA-310-E standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm) racks.

(d) All connections between the horizontal and backbone optical fibers to the
factory-provided "pig tails" within the termination shelves shall be made with
a computer controlled, direct core, 3-axis electronic alignment, LED screen,
push button controlled fusion splicing machine and protected by heat shrink
fusion splice protection sleeves installed by an integrated heater within the
same fusion splice machine.
(e) All optical fiber patch panel trays and associated bulkhead inserts shall have
factory numerical labeling included in the design and presentation to the user
side of the panel.
(f) The optical fiber patch panel bulkheads that house the terminating modules
for the fiber backbone cabling and any station optical fiber cabling shall
accept connectors on the end of each factory-terminated pigtail assembly
(g) The connectors shall conform to the requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.3
standard performance parameters and shall have the same manufacturer,
cable type, connector and polish as noted above for the respective fiber optic
cable (single-mode/multi-mode).
2 Patch Cords
(a) Factory-made, dual-fiber optic cables in lengths that are appropriate for
patching from network equipment ports to the optical fiber patch panels ports
within the telecom spaces .
(b) Patch cords shall conform to the requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.3

standard performance parameters and shall have the same manufacturer,
cable type, connector and polish as noted above for the respective fiber optic
cable (single-mode/multi-mode).
(c) Jackets of patch cords shall have the industry standard aqua colored jacket
for multi-mode cables.
3 Cable Connecting Hardware:
(a) Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS)

specifications. Comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3.
(b) Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not
more than 0.75 dB at all wavelengths.
49.2.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS/CONNECTORS
1 Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position RJ45

modular Category 6A components, wired to T568B pin assignments,. Comply with
ANSI/TIA-568-C.
2 Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.
(a) Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 21 Part
"Wiring Accessories and General Power.”
(b) Metal Faceplate: Complying with requirements in Section 21 “Wiring
Accessories and General Power."

(c) For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of balanced and
optical fiber, Work Area cords.
(i) Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
(d) Legend: Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving for metal faceplates.

(e) Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
49.2.9 GROUNDING
1 Comply with requirements in Section 21 "Earthing and Bonding" for grounding

conductors and connectors.
49.2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

Systems (TIA)."
2 Comply with ANSI//TIA-606 and ANSI/UL 969.
49.3 INSTALLATION
1 Coordinate horizontal cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided
by the telecommunications Service Provider.
49.3.2 WIRING METHODS AND PATHWAYS
1 Comply with Section 21 Part "Conduits and Conduit Boxes."
2 Comply with Section 21 Part "Cable Trays."
3 Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
4 Wiring within Enclosures:
(a) Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and
without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
(b) Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
(c) Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of
enclosure.

5 Comply with ANSI/TIA-569 for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number
of bends between pull points.
6 Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
49.3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

(b) Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
(c) Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
(d) Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch
panels.
(e) Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not
exceeding 760 mm (30 inches) and not more than 150 mm (6 inches) from
cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
(f) Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to
prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by
manufacturer.
(g) Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified
in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing
bars and distribution spools.
(h) Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not
(i) In the communications equipment room, install a 3-m- (10-foot-) long service
loop on each end of cable.
(j) Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable."
Monitor cable pull tensions.
2 Balanced Cable Installation:

(b) Do not untwist balanced twisted pair copper cables more than 12 mm (1/2
inch) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
(c) Verify lengths and counts of twisted patch cords with the Engineer and/or
Employer prior to purchase.
3 Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

(b) Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet
mounted.
(c) Install all patch cords with proper attention paid to bend radii.
(d) Verify lengths and counts of optical fiber patch cords with the Engineer /
Employer prior to purchase.

4 Open-Cable Installation:
(a) Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in

telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection
equipment.
(b) Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
5 Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

(a) Install LSZH cable rated only.
(b) Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor
areas.
(c) Coil cable 1800 mm (6 feet) long not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in
diameter below each feed point.
6 Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
7 Separation from EMI Sources:
(a) Refer to Section 21 Part 45 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling

(TIA)””.
(b) Comply with BICSI TDMM and ANSI/TIA-569 for separating metallic
communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power
lines and equipment.
49.3.4 FIRESTOPPING
2 Comply with requirements in Section 24 Part "Joints, Caulking and Sealants."
3 Comply with ANSI/TIA-569, Annex A, "Firestopping."
4 Comply with BICSI TDMM, Article "Firestopping Systems".
49.3.5 GROUNDING
2 Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, Chapter "Grounding, Bonding, and

Electrical Protection".
1 Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI/TIA-606.

2 Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 21 Part

"Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)."

Systems" for cable and asset management software.
(a) Visually inspect balanced and optical fiber cable jacket materials for third
party testing certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in
communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin
assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1.
(b) Visually confirm Category 6A marking of outlets, cover plates,
outlet/connectors, and patch panels.
(c) Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,
equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
(d) Test balanced copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens,
intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of
shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-
connection.

ANSI/EIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that meets the
the year prior to the testing date. Use only test cords and adapters that
are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
(e) Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

ANSI/TIA-568-C.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified
by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
(ii) Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests
according to ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 and ANSI/TIA-568-C.3.
(f) Balanced Twisted Pair Cables Performance Tests:
(i) Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests
according to ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 and ANSI/TIA-568-C.2:

 Wire map.
 Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
 Insertion loss.
 Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
 Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
 Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
 Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
 Return loss.
 Propagation delay.
 Delay skew.
(g) Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for balanced twisted pair
copper and optical fiber systems after the complete communications cabling
and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
(i) Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been
installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation
point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number
is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital
subscription line telephone call.
(ii) Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has
a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to
the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the
network to ensure proper connection to the network.
3 Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be transferred from
the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
4 End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
END OF PART 49

PART 50 – COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 50 – Common Clauses for IT & Security
Systems including its new clauses as follows:
50.1 GENERAL
2 All the requirements presented in this Specification “Common Clauses for IT &
Security Systems” shall be complimentary to and shall apply to the following
SYSTEMS except where a particular SYSTEM Specification calls for otherwise.
In this case, the individual SYSTEM Specification shall have precedence.
(a) IT Systems
(i) Section 21 Part 51 - Data Communications.
(ii) Section 21 Part 52 - Computers & Related Peripherals.
(b) Security Systems

(i) Section 21 Part 53 – Video Surveillance System
(c) Other Communications Systems

(i) Section 21 Part 54 - Parking Control Equipment.
50.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part includes common requirements for IT & Security Systems for the Project.
2 Related Parts:
(a) Section 21 Part 1 – General provision of electrical installation.
(b) Section 21 Part 6 – Cables and Small Wiring.
(c) Section 21 Part 7 - Conduits and Conduit Boxes.
(e) Section 21 Part 18- Uninterruptible Power Supply.
(h) Section 21 Part 46 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
(i) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
(j) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(k) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
(l) Section 21 Part 51 - Data Communications.
COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS S21P50 - Page 1 of 36

(m) All Parts listed in Paragraph 1.1 B above.

4 Conflicts

with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following
references:
(a) Comply with the latest issue of several material and test standards, which
have been developed and published by Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE) for data communications industry.
(b) IEEE 610.12, IEEE Standard Glossary of Software Engineering

Terminology.
(c) Comply with the latest issue of several material and test standards, which
have been developed and published by Network Equipment Building System
(NEBS). Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are applicable to this Part.
(d) Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
(e) International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
(f) Electrical equipment, devices and components shall comply with the
requirements of EMC:
(i) EN 61000-6-1, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic

standards. Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial
environments.
(ii) EN 61000-6-3, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic
standards. Emission for residential, commercial and light-industrial
environments.

(g) Information Technology equipment, devices and components shall comply

with the requirements of:
(i) EN 55032, Electromagnetic compatibility of multimedia equipment.

Emission Requirements.
(ii) EN 55035, Electromagnetic compatibility of multimedia equipment -
Immunity Requirements
(h) Code of Federal Regulations
47 CFR - Telecommunication, Chapter I - Federal Communications

Commission, Part 15 - "Radio Frequency Devices."
(i) Security Systems shall comply with:
(i) BS EN 50132-7:2012 CCTV Surveillance Systems for Use in Security

Applications
(ii) BS EN 60839-11-1:2013 Alarm & Access control systems for use in
security Applications.
(iii) BSI PAS 68 / 69 – Performance criteria and design guidance for vehicle
security barriers
(iv) Qatar MOI Decree 9: Surveillance Systems
(j) All electrical works shall comply with the local Electricity Regulations. Refer
also to Section 21 Part “General Provision of Electrical Installation”.
6 System software, terminology, and modeling of Integration Systems shall be

compliant with ANSI/ISA-95 (S95).
7 Local regulations and standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have
1 Definitions
(a) SYSTEM: The IT or Security System to which these Specifications apply.
2 Abbreviations
3DES: Triple Data Encryption Standard.

AC: Access Control.
ACL: Access Control List.
AGC: Automatic gain control.
AHU: Air Handling Unit.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ANPR Automatic Number Plate Recognition

API: Application Programming Interface.

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BBU Backup Battery Unit
BLC Back Light Compensation
BPU Ballistic Protection Unit
BSCR Back-up Security Control Room
BD: Building Distributor.
BIO: Biometric.
BMS: Building Management System.
BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.
BS British Standards
BSSR Back-up Security Server Room
B/W: Black and white.
CAN: Campus Area Network.
CCD: Charge-coupled device.
CCTV: Closed Circuit TeleVision.
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations.
CIF: Common Intermediate Format.
CLI: Command Line Interface.
CMS: Cable Management System.
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CoS: Class of Service.
CPE: Customer Premises Equipment.
CPU: Central Processing Unit.
CR: Card Reader.
CRTP: Compressed Real Time Transport Protocol.
CU: Control Unit.
DDE: Dynamic Data Exchange.
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
dpi: Dots per inch.
DMZ: Demilitarized Zone.
DoS: Denial of Service.
DSL: Digital Subscriber Line.
DSP: Digital Signal Processing.
EIA Electronic Industry Alliance.
ELV: Extra Low Voltage.
EMI: Electromagnetic Interference.
EOM: Emergency Operation Mode.

EQ: Environmental Quality

FAS: Fire Alarm System.
FAT: Factory Acceptance Test.
FCC: Federal Communications Commission.
FIFO First In First Out
FOV Field Of View
FPS: Frames Per Second.
FTP: File Transfer Protocol.
FTR: Floor Telecommunication Room.
FTTO: Fiber To The Office.
GPRS: General Packet Radio Service.
GTI: Guarantee Time of Intervention.
GTR: Guarantee Time of Resolution.
GUI: Graphical User Interface.
HMI: Human Machine Interface.
HSIA: High Speed Internet Access.
HTTPS: Hyper Text Transfer Protocol the Secured Version.
HVM Hostile Vehicle Mitigation
HVTS: Horizontal & Vertical Transportation Systems.
IB: Interface Box.
ICT: Information and Communication Technology.
ID: Identification.
IDS Intrusion Detection System
IEC: International Electro-technical Commission.
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/O: Input/Output.
IP: Internet Protocol.
IPSec: IP Security Protocol.
IPTV: Internet Protocol Television.
IR Infrared
ISDN: Integrated Services Digital Network.
ISO: International Standard Organization.
ISP: Internet Service Provider.
ITSM: Information Technology Service Management.
IVA Intelligent Video Analytics
IVR: Interactive Voice Response.
KVM: Keyboard Video Mouse (switch).
LAN: Local Area Network.

LC: Line Card.

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
LED: Light Emitting Diode.
LFEPA London Fire and Emergency Planning Authority
LPR: License Plate Recognition.
LWIR Long Wave Infrared
LSZH/LS0H Low Smoke Zero Halogen
MAC: Moves, Adds and Changes.
MAN: Metropolitan Area Network.
MCS: Master Clock System.
MDF: Main Distribution Frame.
MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group.
MPLS: Multi-Protocols Label Switching.
MSCR Main Security Control Room
MSSR Main Security Server Room
MTR: Main Telecommunication Room.
MTTR: Mean Time To Repair.
MTBF: Mean Time Between Failures.
MV Mega Volt
NAS: Network Attached Storage.
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
NIC: Not Included in Contract.
NIST: The National Institute of Science and Technology.
NIU: Network Integration Unit.
NMS: Network Management System.
NTP: Network Time Protocol.
NTSC: National Television System Committee.
OCR Optical Character Recognition
ODBC: Open Data Base Connectivity.
OFE: Owner Furnished Equipment.
OIP: Officially Important Person.
OIW: Operator Interface Workstation.
OLE: Object Linking and Embedding.
ONVIF: Open Network Video Interface Forum.
OOG: Out-Of-Gauge.
OPC: Ole for Process Control.
OSPF: Open Shortest Path First.

PARCS Parking Access and Revenue Control System.

PAB Panic Alarm Button
PABX: Private Automatic Branch Exchange.
PAL: Phase Alternating Line.
PAS: Public Address System.
PAX: Abbreviation for Passenger.
PBX: Private Branch Exchange.
PC: Personal computer.
PDA: Personal Device Assistant.
PIACS: Personal Identification Access Control System.
PKI: Public Key Infrastructure.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
PMS: Property Management System.
PoD Probability of Detection
PoE: Power over Ethernet
PPM: Pixels Per Meter.
PRO Public Relations Office
PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network.
PSIM Physical Security Information Management
PTB: Push To Break.
PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.
PSU Power Supply Unit
QoS: Quality of Service.
QVGA Quarter Video Graphics Array
RADIUS: Remote Access Dial-In User Service.
RAID: Redundant Array of Independent Disks.
RAM: Reliability, Availability and Maintainability.
RAS: Remote Access Services.
REX: Request to Exit.
RF: Radio frequency.
Rx Receiver
RMS: Resources Management System.
SACS: Security and Access Control System.
SAN: Storage Area Network.
SCN: Structured Cabling Network.
SCP: Secure Copy Protocol (Telephony).
SCR Security Control Room
SCSI Small Computer System Interface

SDK: Software Development Kit.

SLA: Service Level Agreement.
SMS: Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging).
SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNVT: Standard Network Variable Type.
SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol.
SQL: Structured Query Language.
TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the In-
ternet.
TSP: Touch Screen Panel.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories.
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply.
USB: Universal Serial Bus
UTP Universal Twisted Pair
UVSS Under Vehicle Scanning System
VA Video Analytics
VBR: Variable Bit Rate.
VDU Video Display Unit
VIP Very Important Person
VLAN: Virtual LAN.
VoIP Voice over IP (Internet Protocol).
VMS Video Management System
VPN: Virtual Private Network.
VSS: Video Surveillance System.
VoX Vanadium Oxide
WAN: Wide Area Network.
WDR Wide Dynamic Range
WMP: Windows Media Player.
WWW: World Wide Web.
X25: Protocol for Packet Switched WAN.
XML: Extensible Markup Language.
1 The Contractor shall provide, based on these specifications and design drawings,
the final design and construction documents and all equipment, software, material,
labor and services required to construct and install the SYSTEM infrastructure
including, but not limited to:

(a) All design services, drawings and specifications, equipment, software, mate-
rials, labor and services, not specifically mentioned or shown, which may be
necessary to complete the design and installation of the SYSTEM.
(b) Proposal to upgrade the specified systems to the latest technology available,
so as to bring the specified items to the prevailing technology at the time of
construction as detailed in Article “QUALITY ASSURANCE” of this Part.
(c) Hardware as specified for the system and any hardware that is specific to the
Contractor’s proposed system.
(d) Software application and any other software that may be required to make the
system fully operational as specified including the provision of network man-
agement software, IP addresses, setup and configuration and any other re-
quired configuration.
(e) Installation and setup of the system hardware and software as specified.
(f) Coordination with the Service Providers of interfaced systems.
(g) Integration of the SYSTEM with other systems and in coordination with the
Employer.
(h) Risk analysis of system design showing advantages and drawbacks.
(i) Post deployment auditing.
(j) Delivery of the “Interface Control Document - ICD”.
(k) Final connection of hardware to power, infrastructure termination and patch
cords connecting system equipment to the data outlets and other network
communication equipment.
(l) Documentation: Licenses, Shop drawings, Specifications, As-built drawings,
user’s manual, operation and maintenance manuals, test reports, etc.
(m) Handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts (along with current unit
operation.
(n) Handover manufacturer’s recommended test equipment and tools (along with
(o) Test plan.
(p) System testing and commissioning.
(q) System roll-out.
(r) System warranty as specified herein.
(s) Training as specified herein.
(t) Maintenance and support as specified herein.
(u) Supply the licenses for all software, programs and modules provided for the
works including those developed and modified by the Contractor. The appro-
priate licenses supplied by the Contractor shall enable the Employer to use,
modify, and develop the software, programs and modules for the works sup-
plied under this Contract.
2 Systems Integration
(a) In addition to the above scope, a Contractor handling systems integration

works shall:
(i) Coordinate all integrated systems installation with the overall design.
(ii) Provide all additional studies to align works with other trades require-
ments.
(iii) Be in charge of the systems integration and migration of existing inter-
faces, as applicable.

(iv) Be in charge of coordination and systems integration with new systems.

(v) Identify and report all required configurations for integrated applica-
tions and systems.
(vi) Provide and implement a proper coordination mechanism agreed upon
and accepted by the end users during Project execution.
(vii) Provide and implement a clear execution plan for the new configura-
tions and/or upgrades required on the integrated systems.
(viii) Provide documentation and submittals in compliance with Contract
Documents.
(ix) Propose an integration strategy including a test plan philosophy, meth-
odology and assumptions.
(x) Provide for all interfaces interface control documents (ICD) signed by
all involved system providers for approval to implement the described
functionality.
(xi) Provide a fully functional test lab facility with simulation of the pro-
posed facilities.
(xii) Provide all active and passive components required to perform
integration within the test lab.
(xiii) Provide a fully functional virtual environment including all necessary
hardware and software to run the production of all virtualized systems.
(xiv) Provide all additional studies in case of changes due to other systems
modification related to architectural needs.
(xv) Be in charge of coordinating with other systems to ensure that modifi-
cations do not impact other systems and if that happens, he shall be in
charge of additional study to coordinate and propose a solution to the
engineer for final approval.
(xvi) Carry out full coordination with the concerned parties of Local
Authorities and other Contractors prior to commencing work and
throughout that process.
(xvii) Be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged
equipment/accessories at his own expense, if any, which are part of
ongoing contracts or other contracts, while carrying out the above
specified works.
(xviii) Provide gateways to achieve the necessary interface in-between
systems along the Project Data Network. Any equipment shall have to
be provided and is deemed included in the scope of work whether
specifically mentioned or not, in order to ensure proper and functional
integration as intended, and enable proper transfer of information in-
between the systems as specified.
1 Refer to SYSTEM Specifications Parts listed under Clause 1 “Related Documents”

above for requirements.


50.1.8 SUBMITTALS
review of shop drawings, product data or samples until Engineer / Employer has
approved the respective submittal. Such work shall be in accordance with approved
submittals:
(b) Shop Drawings.
(c) Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics.
(d) System Operation: Include:
(i) System Architecture and performance requirements.

(ii) Inter-connectivity patching of all network devices
(iii) Human Machine Interface (HMI) design for all categories of users.
(iv) Software Architecture and justification (e.g.: off-the-shelf and specific
software, etc.).
2 Submittals shall comply with Project General requirements including but not
limited to Parts “Submittal Procedures”, “Closeout Procedures” and “Record (As-
Built) Documents”.
3 Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of equipment and /or software

certifying that furnished products comply with contract requirements.


5 Manufacturer’s Endorsement
(a) Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s technical validation and endorsement
of the design documentation and implementation.

6 Contractor shall deliver signed Warranty.

(a) Comprehensive cost structure according to committed GTI, GTR and MTBF.
(b) Maintenance stock dimensioning.
(c) Distinguish maintenance during and after Warranty period.
(d) Teams' organizations (distinguish local and remote teams, give associated
manpower).
(e) Hardware repairs and software patch support procedures.
7 Testing Plan:
(a) The Contractor shall provide Test Plan elaborating the testing methodologies
and schedule to be applied throughout various stages of the work. This shall
also include the plan for integrated tests for interface with other systems. The
Contractor shall submit the Test Plan for approval by the Employer.
(a) The Contractor shall test all components and circuits of the SYSTEM active
infrastructure after installation to ensure functionality and performance meet
industry approved guidelines.
(b) The Contractor shall provide and supply all necessary technical and skilled
manpower, tools, test equipment, materials and transportation required for
performing system and components testing.
(c) The Contractor shall deliver calibration certificates of testing equipment
indicating that equipment calibration meets the appropriate levels by a
qualified testing agency and that equipment has been calibrated at least once
in the year prior to the testing date.
(d) Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
9 Product data: For each type of product.
(a) Factory Tests: All equipment and cables shall be tested at Manufacturer
premises, and test certificates, shall be submitted to Engineer before shipping
and delivery to site.
(b) Hardware including storage, computation, processor needs, operating system,

display, etc. as specified for the system and any hardware that is specific to
the Contractor system.
(i) Submit catalogue cut-sheets /Datasheets that include manufacturer,

trade name, and complete model number for each product specified.
Model number shall be marked with an arrow or underlined to indicate
exact selection.
(ii) Identify applicable specification Part reference for each product
performance for each component specified for approval prior to
purchase and installation.
(iii) Submit point-by-point compliance statement to the specification, with
necessary supporting documents.
(iv) For each product, include manufacturer’s installation instructions,
(v) Equipment Datasheets to include as a minimum the following:

 Product performance and features,

 Electrical and Environmental requirements (power supply,
temperature, humidity, etc.),
 Software and hardware releases roadmap for the next two years,
 Troubleshooting guide,
 Standard tests passed and results,
 Product certificates,
 Product compatibility matrix with other manufacturers/vendors.
 Specify type of testing: in operation or in laboratory.
 MTBF.
(c) Software application and any other software that may be required to make the
system fully operational as specified including the provision of network
management software, IP addresses, setup and configuration and any other
required configuration.
(d) Management software datasheets to include at least the following

information:
(i) Product performance and existing features,

(ii) Known limitations (number of network elements managed, number of
administrators, number of clients, size of the database, etc.),
(iii) Hardware requirements (storage, computation, processor needs,
operating system, display, etc.),
(iv) Features and software releases for the next two years,
(v) Standardized tests passed and results and available product certificates,
(vi) Product compatibility matrix with other Manufacturers/Vendors
(specify level of testing in operation, lab test, declarative or theoretical).
10 Shop Drawings
all work to be installed:
(i) Submit for approval diagrams showing layout of network components,

schematic diagrams, wiring diagrams, SYSTEM peripherals, etc.
(ii) Include data on electrical and physical characteristics of network
components, network management system, SYSTEM peripherals, etc.
(iii) Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
(iv) Cable schedule: For each type of product indicated.
(v) Include drawings for the Servers, consoles and peripheral I/O devices.
(b) The Contractor shall make any corrections as required. The Engineer’s
approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in
writing called the Engineer’s attention to such deviations at the time of
submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort
in shop drawings or schedules.

11 Qualifications
with, and at the time of, bid submission.
12 Closeout Submittals (Record Documents):
(ii) Parts lists.
(iii) Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
 Software operating and upgrade manuals.
 Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk,
complete with data files.
 Printout of software application and graphic screens.
 All programming and source code shall be considered as a work
for hire and shall be the property of the Employer upon
completion of the project.
(iv) Network devices inventory.

(v) Device configuration details.
(vi) Device port assignments.
(vii) IP addressing schedule.
(viii) VLAN addressing schedule.
(ix) Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocol configurations.
(x) Layer 3 routing paths.
(xi) Recommended list of spare parts and components to be stocked at
Project site.
(xii) Test Reports.
(xiii) Training Manuals.
(xiv) Warranties.
(xv) Record (As-Built) Drawings.
labeled in accordance with Section 21 Part “Identification for
Communications Systems (TIA)”.
(i) Utilize normal recognized drafting procedures that comply with the
Project General requirements.
(ii) Graphical symbols and component identification on detail drawings

should use commonly understood, unique and unambiguous symbols
(an example of such a system is IEC 60617) - to the approval of the
Engineer.
(iii) The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the project
identified in, but not limited to, addenda, change notices, site
instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions.

detailed operation and control of the equipment.
(e) Directory numbers, feature codes and special programming.
(f) Safety precautions.
(g) Diagrams and illustrations.
(h) Testing methods.
(i) Performance data.
(j) Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers, list of special tools and
instruments indicating sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and
name of servicing organization.
(k) List of qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the
(l) Interface Control Document – ICD: The Contractor shall submit the Interface
Control Document (ICD) which will include details of interface signals
and/or protocols and details on communication between the SYSTEM and
the FAS (Fire Alarm System), the BMS and other Building Services Systems.
(m) System Maintenance
(i) Routine/Preventative Maintenance Schedule.
(ii) Trouble Shooting Guide.
(iii) Breakdown Maintenance Instructions.
1 Materials and Equipment
(a) Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest issue of referenced
industry standards, publications, or regulations referenced in this Part, as
applicable.
(b) Materials and equipment shall comply with applicable local regulations and
code requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction. These shall have
precedence over other codes and standards indicated, unless otherwise
approved by the Employer, in writing.
(c) Source Limitation: For each category of technology used for the SYSTEM
infrastructure, obtain system components from one manufacturer who shall
assume responsibility for the system components and for their compatibility.
(d) Materials and equipment shall be new and shall meet or exceed the latest
published specification of the manufacturer in all respects.
(i) These specifications represent the prevailing technology at the time of

design. However, during construction, and because the technology may
be rapidly evolving, the Contractor is required to propose an upgrade
of the specified systems to the latest technology available, so as to bring
the specified items to the prevailing technology at the time of
construction.

(ii) It is the Contractor’s responsibility to amend, as deemed necessary, any

other systems affected by the upgraded submission so as to allow for
the complete and proper functionality of all submitted state-of-the-art
systems, equipment and relevant products.
(iii) All necessary additional works that result from the upgraded materials,
systems, equipment and the ancillary works are to be proposed and
detailed in the shop drawings.
(iv) The Contractor’s proposals must allow in the shop drawings for
physical space, electrical/mechanical support, network connectivity
and other incidental items required for the installation of the proposed
updated systems and equipment.
(v) The Employer shall review the proposal and shall decide whether or not
such substitutions will be appropriate and prices shall be adjusted to
reflect increase or decrease in cost to Employer. The cost of any change
to the converged network system, the infrastructure cabling or physical
plant design due to such changes shall be included in the presented cost
revision prior to Employer acceptance.
(e) Equipment shall generally be supplied in complete factory assembled units
ready for installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for transportation or
other purposes shall be arranged to limit site work to simple re- assembly and
inter-wiring of control and power cabling.
(f) Equipment Country of Origin
(i) Equipment Country of Origin (manufacturing country) shall be
indicated in the proposal at time of bid submission.
2 Manufacturer Qualifications
(a) A firm specializing in providing a SYSTEM, similar to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance for at least five
year prior to commencing the corresponding work for the Project.
(b) Manufacturer's systems shall be, as often as possible, a standard "off-the-
shelf" package utilizing the latest hardware and software technology. Any
major system development effort necessary to meet specified requirements is
unacceptable. Even if this system is a new concept, it should not require huge
development and shall be based on existing and proven technologies.
(c) Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a service center
capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs
for overall system close to the project site with a response time as detailed
under “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY
PERIOD” Article of this Part.
3 Contractor’s Qualifications
(a) Contractor with documented experience in the installation of the subject

SYSTEM with a minimum of 2 projects successfully executed. All projects
must be of comparable size and complexity to that of this Project and they

must be verifiable and completed within the last 5 years prior to commencing
the corresponding work for the Project.
(b) The installer shall have at least one supervisory employee possessing a
certification from the manufacturer or another recognized organization or
institution, providing formal training in the implementation, configuration /
programming and system diagnosis for the specified equipment.
(c) The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Manager who shall be
responsible for system coordination and project scheduling, testing and
commissioning and preparation of documents related to Record (As-Built
Documents) and Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Employer
reserves the right to approve the Contractor's Project Manager.
(d) The Contractor shall be authorized by the manufacturer of the components of
the SYSTEM to sell their products and initiate a Warranty service on the same
items.
(e) By submitting a Tender, the Contractor thereby certifies that he is qualified
in all areas pertaining to, either directly or indirectly, the works. In the event
the Contractor becomes unable to complete the works in accordance with the
Contract Documents, or to the satisfaction of the Employer, it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to retain the services of the applicable
manufacturers' representatives to complete the works in accordance with
Project schedule and at no additional cost to the Employer.
(f) The Contractor shall ensure compliance with and have a thorough
understanding of all local codes and contract conditions pertaining to this
Project.
(g) Installation team members shall have the following skills:
(i) Good knowledge of operating systems to be able to configure accu-
rately the servers and verify their responses to critical events (power
cut, disk crash, etc.).
(ii) Good knowledge of database administration to be able to adjust internal
parameters (redo log size, index, etc.).
(iii) Implementation experience on Projects of similar size and complexity.
1 Comply with the Project General Requirements.
1 Environmental Conditions: Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project

environmental conditions specified under Section 21 Part “General Provision of
Electrical Installation” encountered at the installed location without mechanical or
electrical damage or degradation of operating capability as applicable to:
(a) Interior, Controlled Environments.

(b) Interior, Uncontrolled Environments.
(c) Exterior Environments.

2 Operational Constraints: The SYSTEM will run 24 hours per day, all the days of
the year.
3 Unless otherwise indicated, 25% spare capacity shall be required at all levels of the
SYSTEM.
4 Power Supply
(a) Power supply for all products shall be supplied or derived from the voltage
system described below, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
standard. For details, refer to Section 21 Part “General Provision of Electrical
Installation”.
50.1.12 WARRANTY
1 Special Warranty
(a) The SYSTEM (comprising any associated hardware and software) shall be
warranted by the Manufacturer to be free from defects in equipment, software
and workmanship for a period defined below in paragraph “Warranty
Period”.
(b) Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the
Manufacturer and the Installer agreeing to replace system devices and
equipment that fail in materials or workmanship and to provide software
patch support and updates within specified warranty period.
(c) To maintain the manufacturer’s warranties, equipment shall be installed,
commissioned and serviced by those installers authorized by said
manufacturer to perform those duties. If the Contractor is not authorized, by
the said manufacturer, it is his sole responsibility to make the appropriate
arrangements and bear all cost and consequences thereof.
(d) All manufacturers’ equipment warranties shall be activated in the Employer’s
name and shall commence on the date indicated in paragraph “Warranty
Period” below.
2 Experimental Period
(a) There shall be an Experimental Period during which the Contractor shall
undertake supervision and responsibility for operation of the SYSTEM under
actual site conditions. If any malfunction or degradation in the performance
is noted on the system during this period, it shall be attended to immediately.
(b) During this period, the Contractor shall fully demonstrate the system
performance under actual operation conditions. This demonstration is to
confirm, to the satisfaction of the Employer / Engineer that the SYSTEM is
free of remarks and is ready for taking over.
(c) The Experimental Period shall extend over three months and shall start
following the certification by the Engineer of the successful testing and

commissioning of the system. The Experimental Period shall, each time a

malfunction is detected, be extended by three months starting from the
certification by the Engineer of the successful testing of the system following
the rectification of the malfunction.
3 Taking Over of the System
(a) The system shall be considered ready for taking over by the Employer
following:
(i) The expiry, with no malfunctions being detected during the last three
months, of the Experimental Period (as may be extended), and
(ii) The submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer, of the
documents and information required from the Contractor for the use,
occupation and maintenance of the system in accordance with the
Contract (updated as necessary to reflect any rectification(s) introduced
during the Experimental Period).
4 Warranty Period
(a) The Contractor shall include a statement of warranty on the entire system and
on the individual pieces of equipment for two years from the date of taking
over of the system.
(b) During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall undertake Maintenance
actions as defined in the “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING
WARRANTY PERIOD” Article below.
(c) During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall provide all equipment,
material, software and labor needed to replace or repair defective products
without any additional cost to the Contract.
50.1.13 COMMISSIONING
1 Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation

instructions, will be used as a basis for quality control and final acceptance of the
works.
2 In-System Commissioning
(a) Equipment commissioning shall be done through demonstration of product

capability and compliance with requirements after being wired and config-
ured in the system.
(b) Test system and power supply redundancies by unplugging redundant links.
(c) Check recovery times.
3 The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on

site for each individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly
installed and adjusted on a location by location basis and that the sub-system
operates in every respect in accordance with the Specifications.

(a) During this commissioning phase, the equipment is powered and the automa-
tion and networking are gradually integrated layer by layer.
(b) Any defects, which may become apparent during the course of these tests,
shall be immediately rectified by the Contractor at his expense.
(c) The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall be prepared by the Contractor
and submitted for Approval by the Engineer and Employer.
(d) All Site Acceptance Tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer
who shall sign off the testing documentation on satisfactory completion of
the tests.
(e) The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall at every level, be subjected to
configuration management and change control by the Contractor.
(f) If modification or reprogramming is required as a result of the tests, all af-

fected parts of the Site Acceptance Tests, as determined by the Employer,
shall be re-tested.
(g) The results of the Site Acceptance Tests, version of software and hardware
tested, together with any re-testing as a result of failure, shall be recorded and
signed by the authorized personnel of the Contractor and the Employer.
4 Those tests shall be carried out over two phases.
(a) Preliminary Testing:

(i) Mechanical:
 Mechanical tests,
 Calibration of the components.
(ii) Automatism / Electrical:
 Powering Tests with electricity,
 Control of Input/Output,
 Control of the safety measure either personal or material,
 Test of local mode operation.
(iii) Network / Software Tests:
 Test of the Network,
 Test of the Supervision Workstation user interface,
 Test of the portable Terminal user interface.
(b) System Testing

(i) The tests performed during this phase are performed with and without
loading conditions.
 Testing the crippled mode (Safe shut down consecutive to loss of
energy, etc.).

50.1.14 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
1 Support
(a) The Contractor shall offer a comprehensive explanation of its Service Level
Agreement (SLA) policy. The SLA should cover at least the following
performance terms:
(i) 99.999% availability. GTI and GTR should be guaranteed accordingly.
(ii) Emergency level 24/24, 7/7 phone support shall be available. Distant
intervention on system shall be offered.
(iii) High-level problem investigation support shall be offered 5/7 during
working hours.
(iv) Maintenance stocks shall be properly sized by the Contractor in order
to match operational quantities replacement needs based on
Manufacturers MTBFs for each component within the network.
(v) The MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall include the
diagnostic time, active repair/replacement time and the
adjustment/testing time on site, but shall exclude the response time.
(b) Maintenance service shall include:
(i) Contract lifetime software patching for revealed problems during
operations.
(ii) Contract lifetime hardware replacements on established malfunctions
or weaknesses generating repetitive loss of service quality.
(iii) Following receipt of a defective product, Manufacturer shall make
reasonable efforts to repair or replace equipment with new ones and
return the equipment within a reasonable time not exceeding four
working days.
2 Maintenance service shall include:

(a) Contract lifetime software patching for revealed problems during operations.
(b) Contract lifetime hardware replacements on established malfunctions or
weaknesses generating repetitive loss of service quality.
3 Maintenance Service
(a) During the Warranty Period, Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall
maintain a service center capable of providing spare parts and emergency
maintenance and repairs for the overall system close to the project site 7 days
a week and 24 hours a day. Competent personnel shall be dispatched to rectify
stoppages at any time during the day or night when being called on by the
Employer.
(b) The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to be sent to the Employer
immediately following every call out, indicating the time of call out visit,
cause, remedial action taken and the time that the service was restored.
(c) A Maintenance Manpower Plan shall demonstrate the Contractor’s
committed resource level available for all types of activities to be carried out
within the Warranty Period. Such a plan shall be submitted for Approval six
months before commencement of the Warranty Period.
(d) The Contractor’s response time, during the Warranty Period, shall not exceed
1 hour. The response time is defined as the time that elapses between the

reporting of a fault and the maintenance personnel arriving at where the faulty
equipment is located.
(e) During the Warranty Period, the MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The
MTTR shall include the diagnostic time, active repair/replacement time and
the adjustment/testing time on site, but shall exclude the response time.
(f) During the Warranty Period, the monthly average of the Repair Time shall be
lower than or equal to 6 minutes for each device. This performance will be
monitored.
(g) The Contractor shall provide at least four inspection visits at six-month
interval during the Warranty Period.
(h) The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to be sent to the Employer
immediately following every inspection visit, indicating the time of call out
visit, cause, remedial action taken – if any - and the time that the service was
restored.
(i) The Contractor shall be responsible for clearing away from the Site all surplus
materials, rubbish, temporary works of every kind and leaving Project Site
and installation clean and in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of
the Employer /Engineer, upon completion of repair, and maintenance works.
4 Maintenance Performance Data

(a) Updates
(i) The SYSTEM will have to be conceived to facilitate the updates that
will take place throughout its life. Software update process must be
easy, rapid and without risk, and must be reversible.
(ii) Update shall be transparent to the user and shall be done without
interruption of the service.
(b) Corrections
(i) In the event of error, the SYSTEM shall have, as soon as possible, to
store in a file a certain amount of information allowing the correction
of this error, e.g. entries in the transactions, faulty operations of the
statistics, etc.
(c) The Contractor commits himself to the three (3) main sizing data of
maintenance:
(i) Annual number hours of preventive maintenance.
(ii) Annual number hours of corrective maintenance.
(iii) Average Annual cost of spare parts (Average based on ten years).
5 Preventive Maintenance
(a) The Contractor shall describe the selected operations for preventive
maintenance as planned during daily operation.
6 Curative Maintenance
(a) The selected operations shall be chosen to correspond to a significant fraction
of the forecasted time devoted to curative maintenance.
(b) For each defect incidence, the Contractor shall record:
(i) Equipment identification.
(ii) The object of the Maintenance activity.
(iii) The type of Maintenance activity (planned or not).

(iv) The total man-hours spent for the activity.

(v) The total down-time duration ascribable to the Maintenance activity
(transportation time, diagnosis time, repair time, restart time).
50.2 PRODUCTS
1 Seismic Performance: Supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equip-
ment cabinets and racks, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to UBC1997 Seismic Zone 1.
(a) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
50.2.2 PROPOSED SOLUTION
1 The Contractor shall use well-proven technologies.
2 The proposed solution shall be already available in use on other Projects of similar
application and comparable size.
3 System and applications software shall be controlled and configured by working

parameters stored in tables and easy to change without programming.
4 The system shall be easy to deploy throughout the whole Project.
5 The system shall be able to accept multiple devices of different types, technologies
and manufacturers.
6 The Contractor shall ensure that the system does not cause any interference to other
systems.
7 The Contractor shall point out in the point-by-point compliance to the

Specifications, the functionalities that :
(a) Are implemented and can be easily adapted (i.e. by changing values in a
database).
(b) Are implemented and can be adapted by programming during project
execution.
(c) Are partially implemented.

(d) Are not already implemented.
8 All functionalities that are partially or completely not implemented shall be quoted
as “options”.
9 System Software
(a) Manufacturer's standard software that is compatible with the SYSTEM

performance and that provides automatic facility monitoring, supervision,
and remote control of SYSTEM from one or more locations.
(b) SYSTEM Performance

(i) Software application shall use a popular and user-friendly platform, e.g.
Microsoft Windows.
(ii) The SYSTEM shall support both manual and automatic responses to
alarms. Each alarm shall be capable of initiating a number of different
actions.
(iii) The system shall support definition of access levels with associated
rights and tracking through passwords assigned to each individual
Operator from basic monitoring to full control and programming of the
system.
(iv) The programming shall be menu-driven and shall include on-line
"Help" or "Tutorial" information, as well as on-line data entry
examples.
(c) Levels
(i) Software shall provide different access right levels and passwords:
 Level 0: no password is required: access to supervision.
 Level 1: a password allows to modify certain parameters.
 Level 2: a password allows to enter certain criteria and parame-
ters.
(ii) To reach a level, the Operator uses a password to be allowed access to
the system.
(d) Features
(i) Software shall provide reporting comprising:
 Alarm history consisting of alarm lists.
 Operator history consisting of database changes and log-ins by
Operator.
(ii) A query function shall allow selected data to be sorted on not less than
3 selection criteria.
(iii) Software shall allow a backup function.
(iv) All servers and workstations shall be fitted with the latest virus
protecting software.
(e) Other Minimum Features

(i) Protocols: TCP/IP.
(ii) Traffic Management and Quality of Service Mechanisms.
(iii) VLAN/VLAN tagging (802.1q) support.
(iv) Hardware Redundancy.

(v) Security Features.

(vi) Network Resiliency Features.
(vii) Power: PoE support (IEEE 802.3at).
10 Licensing
(a) The Contractor shall provide a Project wide license covering all relevant
existing devices and any future extensions of the Project.
(b) There shall be no license limitation on the number of Servers and Clients.
(c) There shall be no limitation on the number of concurrent users.
(d) Customization of the software shall remain the property of the Employer and
shall be made available at no extra cost.
(e) The Contractor shall detail the coverage of licensing in terms of:
Maintenance, Revisions, Upgrades, etc.
11 Communication network
(a) All communications between the host workstation, secondary workstations

and SYSTEM equipment shall be via digital transmission through the Project
Data Communications Network backbone.
(b) Provide Ethernet TCP/IP or the latest open communication protocol.
(c) Data transmission:

(i) The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers
shall be bi-directional using TCP/IP VLAN Network.
(ii) Coordinate IP addressing, Ethernet switch port counts and assignments,
long-term storage requirements and bandwidth utilization with the
Employer.
50.2.3 NETWORK EQUIPMENT
1 General
(a) System Architecture shall be based on a "Client-Server" configuration.
(b) System software shall be controlled and configured by working parameters

stored in tables and easy to change without programming.
2 Servers
(a) The Contractor shall design Servers architecture to fulfil, as a minimum, the
following requirements:
(i) Separation of database and application servers.
(ii) Dual-redundant servers in clusters for high availability.
(iii) Servers located in separate rooms for disaster recovery.

(b) Servers Configuration:
(i) The servers shall consist of dual, redundant servers. The intent is to
prevent a single system point of failure.
(ii) The servers shall be identical, with one server acting as the primary and
the second server acting as a hot stand-by server with automatic fail
over capabilities.
(iii) The two servers shall maintain synchronized databases automatically.
Upon loss of communication of the system with the primary host, the
secondary server shall automatically assume the control of the system
and become the primary server. Upon the re-establishment of
communication with the server, the two servers shall automatically re-
synchronize without requiring re-booting of the servers.
(c) The Contractor shall design servers that are able to cope with the foreseen
workload:
(i) The Contractor shall indicate the percentage increase of workload that
the servers will be able to cope with.
(d) The Contractor shall deliver and configure the required servers.
(i) Requirements for servers shall be given (in terms of operating system,
memory, CPU, storage, associated peripheral I/O devices, etc.)
3 End Users' Clients
(a) The Contractor shall provide workstations on which the client will be able to
operate.
(b) Main characteristics shall be given in terms of Memory, CPU, Screen size,
resolution, etc.
(c) The Contractor shall deliver and configure required workstations.
(d) The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at the workstations
and terminal/data servers:
(i) Keyboard and mouse

(ii) Flat panel LCD video display unit.
(e) All PC’s shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be sourced
from a recognized manufacturer. Purchase of the PC’s shall be delayed until
the latest time possible without causing a delay in the construction schedule
to ensure that they will be state-of-the-art, based on the latest proven
technology.
4 Equipment Mounting: Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated,

equipment shall be designed to mount in a 19-inch (483-mm) housing complying
with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E and Section 21 Part “Communications Equipment
Room Fittings (TIA)”.

5 Specifications of servers, workstations, printers and associated peripherals shall be

confirmed by the relevant SYSTEM manufacturer/supplier.
6 For minimum requirements of servers and related ancillaries, refer to:

(a) Section 21 Part “Computers & Related Peripherals”.
7 For minimum requirements of workstations and related peripherals, refer to:

50.2.4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
1 All components of the SYSTEM shall operate on UPS Units. The UPS shall be
provided to cater for the load of all system components considering a maximum of
80% loading and 20% spare capacity for future expansion.
2 Provide Power Strips, connected to the UPS Units. Locate the power strips in the
equipment racks and on the equipment backboards for powering all electronic
systems in the Equipment Rooms. For Power Strips, refer to Section 21 Part
3 Remote field-mounted components shall be fed from the nearest UPS source.
4 Coordinate UPS voltage, circuit size, and connection requirements with the Project
Electrical design.
5 Coordinate UPS configuration whether centralized or decentralized with the Project

Electrical design.
6 Ensure that the allocated space and environmental conditions are adequate for the
adopted configuration.
7 Connect the UPS Units to Project Emergency Generator. UPS units shall allow for
normal continuous operation for 15 minutes for ICT network and 60 minutes for
Security network.
8 Provide shutdown connections from the UPS to servers for graceful power down in
the event of a power failure.
9 Equip the UPS Units with SNMP Management Card connected to the Management
VLAN.
10 Comply with Section 21 Part “Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems”.
50.2.5 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS
1 General Cable Requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by system

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2 Comply with the following Specification Parts – as applicable to power, control,

data and video signal transmission cables:

(a) Section 21 Part “Cables And Small Wiring”

(b) Section 21 Part “Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA)”.
(c) Section 21 Part “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)”.
3 Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) cables: for plenum installation as per adopted
Standards for the Project.
(a) Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH/LS0H) cables shall comply with the
following standards:
(i) Flame retardant: IEC 60332-1.
(ii) Halogen-free according to:
 IEC 60754-1 for amount of halogen acid gas.
 IEC 60754-2 for corrosiveness of combustion gases according to
(iii) Low smoke density according to IEC 61034-2.
4 Fire Resistant Cables: For life safety installations interface. Refer to Section 21 Part
"Cables And Small Wiring".
(a) Use Fire-resistant cables Type FR4.
5 Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Section 21 Part "Earthing

and Bonding ".
50.2.6 CONDUITS, TRUNKING, ENCLOSURES AND FITTINGS
1 Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall be designed

to mount in a 19-inch (483-mm) housing complying with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E
and Section 21 part “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.
2 Comply with the following Section 21 Specification Parts:

(a) "Conduits and Conduit Boxes".
(b) "Cable Trays".
50.3 EXECUTION
50.3.1 INSTALLATION
1 General
(a) All equipment shall be firmly secured in place unless requirements of
portability dictate otherwise.
(b) Equipment is to be laid out properly in communication rooms in a way to
reserve relevant space for maintenance activities. This space shall also
account for any future expansion of the system.
(c) Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards,
requirements, manufacturers’ guidelines and any authorities having
jurisdiction.
(d) All boxes, equipment, etc. shall be plumb and square.

(e) The Contractor shall take such precautions that are necessary to prevent and
guard against electromagnetic interference. Refer to “Separation/Segregation
of Services” paragraph in Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for Structured
Cabling (TIA)”.
(f) After the proper layout of all equipment is accomplished, all components are
to be labeled, and marked in accordance with Section 21 Part “Identification
for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
(g) During installation, consideration shall be given to operational efficiency as
well as the overall aesthetic factors.
(h) The Contractor shall supply and install all fittings and accessories, whether
or not specified, required for proper, safe, and reliable operation of the
system.
(i) The Contractor shall ensure that safe ingress and egress from all work areas
are maintained during movement and installation of equipment/materials.
2 Examination
(a) Examine the areas to receive the works and the conditions under which the
works would be performed.
(b) Examine all the communications rooms where equipment are to be deployed:
(i) Identify equipment location,
(ii) Identify links on patch panels,
(iii) Identify and check general power supply and grounding,
(iv) Identify premises environmental characteristics (kW/m², air
conditioning characteristics, etc.),
(v) Carry out heat dissipation calculations,
(vi) Confirm feasibility for each communications room before starting to
deploy.
(c) Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cable trays,
and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation
tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting
installation.
(d) Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3 Rack Mounted Equipment

(a) The Contractor shall install rack mounted equipment according to locations,
elevations, and plan views developed by the Contractor and approved by the
Employer.
(b) Rack mounted equipment shall be bolted with at least 4 mounting screws for
support.
(c) Cable guide shall be installed between each 2U rack unit set of equipment to
insure proper patch cable run and adequate air circulation.
(d) All distribution hardware shall be securely mounted in a manner that allows
access to the connections for testing and provides sufficient room for the
doors or access panels to open and close without disturbing the cables.
(e) Distribution and backbone cables shall enter from rear of optical patch panels.
(f) Cables shall be maintained with D-Rings.
(g) Each cable shall enter patch panel through adequate bushings and inserts
where required by Manufacturer’s installation manuals/sheets.

(h) Bond all metallic raceway, racks, cable runway, enclosure, and other metallic
hardware to the dedicated bus bar.
(i) Ensure that bonding breaks through paint to bare metallic surface of all
painted metallic hardware.
(j) All spare or unused space shall be obstructed through blank panels.
(k) Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are
accessible at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item
removable from rack without disturbing other items or connections.
4 Wiring Methods
(a) Comply with Section 21 Parts
(i) “Conduits and Conduit Boxes”.
(ii) “Cable Trays”.
(b) Comply with Section 21 Parts:

(i) “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
(ii) “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
(iii) “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.
(c) Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
(d) Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points
with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending
radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
(e) Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever
possible.
(f) Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make
terminations only at outlets and terminals.
(g) Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Cables may not be spliced.
(h) Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm (30 inches) and
not more than 150 mm (6 inches) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks,
frames, and terminals.
(i) Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not
(j) Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation.
(k) Protect cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual
termination.
(l) After installation, and before termination, all wiring and cabling shall be
checked and tested to ensure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any
conductors or shields.
(m) A V.O.M. shall be utilized to accomplish these tests and a reading of greater
than 20 Mega ohms shall be required to successfully complete the test.
(n) Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are
consistent with Category rating of components and fiber-optic rating of
components, and that ensure Class EA performance of completed and linked
signal paths, end to end. Comply with Section 21 Part "Communications
Horizontal Cabling (TIA)."

5 Cleaning
(a) Inspect interior and exterior of installed devices. Remove paint-splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match
original finish.
6 Connections
(a) Tighten connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,
use those specified in applicable Standards.
7 Weatherproof Equipment
(a) For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where exposed to
weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
8 Impedance and Signal Levels

(a) Match input and output impedance and signal levels at signal interfaces.
Provide matching networks where required.
(b) Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the
controller or panel location.
9 Labeling and Marking

(a) Provide a typed schedule of all data ports according to each related room jack
designation for all Telecommunications Rooms in accordance with Section
21 Part “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
(b) Patch wiring must be traceable: Keep a database of patch cords installation
up-to-date including details of physical and logical connections in
coordination with the SCN Contractor.
10 Firestopping
(a) Refer to Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
(b) Comply with requirements in Section 24 Part "Joints, Caulking and Sealants".
11 Grounding
(a) Comply with Section 21 Part “Earthing and Bonding”.
(b) Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to
minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and
other impairments.
12 Boxes and enclosures

(a) Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and
which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided
with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall
not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures
below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be
covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.
13 Push Buttons
(a) Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure,
they shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with
[6.4 mm (1/4-inch)] high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches

shall be connected to the controller associated with the portal to which they
are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or
other facility release device.
14 Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system

with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
15 Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices.
50.3.2 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS
1 The Factory Acceptance Tests shall be carried out in a hardware and software
environment, which simulates the final configuration of the SYSTEM.
2 The Contractor shall carry out any Factory Acceptances Tests, in Manufacturer's
factory itself, before any site delivery, in order to make sure that the SYSTEM of
both hardware and software and the SYSTEM after integration of various sub-
systems is able to satisfy site technical requirements of the equipment
specifications.
3 Test Plan
(a) All tests are to be carried out, according to the methodology presented in the
Test Plan which has been submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Employer.
(b) The tests are to cover every aspect related to the specification of the system
and its operation; including, but not limited to, visual inspections,
measurements, and operation.
4 All Factory Acceptance Test Specifications shall be subject to configuration

management and change control by the Contractor at every level.
5 The results of the Factory Acceptance Tests, together with any re-testing as a result
of failure, shall be recorded and signed by the authorized personnel of the
Contractor and the Employer.
1 Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
2 Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.

(a) Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected,
and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
(b) Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and
functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements.
(c) Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully
completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14
days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.
(d) Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system
complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test
equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.
4 Record test results.
performance requirements are met.
6 Integrated Tests with Other Contractors
(a) Make equipment available for testing and demonstrating various features
specified.
(b) Typical test segments shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
(i) Communication Tests performed for the serial or LAN interface to
ensure that proper communication can be established between the
interfacing systems.
(ii) Point-to-Point Tests performed on the SYSTEM equipment to the
interfacing systems to verify the functionality and correct animation of
each I/O point/command including alarm messages.
(c) Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest until total SYSTEM meets
requirements of the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.
Prepare written records of tests.
(d) Schedule testing with at least 14 days advance notice.
7 The SYSTEM will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
9 Experimental Period: As described under “WARRANTY” Article. Demonstrate

successful operation to confirm, to the satisfaction of the Engineer /Employer that
the system is free of remarks and is ready for taking-over.
1 Train Employer's maintenance personnel to configure, program, adjust, operate,

and maintain SYSTEM equipment.
2 In order to provide a reliable training, Employer’s maintenance personnel who are

involved in the training program of this system, could be involved in the follow up
of system installation as well. The Contractor shall provide an installation agenda
to the Employer and confirm with him any coordination with assigned trainees.

3 Training Program
(a) Scope: Training shall be in sufficient scope to ensure that all trainees who
complete the program will be certified as capable to operate and/or maintain
the equipment, systems, and facilities provided and installed under this
Contract, and to ensure a smooth transition between construction and
operations activities.
(b) Language: Training shall be conducted in English and Arabic.
(c) Training Aids shall include:
(i) Approved Operation and Maintenance (O & M) manual(s) prepared by
the Contractor as part of this Contract,
(ii) Training manuals, including course outline, basic text of instructions
modules, and trainee workbook,
(iii) Films, slides, video tape(s),
(iv) Charts, models, hand-outs, catalogues,
(v) Samples and other visual,
(vi) Written aids to complement instruction.
(vii) In addition, spare parts and other special hardware shall be provided to
support “hands-on” familiarization with the equipment or systems.
(d) Training Manuals
(i) Training manuals shall be provided for each training course covering
both the classroom and on-the-job phases.
(ii) The organization of the manuals shall follow the same sequence as the
course’s scheduled presentation of material, providing such additional
background and supplementary information, as a trainee may need to
understand the O & M manuals.
(iii) There shall be as many Training Manual types as Trainees categories.
(e) Training shall be performed in accordance with an approved training pro-
gram. All training aids shall be available and approved prior to start of train-
ing.
(f) Course Contents
(i) Training course can be broken down into modules either classroom lec-
ture or ‘On-the-job’ training.
(ii) In case of lecture, it is the Employer responsibility to provide the class-
room for the duration of the course.
(iii) No lecture module should exceed 2-hours interval.
(iv) “On-the-job” training can be scheduled for an entire 8 hour shift.
(v) Handouts must support each module; the collation of the Handouts
forms the Training Manual.
(vi) Laboratory equipment, spare parts, and mock-up models may be used
for theoretical orientation.
(vii) However, practical “hands-on” familiarization shall be provided on
equipment that is either installed and operable or ready to be installed
and capable of being operated. SYSTEM spares of special hardware
items may be used to support “hands-on” familiarization as long as said
spares are returned to inventory in satisfactory condition in accordance
with approved procedures.
(viii) The Contractor shall provide a training environment of its SYSTEM,
which can be similar to the “test environment”. All future operations

shall be reproduced in this training environment with no consequences

on the test or on the operational environment.
(ix) Training schedules: the Contractor shall indicate the duration of all ses-
sions, the number of trainees and how they shall fit into the overall pro-
ject planning.
(x) Training facilities: the Contractor shall provide facilities for the training
of the maintenance staff, trainers and end-users including equipment,
software and documentation.
4 The Contractor shall provide training for SYSTEM operational, maintenance and
administration staff:
(a) Operators shall be provided with a thorough training in all aspects of sys-
tem/sub-system operation under both normal and abnormal conditions. This
training shall include, but not be limited to:
(i) Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose, config-
uration, and operations,
(ii) Terminology,
(iii) Operations theory and interface,
(iv) Equipment appearance, functions, concepts and operations,
(v) Operating mode, practices, and procedures under normal and emer-
gency conditions,
(vi) Safety precautions,
(vii) On-the-job operating experience covering all system/sub-system oper-
ating functions, activities, and tasks including those associated with de-
graded operating modes, failure recognition, and recovery processes,
(viii) Familiarity with content and use of O & M manuals and related refer-
ence publications.
(b) Maintenance Training
(i) Maintenance training shall cover all on-site routine, preventive, and re-
medial maintenance of the system/sub-system.
(ii) This training shall include, but not be limited to:
 Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose,
configuration, and operations,
 Terminology,
 Operations theory and interfaces,
 Equipment appearance, layout, functions, concepts and opera-
tions,
 Operating modes, practice, and procedures under normal and
emergency conditions,
 Safety precautions,
 Use of tools and test equipment,
 Use of system utilities, diagnostic software and various software
tools associated with the system maintenance,
 Preventive maintenance,
 Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing,
 Backup and restoration of software/configuration,
 Assembly and disassembly,
 Repair and parts replacement,
 Parts ordering practices and storage,

 Failure and recovery procedures,

 System/sub-system cabling,
 Familiarization with and use of O & M manuals and other refer-
ence materials.
(c) Administrator Training
(i) Administrator course shall be provided so the system administration
staff will be able to:
 Identify and remedy software faults,
 Upgrade and implement data and software changes,
 Production of revised or new displays.
(ii) This training shall include, but not be limited to:
 Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose,
configuration, and operations,
 Terminology,
 Operations theory and interfaces,
 Software design and organization,
 Database structure, generation, and modification,
 Assembly, compilation, linking, editing, debugging, distributing,
testing and integration of program modules,
 Interface software design,
 Configuration management and control of software,
 Backup and restoration of software,
 Use of system utilities, diagnostic software and various software
tools associated with the design, development, and maintenance
of the System,
 Familiarization with and use of O & M manuals and other refer-
ence materials.
END OF PART 50

PART 51 – DATA COMMUNICATIONS
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 51 – Data Communications including its
new clauses as follows:
51.1 GENERAL
complimentary to and shall apply to this Specification “Data Communications”
except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Data
Communications” shall have precedence:
(a) Section 21 Part 50 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.
51.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part Includes:
(a) Data Communications equipment and software required to implement a fully

operational data network:
(i) Core/Distribution Equipment.
(ii) Access Switches: To connect edge devices and equipment to the

network using 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet over copper (10BASE-T,
100BASE-T, and 1000BASE-T) and Fiber to the Distribution Layer
switches (10GBASE-LR/ER).
(iii) Routers: To connect the LAN to external services and Wide-Area

Network (WAN)
(iv) Firewalls: To secure the networks from external threats.
(v) Intrusion Detection: To monitor and thwart illegal access and sabotage
attempts to the networks.
(vi) Network Management: To administer and manage both networks.
(vii) Other devices and equipment such as content firewall and traffic shaper
to optimize the network operations.
DATA COMMUNICATION S21P51 - Page 1 of 43

(viii) FTTH Equipment
(b) The LAN shall include software and hardware components such as network
equipment, network management software, network services and shall
interface to electronic systems.
(c) The LAN system shall be designed to meet the initial operation requirements
of 50,000 ports with the expansion capability to meet the requirements of
future operational growth up to 100,000 ports.
(d) The LAN system final design and construction shall comply with the design
intent as well as design specifications listed herein and associated drawings.
2 Related Parts
(a) Section 21 Part 1 – General Provision of Electrical Installation.
(b) Section 21 Part 7 - Conduits and Conduit Boxes.
(c) Section 21 Part 9 - Cable Trays.
(d) Section 21 Part 18- Uninterruptible Power Supply.
(g) Section 21 Part 46 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
(k) Section 21 Part 50 - Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.
(l) Section 21 Part 52 – Computers & Related Peripherals.
3 Servers and related ancillaries shall comply with:

4 Workstations and related ancillaries shall comply with:

1 Refer to Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.
2 Comply with: PCI DSS, The Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard.
3 Comply with TPQ FTTH Telecommunication Guidelines
2 Definitions
(a) “OFE”: shall refer to “Owner Furnished Equipment”, which will be provided
by the Owner/Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing
this equipment from the Owner’s premises, and re-installing and integrating

this equipment in good working order where required and detailed in these
Specifications.
(b) "Turnkey System": a complete system of hardware and software delivered to
the Employer ready-to-run.
(c) PUE: Power Usage Effectiveness is a metric used to determine the energy
coordinate with the Employer and his Suppliers when considering:
(a) Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and

testing.
(b) Provision and installation of phone systems, computer hardware,
(c) Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
(d) Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
(e) Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.
(f) Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the
(g) Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility
outlets.
(h) Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
(i) Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental
control sensors.
(j) Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit
(a) Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, Contractors, Operators,

Engineer and Employer to exchange information and agree on details of
project implementation, equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
other systems.

1 Overview of Current Environment and Requirements
2 General Features
(a) The Data Network active infrastructure shall be used to provide:
(i) Data connection of the systems/users plugged in different areas, within

Project premises.
(ii) Each area shall be treated as an independent network meeting all the
requirements of these Specifications and is to be managed
independently.
(iii) Data communications between these systems/users and the associated
applications servers.
(iv) Data connection of these systems/users to the external network
(WWW).
(v) Secure data communications.
(b) The Data Network shall provide redundancy at all levels thus eliminating the
presence of any single point of failure.
(c) 25% spare capacity is required at all levels of the system including all
switches, routers, gateways, etc.
(d) Coordinate the features of material and equipment so they form an integrated
system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future
performance.
(e) The software licensing shall be for the entire network with no limitation on
the number of workstations or standard end-users.
(f) Service Life: The system should be designed for a service life of ten years
from the date of Project Completion.
1 Network Redundancy, Reliability and Availability
(a) Network design should be made to assure real time failure recovery. This is
the reason why redundancy, reliability, and availability are required
throughout the network using load balancing mechanisms and clustering
techniques.
(b) Since most Manufacturers have implemented proprietary optimizations for
such purposes, detailed information on system performance shall be given by
the Contractor.
2 Network Performance and Quality Of Service

(a) Performance and Quality of Service (QoS) should be maintained throughout

the data network using, but not limited to, traffic engineering along with
efficient queuing, scheduling, shaping and policing. In addition, the effective
use of these tools allows effective allocation and management of the
bandwidth to meet the needs of different users and applications.
(b) The solution should support intelligent network resiliency, signaling and
routing protocols. Strategic implementation of redundancies and diversity to
avoid single point of failure is also a key design consideration.
(c) A test plan for performance in operations shall be proposed by the Contractor
and, after Employer’s agreement, implemented as one of the global
acceptance tests.
3 Network Security
(a) Network security should be inherent/built-in at all levels of the network. Steps
for securing the network and providing reliable operations consist of, but are
not limited to:
(i) Physical Access: Limit and track physical access to all network and
server elements.
(ii) Virtual Access: Limit, authenticate and track access to every network
device and server.
(iii) Logical Network Separation: Create subnet boundaries between user
data networks, server farms, IP Telephony networks, TV networks,
Server Equipment Rooms, etc.
(iv) Perimeter Security: Enforce a stringent perimeter security strategy,
using network filters and firewalls, to limit and track all traffic between
the Internet, intranets and user data networks, and the critical telephony
and video networks, server farms and Server Equipment Rooms.
(v) Virus Scanning and Host Security: Use a comprehensive virus scanning
and server/application security policy.
4 Network Scalability
(a) Scalability refers to how well the network, in terms of hardware and software,
can adapt to increased demands. Scalability is a very important feature
because it means that the investment in a system/network can be done with
confidence that the system will not be outgrown. This includes the ability to
maintain network availability, reliability, and performance as the amount of
traffic, the number of users, and the number of applications increase.
Contractor to perform the design topology and shall incorporate the Client
active standard polices.
(b) The network shall be designed to scale in a cost-effective and non-disruptive
manner.
5 Equipment Connection
(a) Standard Equipment Connection

(i) Standard equipment is connected with no redundancy on a unique

10/100/1000 Ethernet port of the Access Switch, according to terminal
equipment needs.
(ii) When the terminal (IP Phone, etc.) requires inline power supply, it is
connected to a “POWERED ETHERNET” port (IEEE 802.3at
standard).
(b) Important Equipment Connection
(i) Important equipment is double connected to two ports of the Switch,

with Ethernet speed according to terminal equipment needs.
(ii) Connections are to be clustered and made, depending on switch
technology type:
 On two different switches in case of “stackable” equipment
technology,
 On two different boards of the same switch in case “chassis”
switches are installed.
(c) Critical Equipment Connection
(i) Critical equipment is connected to two ports of the local Access Switch,
with Ethernet speed according to terminal equipment needs.
(ii) These critical connections to access switches must be redundant in all
ways:
 On power supply level,
 In switching matrix,
 And in each of the up-links to core switches.
6 Details of the elements to be considered and implemented for the above:
(a) Protection into the core to prevent multicast and broadcast. This Project
Network will use multicast for data applications and video broadcast. The
solution shall limit the reachability of certain streams such that multicast shall
not negatively impact the network.
(b) Enterprise approach is not acceptable because the Employer is acting as a
Carrier/Service Provider.
(c) No single failure shall isolate more than a communication room at the
Access/Edge Layer. The Contractor shall explain how detected problems are
addressed.
(d) No single failure at the Core or Distribution Switch shall affect the other Core
or Distribution Switches.
(e) Loop detection and protection to be provided to prevent information to go in
circle and congest the network.
(f) Multiple groups with multiple VLANs shall be segregated.
(g) Traffic engineering analysis.
(h) Network shall be able to transition to IPv6 without modification to the
hardware. Furthermore, implementing IPv6 shall not, in any way, negatively
impact network performance or other network characteristics.

7 Specific Requirements:
(a) Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s technical validation and endorsement

of the design documentation and implementation.
(b) Manufacturer shall carry out risk analysis of the Network design showing
advantages and drawbacks.
(c) Manufacturer shall carry out post deployment auditing.
8 Software Requirements
(a) The availability performance shall be 99.999% on a monthly average

combined for all interdependent systems.
(b) The maximum time between detection of an event and its display on a
workstation shall be 3 seconds, under normal operating mode (for a mean
load on network and on servers).
(c) The MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall include the
diagnostic time, active repair/replacement time and the adjustment/testing
time on site, but shall exclude the response time.
(d) The Contractor’s response time shall not exceed 1 hour. The response time is
defined as the time that elapses between reporting of a fault and arrival of
maintenance personnel at where the faulty equipment is located.
(e) In order to reach the requested MTTR and MTBF, modular design and quick
interchange of modules are required for the Data Network components.
(f) Redundancy: At all levels of the architecture, data redundancy shall be
ensured. The detailed design of the Contractor shall highlight the actions
adopted to implement this redundancy.
(g) Software Availability (SA) is defined as the probability that the program is
performing successfully, according to specifications, at a given point in time.
The Software Availability shall be better than 99.999%.
(h) Task Crash is defined as the unexpected termination of an executing task
resulting in the system not being able to perform the task functions
successfully according to specifications, for any reason. Task Crash is not
allowed.
(i) System Crash is defined as the unexpected system halt resulting in the system
not being able to continue the operation of the machine, for any reason.
System Crash is not allowed.
(j) The Contractor shall adhere to recognized structured analysis and design
methods throughout the design process.
(k) All compilers and code generators shall be of the latest version and in
compliance with international standards. No undocumented or non-standard
feature of the language or operating system shall be used. Main and disk
memory requirements shall be minimized.
(l) The Contractor shall ensure that all software delivered to site shall be
accompanied by evidence that the media is free of viruses.
(m) No software Beta version shall be used in the network unless specifically
authorized by the Employer.

9 Design Considerations
(a) The Contractor shall use a suitable modular design method to enable the
software to be easily modified to cope with additional functionality providing
I/O dialogues, billing equipment and controlling equipment. These additional
functionalities are to be proposed as optional.
(b) Network management software to be provided with, but not limited to, impact
analysis, event resolution, policy management, problem diagnosis, real time
trending, service monitoring, SLA compliance, and reporting and out-of-band
management stress as per community SLA reporting capabilities.
(c) The expansion of software shall not cause any degradation of the performance
of the system.
10 Software Expansion Requirements
(a) Software databases working in an off-line or an on-line mode of operation

should be designed to allow for ease of expansion. Where new database
structures are implemented with fixed sizes then at least 25% spare capacity
of each entry type and attribute shall be provided.
(b) The Contractor should develop software with possible expansion provision
of porting to other hardware platforms, where practicable. To achieve this, a
structured language and compiler should be used, subject to the approval of
the Employer.
51.1.10 SUBMITTALS
51.1.14 WARRANTY

1 Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation

instructions, will be used as a basis for quality control and final acceptance of the
works.
2 In-System Commissioning
(a) Equipment commissioning shall be done through demonstration of product

capability and compliance with requirements when wired and configured in
the system.
(b) Test system and power supply redundancies by unplugging redundant links.
(c) Check recovery times.
3 When the Contractor has completed his own system tests and when the system
record documents, including drawings, operation and maintenance manuals are
complete, the Engineer and Employer are to be notified that the system fulfills the
specifications and is ready for acceptance testing.
4 The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on

site for each individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly
installed and adjusted on a location by location basis and that the sub-system
operates in every respect in accordance with the Specifications.
5 During this commissioning phase, the equipment is powered and the automation
and networking are gradually integrated layer-by-layer.
6 The Site Acceptance tests shall be performed by the Contractor. Employer and
Engineer reserve the right to be present during any or all testing.
7 Any defects, which may become apparent during the course of these tests, shall be
immediately rectified by the Contractor at his expense.
8 The Contractor shall provide a test plan in a matrix format for the converged
network system including, but not limited to, the following:
(a) Layer 1 (physical) resilience testing.

(b) Layer 2 re-convergence times (if required).
(c) Layer 3 protocol re-convergence times.
(d) Link Data Rates: 10/100/1000Mbps and 10Gbps, full duplex configurations.
(e) Round trip delay.
(f) Bandwidth utilization per backbone uplink.
(g) Frame Errors: % of frames with errors passing through switch ports.
(h) Frame Sizes: Check for runt and giant frames.
(i) CRC Errors: Ensure frames have correct CRC figures.
(j) Packet Loss: Amount of packets dropped during transmission.
(k) VoIP Post Dial Delay:
(i) Measures the response time to receive a ringback or answer to an
outside telephone.
(ii) Measures call set-up time using SIP or H323.

(l) CoS/ToS & QoS including:

(i) Jitter, the amount of variance in the packet delay of voice packets.
(ii) Latency, the delay that components in a path add to the overall response
time.
(iii) Per call bandwidth utilization.
(m) Call set-up and release for the following:
(i) IP phones connected to the same switch.
(ii) IP phones connected to different switches.
(iii) IP phone to Wireless IP phone.
(iv) Wireless IP phone to Wireless IP phone.
(n) Speech quality evaluation (MOS).
(o) WLAN AP coverage patterns, data rates and signal strength.
(p) Any other tests deemed necessary by the manufacturer, systems integrator,
Engineer or Employer.
9 Site Acceptance test specifications shall be subjected to configuration management

and change control by the Contractor at every level.
10 If modification or reprogramming is required as a result of the tests, all affected

parts of the Site Acceptance Tests, as determined by the Employer, shall be re-
tested.
11 The results of the Site Acceptance Tests, together with any re-testing as a result of
failure, shall be recorded and signed by the authorized personnel of the Contractor
and the Employer.
12 Tests are divided into two phases.

(a) Preliminary Testing:
(i) Mechanical:
 Mechanical tests,
 Calibration of the components.
(ii) Automatism / Electrical:
 Powering Tests with electricity,
 Control of Input/Output,
 Control of the safety measure either personal or material,
 Test of local mode operation.
(iii) Network / Software Tests:
 Test of the Network,
 Test of the Supervision Workstation user interface,
 Test of the portable Terminal user interface.
(b) System Testing:
(i) The tests performed during this phase are performed with and without
loading conditions for:
 The crippled mode (Safe shut down consecutive to loss of energy,
etc.),
 Reliability/ease of maintenance tests in accordance with the
results of the study phase.
 Stress Test.

13 A punch list for correction of defective components or operational failures shall be

provided by the Contractor after the testing procedure.
14 The Contractor shall correct any deficiencies noted on the punch list and shall take
corrective action to assure proper operation. Once corrected, re-testing of the
system shall be scheduled.
15 Preliminary Acceptance
(a) The system shall be accepted as complete when all base contract works have
been completed and all remedial works have been performed and all
documentation has been submitted and the Employer has received the
specified training.
(b) Complete records of the testing procedures shall be retained by the Contractor
and upon acceptance these records shall be submitted to the Employer.
(c) As part of the acceptance test procedure, the Contractor shall provide hourly
traffic studies for the first four hours on the first business day following site
operation and hourly for one week commencing one week after site operation.
(d) Thirty days after the system operational in-service date the Employer shall
either accept the system in writing or notify the Contractor in writing,
specifying in reasonable detail those particulars that the Employer deems
unacceptable.
(e) With respect to any such particulars that the Contractor reasonably agrees are
unacceptable, the Contractor shall provide in writing the methodology and
time line to correct them and after verification of correction thereof the
Employer shall accept the system in writing.
components in the system for two years fault-free operation.
3 However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than
one from each type shall be included in the deliverables irrespective of
Manufacturer’s recommendation.
equipment supplied.

51.2 PRODUCTS

to:
(a) CISCO Systems Inc. (USA)

(b) Hewlett-Packard Company (USA)
(c) Or Approved Equal
51.2.2 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS
1 The Project requires high availability network in which no downtime is permitted

because of the nature of the activities carried out by the Employer, in addition to
the real time applications requirements (e.g. IP telephony).
2 The network topology is based on two layers. Some of the main functionalities are
described below:
(a) The Core/Distribution Layer provides optimal transport and high speed
switching, also area aggregation as well as policy based connectivity.
(b) The Access or Edge Layer provides workgroup/user access to the network.
3 A particular layer can be omitted –such as collapsed Core/Distribution

configuration - depending on the Employer site and requirements, but for optimum
performance a hierarchy should be maintained.
51.2.3 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
1 The system architecture shall support multi-manufacturer interoperability with

other manufacturer’s products and across any QoS infrastructure.
2 Each network shall be a multi-layer, fault tolerant, Layer-3 campus-wide TCP/IP

network. The LAN hierarchy shall be based on two-tier architecture: access,
distribution/core. A high-bandwidth, multiple 10 Gigabit Ethernet shall be utilized
for core and distribution layer interconnectivity.
3 Layer-3 Ethernet switches shall be utilized at the access (edge) layer to connect all
field equipment (using auto sensing 10/100/1000 Base-T). Each MLS Layer-3
Access switch or stack of switches shall support multiple VLANs and shall be
connected simultaneously to two different Distribution switches.
4 The Data Network active infrastructure shall be highly scalable, growing from a
small amount of users, to tens of thousands of users, with the potential to further
expand. Although implemented mainly for voice and data communications, the
infrastructure shall be capable of multiple means of real time communication

(voice, video, instant messaging, collaboration, etc.). The infrastructure shall

provide high availability, redundancy, and contingency. The infrastructure shall be
able to integrate with many other devices and applications, from existing voice
infrastructure to new endpoints and applications.
5 The system architecture shall provide bandwidth management and call admission
control to guarantee at all times that the network and LAN/WAN links are not
oversubscribed.
6 The system architecture shall support end-to-end QoS. This shall include, but not
limited to, traffic marking, enhanced queuing services, link fragmentation and
interleaving, CRTP, low latency queuing, link efficiency, traffic shaping, and call
admission control.
7 Congestion management and multicast control, shall be implemented to manage

real-time voice and video traffic as well as priority network data traffic. Other
LAN/WAN services such as VLANs, Sub-netting, DNS, Proxies, Access Control
Lists, DHCP and Routing Protocols shall be configured and implemented as part of
the LAN solution. WAN connectivity to the internet and external services shall be
secured using Firewalls and intrusion detection system.
8 The LAN shall be resilient and redundant with automatic fail-over to ensure that
performance and high-availability objectives are met without manual intervention.
Recovery mechanisms must be deployed as part of the network implementation and
must be tuned to achieve sub-second recovery time. All switches shall be inter-
connected and configured so that there is not any single point of failure causing
disruptions to LAN operations. Non Stop forwarding (NSF), Stateful Switchover
(SSO) and in-service software upgrades (ISSU) shall be part of the devices
specifications.
9 All network equipment shall be both IPV4 and IPV6 capable. While the
specifications are based on IPV4, the Contractor, if directed by the Employer, shall
implement IPV6 with backward compatibility to IPV4. Notwithstanding, the
Contractor shall define all IP addresses static ranges and dynamic ranges as well as
subnets and subnet masks.
10 Connectivity to external services shall be accomplished using either asynchronous

or synchronous services (e.g. E1, E3, OC-3 or OC-12) utilizing interfaces to
external Service Provider SDH network in addition to SIP-trunk with all the
required components (e.g. Session Border Controller) and connectivity to external
services should have redundant mux to provide edge last miles for specific
location/services for both MPLS, PRI and internet connectivity
11 All internal network routing protocols shall include OSPF. External routing
protocols shall include BGP.
12 A Network Management System (NMS) shall be provided as part of each Network

to support around the clock 24/7 operation monitoring and management of all
network devices and operations.

51.2.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1 Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated

system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
2 Even though the Employer may be interested in evaluating an outsourcing operation

and maintenance option for the IT Network, the Project shall still:
(a) Have full real time visibility into the network components,
(b) Configure hardware, software, and live software configuration files.
3 The Contractor's solution shall have to be redundant by having:
(a) Redundant devices (core/distribution),

(b) Redundant modules within devices (core/distribution),
(c) Links redundancy,
(d) Permitting the detection of failed components and allow their replacement
while the system is still in operation,
(e) Links are physically diverse so as to ensure no single point of failure
(including, but not limited to, hardware, cable paths, entrance to the buildings
and in building riser distribution).
4 Equipment being deployed must be fully supported (software updates, product

enhancements, hardware maintenance, etc.) until at least 10 years.
51.2.5 TECHNICAL STUDY
1 Preliminary study
(a) A thorough study of the different possibilities shall be carried out by the
Contractor to achieve the Contract objectives. The study shall be checked and
approved by the Employer before any attempt by the Contractor to order and
process the system.
(b) The study shall take into consideration:

(i) Types of zoning,
(ii) Types of data traffic,
(iii) Ways of carrying them through the dedicated technical rooms,
(c) The objectives of the study would be to derive:

(i) The number and position of the specific equipment in the Data
Communications Network cabinet,
(ii) The adopted types of switches,
(iii) The number, position and types of Edge switches in each area
(iv) The number, position and type of Core/Distribution switches in each
Technical Room
(v) The number, position and type of Sub-System Servers
(vi) The number, position and type of links with other systems
(d) Among others, the following possibilities shall be taken into account:

(i) Principal Structured Cabling Network is out of order,

(ii) Principal power supply is out of order,
(iii) Main Servers/Equipment Room is out of service.
2 Final study
(a) The technical study shall also define precisely the necessary dimensions for
both common network and dedicated network in order to determine the
following features:
(i) Redundant servers shall be operating in hot standby and any update
shall be automatically done on both servers.
(ii) The software license shall not be limited and shall be opened for any
number of users within the Project premises.
(iii) The software application shall be working on popular and user-friendly
platform.
(iv) The maintenance stations shall be PC-based with GUI's featuring
capabilities for system configuring, annunciation, diagnosis etc.
(v) The Contractor shall investigate flexibility of connecting (maintenance)
workstations to the common network as well.
(vi) The Contractor shall provide the revised list of number and locations of
technical rooms where Data Network equipment will be located based
on the above.
51.2.6 GENERAL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
1 To ensure compatibility among network devices, all hardware equipment shall be

supplied by a single manufacturer. Solutions which are based on sourcing
equipment from different manufacturers, are not acceptable.
2 All hardware requirements given are the minimum requirements. All Contractor’s
proposed products shall meet or exceed these requirements. Additionally, the
hardware selected shall meet the operational, functional, and performance
requirements specified herein.
3 Due to the rapid advancement of hardware technology, the supplied hardware shall
be the “contemporary technical equivalent” of the specified hardware.
“Contemporary technical equivalent” shall be based on a comparison of technology
at the time of publication of the specifications to the technology at the time of
ordering the equipment for each phase.
4 Hardware shall be ordered as close to the actual installation date for a given phase
as possible. Final hardware approval and scheduled order date shall be at the sole
discretion of the Employer.
5 Approved Equivalent Substitution: The Contractor may propose an Employer

approved equivalent device. Requests for hardware substitution shall be submitted
in writing and include the hardware cut sheet and the exact configuration being
proposed.

6 Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the
ambient environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions
encountered at the installed location. For devices located in harsh environments
such as interior uncontrolled or exterior environments, the Contractor shall provide
the necessary housings or enclosures to ensure proper equipment operation and
performance. Continuous operating ranges of temperature and humidity within
Communications Rooms shall be maintained as specified in Section 21 Part
7 The Contractor shall provide all termination components to the data outlet including
patch cords for a fully operational LAN, unless noted otherwise.
8 Hardware Structures: Contractor shall review casework to ensure proper fit of

equipment, ventilation, etc. Contractor shall verify casework requirements.
9 Equipment racks: Equipment located in telecommunications rooms shall be rack

mounted in standard 19-inch (483 mm) racks complying with ECA TIA/ECA-310-
E. Contractor shall provide the appropriate factory or custom rack mount adapters
for all equipment installed in the equipment racks, whether specifically itemized or
not. Contractor shall cover unused slots using blank panels. The equipment rack
shall be approved by the related active component manufacturer. Comply with
Section 21 Part “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).”
10 Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing fans, shelves,

drawers, special power wiring, ground connections, cables, connectors,
appurtenances, and adapters of any kind necessary to accommodate the system
installation, operation, testing, or maintenance.
11 Arrangement: The overall equipment arrangement of servers and racks should be

configured to work in conjunction with the cooling system to provide a low PUE
for low energy operation. Coordinate with Mechanical Department for system
requirements.
12 Thermal Management Systems including “Air Containment Systems” should be

well integrated into the HVAC system design. Coordinate with Mechanical
13 Refer to Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”, Articles
“Proposed Solution” and “Network Equipment”.
51.2.7 GENERAL SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
1 Levels: system software shall provide different access right levels and passwords.
To reach a level, the Operator uses a password to access the system:
(a) Level 0: no password is required: access to supervision,

(b) Level 1: a password allows to modify a set of parameters,
(c) Level 2: a password allows to enter criteria and parameters.
2 Features

(a) Software shall provide the following reports as a minimum:

(i) Alarm/event history consisting of alarm/event lists,
(ii) Operator history consisting of database changes and log-ins by
Operator.
(b) A query function shall allow selected data to be sorted on not less than 3
selection criteria.
(c) Software shall allow for a backup function.
(d) All servers and workstations shall be fitted with the latest virus protecting
software.
51.2.8 WAN SERVICES
1 WAN communication services into the Project networks shall be engineered to

maximize service availability by removing single points of failure.
2 Service availability shall be achieved by
(a) Provision of Service Provider (SP) Telecommunications Service Entrance

Facilities (TSEF) or Demarcation Room within the Project networks.
Interconnection and tie-in requirements (space, power supply, cooling,
wiring, etc.) shall be fully coordinated with the Service Provider for proper
operation and services.
(b) Implementation of WAN services utilizing fault tolerant transmission
techniques and equipment.
3 All required services whether voice, data or video, shall be delivered over the
Structured Cabling Network cables and the resilient device/system configuration.
4 The applications and services shall be equally divided and load balanced across this
solution, thereby providing resilient logical and physical paths in the event of a
failure. This solution will ensure continued service to the networks should any one
element of the WAN system fail.
5 The Contractor shall provide adequate number of circuits, or equivalent bandwidth

via an alternative technology, for the data bandwidth requirements with proper
sizing submitted to the consultant. The data bandwidth requirements have been
based upon the availability of HSIA, off site and remote access. An estimation of
the data bandwidth requirement is 10Gbps.
6 Depending on the types of technologies available both VoIP telephony and data
system bandwidth requirements could be shared. The Contractor shall provide the
most suitable option available within their tender response.

51.2.9 WAN DEVICES & NETWORK SECURITY
1 With the implementation of a converged network, incorporating wireless LAN

accessibility, dual paths/interfaces to external resources and additional Third Party
access, network security is paramount.
2 The network security policies required for the converged network system shall
provide multiple levels of logical security to restrict and monitor access including:
(a) Port Security to restrict access into a device by disabling the ports on a per
port basis.
(b) VLAN implementation requiring routing between VLAN networks.
(c) Filtering by MAC address, IP address, Protocol, Port Number, role-based or
Application.
(d) Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA).
(e) Remote Access Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers.
(f) Terminal Access Controller-Access Control System.
(g) Firewalls.
(h) Proxy
(i) Intrusion detection and prevention mechanisms.
(j) Utilization of Access Control Lists (ACLs).
(k) Encryption techniques.
(l) Implementation of security protocols e.g. IPSec, IEEE 802.1X and SSL/TLS.
(m) Virtual Private Network (VPN) capabilities.
(n) Packet filtering.
(o) Policy based routing.
(p) Compliance with the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI-
DSS) requirements for securing card payment transactions.
3 To provide WAN connectivity and security converged network, the following

functional areas shall be implemented:
(a) WAN Access devices.

(b) Internal and Perimeter Firewalls, Intrusion Prevention System (IPS)
(c) DMZ devices (e.g. switches, IPS)
(d) Load Balancing devices.
(e) WAN Routers.
4 The WAN Access devices shall be connected into the converged network and shall
conform to all of the converged network chassis based devices functionality and
specification requirements.
5 Two levels of firewall shall be provided: perimeter and internal. These devices shall
be located on either side of the DMZ switch.
6 Both sets of firewalls shall, as minimum, provide the following functionality:
(a) Application inspection and control.

(b) Protocol conformance checking.
(c) Stateful packet inspection.

(d) Alert notification and logging.

(e) Application traffic rate and session control.
(f) Telephony Application Layer Gateway (ALG) inspection.
7 The DMZ fixed configuration devices shall conform to the same functionality and
specification as the converged network fixed configuration Access device.
8 The load balancing devices shall allow the data and other services to be load
balanced.
9 The load balancing devices, as a minimum, shall provide the following:
(a) Load balancing algorithms including:
(i) Application type.

(ii) Traffic type.
(iii) IP address.
(iv) Round Robin (RR).
(v) Weighted Round Robin (WRR).
(b) Multiple VLAN implementations (IEEE 802.1Q).
(c) Layer 3 routing capabilities:

(i) OSPF support.
(ii) Multiple public IP pass through.
(iii) Network Address Translation (NAT).
(iv) VPN pass through and VPN fault tolerance.
(d) QoS prioritization (IEEE 802.1p). QoS implementation is to provide quality

and priority of voice and other time based transmissions whilst ensuring data
delivery.
(e) Inbound load balancing.
(f) Bandwidth management to provide prioritization to critical traffic.
(g) Built in DNS server.
(h) SNMP, RMON & RMON II network management standards.
10 The WAN perimeter routers shall be chassis based modular devices and shall be of
the following specification:
(a) Provide a minimum 2 RU slot space.

(b) Built in redundant power supply.
(c) Should have at least 1Gbps WAN performance and upgradable up to 2 Gbps.
However, Minimum forwarding performance shall accommodate all
type/bandwidth of service provider connectivity and employer requirements
(d) Should have at least 2 GE/SFP integrated WAN ports.
(e) Should have integrated out of band management ports.
(f) Multiprotocol support.
(g) WAN connectivity shall be sized with accordance to the project/Operator
requirements and submitted to the engineer for approval.
(h) Support OSPF, BGP, policy based routing and QoS.

51.2.10 CONVERGED NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
1 The converged network system shall meet the current and future strategic
requirements. The following criteria have been identified as being necessary to
ensure a high performance, high availability, logically resilient, scalable and
manageable converged network system. The converged network system shall
provide:
(a) Resilience, both physical and logical.

(b) Shall operate twenty-four (24) hours per day, seven (7) days per week with a
99.999% availability.
(c) Modularity, with the capability to support emerging technologies without
major upgrades.
(d) Support for business-quality voice and video traffic without any degradation
in performance.
(e) Ethernet based technology interfaces.
(f) Support for current IPv4 network addressing and future compatibility with
IPv6 network addressing schemes.
(g) Seamless Wireless LAN connectivity.
(h) Dynamic support for Moves, Adds and Changes, thereby reducing
operational costs and facilitating network management.
(i) A minimum product life cycle of five years after network commissioning and
to be verified by the network product vendor. Products are to be three years
before end-of sale and five years before end-of life after the network
commissioning and to be verified by the network product vendor
(j) Converged network systems are increasing in complexity and criticality to an
organization’s business success, therefore industry recognized design
guidelines and standards based practices shall be followed and implemented.
51.2.11 CONVERGED NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONALITY
1 IP Addressing
(a) Due to the size of the network in the project , the requirement for the Data,
Voice and Security systems, etc., to be converged, an IPv4 RFC 1918 IP
Addressing scheme shall be implemented.
(b) Within the address range, the network shall be sub-netted so that it will
provide a contiguous block of IP Subnet.
(c) The IP Addressing scheme shall reflect the type of device, system and its
location within the network.
(d) The IP Address scheme shall be easily summarized for management and
routing purposes.
(e) The IP Addressing scheme shall provide growth capacity, allow for future
network topology changes and be easy to implement and maintain.
(f) IP Addresses shall be both statically and dynamically configured. The
Contractor shall specify the types of devices and equipment that shall have
static and dynamic IP addresses.
(g) DHCP facilities shall be provided by the Contractor.

(h) The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and
approval, of their recommended IP Addressing scheme.
2 IP Multicasts
(a) The IP Multicast address allocation shall conform with administratively

scoped IP Multicast addressing (RFC2365) and be based on the geographical
scope of the application, the defined business groups and areas within the
Project organizations.
(b) The IP Multicast boundaries shall be configured around either the edges of
each building or groups of buildings with a common function such that their
multicast will not leave that boundary.
(c) An IP Multicast boundary shall be configured around the entire network so
that all multicast traffic is not permitted to leave the converged network.
(d) To ensure that multicast traffic does not overwhelm the network, restrictions
on bandwidth within each multicast boundary shall be applied.
3 The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and approval,
of their recommended IP Multicast Addressing scheme.
4 Virtual LAN (VLANS)
(a) To provide multiple groups of users’ access to secure services via a single
converged network system, the network shall be configured to facilitate
multiple SSIDs for Wireless LAN connectivity and multiple VLANs.
(b) VLANs shall not be allowed to propagate beyond the Access layer devices.
(c) Separate VLANs shall be provided for the following services carried over the
converged network system:
(i) IP telephony.
(ii) General administration applications per department or application.
(iii) Specialist applications, e.g. SAP.
(iv) AV systems.
(v) Building Management systems.
(vi) Network management.
(vii) Out of band management (dependent on device).
(viii)Storage systems. (Separate VLAN to provide dedicated bandwidth and
increased throughput to users accessing the stored data).
(ix) Back-Up systems. (Separate VLAN to provide a dedicated channel to
allow periodical Back-Ups without causing any impact on the
operational network).
(x) Access to web based e-learning and training facilities.
(xi) Staff and visitor access to the public internet (www).
(xii) Integration Systems.
(d) Hosts per VLAN should not exceed the industry standard guidelines,
(e) The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and
approval of their recommended VLAN Addressing scheme.

5 IP Routing Protocol (OSPF)
(a) Multi-protocol enterprise network with many routes, a robust, efficient and
scalable routing protocol shall be provided.
(b) OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) shall be implemented as the routing protocol
for each of the Project converged networks as it is a hierarchical, modular,
standards based, rapid converging and granular routing protocol.
(c) The OSPF configurations shall provide load balancing between multiple
equal cost paths ensuring that traffic is efficiently forwarded.
(d) The hierarchical structure of OSPF shall allow the configuration to map
directly onto the 2-tier physical model of the Core/Distribution and Access
layers.
(e) The core/distribution devices within the Server Equipment Rooms shall be
defined as “backbone routers”.
(f) The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and
approval, of their recommended layer 3 routing protocol configurations and
convergence paths to achieve the required logical resilience.
6 Service Delivery
(a) To ensure the delivery of time sensitive traffic, e.g. voice and video, the
converged network shall incorporate several technology mechanisms
dedicated to traffic service levels and prioritization.
(b) To provide traffic prioritization for ‘time sensitive’ applications and services,
the converged network shall be configured to deliver Class of Service (CoS)
at Layer 2 and Quality of Service (QoS) at Layer 3.
(c) Voice and video traffic shall be prioritized as critical, whereas data traffic
shall be prioritized as routine or best effort.
(d) To ensure sufficient bandwidth is available within the LAN for the VoIP
solution, the Codec to be utilized shall be G711. G711 provides slightly better
voice quality than G729 due to the additional payload and header information
it carries.
7 Power Over Ethernet (POE)
(a) The IEEE 802.3at standard shall be adhered to for the PoE requirements for
the converged network devices.
(b) The Ethernet, 10/100/1000, RJ45 interfaces providing connectivity to the end
user devices shall be PoE enabled, thereby utilizing the Power Source
Equipment method for delivery of power to the end user device.
(c) Based on the Level 0 (default) Class for PoE delivery, the Contractor shall
provide details within their proposal, for review and approval, of the power
consumption calculations ensuring that the proposed chassis power supplies
are of sufficient capacity for the systems PoE requirements.

51.2.12 CONVERGED NETWORK MANAGEMENT
1 General
(a) After implementation of the converged network system, a network

management platform for monitoring and managing the operational
requirements of the whole converged network system shall be provided.
(b) The Network Management System shall provide the capability to manage and
monitor both the devices connected to the network and the services delivered
over the network.
2 Standards
(a) Applicable portions of the following IETF standards, issued as RFCs, for
Network Management shall be adhered to for each Network Management
Systems (NMS):
RFC Description
#
1157 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
1212 Concise MIB definitions.
1213 Management Information Base for Network Manage-
ment of TCP/IP based internets (MIB2).
1757 Remote Monitoring (RMON).
2021 Remote Monitoring 2 (RMON2).
2578 Structure of Management Information v2 (SMIv2).
2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information
Base.
3411 Architecture for describing SNMP management frame-
works.
3412 Message processing and dispatching for SNMP.
3413 SNMP applications.
3414 User based Security Model (USM) for SNMPv3.
3415 View based Access Control Model (VACM) for SNMP.
3416 Version 3 of Protocol Operations for SNMP.
3417 Transport Mappings for SNMP.
3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for SNMP.
3 The NMS services shall be provided for:
(a) Metro Infrastructure and MPLS equipment

(b) Voice services equipment
(c) Video and IPTV services equipment
(d) Wireless communications services equipment
4 Network Management Capabilities
(a) The Network Management System shall, as a minimum, provide the

following features and functionality:

(i) Full compatibility with the proposed converged network equipment.

(ii) Automatic and manual device/system configuration and discovery
using standards based discovery mechanisms.
(iii) Automatic and manual Layer 2 & 3 topology configurations.
(iv) Separate VLAN for device management.
(v) Individual services management of operational VLANs.
(vi) Capability to perform remote diagnostic tests on system resources and
devices.
(vii) Raise alarms when set thresholds are reached.
(viii) Provide alarm history and device/fault management.
(ix) Back-up capability to allow for trend analysis.
(x) Diagnose Quality of Service (QoS)/Class of Service (CoS) problems.
(xi) Provide packet, protocol and traffic/bandwidth analysis.
(xii) Call detail recording.
(xiii) Provide remote access via the WAN to facilitate moves, adds and
changes.
(xiv) Provide dynamic functionality to Moves, Adds and Changes (MACs),
allowing the network administrators a visual, graphical user interface.
It shall interpret changes as they occur. As part of the network
management system, this specifically details any disconnected, failed
or 3rd party devices being connected to the system.
(xv) Diagnostic testing, performance and connectivity details about
different modules, devices and configurations comprising the
converged network.
(xvi) WAN performance measurements including latency, jitter and node to
node service quality.
(xvii) IP Service Level Agreement (SLA).
51.2.13 VOIP SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
(a) The VoIP telehony management solution shall provide a real time service
level view of the VoIP solution and the current operational status of the
various VoIP devices, as well as providing the following additional
management capabilities:
(i) Display the Mean Opinion Scores (MOS) associated with service
quality between pairs of endpoints (the endpoints can be IP phones,
messaging systems, conferencing systems or voice gateways) at
specified times.
Mean Opin- Quality Impairment

ion Score
5 Excellent Imperceptible
4 Good Perceptible but not annoying
3 Fair Slightly annoying
2 Poor Annoying
1 Bad Very annoying

(ii) Provide current information about connectivity-related and

registration-related outages affecting IP phones including Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H323 on the network.
(iii) Provide additional information to determine the location and
identification of the IP phones. Track the IP phones status changes and
create a variety of reports that document moves, adds and changes
associated with IP phones on the network.
(iv) Discover and continuously monitor and support diagnostic tests to IP
phones deployed within the converged network.
2 Wireless LAN System Management
(a) The WLAN management solution shall provide Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11)
planning, configuration and management enabling the design, control and
monitoring of the enterprise wireless networks from a centralized location.
(b) The WLAN management solution shall provide visualization of the wireless
network layout and monitor the ongoing WLAN performance including:
(i) RF prediction, planning and design.

(ii) Performance and coverage estimations.
(iii) Device configuration.
(iv) Policy provisioning.
(v) Network optimization and utilization.
(vi) Troubleshooting and fault diagnosis.
(vii) User tracking.
(viii) Security monitoring.
(ix) Wireless LAN systems management.
(x) Trend analysis.
(xi) RF management capabilities provided by Wireless LAN controllers,
including channel assignments, cross channel interference and access
point transmit power settings.
(xii) Alarm notification.
(xiii) Key utilization statistics.
(xiv) Intrusion Detection System/Intrusion Prevention System.
(xv) RF attack signatures and management frame protection.
(xvi) Rogue detection, location and containment.
(xvii) User exclusion lists.
3 Cost Information
(a) The costs for each individual element of the Network Management System
shall be provided separately and shall include the supply, installation, set-up
and commissioning of the Network Management System as described within
this Specification
51.2.14 CONVERGED NETWORK SWITCHES
1 Device Hierarchy

(a) The most important aspect of a converged network design is the

implementation of the hierarchical model incorporating the core/distribution
and access layers, providing inter-connectivity at both the physical and
logical layers for a fault tolerant network.
(b) Converged network design shall be based on the 2-tier hierarchical model
incorporating a Core/Distribution and Access layer. However, a particular
layer can be omitted – such as collapsed Core / Distribution configuration –
depending on the Employer site and requirements.
(c) The Access layer shall provide the connection point into the network for the
end user device, VoIP telephony devices and other IP networked devices
(client PCs/workstations, laptops and WAPs).
(d) The Core/Distribution layer shall provide a high-speed switching backbone
and shall be designed to switch packets as fast as possible.
2 Device Functionality
(a) To provide a fully converged and resilient network system; at a minimum the
network devices shall provide functionality and support for the following
protocols and specifications:
(i) Layer 2 bridging/switching supporting Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE

802.1s) and Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w) to remove bridging
loops and provide redundant fail over at Layer 2.
(ii) Multiple VLAN implementations (IEEE 802.1Q).
(iii) Layer 2 Class of Service.
(iv) Layer 3 routing capabilities.
(v) IP Multicast routing/IGMP snooping.
(vi) QoS prioritization (IEEE 802.1p). QoS implementation is to provide
quality and priority of voice and other time based transmissions whilst
ensuring data delivery.
(vii) Power over Ethernet specification (IEEE 802.3at).
(viii) IPSec and enhanced security specification (IEEE 802.1X).
(ix) Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) & H323.
(x) Network Time Protocol (NTP).
(xi) Wireless LANs (IEEE 802.11) (for Wireless LAN).
(xii) Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) (for Telephony).
(xiii) SNMP, RMON & RMON II network management standards.
(xiv) Redundant Power Supply shall be provided for each networking device.
3 Device Types
(a) Network Core/Distribution shall be a multi-layer switch. Each

Core/Distribution switch shall support multiple 10 Gigabit Ethernet
standards.
(b) The Access switches shall be based on fixed configuration, providing a fixed
configuration regarding:

(i) Port count 24 or 48.

(ii) RJ45 connectivity with data rates of 10, 100 or 1000Mbps.
(iii) Power capacity for PoE (IEEE 802.3 at).
(c) Chassis based devices shall have the capability to accommodate the following
feature modules:
Module Feature
Individually Configurable
Hot Swappable
Interchangeable within Series
10Gbps Fibre Connectivity
1Gbps Fibre Connectivity
100Mbps Fibre Connectivity
10/100/1000Mbps Copper Connectivity
WAN Connectivity
Integrated WAN Connectivity (OC3-
OC48)
PSTN/Gateway Connectivity
(T1/E1/T3/E3/FXS)
DWDM Connectivity
CWDM Connectivity
Metro Ethernet Connectivity
Wireless LAN Services Module
IP Security VPN Module
SSL/TLS Module
4 Core/ Distribution Switches System Requirements
(a) Core/ Distribution switches shall be interconnected via multiple 10 Gigabit

Ethernet interfaces.
(b) The Core/Distribution devices shall be chassis based modular devices and
shall be of the following specification:
(i) Provide a minimum 10 module slots space.

(ii) Dual processor control modules.
(iii) 10 Gbps modules
(iv) Dual power supplies.(redundant)
(v) Fan unit. (redundant)
(vi) Switch fabric (backplane) capability of 11.4 Tbps (minimum).
(vii) Virtual switching
5 The Core/Distribution and Access devices shall have the capability to provide the
following functionalities:

Functionality
Layer 2 Switching (MAC)
Layer 3 Switching (IP Address)
Layer 4 Switching (TCP/UDP Port)
Layer 2 CoS
Layer 3 QoS
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple VLAN Support
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
OSPFv2/v3
Protocol-Independent Multicast
IPv4/IPv6 Dual-Stack
802.1X Security/Port Control
IPSec
MAC Address security/lockdown (Port Security)
Layers 2, 3, 4 and 7 ACLs
6 Core/ Distribution Switches System Architecture
(a) The switch shall be based on a high-speed distributed or central routing

architecture. The Routing Engine (RE) shall deliver high performance and
throughput.
(b) All cards shall be installed from the front of the chassis and plugged into a
passive backplane. This backplane contains interconnections between all the
LCs to the switch-fabric cards as well as other connections for power and
maintenance functions.
(c) The general architecture of the switch shall guarantee full line-rate
forwarding on every line interface module.
(d) The switch fabric shall have a 1:1 redundancy ratio, with hot-standby, so that
if one of the fabrics fails, a single fabric can handle the full traffic load
without packet loss.
(e) Power supplies shall be N+1 redundant hot-swappable and load sharing. If
one power supply fails, the second shall seamlessly take over the provision
of full power to the unit without any operational outage.
(f) Ventilation: N+1 redundancy shall apply to the cooling (ventilation) system
of the switch: If the switch/router is equipped with fan(s), failure of one unit
shall have no impact on the normal operation of the unit.
(g) The switch shall have high availability including, but not limited to, fully non-
blocking switching fabric. The Contractor shall state clearly the switch

capacity, throughput, and any blocking probability for the different service
types at peak hour.
7 Access Switches Systems Requirements
(a) Required Topology: Reliability of solution shall demonstrate equivalent

performance such as 50 ms recovery.
(b) Switch Fabric Capacity: shall be selected to provide non-blocking wire-line

speed.
(c) The access switches shall provide a minimum stacking bandwidth of 480
Gbps.
(d) Packet per Second Forwarding Rate: shall be selected to provide non-
blocking wire-line speed.
(e) Supported Protocols and Standards (as a minimum): IEEE802.1s,

IEEE802.1w, IEEE802.1X, IEEE802.3ad, IEEE802.3af, IEEE802.3at,
IEEE802.1D, IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab, IEEE802.3ae,
IEEE802.3z, IPv4 routing, IPv6 routing, multicast routing, modular quality
of service (QoS), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Snooping,
DHCP Guard, Dynamic ARP Inspection, IP Source-Guard, ACLs, Unicast
Reverse Path Forwarding, IGMP snooping, broadcast storm control.
(f) Management Controls: CLI, RMON I and II standards, SNMPv3.
(g) Minimum Number of ports required:
(i) The Contractor shall design and size the Data Network access/edge and
top of rack switches following the requirements and guidelines as
described in this Section and the referenced Sections of this
Specification.
(ii) The Contractor shall design and size the Data Network access/edge
switches based on the selected network topology, level of redundancy
required, the number of uplinks each switch will connect to, and the
number of users/ports that will be served by each switch. This has to be
evaluated and approved by the Client Representative.
(iii) The Contractor shall account for 25% additional port capacity to
accommodate for future growth and expansion.
(h) Traffic Management: The following features shall be supported as a

minimum:
(i) L2, L3 Classifications.

(ii) 802.1p COS.
(iii) Policing mechanism.
(iv) Shaping.
(i) VLAN Support (as a minimum):

(i) 802.1Q tagging.

(ii) Physical Ports.
(iii) MAC addresses.
(j) Supported Redundancy: The following items shall be fully redundant:
(i) Power Supply.

(ii) System shall be hot-swappable.
(iii) Fan.
(iv) The edge/access switches shall be stackable and support redundant
stacking configuration.
(k) Power:
(i) PoE (IEEE802.11af): Power over Ethernet support.

(ii) PoE+ (IEEE802.11at): Power over Ethernet plus support.
8 Access Switch Systems Architecture
(a) The edge/access switches shall support a stackable configuration that can be
managed as one logical switch.
(b) The stacking architecture shall be hot swappable, such that a replacement of
any unit in the stack can be done without powering down the stack.
(c) The general architecture of the switch shall guarantee full line-rate
forwarding.
(d) The network communication processors shall allow all types of packet
filtering such as acceptance, discarding and policing while maintaining the
same full line-rate forwarding.
(e) The switch shall have high availability including, but not limited to, fully non-
blocking switch fabric, fully non-blocking back-plane switching.
9 Fixed configuration Access devices, shall be of the following specification:
(a) 24 or 48 10/100/1000 Mbps ports.

(b) 10Gbps uplink ports.
(c) PoE+ capabilities.
(d) Redundant power supply and modular fans providing redundancy.
(e) Switch fabric (backplane) capability of 128Gbps minimum on 48-port switch
and 104 Gbps minimum on 24-port switch.
(f) Stacking bandwidth: 480 Gbps minimum.
(g) Layer 3 forwarding performance 130mpps.
(h) Designed for mobility and the IoT.
10 Stacking for fixed configuration access switches: A typical Access layer “stack”
shall consist of up to 4 switches. The maximum acceptable number of switches
connected together in a stack is 6 depending on the overall bandwidth requirements.

11 Outdoor Camera Switch Requirements
(i) Industrial grade ruggedized outdoor switch. Refer to drawings for

installation details and locations.
(ii) The switch shall be capable of operating in an extended temperature
range. It shall also have vibration, shock, surge, and noise immunity
ratings complying to specifications for outdoor environments.
(iii) Compact form factor.
(iv) Managed, non-blocking wire-line speed, four 1000/10000 Mbps ports.
(v) Supported Protocols and Standards (as a minimum): IEEE802.1s,
IEEE802.1w, IEEE802.1X, IEEE802.3af, IEEE802.3at, IEEE802.1D,
IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, Dynamic ARP Inspection, IP Source-Guard,
ACLs, IGMP snooping, MAC address port locking, broadcast storm
control.
(vi) Supports self-healing ring topology.
(vii) Management Controls: CLI, RMON I and II standards, SNMPv3.
12 Routers
(a) A routing device is required to connect external networks and circuits to the
LAN. A standalone device shall be utilized.
(b) Routers shall provide interfaces for all external network circuits, as well as
achieve adequate security requirements.
(c) They shall have the capability to provide the following at a minimum:
Capability
USB Ports: 2
Flash memory: 2 GB
Memory (DRAM): 8 GB
10Gbps LAN Ethernet connectivity
Dual redundant power supplies
Connectivity options: T1/E1, xDSL, and GE.
Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, static routing, Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), , IPSec, IPv4-to-IPv6
Multicast, MPLS, 802.1ag, 802.3ah, L2 and L3 VPN, 802.1q
VLAN, QoS, SNMP, RMON & RMON II
Advanced Security (with all necessary licenses)
Stateful Firewall
Onboard hardware VPN acceleration (Digital Encryption Stand-
ard [DES], Triple DES [3DES], and Advanced Encryption
Standard [AES])
Intrusion Prevention
Content Filtering
(d) Firewalls and Intrusion Detection System

(i) The network shall be equipped with perimeter and server room network
security device appliances such as firewalls intrusion detection, and
intrusion protection to prevent unauthorized network access.
(ii) Security devices shall provide access-control capabilities with the
ability to define custom applications, services and security policies.
(iii) The firewall shall support multiple virtual firewalls to allow the setting
of multiple Demilitarized zones.
(iv) Security devices shall provide advanced application and protocol
inspection including Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), File
Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP),
Domain Name System (DNS), Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP), SQL*Net, H.323 Versions 1-4, Session Initiation Protocol
(SIP) and Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) .
(v) Security devices shall provide remote access VPN services, IPSec VPN
standards and strong data encryption such 3-DES and AES.
(vi) Security devices shall provide intrusion prevention such network-based
attacks such as malformed packet attacks and DoS attacks.
(vii) Security devices shall allow the creation of logical interfaces based on
IEEE 802.1q VLAN tags, and the creation of security policies based on
these virtual interfaces
(viii) Security devices shall support multiple virtual interfaces on a single
physical interface through VLAN trunking, with support for multiple
VLAN trunks and shall support Virtual Context.
(ix) Security devices shall support OSPF dynamic routing and MD5-based
OSPF authentication to prevent route spoofing and various routing-
based DoS attacks.
(x) Security devices shall support Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)
allowing devices to obtain IP addresses dynamically.
(xi) NAT/PAT support: Security devices shall provide dynamic, static, and
policy-based NAT, and PAT services.
(xii) Provide Content Firewall as required to protect Web based
applications.
(xiii) Security devices shall support WLAN security management and
secured wireless zones.
(xiv) Demilitarized zones shall be created to support logical segregation of
the network across multiple secured regions. As a minimum the
Contractor shall create the following DMZs, each equipped with dual
firewalls:
 Each External Network and Service provider network brought
into the local network.
 Each Network Vertical.
 Wireless LANs.
 Critical Systems (As defined herein).
 CCTV Equipment room.
(xv) Contractor shall deploy distributed Intrusion Detection sensors and
Prevention devices throughout the Project with sufficient sensors to
monitor traffic at the following network segments :
 Each External Network and Service provider network brought
into the local network.

 Each Network Vertical (VLAN Defined).

 Wireless LANs.
 Critical Systems.
 CCTV Equipment room.
(e) Network Management Software: The Contractor shall provide a

comprehensive Network Management System (NMS) to manage, control,
and monitor all networking components, end devices, and operations. The
following network management functions shall be provided at a minimum:
(i) Web Based Management: Support use of a web browser as a client for
configuring, monitoring, and managing SNMP capable devices.
(ii) Device View and Configuration: Through use of a graphical user
interface, support the ability to view real-time device status to include
the status of devices, ports, and interfaces.
(iii) VLAN Management: Tracking and management of VLANs, port
VLAN assignments, VTP domains.
(iv) Equipment failures: shall be viewable at the Network Administrator's
workstation. A failure shall initiate an alarm and add a failure record to
the failure database table. Additionally, the Network administrator shall
receive a warning message on the Network administrator workstation,
notifying him of the failure. The system shall also be capable of
providing pager and e-mail notification. Network failure shall include
any hardware or software based failure.
(v) Network Topology and Display: Support auto-discovery of all devices
within the network and to display the topology accurately. Configured
to support network path analysis and spanning tree analysis across the
network.
(vi) Traffic Monitoring and Performance: Support the ability to monitor the
performance in real-time or for trending of a specific device, port, or
interface including port status, Link Integrity, capacity utilization and
usage statistics, availability, throughput, Quality of Service (Packet
propagation delay, jitter and packet loss), Multicast (QoS, utilization,
members).
(vii) Trend Analysis: The NMS shall support trend analysis for performance,
throughput, availability, faults, and errors.
(viii) WLAN Management: The NMS system shall provide overall
management and statistics of all Complex WLAN controllers and
access points.
(ix) Security: Configure and monitor security devices, such as firewalls. In
addition, the ability to identify network-based intrusion and security
threats.
(x) Visibility to manage and oversee the health of management systems
specific to other systems, including: BMS, CCTV, Access Control,
Telephone, SAN, NAS, AV, Wireless network and other Application
Services. The Contractor shall integrate the NMS system to these other
systems and corresponding IP endpoints. Where applicable the
Contractor shall take advantage and make use of additional
functionality and visibility where various systems share the same
manufacturer of the Network management system, or additional

functionality is gained through the use of a proprietary protocol for

these cases.
(xi) Alert and Notification: Support for triggering alerts and notifications
for thresholds, device state, and so forth, utilizing SNMP traps. The
network management system should also support methods of
notification beyond console view, such as text messages, SMS, email,
and so forth.
(xii) Software Image Updates: Support the ability to manage, track, and
update software images on LAN Switch devices from within the
network management software system including software FLASH
Upgrade via Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
(xiii) Reporting: Reporting functions to provide overall health of the
Complex systems and devices, network statistics, port utilization, fault
statistics, LAN, MAN, and WAN health and performance, security
events and statistics, compliance reporting, and other reporting features
to support the functions and requirements specified herein.
(xiv) The NMS provided shall be at least 32-bit based applications at a
minimum and shall be built around a compliant operating system as
defined in this Specification.
(xv) The Contractor shall provide Network Management System servers and
workstations that exceed the minimum hardware requirements
specified by the NMS manufacturer to accommodate all network
devices, all host tracking, all utilities, tools, and add-ons, and
monitoring and management of other specialized system network
managers. NMS servers shall be equipped with sufficient storage to
accommodate a minimum of 5 years of NMS data for Trend analysis
and reporting
(xvi) The systems shall provide context sensitive, on-line help capabilities.
The online help system shall contain enough information to inform the
user of the nature of the current process/form/window, and provide a
reference for the user to gather further information. The Contractor
shall populate the on-line help messages prior to the On-site
performance testing and provide a facility for maintenance and update
of online help.
(xvii) The software selected shall meet the operational, functional, and
performance requirements specified herein. Additionally, due to the
rapid advancement of software technology, the supplied software shall
be the latest released version with all manufacturer patches applied.
(xviii) The Contractor shall deliver all required utilities, tools and licenses for
a fully functional Network Management system. Software provided by
the Contractor shall be delivered in a ready-to-run form, including all
necessary utility programs, software modules, add-ons, and
documentation.
(xix) Contractor shall configure the management traffic to be on a separate
management VLAN.
(xx) All supplied software running on servers or clients shall synchronize to
a Network Time Protocol (NTP) source.
(xxi) Authorized users shall log into the system using a unique user name
and password. Depending on assigned user access privileges, the user

shall be either granted or denied access to individual applications,

forms, fields or data.
(xxii) A Network Administrator shall be able to add, delete, set, and change
user privileges and access authorization using direct interface to the
device or using the Network Management System. All system security
parameters shall be configurable remotely by the Network
Administrator.
(xxiii) The system shall provide an audit trail of all transactions. The audit trail
shall track on a per-user basis. The audit trail file shall indicate any
changes that occurred to applications configuration, data structure, or
database fields/records, and shall contain the date and time of the
change, the identification of the user or the subsystem that made the
change, and the details of the change.
(xxiv) Policy and rule-based compliance reporting and management. The
system shall be able to track and regulate changes based on the
Employer’s IT rules and policy.
(xxv) The Contractor shall configure the NMS to depict the overall logical
and physical Complex environments. The Contractor shall configure
NMS screens to depict a subset of the entire Complex environment
broken out by network verticals as shown on the drawings, and logical
systems.
(xxvi) The Network Management System shall provide configurable
parameters to monitor device timeouts, disconnections and fail over
switching. All errors shall be tracked and reported within 20 seconds of
the fault occurrence.
(xxvii) The Network Management System shall provide self-monitoring
watchdog timers so that internal system failures are automatically
detected and notified to the Administrator using SMS, text messages,
e-mail and other communication tools.
(xxviii) The Contractor shall provide 10 user licenses or site-wide license to
support network monitoring and administration. Contractor shall
provide all licensing required to provide all network nodes with NMS
capabilities and reporting.
13 Device Inter-Connectivity
(a) Based on a hierarchical ‘dual homed’ solution, and in accordance with the
Project 2-Tier Inter-connectivity Schematic drawing, following is the
network device inter-connectivity for the Network:
(i) The Core/Distribution devices shall be located within the respective

Servers/ Equipment room.
(ii) The Core/Distribution devices shall be inter-connected to provide both
logical and physical resilient connectivity.
(iii) The resilient links between the Core/Distribution devices will also
provide traffic load balancing between the Core devices.
(iv) The backbone cable infrastructure inter-connecting the
Core/Distribution devices shall provide multiple 10Gbps links.
(v) Each Core/Distribution device shall be provided with dual power
supplies and dual processor control module.

(vi) Each Core/Distribution device shall be located in a separate cabinet and

powered from separate building power distribution supplies.
(vii) Fixed configuration Access devices shall be inter-connected to form a
‘stack’ configuration to provide both physical and logical resilience.
(viii) Fixed configuration Access devices shall be connected to two separate
Core/Distribution devices.
(ix) Convergence protocols shall be implemented.
(x) WAN connectivity shall be provided to the Server Equipment Rooms
for connection into the converged network Core devices.
(b) The converged network system shall be installed in accordance with this
specification, network design schedules and construction drawings.
(c) The Contractor shall review and verify the product description and quantities
required to deliver complete converged network systems as described in this
Specification.
14 System Configurations
(a) Prior to configuration and installation, all converged network devices and
components shall be bench tested and checked to ensure functionality via:
(i) Power-up self tests.

(ii) Software/firmware revisions for compatibility and integration.
(b) Prior to installation on site, as much of the converged network system as

possible, shall be configured and bench tested in a ‘proof of concept’ scenario
in order to remove any inconsistencies or conflicts with the design or
specified products.
(c) All chassis based devices shall be fitted with their relevant modules prior to
installation on site.
(d) Network device naming conventions and passwords shall be provided.
51.2.15 FTTH NETWORK ACTIVE EQUIPMENT
1 The proposed FTTH solution in the project shall comply with the latest edition of the
FTTH requirements in the Pearl.
2 Design is based on future proof FTTH model and can cater up to 10 Gbps access to
each apartment/Villa. Upon completion of the network rollout, below services can be
provided to the occupants of Pearl Qatar:
(a) Telephony services
(b) IP based Television
(c) Internet Access
(d) Digital Metering
3 The contractor shall provide GigE Network Access Switch which connect other CPE,
Security and Utility Network switches with following specifications:
(a). High Capacity Ethernet switch, which is used to connect/aggregate all
Apartment connections, Security, Utility switches and common area services.
(b). 7 slot chassis for 48Gbps/slot

(c). Console Cable 6ft with RJ-45-to-RJ-45

(d). SFP transceiver module MMF/SMF 1310nm DOM
4 Apartment Switches shall be used in each apartment/Villa. Switch to be uplinked to

GigE-Access Switch in the MDF (Service Provider Room) using GigE optical
connection. General specification shall be:
(a). The size of Apartment switches shall fit within the proposed Apartment Panel
(b). 1 x GigE optical port (Support for dual-mode SFP preferred)
(c). 24 x GigE electrical downlinks
(d). Fanless
(e). PoE (Powered over Ethernet)
(f). Minimum 15Gbps switching capacity
(g). Enhanced QoS support (4 hardware queues)
(h). Remote management
(i). Optimal energy efficiency
(j). Redundant power supply
(k). 4096 VLAN support
(l). Q-in-Q VLAN support
(m). IGMP snooping/Querier
(n). DHCP snooping
(o). LLDP
5 Utility Network Switch shall have the following specifications:

(a). 24 Port 10/100 + 2 1000BT LAN Base Image
(b). 10Gbps uplink ports.
(c). PoE (Powered over Ethernet)
(d). Redundant power supply
(e). GE SFP, LC connector LX/LH transceiver
51.2.16 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS
1 The following systems shall be integrated and interfaced to the Data

Communications Network specified in this Part:
(a) The Structured Cabling Network (SCN).

(b) The Wireless Data Equipment.
(c) The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
(d) The IP-Based Telephony Communications System.
2 The description of all of the above interfaces shall be defined into software
requirements specification such as:
(a) The type of interface: databases queries/tables, shared flat files, messages,
etc.,
(b) The frequency: periodically or on-demand.
3 SCN
(a) SCN shall be used for communication all over the Project network.

4 Wireless Data Network
(a) Wireless Data Network equipment linked to the SCN shall provide network
monitoring facilities to the Active Communication and Data Processing
Equipment.
(b) Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment ensure the security
of the interface with Wireless Data Network end users.
5 Other Packages
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of all data interfaces,
requested by any described Building Services System - as applicable to the
Project, as well as any other needed interface with general Communications
and Security Systems, or other packages etc.:
(i) Security and Access Control System

(ii) Closed Circuit Television Equipment (CCTV)
(iii) Public Address System (PAS)
(iv) Building Management System (BMS)
(b) The Contractor shall ensure the general coordination between the system
equipment's and any other systems under its scope of work, or to be
coordinated with others, as to avoid any technical mismatches which may
prevent its proper long term operation and maintenance.
51.3 EXECUTION
51.3.1 INSTALLATION
2 Coordination
(a) The Structured Cabling Network (SCN) installer shall be in charge of

providing the patch cords for the various data communications systems.
Coordinate with the SCN installer on quantities, lengths and specifications of
patch cords to be delivered.
(b) Wide Area Network WAN Interface: confirm that core network
interconnection is done directly through WAN devices. If such is the case,
coordinate with WAN supplier to verify:
(i) Common interfaces speeds and standards.
(ii) Redundancy consistence: interconnection through WAN should not
lower any of the data communications network SLA commitments.

(iii) Time signal synchronization: generally WAN equipment provides the

master clock signal source for the entire network.
(c) Coordinate with the Engineer and/or Employer the following plans to be
implemented in the network:
(i) Addressing plan.
(ii) Security plan.
(iii) Applications port designations.
(iv) Any other logical information that is not self-discovered by the system.
1 Installation shall be supervised and tested by the Contractor.
2 The works shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of

experienced engineers, all of whom shall be properly factory trained and qualified
for this work.
3 Upon installation of network components, demonstrate product capability and

compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance to
verify that the data network system is in proper working condition. Remove
temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.
4 Correct malfunctioning units at Project site, where possible, and retest to

demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
5 Integrated Tests with other Contractors / Service Providers:

(a) Make equipment available for testing and demonstrating various features
specified.
(b) Communication Tests: performed for the serial or LAN interface to ensure
that proper communication can be established between data network
equipment and the interfacing systems.
(c) Point-to-Point Tests: performed on the data network equipment to the
interfacing systems in order to verify the functionality and correct animation
of each I/O point/command including alarm messages.
(d) Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest until total system meets
requirements of the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.
Prepare written records of tests.
(e) Schedule testing with at least seven days advance notice.
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for training the Employer designated personnel
in all aspects of each system, as well as training Employer designated training

personnel to allow the Employer to provide future training without the aid of the
Contractor. Training shall consist of both classroom and hands-on course work.
Topics will include instruction in the operations, diagnostics and maintenance of
hardware and software.
2 In order to provide a reliable training, Employer’s maintenance personnel who are

involved in the training program of this system, could be involved in the follow up
of system installation as well. The Contractor shall provide an installation agenda
to the Employer and confirm with him any coordination with assigned trainees.
3 Trainers
(a) Engage factory authorized service representatives to explain programming

and operation of system and to train Employer's personnel on procedures and
schedules for maintaining, programming, operating, adjusting, troubleshoot-
ing, and servicing the system.
(b) Credentials of the Trainers shall be approved by the Manufacturer and by the
Employer.
4 The Contractor shall submit a training plan that describes the Contractor training
methods and techniques. The plan will maximize flexibility of the training schedule
in terms of the course structure and content, and the differing availability of students
within each category and from each agency. The Contractor shall support
discussions and inputs from the Employer to the Final Training Plan. The training
plan shall include but shall not be limited to:
(a) A brief description of training capabilities and Contractor planned facilities.
(b) A description of training methodology and objectives.
(c) The recommended amount and minimum amount of training necessary for
User and Administrator proficiency.
(d) Training development team qualifications and experience.
(e) The space or classroom requirements including computer and other
equipment necessary to conduct training; indicate what will be provided by
the Contractor and what is expected from the Employer.
(f) Identification of training materials to be approved by the Employer.
5 The Contractor shall provide training products and present hands-on training at
Employer designated facilities including conference rooms or other training room
on site, using operational equipment as approved by the Employer.
6 Quantity of training sessions and number of personnel to be trained shall be as per

the direction of the Employer.
7 Four (4) categories of system training shall be provided:
(a) Category 1 User training shall include all end-user functionality involved in
the daily use and operation of all Contractor supplied hardware and software.
Target audience may include any and all end users, help personnel, managers,
and/or supervisors who will be required to use Contractor equipment to
accomplish job functions utilizing Contractor deliverables. All user training

shall cover the operation methods, procedures and processes necessary to

optimize utilization of the system(s).
(b) Category 2 Field Technician training shall include all technical and functional
activities involved in the daily support, and operation(s) of all contractor
supplied field hardware. Target Audience will include Employer field support
personnel, managers, supervisors and/or technicians who will be required to
support, modify, and maintain Contractor provided field equipment to allow
all end-users of Contractor system to accomplish job functions utilizing
Contractor deliverables. Field Technician training shall include typical field
hardware for each specific systems and other such technical areas as
necessary to manage and maintain the complete system(s).
(c) Category 3 Head End Hardware Administrator training shall include all high-
level technical and functional activities involved in the daily support, and
operation(s) of all Contractor supplied hardware. Target Audience will
include Employer support personnel, managers, supervisors and/or technical
administrators who will be required to support, modify, maintain and/or
administer Contractor Head End Hardware equipment to allow all end-users
of Contractor system to accomplish job functions utilizing Contractor
deliverables. Head end Hardware Administrator training shall include server
hardware, SAN hardware, interface management/troubleshooting, and other
such technical areas as necessary to manage and maintain the system(s).
(d) Category 4 System Administrator training shall include all high-level
technical and functional activities involved in the daily support, and
operation(s) of all Contractor supplied hardware and software. Target
Audience will include Employer support personnel, managers, supervisors
and/or technical administrators who will be required to support, modify,
maintain and/or administer Contractor equipment to allow all end-users of
Contractor system to accomplish job functions utilizing Contractor
deliverables. System Administrator training shall include server operating
systems, applications systems, system security, granting of authorities,
database & system backup procedures, database management/administration,
interface management/troubleshooting, and other such technical areas as
necessary to manage and maintain the system(s).
8 Quality and adequacy of training is of extreme importance to the Employer

regardless of the instructional methodology utilized. Contractor shall provide a
method by which students will be evaluated, prior to the start of a course; to ensure
they have the basic skills necessary to complete and utilize Contractor provided
training. Upon course completion verify using approved test procedure that students
have acquired the skills from Contractor training to optimally perform the tasks
contained in the course(s) of instruction. Identify and provide recommendations for
remedial training of students failing to demonstrate required skills. Training shall
be deemed acceptable when 90% of the students demonstrate satisfactory
proficiency. Final training reports and proficiency testing shall be submitted to the
Employer as part of final project documentation.
9 An overall training schedule shall be submitted for review and approval. The
Contractor shall provide maximum flexibility in scheduling training and shall
construct an approach that does not require “bulk” availability of the student
populations. Areas of flexibility shall include the structure and timing of course

elements, the shifts being trained, the availability of students, and modularity of
courses or subject streams in such a way as to minimize or eliminate sequential
dependencies between classes. For each time that training is provided, at least four
(4) sessions of each category of training shall be held. At least one (1) session shall
be provided during standard daytime working hours, and at least one (1) session
shall be provided during evening working hours. Specific days, work shifts, and
hours for training must be approved by the Employer.
10 Training materials shall be provided to the Employer a minimum of ten (10)

working days in advance of the training courses. Training must be in a modular
format and shall provide separate areas of training materials specific to
administration, operation, and maintenance.
11 Training sessions and intervals shall be as follows:
(a) System Pre-Acceptance training – shall be provided at least two (2) weeks
before system acceptance testing.
(b) Follow-up Training Session – shall be provided between fifteen (15) and sixty
(60) days after pre-acceptance training, with times and dates to be selected by
Employer.
(c) Factory Certification Training – Manufacturer’s factory certification training
shall be provided for at least two (2) Employer designated technicians per
individual system. If performed at the manufacturers’ facilities, the
Contractor shall provide transportation, lodging, per diem, and all training
materials associated with the factory certification training. This training shall
provision for the Employer approved staff to provide minor service to the
system during the warranty period (when required) without voiding the
conditions of the warranty.
12 The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of factory produced training session
on DVD or other approved media for future system operation training. In addition,
the Contractor shall record one (1) training class session of all four (4) categories
at each training interval and provide three (3) copies of each session to Employer
on DVD or other approved media. Provide training materials for each attendee to
use at each training session and to keep for reference. Provide an additional five
(5) hardcopies and two (2) electronic versions in Word or PDF of each piece of
training material used at each session at the completion of each training session.
Employer will have unrestricted, unlimited right to reproduce all training material
as necessary to conduct training by the Employer for Employer employees.
13 Should the Contractor update training material prior to any final System
Acceptance, Contractor shall provide a complete and fully integrated replacement
copy of the training materials, both hard and soft copy, to the Employer during the
software maintenance period.

14 The Contractor shall provide a listing of recommended continuing education and

professional development course work that would be useful in order to assist
personnel in maintaining the system long-term including factory, classroom, user
group, seminar course work and/or professional certification courses.
END OF PART 51

PART 52 – COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 52 – Computers & Related Peripherals
including its new clauses as follows:
52.1 GENERAL
complimentary to and shall apply to this Specification “Computers & Related
Peripherals” except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this
Specification “Computers & Related Peripherals” shall have precedence:
(a) Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.
52.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part Includes:
(a) Computers and related peripherals including but not limited to computer
workstations, laptop computers and printers.
(b) Servers and related ancillaries.
2 Related Parts
(a) Section 21 Part - Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.
2 Definitions
(a) PUE: Power Usage Effectiveness is a metric used to determine the energy
COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS S21P52 - Page 1 of 9

coordinate with the Employer and his suppliers when considering:

testing.
(b) Provision and installation of phone systems, racks/cabinets and related
networking software and equipment.
(c) Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
(d) Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
outlets.
(h) Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
control sensors.
(j) Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit

other systems.

52.1.8 SUBMITTALS
52.1.12 WARRANTY
3 However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than one
from each type shall be included in the deliverables irrespective of Manufacturer’s
recommendation.
equipment supplied.

52.2 PRODUCTS

to:
(a) DELL (USA)

(b) Hewlett-Packard Company (HP) (USA)
(c) Or Approved Equal
52.2.2 GENERAL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
1 For each category of technology, obtain system components from one leading
manufacturer in the industry who shall assume responsibility for the system
components and for their compatibility.
2 All hardware requirements given are the minimum requirements. All Contractor’s
proposed products shall meet or exceed these requirements. Additionally, the
hardware selected shall meet the operational, functional, and performance
requirements specified herein.
3 Due to the rapid advancement of hardware technology, the supplied hardware shall
be the “contemporary technical equivalent” of the specified hardware.
“Contemporary technical equivalent” shall be based on a comparison of technology
at the time of publication of the specifications to the technology at the time of
ordering the equipment for each phase.
4 Hardware shall be ordered as close to the actual installation date for a given phase
as possible. Final hardware approval and scheduled order date shall be at the sole
discretion of the Employer.
5 Approved Equivalent Substitution: The Contractor may propose an Employer

approved equivalent device. Requests for hardware substitution shall be submitted
in writing and include the hardware cut sheet and the exact configuration being
proposed.
6 Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the
ambient environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions
encountered at the installed location. For devices located in harsh environments
such as interior uncontrolled or exterior environments, the Contractor shall provide
the necessary housings or enclosures to ensure proper equipment operation and
performance. Continuous operating ranges of temperature and humidity within
Communications Rooms shall be maintained as specified in Section 21 Part
7 The Contractor shall provide all termination components to the data outlet including
patch cords for a fully operational LAN, unless noted otherwise.

8 Hardware Structures: Contractor shall review casework to ensure proper fit of

equipment, ventilation, etc. Contractor shall verify casework requirements.
9 Equipment racks: Equipment located in telecommunications rooms shall be rack

mounted in standard 19-inch (483 mm) racks complying with ECA TIA/ECA-310-
E. Contractor shall provide the appropriate factory or custom rack mount adapters
for all equipment installed in the equipment racks, whether specifically itemized or
not. Contractor shall cover unused slots using blank panels. The equipment rack
shall be approved by the related active component manufacturer. Comply with
Section 21 Part “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.
10 Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing fans, shelves,

drawers, special power wiring, ground connections, cables, connectors,
appurtenances, and adapters of any kind necessary to accommodate the system
installation, operation, testing, or maintenance.
11 Arrangement: The overall equipment arrangement of servers and racks should be

configured to work in conjunction with the cooling system to provide a low PUE
for low energy operation. Coordinate with Mechanical Department for system
requirements.
12 Thermal Management Systems including “Air Containment Systems” should be

well integrated into the HVAC system design. Coordinate with Mechanical
52.2.3 WORKSTATION EQUIPMENT
1 Computer Workstation - Type 1

(a) Workstation ATX form factor
(b) Processor: 4.2GHz latest generation of quad core intel i7 processor
(c) Memory: 32GB 2400MHz or 2666 Mhz DDR4 SDRAM
(d) Disk: 1TB SSD
(e) PCI Express 3.0 x16
(f) DVDRW Optical Drive
(g) Minimum 6 USB 3.0 ports
(h) 10/100/1000 Ethernet Port
(i) Ergonomic 104 keys keyboard: English/Arabic keys
(j) USB Optical Mouse
(k) 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hz Power Supply.
(l) Video Card(s)
(i) 4 monitor support
(ii) PCI Express 3.0 x16 compatible
(iii) Minimum 4GB GDDR5 graphics memory
(iv) DP/HDMI connectors supporting 3840 x 2160 resolution per display
(v) RoHS, RoHS2 and WEEE compliant, support 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratio

(vi) Supports configuration of four screen arranged horizontally, vertically

or combination of both orientations.
2 Computer Workstation - Type 2

(a) Standard ATX form factor
(b) Processor: 3.6GHz latest generation of quad core intel i7 processor
(c) Memory: 16GB 2133MHz DDR4 SDRAM
(d) Disk: 512GB SSD
(e) PCI Express 3.0 x16
(f) DVDRW Optical Drive
(g) Minimum 4 USB 3.0 ports
(h) 10/100/1000 Ethernet Port
(i) Ergonomic 104 keys keyboard: English/Arabic keys
(j) USB Optical Mouse
(k) 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hz Power Supply.
(l) Video Card(s)
(i) Dual monitor support
(ii) PCI Express 3.0 x16 compatible
(iii) Minimum 8GB GDDR5 graphics memory
(iv) DP/HDMI connectors supporting 3840 x 2160 resolution per
displa0079
(v) RoHS, RoHS2 and WEEE compliant, support 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratio
(vi) Supports configuration of two screens arranged horizontally, vertically
or combination of both orientations.
52.2.4 LED DISPLAYS
1 Workstation 23-inch LED Display
(a) 178-degree viewing angle

(b) Minimum of two USB 3.0 Ports
(c) At least 1920 x 1080 (full HD) resolution
(d) 32-bit color support
(e) At least DP, DVI, and HDMI connectors
(f) 800:1 minimum contrast ratio
(g) 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hz Power Supply; refresh rate 75 Hz.
(h) Built-in speakers
2 32-inch LED Display Screen
(a) Monitor for extended use for CCTV control room applications.
(b) The LCD/LED screen shall be provided as a video wall to provide complete
monitoring of the facility.
(c) Brightness : 500 cd/m² or better
(d) 32 inch viewable size
(e) Refresh rate: 240 Hz
(f) Interfaces:
(i) 3 x HDMI and 1x DP In

(ii) Audio Line Out

(iii) Audio Line In
(iv) BNC Composite Video In
(v) RS-232
(vi) RGB (Analog)
(g) Contrast ratio: Minimum 5000:1
(h) The display shall be equipped with LED back light or better based on latest
proven product availability in the market.
(i) Monitor shall allow for viewing angles of 178 degrees for horizontal and ver-
tical planes.
(j) Provide all fixtures and fixing material (monitor stand) to allow Tilt, Swivel
and Height adjustment of monitors by Operators at the nominated locations
as agreed upon with the Employer.
52.2.5 SERVERS
1 Rack Mount Server: the servers shall support as a minimum the following features
– subject to manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular served
telecommunications system:
(a) At least four processors.

(b) Intel E5 (or latest and equivalent) processors.
(c) High memory densities. As a minimum the blades shall be scalable to 768
GB RAM and shall support 4, 8, 16 and 32 GB DIMMs System have
integrated RAID 0,1 with an on board RAID controllers.
(d) Onboard NIC with dual Gigabit Ethernet ports with TOE 2 x Converged
Network Adapters (10GE) and (FcoE).
(e) Converged network (multiple traffic classes over a lossless Ethernet fabric,
thus enabling consolidation of LAN, SAN, and cluster environments.).
52.2.6 STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
1 General-purpose hybrid scale-out NAS solutions to enable a wide range of high-

performance computing (HPC) file workloads on a single platform.
2 The following NAS solutions shall be provided:

(a) NAS solution shall be provided as part of the Security network- refer to
CCTV specification, Section 21 Part 65, for more details.
3 The solutions should be designed for high-throughput and high-performance

demanding applications like the CCTV application.
4 All-Flash solutions.
5 Storage system IOPS (read/write), read/write ratio, and throughput requirements

shall be sized to match the IOPS and throughput requirements of the servers and
applications.
(a) Management, Reporting and Alerting Features:
(i) Single GUI for Administering and configuring the storage system

(ii) Performance Monitoring and Reporting feature(s) that monitors and

reports on how resources (disk drives, storage networking ports, cache,
LUNs, etc…) within the array are being utilized and how well they are
performing
(iii) Utilization and performance metrics live and historical data reports
(including but not limited to: IOPS per LUN, IOPS per host, throughput
MB/s, disk queue length, disk response time…), capacity utilization,
array health information
(iv) Detailed reporting on the capacity, performance and health of the all
array components
(v) Alerting in any case of warning or error situations (e.g. failed drive,
port link down, temperature warning, predictive disk failures…)
(vi) Notifications Channels: SMTP , SNMP
(vii) Advanced Diagnostics and troubleshooting Tools
6 All Software Licenses which are required to support the above mentioned features
including the Data Optimization section shall be included covering unlimited
capacity.
7 Capacities required:
(a) Security storage solution: the capacity shall be calculated by the Contractor
and submitted for the Engineer’s approval, but should not be less than 5.1 PB
of usable storage capacity after applying RAID, while complying with MOI
requirements.
8 High-availability including back-end and intra-cluster failover.
9 The solution shall provide schemes for data protection, data replication, and data
retention.
1 The following systems shall be integrated and interfaced to miscellaneous

Computer Hardware specified in this Part:
(a) The Structured Cabling Network (SCN).

(b) The Wireless Data Equipment.
(c) The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
(d) The IP-Based Telephony Communications System.
2 The description of all of the above interfaces shall be defined into software
requirements specification such as:
(a) The type of interface: databases queries/tables, shared flat files, messages,
etc.,
(b) The frequency: periodically or on-demand.
3 SCN
(a) SCN shall be used for communication all over the Project network.

4 Wireless Data Network
(a) Wireless Data Network equipment linked to the SCN shall provide network
monitoring facilities to the Active Communication and Data Processing
Equipment.
(b) Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment ensure the security
of the interface with Wireless Data Network end users.
52.3 EXECUTION
52.3.1 INSTALLATION
2 Coordination
(a) The Structured Cabling Network (SCN) installer shall be in charge of

providing the patch cords for the various data communications systems.
Coordinate with the SCN installer on quantities, lengths and specifications of
patch cords to be delivered.
(b) Coordinate with the Engineer/Employer the following plans to be

implemented in the network:
(i) Addressing plan.
(ii) Security plan.
(iii) Applications port designations.
(iv) Any other logical information that is not self-discovered by the system.
END OF PART 52

PART 53 – VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 53 – Video Surveillance including its new
clauses as follows:
53.1 GENERAL
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular
2. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be
complimentary to and shall apply to this Specification “Video Surveillance” except
where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Video
Surveillance” shall have precedence:
53.1.2 SUMMARY
1. Section includes an IP Video Surveillance System consisting of but not limited to:
(a) IP CCTV Cameras,

(b) Software,
(c) Servers and Workstations.
(d) Data Storage System.
(e) Ancillary equipment.
2. This system shall provide for:
(a) The transport of video signals to the video recorders via the Project Data
Communications Network.
(b) The display of live camera video.
(c) The archiving of all camera video onto a long term storage facility.
3. The Video Surveillance System (VSS) shall interface the Fire Alarm System and
other Building Services Systems.
4. Related Sections:

(b) Section 21 Part 6 - Cables and Small Wiring.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE S21P53 - Page 1 of 30

(e) Section 21 Part 18- Uninterruptible Power Supply.

(g) Section 21 Part 39 – Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits.
(h) Section 21 Part 45 - Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
(i) Section 21 Part 46 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
(j) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
(k) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(l) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
(m) Section 21 Part 50 - Common Clause for IT & Security Systems.
(n) Section 21 Part 51 - Data Communications.
(o) Section 23 Part 3 - Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System.
5. Servers and related ancillaries shall comply with:

6. Workstations and related ancillaries shall comply with:

2. Regulations and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall

comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the
following references:
(a) Comply with the latest issues of the ONVIF Specifications.
(b) Security Industry Association
(i) SIA TVAC: CCTV to Access Control Standard.
(c) ISO 11064 - Ergonomic Design of Control Centres.
(d) MOI SSD Laws & Regulations – State of Qatar
1. Refer to Section 21 Part “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.
2. Definitions
(a) “OFE”: shall refer to “Owner Furnished Equipment”, which will be provided
by the Owner/Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing
this equipment from the Owner’s premises, and re-installing and integrating
this equipment in good working order where required and detailed in these
Specifications.

(b) "Turnkey System": a complete system of hardware and software delivered to

the customer ready-to-run.
(c) ONVIF™: Open Network Video Interface Forum, an open standard
developed to allow the management of IP cameras and other network video
devices via a unified, open platform standard. ONVIF is an organization
started in 2008 by Axis Communications, Bosch Security and Sony. The aim
of the ONVIF™ standards is to achieve interoperability between IP cameras
and other network video devices regardless of manufacturer.
2. Other Clarifications Related to the Scope of Work:
(a) Specific Requirements:

(i) Integration with existing network elements, if any, with full
responsibility to the Contractor in order to make a coherent Video
Surveillance System. This work shall be carried out in close
coordination with the Employer.
(ii) Manufacturer technical validation and endorsement of the design
documentation and implementation shall be provided.
(iii) Risk analysis on the design with advantages and drawbacks shall be
provided by the Manufacturer.
(iv) Post deployment auditing by Manufacturer shall be specified in the
documents,
(v) Submission of credentials of the trainers shall be approved by the
Manufacturer and by the Employer.
(b) The Video Surveillance System shall utilize the Project Structured Cabling
Network and Data Communications Network Installations. This connectivity
shall form part of the Structured Cabling Network and Data Communications
Network as applicable. It shall not form part of the Video Surveillance
System.
(c) Network switches and other similar devices which are strictly dedicated and
configured for the Video Surveillance System, but installed remotely from
the Video Surveillance System headend, shall form part of the work for the
Video Surveillance System.
(d) Inter-wiring, conduits and related accessories, network connectivity and any
other material which is specific to the Video Surveillance System central
equipment and which is required to provide a complete operational system,
shall form part of the Video Surveillance System.
1. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and

coordinate with the Employer and his Suppliers when considering:

testing.
(b) Provision and installation of phone systems, computer hardware,
(c) Active communication and data processing equipment.
(d) Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
(e) Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
(f) Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.
(g) Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the
(h) Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility
outlets.
(i) Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
(j) Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental
control sensors.
(k) Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit
2. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

other systems.
(d) Coordinate with the other Contractors whose deliveries are necessary for the
correct operation of the Video Surveillance System including but not limited
to the Data Communications Network, Fire Alarm System, etc.
1. The Video Surveillance System (VSS) shall provide digital video capture,
transportation, management, recording, live viewing, playback, and storage of the
video. The VSS shall be based on capturing and processing Ethernet transmission
of video signals from cameras. The entire VSS system shall be capable of being
partitioned and allow sharing of selected video signals between Security personnel
and other operational personnel as required.
2. The Video Surveillance IP/Ethernet based system shall consist of video

management and archiving software, Power over Ethernet (PoE) IP fixed cameras

and IP cameras with pan, tilt zoom (PTZ) features, camera housings and mounting
hardware, and power supplies required to form a fully functional and operational
network based virtual matrix surveillance system and network based digital video
recording system.
3. The system shall operate on a digital IP/Ethernet network. The Contractor shall
coordinate for the provision of network switches as part of this Project as required
to accommodate the VSS.
4. The system shall have the capability to allow live video monitoring via web
browsers or wireless devices. Access shall be restricted by two-factor
authentication and encryption as directed by Employer. The cameras and video
accessible via web browser or wireless devices shall be limited based upon user and
shall be configurable by the System Administrator to limit access by person and by
device or by access method.
5. The system shall include a combination of fixed and pan tilt zoom cameras, video
recording and archiving servers, as specified herein and as indicated on the
Drawings. The camera management and recording servers shall be connected to
the network.
6. The Contractor shall provide fiber optic between the IP Surveillance System and
the CCTV equipment room in CCTV monitoring building.
(a) All Outdoor Cameras shall be wired to the CCTV equipment room using fiber
optic cables with proper media converters for the purpose. All wiring, Patch-
ing and needed active and passive components shall form part of the Contract.
(b) Each camera shall be connected by 4-core fiber cable from CCTV equipment
room.
7. The Contractor shall provide for the necessary IP cameras, data network switches,
local workstations, patch panels, fiber optic cables, copper cables, accessories and
ancillary, etc. for the complete operation and full integration of the above.
8. The Operator shall have the full control of the cameras. Local terminals and clients
shall be provided at specific locations in the project for on-site operation and
security monitoring.
9. The Contractor shall fully coordinate with the Employer for the exact location and
positioning of the different equipment and materials.
53.1.9 SUBMITTALS
1. Additional Requirements for Submittals:
(a) Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and

conditions (Site Survey Requirements), Security Systems installation shall be
based on approved shop drawings prepared by the Contractor based on a site
survey to determine the specific installation parameters including the

perimeter length, alarm zone layouts, sensor cable route, cable spacing, type
of sensor cable, existing CCTV cameras and poles, optimal location of CCTV
cameras and the location for the electronic components. The shop drawings
shall highlight the below:
(i) Buildings and other structures (such as perimeter walls)

(ii) Roads, driveways, sidewalks, paths, parking areas, storage compounds
(iii) Fences (include type and condition)
(iv) Underground pipes (water, sewage and drainage)
(v) Above ground pipes
(vi) Electrical conduits, buried cables
(vii) Trees
(viii) Proposed location of cable path (include cable spacing and burial depth)
(ix) Soil type
(x) All obstacles
(xi) Gates (including type and size)
2. Electronic data exchange between the video surveillance system and the security
and access control system shall comply with SIA TVAC.
3. All system components such as cameras, storage systems, etc. shall be ONVIF
compliant.
2. Environmental Conditions: Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project

electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:
(a) System components installed indoors: Conditioned air is provided into

buildings and communication rooms, but the Contractor shall take into
account specific location conditions, for example, direct sunlight behind
windows.
(b) System components installed outdoors: Install outdoor system components in

enclosures that meet the environmental conditions.

(c) Security Environment: Provide camera housing for use in high-risk areas
where surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence.
(d) Enclosures
(i) Screw Covers: Where enclosures are readily accessible, secure with
security fasteners of type appropriate for enclosure.
53.1.13 WARRANTY
2. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major
3. However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than
one from each type shall be included in the deliverables irrespective of
Manufacturer’s recommendation.
4. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine
equipment supplied.
53.2 PRODUCTS
1. Available Manufacturers of IP Surveillance System: subject to compliance with

requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
(a) Honeywell
(b) Vicon Industies.
(c) Pelco.
(d) Siemens.
(e) Bosch.

(f) Panasonic.
(g) Or Approved Equal
53.1.2 GENERAL FEATURES
1. The IP surveillance system shall provide digital video capture, transportation,

management, recording, live viewing, playback, and storage for the video
surveillance system.
2. 25% spare capacity shall be required at all levels of the system.
3. The software licensing shall be provided for the entire network with no limitation
on the number of workstations or standard end-users.
4. The Video Surveillance System shall be used by agents mainly for operation
management and for access control of staff and residence, inside the Project.
5. A graphical user interface shall be provided at the system workstations.
6. The Video Surveillance system shall be used for:

(a) Operation purposes at the Project.
(b) The monitoring of all vital areas in the Project.
(c) Surveillance to help enforce safety and security.
(d) General surveillance general traffic areas.
7. The functions of the CCTV shall consist of:

(a) Facilitating the coordination of the operations.
(b) Supplying staff with video information.
(c) Recording and storage images.
53.1.3 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND COMPONENTS
1. The VSS shall consist of IP compatible cameras, both fixed and PTZ, connections
to the LAN via fiber, LAN switches, Video and Archiving Servers, system
workstations, and all associated software and hardware required for a complete and
operational system.
2. Provide all software licenses required for the specified monitoring and control.
3. Provide all equipment as shown on the Drawings or described in the Specifications

including, but not limited to, cables, conduit, lightning and surge protection,
mounting bracket fabrication, connection to mains power supply and
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), and all equipment necessary to provide a
complete and operational system.
4. All servers, both video and archiving, shall be connected to the system via network
switches. Refer to Section 21 Part “Data Communications” for the LAN equipment
specifications. This connection shall be secured by an IP access list, and firewalls

and shall be provided and configured to prevent unauthorized access to and from
the VSS VLAN, as directed by the Employer.
5. An encrypted audit trail log shall be maintained in the system to archive all Operator
workstation activity including, but not limited to, the viewing of live or archived
video, moving any PTZ camera or adjusting PTZ pre-sets. This log shall be
searchable by Operator basis or camera basis, for both live and archived video
access.
53.1.4 MATERIAL
1. General:
(a) Provide material of types, sizes, capacities and electrical characteristics

indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's VSS
components as indicated by their published product information, designed
and constructed as recommended by manufacturer. The design intent is that
all cameras, both fixed and PTZ, be provided from the same manufacturer for
ease of servicing. The design intent is that all camera housings shall be
provided from the same manufacturer so that a fixed dome housing will have
the same look/style as that of a PTZ housing.
2. Color
(a) All visible camera housings shall be painted to match the surrounding
structure or finishes. This contract shall include all cost with custom painting
as needed, and no change orders will be considered for additional costs
associated with painting. Only the visible window or ‘bubble’ shall be the
exception to color stated above. All associated brackets, outlets, or other
required devices visible to the public shall be painted to match the camera
housings including fasteners used.
3. Cameras
(a) Cameras shall fulfill the following minimum requirements:

(i) Cameras located in unconditioned areas shall be installed within an
environmental dome enclosure, equipped with a thermostatically
controlled heater and blower. Provide power supply as required.
(ii) Cameras located in areas with changing light conditions shall be
equipped with Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) functionality for
automatic adjustment to compensate for changing lighting (sunlight)
conditions.
(iii) Cameras shall provide three (3) video streams including configurable
unicast and multicast simultaneous streams as a minimum.
(iv) Cameras shall be equipped with motion detection functionality and
alarms input/output.
(b) The camera representation of an object for monitoring purposes should be as

follows:

(i) For identification purposes: the figure should cover at least 120% of the
screen height.
(ii) For recognition purposes: the figure should cover at least 50% of the
screen height.
(iii) For detection purposes: the figure should cover at least 10% of the
screen height.
(iv) For monitoring purposes: the figure should cover at least 5% of the
screen height.
(c) Outdoor Megapixel Resolution Fixed Cameras: Cameras shall be fixed 3

megapixel Network IP cameras. Pole mounted camera, mounting height to
be selected to achieve the required function. The fixed Megapixel Network
IP camera shall be furnished with a vari-focal auto-iris lens as required for
the desired field-of-view. Verify field-of-view requirements for each camera
location with the Employer prior to ordering camera. The fixed Megapixel IP
camera shall be powered via POE. As a minimum, the fixed camera shall
comply with the following:
(i) Cameras shall be similar in appearance to the PTZ cameras (dome type)
specified below and have a manual 3-axis position adjustment for pan,
tilt and rotation about the lens axis for any angle of view required.
(ii) The imaging device shall be a 1/4-inch color pixel based imager
providing a minimum resolution of 3 MP. The minimum light
sensitivity shall be 0.4 lux in color mode, 0.04 lux in black and white
mode. The camera shall be provided with an auto iris lens with the
ability for the camera to control the iris automatically.
(iii) The camera shall be provided with automatic Gain Control, automatic
exposure control, and automatic Backlight Compensation.
(iv) The Video Compression shall be H.264, the communication port shall
be based on 10/100/1000 Based-T RJ-45.
(v) Where installed outdoors, cameras shall be furnished with an IP-66
rated enclosure and shall be provided with special arrangement to
minimize reflection from side windows.
(vi) Camera Type selection for each scene, shall be based on the resolution
which is required to achieve the camera representation purpose
(Identification, Recognition, Observation, Detection, etc. - defined
above).
(d) Outdoor PTZ Cameras: Exterior PTZ dome cameras shall be equipped with
a mount, a sunshield and integral heater/blower to accommodate for
environmental changes. Provide power supply as required.
It is preferable that PTZ cameras be provided with Power over Ethernet (PoE)
or Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+) capability, but cameras shall be capable
of PoE/PoE+ and 24/28 VAC. If not available, provide centrally located
power supplies, as specified herein. As a minimum, the PTZ camera shall
comply with the following:
(i) PTZ control shall be via full duplex data communication via the RJ-45
communication Port with electronics integral to the drive housing.

Configuration of dome functions shall be via on screen menu available

remotely. The camera shall be powered with Power over Ethernet
where available or by 24/28 volts AC from a multi-output rack mounted
power supply provided under this Contract and located in the
communications room associated with the camera.
(ii) All PTZ cameras shall be IP network security cameras.
(iii) Minimum 20-character user-defined on screen titling for each camera,
preset and sector.
(iv) Minimum 64 preset PTZ positions and 16 sectors defined by user.
(v) Minimum eight 32-step user programmable tours with an additional
two user defined 360 step dynamic “auto-tour” functions.
(vi) Imaging device shall be a color 1/4-inch CCD and shall have a lens with
a variable focal length included in the range of 3.6 to 95 mm with a
minimum optical zoom of 15X, maximum aperture size of F1.6 and
providing a minimum resolution of 3 MP, or otherwise indicated. Light
sensitivity shall be 0.01 lux or less. The lens shall have an auto-iris
function and auto-focus function that can be placed in override by the
Operator. The camera shall automatically switch between color and
monochrome modes to enhance viewing in low light conditions. Low
light viewing conditions shall be further enhanced by frame integration,
automatic gain control and slow shutter speeds being activated
automatically when conditions require them. The camera shall have an
adjustable backlight compensation feature.
(vii) Panning: Continuous 360 degrees rotation at user controlled variable
speeds between 0.25 and 250 degrees per second without image
interruption. Tilt: –2.5 degrees through 92.5 at user controlled variable
speeds between 0.25 and 110 degrees per second. The drive shall
perform an auto-flip function to track objects passing directly below the
dome in an upright position. Zoom speed shall be user-controlled
varying between 0 to 200 degrees per second. Focus speed shall be no
less than 1.8 from near to far stops. Preset seek time shall not exceed
1.8 second.
(viii) Video Compression shall be H.264 (preferred if available), MPEG-4
(preferred if H.264 not available), or MJPEG (not preferred),
(e) General Requirements for Outdoor Cameras.

(i) Cameras shall be pole mounted.
(ii) Cameras pole height shall selected based on site conditions, to achieve
the required coverage.
(iii) Minimum 20-character user-defined on screen titling for each camera,
preset and sector.
(iv) Cameras shall be able to preserve details in high dynamic range
imagery and in scenes with extreme temperature dynamics.
(v) Thermal Cameras shall be un-cooled.
(vi) Video Compression shall be H.264.
(vii) Cameras shall provide a minimum of two (2) video streams including
configurable unicast and multicast simultaneous streams as a minimum.
(viii) Cameras shall be furnished in an IP-66 rated outdoor enclosure with
mounting base.

4. Lenses
(a) Provide vari-focal lenses for all fixed IP cameras. Field verify lensing
requirements to provide for the defined desired angle of view, and high
quality, glare-free, clear pictures at the video monitors.
(b) All camera lenses shall incorporate C or CS mounts and shall be specifically
designed for color applications.
(c) All camera lenses shall incorporate auto iris control.
5. PTZ Camera Power Supply
(a) Although IP cameras with PoE/PoE+ capability are preferred, if necessary,

24/28 VAC output individually fused camera power supplies shall be
provided for Network IP cameras with PTZ capabilities. Camera power
supplies shall be UL listed (UL 2044) 24/28 VAC units.
(i) Low voltage outputs shall have automatically resetting over current
protection devices. Each output shall be electrically isolated from other
outputs on the supply.
(ii) Each camera power supply shall be connected to a UPS branch circuit.
(iii) Individual, plug-in type power supplies shall not be acceptable.
(iv) The power supplies shall also contain Surge Protection Devices in
accordance with Section 21 Part “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Circuits”; failure of surge protection capabilities will
result in open circuit to indicate module needs replacement.
6. Media Converters
(a) Media converters shall be used for cameras in areas where direct copper
connectivity is not feasible.
(b) Media converters shall be provided by the Video Surveillance System
Contractor in coordination with the Structured Cabling Network Contractor.
7. CCTV Poles
(a) Construction: The pole height shall be based on the required CCTV cameras
field of view. Height of the pole shall be considered as 2.1 meter,3 meter,6
meter or more.
(b) Top of pole is to be designed to receive single or double arm brackets or other
arrangement required, supporting number of CCTV cameras shown on the
Drawings. Bracket arrangement is to be designed to ensure that failure, due
to wind induced oscillations, does not occur and that rotation from desired
alignment is not possible.
(c) Access door of weatherproof construction, with non-degradable heat resistant
rubber gasket, is to be positioned at pole base and is to be suitably sized to
insert and service the supply cable terminations and protective device. Door
is to be flush fitting with retaining mechanism and positive locking
arrangement with removable hexagonal key. Pole is to be reinforced at door
opening. Opposite each door, a non-hygroscopic baseboard of suitable size to
accept appropriate equipment is to be fixed to inside of column by purpose-
made brackets. Steel earthing stud with washers and nuts is to be welded
inside the column near the access door.

(d) Finish: Poles shall have an external powder paint coating (color to be
approved by the Engineer). Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed;
inside and outside surfaces of column are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting
and are to be free of grease. Steel components of poles to be hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness of zinc coating is to be 500
g/m2 on both inside and outside surfaces of column. Galvanizing is to be to
NFT 91 121 (June 1958) or BS EN ISO 1461. Any damage to galvanizing is
to be rectified during erection by wire brushing affected area and treating with
approved rust converter to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Flange plate and
inside and outside of column base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint
prior to erection.
(e) IP rated “cut-out” weatherproof enclosure box to be provided at base of pole
containing media converters and cable terminations. Fixing/holding screws
shall be captive type.
(f) Terminal blocks shall be high temperature, non-inflammable, non-toxic
material with high quality fixing screws. Individual terminals for each
termination.
(g) Wiring is to be PVC insulated 3 core or 4 core, heat resistant type to 105 deg.
C (221 deg. F) conductor temperature.
(h) Selected height of the CCTV pole is subject to the site conditions, to achieve
the required coverage in the project.
(i) CCTV pole final selection shall be subject to the approval of Engineer and/or
Employer.
53.1.5 VSS PROCESSING SERVER
1. The processing server receives camera IP streams from cameras, converts the video
stream into a compressed video format, and then writes the video to the long term
storage device. The processing server shall be able to provide compression of all
cameras received by the server at thirty (30) frames per second at the native
resolution of each camera Type. The processing server shall be able to interface
with large network storage arrays or drives. The use of a system that is limited to
less than the noted size shall not be allowed. Each server shall be able to log
multiple drives or partitions, but the intent is that each server will log only a single
partition for storage of all camera video for cameras assigned to that server. The
intent is that the storage size and cameras per partition shall not be limited by the
system software. Each server shall have the capability of logging multiple partitions
or drives, but only one partition is expected at this time. A storage solution shall be
provided for the CCTV system as described under “Storage Considerations” Article
of this Specification.
53.1.6 APPLICATION/CONTROL SERVER
1. The application/control server tracks all live video clips and stored video. The
application/control server shall be a dual, fully redundant configuration which is
comprised of two identical servers located in physically diverse locations.

53.1.7 VSS SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
1. The system shall be based on open architecture software and shall allow the use of
any industry standard computer hardware, LAN hardware, and data storage
equipment (non-proprietary hardware). Systems requiring the use of proprietary
hardware shall not be acceptable.
2. The system shall be an entirely plug-and-play IP/Ethernet based system which shall
allow the display of live video streams, the recording and playback of digital video
streams from multiple video surveillance IP cameras simultaneously on the
System’s Operator console and/or on clients. Clients may include selected
workstations, laptops, or other devices.
3. The system shall provide the capability to integrate IP fixed and PTZ cameras,
video encoders, and management and storage servers on a standard IP/Ethernet
network.
4. The system shall operate Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) hardware and on

industry standard server operating system with all the controls done via keyboard
and mouse
5. The software installed in both servers and workstations shall be similar in Graphical
User Interface, therefore, an Operator shall need to learn only one interface for both
control and programming of the system and functions, offering the ability to
remotely configure most system components from any recorder or workstation.
6. The recorder shall also offer a full multi-user authorization logon application. This
application shall offer levels of authorization based on defined sites and functions.
In addition, a full setup utility shall be available for the Administrator to configure
authorizations. The login window shall consist of a User Name and Password field.
The software shall offer a full multi-user authorization process as follows:
(a) User groups shall be created once globally and shall appear in all recorders
and workstations connected to the network.
(b) Users shall be created once globally and shall be given rights to particular
groups.
(c) Groups shall be authorized and given specific access to each unit, permitting
“function-specific” profiles.
(d) Users created and authorized for each machine shall be able to login to any
recorder and workstation and automatically have their group rights for that
machine follow them.
(e) There shall be no virtual limit on the amount of Groups and Users that can be
authorized in the software.
(f) The recorder shall allow for each group to be authorized or denied access, per
component, to: Login, Logout, Setup: Network & Site Name, User and Group
Management, Site Authorization, Auto Login, Macro Create-Edit, Alarm
Setup, Authentication Settings, Device Setup, Pre & Post Alarm Times,
Storage Database Utilities, Auto Record, Exit to OS, RS-232 Setup, Priority
Setup, Registration Setup, Manual Record Setup, Scheduler for
Macros(multiple actions), Reports, Scheduler/Macro, Shutdown/Close,

Record, Stop, Change Quality, Picture Export and Print, Control PTZ, Live
View, Playback Recorded Images, Edit Camera titles, Define Alarm
conditions, System reports, Relay Operation, and Alarms Functions.
7. Workstation Graphical User Interface Software
(a) The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall provide a multi-channel display
area containing access to a listing of all connected cameras, Site and terminal
maps and device tree, a navigator window, a control dialog display area, a
toolbar, a display mode control area, a function control area, a video display
controls area and other image controls area. Each area shall contain the
necessary controls to operate and setup the system.
(i) The Main Window shall provide the following:
1) Site and Device Tree depicting each recorder with all connected
cameras, visually differentiating between PTZ and fixed cameras
by either icons or camera tags.
2) A multi-screen display area that allows for screen displays of a
Single camera, Quad, 3x3, 4x4, and Full screen of any of the
above selected multi-screen displays. The main window shall be
capable of spanning multiple monitors through the use of
multiple display cards per workstation.
(b) Shall have the ability to view, record, playback and archive video from
cameras located at remote locations over the IP network. (Multi-location
recordings).
(c) Shall provide the capability to record audio with the associated camera, when
audio recording is necessary and the camera has audio feature supported by
the software.
(d) Shall allow time synchronized multiple cameras view/playback.
(e) Shall provide a tamper-proof log file on user’s activity in the system using
encryption and integrity check.
(f) Shall be scalable to support an unlimited number of cameras with multiple

servers.
(g) Shall provide 24 hours scheduler to activate and deactivate the following
features on a per camera basis:
(i) Bring cameras on/off line.

(ii) Sound audible alarm on motion detection in camera’s field of view.
(iii) Send e-mail/text, pager notification on motion detection events
with/without video image attachment.
(iv) Start/stop and change patrolling sequence for PTZ cameras.

8. Software shall have an advanced motion detection capabilities with the functions
as described below. The administrator shall have the ability to use one, several or
any non-conflicting combinations of the following functions, on a per camera basis:
(a) Pre-recording images up to 999 seconds (User defined) before a motion is

detected in the cameras field of view and continue recording for up to 999
seconds (user defined) after the motion stopped in the cameras field of view.
(b) Adjustments of motion level sensitivity from 0 –10,000 units in 1 unit
increments.
(c) Up to 1024 inclusion / exclusion motion detection zones per camera.
(d) Change recorded frame rate when motion is detected.
(e) Annunciate motion as an event or alarm on the Operator’s workstation on a
time schedule basis.
9. The system shall monitor camera video and provide alerts for the following
malicious acts:
(a) Camera masking – attempts to ‘cover up’ the camera view either by painting
the lens or covering the camera fixture with a bag or blanket
(b) Blinding – use of a bright light source or laser aimed directly into the camera
lens
(c) Signal cut – interruption of the camera signal cable
(d) Power cut – interruption of AC or DC power to the camera
10. The System shall:

(a) simultaneously record, playback and display live video (Triplex), and shall
provide the capability to include audio.
(b) have the ability to record and store images at rates between 1 frame per hour
to 25 frames per second on a per camera basis, dynamically configurable
based upon user parameters.
(c) have the ability to store the recorded images on Storage Area Network (SAN)
and shall not be limited by partition or drive size.
(d) be able to perform multiple archiving per day.
(e) have the option to start recording on an event setup by the
Operator/administrator.
(f) have the option to increase the recording FPS on motion detection, on event
detection or Operator command.
(g) have the ability to adjust image resolution to 4CIF or up to 4.9MP on a per
camera basis. All cameras shall be able to be recorded at 30 fps, but the frame
rate and recording duration shall be individually adjustable for each camera.
(h) have the ability to adjust the compression level of the video image data size,
to save on storage size, when needed.
(i) allow Operator to select the controlled display monitor by mouse click or
touch screen.
(j) allow the Operator to switch a camera between live view and playback in less
than half of a second.
(k) allow Operator to pause live video.
(l) allow Operator to rewind or forward video on a frame-by-frame basis.
(m) allow Operator to play video back and forth by using a slider button for ease
of video investigation.

(n) allow Operator to continuously play forward and backward a recorded video
and increase or decrease the playback speed.
(o) allow the Operator to select time and date for playback and be able to retrieve
this video within less than 5 seconds.
(p) allow Operator to digitally zoom in and out of pre-recorded video in paused,
playback or live video mode and adjust the zoomed area up, down, left or
right.
(q) allow Operator to control PTZ cameras using mouse control.
(r) allow Administrator/Operator to write (copy) archived video to CD/DVD, as
email attachment, external hard drive (thumb drive), etc. if allowed by user
rights.
53.1.8 REMOTE WEB ACCESS
1. Remote web access shall provide web server service to allow authorized users to
view live video, playback of recorded video and search the archive to view video
using their Internet Explorer web browser from any PC on the Intranet or Internet.
Web browser functionality shall include the following features based on user
profiles:
(a) Provide username and password for access control into the System.
(b) Define remote user profile and user rights in relation to viewing certain
cameras and the use of PTZ and Output relays. This feature is limited to
Administrator level users.
(c) Navigate to cameras and sites using an integrated Project System map.
(d) Control all PTZ Presets per camera for fast and accurate remote positioning
control.
(e) Access any recorded video of the current day and the archive for past days,
search by time/date or activity/alarm and playback the video as a stream,
frame by frame or jump to motion detected sequences.
(f) Provide thumbnail images for each new event for easy search.
(g) Provide a view of live video from 4 cameras, simultaneously.
53.1.9 VIRTUAL MATRIX APPLICATION SOFTWARE
1. Virtual matrix application shall be part of the VSS and shall provide the
functionality of a traditional full cross point matrix CCTV switch without the use
of analog cross point switching circuits. Any camera shall be capable of being
viewed on any monitor or one camera on all monitors without limitations. IP
streams from the IP cameras may be decoded to analog where required for use by
typical analog display monitors/devices, but it is the design intent to display/record
video information in its native digital format from the cameras and on Operator
workstations.
2. The virtual matrix software shall support sequential switching on all monitors.
Sequencing shall be a user configurable pattern with dwelling times user selectable
per camera. The software shall also support salvo switching where a selected group
of cameras will be simultaneously switched on to a selected group of monitors.

3. A web browser interface shall be provided allowing viewing and PTZ control from
any location with proper authentication.
4. The software shall provide the Operator with a GUI interface for control and
selection of the cameras on the system. The GUI shall offer the Operator the ability
to select a camera for control and viewing via Map based multiple level floor plans
that can be drilled down from an overall site view through each terminal and
terminal level. The Operator shall have the option of using an expandable device
tree for dragging and dropping selected cameras to view and control on selected
monitors. The Operator shall be able to select a monitor by monitor number or by
selecting the specific camera icon on the display and select a camera by camera
number or by selecting the specific monitor icon on the display. Upon camera
selection by number, the software shall allow the ability to bring the map/floor plan
of that camera to the Operator’s desktop. The quantity of maps shall not be limited
by the software. The bid shall include all software and programming time required
to implement this feature.
5. Virtual matrix software shall provide user configurable camera and monitor titles
of up to 20 characters per instance. All camera titles and text shall be controlled via
the VSS software. System shall also provide up to an additional 20 characters of
user configurable alarm text displayed in red during an alarm event as defined by
the SACS.
6. Software shall provide for Operator notification on loss of image from an IP camera
as an alarm event. Loss of image shall be interpreted to mean a loss of image due
to power failure of a camera, masking or blinding the camera field of view or loss
of communication with the camera.
7. Software shall provide an unlimited number of individually identifiable Operators.

Each Operator shall be by unique user name and password and configured by the
system administrators to allow or restrict access to system features on a per user
basis and per feature basis.
8. The software shall provide user configurable partitioning of cameras and monitors
to permit only selected cameras to be viewed on selected monitors by selected
Operators. Coordination with the Employer is required to properly configure the
system.
9. Shall provide the Operator with up to 64 presets position per PTZ camera.
10. Shall have the ability to move a PTZ camera to any of the preset positions upon
receiving software command from the SACS system (or other devices interfaced
via RS232). The quantity of cameras per alarm shall not be limited, and the quantity
of alarms that may call a specific camera or preset shall not be limited. The intent
is that different SACS alarms be allowed to call the same or different presets on a
specific camera.
11. Shall have the ability to provide PTZ camera tour feature between preset positions.

12. Shall be able to program unlimited number of continuous tours for each camera
with each tour utilizing up to 16 presets in the camera.
13. Shall be able to control the tour sequences using a 24/7 scheduler.
14. Shall be able to resume tour when Operator manual control times out.
15. Shall have the ability to return to a designated preset after a pre-determined period
of no Operator activity or manual commands. Shall have the option not to record
while moving between presets and shall stay in a preset position if motion was
detected in the camera field of view at that preset position, and shall continue
touring once motion stopped.
16. Latency between system control (whether manual or software driven) and viewing
of camera movement on system monitors shall not exceed 0.25 seconds.
(a) Shall display overlay information on each camera window with video time
and date, video status: live, rewind, forward and pause, and display camera
name. These features are to be configurable by the administrator.
(b) Shall be able to display incoming live video upon alert using the Matrix
Event-driven Push Live Video with Alert-Live message on the screen.
17. Software shall have a real-time system clock to display time and date information
on selected monitors. The clock shall be synchronized with an external time server,
with the time updates not to exceed 60 minutes between updates. The time shall be
synchronized with the network time. Coordinate with the Employer for the
Network Time Protocol source.
53.1.10 VIRTUAL MATRIX
1. The Virtual Matrix shall be an IP Network based Virtual Video Matrix capable of
display of live, recorded and playback of digital video images from any camera or
the Storage platform on any IP based monitor or workstation on the network.
2. The Virtual Matrix shall have multiple modes for pushing live video to the Operator
workstations:
(a) Manual – Operator initiated calling of live video

(b) Automatic – Triggered by internal motion detection from the specific camera
or another associated camera.
(c) 3rd Party – Triggered by a URL command from another system or serial data
exchange via TCP/IP socket or RS232.
3. The Virtual Matrix shall enable system to issue disconnect of video stream to
Operator workstations.
4. The Virtual Matrix shall be able to communicate and receive image streams from
unlimited number of local and remote Video Servers.

5. The Virtual Matrix shall support cameras using H.264 (preferred if available),
MPEG-4 (preferred if H.264 is not available), or MJPEG (not preferred)
compression.
53.1.11 WORKSTATION REQUIREMENTS
1. The PCs or system workstations shall be used for surveillance and alarm viewing
as well as for data storage. The PCs shall be installed in a console in CCTV Control
Room
2. CCTV Control Room shall be fully equipped with all the necessary equipment for
viewing, operating, controlling and monitoring of CCTV cameras, as per MOI SSD
laws & regulations.
3. The PC or system workstation and associated peripherals shall be confirmed by

relevant manufacturer/supplier and shall comply with Section 21, Part “Computers
& Related Peripherals”, including but not limited to
(a) Computer Workstation.

Display Screens, 23-inch suitable for extended use for CCTV and control
room applications.
(b) The final monitor configuration and display of cameras will be determined in
liaison with the Employer and may be subject to change.
4. Include a USB or Ethernet Keyboard controller.
5. The exact location of the workstations, and number of monitors at each location,
shall be coordinated with the Employer and shall be reflected on the Shop
Drawings.
6. PC’s shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be sourced from a
recognized manufacturer. Purchase of the PC’s shall be delayed until the latest time
possible without causing a delay in the construction schedule to ensure that they
will be state-of-the-art, based on the latest proven technology.
7. The system shall support two (2) three (3) or four (4) display screens per Operator
workstation for live view of cameras, and alarm video monitoring, playback, search,
video clips productions, evidence printout and more (viewer screens). Playback and
searching shall not interfere with or eliminate the continuous and simultaneous view
of the live streaming videos.
53.1.12 VIDEO SERVER REQUIREMENTS
1. The Video Server software shall be a package that shall be installed on a Server
running a database server software platform, and combined with the hardware, shall
function as an IP based digital video surveillance and recording server.
2. The system shall communicate, receive and record video image streams from IP
addressable cameras.

3. The system shall record and communicate simultaneously with mixed format IP
cameras on the same server.
4. All System configurations, changes, setups and operation shall be password

protected and always available to the System administrator for access and use.
5. The system shall support an Application Programming Interface (API), and shall
provide a Software Development Kit (SDK), for integration with 3rd party software
systems.
6. The system shall support DNS entries for camera naming of IP addresses from
network DHCP server.
53.1.13 INTELLIGENT VIDEO ANALYSIS SYSTEM (IVAS)
1. The IVAS shall be integrated in the same hardware as the recording system to provide
a seamless integration of video and events. The Contractor shall confirm with
Employer the functions and features required.
2. Each channel of the IVAS shall be configured individually to support a specific type
of content analysis application.
3. Each channel of the IVAS shall support simultaneous recording of at the native
resolution of the various camera Types
4. The IVAS shall be an enterprise application allowing for simultaneous viewing of

multiple channels from multiple locations.
5. All IVAS devices, workstations, and video outputs shall connect together over a
standard TCP/IP network infrastructure. This will allow for a centralized or
distributed, command, control, and alerting design.
6. The IVAS shall be capable of processing video from thousands of cameras.
7. Additional IVAS devices shall have the ability to be added without disruption of the
active system.
8. The IVAS shall monitor its own operation and provide notification should the video
feed or network connectivity be lost. Should network connectivity be lost, the IVAS
shall continue to record and analyze without loss of alarm data.
9. The IVAS shall support a single Operator interface that provides live content analysis
information, live video from both analyzed and standard input, and video playback.
10. Video playback from analyzed sources shall also simultaneously display the analysis
data from those sources synchronized to the time of the playback.
11. The IVAS shall highlight in the video display window objects that are being tracked
and alarmed.

(a) Objects that are alarming shall be a different color from objects that are not
under alarm.
(b) The oldest alarming object shall be displayed in a different color from all
subsequent alarms in the same view.
(c) Alarm objects that have been acknowledged shall be displayed differently
from those that have not been acknowledged.
(d) The Operator shall have the option of turning off the highlights for either
unalarmed objects or all objects.
12. The IVAS shall provide the ability for the Operator to select an alarm from the
active video and through a single click start playback at the time in the video at
which the alerting object was first detected. In addition to playback, the system shall
also allow the Operator to acknowledge an alarm or add the alarm to the scene
background through the same action as above.
13. The IVAS shall provide a reporting application that allows alarms to be searched
based upon desired time/date range and one or more channels.
14. The IVAS shall provide automatic and immediate notification of user-defined
threats via:
(a) Audible alert on Operator screen(s)

(b) Text popup at Operator station(s)
(c) Email
(d) Automatic playback of live and pre-event video
(e) Automatic popup of multiple camera views in a pre-defined layout, including
a configurable combination of live and playback streams.
15. The IVAS shall provide capability for viewing video and alarms wirelessly via a
PDA.
16. The IVAS display shall be capable of displaying up to 16 simultaneous video feeds
with their associated content analysis data overlaid on each video window.
17. The IVAS shall provide software and hardware capability to accept alarm data from
and output alarm data to external systems such as access control systems.
18. The IVAS shall automatically learn the scene background. Should the camera view
change dramatically, the system shall pause detection and display on the camera
view that the analysis is no longer effective. If the analysis remains ineffective for
a specified period of time the system shall automatically re-learn the scene
background and resume detection.
19. The IVAS shall provide capability to configure in each camera view areas that are
of interest and areas that are to be ignored.
20. The IVAS shall provide capability to alert upon an intruder entering a restricted
area or moving from one defined area to a second defined area.
21. The IVAS shall be able to alert upon an object being left in or removed from a
designated area after a predetermined period of time.

22. The IVAS shall be able to detect if a vehicle remains in a specific area for more
than a predetermined period of time.
23. The IVAS shall be able to detect if a person or object moves in an unauthorized
direction through a given area, even when a large number of people or objects are
also moving in the same area in an authorized direction.
24. The IVAS shall be able to alert upon a queue of people extending beyond a
designated length.
25. The IVAS shall be able to count people entering or exiting a specific area with
output of the count as an on-screen display and over configurable time periods in a
reporting application.
26. The IVAS views shall apply seamlessly to either indoor or outdoor scenes.
(a) In outdoor scenes, the system shall dynamically and automatically adapt to
changing environments without Operator intervention. This includes reacting
to lighting changes caused by day, night, cloud cover, and video stationary
motion created by events such as blowing leaves or waves.
(b) In outdoor scenes, the system shall provide filters to compensate for fog and
clouds.
(c) The system shall provide software stabilization to compensate for shaking
cameras.
27. The IVAS shall be able to limit which objects are considered threatening based
upon a range of object sizes.
(a) In determining object size, the system shall take in to account the perspective
of the camera view, allowing larger objects closer to the camera and smaller
objects further from the camera.
28. The IVAS shall be able to track and alarm on up to 16 objects simultaneously in
each video channel.
53.1.14 STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS
1. The system shall support a wide range of automated video storage options ranging
from as little as a few hours of online storage capacity to keep long-term storage
using hard drives, digital tape or other cost-effective long-term storage media. The
system shall be capable of supporting unlimited video storage capacity by enabling
system Operators to periodically remove and replace hard drives, tape cartridge, or
other removable storage media.
2. The system shall allow flexible storage architecture (centralized, local, and remote
storage) for enabling best storage utilization.
3. The system shall provide sufficient storage for all camera recordings for a period
of 120 days, in MPEG-4 or H.264 format or better quality compression techniques.
The recording frame rate and resolution must be programmable at user level. It shall

be possible to customize the quality of the video output based on the viewing needs
and storing capacity.
4. The storage system shall be equipped with a database mirroring and distributed
video storage features, which shall allow the system to sequentially distribute
recorded video among the installed hard disks. And therefore, in case of a hard disk
failure, the user shall be able to receive a relatively reduced frame rate, but shall not
lose the complete video sequences.
5. Recorded and stored images shall be accessible from any workstation PCs
connected directly to the LAN or via remote connections.
6. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to justify the selection of the hard
disk or other storage media and the capacity and type of the storage library.
7. The following criteria shall be adopted to determine the minimum storage capacity
for the Project:
(a) The Motion Ratio which is the average number of hours that the camera’s
recording is subjected to motion detection, and is defined as follows:
(i) Cameras are assumed to have a Motion Ratio of 18 hours per day.
8. The Storage shall be designed for high speed, high capacity digital video storage
and high performance playback applications.
9. The Contractor shall accommodate any changes in Specifications from the

Authorities Having Jurisdiction before final approval.
10. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide sufficient storage.
11. The Contractor shall provide all supporting calculations including network
bandwidth calculations and all other parameters used in the assessment of Storage
requirements - for review and approval by the Employer.
12. The Contractor shall provide updated SAN calculations proposed upon the final
selected cameras and video management solution.
13. The Contractor shall confirm that the calculated storage requirements are correct
during the testing phase of the Project. This shall be in the form of a submittal that
shall also include documentation stating successful completion of the System
Availability testing.
14. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to confirm the bandwidth necessary to

support the VSS traffic on the Security LAN.
15. The storage must support redundancy or recording scheme with RAID 6 features.
(a) The Recording Rate for the Cameras, which is defined as follows:
(i) For continuous recording, the frame rate per camera shall be a mini-
mum of 6 fps.
(ii) For activity based recording, the frame rate per camera shall be a
minimum of 15 fps.

(iii) For alarm based recording, the frame rate per camera shall be a mini-
mum of 30 fps.
(b) The alarm ratio per Camera, which is the average percentage of time that the
Camera will be triggered by an Event/Alarm and is dependent on the camera
location. The alarm ratio shall be coordinated with the Operator(s) and shall
be greater than 20%.
(c) The Camera Mode, which shall be coordinated with the Operator(s) with re-
spect to each camera location and ambient light conditions and is generally
classified per day on the following basis:
(i) 12 hours Day Mode
(ii) 12 hours Night Mode
(d) Record and storage capacity shall ensure at least the recording for all the cam-
eras during a minimum of 120 days continuously.
16. Scheduled Recording Administration:
(a) The system shall be able to establish a recording schedule based on hours of
the day and days of the week.
(b) The system shall be able to specify the times during which each camera will
be recorded along with the recording settings to be used during each period
including the frame rate, resolution, and quality settings.
17. The storage system shall be designed to work with the Network Management
System in order to send recorded pictures to all monitors or remote workstations on
request.
18. Surveillance Requirements
(a) The Surveillance requirements shall be as per MOI SSD laws & requirements
in Qatar.
53.1.15 LAN INFRASTRUCTURE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1. LAN equipment are not part of this Specification; however, in order for the IP
Surveillance system to function properly the LAN infrastructure shall have as a
minimum the features listed below.
(a) Protocols: TCP/IP.
(b) Traffic Management and Quality of Service Mechanisms.
(c) VLAN/VLAN tagging (802.1q) support.
(d) Hardware Redundancy.
(e) Security Features.
(f) Network Resiliency Features.

(g) Power: Power over Ethernet support (IEEE 802.3at).
53.1.16 ALARMS AND EVENTS
1. Overview: For the purpose of these Specifications, an “alarm” is any event that can
be received or detected by an external equipment (access control for example) or
internal (failure for example) and responded to in real time. Many types of events
are not “alarms” in the traditional sense of an immediate problem such as a fire or
intruder. An event can be any type of activity that may be the subject of future
investigation and video review. The two basic requirements for an event are time
and location:
(a) Time: A signal or data that can be detected or received in real time.
(b) Location: A physical location associated with the signal or data that can be
related to cameras and camera presets.
2. All the pictures shall be recorded and stored, continuously or on event.
(a) The “operation cameras” output shall be recorded all the time at the resolution
of the of the respective CCTV cameras
(b) The “security cameras” output shall be recorded on event with pre and post
alarm.
3. Alarm Recording: The system shall be equipped with Alarm Recording function
that:
(a) Enables the system administrator to define alarm responses including instruc-
tions to trigger recording of specified cameras at specified frame rates and
quality settings.
(b) Enables system administrator to determine the pre-alarm duration.
(c) Record cost-effective low frame rate video during non-alarm periods, and
then start recording at high frame rate (real-time) in response to alarm events.
(d) Enables system administrator to determine whether video will be retained on

long-term storage media for each continuous or scheduled recording instruc-
tion and automatically retain video on long-term storage media when video
is recorded as part of a defined response to an alarm event.
4. Tasks Related to Alarms: The system shall be able to perform the following tasks:
(a) Execute video image analysis algorithms (video sensor), including activity
detection and video loss detection and generate alarm messages.
(b) Receive signals from alarm inputs and generate alarm messages.
(c) Send alarm messages to the server or program that manages alarm responses.

(d) Process alarm response instructions, change recording modes and control
alarm relay outputs.
(e) Forward alarms from a remote node to a central alarm monitoring site.
(f) Motion detection feature shall be provided for fixed cameras looking at sen-
sitive areas, in order to initiate alarm when unauthorized movement is de-
tected. The Contractor shall coordinate and check precise location.
5. Event recording mode shall be used in relation with the Security System for access
controlled doors.
6. The system shall perform the following tasks in response to requests from one or
more workstations:
(a) Supply one or more live video streams.
(b) Enable one or more users to playback previously recorded video, including
“instant replay” of video recorded within the last few seconds.
53.1.17 PROPOSED SOLUTION
2. Data Transmission:
(a) The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers shall be
bi-directional using TCP/IP VLAN Network.
(b) Coordinate IP addressing, Ethernet switch port counts and assignments, long-
term storage requirements and bandwidth utilization with the Contractor
providing and configuring the dedicated security VLAN.
53.1.18 NETWORK EQUIPMENT
1. The IP Surveillance System shall be integrated and interfaced to the following

systems:
(a) The integration with the Storage devices shall allow the storage of CCTV
video for all the cameras for the required storage duration continuously.
(b) Structured Cabling Network and Data Communications Network
(i) The system shall be interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network
and the Data Communications Network to allow the communication

between the CCTV System, workstations, recording and storage serv-

ers, Network Management System, and all other interfaced systems
through the network backbone.
(c) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
(i) All CCTV equipment shall be powered by UPS for 60 minutes.

Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to ensure UPS power supply
for CCTV equipment.
(ii) A UPS failure shall be communicated to the CCTV workstations.
53.3 EXECUTION
53.1.1 INSTALLATION
2. Additional Installation Requirements:

(a) Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.
(b) Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to
obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms,
and adjust.
(c) Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations
unless otherwise indicated.
(d) Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches,
arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system-component enclosures and
mounted in self-protected, inconspicuous positions.
(e) Ensure that CCTV poles are free of any source of vibration before installing
the cameras.

2. Tests and Inspections – Additional Requirements:
(a) Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected,
and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
(b) Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and
functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct
tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable.
Prepare video-surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing
as follows:
(i) Prepare equipment list described in "Submittals" Article.
(ii) Verify operation of auto-iris lenses.
(iii) Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity,
simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a
density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with
and without the filter.
(iv) Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate
nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density
that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle
and aim camera at an object 17 to 23 m (50 to 75 feet) away. Adjust
until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the
filter in place.
(v) Set and name all preset positions; consult Employer's personnel.
(vi) Set sensitivity of motion detection.
(vii) Connect and verify responses to alarms.
(viii) Verify operation of control-station equipment.
(c) Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully
completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14
days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.
(d) Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system
complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test
equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.
53.1.4 CLEANING
1. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.
2. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows,

lenses, and monitor screens.
53.1.5 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS
1. When requested within 12 months of date of System Taking Over, provide on-site
assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two

visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Visits
for this purpose shall be in addition to any required by warranty.
END OF PART 53

PART 54 – PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Add the following completely new Part titled: Part 54 – Parking Control and Guidance
Equipment including its new clauses as follows:
54.1 GENERAL
54.1.2 SUMMARY
1 Part Includes:
(a) Automatic barrier gates.
(b) Vehicle detectors.
(c) Miscellaneous parking control equipment.
2 Related Parts:
(a) Section 5 - Concrete.

(b) Section 6 Part 5 - Asphalt Works.
(c) Section 6 Part 6 - Concrete Road Pavement.
(d) Section 17 Part 4 – Architectural Metal Work.
(e) Section 17 Part 3 - Metal Doors and Windows.
(f) Section 21 Part 1 – General provision of electrical installation.
(g) Section 21 Part 6 - Cables and Small Wiring.
(h) Section 21 Part 7 - Conduits and Conduit Boxes.
(i) Section 21 Part 18- Uninterruptible Power Supply.
(j) Section 21 Part 22 - Earthing and Bonding.
(k) Section 21 Part 56 – Video Intercom System.
(l) Section 21 Part 58 – Video Surveillance System.
(m) Section 31 Part 14 –Signage.
(n) Section 31 Part 15 - Fabricated Structures.
(o) Building Management System (BMS).
1 Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local
ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT S21P54 - Page 1 of 19

with either set of applicable requirements and standards addressed within the
references:
(a) According to North American Standards:

(i) ANSI/UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and
Window Operators and Systems.
(ii) ASTM F2200 - Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate
Construction.
(iii) UL 991 - Standard for Tests for Safety-Related Controls Employing
Solid-State Devices.
(b) According to European Standards:

(i) EN 12453 - Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates. Safety
in use of power operated doors. Requirements.
(ii) EN 12445 - Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates. Safety
in use of power operated doors. Test methods.
(iii) EN 12978 - Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates. Safety
devices for power operated doors and gates. Requirements and test
methods.
(iv) EN 12604 - Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates.
Mechanical aspects. Requirements.
(v) EN 12635 - Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates.
Installation and use.
(vi) EN 13849-1 - Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of control
systems. General principles for design.
(vii) EN 60204-1 - Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.
3 General requirements: All electrical works shall comply with the local Electricity
Regulations. Refer also to Section 21 Part “General Provision of Electrical
Installation”.
4 Local regulations and standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have
1 Not Applicable.
1 The Contractor shall provide, based on these specifications and design drawings,
the final design and construction documents and all equipment, software, material,
labor and services required to construct and install the Parking Control Equipment
including, but not limited to:
(a) All design services, drawings and specifications, equipment, software, mate-
rials, labor and services, not specifically mentioned or shown, which may be
necessary to complete the design and installation of the System.
(b) Installation and setup of the system hardware and software as specified.

(c) Coordination with the Service Providers of interfaced systems.

(d) Integration of the System with other systems and in coordination with the
Employer.
(e) Delivery of the “Interface Control Document - ICD”.
(f) Final connection of hardware to power, infrastructure termination and patch
cords connecting system equipment to other communication equipment.
(g) Documentation: Licenses, Shop drawings, Specifications, As-built drawings,
user’s manual, operation and maintenance manuals, test reports, etc.
(h) Handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts (along with current unit
operation.
(i) Handover manufacturer’s recommended test equipment and tools (along with
(j) Test plan.
(k) System testing and commissioning.
(l) System roll-out.
(m) System warranty as specified herein.
(n) Training as specified herein.
(o) Maintenance and support as specified herein.
2 Parking Control Equipment shall include all wiring, control cabling, conduit, boxes,
weatherproof enclosures, contactors and accessories and ancillary work, whether
described in the Specification or not, required for a complete and fully operational
system.
3 The Parking Control Equipment shall interface with the Fire Alarm System and
other Building Services Systems.
4 Comply with the following Specifications Parts as applicable:
(a) Section 5 Part “Concrete” for concrete islands and curbing.

(b) Section 17 Part "Architectural Metal Work" for pipe bollards to protect
parking control equipment.
(c) Sections 17 Part “Metal Doors and Windows” for parking garage entrance
doors and grilles interlocked to parking control equipment.
(d) Section 31 Part “Signage” for exterior parking-related signs.
(e) Section 31 Part "Fabricated Structures" for cashiers'/parking attendants'
booths.
(f) Section 21 Part “IP-based Intercom System” for integrating parking control
equipment with the Project intercommunication system.
(g) “Access Control” for integrating parking control equipment with building
access control.
(h) "Intrusion Detection" for integrating parking control equipment with the
building intrusion detection system.
(i) "Perimeter Security Systems” for integrating parking control equipment with
the site security control system.
(j) Section 6 Part "Asphalt Works" for asphalt driveway and approach paving.
(k) Section 6 Part "Concrete Road Pavement" for concrete driveway and
approach paving.

5 Site Survey Requirements
(a) Parking Control Equipment installation shall be based on approved shop

drawings prepared by the Contractor based on a site survey to determine the
specific installation parameters. The shop drawings shall highlight the below:
(i) Buildings and other structures
(ii) Roads, driveways, sidewalks, paths, parking areas, storage compounds
(iii) Electrical conduits, buried cables
(iv) Proposed location of cable path (include cable spacing and burial depth)
(v) All obstacles
(vi) Gates (including type and size)
1 Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his Suppliers when considering:
(a) System cabling, termination, identification and testing.

(b) Provision and installation of computer hardware, racks/cabinets and related
networking software and equipment.
(c) Active communication and data processing equipment.
(d) Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
outlets.
(h) Installation and finishing of plywood backboards in communications rooms.
control sensors.
(j) Communications and electrical pathway devices both indoors and outdoors
such as underground ductbanks, manholes, handholes, cable trays, conduits,
conduit sleeves, and penetrations in walls and floors.

(a) Meet jointly with representatives of the above systems, Contractors,
Operators, Engineer and Employer to exchange information and agree on
details of project implementation, equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
other systems.
(d) Coordinate with the other Contractors whose deliveries are necessary for the
correct operation of the Parking Control Equipment.


1 Parking Control System: Can be used for the following types of parking
management:
(a) Transient Parking: Hourly rated parking, with fee paid while exiting.
(b) Monthly Parking: Monthly rated parking, with fee paid by the month and
access gained by access control card.
(c) Flat-Rate Parking: Unlimited-duration parking, with free gate entry and
fixed-fee amount paid while exiting.
(d) Special-Event Parking: Duration-of-event parking, with fee paid while
entering with gates up or down.
(e) Limited Date and Time Parking: Limited-duration parking, with
predetermined fee access control card.
(f) Validated Parking: Fee set, reduced, or waived by merchant validation, with
free gate entry and fee paid while exiting.
(g) Resident Parking: Free Parking for Residents using Card Reader
Authentication.
54.1.9 SUBMITTALS
review of shop drawings, product data or samples until Engineer / Employer has
approved the respective submittal. Such work shall be in accordance with approved
submittals:
(b) Shop Drawings.
(c) Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics.
(d) System Operation: Include system architecture and performance

requirements.
2 Submittals shall comply with Project General requirements including but not
limited to Parts “Submittal Procedures”, “Closeout Procedures” and “Record (As-
Built) Documents”.

3 Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full
range of colors available for equipment with factory-applied color finishes.
4 Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of equipment and /or software

certifying that furnished products comply with Contract requirements.


6 Signed Warranty: as specified.
7 Testing Plan:
(a) The Contractor shall provide Test Plan elaborating the testing methodologies
and schedule to be applied throughout various stages of the work. This shall
also include the plan for integrated tests for interface with other systems. The
Contractor shall submit the Test Plan for approval by the Employer.
8 Test Equipment
(a) The Contractor shall furnish test equipment required to test the system.
(b) Test equipment shall have accuracy better than the parameters to be tested.
(c) The Contractor shall deliver calibration certificates of testing equipment in-
dicating that equipment calibration meets the appropriate levels by a qualified
testing agency and that equipment has been calibrated at least once in the year
prior to the testing date.
(a) The Contractor shall test all components and circuits of the System after in-
stallation to ensure functionality and performance meet industry approved
guidelines.
(b) The Contractor shall provide and supply all necessary technical and skilled
manpower, tools, test equipment, materials and transportation required for
performing system and components testing.
(c) Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance require-
ments.

10 Product data: For each type of product.
(a) Factory Tests: All equipment and cables shall be tested at Manufacturer
premises, and test certificates, shall be submitted to Engineer before shipping
and delivery to site.
(b) Submit catalogue cut-sheets /Datasheets that include manufacturer, trade

name, and complete model number for each product specified. Model num-
ber shall be marked with an arrow or underlined to indicate exact selection.
(c) Identify applicable specification Part reference for each product performance
for each component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation.
(d) Submit point-by-point compliance statement to the specification, with neces-

sary supporting documents.
(e) For each product, include manufacturer’s installation instructions,
(f) Equipment Datasheets to include as a minimum the following:

(i) Product performance and features.
(ii) Electrical and Environmental requirements:
 Power supply, rated capacities, operating characteristics,
electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, temperature,
humidity, etc.
(iii) Product certificates.
(g) Software application and any other software that may be required to make the
system fully operational as specified including setup and configuration and
any other required configuration.
11 Shop Drawings
all work to be installed:
(i) Submit for approval diagrams showing layout of system components

and peripherals, schematic diagrams, wiring diagrams, etc.
(ii) Include data on electrical and physical characteristics of system
components and peripherals.
(iii) Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
(iv) Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
(v) Include drawings for the consoles and peripheral I/O devices.
(vi) Vehicle Detectors: Layout and method of placement of vehicle loop
detector system.
(b) The Contractor shall make any corrections as required. The Engineer’s
approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in

writing called the Engineer’s attention to such deviations at the time of

submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort
in shop drawings or schedules.
12 Qualifications
with, and at the time of, bid submission.
13 Closeout Submittals (Record Documents):
(ii) Parts lists.
(iii) Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
 Software operating and upgrade manuals.
 Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk,
complete with data files.
 Device address list.
 Printout of software application and graphic screens.
 All programming and source code shall be considered as a work
for hire and shall be the property of the Employer upon
completion of the Project.
(iv) Recommended list of spare parts and components to be stocked at
Project site.
(v) Test Reports.
(vi) Training Manuals.
(vii) Warranties.
(viii) Record (As-Built) Drawings.
labeled in accordance with Section 21 Part “General Provision of Electrical
Installation”.
(i) Utilize normal recognized drafting procedures that comply with Project
General requirements.
(ii) Graphical symbols and component identification on detail drawings

should use commonly understood, unique and unambiguous symbols
(an example of such a system is IEC 60617) - to the approval of the
Engineer.
(iii) The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the Project
identified in, but not limited to, addenda, change notices, site
instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions.

detailed operation of the equipment.
(e) Safety precautions.
(f) Diagrams and illustrations.
(g) Testing methods.
(h) Performance data.
(i) Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers, list of special tools and
instruments indicating sources of supply and recommended spare parts.
(j) List of qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the
(k) Interface Control Document – ICD: The Contractor shall submit the Interface
Control Document (ICD) which will include details of interface protocols and
details on communication between the System and other Building Services
Systems.
(l) System Maintenance
(i) Routine/Preventative Maintenance Schedule.
(ii) Trouble Shooting Guide.
(iii) Breakdown Maintenance Instructions.
1 Qualifications
(a) Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing

Parking Control Equipment with a minimum of 5 continuous years of
documented experience.
(b) Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized

representative of equipment manufacturer for both installation and
maintenance of Parking Control Equipment and factory trained personnel to
perform systems engineering and design, installation, testing, training,
maintenance and repair service.
(c) Installer Qualifications: Installer with documented experience in the

installation of Parking Control Equipment with a minimum of 2 projects
successfully executed. All projects must be of comparable size and
complexity to that of this Project and they must be verifiable and completed
within the last 5 years prior to commencing the corresponding work for the
Project.
2 Standard Products
(a) Identical Items: All items of the same classification shall be identical. This
requirement includes equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.


1 Comply with Project General Requirements.

electrical damage or degradation of operating capability as applicable to.
(a) Interior, Controlled Environments.

(b) Interior, Uncontrolled Environments.
(c) Exterior Environments.
2 Specifically, equipment installed outdoors exposed to weather conditions shall be

rated for continuous and trouble-free service operation in ambient conditions of 5
to 70 deg C dry bulb under direct sunlight and 10 to 100 percent relative humidity
and high content of ultra-violet rays, condensing, when exposed to winds up to 160
km/h.
3 Thermal Movements: Provide Parking Control Equipment that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
(a) Temperature Change (Range): 5 to 70 deg C dry bulb ambient under direct
sunlight; 100 deg C material surfaces.
4 Waterproof Equipment: Listed and labeled for duty outdoors or in damp locations,
with a minimum Ingress Protection rating of IP65.
5 Expansion Capability: Increase number of system components (i.e. number of

Entry/Exit points) in the future by 25 percent without the introduction of any major
modification to system software or headend equipment.
6 Power Supply
system described below, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise
specified.
standard. For details, refer to Section 21 Part "General Provision of Electrical
Installation".

54.1.13 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
1 Contractor shall provide a two years warranty for the works specified herein,
including all materials, software and labor, to be free from defects in design,
workmanship, and materials.
2 Warranty period shall commence from date of Taking Over.
3 Further, the Contractor shall warrant that the completed systems, including all
components (except those, which are existing or provided by others), are of
sufficient size and capacity to fulfill the requirements of the Specifications.
4 The warranty shall be valid following the date of System Acceptance by the
Employer. System Acceptance shall commence when all parts, components and
Systems have been tested, shown to be working in accordance with the
Specification, and approved by the Employer / Engineer.
5 Warranty Service: In the event that defects in the materials, software and/or
workmanship are identified during the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide
all labor, software patches/updates and materials as may be required for prompt
correction of the defect.
6 Warranty shall also cover for system failures which include, but are not limited to,
the following:
(a) Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
(b) Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware.
(c) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
7 Response time: Contractor’s service center shall provide maintenance and service
to the Project through factory-trained technicians who can attend to and resolve
emergency service within 8 hours after being called.
(a) After the on-site tests are satisfactorily completed in accordance with the
technical specifications and approved procedures, and before Taking Over,
assume a one-month experimental period during which the system perfor-
mance will be fully demonstrated under actual operation conditions. This
demonstration is to confirm, to the satisfaction of the Engineer /Employer,
that the system is free of remarks and is ready for taking-over.
(b) Contractor shall supervise and take responsibility for the operation of the sys-
tem during the experimental period. After the satisfactory completion of this
period, the system shall be taken over by the Employer, as per contract con-
ditions, whereby the warranty period shall commence.

3 Furnish extra materials and spare parts that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation, where spare parts shall
be 2% of the total number of the respective material, and no less than (1) one unit.
equipment supplied.
54.2 PRODUCTS
1 Available Manufacturers of Parking Control Equipment: Subject to compliance

with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. CAME (Italy)
2. Scheidt & Bachmann (Germany)
3. SKIDATA AG (Austria)
4. Siemens (Germany)
5. Or Approved Equal
2 All equipment and brands proposed by the Contractor shall be fully in line with the
Hotel Operator standards, guidelines, and requirements.
54.2.2 AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES
1 General: Provide parking control device consisting of operator and controller

housed in a weather-tight, tamper-resistant cabinet enclosure with gate arm. Device
shall be activated by a signal from access reader or control device such as push
button located inside security cabin. Fabricate unit with gate-arm height in down
position of not more than 900 mm above pavement.
2 Standards: ASTM F2200 for barrier gates and gate operators that are listed and
labeled according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency.
3 Standards: comply with EN 12453, EN 12445, EN 12635, EN 12978 and EN 12604.

4 Controller: Factory-sealed, solid-state, plug-in type, with galvanized-steel box for

wiring connections.
(a) Physical Characteristics:
(i) On-off power supply switch.

(ii) Automatic-manual switch.
(iii) Differential counter.
(iv) Communication port.
(v) Internal resettable counters.
(vi) Thermal-overload protection with manual reset.
(vii) Plug-in connectors for two vehicle loop detectors.
(viii) Thermostatically controlled heater with on/off/auto switch.
(ix) Switch to test motor and limit switches.
(x) Emergency manual disconnect.
(xi) Battery backup.
(xii) Single, 230 V ac grounded power socket outlet.
(b) Operational Characteristics:
(i) Able to store successive inputs and sequentially processing each one.
(ii) Automatic instant-reversing obstacle detector mechanism that stops
downward motion of gate arm if arm contacts or nears an object and
that immediately returns arm to upward position. Include a zero- to 60-
second, variable-time reset device.
(iii) Directional arming logic.
(iv) Broken gate-arm monitoring.
(v) Programmable automatic timer.
(vi) Diagnostic mode for on-site testing, with LEDs for inputs and outputs.
(vii) Automatic and continuous testing of inputs and outputs.
(viii) Reversible arm capability for right- or left-handed operation.
5 Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth;
approximately 400 mm square by 1000 mm tall. Provide single, gasketed access
door for each cabinet with flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for each lock, all
locks keyed alike. Fabricate cabinet with internal reinforcing and four mounting
holes accessible only from inside cabinet.
(a) Steel Sheet: Not less than 2.5-mm thick, galvanized- steel sheet.
(i) Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard
baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.
(ii) Finish galvanized steel cabinet with high performance polyurethane
coating system as specified in Division 05 Section "Metal
Fabrications".
6 Straight Gate Arm with Counterbalance: (19-by-140-mm actual-) (1-by-6-inch

nominal-) size pine or redwood with steel counterweights; with painted finish and
black diagonal stripes on traffic-side face. Provide mounting flange with breakaway
feature to ensure a clean break if arm is struck by vehicle.

(a) Length: As indicated on Drawings.
7 Operator: 1/2 hp; 230 V, 50-Hz, single-phase, instant-reversing, continuous-duty

motor for operating gate arm. Transmit power to gate-arm drive shaft through the
speed reducer to harmonic-acting crank and connecting rod. Fabricate crank, rod,
and drive shaft of galvanized solid bar steel. Provide an operable cam for adjusting
arm travel.
(a) Opening Time: Maximum Three seconds.

(b) Inherently adjustable, torque limiting clutch for safety.
8 Characteristics:
(a) Audible alarm that activates as part of a safety device system.

(b) Additional obstruction detector; noncontact infrared / photoelectric / radio-
frequency barrier.
(c) Barrier-arm warning safety signs on both sides of unit to limit traffic to
vehicular traffic.
(d) Low-voltage warning lights that illuminate when gate is in down position.
(e) Low-voltage light on cabinet top that flashes or changes from red to green
when barrier gate is operating.
(f) Manually operated crank for emergency operation.
54.2.3 VEHICLE DETECTORS
1 General: Provide detection devices that sense presence or transit of vehicles and
emit signals activating gate-arm operators.
2 Vehicle Loop Detector System: Self-tuning electronic presence detector with

adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and
panel indicator light. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay
before closing, timer cut-off switch, designed to hold gate arm open until traffic
clears. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of
turns, loop size, and method of placement at location indicated on Drawings, as
recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for installation.
(a) Factory-Formed Loop: Wire, performed in size indicated.
(b) Operation:
(i) Recognize vehicles within (152 mm) (6 inches) of each other on

standard-sized loop.
(ii) Recognize vehicle direction by detecting vehicle moving from one loop
to another.
(iii) Generate reverse count if vehicle backs up after generating directional
count in forward direction.
(iv) Continuous diagnostic monitoring for intermittently operating and
failed loops.
(v) Crosstalk test between adjacent loops.
3 Active Infrared Vehicle Detector: Reflective presence detector with adjustable

detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect the presence or transit of

vehicle in gate-arm pathway by interrupting infrared beam in zone pattern and to

emit signal activating gate-arm operator. Include automatic closing timer with
adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off switch, and vehicle presence
detector designed to hold gate arm open until traffic clears. The detector shall
operate on the immediate area in front of the gate barrier, operating only when a
vehicle
54.2.4 ACCESS CONTROL UNITS
1 Card Reader Controlled Unit: Functions only when authorized card is presented.
(a) Specifications: Refer to “Access Control” specifications.

(b) Operation: Online communication to remote parking control and security-
access control system computers.
(c) Characteristics: Timed antipassback, Capable of monitoring and auditing
barrier gate activity, LED.
(d) Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.
54.2.5 ANCHORAGES
1 Anchor bolts; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M and

ASTM F 2329.
1 The Parking Control Equipment shall be integrated and interfaced to the following
systems:
(a) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
(i) Parking Control Equipment shall be powered by UPS. Coordinate with

the Electrical Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for Parking
Control Equipment.
1 The UPS shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor to cater for the load of all
system components as described above and as recommended by the Supplier
considering a maximum of 80% loading and 20% spare capacity for future
expansion.
2 Remote field-mounted components shall be fed from the nearest UPS source.
3 Coordinate UPS voltage, circuit size, and connection requirements with the Project
Electrical design.
4 Coordinate UPS configuration whether centralized or decentralized, redundant or

non-redundant with the Project Electrical design.

5 Ensure that the allocated space and environmental conditions are adequate for the
adopted configuration.
6 Comply with Section 21 Part “Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems”.
1 General Cable Requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by system

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2 Comply with the following Specification Parts – as applicable to power, control,

data and video signal transmission cables:
(a) Section 21 Part “Cables And Small Wiring .”
(b) Section 21 Part “Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).”
(c) Section 21 Part “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).”
(d) This Specification Section.
3 Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Section 21 Part "Earthing

and Bonding ".
1 General Requirements for Conduits, Trunking, Boxes and Similar Fittings:
(a) Comply with the following Section 21 Part:

(i) "Conduits and Conduit Boxes".
(b) Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for
use in wet locations and shall carry the appropriate Degree of Protection (IP)
as per IEC 60529 and Degree of Mechanical Shock Protection (IK) as per
IEC 62262.
54.3 EXECUTION
54.3.1 EXAMINATION
1 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, including equipment bases; accurate
placement, pattern, and orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
2 Examine roughing-in for electrical and communication systems to verify actual

locations of connections before parking control equipment installation.
3 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

54.3.2 INSTALLATION
1 General: Install parking control equipment as required for a complete and

integrated installation.
(a) Rough-in electrical connections according to requirements specified in

Section 21 Parts.
(b) Coordinate positions and foundations for gates, dispensers, card readers, etc.
Prepare detailed drawings, indicating curbs and any service lines, cable ducts,
handholes /cable boxes, etc., and templates required for construction. Obtain
Engineer's approval before executing any work.
(c) Fixings: Supply steel frame bases, holding-down bolts, nuts, washers, etc.,
before construction of foundations and bases.
(d) Before pulling cables or wires, fix all major equipment in final position and
complete all raceways, duct-banks, conduits, handholes /cable boxes and
covers.
(e) All equipment shall be firmly secured in place unless requirements of
portability dictate otherwise.
(f) Equipment is to be laid out properly in communication rooms as applicable
in a way to reserve relevant space for maintenance activities. This space shall
also account for any future expansion of the system.
(g) Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards,
requirements, manufacturers’ guidelines and any authorities having
jurisdiction.
(h) All boxes, equipment, etc. shall be plumb and square.
(i) The Contractor shall take such precautions that are necessary to prevent and
guard against electromagnetic interference. Comply with
“Separation/Segregation of Services” paragraph in Section 21 Part “Common
Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)” for separation from EMI sources.
(j) After the proper layout of all equipment is accomplished, all components are
to be labeled, and marked in accordance with Section 21 Part “General
Provision of Electrical Installation”.
(k) During installation, consideration shall be given to operational efficiency as
well as the overall aesthetic factors.
(l) The Contractor shall supply and install all fittings and accessories, whether
or not specified, required for proper, safe, and reliable operation of the
system.
(m) The Contractor shall ensure that safe ingress and egress from all work areas
are maintained during movement and installation of equipment/materials.
2 Vehicle Loop Detectors: Seal wire loop at locations indicated on Drawings

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to parking control
equipment operated by detector.
3 Fee Computers: Install computers at locations indicated, including connecting to

peripheral equipment and remote computers.
4 Connect wiring according to Section 21 Part "Cables and Small Wiring."
5 Ground equipment according to Section 21 Part "Earthing and Bonding."

1 The Factory Acceptance Tests shall be carried out in a hardware and software
environment, which simulates the final configuration of the system.
2 The Contractor shall carry out any Factory Acceptances Tests, in Manufacturer's
factory itself, before any site delivery, in order to make sure that the system of both
hardware and software and the system after integration of various sub-systems is
able to satisfy site technical requirements of the equipment specifications.
3 Test Plan
(a) All tests are to be carried out, according to the methodology presented in the
Test Plan which has been submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Employer.
(b) The tests are to cover every aspect related to the specification of the system
and its operation; including, but not limited to, visual inspections,
measurements, and operation.
(c) Some of the functional or performance tests, which cannot be conducted in a

simulated environment, due to their nature and complications, may, subject
to the Engineer’s approval, be combined with the Site Acceptance Tests.
4 All Factory Acceptance Test Specifications shall be subject to configuration

management and change control by the Contractor at every level.
5 The results of the Factory Acceptance Tests, together with any re-testing as a result
of failure, shall be recorded and signed by the authorized personnel of the
Contractor.
6 Factory Acceptance Tests shall not be witnessed by the Engineer and/or Employer.
1 Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
2 Perform tests and inspections.
(a) Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
3 Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and
labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

5 Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has successfully been completed and
system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a
minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.
6 Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies
with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for
proper operation in all functional modes.
specified performance requirements are met.
9 Experimental Period: as described above under “Warranty and Maintenance”

article. Demonstrate successful operation to confirm, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer / Employer that the system is free of remarks and is ready for taking-over.
10 Parking Control Equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests
and inspections.
54.3.5 ADJUSTING
1 Adjust parking control equipment to function smoothly and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.
2 Confirm that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
3 After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished parking control

equipment, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
1 Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain parking

control equipment.
END OF PART 54

SECTION 23
FIRE FIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 3 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
following new Part 3.
3.1. GENERAL
3.1.1. SUMMARY
1 Section includes a microprocessor based, non-coded, addressable fire alarm system

with manual and automatic alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain
smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service
only including but not limited to:
(a) Fire Alarm Control Panel.
(b) Manual fire-alarm boxes.
(c) System smoke detectors.
(d) Multi-criteria detectors.
(e) Heat detectors.
(f) Device Guards.
(g) Notification appliances.
(h) Remote annunciators
(i) Graphic annunciators.
(j) Addressable interface devices.
(k) Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
(l) Interface with other systems, wiring, wire-ways and all accessories to form a
complete and fully functional system as required by this specification and
drawings.
2 Section includes Fire Alarm System interface with HVAC, smoke management
system, elevators, fire suppression systems, clean agent fire suppression systems,
Emergency Lighting System, lighting control system, etc.. These interfaces shall be
hardwired where required by code.
3 Related Parts:
(b) Section 21 Part 6 - Cables and Small Wiring.
(d) Section 21 Part 18- Uninterruptible Power Supply.
(f) Section 21 Part 39 – Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits.
(h) Section 21 Part 46 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM S23P3 - Page 1 of 37

(i) Section 21 Part 47 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).

(j) Section 21 Part 48 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
(k) Section 21 Part 49 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
(l) Section 21 Part 51 - Data Communications.
(m) Video Surveillance.
3.1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS

4 Conflicts

5 Codes and Standards: System design, operation, installation and workmanship

shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the
following references:
(a) Local regulations and codes.
i. QCDD: Qatar Civil Defense Department.
(b) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
(c) NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
(d) NFPA 170, Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols.
(e) NFPA 5000, Building Construction and Safety Code.
6 Codes and Standards: System components shall comply with the applicable
requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
(a) UL 38: Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems
(b) UL 217: Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms
(c) UL 228: Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling systems.

(d) UL 268: Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm System
(e) UL 268A: Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
(f) UL 464: Audible Signal Appliances
(g) UL 521: Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
(h) UL 632: Electrically-Actuated Transmitters
(i) UL 864: Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems
(j) UL 1480: Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and
Professional Use
(k) UL 1711: Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
(l) UL 1887: Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and
Smoke Characteristics
(m) UL 1971: Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired
(n) NFPA 1221: Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Emergency Services Communications Systems
(o) 47 CFR 90
7 System components, design, operation, installation and workmanship shall comply

with the applicable local regulations and code requirements of Authorities Having
Jurisdiction. These shall have precedence over other codes and standards indicated,
unless otherwise approved by the Employer, in writing.
3.1.3. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1 Definitions
(a) Alarm Verification Feature: A feature of automatic fire detection and alarm
systems to reduce unwanted alarms wherein smoke detectors report alarm
conditions for a minimum period of time, or confirm alarm conditions within
a given time period after being reset, in order to be accepted as a valid alarm
initiation signal.
(b) A “/ “used throughout the text between two consecutive words is equivalent
to and shall be used interchangeably with “and “.
(c) Alarm: A warning of fire danger.
(d) Signal: A status indication communicated by electrical or other means.

ii. Alarm Signal: A signal indicating an emergency that requires immediate

action, such as a signal indicative of fire.
iii. Evacuation Signal: A distinctive signal intended to be recognized by the

occupants as requiring evacuation of the building.
iv. Fire Alarm Signal: A signal initiated by a fire alarm-initiating device

such as a manual fire alarm box, automatic fire detector, water-flow
switch, or other device in which activation is indicative of the presence
of a fire.
v. Supervisory Signal: A signal indicating the need for action in connection

with the supervision of the fire suppression systems or equipment, or the
maintenance features of related systems.
vi. Trouble Signal: A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device
indicative of a fault in a monitored circuit or component.
(e) Positive Alarm Sequence. An automatic sequence that results in an alarm

signal, even when manually delayed for investigation, unless the system is
reset. It provides a timed delay of a general alarm signal in a building and at
a supervising station. This gives a trained responder up to 3 minutes to
investigate the cause of an alarm signal. The time limits to acknowledge the
alarm signal and reset the system are designed to assure all alarm system
functions are actuated in the event personnel are not available to
acknowledge, investigate and reset the alarm. A positive alarm sequence
feature can only be used with the specific approval of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
2 Abbreviations
(a) EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
(b) FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
(c) FAS: Fire Alarm System.
(d) FCC: Fire command center.
(e) GUI: Graphical User Interface
(f) HLI: High Level Interface.
(g) LED: Light-emitting diode.
(h) PA / PAS Public Address System.
(i) PC: Personal computer.
(j) UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

(k) VES: Voice evacuation Sub-system.
(l) NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.
3.1.4. SCOPE OF WORK
1 General: Non-coded, addressable system with manual and automatic alarm

initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed
signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
2 Provide the following:
(a) FACP, manual stations, automatic fire detectors, notification appliances,

wiring, wire-ways and all accessories to form a complete system.
(b) Remote annunciator(s).
(c) Graphic annunciator(s).
(d) Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
(e) Interface with the Operation Control and Command Center (OCCC) in the Pearl.
3.1.5. COORDINATION
1 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and other Contractors for
interfaces with the existing systems. The Contractor shall provide in the shop
drawings the final solution for those interfaces for Engineer’s review and approval.
2 Fire alarm zoning shall be coordinated with Architectural Fire Zoning, HVAC,
smoke management, and fire-fighting systems.
3 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Security and Building Services
Contractors as specified in this Specification Section, the relevant system
Specifications.
i. All controls in case of fire shall remain with the fire alarm system in
accordance with the applicable NFPA codes.
3.1.6. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1 Control of System: By the FACP.
2 System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuit, short circuit,
and ground fault of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-
appliance circuits. System shall detect ground fault by panel, loop circuit, and
group of devices.

3 Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm

signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory,
or trouble signals. An alarm signal has the highest priority. Supervisory and
trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take
precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower-priority condition
occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals
regardless of priority or order received.
4 Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from
other zones.
5 System Reset: All zones are manually re-settable from the FACP after initiating
devices are restored to normal.
6 System shall continually monitor any changes in the sensitivity of individual smoke
or heat sensors due to environmental effects.
7 All operations shall be according to the approved Cause & Effect Matrix.
8 System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring, circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or
wire-to-wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time
in Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits.
(a) Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A for initiating-devices and
notification-appliance circuits; NFPA 72, Class X for signaling-line circuits.
(b) NFPA 72 requires that fire alarm system design include the designation of
system pathway survivability unless no provisions for pathway survivability
are included. Capacities on a single circuit should be determined based on the
amount of detection that is lost during a fault condition and the resulting
impact on life safety or property protection. See Editing Instruction No. 3 in
the Evaluations for discussion about determining circuit survivability.
(c) Pathway Survivability: NFPA 72 Level 2
(d) Install no more than 150 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.
(e) Serial Interfaces: type and quantity as recommended by manufacturer to suit

Project requirements for interface with:
ii. Central-station.
iii. Remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface module

(printer port).
iv. PC configuration.
(f) Provide addressable fault isolator circuit modules not less than one isolator
for a group of 20 devices. The module shall be capable of isolating and

removing a fault from a Class A data circuit while allowing the remaining
data loop to continue operating.
9 Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP. The
FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the secondary power
supply.
10 Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
systems:
(a) Manual stations.
(b) Smoke detectors.
(c) Multi-criteria detectors.
(d) Heat detectors.
(e) Duct smoke detectors.
(f) Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
(g) Pre-action system.
(h) Fire-extinguishing system operation.
(i) Fire standpipe system.
(j) Dry system pressure flow switch.
(k) Fire pump running.
11 Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
(a) Identify alarm and specific initiating device at connected network control
panels, and remote annunciators.
(b) Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
(c) Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire

alarm mode in accordance with Mechanical Specifications.
(d) Activate emergency lighting control.
(e) Record events in the system memory.
(f) Record events by the system printer.
(g) Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.
12 Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
actions:

(a) Valve supervisory switch (sprinkler valve-tamper switch).
(b) High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler system.
(c) Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems.
(d) User disabling of zones or individual devices.
(e) Loss of communication with any panel on the network.
13 System Trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices
and actions:
(a) Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
(b) Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory

signal-initiating devices.
(c) Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay,
control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.
(d) Loss of primary power at fire alarm control panel.
(e) Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire alarm control panel.
(f) Abnormal AC voltage at fire alarm control panel.
(g) Break in standby battery circuitry.
(h) Failure of battery charging.
(i) Abnormal position of any switch at fire alarm control panel or annunciator.
(j) Voice signal amplifier failure.
(k) Hose cabinet door open.
14 System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions:
(a) Initiate notification appliances.
(b) Flashing of the device location-indicating-light for the device that has operated.
(c) Identify specific device initiating the event at connected network control panels,
and remote annunciators.
(d) Record the event in system memory.
(e) Record the event on system printer.
(f) After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to
the remote alarm receiving station.

(g) Display system status on graphic annunciator.
15 Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the

FACP.
(a) Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances

and activate an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or
device is retained.
(b) Subsequent alarm signals, from other devices or zones, shall reactivate
notification appliances, until silencing switch is operated again.
(c) When alarm-initiating do not return to normal and system reset switch is
operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is
reset.
(d) When fire alarm system is reset, all auxiliary systems shall be released from
fire mode.
16 Smoke-Alarm Verification:
(a) Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire

alarm control panel.
(b) Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire alarm control

panel and detector.
(c) Record events by the system printer.
(d) Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
(e) Cancel fire alarm control panel indication and system reset if the alarm is not
verified.
17 Notification-Appliance Circuit:
(a) Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined

in NFPA 72.
(b) Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple

appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.
18 Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific

addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and
sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program
repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific
detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment
schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on
system printer.

19 Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble

events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm,
supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm
signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including
same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the
printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system
and a historical log of events.
20 Power Supply: Refer to Article “System Power Supply” of this Specification

Section.
21 Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a

plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation
and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the
functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
22 System shall support English language as coordinated with the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
23 Communication of Events: On receipt of the signal, communicate alarm and

supervisory. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm,
supervisory, or trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm
signals from all other indications. Also communicate system-reset event, including
the same information for device, location, date, and time.
24 The Fire Alarm System shall control directly HVAC units and HVTS systems in
accordance with the approved Cause and Effect Matrix via hardwired interlocks.
25 FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain English language descriptions of alarm,

supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or
supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and
component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the
system's historical memory.
26 System shall be able to report a map of all initiating devices connected to the system
for confirmation of As-Built drawings, and it shall show physical wiring of T-type
by device type and number. Other proposed alternatives shall be considered.
27 Expansion Capability: Increase number of devices in the future by 25 percent

above those indicated without adding any internal or external components or cable
conductors.
3.1.7. ACTION SUBMITTALS
1 Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and
accessories.
(a) Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and

finishes.

(b) Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
(c) Name and address of the manufacturer and country of origin of the product.
(d) Name and address of the authorized local representative and/or dealer.
(e) Compliance statement to specification, with necessary supporting documents.
(f) Complete catalog pages of proposed equipment.
(g) Detectors characteristic curves of coverage area against ceiling height and air
movement speed.
(h) Personal computer including dual processor type and speed, auxiliaries,
software-package, printer and the like.
2 Shop Drawings: For fire alarm system.
(a) Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation"

section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
(b) Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
(c) Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations.
Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and
distinguish between factory and field wiring.
(d) Basic system architecture indicating tie-in points with existing services.
(e) Detail assembly and support requirements.
(f) Include voltage drop and cable sizing calculations for notification-appliance
circuits.
(g) Include battery-size calculations.
(h) Include input/output (Cause/Effect) matrix. Show in a matrix format, the

effect of every initiating device on the FACP, notification devices, system
peripherals, and auxiliary systems interfaced with it.
(i) Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components
have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification
and in NFPA 72 (system endorsement).
(j) Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.
(k) Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-
conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke
detectors and access to them.

i. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of

sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm
indicators.
i. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on
alarm and override by firefighters' control system.
ii. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
iii. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.
(l) Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each
addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-
point wiring diagrams.
(m) Include coordination drawings with other systems that interface with the fire
alarm system as listed under Article “Scope of Work” of this Specification.
(n) Coordination drawings on reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale shall include,
but not limited to fire alarm detectors and notification appliances, light
fixtures, sprinkler heads, AC grills, access panels etc.
3 Sound Levels: Measure and submit audible sound levels. Verify that 15 decibels
(dB) above ambient noise levels or 5 dB above the maximum sound level that
occurs at the location for 60 seconds or more, but not greater than 120 dB, are
achieved.
4 System Graphics: Provide system schematics in AutoCAD format indicating the

location of monitoring and control points. Coordinate with the BMS Contractor.
5 Voice message uniformity/SPL and Intelligibility: Contractor shall submit

calculations showing the results of speaker distribution in conformity with
International Standards.
6 Test Results and Certificate of Completion: Comply with specified Standard.
7 Submit suitably framed Fire Zone drawings of proper size.
8 General Submittal Requirements:
(a) Submittals shall be approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction prior to

submitting them to Engineer.
iv. Prepare an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction.

Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict
component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make
clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments
from Authorities Having Jurisdiction, submit them to the Engineer for
review.
(b) Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

i. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
ii. Licensed or certified by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
9 For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals
listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design
criteria, including analysis data.
(a) Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and
heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply
with listing conditions of the device.
(b) Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and
sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and
intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.
(c) Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per
NFPA 72.
10 Coordination Drawings:
(a) Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating installation of
smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each
duct smoke detector installation:
iii. Size and location of supply and return ducts, including lining.
iv. Size and location of piping.
v. Size and arrangement of structural elements.
(b) Location of detectors in ceilings and reflected ceilings.
11 Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s technical validation and endorsement of

the design documentation and implementation.
3.1.8. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1 Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
2 Seismic Qualification Certificates: For Fire-Alarm Control Panel, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.




3 Field quality-control reports.
4 Signed warranty: As specified.
3.1.9. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1 Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
(a) Include the following and deliver copies to Authorities Having Jurisdiction:
i. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
ii. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record

of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents"
Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter
in NFPA 72.
iii. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and
equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point
with indication of origination and termination points.
iv. Riser diagram.
v. Device addresses. Coordinate with final system programming and

labeling.
vi. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project,

including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit
and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated
system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for
generic systems are not acceptable.
vii. Record copy of site-specific software.
viii. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the
following:
1) Equipment tested.
2) Frequency of testing of installed components.
3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of
maintenance.
5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
ix. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty

requirements.

x. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire alarm control

panel and each annunciator panel.
2 Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
(a) Software operating and upgrade manuals.
(b) Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete

with data files.
(c) Device address list.
(d) Printout of software application and graphic screens.
3.1.10. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 Materials and equipment shall comply with applicable local regulations and code
requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction. These shall have precedence over
other codes and standards indicated, unless otherwise approved by the Employer,
in writing.
2 Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is an authorized and

certified representative of the fire alarm system manufacturer for both installation
and maintenance of units required for this Project.
(a) Experience: Minimum 5 years.
(b) Demonstrate that Installer has satisfactorily completed at least 2 system

installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
3 Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
4 Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through a single source
from a single manufacturer.
5 Certification
(a) All components of the fire alarm system including system hardware and
software shall be UL listed.
(b) The entire fire alarm system including integration arrangement with the BMS,
the Access Control, PAS and other Building Services Systems shall be UL
listed and suitable for life safety and fire alarm applications.
(c) Indicate type of applicable NFPA 72 certification to suit project to require

independent system verification.
(d) Delete Sub-paragraph below if NFPA certification is not required.

(e) Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a NRTL.

3.1.11. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

environmental conditions encountered at the installed location without mechanical
or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability.
2 Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any
equipment or components not functioning as designed.
3 Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless

devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.
4 Power Supply
system described below, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
standard.
3.1.12. WARRANTY
1 Special Warranty
(a) The Fire Alarm System (comprising any associated hardware and software)
shall be warranted by the Manufacturer to be free from defects in equipment,
software and workmanship for a period defined below in paragraph
“Warranty Period”.
(b) Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the

Manufacturer and the Installer agreeing to replace system devices and
equipment that fail in materials or workmanship and to provide software
patch support and updates within specified warranty period.
(c) To maintain the manufacturer’s warranties, equipment shall be installed,

commissioned and serviced by those installers authorized by said
manufacturer to perform those duties. If the Contractor is not authorized, by
the said manufacturer, it is his sole responsibility to make the appropriate
arrangements and bear all cost and consequences thereof.

(d) All manufacturers’ equipment warranties shall be activated in the Employer’s

name and shall commence on the date indicated in paragraph “Warranty
Period” below.
(a) There shall be an Experimental Period during which the Contractor shall
undertake supervision and responsibility for operation of the Fire Alarm
System under actual site conditions. If any malfunction or degradation in the
performance is noted on the system during this period, it shall be attended to
immediately.
(b) During this period, the Contractor shall fully demonstrate the system
performance under actual operation conditions. This demonstration is to
confirm, to the satisfaction of the Employer / Engineer that the Fire Alarm
System is free of remarks and is ready for taking over.
(c) The Experimental Period shall extend over one month(s) and shall start
following the certification by the Engineer of the successful testing and
commissioning of the system. The Experimental Period shall, each time a
malfunction is detected, be extended by one month(s) starting from the
certification by the Engineer of the successful testing of the system following
the rectification of the malfunction.
3 Taking Over of the System
(a) The system shall be considered ready for taking over by the Employer following:
(b) The expiry, with no malfunctions being detected during the last one month(s),
of the Experimental Period (as may be extended), and
(c) The submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer, of the
documents and information required from the Contractor for the use,
occupation and maintenance of the system in accordance with the Contract
(updated as necessary to reflect any rectification(s) introduced during the
Experimental Period).
4 Warranty Period
(a) The Contractor shall include a statement of warranty on the entire system and
on the individual pieces of equipment for three years from the date of taking
over of the system.
(b) During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall undertake Maintenance
actions as defined in the “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING
WARRANTY PERIOD” Article below.
(c) During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall provide all equipment,
material, software and labor needed to replace or repair defective products
without any additional cost to the Contract.

3.1.13. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
1 Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at system Taking Over, maintenance

service shall include full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's
designated service organization.
2 Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation.
Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and
supplies.
(a) Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies"

table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
chapter in NFPA 72.
(b) Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
(c) Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph
of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3 During the Warranty Period, Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall

maintain a service center capable of providing spare parts and emergency
maintenance and repairs for the overall system, 7 days a week and 24 hours a day.
Competent personnel shall be dispatched to rectify system failures at any time
during the day or night when being called on by the Employer.
4 The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to the Employer immediately

following every call out, indicating the time of call out visit, cause, remedial action
taken and the time that the service was restored.
5 A Maintenance Manpower Plan shall demonstrate the Contractor’s committed

resource level available for all types of activities to be carried out within the
Warranty Period. Such a plan shall be submitted for Approval six months before
commencement of the Warranty Period.
6 The Contractor’s response time, during the Warranty Period, shall not exceed 1
hour. The response time is defined as the time that elapses between the reporting
of a fault and the maintenance personnel arriving at where the faulty equipment is
located.
7 During the Warranty Period, the MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR
shall include the diagnostic time, active repair/replacement time and the
adjustment/testing time on site, but shall exclude the response time.
8 During the Warranty Period, the monthly average of the Repair Time shall be lower
than or equal to 6 minutes for each device. This performance will be monitored.
9 The Contractor shall provide at least four inspection visits at six-month interval
during the Warranty Period. The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to
be sent to the Employer immediately following every inspection visit, indicating

the time of call out visit, cause, remedial action taken – if any - and the time that
the service was restored.
10 The Contractor shall be responsible to clear away from the Site all surplus
materials, rubbish, temporary works of every kind and leave the whole of the Site
and installation clean and in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the
Employer, upon completion of each item of the repair, and maintenance works.
11 Software Service Agreement
(a) Technical Support: Beginning at Taking Over, service agreement shall

include software support for three years.
(b) Upgrade Service: At Taking Over, update software to latest version. Install
and program software upgrades that become available within two years from
date of Taking Over. Upgrading software shall include operating system and
new or revised licenses for using software.
xi. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Employer to schedule access

to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
3.1.14. SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL
2 However furnish the following extra materials, as a minimum, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents, irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation:
(a) Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of
amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.
(b) Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but
no fewer than one unit.
(c) Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than one unit of each type.
(d) Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed,
(e) Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamper-proofed
components.
(f) Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
(g) Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet
with compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.

(h) Linear heat detectors: Quantity equal to 2 of amount installed but no fewer
than 100m.
(i) Manual stations: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,
(j) Loudspeakers: Quantity equal to 2 of amount of each type installed, but no

fewer than one unit of each type.
(k) Fire fighters telephone units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each
type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.
(l) Printer paper: 10 packets.
(m) FACP LCD display screen/module: 5 percent with a minimum of one piece.
(n) Loop cards: 2 percent with a minimum of one piece.
(o) FACP power supply: 5 percent with a minimum of two.
Acceptance by the Employer.
equipment supplied.
3.2. PRODUCTS
3.2.1. MANUFACTURERS
1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
2 Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following or
approved equivalent:
(a) Honeywell (USA).

(b) Notifier (USA).
(c) Simplex (USA).
(d) Gamewell-FCI (USA).
(e) Edward –EST (USA)
(f) Approved Equal

3.2.2. SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
1 Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
systems:
(a) Manual fire alarm boxes/stations.

(b) Heat detectors.
(c) Smoke detectors.
(d) Combined detectors.
(e) Duct smoke detectors.
(f) Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
(g) Fire-extinguishing system operation.
(h) Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
(i) Fire standpipe system.
2 Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

(a) Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
(b) Identify alarm at Fire-Alarm Control Panel
(c) Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
(d) Entrance doors in case of fire from the atrium.
(e) Activate alarm communication system.
(f) Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-
alarm mode.
(g) Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-
control system panel.
(h) Activate emergency lighting control.
(i) If supplies are not essential to life safety,
(j)
(k) Record events in the system memory.
(l) Record events by the system printer.
3 Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
actions:
(a) Valve supervisory switch.

(b) Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.
4 System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices
and actions:
(a) Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
(b) Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory
signal-initiating devices.
(c) Loss of primary power at Fire-Alarm Control Panel.
(d) Ground or a single break in Fire-Alarm Control Panel internal circuits.
(e) Abnormal ac voltage at Fire-Alarm Control Panel.
(f) Break in standby battery circuitry.
(g) Failure of battery charging.
(h) Abnormal position of any switch at Fire-Alarm Control Panel or annunciator.
(i) Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
(j) Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe.

5 System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance

and annunciate at Fire-Alarm Control Panel. Record the event on system printer.
3.2.3. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS (FACP)
1 Description: FACP panel maintains the status and control of its own dedicated circuit
points.
(a) Comply with UL 864.
2 The FACP shall be an independent, local fire alarm control unit as well as being listed
as a critical component in a multiplex fire alarm system. FACPs shall be located
where shown on the Drawings.
3 The FACP shall serve as the interface between initiating fire devices, controlled
signaling devices, and each fire alarm node. The supervised multiplex
communication port shall be an integral part of the FACP.
4 Each FACP shall be powered from a local power supply, and shall provide all power
necessary for its own operation and related components, including standby power.
Contractor shall verify by calculations that the voltage drop limits on the lines feeding
the different components do not exceed the limits recommended by manufacturer,
and shall rectify wherever needed.
5 FACPs shall be used to house batteries, and power supplies to allow true distributed
processing.
3.2.4. MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
1 General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes
shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting
color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed
outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
(a) Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-
lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate
manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACP.
(b) Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
(c) Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged
at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover
actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage
false-alarm operation.
(d) Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure
hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
(e) Protective shield shall be provided in public spaces or where required by the
Client/ Engineer.

3.2.5. SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
1 General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

(a) Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
(b) Detectors shall be two-wire type.
(c) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACP.
(d) Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide
terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.
(e) Mounting: Surface or semi-recessed ceiling mounted type, located as shown
on Drawings, with head removable from fixed twist-lock base. Removal of
detector head is to interrupt supervisory circuit and cause trouble signal at
control panel. Normal flat surface coverage is to be over 100 m2 at mounting
height of 6 m.
(f) Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after
actuation to restore them to normal operation.
(g) Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has
operated and power-on status.
(h) Detector shall be addressed through soft-addressing mechanism.
(i) Circuitry for two-way communication with the FACP: Each time the detector
is polled, it is to communicate its type (ionization, optical etc.) and an
analogue/digitally-encoded value corresponding to its sensitivity and status
with microcomputer processing in the control unit.
(j) Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-
addressable type, individually monitored at FACP for calibration, sensitivity,
and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by FACP
i. Multi-sensor: Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination

smoke- and heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire alarm control
panel for 8 or 11 deg C (15 or 20 deg F) per minute.
ii. Multi-sensor: Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination
smoke- and heat-detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise
sensing and shall be settable at fire alarm control panel to operate at 57
or 68 deg C (135 or 155 deg F).
iii. Number of settable levels in fire alarm control panel varies among
manufacturers and between detector types. Indicate specific number of
levels.
iv. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
v. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.
(k) Smoke detectors installed in harsh environment shall be manufactured and
listed for use in harsh environment.
(l) Smoke detectors installed in plenum areas or above false ceiling shall be
manufactured and listed for use in such places

(m) Detectors installed in the sleeping areas shall have a sounder base.
(n) Detector address shall be accessible from Fire-Alarm Control Panel and shall
be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity
setting.
(o) An operator at Fire-Alarm Control Panel, having the designated access level,
shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:
i. Primary status.
i. Device type.
ii. Present average value.
iii. Present sensitivity selected.
iv. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
2 Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

(a) Detector address shall be accessible from FACP and shall be able to identify
the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
(b) An operator at Fire-Alarm Control Panel, having the designated access level,
i. Primary status
ii. Device type.
iii. Present average value.
iv. Present sensitivity selected.
v. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3 Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type

(a) Detector address shall be accessible from FACP and shall be able to identify
the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
(b) An operator at Fire-Alarm Control Panel, having the designated access level,
i. Primary status.
ii. Device type.
iii. Present average value.
iv. Present sensitivity selected.
v. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
(c) Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: IP 66; listed for use with the supplied
detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.
(d) Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
(e) Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer
for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
(f) Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-
control circuit.
(g) Comply with UL 268A.

3.2.6. HEAT DETECTORS
1 General Requirements for Heat Detectors:

(a) Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of
the device.
(b) Comply with UL 521.
(c) Detector shall be addressed through soft-addressing mechanism.
2 Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57

deg C (135 deg F) or a rate of rise that exceeds 8 deg C (15 deg F) per minute unless
otherwise indicated.
(a) Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
(b) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire alarm control panel.
3 Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: consisting of detector cable and control

unit
(a) Analog Type: Detector Cable: Shall be flexible in installation and recoverable
after operation. It shall have high sensitivity to small temperature variations
and shall monitor the precise point of risk. The analog sensor shall consist of
a 4-core cable. Two of the four color-coded conductors shall be insulated with
a negative temperature coefficient material. The other two conductors shall
have normal PVC insulation. The cores shall be twisted together and
protected by an outer sheath of high temperature, flame-retardant PVC
insulation. The analogue sensor senses temperature variations by
continuously monitoring the resistance such that a change in temperature
produces a relative change in resistance between the two loops within the
sensor cable.
(b) Control Panel: Microprocessor controlled that can automatically detect the
length and the ambient temperature of the attached sensor cable. The control
unit shall continuously monitor the sensor cable and shall have the following
minimum features:
i. Several programmable levels
ii. Short circuit monitoring of analog type sensor cable.
iii. Open circuit monitoring of analog and digital type sensor cable.
iv. History and event log storage that can be downloaded using a PC.
v. Relay outputs for alarms and faults.
vi. Detecting hot spots.
vii. Providing advanced notification of temperature increase.
(c) Signals to the FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the
FACP as a composite "trouble" signal.

(d) Provide Addressable Monitoring modules for monitoring the Linear Heat
Detection system Zone and provide two-way communication with FACP.
One module shall be used for each zone to report Alarm information to FACP.
3.2.7. MULTICRITERIA DETECTORS
1 Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2 Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire alarm control panel.
3 Automatically adjusts its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing

algorithms. The detector shall send trouble alarm if it is incapable of compensating
for existing conditions.
4 Test button tests all sensors in the detector.
5 An operator at fire alarm control panel, having the designated access level, shall be
able to manually access the following for each detector:
(a) Primary status.
(b) Device type.
(c) Present sensitivity selected.
(d) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
6 Sensors: The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements including a smoke
sensor, a carbon monoxide sensor, an infrared sensor, and a heat sensor.
(a) Smoke sensor shall be photoelectric type as described in "System Smoke
Detectors" Article.
(b) Carbon monoxide sensor shall be as described in "Carbon Monoxide
Detectors" Article.
(c) Heat sensor shall be as described in "Heat Detectors" Article.
(d) Each sensor shall be separately listed according to requirements for its
detector type.
3.2.8. FLAME DETECTORS (INFRA-RED)
1 The infra-red flame detectors shall be capable of detecting infra-red radiation

produced by flaming fires involving carbonaceous materials.
2 The infra-red flame detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention
Council Board (LPCB) and manufactured under the appropriate category by the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “UL.” label.
3 The infra-red flame shall be able to detect a fuel fire of 0.1 m2 area from a
distance of 30 m for the following fuels:

(a) petrol
(b) N-heptane
(c) kerosene
(d) diesel Oil
(e) alcohol
(f) ethylene glycol
4 The infra-red flame detectors shall employ narrow band optical filters that block
unwanted radiation such as that emanating from the sun or tungsten filament
lamps.
5 The infra-red flame detectors shall be designed to be sensitive to modulation of the

received radiation in a small range of frequencies corresponding to the flicker of
flames.
6 The infra-red flame detectors shall be designed to have high resistance to

contamination and corrosion.
7 The electronic assembly of the infra-red flame detectors shall be encapsulated in

high resistivity epoxy resin.
8 The infra-red flame smoke detectors shall include RFI screening and feed through
connecting components to minimize the effect of radiated and conducted electrical
interference.
9 The system may include, but not be limited to, the following version of infra-red
flame detectors to meet different applications:
(a) analogue addressable -intrinsically safe
(b) conventional -intrinsically safe
10 The intrinsically safe versions of the infra-red flame detectors shall be suitable for
use with safe area circuits.
11 The infra-red flame detector shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the
outside, to provide indication of alarm actuation.
3.2.9. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
1 General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification

appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and
with screw terminals for system connections.
(a) Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a
single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with
screw terminals for system connections.

2 Areas with an average ambient sound level greater than 105 dBA shall require the
use of a visible notification appliances in accordance with NFPA 72.
3 The total sound pressure level produced by combining the ambient sound pressure
level with all audible notification appliances operating shall not exceed 110 dBA at
the minimum hearing distance.
4 Notification appliances shall be listed for the purpose for which they are used.
5 Appliances intended for use in special environments, such as outdoors versus

indoors, high or low temperatures, high humidity, dusty conditions, and hazardous
locations, or where subject to tampering, shall be listed for the intended application.
6 Audible appliances shall provide a sound level of at least 15 dB above the average
ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at
least 60 seconds or a sound level of at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured
at 1.5 m above the floor in all the areas,.
7 Chimes/Bells, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 94-dBA minimum rated output at

three meter.
8 Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of
90 dBA, measured 3 m (10 feet) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in
UL 464 test protocol.
(a) Comply with UL 464.
9 Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with
clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The
word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens
(a) Rated Light Output:
i. 15 cd.
ii. 30 cd.
iii. 75 cd.
i. 110 cd
(b) Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of
the specific strobe.
(c) Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
(d) For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall
be determined with guards in place.
(e) Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
(f) Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
(g) Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.
10 Combined chimes/horns and visible notification appliances: have the same features
the chimes/horns and visible strobe appliances listed earlier.

3.2.10. SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY
1 Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from Project AC mains power supply service and a
power-supply module in the FACP. Initiating devices, notification appliances,
signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals and digital alarm communicator
transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
(a) Alarm current draw of entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 50 percent of
the power-supply module rating.
2 Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger,
and automatic transfer switch in the FACP.
(a) Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
(b) Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type.
Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while
maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the
charger recharges them completely within 4 hours. Charger output is
supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
(c) Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without
loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails.
(d) Capacity: 24 hours under standby and 1/2 hour under full alarm load
conditions at the end of the 24 hours.
(e) Amend sub-paragraph below to suit Project.
(f) Magnetic door holders shall not be served by emergency power. Magnetic
door holders shall be released when normal power fails.
3 Remote power supply for devices is not recommended. However, if provided under
inevitable circumstances, the remote power supply shall be fully supervised by the
control panel and backed-up by battery as part of system power supply supervision.
3.2.11. ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
1 General:
(a) Include address-setting means on the module.
(b) Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module
type.
(c) Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.
2 Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-

initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
3 Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate

elevator recall & to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.
(a) Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.

(b) Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts
available for field wiring.
4 Control Module:
(a) Operate notification devices.
(b) Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.
(c) The control module NAC shall be wired for Style Z (Class A). Audio/visual
power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main
fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote power supply.
3.2.12. DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER (DACT)
1 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central

station.
2 Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal

from fire alarm control panel and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and
dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central
station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for
longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit
the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over
the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service
restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter
shall initiate the local trouble signal.
3 Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall
include the following:
(a) Verification that both telephone lines are available.
(b) Programming device.
(c) LED display.
(d) Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
(e) Communications failure with the central station or fire alarm control panel.
4 Digital data transmission shall include the following:

(a) Address of the alarm-initiating device.
(b) Address of the supervisory signal.
(c) Address of the trouble-initiating device.
(d) Loss of ac supply.
(e) Loss of power.
(f) Low battery.
(g) Abnormal test signal.
(h) Communication bus failure.

5 Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.
6 Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central

station.
7 Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall comply with UL 632.
3.2.13. DEVICE GUARDS
1 Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke
detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.
(a) Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.
(b) Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
3.2.14. WIRE AND CABLE
1 Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and the following Specifications

Sections – as applicable to power, control and data signal transmission cables:
(a) Section 21 - Part 6 “Cables and Small Wiring”
(b) Section 21 - Part 22 "Earthing and Bonding"
(c) Section 21 - Part 14 “ Structured Cabling Network”
2 Fire Resistant Cables: As per adopted Standards for the Project for life safety
installations. Refer to Section 21 – Part 6 “Cables and Small Wiring”
(a) Use Fire-resistant cables Type FR4
3 Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Section 21 – Part 22

"Earthing and Bonding"
4 It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the connected loads and provide
the proper section of wires to compensate for voltage drops and ensure the proper
components’ operation.
3.3. EXECUTION
3.3.1. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1 Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.
2 Manual Stations: Mount semi flush in recessed back boxes.
3 The center point of a manual pull station should be mounted at 1200mm from floor
level.

4 Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler
valve station required to be supervised.
5 Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 100 mm from a sidewall to the
near edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of
joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 9 m apart in any direction.
6 Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 100 mm, but not more than 300 mm,
below the ceiling.
7 Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Locate detectors not closer than 910 mm (36
inches) from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.
8 The selection and placement of smoke detectors shall take into account the
performance characteristics of the detector and the characteristics of areas into
which the detectors are to be installed to prevent nuisance alarms or improper
operation after installation. Smoke detectors shall not be installed in areas where
air velocity is greater than 1.5m/sec, and shall not be located in a direct airflow. If
siting of detectors in such areas is unavoidable, use detectors specifically designed
for use in such conditions.
9 Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

(a) Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity,
temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
(b) Install sampling tubes so that they extend the full width of the duct.
10 Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with

sprinkler rating and location. Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator
shafts.
11 Audible Alarm Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install
bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location
into a single unit.
12 Visible Alarm Devices: Install at least 150 mm below the ceiling.
13 Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they
monitor.
14 FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor.
15 Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor.
16 The center point of a fire fighter telephone should be mounted at 1200mm from floor
level.

3.3.2. WIRING INSTALLATION
1 Conceal fire alarm system wiring in raceway.

(a) Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire
alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system.
(b) Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control
wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire
or cable.
2 Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited

conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with
or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are
terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm
system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
3 Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes,
cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
4 Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors in red differently from the normal
building power wiring. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
5 No joints are allowed in the fire alarm cabling.
6 Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system.
Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall,
so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from
other floors or zones.
3.3.3. IDENTIFICATION
1 Install framed instructions and zone layout in a location visible from the FACP.
2 Paint power-supply disconnects switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3 Fire alarm zone numbering scheme shall be in numbers not letters reflecting the
floor number.
3.3.4. CONNECTIONS
1 Coordinate installation and specialty arrangements with Drawings and with

requirements specified in related Sections. If Drawings are explicit enough, these
requirements may be reduced or omitted.
2 For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to
doors in smoke partitions. Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

(a) Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm
system in this Section before making connections.
3 Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following

devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the
device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such
feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.
(a) Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management)
at firefighter smoke-control system panel.
(b) Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and shaft pressurization systems.
(c) Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.
(d) Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel
supplies.
(e) Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
(f) Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler
system.
(g) Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase
or phase-reversal condition.
(h) Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
3.3.5. IDENTIFICATION
1 Install framed instructions in a location visible from Fire-Alarm Control Panel.
3.3.6. GROUNDING
1 Ground Fire-Alarm Control Panel and associated circuits. Install a ground wire
from main service ground to Fire-Alarm Control Panel.
2 Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written

instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent
possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other
impairments.
3.3.7. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1 Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory trained and authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and connections and to
supervise installation, pre-testing, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report
results in writing.
2 Pre-testing: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform
complete pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the compliance of the system
with requirements of the Drawings and Specification. Correct deficiencies observed

in pre-testing. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest
until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for
systematic recording of acceptance test results.
3 Report of Pre-testing: After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the

installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of
witnesses to preliminary tests.
4 Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system
is ready for final acceptance testing.
5 Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA
72. Minimum required tests are as follows:
(a) Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and
ground.
(b) Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
(c) With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure
the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each
circuit on Record (As-Built) Drawings.
(d) Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the
manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.
(e) Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under
open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less
than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal
transmission according to class of wiring used.
(f) Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper
response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of
combustion.
(g) Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved
operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified
functional performance items at each station, including making all possible
alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For
each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected
by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays,
signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing,
clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.
(h) Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary
power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the
manner specified.
6 Re-testing: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest works

affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets
specified requirements and complies with applicable standards.

7 Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and
detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory
completion of tests.
8 Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been
satisfactorily completed.
9 Contractor shall be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged

equipment/accessories, if any, which are part of existing, while connecting to
existing system.
10 Experimental Period: as described under “WARRANTY” Article. Demonstrate

successful operation to confirm, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that the system
is free of remarks and is ready for taking-over.
3.3.8. CLEANING
1 Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up
scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using
methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.3.9. OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS
1 When requested within 12 months of date of Taking Over, provide on-site assistance
in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project site during other than normal
occupancy hours for this purpose. Visits for this purpose shall be in addition to any
required by warranty.
3.3.10. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1 Engage a factory-authorized and trained service representative to train the

Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for operating,
adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing system. Training shall be provided for a
minimum of 3 levels of maintenance staff; engineer, supervisor and technician.
2 Training shall also be provided for fire service personnel: supervisors.
3 Each category of trainees shall be provided with training for a minimum period of 6
hours per day for 3 days and shall include all personnel on the rolls who are required
to operate and maintain this system.
4 Training manuals and technology training for all systems shall be in English only,
except for operator’s familiarization training, which shall be provided in English
and Arabic.

5 Demonstrate full functionality of the system as specified to the acceptance of the

Engineer, Employer, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
END OF PART 3

SECTION 24
FINISHES TO BUILDINGS
General:
PART 2 - LATH AND PLASTER
2.11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
2.11.1 Materials and Mixes
1 Plastering Mix: aerated plaster for general use comprising:
(a) Ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1, Type I

(b) Sand to BS EN 13139, Table 1 or ASTM C 897
(c) Cement-sand proportions shall be adjusted to give compressive strength not
less than 5 1 N/ mm2
(d) Plasticiser to BS EN 934-3and to approval, to be used with cement-sand
mix in proportions recommended by manufacturer.
Man: Fosroc
Ref: Nitobond SBR
Man: Master Builders Technologies
Ref: Rheomix 141
Or other equal and approved.
PART 4 - SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
4.1 NATURAL STONE CLADDING
1 For Material types, Thicknesses, Finish and Pattern, refer to Drawings, Finish
Manuals and Legends.
FINISHES TO BUILDINGS S24 - Page 1 of 6

4.1.2 MATERIALS
1 Marble Slabs and Fittings: approved natural marble slabs to ASTM C503 with
finish indicated on the Drawings.
2 Limestone
(a) Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568
(i) Classification: III High Density

4.1.3 CEMENT BOARD
1 Where indicated, shall conform to ANSI A118.9.
4.1.4 SILICONE-BASED WATER REPELLENT
1 Solvent based clear impregnating liquid to BS 6477 based on silane / siloxane

polymers.
Man: Tremco Incorporated

Ref: Tretoshield
Man: Weber & Broutin
4.1.5 FIXINGS AND ACCESSORIES
1 Fixings: stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

2 Metal Ties
3 Stainless-Steel Sheet to ASTM A 666, type 316.
Man: ABL Industrie (FR)

Man: Artur Fischer
Man: Hilti
PART 5 - TILES
5.4 TILE ADHESIVES
5.3.1 Adhesives
1 To ANSI A118.4 or BS EN 12004 incorporating SBR latex.
5.3.5 Floor Tiles
1 Ceramic floor tiles and fittings: to BS EN 14411, with water absorption E < 3%.
Man: Villeroy & Boch

Man: Agrob Buchtal Ceramics
Man: Marazzi

Gewan Island PK2 – Infrastructure Works
PART 7 - STONE
7.2 MATERIALS
7.2.1 Threshold:
1 Marble thresholds and saddles, where indicated as per ASTM C503.

2 Steel saddles, where indicated.
Man.: Bellinzoni.EU
7.2.2 Countertops:
1 Granite: Unless otherwise indicated, 20 mm thick polished granite countertop with

mitered edge as specified in drawings.
a. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615.
PART 9 - FLOOR SCREEDS AND TREATMENTS
9.2.3 Cement-Sand Screed: To BS EN 12620
PART 13 - OTHER FLOOR COVERINGS
13.4 VINYL FLOORING
13.4.1 Static-Conductive, Solid Vinyl Tiles
1 Thickness: Not less than 2.0 mm unless otherwise indicated.
2 Seaming Method: Heat welded or as per manufacturer’s standard method.
3 To ASTM F 1700
Man:AB ElectroStatic, a division of American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.;

Electrotile Static- Dissipative (STD).
Man: Flexco; Static Dissipative Solid Vinyl Tile.
Man: Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Colorex SD Static Dissipative Vinyl Tile.
Man: 3M Specified Construction Products Division; Dissipative Vinyl Floor
Tile.

13.4.3 Adhesives and Compounds
1. Adhesives, Primers, Levelling Compounds, Sealers and Polish
2. Welding Rod.

13.4.3 Concrete Paving Slabs And Fittings
1. Interlocking Concrete Pavers
13.6 EPOXY TOPPING
1 Description: single component, high traffic, pedestrian grade anti-slip coating,

resists oil, gasoline, acids, caustics, and most solvents.
Man: PPG Protective & Marine Coatings

Reference: AMERCOAT, PPG CO.
PART 14 - CEILING
14.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
1 Systems are to be fully integrated with the mechanical and electrical installations,
including the provision of additional hangers, framing etc. and are to be supplied
complete with manufacturers' standard edge trims, accessories, connectors, fixing
clips and fixings.
14.2 MATERIALS
1 Mineral Fibreboard:
Man: SAS International

Man: Armstrong World Industries
Man: Celotex Corporation
2 Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum plasterboard with water repellent

additives in the core and paper liners.
Thickness: 12.5 mm, as indicated
3 Gypsum Board: Plasterboard consists of an aerated gypsum core encased in, and
firmly bonded to, strong paper liners.
PART 17. RAISED ACCESS FLOORS
17.1 FLOORING
17.1.1 Raised Access Floors: Where indicated, access flooring with cementitious filled
steel panels.

SECTION 25
GLASS AND GLAZING
General:
PART 1 – GENERAL
1 Structural Load:
Wind Performance:
Applicable Standard QCS 2014-ASCE 7- 05

Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph
Exposure Type: D
Seismic Performance:
Applicable Standard QCS 2014-ASCE 7-10

Site Class: C
Seismic Design Criteria: Ss = 0.09g, S1 = 0.045g
1.1.6 Sustainable Requirements
1 U-value of the assembly glazing with frame : 1.9 w/m2.K.

2 Shading Co-efficiency of the glass assembly : 0.28.
GLASS AND GLAZING S25 - Page 1 of 2

PART 2 - GLASS
2.1 GENERAL GLASS TYPES AND GLAZING
2.2.3 Insulating Glass
1 Insulating Glass Units Type A: to BS 5713, factory made, hermetically sealed,

double glazed units. Low-E fully tempered laminated clear outer pane, and fully
tempered clear inner pane.
(a) Outer Pane:

Kind : FT (fully tempered)
(b) Inner Pane:
Kind : FT (fully tempered) laminated.
2 Structural Silicone Sealant: Neutral-cure silicone sealants. Use sealant type

complying with ASTM C 1184 requirements.
Man: PPG http://www.ppg.com

Ref: Solarban 70XL
Man: Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford
Man: Saint Gobain
2.3 WARRANTY PERIOD
1 Warranty Period for Insulating Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial

Completion.
GLASS AND GLAZING S25 - Page 2 of 2

SECTION 26
PAINTING AND DECORATING
of QCS 2014 (Qatar Construction Specification), or are additional clauses, as appropriate.
PART 3- PRIMERS, PAINTS AND COATINGS
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1.3 Approved Manufacturers
1 Manufacturer: coating materials are to be approved brands and obtained from one
approved manufacturer unless otherwise specified. Inform the Engineer of
proposed manufacturer at an early date.
Man: Hempel Paints [http://www.hempel.com/]

Man: Jotun AS [http://www.jotun.com/]
Man: PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints
[http://www.ppg.com/ppgaf/pittsburgh/index.htm]
Man: The Sherwin-Williams Company [http://www.sherwin-williams.com/]
Man: LA Seigneurie http://www.seigneurie.tm.fr/
Man: Dulux Trade http://www.duluxtrade.co.uk
3.3 PRIMERS AND UNDERCOATINGS
3.3.1 Materials
1 General: Unless otherwise referenced, all paint and stain materials for painting
work shall conform to the applicable requirements of BS 6150:2006.
2 Corrosion protection of steel by protective paint system shall be to BS EN ISO

12944- 1 to 8.
3 Undercoat Materials: Undercoat and finishing paints shall be to BS 7664
3.4 PAINTS AND FINISH COATINGS
3.4.1 Materials
1 Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: exterior acrylic resin based emulsion to produce a

durable, flexible and water-resistant coating suitable for repeated washing and
PAINTING AND DECORATING S26 - Page 1 of 2

scrubbing. The white pigment shall consist of titanium dioxide Rutile to ASTM D
476, Type IV.
2 Alkyd Gloss Enamel: The white pigment shall consist of titanium dioxide to
ASTM D 476 Types III or IV. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive further
coatings. Finish is to be high gloss as selected by the Engineer.
3 Interior Acrylic Emulsion: Interior acrylic resin based emulsion to produce a

durable, Satin, flexible and water-resistant coating suitable for repeated washing
and scrubbing. The white pigment shall consist of titanium dioxide Rutile to
ASTM D 476, Type IV.
4 High Performance Architectural Latex - Semi-Gloss, over Concrete and Plaster

substrates.
5 Polyurethane Coating: Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented.

6 VOC content: Low VOC content
7 Resinous flooring: Where indicated, provide the following coating system:
(a) System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the
following minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to test methods
indicated:
i. Compressive Strength: 68 mPa per ASTM C 579.

ii. Tensile Strength: 12 mPa per ASTM C 307.
iii. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 27 mPa per ASTM C 580.
iv. Water Absorption: 0.2% per ASTM C 413.
v. Impact Resistance: No chipping, cracking, or delamination and not
more than 1.6-mm
vi. Permanent indentation per MIL-D-3134.
vii. Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No slip or flow of more than 1.6
mm per MIL-D-3134.
viii. Abrasion Resistance: 0.09g maximum weight loss per ASTM D 4060.
ix. Flammability: Self-extinguishing per ASTM D 635.
x. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater per NFPA 253.
xi. Hardness: 0.45W/sq cm, Shore D per ASTM D 2240.
PAINTING AND DECORATING S26 - Page 2 of 2

SECTION 27
EXTERNAL WORKS
The following clauses amend or replace the corresponding referenced clauses in section 27
of QSC 2014 (Qatar Construction Specification), or are additional clauses, as appropriate.
PART 2 – BLOCK PAVED AREAS
For this section, the following sub-parts are to be added to section in QCS 2014 - Section
27
2.1 GENERAL
Add clauses as follows:
4 Bedding requirements for paved surfaces shall be in accordance with:
(a) QCS 2014Section 6 Part 3 “Earthworks” for the subgrade layer,

(b) QCS 2014 Section 6 Part 4 “Unbound Pavement Materials” for the Aggregate
base course layer,
(c) QCS 2014 Section 6 Part 6 “Concrete Road Pavement” for the cement-bound
courses (CBM3) layer.
SYSTEM PERFOMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. It is required that stone paving flooring remain permanently bonded, perform under
long term heavy duty service exposure, and not deteriorate including crack, break,
disintegrate, discolor or change appearance due to movement from range of
temperature or moisture exposure at project site, natural light exposure or
Employer's service use exposure including construction, dynamic and impact
loading. Failure of the installation to comply with these requirements will be
considered a failure of materials and/or workmanship.
a) Mockups for each form and pattern of paver.
For this section, the following sub-part is to be omitted from QCS 2014 - Section 27
EXTERNAL WORKS S27 - Page 1 of 27

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-LS-01 REV 0
Omit items as follows:
2.4 CLAY PAVING BLOCKS
27
2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE FLAGS
2.2.4 Material
Precast concrete paving flags 200x200x80 mm, grey color, shall comply with BS EN 1341
and BS 7533 standards
27
2.5 GRANITE PAVING BLOCKS
2.5.1 Material
9 Stone Pavers: paving slabs made from granite with thermal, highly slip
resistant,
rough textured surface finish.
10 Edge Restraints: Job-built concrete.
11 Grout: prepackaged, sanded high-performance cement grout.
12 Types and Colors :
1. Granite tiles 400x400x60 mm for pedestrian, beige color, honed finish

manufactured and laid to BS EN 1341 and BS 7533 standards, refer to
landscape drawings and material schedule
3. Granite tiles 100x100x60 mm for pedestrian, grey color, honed finish
manufactured and laid to BS EN 1341 and BS 7533 standards. The joint
width shall be 6-10 mm wide laid according to BS 7533, refer to


5. Granite bands 300x300x60 mm for pedestrian, dark grey color, honed
finish manufactured and laid to BS EN 1341 and BS 7533 standards, refer
to landscape drawings and material schedule
6. Granite pavers 80x160x80 mm for vehicular parallel parking and building
entrances, brick color, honed finish manufactured and laid to BS EN 1342
and BS 7533 standards. The joint width shall range from 8 mm to 12 mm
and the jointing material shall satisfy the requirements of BS 7533
standards, refer to landscape drawings and material schedule
7. Natural stone granite sets 150x150x180 mm for vehicular road, grey
color, honed finish conforming to BS EN 1342 with a minimum flexural
strength of 12 MPa. Laid according to BS 7533 part 4 and part 7 standard
requirements. The joint width shall be minimum 10 mm to 15 mm with
minimum compressive cylinder strength of 32 MPa. refer to landscape
drawings and material schedule
13 Cut stone to fit stone pattern as indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Produce
units to minimize field cutting for thickness, face sizes, and within fabrication
tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone
source.
1. Thickness of Stone Paving and Flooring: Provide thickness indicated, but not less
than the following: a. Nominal Thickness : 8 0 mm or thicker per Structural Engineers
recommendation.
2. Stone Edges: As follows:
a. Square.
b. Cut stone to produce joints of uniform width and in locations
indicated.
c. Joint Width: 3 mm
14. Sizes: As shown on drawings with tolerances as follows:
1. Face Dimensions: Plus or minus 1.5 mm.
2. Thickness: Plus or minus 1.5 mm.
3. Squareness: Plus or minus 1.5 mm.
4. Flatness Along Any Edge: Plus or minus 1.5 percent.
15 Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in
place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units
match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in
approved samples and mockups.
16 Suppliers: As scheduled in Material Finish Schedule. Identical materials matching
Engineer's samples and which comply with specified requirements will be
considered if acceptable to Engineer.
1. Stone paver from suppliers other than listed in Material Finish Schedule must
be prequalified prior to submitting bid proposal.

27
2.6 INSTALLATION OF PAVING BLOCKS
9 Joint Pattern As indicated on drawings.

10 Aggregate Setting Bed:
1) Thick aggregate base course over compacted subgrade.
2) Leveling course of 25 to 38 mm, treated with herbicide.
3) Pavers set with 1.5- to 3-mm sand-filled joints.
10 Laying course:
12 40mm laying course satisfying the requirement of BS7533 standards.
27
2.7 PLAYGROUNDS, PARKS AND OTHER AREAS
2.7.2 Material:
1. Stone pavement:
a. Limestone pavement 600x600x50 mm for pedestrian, beige color manufactured

and laid to BS EN 1341 and BS 7533 standards, refer to landscape drawings
b. Limestone cladding for stairs, light cream color, honed finish refer to landscape
drawings
c. Marble tiles 600x600x50 mm for pedestrian, white color manufactured and laid
to BS EN 1341 and BS 7533 standards, refer to landscape drawings
2. Playground protective surfacing:
a. Wet pour in-situ rubber, rubber surfacing material for play areas, 150 mm thick
of EPDM/SBR wearing course, on 150 mm thick concrete layer on a
geotextile sheeting (polyethylene sheeting) over 150 mm crushed aggregate
base course compacted over subgrade, as per drawing. Surface preparation,
protective measures to avoid damage to base of finish application & site
cleaning, Including required subgrade preparation along with required
excavation or backfill with approved site material

b. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
c. Definitions:
I. Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation. According to

CPSC No. 325, this means "the fall height below which a life-threatening
head injury would not be expected to occur."
II. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber
d. Performance requirements:
i. Impact Attenuation: According to ASTM F 1292.
ii. Accessibility of Surface Systems: According to ASTM F 1951.
iii. Minimum Characteristics for Organic Loose-Fill Surfaces: According

to ASTM F 2075.
e. Informational submittals:
I. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
Installers of the items involved:
a. Extent of surface systems and use zones for equipment.

b. Critical heights for playground surfaces and fall heights for
equipment.
IV. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.
VI. Material Certificates: For each type of loose-fill playground surface

system, from manufacturer.
VII. Material Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests

performed by a qualified testing agency, for each loose-fill playground
surface system.
IX. Product Certificates: For each type of synthetic playground surface

system, from manufacturer.
X. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests

performed by a qualified testing agency, for each synthetic playground
surface system.
XII. Field quality-control reports.
XIII. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

f.Warranty:
I. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of playground surface system that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
i. Reduction in impact attenuation.

ii. Deterioration of surface and other materials beyond normal weathering.
b. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
27
2.8 SPORTS ACTIVITY PLAYING SURFACES
2.8.1 Material:
1. Direct fluid-applied flooring for exterior Tennis Court:
a. Description: Fluid-applied athletic flooring system consisting of primer and aliphatic

polyurethane body and top coats applied directly to substrate refer to landscape
drawings
b. Materials:
i. Primer: Manufacturer's primer recommended

for substrate indicated.
ii. Body Coat(s): Two-component, self-leveling,
pigmented, polyurethane containing no rubber
fillers and no mercury.
iii. Topcoat (Finish Coat): Manufacturer's
standard pigmented aliphatic polyurethane
with UV resistance.
c. Finishes:
i. Color: As selected by Engineer from

manufacturer's full range
ii. Surface Texture: Manufacturer's standard.

27
2.9 NATURAL STONE CLADDING AND COPPING

As specified in section 24 finishes to building
2.10 KERBS AND EDGING
1. Kerbs and edging requirements shall be in accordance with QCS 2014 Section
6, Part 11 “Kerbs Footways and Paved Areas”.
PART 3 – FENCES AND GATES
For this section, the following sub-parts are to be added/ modified to section in QCS 2014
- Section 27
3.2 FENCES
3.2.3 Ornamental Metal Fences
2. Bow top railing fencing for playground as per manufactured Wicksteed or

similarly approved. The fencing is supplied galvanised and painted yellow as
standard to highlight entry exit point. Other colors are available upon request.
3.2.8 Tennis Court Fencing
1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
a) Delegated Design: Design chain-link fences and gates, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.

b) Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand the
effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated according to local requirement (check ST)
(a) Minimum Post Size: Determine according to ASTM F 1043 for framework
up to 3.66 m high, and post spacing not to exceed 3 m.
(b) Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to
CLFMI WLG 2445, based on mesh size and pattern specified and on the
following:
a. Wind Loads: 38m/s according to QCS 2014.

b. Exposure Category: D.
c. Fence Height: [3 m] <Insert dimension>.
d. Material Group: [IA, ASTM F 1043, Schedule 40 steel pipe] [IC,
electric-resistance-welded round steel pipe] <Insert group>.
c) Lightning Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms

under normal dry conditions.
2. ACTION SUBMITTALS
a) Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes for chain-link fences and gates.
(a) Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.

(b) Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
(c) Accessories: Privacy slats
(d) Gates and hardware.
(e) Gate operators, including operating instructions.
(f) Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting
arrangements.
b) Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to

other work. Show accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational
clearances.
(a) Gate Operator: Show locations and details for installing operator
components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical
characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.
(b) Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
c) Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
d) Samples for Verification: Prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
(a) Polymer-Coated Components: In 150-mm lengths for components and on

full-sized units for accessories.

e) Delegated-Design Submittal: For chain-link fences and gate framework indicated

to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
a) Qualification Data: For qualified Testing agency or factory-authorized service

representative.
b) Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence, operator, and gate, from
manufacturer.
c) Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.
d) Field quality-control reports.
e) Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
4. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
a) Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals:
(a) Polymer finishes.

(b) Gate hardware.
(c) Gate operator.
5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
a) Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing fence grounding. Member company of

NETA or an NRTL.
(a) Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise

on-site testing.
b) Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
(a) Comply with NEMA MG1.

(b) Comply with IEC 60034, IEC 60072, and IEC 60529.
c) Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for gates with automatic gate operators serving as a required means of
access.
d) Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
(a) Include 3 m length of fence and gate.

e) Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
(a) Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, equipment bases, and other
preparatory workspecified elsewhere.
(b) Review sequence of operation for each type of gate operator.
(c) Review coordination of interlocked equipment specified in this Section and
elsewhere.
(d) Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
f) Installer to be approved by Dubai Municipality.
6. PROJECT CONDITIONS
a) Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates
shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify
dimensions by field measurements.
7. WARRANTY
a) Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
(a) Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of gate operators and controls.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
c. Verify available warranties and warranty periods for units and
components and insert number below.
(b) Warranty Period: from date of installation, execution and ten years from date
of taking over.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
a) General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of
outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and
with requirements indicated below:
(a) Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings.

(b) Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 3.76 mm
a. Polymer-Coated Fabric: ASTM F 668, Class 2a over aluminum coated
steel wire.

1) Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range

complying with ASTM F 934.
b. Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving
process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.
(c) Aluminum Wire Fabric: ASTM F 1183, with mill finish, and wire diameter
of 3.76 mm.
a. Mesh Size: 50 mm
2. FENCE FRAMING
a) Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces,
and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions
and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 based on the
following:
(a) Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings

(b) Light Industrial Strength: refer to the performance requirements clause Line
Post: 48 mm in diameter.Heavy Industrial Strength: Material Group IA,
round steel pipe, Schedule 40
a. Line Post: 48 mm in diameter

b. End, Corner and Pull Post: 60 mm in diameter
(d) Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate rails complying with

ASTM F 1043.
a. Top Rail: 42 mm in diameter.
(e) Brace Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043.

(f) Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:
a. Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 0.61-kg/sq. m average

zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 1.22-kg/sq. m zinc coating
per ASTM A 653/A 653M.
b. Type B, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.27
kg/sq. m of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a
clear, verifiable polymer film.
c. External, Type B, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum
of 0.27 kg/sq. m of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating,
and a clear, verifiable polymer film. Internal, Type D, consisting of 81
percent, not less than 0.0076-mm- thick, zinc-pigmented coating.
d. Type C, Zn-5-Al-MM alloy, consisting of not less than 0.55-kg/sq. m
coating.
e. Coatings: Any coating above.

(g) Polymer coating over metallic coating.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range,

complying with ASTM F 934.
3. TENSION WIRE
a) Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 4.5-mm- diameter, marcelled tension wire complying

with ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating:
(a) Type I, aluminum coated aluminized.

(b) Type II, zinc coated galvanized by hot-dip process, with the following
minimum coating weight:
a. Class 4: Not less than 366 g/sq. m of uncoated wire surface.
b. Matching chain-link fabric coating weight.
(c) Type III, Zn-5-Al-MM alloy with the following minimum coating weight:
a. Matching chain-link fabric coating weight.
b) Polymer-Coated Steel Wire: 4.5-mm diameter, tension wire complying with

ASTM F 1664, Class 1 over aluminum-coated steel wire.
(a) Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range, complying

with ASTM F 934.
c) Aluminum Wire: 4.88-mm- diameter tension wire, mill finished, complying with
ASTM B211M, Alloy 6061-T94 with 344-MPa minimum tensile strength.
4. SWING GATES
a) General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and swing gate types
(a) Gate Leaf Width: As indicated

(b) Gate Fabric Height: As indicated
b) Pipe and Tubing:
(a) Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083;
protective coating and finish to match fence framing
(b) Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 429/B 429M; mill
(c) Gate Posts: Round tubular steel
(d) Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel
c) Frame Corner Construction: assembled with corner fittings.
d) Hardware:
(a) Hinges: 180-degree inward swing.

(b) Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for
padlocking accessible from both sides of gate.

(c) Padlock and Chain: Insert requirements for padlocks and chains if not
Employer furnished.
(d) Lock: Manufacturer's standard internal device furnished in lieu of gate latch.
(e) Closer: Manufacturer's standard.
5. FITTINGS
a) General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
b) Post Caps: Provide for each post.
(a) Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.
c) Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
d) Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
(a) Top Rail Sleeves: Aluminum Alloy 6063 not less than 152 mm long.
(b) Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate
and bottom rails in the fence line-to-line posts.
e) Tension and Brace Bands: Aluminum Alloy 6063.
f) Tension Bars: Aluminum, length not less than 50 mm shorter than full height of
chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each
corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.
g) Finish:
(a) Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 366 g /sq. m
zinc.
a. Polymer coating over metallic coating.
(b) Aluminum: Mill finish.
6. PRIVACY SLATS
a) Material: PVC, UV-light stabilized, flame resistant, four ply, not less than 0.15 mm
thick; attached to not less than 1.21-mm- diameter, twisted galvanized wire;
hedge-type lattice; sized to fit mesh specified for direction indicated.
b) Material: Polyethylene tubular slats, not less than 0.58 mm thick, manufactured for
chain-link fences from virgin polyethylene containing UV inhibitor, sized to fit
mesh specified for direction indicated; with vandal-resistant fasteners and lock
strips.
c) Material: Fiber-glass-reinforced plastic, UV-light stabilized, not less than 1.5 mm

thick, sized to fit mesh specified for direction indicated; with vandal-resistant
fasteners and lock strips.

d) Material: Aluminum, not less than 0.25 mm thick, sized to fit mesh specified for
direction indicated.
e) Material: Redwood, 7.9 mm thick, sized to fit mesh specified for direction
indicated.
f) Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
7. GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
a) Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout,
recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
b) Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining,

hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water
at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.
Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without
needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in
writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. EXAMINATION
a) Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for a verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site
clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Works.
(a) Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise
permitted by Engineer.
b) Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. PREPARATION
a) Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of
152.5 m or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn
sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
a) Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent
requirements indicated.
(a) Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.

4. CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
a) Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings
indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.
b) Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
(a) Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing,
and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
(b) Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from
concrete splatter.
a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 50 mm above grade; shape and smooth to

shed water.
b. Concealed Concrete: Top 50 mm below grade as indicated on
Drawings to allow covering with surface material.
c. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and
anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water
away from post.
d. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than
125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose
material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete
with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to
drain water away from post.
(c) Mechanically Driven Posts: Drive into soil to depth of 914 mm .Protect post
top to prevent distortion.
c) Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and
terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment as indicated on
Drawings Revise first paragraph below for unusual load conditions. Posts are
usually spaced 10 feet (3 m) o.c.
d) Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 3 m o.c.
e) Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567,

maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Diagonally brace terminal
posts to adjacent line posts with truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end
and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.
(a) Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric 1830 mm or higher, on fences

with top rail and at two-third fabric height on fences without top rail. Install
so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.

f) Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and
alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire
with 3.05-mm- diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire,
spaced a maximum of 610 mm o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before
stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations:
(a) Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric. Install top tension wire
through post cap loops. Install bottom tension wire within 152 mm of bottom
of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of
wire.
g) Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and
alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to
radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps
fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as
recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.
h) Intermediate and Bottom Rails: Install and secure to posts with fittings.
i) Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside, inside of enclosing framework. Leave

50 mm between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise
indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to
framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
j) Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull,
and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 380 mm o.c.
k) Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails.
Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of
180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends
of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.
(a) Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 300 mm o.c. and to braces at
610 mm o.c.
l) Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence
opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of
nuts.
m) Privacy Slats: Install slats in direction indicated, securely locked in place.
5. GATE INSTALLATION
a) Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and

secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach
hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in
concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where
necessary.

6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
7. ADJUSTING
a) Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp,
excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or
malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks
engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
b) Lubricate hardwareand other moving parts.
8. DEMONSTRATION
a) Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link fences and gates.
For this section, the following sub-parts are to be omitted from QCS 2014 - Section 27
3.2 FENCES
3.2.2 Chain Link Fences and Gates

3.2.4 Wire Fences
3.2.5 Wood Fences
3.2.6 Open Mesh Steel Panel Fencing
3.2.7 Security Fences
PART 4 – FOUNTAINS AND AQUATIC FEATURES
For this section, the following sub-part is to be added to section in QCS 2014 - Section 27
4.4 PRODUCTS
1. Water Feature type 1: raised water mirror diamond shape, cascading into irregular-
shaped water body, cladded with grey granite tiles, refer to landscape drawings
2. Water Feature type 2: cascading water mirror semi-rectangular shape, drained into
water channel, cladded with grey granite tiles, refer to landscape drawings
3. Water Feature type 3: interactive dry deck fountain with flush-mounted nozzles,
collected into an underground drainage system, refer to landscape drawings

PART 5 – SITE FURNITURE
5.2 PRODUCTS
5.2.1 Manufactured Units
1 Items covered in this Part include, but are not limited to the following:
b) benches
d) rubbish bins
g) bicycle storage
h) street furniture : bollard
b) Benches:
a. Prima marina bench - Escofet or similarly approved as per landscape
drawings
b. Abril backless bench – Landscape Forms or similarly approved as pe
landscape drawings
c. Banda doblada bench- Escofet or similarly approved as per landscape
drawings
d. Equal bench- Escofet or similarly approved as per landscape drawings
e. Socrates bench- Escofet or similarly approved as per landscape
drawings
f. Outfit benchm- Vekso or similarly approved as per landscape drawings
d) Rubbish Bins:
a. Bevel litter receptecal – Forms+Surfaces or similarly approved as per

landscape drawings
b. Urbana litter bin- Escofet or similarly approved as per landscape drawings
g) Bicycle storage:
a. Olympia bike rack- Forms+Surfaces or similarly approved as per

landscape
drawings
h) Street Furniture
Bollards:
a. Material: Stainless steel
b. Installation Method: cast in concrete

3 Warranty: Product warranty period, 10 years from taking over.
For this section, the following sub-parts are to be omitted from QCS 2014 - Section 27
5.2 PRODUCTS
5.2.1 Manufactured Units
1 Items covered in this Part include, but are not limited to the following:
a) planters
c) tables
d) ash type rubbish bins
g) combination rubbish bins
PART 7 – PROTECTIVE OR SHADE COVER SYSTEMS
7.1.3 System Description
a. Design and provide permanent, custom fabricated fabric structures in architectural

forms and configurations indicated, including foundations, fabric membrane,
framing, hardware and fittings, anchors, connections, drainage provisions,
finishing, and accessories required to produce a complete fabric structure system
complying with the design intent including specified work results.
b. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate architectural form and configuration,

extents and major basic components. Provide additional detailed design as required
to complete the work. Ensure provision appropriate cables and wires passage for
wiring of lighting installed on the structures as per details and drawings.
c. Architectural form includes tensile membrane shell of low elongation

characteristics under tension.
d. System may optimize the amount of framing and utilize the strength of the fabric;
however the structural support members shall not rely on the fabric for structural
stability.
e. Provide a single source responsibility for the following:
1. Engineering design for overall system and component performance.

2. Final selections of additional products that comply with the architectural

design intent, performance requirements and other specified work results.
3. Fabrication of the system.
4. Installation of the system.
5. Related services, including services related to quality assurance, installation,

and quality control.
7.1.4 Fabric Structure Performance Requirements
a) General: Design fabric structure, including comprehensive Engineering analysis by

a qualified professional Engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
b) Structural Performance:
(a) Fabric structures shall withstand the effects of gravity dead loads, loads due
to tensioned materials, and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated.
(b) Wind Loads: Basic wind speed 38 m/s (mean hourly) as per QSC 2014.
(c) Seismic zones: according to IBC 2009 and QCS 2014
c) Thermal Movements:
(a) Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening
of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base Engineering calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and night time
sky heat loss.
(b) Temperature Change (Range): 670C, ambient; 1000C, material surfaces.
7.1.5 Submittals
a) Product Data: For each type of fabric structure component. Include product details
and dimensions, material descriptions, individual component profiles, and finishes
for the following:
(a) Structural steel framing systems and related components.

(b) Fabric membrane.
(c) Hardware and fittings.

(d) Accessories.
(e) Finishes.
b) Delegated Design Submittal:
(a) For fabric structures indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria.
(b) Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional Engineer responsible for their preparation.
(c) Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design
criteria in the Contract Documents.
(d) Include list of applicable building codes, design loads and other factors
applied.
(e) If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification
required, submit a written request for additional information to the Engineer.
(f) Indicate reaction forces related to anchors.
(g) Coordinate submittals of structural data related to supporting systems, as
required to accommodate delegated design of fabric membrane structures.
(h) Provide structural design and locations of anchors and connections for fabric
structures. Provide Engineering design as required to accommodate structure
indicated.
(i) Certification by qualified professional Engineer that the design of fabric
structures, including connections to supporting structure, is in compliance
with the Contract Documents and with applicable building codes.
(j) Include shop drawings specified in this section.
c) Installation and Assembly Instructions: Submit complete written instructions for

assembly and procedures for erection and installation of tensioned membrane fabric
structures for this Project. Include assembly diagrams, parts schedules and step by
step procedures.
d) Shop Drawings:
(a) For the following fabric structure components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details and attachments to other work.
(b) Structural Frame Drawings: Show complete fabrication of steel framing;
include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections,
distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-
sections.
(c) Submit anchor bolt plans and templates before foundation work begins.
Include location, diameter and projection of anchor bolts required to attach
system to foundation.
(d) Drainage Provisions: Include details of drainage provisions, including
required components, at a scale of not less than 1:8.

e) Samples for Verification: For each type of the following: Exposed fabric
membrane, minimum 300 x 300 mm, including the fabric welding by high
frequency.
f) Qualification Data: For the following:

(a) Manufacturer.
(b) Professional Engineer
(c) Testing and inspection agency.
g) Welding certificates.
h) Material Test Reports: For each of the following products:

(a) Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.
(b) Bolts, nuts and washers including mechanical properties and chemical
analysis.
(c) Shop primers.
(d) Non-shrink grout.
(e) Product Test Reports: For specified fabric membrane performance
characteristics, including fire test response characteristics.
(f) Source quality control reports.
(g) Field quality control reports.
a) Manufacturer Source Qualifications:
(a) A firm experienced in design, manufacturing/fabrication and erection of

products and systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a
record of 10 successful projects in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
(b) Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of shop drawings and

comprehensive Engineering analysis by a qualified professional Engineer.
b) Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329

for testing indicated.
c) Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the

following:
(a) AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
(b) AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
d) Pre-installation Conference:
(a) Conduct conference at the Site.
(b) Review methods and procedures related to fabric structures including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.

b. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials and erector's

personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
c. Required tests, inspections, and certifications.
d. Unfavourable weather and forecasted weather conditions.
7.1.7 Delivery, Storage, And Handling
1. Deliver, store and handle components, in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions, and so as not to be damaged, deformed, wet, stained or dirty. Package
components for protection during transportation and handling.
7.1.8 Project Conditions
1. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions

permit components to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions
and warranty requirements.
7.1.9 Warranty
1. Special Warranty: Total system warranty in which manufacturer, installer and

contractor are jointly and severally bound and agree to repair or replace fabric
membrane structures that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
c. Sealant failures.
d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
e. Deterioration of factory-applied finishes.
f. Fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.
g. Fabric membrane failures.
h. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion
7.2 PRODUCTS
1. Shade structure type 1: galvanized steel shade structure with wood-textured finish
and a perforated panel of 20 to 30% openings, fixed on rectangular-shaped steel
frames, size: 12200x4200mm, refer to landscape drawings
2. Shade structure type 2: l-shaped shade structure made from galvanized steel frame
with perforated panel of 35 to 40% openings, fixed on circular-shaped steel columns,
refer to landscape drawings
3. Shade structure type 3: tensile shade structure made from knitted polyethylene fabric,
fixed on a carbon steel posts with a mill finish, size: 9170x9170 as manufactured by
tensile shade products llc, or equally approved, refer to landscape drawings
4. Shade structure type 4: circular shaped shade structure made from acrylic fabric and
an aluminium post of 200 to 400mm diameter, as manufactured by mdt-tex or equally
approved, quantities:3, refer to landscape drawings

PART 8 – PLAY FIELD AND PARK EQUIPMENT
8.2 PRODUCTS
1. 2.4m log swing - flat seats lsw24f 22.5 sq metres 60mm wetpour 20.5 linear
metres wetpour edging 24.5 sq metres 55mm tiles 21.0 linear metres tile edging 24
grass mats sph = 2370mm seat upper surface = 450mm calculated ffh = 1635mm,
as per manufactured specification Wicksteed or similarly approved
2. Seesaws and spring animals: are made from: colored panels, all panels made from
high density polyethylene, non toxic and complies with EN7.
Support structures : steel sheet, laser cut, welded, thermal zinc coated and finished
with a polyester powdercoat.
Spring: cold drawn, machined ends, shot peened, phosphated and polyester powder
coated. All plastic equipment is impact proof in a temperature from -40 to +110
celsius. All fasteners are sinc coated or stainless steel as per manufactured
specification Wicksteed or similarly approved
3. castle esclabor 801-escl :32.0 sq metres 40mm wetpour 35.0 sq metres 33mm tiles
22.0 linear metres wetpour edging 24.0 linear metres tile edging max ffh =
1110mm 29 grass mats as per manufactured specification Wicksteed or similarly
approved
4. Parallel bar for outdoor workout, the maximum fall height of this structure is
1.16m, total square footage is 24.2m2, steel bar to EN 10025, steel chs to BS EN
10219, welding to EN iso 14341 : 2011, polyester powder paint to EN 13438:2005
PART 9 – MISCELLANEOUS OTHER EXTERNAL WORKS
9.2 STONE VENEER - SITEWORK
1. GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
a. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct the
stone veneer wall work, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. SUBMITTALS

a. Samples: Submit representative samples of products to be furnished under this

Section to Architect for selection and approval, as follows. Delivered materials
shall closely match the approved samples.
b.Submit manufacturer’s product data for all specified materials.
c. Shop Drawings: Cutting and setting drawings of stone pieces specified herein shall
be submitted. Drawings shall indicate fixation method, ISR anchorage system,
including steel support angles, anchors, cramps, dowels, etc., complete stone
sizes, dimensions, layout, finishes, arrangement and other necessary details for
reception of other work.
C. SAMPLE INSTALLATION
a. Install in specific location directed by Architect at least one sample stone wall
veneer installation conforming to typical project construction. Sample
installation shall be approximately 30 sq. ft. in area, located as directed by
Architect, and shall show the proposed, stone type, color, and finish, fixation,
anchorage system, joint sealing, cap stone/copping, and other pertinent details of
installation.
D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. Stone shall be supplied by a source approved by the Engineer.
2. PRODUCTS
A. STONE
a. Granite shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 615, Architectural

Grade and NBGQA Specifications, supplied by a local supplier or as approved
by Engineer.
1.Granite shall be sound and uniform in quality, texture, and strength,
and shall be free of any flaws, reeds, rifts, laminations, seams, or defects
which would impair its strength, durability, or appearance.
a. Absorption by weight shall not exceed 0.4 %
b. Compressive strength of not less than 19,000 psi.
c. Minimum density of 160 pcf.
b. Limestone for Walls and planters cladding: Comply with ASTM C 1527,
Classification I Exterior, supplied by a local supplier or as approved by
Engineer.
B. MASONRY VENEER INSTALLATION SYSTEM
a. Masonry Veneer Installation System (MVIS) for walls less than 1m height
shall consist of the following components, manufactured by Laticrete

International, or approved equal. Mix according to manufacturer's

instructions.
1 LATICRETE Hydro Ban™ or approved equal, a liquid applied breathable

waterproof membrane located outside of the corrodible structural
components of the wall.
2. Setting bed mortar shall be Laticrete Masonry Veneer Mortar or approved
equal.
3. Pointing mortar shall be Laticrete Masonry Pointing Mortar or approved
equal. Light beige color.
b. Mechanical fixation shall be provided for walls higher than 1m from ajdacent
surface. Refer to AR drawings and specs.
C. METAL ITEMS
a. Steel angle support anchors for general use shall consist of continuous lengths
of steel angles, indicated sizes, ASTM A 36, pre-drilled for anchor bolts, all
as shown on the approved shop drawings. Steel support angles at exterior
veneer work shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
ASTM A 123, with all field welds and/or field cuts shall be thoroughly cleaned
to bare metal and prime painted with ZRC or zinc dust primer.
b. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than (22 mm) wide with
corrugations having a wavelength of (7.6 to 12.7 mm) and an amplitude of (1.5
to 2.5 mm) made from steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication not less than
(1.7 mm) thick.
D. CONCRETE BACKUP
a. Concrete wall for backup shall have minimum 28 day compressive strength of
3,000 psi
3. EXECUTION
A. PLACEMENT OF STEEL SUPPORT ANCHORS
a. Goshen stone veneer shall be anchored and dowelled as indicated, and as

shown on the approved shop and setting drawings.
B. SETTING
a. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with
requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that
is otherwise unsuitable for intended use.

b. Arrange stones in pattern with course heights as indicated on approved sample

installation, and uniform joint widths, with offset between vertical joints as indicated
on approved sample installation.
c. Space anchors not more than (400 mm) o.c. vertically and (600 mm) o.c. horizontally.
Install additional anchors within (300 mm) of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter
at intervals not exceeding (300 mm).
d. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
Install ties, anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary
to secure dimension stone cladding in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and
accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated with uniform joints of widths
indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and
indicated tolerances.
a. Securely anchor to back-up construction as indicated on the
approved shop and setting drawings. Stone veneer shall be
anchored with metal ties, as indicated. Exposed surfaces shall
be kept free of mortar at all times.
e. Cooperate with Sheet Metal and Sealant trades, coordinating work of this Section
with installation of related work.
f. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations

indicated.
i. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in
Section 27 part 9.4 , EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS.
C. POINTING
a. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers not
more than (10 mm) deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become
thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
b. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing
tool to produce smooth, flat face slightly below edges of stone.
D. CLEANING
a. Stone work shall be carefully cleaned, removing all dirt, excess mortar, stains,
and other defacements.
For this section, the following parts are to be omitted from QCS 2014 - Section 27
PART 6 – FLAG POLES

SECTION 31
FITTINGS
General:

- The following is a new Section 31 added to QCS 2014 (Qatar Construction
Specification).
PART 2 - MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
2.2 SHELVING AND STORAGE FITTINGS
2.2.2 Steel Lockers
1 Where indicated, shall be galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 653.
2.3 SUNDRY FITTINGS
2.3.1 Railings
1 Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
Man: Construction Specialities

Ref: Acrovyn HRB-4C Handrail
2.4 GRP FABRICATIONS
2.4.1 GRP Ladders
1 Shall comply with OSHA PP 1910.27 and installed to supplier's

specifications. Where indicated, safety cages are also made from fiberglass-
composite materials.
FITTINGS S31- Page 1 of 3

Man: International Gratings, Inc

Ref: Fiberglass Ladders.
Man: IKG Industries, Harsco Corp.
Ref: Fiberglass Ladders.
2.4.1.1 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Fabrications: Molded surface coat over
polyester resin laminate reinforced with glass fiber and structural reinforcing as
required.
1 Surface Coat: Ultraviolet inhibited NPG-ISO polyester gel coat, 20 mils (0.5
mm) thick, nominal.
2 Surface Coat: Polyurethane.
3 Color: As indicated.
4 Texture on Exposed Side: As indicated.
5 Resin: Isophthalic polyester resin; with flame spread index less than 25,
smoke developed index less than 450, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E 84; heat distortion greater than 180 degrees F (82 degrees C), when tested
in accordance with ASTM D 648.
6 Glass Fiber: "E" type random chopped fibers.
7 Glass Content: 25 to 30 percent by weight.
8 Shell Thickness: 5 mm, minimum.
9 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of less than 25, smoke
developed index of less than 450, when tested in accordance with ASTM E
84.
10 Tensile Strength: ASTM D 638 12000 psi 83 MPa
11 Compressive Strength: ASTM D 638 17000 psi 117 MPa
12 Bearing strength ASTM D 638 9000 PSI 62 MPa
13 Flexural Strength: ASTM D 790 20000 psi 138 MPa
14 Modulus of Elasticity: ASTM D 790 0.9x 106 psi 6200 MPa
15 Expansion Coefficient: 5.56 x10-6/deg
C.
16 Specific gravity 1.5
17 Flame Spread: ASTM E 84 25 or less
18 Tolerances:
(a) Variation in Thickness from Nominal: Minus 1.5 mm, plus 6 mm.
(b) Variation in Thickness of Gel Coat: Plus and minus 0.06 mm,
maximum.
(c) Variation from Dimensions Indicated on Drawings: Plus and minus 3
mm, maximum.
(d) Variation from Square: Plus and minus 3 mm, maximum.
(e) Variation of Hardware from Intended Location: Plus and minus 6 mm,
maximum.
19 Provide concealed reinforced anchorage points for anchors of type

recommended by manufacturer.

20 Mark each unit with permanent serial number coordinated with shop drawing
designators.
21 Cure and clean prior to shipment; remove material that may be toxic to plant
or animal life or incompatible with adjacent building materials.
22 Ventilation
(a) Where indicated, all enclosures shall be provided with nominal natural
cross flow ventilation to assist in the prevention of condensation and
mildew .Vents should be fitted internally and externally. They should
be weather resistant, vermin proof and must be fitted with stainless steel
insect mesh and external cowls.
2.4.1.2 Execution
1. Installation
(b) Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions
affecting performance.
i. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected.
(c) Install cast plastic fabrications true in line and plane. Use concealed
shims where required for alignment.
(d) Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length
pieces from maximum lengths available. Stagger joints in adjacent and
parallel or related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter
at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact
throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
(e) Attach cast plastic fabrications at joints with adhesive and band or brace
together until adhesive is cured. Cure adhesive according to
(f) Predrill fastener holes in plastic ornamentation.
(g) Locate fasteners not less than 100 mm o.c. and not less than 8 mm from
edge and end.
(h) Patch fastener holes flush with finish face. Sand patch smooth and
level.

SECTION 34
SIGNAGE
General:
- Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of author-
ities having jurisdiction.
- The following is a new Section 34 added to QCS 2014 (Qatar Construction Specifi-
cation).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SIGNS
2.1.1 Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters
having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles;
and as follows:
1 Solid-Sheet Sign, Returns, and Back: Aluminum and Acrylic sheet with
finish specified in "Surface Finish and Applied Graphics" Subparagraph
below and as follows:
(a) Thickness: As indicated in Signage Manual.

(b) Surface-Applied Graphics: As indicated in Signage Manual.
2 Mounting: As indicated
3 Surface Finish and Applied Graphics:
(a) Integral Metal Finish: As selected by Engineer from full range of

industry finishes.
(b) Integral Aluminum Finish: Match Engineer's sample.
(c) Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish and Graphics: Manufacturer's
standard, in color matching Engineer's sample.
(d) Painted Finish and Graphics: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied
exterior-grade sign paint, in color matching Engineer's sample.
(e) Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating.
4 Text and Typeface: As indicated in Signage Manual. .
2.2 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS
2.2.1 Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M, alloy and temper recommended
by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
SIGNAGE S34 - Page 1 of 3

2.2.2 Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for
each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure

anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined
2.3.2 Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content

of 70 g/L or less for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and
applied on-site when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
2.3.3 Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 1.14

mm thick, with adhesive on both sides.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
2.4.1 Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.4.2 Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
2.4.3 Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and
perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless
otherwise indicated.
2.4.4 Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal
after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised
features unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
2.5.1 Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.04 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1 Colour: As indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of signage work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to
1 Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated,
with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2 Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or
debris that would impair installation.
3 Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in
contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a
heavy coat of bituminous paint.

SECTION 35
FABRICATED STRUCTURES
General:
- Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014) shall be the basis of the Architec-
tural Specifications unless otherwise indicated hereunder.
- Qatar Electrical and telecommunication Specifications (QCS 2014) shall be the
basis of the electrical Specifications unless otherwise indicated hereunder.
- Qatar Mechanical and Equipment Specifications (QCS 2014) shall be the basis of
the Mechanical Specifications unless otherwise indicated hereunder.
- Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of author-
ities having jurisdiction.
- All Electrical and telecommunication work shall be in accordance with project
specification, QCS 2014 and local authority requirements.
- The following is a new Section 35 added to QCS 2014 (Qatar Construction Specifi-
cation) for this project.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Performance Requirements
1 Structural Performance: Control booths shall withstand the effects of gravity

loads and the following loads
Wind Performance:
Applicable Standard QCS 2014-ASCE 7- 05

Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph
Exposure Type: D
Seismic Performance:
Applicable Standard QCS 2014-ASCE 7-10

Site Class: C
Seismic Design Criteria: Ss = 0.09g, S1 = 0.045g
2 Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
(a) Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material
surfaces.
FABRICATED STRUCTURES S35 - Page 1 of 8

3 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Archi-

tectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines.
4 Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
5 Safety Glazing Products: Category II materials complying with testing require-

ments in 16 CFR 1201.
1.2 Warranty
1 Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
1 Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manu-

facturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
(a) Sheet: ASTM B 209M.

(b) Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221M.
(c) Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T4 or Alloy 6061-
T6.
(d) Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded
Tube: ASTM B 241.
(e) Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429.
(f) Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy drawn Tubes for General Purpose Appli-
cations: ASTM B 483.
2 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quali-

ty, Z275 coating designation; mill phosphatized.
3 Galvanized, Rolled Steel Tread Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from steel
plate complying with ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 380; hot-dip galvanized ac-
cording to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
4 Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
5 Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
6 Steel Mechanical Tubing: ASTM A 513, welded steel mechanical tubing.
7 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: Hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.
8 Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

9 Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS or HGL grade.
10 ASTM C 578 – Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
11 ASTM C 1289 – Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board
12 High Pressure Decorative Laminates, ANSI/NEMA Standard LD3
13 Plywood: DOC PS 1, Exterior grade.
14 Anchorages: Anchor bolts; stainless steel.
2.2 Prefabricated Aluminum Control Booths
1 Frame: Frame comprising the structure shall be 3.175 mm minimum tubular alu-
minum frame, standard prefinished white. Aluminum tubes shall be mechanically
fastened into each panel for reinforcement, including all necessary hardware.
a) Colour: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s full range.
b) Hardware: Stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
2 Size of Booth: As indicated
3 Wall panels: Impact resistant, moisture resistant and expansion resistant composite
with aluminum exterior sheets insulated with rigid insulation. Interior panels shall
be prefinished white aluminum dent resistant composite sheet.
a) Thickness: 1.6 mm thick

b) Finish: Smooth finish
4 Roof: Roof panel shall be a total of 76.2 mm thick composite and shall have pre-
finished white aluminum with stucco embossed finish on top and bottom. Standard
units intended for exterior use include 76.2 mm overhang on all sides and 203.2
mm high fascia. Roof scupper(s) shall be provided for water runoff. Roof shall be
sealed at all joints and seams for a complete weatherproof roof system.
5 Glazing: All flat windows shall be 6.35 mm tempered safety glass. Curved win-
dow(s) shall be mar-resistant polycarbonate. Optional sliding windows have ex-
truded aluminum framing with 3.175 mm tempered safety glass.
6 Door(s): Fully weather-stripped top-hung sliding door(s) with mortise type hook
bolt locking device manufactured from 3.175 mm extruded aluminum sections,
with a fixed window glazing to match booth. Door panel shall match the exterior
of the booth.
a) Thickness: 38.1 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

b) Hardware: Heavy duty
c) Locking: Manufacturer’s standard commercial grade key locking device to be
factory installed.

7 Flooring: Aluminum treadplate floor covering over 3.175 mm aluminum tube sub-
floor supports. Supports to be spaced to minimize defection without failure, and
welded to the booth frame as an integral part of the booth framing system. Re-
quired number of pre-engineered and pre-drilled anchor clips to be provided.
8 Counter/Shelf: Unit shall be provided with plastic laminate or as shown on the

drawings. Counter shall be mechanically fastened to reinforced rib sections of wall
structure. Provide access opening for electrical cords as required.
Man: AustinMohawk and Company, Inc.

Man: B.I.G. Enterprises, Inc.
Man: Canada Kiosk; an NRB company.
Man: Delta Scientific Corporation.
Man: Keystone Structures, Inc.
Man: Little Buildings, Inc.
Man: Mardan Fabricators.
Man: Parking Booth Company, Inc.
Man: Par-Kut International, Inc.
Man: Porta-King Building Systems.
2.3 ELECTRICAL
1. Unit shall pre-wired with suitable wire sizes for respective equipments, sockets
and lighting fixtures as per project specification. Wiring shall be through con-
cealed PVC conduit.
2. Unit shall be supplied with 12 way distribution panel consisting of three phase
100A MCCB, 415V/240V, 50Hz (TPN+E) as incomer. Outgoing circuit breakers
shall be single pole 15A for lighting circuit and 20A for power and for AC unit,
circuit breakers shall be as per equipment ratings.
3. Unit shall be equipped with LED lighting fixtures mounted at ceiling to achieve
average 200 lux and type of lighting fixture shall be as per interior intent.
4. Unit shall be equipped with minimum one single phase 13A duplex electrical re-
ceptacle for general purpose application.
5. Necessary sockets shall be considered as per additional equipment requirements if

any (like workstation, printer etc.).
6. HVAC unit shall be as per mechanical requirement and specification.
7. Necessary arrangement for earthing shall be done for all electrical equipments,
metallic structure inside security booth as per project specification requirement.
8. Manufacturer to provide following for boom barrier located beside security booth:
(a) One single phase 20A MCB outgoing in distribution panel

(b) Wiring from distribution panel to boom barrier control panel with
3x4Sqmm copper armoured
(c) Cable shall be considered and run through provided underground contain-
ment / ducting form
(d) Booth till barrier panel.
(e) Earth leakage protection using ELCB/RCCB in distribution panel for boom
barrier circuit.
9. Manufacturer to coordinate with contractor for proper location of cutout/sleeves

for cable entry to panel and wiring from panel to boom barrier.
10. All electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with project specification
and local authority requirements (KAHRAAMAA).
11. Manufacturer shall submit electrical shop drawing showing locations of all electri-
cal services (lighting, sockets, panels and schedule, access cutouts/sleeve etc.).
12. Booth shall have Twin data outlets to service voice and other services, these out-
lets shall be connected to the nearest Telecom Closet in the Common Basement
via fiber optic cables & associated media convertor, if the distance exceed the 90
meters. Otherwise, copper cables (Cat6a) is accepted.
2.4 MECHANICAL
2.4.1 Unitary Equipment
1. Page 3, Sub Clause 3.2.2 titled “Split Type Air - Conditioners”
a. The air conditioning units shall be capable of handling the cooling loads when
operating in ambient conditions of 51 Deg. C.
b. The outdoor unit shall be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperature

of 55 Deg. C.
c. Units shall be provided with dedicated controller.
d. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer

agreeing to repair or replace components of Split Type Room Air-conditioners
that fail in materials or workmanship within 5 years from date of substantial
completion.

2.4.2 Condensing Unit, Propeller Fan Cooled
1 Page 4, add in sub- clause 3.2.3 titled “ Condensing Units” clause as follows:
a TYPE: air cooled, vertical air discharge type, comprising multiple compressors,
condenser fans and motors, condenser coils, refrigeration accessories and safety
and operating controls assembled in common casing. Unit to be piped, wired
and tested at factory and supplied complete with operating charge of refrigerant
22 and dehydrated compressor oil.Unit shall be capable to operate at 51o C am-
bient temperature and it shall be rated in accordance with AHRI-365 standard.
b COMPRESSORS: serviceable, hermetic type, mounted on external spring isola-

tors, with automatically reversible oil pump, crankcase heater and in-built ther-
mal overload protection. Compressors to be located in separate isolated sec-
tions from condenser coil and fan. They are to have unloaders arranged so that
they will start unloaded and will unload in response to suction pressure down to
33% of full capacity in six steps for partial load operation. Motors to have part-
winding start.
c CONDENSER COILS: heavy gauge seamless copper tubes mechanically

bonded to aluminium plate fins and circuited for sub-cooling. Coil shall be test-
ed against leakage by pressurizing sir at 3100kPa in coil, under water, cleaned
and dehydrated at the factory.
d UNIT CASING: heavy gauge galvanized steel, zinc phosphatized, finished with
baked enamel and fully weatherproofed for outdoor installation. Casing to
have openings for power and refrigerant connections and removable panels for
easy access to internal components. Control panel to have hinged access door.
e REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES to include the following: filter-driers,

sight glasses, suction and discharge pressure gauges, oil pressure gauges, oil fil-
ters, suction strainers, pressure relief valves, suction and discharge shut-off
valves and discharge line check valves.
f CONDENSER FAN(S) & MOTOR(S): The machine shall be furnished with di-
rect driven propeller type discharging air upward condenser fans. Fans shall be
constructed of corrosion resistant blades such as heavy gauge aluminum. The
fan and drive shall be held in proper alignment. Fan assemblies shall be provid-
ed with heavy gauge, rust resistant steel wire fan guard. All condenser fans shall
be individually, statically, and dynamically balanced for vibration free opera-
tion. Motors shall be Totally Enclosed Air Over (TEAO), , with class ‘F’ insu-
lation, minimum IP-55 protection and factory wired to unit control panel
g CONTROLS: safety and operating controls to include: high and low pressure
switches, oil pressure switches, compressor overload safety devices, positive
acting timers to prevent short cycling of compressors on power interruption,
suction pressure actuated unloaders, head pressure controls to automatically
cycle condenser fans, discharge line thermostats with automatic reset, crankcase
heaters, control voltage transformer, compressor and condenser fan contactors

and compressor and condenser fan circuit breakers. Units shall be provided with
microprocessor controller suitable for integration with BMS.
2 MANUFACTURERS: obtain unit from one of the following:
Carrier (U.S.A.)
Trane (U.S.A.)
York (U.S.A.)
or approved equal.
3 Manufacturer to coordinate with contractor for proper location of sleeves for re-
frigerant pipe connections to indoor and outdoor condensing unit.
4 All mechanical works shall be carried out in accordance with project specification
and local authority requirements.
5 Manufacturer shall submit mechanical shop drawing showing locations of all

split air conditioning equipment’s and it condensing units. (Refrigerant pipe con-
nections, condensate drain etc.).

2.4.3 Fabrication
1 Fabricate control booths completely in factory.
2 Preglaze windows and doors at factory.
3 Prewire control booths at factory, ready for connection to service at Project site.
4 Fabricate control booths with forklift pockets in base of booth.
5 Accessible Control Booths: Where indicated to be accessible, fabricate control

booths as follows:
(a) Provide service windows located no higher than 865 mm above exterior
grade.
(b) Provide door opening with minimum 813-mm clear width.
(c) Provide minimum 1525-mm clear turning spacing within the booth.
(d) Provide minimum 685-mm clearance beneath interior work surfaces. Lo-
cate work surfaces 710 mm minimum and 865 mm maximum above the
floor.
(e) Locate controls and operable parts no lower than 381 mm and no higher
than 1219 mm above the floor where reach is unobstructed. Where side
reach is obstructed, locate controls and operable parts no lower than 381
mm and no higher than 1219 mm above the floor.
2.4.4 General Finish Requirements
1 Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2 Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not ac-
ceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they
are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to mini-
mize contrast.
2.4.5 Steel Finishes
1 Steel and Galvanized-Steel Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-
treating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of
prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
a) Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.4.6 Aluminum Finishes
1 PVDF as specified in section 17

Additions to Qatar Construction Specification (QCS)
The following section shall govern pipework for district cooling distribution network on
the above referenced project and shall be read in conjunction with the Qatar Construction
Specification (QCS) and amendments thereto:
Section 36
PIPEWORK FOR DISTRICT COOLING

DISTRIBUTION NETWORK
Part 1 Manufacturer of Carbon Steel Pipes
Part 2 Coating and Insulation of Chilled Water Pipe
Part 3 Welding of Chilled Water Pipe
Part 4 Installation of Chilled Water Pipe
PIPEWORK FOR DISTRICT COOLING DISTRIBUTION NETWORK S36 - Page 1 of 1

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-ME-01 REV 0
1. Manufacture of Carbon Steel Pipe................................................. 2
1.1 General ............................................................................................. 2
1.1.1 Scope ................................................................................................. 2
1.1.2 Related Sections and/or Parts ............................................................ 2
1.1.3 Reference ........................................................................................... 2
1.1.4 Definitions ......................................................................................... 3
1.1.5 Submittals .......................................................................................... 3
1.1.6 Quality Assurance.............................................................................. 4
1.1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling ........................................................ 4
1.1.8 Guarantee ........................................................................................... 5
1.2 Products ............................................................................................ 5
1.2.1 General Requirements ....................................................................... 5
1.2.2 Piping ................................................................................................. 5
1.2.3 Fittings ............................................................................................... 5
1.2.4 Flanges ............................................................................................... 6
1.2.5 Bolts and Nuts ................................................................................... 6
1.2.6 Gaskets............................................................................................... 6
1.2.7 Branch Connections ........................................................................... 6
1.3 Inspection, Testing and Marking ................................................... 7
1.3.1 General............................................................................................... 7
1.3.2 Hydrostatic Testing............................................................................ 7
1.3.3 Dimensions, Weights, Lengths and Other Criteria ............................ 7
1.3.4 Marking ............................................................................................. 8
MANUFACTURE OF CARBON STEEL PIPE S36 - Page 1 of 9

1. MANUFACTURE OF CARBON STEEL PIPE
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Scope
1 This part of Section 36 covers the minimum requirements for the design,
manufacture testing & inspection of Carbon Steel (CS) piping and accessories for
district cooling distribution network.
1.1.2 Related Sections and/or Parts
1 Section 1 - General.
2 Section 36 - Part 2 Coating & Insulation of Chilled Water Pipe.
3 Section 36 - Part 3 Welding of Chilled Water Pipe.
4 Section 36 - Part 4 Installation of Chilled Water Pipe.
1.1.3 References
1 Product manufacture, testing and inspection shall comply with the latest edition of
the following references, unless, otherwise stated in the specification or unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2 American Petroleum Institute (API)
(a) API 5L - Specification for Line Pipe.

(b) API 609 - Butterfly Valves lug and wafer type.
(c) API 1104 - Standard for welding of pipelines and related facilities.
3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM/ANSI)
(a) A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

(b) A105/A105M - Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping applications.
(c) A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service.
(d) A126 - Standard Specification for Gray iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges and Pipe Fittings.
(e) A193/A193M - Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting.
(f) A194/A194M - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure
and High Temperature Service.
(g) A216/A216M - Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for
High temperature service.
(h) A234 A234M - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature services.
(i) A278M - Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for
Temperatures Up to 350oC.
(j) A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.

(k) A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

(l) B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Bronze Castings.
(m) B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
4 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
(a) B16.1 -
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flange Fittings (Class 125.250)
(b) B16.5 -
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
(c) B16.9 -
Factory-made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings.
(d) B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings. Socket – Welding and Threaded.
-
(e) B1.20 1 -
Pipe Threads, General Purpose, inch.
(f) B31.4 -
Liquid transportation systems for hydrocarbons, Liquid
Petroleum Gas, Anhydrous Ammonia and Alcohol’s.
(g) ASTM A 370 - Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical
Testing of Steel Products.
(h) ASTM E 112 - Estimating the Average Grain Size of Metals.
(i) ASTM E 23 - Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
5 Euronorms (CEN / EN)
(a) EN 10204 - Metallic Products - Types of Inspection Documents.
6 Manufacturers Standardisation Society of the valves & fittings industry (MSS)
(a) SP-25 - Marking of valves, fittings and flanges.

(b) SP-69 - Butterfly valves.
(c) SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
(d) SP-72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for
General Service.
(e) SP-84 - Socket Welding and Threaded Ends.
1.1.4 Definitions
1 The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilized in this

section.
(a) “CS” shall mean Carbon Steel.

(b) “SS” shall mean Stainless Steel.
(c) “GI” shall mean Galvanized Iron.
(d) “GS” shall mean Galvanized Steel.
(e) “PE” shall mean Polyethylene.
(f) “HDPE” shall mean high density polyethylene (PE100).
(g) “MDPE” shall mean medium density polyethylene (PE80).
(h) “NB” shall mean nominal bore.
1.1.5 Submittals
1 Technical data on pipe shall be submitted for all proposed sizes and pressure

classes for the Engineer’s approval. The submittals shall clearly indicate or include
at least the following:
(a) Pipe manufacturer’s name.

(b) Proposed pipe diameters.
(c) Proposed pressure class or rating.
(d) Proposed manufactured lengths.
(e) Proposed joint type.
(f) Maximum internal test pressure.
(g) Mill Test Certificates.
2 Fittings, bends and special couplings for all proposed sizes and pressure classes
shall also be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
(a) Samples shall be supplied according to the Engineer’s request.
3 All joint welding equipment, materials and procedures shall be submitted for the
1 Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in
sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the
pipes, if so desired.
2 All notifications shall be made by a written inspection request.
(a) An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineer’s office, but the original
must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
3 Minimum notification times shall be as follows:
(a) 48 hours within Doha city and surrounding area.

(b) 72 hours for other areas within Qatar.
(c) 2 Weeks outside of Qatar.
1.1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 Products shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations along with the following provisions:
2 Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner to

avoid product damage.
(a) All pipe shall be handled, loaded and shipped in accordance with API RP
5L1, Recommended Practice for Railroad Transportation of Line Pipe, and
API RP 5LW, Recommended Practice for Transportation of Line Pipe on
Barges and Marine Vessels.
(b) Manufacturer shall submit loading instructions and diagrams for approval

for all pipe shipped by rail, truck, or marine vessel. However, approval of
these documents shall not relieve the Manufacturer of its responsibility for
damage during shipment.
(c) All dimensional tolerances and pipe surface conditions specified herein and
in API 5L shall apply to the pipe as received at the shipping destination.
3 Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting pipes and fittings. Steel chains,
clamps or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless approved by the
Engineer.
(a) Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing pipes during transport or
storage provided protective padding or timber blocking is utilized.
4 Visually inspect all pipes and fittings upon delivery and report any damage to the
Engineer.
(a) Any pipes or fittings damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall
be marked and set aside.
(b) Proposals for repair of any damaged pipes or fittings shall be submitted in
writing to the Engineer for approval.
(c) No repairs to damaged pipes or fittings shall be attempted without the
(d) Any damaged pipes or fittings deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
shall be removed from site and replaced at the Contractors expense.
1.1.8 Guarantee
1 Manufacturer shall bear all costs to seek, find, and repair all leaks and/or ruptures
which occur during field hydrostatic testing, which result from defects traceable to
the manufacture of the pipe.
2 The field test will not exceed a pressure that will cause a circumferential fibre stress
greater than 100 percent of the specified minimum yield strength of the pipe based
on the minimum specified wall thickness.
3 Engineer may elect to raise and lower the field test pressure one or more times
either as part of a planned testing routine, or as a consequence of a failure in the
pipeline, or in the testing equipment; however, these pressure cycles shall in no way
relieve the Manufacturer of its obligations.
1.2 PRODUCTS
1 All piping, fittings, valves, on the primary side to be designed and installed in
accordance with ASME Code B31.4 to operate at the following design conditions.
(a) Chilled Water Design Pressure - 1035 kPa (150 psig)

(b) Chilled Water Operating Temperature Range 4.4 Deg C to 13.3 Deg C

2 All pipes and fittings shall be supplied pre-insulated with polyurethane foam and
with HDPE outer jacket with cut backs at the ends for welding in the field. For this
purpose all fittings shall have a pup piece of suitable length welded on the ends
prior to application of coating and insulation in the shop.
3 The contractor is responsible for providing Mill Test Certificates for all pipes &
fittings.
4 Manufacturer’s name or trademark shall appear on all fittings and on each length of
pressure pipe.
5 The contractor’s quality control manual shall provide procedure to identify material
pieces, which have been cut from properly identified pipe.
1.2.2 Piping
1 Service pipe for chilled water distribution networks shall be carbon steel
conforming to ASTM A53 / API 5L Grd. B, with bevelled ends for welded joints
and the following schedule for wall thickness:.
(a) Pipe size upto 10  : ERW (Longitudinally welded) with Schedule
40 wall thickness.
(b) Pipe size 12  upto 24 : ERW (Longitudinal welded), standard weight
wall thickness (0.375 /9.5mm).
(c) Pipe size 26  upto 32 : SAW (Longitudinally/Spirally welded),
standard weight wall thickness (0.375
/9.5mm).
(d) Pipe sizes 36   and larger : SAW (longitudinally/Spirally welded),
extra strong wall thickness (0.5 /12.7mm)
1.2.3 Fittings
1 All fittings upto and including NPS 2” shall be carbon steel ASTM A 105, 3000 lb,
socket welded to ANSI B16.11.
2 All fittings NPS 2½ and over shall be carbon steel ASTM A234 Grade WPB,
Standard Weight, bevel ends, to ANSI-B16.9.
3 All elbows shall be long radius (R=1.5D). Short radius elbows and mitres shall not
be used without the specific approval of the Engineer.
4 Bends and special fittings shall be of pressure rating PN16 and shall comply with
the following requirements unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(a) All bends and special fittings even if manufactured elsewhere, shall be
obtained from the pipe manufacturer.
(b) Additional testing for bends and special fittings may be directed by the
Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.

1.2.4 Flanges
1 All flanges upto and including NPS 2” shall be ASTM A 105, ANSI B 16.5 Class
150 lb, Socket weld, Raised face to ANSI B16.5
2 All flanges NPS 2½ to NPS 24” shall be ASTM A105, ANSI B.16.5 Class 150 lb.
Carbon steel weld neck. Bore of the flange shall suit the wall thickness of the pipe.
3 All flanges NPS 24” and above shall be to MSS-SP-44, Class 150 lb, carbon steel
weld neck, bore to suit the pipe wall thickness.
4 Surface finish of the flange faces shall be suitable for the rubber gaskets.
1.2.5 Bolts and Nuts
1 Stud bolts, carbon steel, semi-finished with heavy hex nuts, to ASTM A 193 Grade
B / A194 Grade 2H.
1.2.6 Gaskets
1 Red-rubber or equivalent 3.2mm (1/8”) thick. Duro-hard 70-85 to ANSI B16.21,

full faced and rated for temperature and pressure of the system.
1.2.7 Branch Connections
1 Standard weight equal tee shall be used for full size tees.
2 Standard weight reducing tee, weldolets and sockolets shall be used for all branch
connections.
3 Stub in connections shall not be used unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
1.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND MARKING
1.3.1 General
1 All inspection and testing shall be carried out in accordance with the codes and
standards applicable to the relevant material.
2 Manufacturer shall submit certification which shall include as a minimum the

inspection and test reports and mill test certificates indicating all the tests were
carried out as per the applicable code.
1.3.2 Hydrostatic Testing
1 Hydrostatic testing of the pipe shall be in accordance with API 5L and in the
manner approved by the Engineer.
(a) Each length of pipe shall withstand (without leakage) a hydrostatic test

pressure such that the hoop stress (calculated on the basis of minimum
specified wall thickness, including stresses from end loading) is at least 95
percent of the specified minimum yield strength.
(b) When applied, the end load compensation factor as determined by the
formula given in API 5L, Appendix F, SR14 shall be used.
(c) The test pressure shall be held for not less than 10 seconds, during which
time the full length of the weld seam shall be inspected for leaks.
(d) The hydrostatic test equipment shall be equipped with a recording gauge
that will record test pressure and duration of test applied to each length of
pipe, which shall be identified by a unique Pipe Number.
(e) Hydrostatic test records shall be made available to the Engineer’s
Representative.
1.3.3 Dimensions, Weights, Lengths & Other Criteria
1 General :
(a) Dimensions, length, weights, and straightness of pipe shall comply with API
5L and the following clauses.
(b) Measuring equipment shall have a resolution and accuracy at least five (5)
times finer than the tolerance of the parameter being measured.
2 Length: The pipe shall be supplied to the following length requirements unless
otherwise specified.
(a) A minimum of 95% of the pipes shall be between 11.0 and 12.2 m in length.
(b) No pipe shall be less than 9.0 m in length.
(c) No pipe shall be more than 12.5 m in length.
3 Wall Thickness: As per API 5L
4 Diameter: As per API 5L
5 Pipe Body: As per API 5L
6 Pipe Ends: As per API 5L
7 Out-Of-Roundness:
(a) The out-of-roundness of the outside diameter of the pipe shall not exceed
the following: (Maximum OD - Minimum OD) / Nominal OD < 1.5
percent.
8 Straightness: As per API 5L.
9 Bevels: Pipe ends shall be bevelled in accordance with API 5L unless otherwise
specified.
10 Jointers: Jointers shall not be supplied.

11 Weld Repairs: No welding repairs are permitted to the weld or parent metal.
1.3.4 Marking
1. The pipe shall be paint stencilled at both ends, in accordance with API 5L on the
surface of the pipe within 200 mm of the ends. Pipe markings shall show: steel
grade, service, pipe diameter (OD), length, weight and wall thickness. Sizes,
weights, lengths, and pressures shall be given in metric units.
2. Pipe marking shall include the unique pipe number, lot number, heat number, and
whatever other designation is required so that complete traceability is maintained,
and each length of pipe can be specifically linked to all applicable chemical,
mechanical and other required tests, and to each step of the manufacturing, testing
and inspection operations.
3. End caps / bevel protectors shall be furnished for all pipes. End caps / bevel
protectors shall be of a re-usable type, and shall seal the bore against ingress of any
contamination.
4. Valves, fittings and flanges shall be marked in accordance with MSS – SP –25.
END OF PART 1

2. Coating and Insulation of Chilled Water Pipe .............................. 2
2.1 General ............................................................................................. 2
2.1.1 Scope ................................................................................................. 2
2.1.3 Reference ........................................................................................... 2
2.1.4 Definitions ......................................................................................... 2
2.1.5 Submittals .......................................................................................... 3
2.1.6 Quality Assurance.............................................................................. 4
2.1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling ........................................................ 4
2.1.8 Environmental Conditions ................................................................. 5
2.1.9 Performance Guarantee ..................................................................... 5
2.2 Products ............................................................................................ 5
2.2.1 Pipe and Fittings ................................................................................ 5
2.2.2 Abrasives ........................................................................................... 5
2.2.3 Coating............................................................................................... 6
2.2.4 Insulation ........................................................................................... 6
2.2.5 Outer Jacket ....................................................................................... 7
2.3 Application ....................................................................................... 8
2.3.1 General............................................................................................... 8
2.3.2 Coating Schedule ............................................................................... 9
2.3.3 Workmanship..................................................................................... 11
2.3.4 Items Not to be Coated ...................................................................... 11
2.3.5 Preparation ......................................................................................... 11
2.3.6 Grit Blasting ...................................................................................... 12
2.3.7 Application of Protective Coating ..................................................... 12
COATING AND INSULATION OF CHILLED WATER PIPE S36 - Page 1 of 17

2.3.8 Testing and Inspection ....................................................................... 14
2.3.9 Cleanup .............................................................................................. 15

1. COATING & INSULATION OF CHILLED WATER PIPE
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
1 This part of Section 36 covers the minimum requirements for surface preparation,
coating and insulation of chilled water piping for district cooling.
(a) Requirements for field joints will be found in Part 4.
2 Section 36 - Part 1 Manufacture of Carbon Steel Pipes.
2.1.3 References
1 Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following
references, unless otherwise stated in the specification or unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
(a) ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer,

and Related Products.
(b) BS 729:1971 - Hot-dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles.
(c) BS 5493:1977 - Code of practice for protective coating on iron and steel
structures against corrosion.
(d) BS 7079 - Preparation of steel substraights before application of
paints and related products.
(e) NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) – Industrial
Maintenance Painting.
(f) SSPC (Steel Structures Paining council) – Steel Structures Painting Manual.
(g) SIS 05 900-1967- Rust grades for steel surfaces and preparation grades
prior to protective coating, Swedish Standard.
2.1.4 Definitions

section.
(a) “WFT” shall mean wet film thickness.

(b) “DFT” shall mean dry film thickness.
(c) “NDFT” shall mean nominal dry film thickness.

2.1.5 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall submit detailed information on the proposed coating and
insulation at the bid stage for the Engineer’s approval prior to proceeding with the
work.
(a) No subsequent deviations or exceptions shall be permitted without the

written approval of the Engineer.
(b) The Contractor shall co-ordinate, expedite and resolve any problems with
the Manufacturer/Supplier. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring
that all relevant information and documentation is passed on to the
Manufacturer/Supplier, to complete the work to the satisfaction of Engineer.
(c) The final responsibility for the satisfactory completion of the work shall lie
with the Contractor.
2 Contractor shall submit manufacturers’ current printed product description,

materials safety and technical data sheets for coating and insulation systems,
including:
(a) Pigmentation
(b) Thinners
(c) Cleaner
(d) Pot life after mixing
(e) Nominal Solid contents by volume (%)
(f) Flash Point
(g) Nominal Dry Film thickness in Microns
(h) Theoretical spread at Normal Dry Film thickness
(i) Drying time at 250C
(j) Colours available
(k) Storage conditions and standard container size
(l) Product weight per liter
3 Detailed mixing, thinning and application instructions, minimum and maximum

application temperature, curing and drying times between coatings.
4 Instructions for surface preparation requirements, number and types of coats

required for each surface.
5 Color charts for each coating system.
6 Certifications from manufacturer verifying factory applied prime coatings are

compatible with the specified finish coatings.
7 Detailed maintenance manual including the following information:
(a) Product name and number.

(b) Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor.
(c) Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning.
(d) Detailed procedures for light repairs such as scratches and staining.
8 Abrasive:

(a) Information on:
(i) Particle size distribution.

(ii) Dust generation at proposed operating pressure and distance.
(iii) pH value.
(iv) Soluble chloride content.
(v) Analysis for free silica.
(vi) Trace toxic contaminants.
9 Sample Panels
(a) Apply a complete coating / insulation system to a panel of the same material
as that on which the coating and/or insulation will be applied and submit for
approval.
(b) Approved sample panels will be retained by the Engineer for quality control
in applying coating / insulation systems.
1 Applicator Qualifications
(a) Submit name and experience record of proposed coating/insulation

applicator for Engineer’s approval.
2 Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in
sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the
pipes, if so desired.
3 All notifications shall be made by a written inspection request.
(a) An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineer’s office, but the original must
arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
4 Minimum notification times shall be as follows:
(a) 48 hours within Doha city and surrounding area.

(b) 72 hours for other areas within Qatar.
(c) 2 Weeks outside of Qatar.
1 Deliver coating and insulation materials in original, unopened packages and

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label including the following
information:
(a) Name or title of material.

(b) Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
(c) Manufacturer's name.
(d) Color code and name.
(e) Expiry date.

2 Storage
(a) Store materials on site in a suitable location, protected from exposure to

extreme weather.
(b) Keep area clean and accessible.
(c) Restrict storage to coating materials and related equipment.
(d) Keep coating & insulation materials stored in an insulated cool room at
temperatures between 180C and 260C 24 hours a day, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
(e) Comply with Local Laws and Regulations.
(f) Provide approved fire extinguishers in material storage area.
2.1.8 Environmental Conditions
1 To avoid condensation, blast cleaning may only be done when the steel surface
temperature is at least 30C above the dew point and relative humidity is below 85%.
2 Unless otherwise recommended by coating manufacturer, the ambient temperature

shall be between 150C and 500C when applying coatings other than water-thinned
epoxy.
3 Water-thinned coatings shall be applied only when ambient temperature is between

100C and 400C.
4 Epoxy coatings will be applied only within the minimum and maximum
temperatures recommended by the coating manufacturer.
5 Coatings, except water-thinned types shall be applied only to surfaces that are
completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.
6 Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%.
7 Do not apply in dusty or windy conditions as determined by the Engineer.
8 Paints and painting practices shall comply with all applicable state and local
requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds.
2.1.9 Performance Guarantee
1 The Contractor shall provide a Joint Performance Guarantee (Manufacturer and

Contractor) for the complete coating/insulation/outer jacket system for a period of 5
(five) years.
2.2 PRODUCTS
2.2.1 Pipe and Fittings
1 Carbon steel pipe and fittings shall comply with Part 1 of this Section.

2.2.2 Abrasives
1 Abrasives shall comply with the following requirements unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
(a) Abrasives shall be steel shot, steel grit or garnet grit.

(b) Silica sand shall not be used.
(c) Chose particle size, shape, and specific gravity to produce desired surface
profile for coating adhesion recommended by coating manufacturer.
(d) If not listed in manufacturer's literature, provide for a Profile of 50 to 75
microns.
(e) pH value : Not less than 4 nor greater than 10 when mixed in neutral
water.
(f) Soluble Chloride: None.
2.2.3 Coatings
1 All insulated piping shall have their external surfaces mechanically cleaned and
primed in accordance with this specification before applying insulating foam.
2 Epoxy coating shall be self-priming polyamide/polyamine.
3 Epoxy coating shall be compatible with subsequently applied insulation.
2.2.4 Insulation
1 All pipes and fittings shall be pre-insulated at an approved factory with rigid
polyurethane foam meeting the following requirements:
(a) 100% CFC free.

(b) Nominal thickness: 2” for pipes dia. <36” & 3” for pipe dia.  36”.
(c) Density ASTM D 1622 3.0 lbs / cu ft (48 kg/cu m)
(d) Thermal Conductivity ASTM C 518 0.21 BTU  In / SF  Hr
 0F (0.03 W/m  0K)
(e) Water Absorption ASTM D 2842 4% by volume.
(f) Closed Cell Content ASTM D 2856 90% Minimum
(g) Compressive Strength ASTM D 1621 30 Psi
2 Field joint insulation for straight pipes and fittings of sizes up to 110mm diameter
shall consist of prefabricated two half shells of LDPE with cell PEX insulation
foam, joined by an adhesive surface and metal clamps fixed over the joint to ensure
complete closure.
The filed joint insulation for pipe sizes 125mm dia and above shall consist of
polyurethane foam chemical poured into a sheet metal mould around the joint.
Then, a heat shrinkable sleeve with closure patch is applied and heat shrunk to
finish the joint.

2.2.5 Outer Jacket
1 Outer jacket / casing over the insulation shall be High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) with a minimum density of 950 kg/m3 and thickness as stated in the
following table:
HDPE Outer Jacket / Casing Pipe Wall Thickness Table
Nominal outside Minimum wall

diameter thickness,
D mm emin mm
75 2.2
90 2.2
110 2.5
125 2.5
140 3.0
160 3.0
180 3.0
200 3.2
225 3.5
250 3.9
280 4.4
315 4.9
355 5.6
400 6.3
450 7.0
500 7.8
560 8.8
630 9.8
710 11.1
800 12.5
900 12.9
1000 13.3
1100 13.8
1200 14.6
2 The insulated pipe must sustain an H-24 Highway loading at a burial depth of 24”
(600 mm) without crushing or deformation to the insulation.

2.3 APPLICATION
2.3.1 General
1 No substitutions shall be considered that decrease the following criteria, unless

otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(a) Nominal film thickness.

(b) Number of coats.
(c) Surface preparation.
(d) Performance criteria of the generic type of coating specified.
2 Furnish coatings and coating products under this Section from a single
manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
3 Compatibility
(a) Compatible materials shall be used as primer and finish coats of systems.
(b) Compatible barrier coats may be used between factory-applied prime coats,
or finish coats on existing surfaces to be refinished and subsequent field
coats with the Engineer’s approval.
(c) Contractor must also ensure that the paint system for insulated pipe is
compatible with the applied insulation.
4 Colors
(a) Colors shall be as scheduled or selected by the Engineer.

(b) Prime and intermediate coats shall be tinted as approved by the Engineer to
facilitate inspection of coverage for each coat.
2.3.2 Coating Schedule
1 General
(a) The schedule here-in shall indicate the coating system to be used for carbon
steel pipe and associated equipment.
(b) The list shall not be construed as a complete list of surfaces to be coated, but
rather as a guide as to the application of the various coating systems.
(c) All surfaces shall be painted except those specifically deleted herein.
2 External Coating System for Carbon Steel Piping & Equipment with Insulation
(a) Scope
(i) External coating for atmospheric protection of pipe, vessels and

other equipment which are insulated.
(b) Surface Preparation

(i) For shop application, grit blast cleaning to a visual standard of SA

2½ near white metal finish (SIS 05-59-00)
(ii) For Field application, power tool cleaning to a visual standard of St
3 (SIS 05-59-00).
(c) Coating System
(i) For shop application, 1 coat of Self Priming Polymine / Polyamide

Epoxy to a DFT of 150 microns minimum, by airless spray
technique.
(ii) For field applications, self priming high solids (65% minimum)
epoxy coating applied by brush to achieve a total DFT of 200
microns.
Notes:
(a) Contractor must ensure that the paint system is compatible with the applied
insulation.
3 External Coating System for Carbon Steel Piping and Equipment without
insulation.
(a) Scope
(i) External coating for atmospheric protection of piping, valves and

other equipment (other than galvanised/insulated).
(b) Surface Preparation
(i) Dry blast cleaning to a visual standard of Sa 2.1/2 near-white metal

finish (SIS 05 59 00).
(ii) For local touch up/repair work power tool cleaning to a visual
standard of St 3 (SIS 05 59 00).
(iii) Hand tool cleaning to a minimum visual standard of St 2 (SIS 05 59
00) only for specific applications.
(c) Coating System
(i) Prime Coat:

Inorganic zinc silicate to a DFT of 75 microns minimum.
(Minimum pure zinc content shall be 85%).
(ii) Second Coat:
Polyamide cured tie coat of DFT 40 microns minimum.
(iii) Third Coat:
Amine or Polyamide cured high-build epoxy to a DFT of 125-175
microns.
(iv) Fourth Coat:
Polyurethane high gloss finish to a DFT of 50-75 microns, with
finishing colour to match the existing or as approved by Engineer.
(v) Total Dry film thickness:

Minimum total dry film thickness shall be 325 microns.
4 External Coating System for Galvanized Piping
(a) Scope
(i) External coating for atmospheric protection of galvanized steel

structures, and galvanised piping.
(b) Surface preparation
(i) Surfaces shall be cleaned with fresh water and/or suitable solvent
wash to remove zinc salts and/or oil, grease etc.
(ii) Dry light blast cleaning with suitable abrasive such as aluminium
oxide or VASIL GRIT.
(iii) If blast cleaning is absolutely impossible then solvent cleaning with
an alkaline detergent agent may be used as a second choice surface
preparation.
(c) Coating system
(i) Prime Coat

Inorganic zinc silicate to a DFT of 75 microns minimum. (Minimum
zinc content shall be 85%).
(ii) Second Coat
Polyamide cured tie coat to a DFT of 40 microns minimum.
(iii) Third Coat
Amine or polyamide cured high build epoxy to a DFT of 125-175
microns minimum.
(iv) Fourth Coat
Polyurethane high gloss finish to a DFT of 50-75 microns minimum.
With color to match existing or as approved by the Engineer.
(v) Total dry film thickness
Minimum total dry film thickness shall be 325 microns.
2.3.3 Workmanship
1 Paint and coatings shall be applied so as to produce an even film of specified

thickness.
2 Edges, corners, crevices and joints shall receive special attention to ensure that they
have been thoroughly cleaned and that they receive the nominal thickness of paint.
3 Finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks
and variations in color, texture and finish.
4 Coverage shall be complete so that the addition of another coat of paint would not
increase the coverage.

5 Adjacent surfaces shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other approved
precautionary measures.
2.3.4 Items Not to be Coated
1 No paint or coating shall be applied within 50mm of edges prepared for welding.
2 Precautions shall be taken to prevent the coating from being applied to name plates,
couplings, shafts, valve stems, bearings, linkages, vent openings, gauge glasses,
pressure gauges, instruments, instrument windows, etc. Masking tape, plastic film,
or some other suitably impervious material shall be used, and all materials shall be
removed after the painting has been completed and accepted.
3 Following completion of coating of each piece, removed items shall be reinstalled.
4 Removal and installation shall be done by workmen skilled in the trades involved.
5 Equipment manufactured and painted at manufacturer's works in accordance with

manufacturers standard shall be accepted subject to the Engineer’s prior approval of
the surface preparation and painting system. The colour of the paint shall be as
2.3.5 Preparation
1 Surfaces to receive paint and protective coatings shall be cleaned as recommended

by the Coating manufacturer.
2 All Welded areas shall be cleaned free of slag, weld splatter, silvers, lamination or
mill scale.
3 Examine surfaces to be finished and correct surface defects before application of

any coating material.
4 Beginning the work of this section without reporting unsuitable conditions to the
Engineer constitutes acceptance of conditions.
5 Marred or abraded areas on shop-primed and factory-finished surfaces shall receive

touch-up restoration prior to any other coating applications.
2.3.6 Grit Blasting
1 All grit blasting shall be done in strict accordance with the referenced specifications
of the Steel Structures Painting Council.
2 When items are to be primed and finish coated in the shop, surface preparation shall
be as specified in this Section.
3 The Engineer shall have the right to witness, inspect and reject any grit blasting
done in the shop.

4 When grit blasting is done in the field, care shall be taken to prevent damage to
structures and equipment.
(a) Pumps, motors and other equipment shall be shielded, covered or otherwise
protected.
(b) No grit blasting may begin before the Engineer inspects and approves the
protective measures.
5 After grit blasting, dust and spent grit shall be removed from the surfaces by
brushing or vacuum cleaning. No blast cleaning shall be done in areas close to
painting operations.
6 Surface preparations shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(a) No painting or protective coating shall be applied before the Engineer has
inspected and approved the preparation.
2.3.7 Application of Protective Coating
1 Except where in conflict with the manufacturer's printed instructions or where

otherwise specified herein airless spray application shall be the preferred process.
(a) Spraying equipment, guns, nozzle sizes and pressure ranges shall comply
with the paint Suppliers recommendations.
(b) The equipment used shall be equipped adequately with air and oil vapour
trap regulators and gauges to achieve proper paint application. Traps or
separators shall be periodically drained. The air caps, nozzles and needles
shall be those recommended by the Manufacturer of the equipment for the
material being sprayed.
(c) The air pressure shall be adjusted to obtain optimum effectiveness that will
cause no excessive fogging of coating or excessive evaporation of solvent or
loss by over spray.
(d) Ingredients shall be kept properly agitated by mechanical means to obtain
consistency in the material. The spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently
clean of dirt, old paint and other foreign materials.
(e) Each coat shall be applied uniformly and completely over the entire surface
and shall be free from runs and sags.
2 Areas inaccessible to spray coating may be coated by brushing or other suitable

means, if approved by the Engineer.
(a) Brush application shall be done on areas which cannot be properly sprayed,
and for touch-up where spray application is not practical.
(b) Brushes shall be of a type and size which permits proper application of
paint. Round or oval brushes are most suitable for irregular surfaces, i.e.
bolt holes, welds, pitted steel. Wide flat brushes shall be used for large flat
areas. The brushing shall be done such that a uniform coat, with no deep or

detrimental brush marks, is obtained. Paint shall be worked into all corners
and crevices. Runs and sags shall be avoided.
(c) Surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray or sheep skin
roller.
3 Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, bolts and other
areas as determined by the Engineer, receive a film thickness at least equivalent to
that of adjacent coated surfaces.
4 All protective coating materials shall be applied in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
5 Prime coat shall be applied to clean surfaces within a 4-hour period of the cleaning
and prior to deterioration or oxidation of the surface and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
6 Coatings shall be applied in dry and dust-free environment.
7 No coating or paint shall be applied during following conditions:
(a) When the surrounding air temperature, measured in the shade is below
15oC.
(b) To wet or damp surfaces.
(c) In rain, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%.
(d) When it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed 85% or that the
air temperature will drop below 5oC within 18 hours after the application of
the coating or paint.
(e) When surface temperature is less than 30C above dew point.
(f) Dusty or windy conditions as determined by the Engineer.
8 If above conditions are prevalent, painting shall be delayed until surfaces are dry
and clean.
9 The day's coating shall be completed in advance of the probable time of day when
condensation will occur in order to permit the film a sufficient drying time prior to
the formation of moisture.
10 Care shall be exercised to avoid lapping paint on adjacent surfaces:
(a) Coatings shall be sharply cut to lines.

(b) Finished coated surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes.
(c) Drop cloths shall be used to protect floors, fixtures, and equipment.
(d) Care shall be exercised to prevent paint from being spattered onto surfaces
from which such paint cannot be removed.
(e) Surfaces from which paint cannot be removed shall be painted or repainted
as required to produce a finish satisfactory to the Engineer.
(f) Whenever two coats of a dark colored paint are specified, the first coat shall
contain sufficient powdered aluminum to act as an indicator of proper
coverage, or the second coating shall be of a contrasting color.

11 Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be coated before erection:
(a) No structural friction connections, high-strength bolts and nuts shall be

painted before erection.
(b) Areas damaged during erection shall be hand or power-tool cleaned and
recoated with prime coat.
12 Touch up of surfaces shall be performed after installation.
13 All surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry at the time of application.
14 All coating surfaces shall be kept clean and dry until the coating has reached a hard
set.
15 Special attention shall be given to safety, ventilation, the use of non-explosive

lights and other equipment.
16 Manufacturer's recommended recoat time shall be complied with.
(a) Sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse between successive coats to

permit satisfactory recoating, but once commenced, the entire coating
operation shall be completed without delay.
(b) No additional coating of any structure, equipment or other item designated
to be painted shall be undertaken without specific permission of the
Engineer until the previous coating has been completed for the entire
structure, piece of equipment or other item.
17 Dry film thickness specified shall be achieved and verified for each coat.
18 When coating has been damaged in handling or due to any reason, all damaged and
loosely adhering coating shall be removed and the surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned. One of the following methods shall be adopted with the approval of
Engineer.
(a) dry blast cleaning to standard Sa 2.1/2

(b) power tool cleaning to standard St 3.
(c) hand tool cleaning to standard St 2 (only in exceptional cases and only for
minor touch up/repair work).
19 Surfaces to be coated which become contaminated with oil, grease, salts, etc. shall
be cleaned with solvents or with detergent/fresh water solutions, followed by a
rinse with clean fresh water.
20 The type of coating materials used for repair shall be identical to, or in any case
compatible with the original materials. The designated coats of prime & finish
coats shall be applied to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.3.8 Testing and Inspection
1 Inspection Devices
(a) Provide, until final acceptance of coating and painting, inspection devices in
good working condition for measurement of surface profile, WFT, DFT,
adhesion, pull-off value and detection of holidays.
(b) Furnish certified calibration plates to test accuracy of DFT gauge and
certified instrumentation to test accuracy.
(c) Wet film and dry film thickness gauges shall be made available for the
Engineer's use until final acceptance of application.
(d) Holiday detection devices and adhesion measurement equipment shall be
operated in the presence of the Engineer.
(e) Inspection devices shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and when directed by the Engineer's representative.
2 Conduct DFT measurements and electrical inspection of the coated surfaces as

directed by the Engineer.
3 Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with the specifications.
4 After repaired and recoated ferrous metals areas have cured, final inspection tests
shall be conducted by the Engineer.
5 Coating thickness specified in microns on ferrous substrates shall be measured with

a nondestructive electronic type dry-film thickness gauge such as the Elcometer,
manufactured by Gardner Laboratories, Inc.
(a) The coating thickness shall be considered compliant if the average of all
readings taken meets or exceeds the specified NDFT and none of the
readings fall 20% below the NDFT.
6 Nondestructive type electrical holiday detectors shall be used to reveal

discontinuities, voids and pinholes in the coatings.
7 Epoxy coatings and thin film coatings shall be checked for discontinuities and voids
with a low-voltage detector of the wet-sponge type, such as Model M1 as
manufactured by Tinker and Rasor.
8 Use a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flo, which shall be
added to the water prior to wetting the sponge.
9 A high-voltage, low-current, spark type detector such as Model EP, manufactured

by Tinker and Rasor shall be used for electrical inspection of coal tar enamel only.
10 Tape-type coatings shall be inspected for holidays using a device designed for use
in

11 Pinholes shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed

recommendations and retested.
12 No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted.
13 Coatings not in compliance with the specifications will not be acceptable and shall
be replaced and reinspected at Contractor's expense until the requirements of the
specifications are met.
14 All gauges and detectors shall be provided by the Contractor subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
2.3.9 Cleanup
1 Upon completion of the work staging, scaffolding and containers shall be removed
from the site or destroyed in an approved manner.
2 Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed.
END OF PART 2

3. Welding of Chilled Water Pipe....................................................... 3
3.1 General ............................................................................................. 3
3.1.1 Scope ................................................................................................. 3
3.1.3 Reference ........................................................................................... 3
3.1.4 Definitions ......................................................................................... 3
3.1.5 Submittals .......................................................................................... 3
3.1.6 Welding Procedure Qualification Testing ......................................... 4
3.1.7 Welder Qualification ......................................................................... 5
3.1.8 Records .............................................................................................. 6
3.2 Products / Equipments .................................................................... 6
3.2.1 Welding Equipments, Tools and Supplies ......................................... 6
3.2.2 Electrodes, Filler Wires and Fluxes ................................................... 6
3.2.3 Pipeline Materials .............................................................................. 7
3.3 Welding ............................................................................................. 7
3.3.1 General............................................................................................... 7
3.3.2 Production Welding ........................................................................... 8
3.3.3 Cleaning and Pipe Bevelling ............................................................. 8
3.3.4 Alignment of Pipe .............................................................................. 8
3.3.5 Pre-Heating & Interpass Temperature and Post-Weld Heat Treatment 9
3.3.6 Tack Welds ........................................................................................ 9
3.3.7 Line-up Clamps ................................................................................. 9
3.3.8 Working Clearance ............................................................................ 10
3.3.9 Fittings ............................................................................................... 10
3.3.10 Inter-Pass Cleaning ............................................................................ 10
WELDING OF CHILLED WATER PIPE S36 - Page 1 of 20

3.3.11 Arc Strikes ......................................................................................... 10
3.3.12 Marking Welds .................................................................................. 10
3.3.13 Proximity of Welds ............................................................................ 10
3.3.14 Tie-in Welds ...................................................................................... 11
3.3.15 End Protection ................................................................................... 11
3.3.16 Weather Limitations .......................................................................... 11
3.3.17 Standard of Acceptability .................................................................. 11
3.3.18 Welding Material Disposal ................................................................ 11
3.4 Inspection and Testing .................................................................... 12
3.4.1 General............................................................................................... 12
3.4.2 Radiographic Inspection .................................................................... 12
3.4.3 Ultrasonic Inspection ......................................................................... 12
3.4.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection ............................................................. 13
3.4.5 Defect Acceptance Levels ................................................................. 13
3.5 Repair of Welds ............................................................................... 13
3.5.1 General............................................................................................... 13
3.6 Attachments ..................................................................................... 14
3.6.1 Vickers Hardness Measurement Transverses .................................... 14
3.6.2 Impact Testing Requirements ............................................................ 14
3.6.3 Location of Partial Penetration Weld Repairs ................................... 14

3. WELDING OF CHILLED WATER PIPE
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
1 This specification covers the requirements for field welding of chilled water
pipelines for district cooling.
2 Section 36 - Part 1 Manufacture of Carbon Steel Pipe.
3.1.3 References
1 Product manufacture, testing and inspection shall comply with the following
standards, unless otherwise specified or unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(a) API 5L - Specification for Line Pipe.

(b) API 1104 - Standard for welding of pipelines and related facilities.
3 American Society of Non-destructive Testing (ASNT)
(a) RP SNT-TC-1A - Personal Qualification and Certification in

Non-destructive Testing.
3.1.4 Definitions

section.
(a) “SMAW” shall mean Shielded Metal Are Welding.

(b) “SAW” shall mean Submerged Are Welding.
(c) “WPS” shall mean Welding Procedure Specification.
3.1.5 Submittals
1 Contractor shall submit detailed welding procedure specifications (WPS) for

approval by the Engineer for each pipe grade, size, and wall thickness prior to
commencement of welding procedure qualification tests.

2 The following welding processes are pre-approved for use on the project:
(a) Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) – Manual.

(b) Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) – Automatic.
3 Welding processes other than those listed above may be submitted for Engineer
approval. As a minimum, the Engineer’s approval shall require the following
conditions be met:
(a) Contractor has knowledge and previous satisfactory experience with the
process and/or system.
(b) Contractor has a successful past history using the process and/or system
which must be supported with documentary evidence. This shall be subject
to the Engineer’s review.
(c) In each case where a semi-automatic and/or automatic welding process is
approved for use, a manual welding procedure shall be qualified as a back-
up.
4 In addition to the requirements of Section 2.3 of API 1104, the following minimum
details shall be included in the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS):
(a) Project Identifications.

(b) Consumable trade names, type and batch number.
(c) Interpass temperature (maximum).
(d) Nozzle diameter for automatic welding (if applicable).
(e) Fit up tolerance.
(f) Oscillation width and frequency for automatic welding (if applicable).
(g) Electrode stick-out length (if applicable).
5 Each revision of a Welding Procedure Specification shall be given a new number in

sequential order and revisions marked in order to identify changes.
6 After acceptance by the Engineer of the Welding Procedure Specification(s),

Contractor shall notify Engineer of the date and location of the Welding Procedure
Qualification Test at least ten (10) working days before the start of any test.
Engineer reserves the right to witness all Welding Procedure Qualifications and
Welder Qualification Tests. Pre-qualified welding procedures will not be accepted.
All proposed welding procedures shall undergo a PQR - test.
3.1.6 Welding Procedure Qualification Testing
1 All procedure qualification test welds shall be allowed to cool for a minimum of 12
hours in simulated site conditions and then be fully radiographed prior to
destructive tests. If radiographic testing indicates the presence of flaws exceeding
the levels permitted in this Specification, the reason for these flaws shall be
investigated and explained to the satisfaction of the Engineer before re-welding a
test piece to the same (or any other) welding procedure. Automatic or semi-
automatic welding shall also be inspected in accordance with an ultrasonic testing
procedure, approved by the Engineer.

2 For mechanised or semi-automatic welding equipment, other than SAW, a

minimum of three consecutive complete test joints are to be made.
3 Pipe to be used for qualification shall be from materials to be incorporated into the
project, and shall be selected from among the heat exhibiting the highest carbon
equivalent
4 The qualification welds shall be destructively tested in accordance with API 1104,
except as amended by this Specification.
5 Three macroscopic sections shall be taken from each weld close to the 12 O’clock,
3 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions, they shall be ground, polished (diamond paste
finished) and etched to show the weld metal and heat-affected zone micro-
structures. Vickers hardness testing shall be conducted. The maximum hardness
shall not exceed 275 HV10 on the root side of the weld (weld metal, heat affected
zone and parent metal) and 320 HV10 on the cap side of the weld.
6 Photomicrographs showing the indentation locations shall be submitted with the

Welding Procedure Qualification Record.
7 Photomicrographs at magnification 200 showing weld metal and heat affected

zones microstructures shall be submitted with the PQR.
8 Untempered martensitic structure shall not be acceptable.
9 Hardness shall be carried out in accordance with Attachments Figure 1.
10 Nos of specimens shall be taken as per table 1 for testing. Impact testing shall be
carried out in accordance with Attachment Figure 2.
11 Tensile tests shall be in accordance with API 1104 and the following requirements.
Tensile strength shall not be less than the minimum requirements of the actual line
pipe used for the Procedure Qualification Tests. Maximum tensile strength shall not
exceed the minimum specified tensile strength of the pipe plus 30 percent.
12 Contractor shall review, witness and submit for approval all non-destructive and
destructive testing. All mechanical testing shall be carried out by a certified testing
facility approved by the Engineer. All Procedure Qualification tests shall be
witnessed and certified by an Independent Inspecting Authority approved by the
Engineer.
13 The Contractor prior to the start of any production welding shall maintain a
Register of all Welding Procedures approved for production.

TABLE 1
Steel Grade Specimen Size Charpy-V Notch Energy at 0oC

(mm) requirement (Joules)
Average 3 Single any 1
specimens specimen
API 5L GR B 10 X 10 27 19
10 X 6.7 21 15
10 X 5.0 18 13
3.1.7 Welder Qualification
1 Contractor shall use only skilled workmen for welding. Each welder employed by
the Contractor shall be required to pass a welding test on project material for the
type and methods of welding he will perform, including attachment welds. No
welder shall work on any phase of the pipeline unless he has been tested and
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall subject the welder to practice prior
to performing Qualification Welding Test.
2 Testing shall be in accordance with API 1104 Section 3.
3 Testing of prospective welders shall be at Contractor’s expense. Contractor shall

furnish all welding materials and equipment similar to those which will be used for
production welding. Contractor shall provide test nipples or materials for test
nipples identical in chemistry and mechanical characteristics as Project materials.
Contractor shall furnish a coupon-cutting machine and testing equipment.
Contractor shall prepare all test nipples. The welder shall make a test weld under
simulated field conditions. The weld shall be examined and tested by Contractor,
and witnessed and approved by Engineer.
4 The quality of the qualifying weld shall be determined by both radiographic testing
and destructive testing.
5 Test welds shall be free from cracks and lack of fusion. Any other defects shall be
within the limits of API 1104 and this Specification.
6 Each welder/operator shall be given a unique number which shall be marked in

paint on all welds produced by him. Paint quality shall be approved by the
Engineer. A register of qualified welders shall be kept up to date and available for
the Engineer’s inspection. Should a welder leave the job, his number shall not be
duplicated.
7 A welder’s competence certificate, which includes reference to the corresponding

WPS number, the essential variables, validity date and the test results, shall be
issued for each welder or welding operator for each test.
8 Any welder found responsible for an unacceptable level of defects/repairs, shall, at

the Engineer’s request, be removed from production. At the discretion of the

Engineer, the welder in question may be re-tested after an agreed upon period of
retraining.
3.1.8 Records
1 Permanent records shall be made, with full supporting information of all welds,
including repairs and re-welds. Records shall include a pipe tracking system or
field drawing which identifies the final location co-ordinates of each pipe and weld.
2 In addition to hard copies, all project-welding procedures (WPS and PQR) shall be
furnished on diskettes with a suitable software package.
3.2 PRODUCTS / EQUIPMENT
3.2.1 Welding Equipment, Tools and Supplies
1 All welding machines, line-up clamps, bevelling machines, cutting torches, and
other equipment, tools, and supplies used in connection with the welding work shall
be kept in good mechanical condition so as to produce sound welds.
2 The welding machines shall have all necessary controls for making current
adjustments for all pipeline welding requirements.
3 Sufficient meters, portable or permanent, shall be provided to calibrate machines

and to regulate voltage and amperages as may be needed.
4 Ground clamps shall be dependable and not “arc” the pipe. The clamps shall be
located as close as practicable to the point of welding.
5 The welding equipment used in production welding shall be the same type and
model welding equipment used during welding procedure qualifications.
6 Any equipment which, in the opinion of Engineer is not adequate for the welding to
be done, shall be replaced by the Contractor.
3.2.2 Electrodes, Filler Wires and Fluxes
1 All welding consumables shall be as specified in the approved Welding Procedure

(WPS).
2 The electrodes to be used shall be as per the qualified and approved welding
procedure specification. However, the root pass on the field joints shall be E-6010,
whereas for subsequent passes E-7018 may be used for SMAW welding of the
pipes. All requirements of storing, handling and welding with “low hydrogen”
electrodes shall be complied with.
3 Storage and handling procedures for consumables shall be submitted to Engineer

for review and approval.

4 All welding consumables shall be stored and handled in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s recommendations, as a minimum. Any consumable that becomes
wet, contaminated or damaged shall be removed from the Project Site and
destroyed.
5 Each tin or packet of electrodes, or reel of filler wire and bag of flux shall be clearly
marked with the respective batch number. Manufacturer’s Certificates shall be
supplied for each batch of consumables. Consumables stored in damaged packing
shall also be rejected.
6 Each type of electrode and designated Manufacturer’s trade name shall pass a
welding procedure qualification test. A full set of mechanical tests shall be
conducted in accordance with this Specification.
7 Welding consumables used during production shall be identical to those used

during welding procedure qualifications.
8 Sufficient quantities of each batch of consumable to complete the work should be

purchased by the Contractor.
3.2.3 Pipeline Materials
1 The pipe and fitting materials shall be as specified in the Part 1.
3.3 WELDING
3.3.1 General
1 Contractor shall be responsible for developing and obtaining Engineer approval of

all welding processes, equipment and procedures.
2 Welding procedures are required for all production welding including butt welds,
fillet welds, and all associated repairs. A weld procedure utilising a Tig Root Bead
shall be qualified and used for any welds performed after hydrostatic testing.
3 Both partial penetration and full penetration repair procedures shall be qualified.
See Figure 3 for location of partial penetration weld repairs.
4 Roll welding shall only be acceptable when using a fully automatic welding
process. Oxyacetylene welding and the flash butt-welding process shall not be
permitted.
5 The maximum time lapse between the root and hot pass (second pass) shall be
recorded on the welding procedure specification. The time shall be kept to a
minimum and shall not exceed 5 minutes.
6 Direct current negative polarity root passes are not allowed when using the SMAW
process vertical down technique.

7 Weld direction shall be downhill except for repairs.
8 For all tie-in welds, joints where an external line-up clamp is used and for full
penetration repairs, the root bead shall be deposited in the uphill progression.
9 All fillet welds shall be carried out with low hydrogen electrodes.
10 No single pass welds, or internal root sealing welds shall be allowed, except for an
automatic root pass applied internally that is an integral part of the welding
procedure when specifically approved.
11 Preheat shall be specified on the Welding Procedure Specification when it is

required.
12 If the ambient temperature is 10ºC or less and/or the pipe surface is wet, a
minimum preheat of 60ºC shall be applied.
13 Preheat shall be applied around the entire circumference of the pipe and 100 mm
either side of the bevel face.
14 The use of oxyacetylene gas for preheating shall not be permitted. If hand-held
torches are approved by the Engineer, a minimum of two fuel gas torches shall be
used on pipe diameters greater than 6 inch, when preheating manually.
15 All tie-in welds, repairs, fillet welds and fitting-to-pipe welds shall be preheated to
50C above that required for similar pipe-to-pipe butt-welds. The interpass
temperature shall not exceed 250C.
3.3.2 Production Welding
1 All welding shall be performed in accordance with API 1104 and this specification.
3.3.3 Cleaning and Pipe Bevelling
1 The following requirements shall be met by Contractor:
(a) Each joint of pipe shall be cleaned along its full length, immediately prior to
“setting up” for welding.
(b) Cleaning shall remove any dirt, mill scale, and other foreign substances
from inside the pipe.
2 All field bevels on line pipe shall be made with a bevelling machine. Hand
bevelling shall not be permitted. All field bevels shall be cut evenly and finished at
right angles to the longitudinal axis of the pipe, with no rough surfaces.
3 Line pipe will be supplied with a standard API bevel of 30 degrees, +5 degrees – 0
degrees and with a root face of 1.6 mm +/- 0.8 mm.

3.3.4 Alignment of Pipe
1 Details of alignment clamps shall be submitted to Engineer for approval. All joints
shall be aligned with internal line-up clamps, except for tie-in’s or under
exceptional conditions as approved by the Engineer. In situations where an internal
clamp is impractical, an external line-up clamp may be used.
2 The use of internal clamps shall be shown to not introduce undue stresses into the
welded joint.
3 The line pipe may have a longitudinal seam. The longitudinal seams in adjoining
pipe lengths shall be staggered by not less than 100 mm and shall be located in the
top 120 degrees of the circumference of the pipe. For all bends, the longitudinal
seam shall be in the plane at right angles to any bend.
4 Force shall not be used to correct misalignment other than the normal force
associated with the use of conventional line-up clamps.
5 Maximum misalignment or offset shall not exceed 1.6 mm prior to welding the root
bead.
6 Preheating requirements shall take into account weldability results that are available
from the line-pipe supplier and shall be defined so as to achieve the hardness tests
restrictions, as laid down in this specification in the weld area, heat affected zone
and parent metal.
7 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the preheat for repair welds shall be at
least 100°C and shall be applied uniformly around the full circumference of the
welds.
3.3.5 Pre-Heating and Interpass Temperature and Post-Weld Heat Treatment
1 The need for an appropriate level of welding preheat shall be determined during the
welding procedure qualification. Preheat and postheat requirements shall be in
accordance with the appropriate API code.
2 Preheating requirements shall take into account weldability results that are available
from the line-pipe supplier and shall be defined so as to achieve the hardness tests
restrictions, as laid down in this specification in the weld area, heat affected zone
and parent metal.
3 Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the preheat for repair welds shall be at
least 100oC and shall be applied uniformly around the full circumference of the
welds.
4 Any requirements for post-weld heat treatment shall be established during welding
procedure qualification tests. In such cases the specific requirements for heat
treatment shall be included in the welding procedure specification by the Contractor
and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

3.3.6 Tack Welds
1 Tack welds when approved by the Engineer shall be a minimum of 50 mm long,

and shall be welded with the same Welding Procedure Specification used for the
root pass and by a qualified welder.
2 All tack welds shall be welded vertical-up.
3 Preheat of tack welds shall be the same as the approved welding procedure
specification for that pipe or fitting grade, size and thickness.
4 Tack welds incorporated into the final weld shall be ground to a feather edge at
each end to ensure adequate fusion on the root pass.
3.3.7 Line-up Clamps
1 Internal line-up clamps shall be used to hold pipes firmly in position. Unless
otherwise agreed in writing by Engineer, internal line-up clamps shall not be
removed before the completion of the first pass.
2 For all tie-ins (closing welds) and all welds where external line-up clamps are used,
vertical-up welding shall be used for the root pass.
3 External line-up clamps may be removed when the root pass is at least 50 percent
complete and equally spaced around the pipe circumference, subject to the pipe
remaining adequately supported.
4 The pipes on both sides of the weld joint shall not be raised, lowered, or otherwise
moved, until both the root pass and the second pass (hot pass) have been completed,
unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of Engineer that the root
pass alone is adequate to resist deformation and cracking.
3.3.8 Working Clearance
1 The working clearance shall be such as to afford the welder maximum comfort
during welding and to facilitate the performance of radiography of the completed
weld. A minimum 400 mm clearance shall be maintained.
3.3.9 Fittings
1 The welding of pipeline fittings to pipe and/or fitting to fitting, shall meet the
requirements of this Specification.
3.3.10 Inter-Pass Cleaning
1 Each weld pass shall be cleaned to remove all welding slag and foreign matter prior
to welding the successive pass. Cleaning methods shall be in accordance with the
approved Welding Procedure Specification.

3.3.11 Arc Strikes
1 Arc strikes shall not be permitted outside the weld bevel. Should arc strikes occur
outside the weld bevel area, they shall be removed by grinding and inspected by
magnetic particle examination to ensure freedom from cracks. The remaining wall
thickness shall be checked by ultrasonic testing. If the reading is below the
specified minimum wall thickness of the pipe, the defective pipe section shall be
cut off. Repair welding of arc strikes shall not be permitted.
3.3.12 Marking Welds
1 All welds shall be given a unique number in sequence. The sequence shall be
recorded on identification weld reports and/or field drawings. The weld numbering
sequence shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
2 Immediately on completion of a weld, the Contractor shall paint the weld number.
The number of the welder(s) for each pass, and the date on which each pass was
performed on the pipe adjacent to the weld at a point where it shall remain visible
after field joint coating. These numbers shall be used by the surveyors to record the
weld locations and for radiographers to identify the welds. The numbers shall be
applied with a spray can or brush using water-proof paint of a contrasting colour to
the pipe coating. Punch or steel stamping shall not be permitted. The weld
numbers shall be a minimum of 100 mm high and legible.
3.3.13 Proximity of Welds
1 Adjacent circumferential welds in pipelines shall be separated by a minimum of 2

meters.
2 The distance can be reduced to 500 mm in the above ground pipe at valve stations
and pipe on the plant side of anchor blocks or expansion loops at end stations.
3 Branches, fittings, and attachments shall be separated away from other welds on the
pipeline. The minimum separation shall be the greater of:
(a) Diameter of Branch/Fitting

(b) Six (6) times the wall thickness of the thickest component
(c) 150 mm
3.3.14 Tie-In Welds
1 Tie-in welds in restrained sections of the line shall be made when the pipe
temperature is at the minimum. If necessary to avoid strain in the pipe, sufficient
restrained pipe shall be uncovered to allow slack loops to be held during the line-
up and welding of the tie-in. Under no circumstances shall the line be left in
tension after the tie-in. Bell holes made to facilitate welding shall provide adequate
clearance (not less than 400 mm) to enable the welder to exercise normal welding
ability and skill and for subsequent NDT, coating and insulation. The lap of the

strings at tie-ins shall be at least 2 m. All tie-in welds shall be 100 percent
radiographed.
2 The Contractor shall perform his work in such a manner to minimise the number of
pups and shall progressively carry forward and install the same between full
lengths of pipe. If pipe is to be added for a tie-in, the minimum length that may be
used shall be 1.5 meters. Two or more such pups shall not be welded together. All
pups of 1.5 meters and over shall be carried forward and be installed in the pipeline
where required. Pieces shorter than 1.5 meters shall be collected by the Contractor
and stocked as directed by the Engineer. Tie-ins with two or more pups may be
used provided that they each have minimum length of 1.5 meters and are separated
by an entire length of pipe. In no case shall more than three (3) welds be permitted
on an eight (8) meter length of pipeline.
3.3.15 End Protection
1 Pipe ends shall be adequately protected during transportation, handling, fabrication

and installation.
2 End covers, where provided, shall remain in place until the pipe end is welded.
3 On completion of stage fabrication or end of work shift or end of the day, any end
covers that were removed shall be replaced.
3.3.16 Weather Limitations
1 The applicable welding procedure approved by Engineer shall be strictly adhered to

at all times with regard to welding parameters and environmental conditions.
Welding may not be performed when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the quality
of the completed weld would be impaired by the prevailing weather conditions.
These conditions include, but are not limited to, airborne moisture, sand or dirt
particles and high winds. Windshields and enclosed welding stations may be used
when practical.
3.3.17 Standards of Acceptability
1 The standards of acceptability for all welding shall be in accordance with the
requirements of API Standard 1104, Section 6, and this Specification.
3.3.18 Welding Material Disposal
1 The Contractor shall furnish each welder with a container for disposal of weld rod
stubs. Containers shall be emptied at locations acceptable to Engineer. Contractor
shall clean welding areas at least once per day of all trash, waste, rod stubs, etc. to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. In no instance shall welding rod stubs, grinding
discs, rotary wire brushes, etc. be discarded onto the ground.

3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
3.4.1 General
1 The Contractor shall provide all weld inspection.
2 Each weld shall be cleaned by a power brush to remove all slag, splatter, etc., and
filed as necessary before inspection.
3 All welds shall be inspected 100 percent by visual examination.
4 All butt welds shall radiographed 100 percent around the full circumference.
(a) Where radiographic inspection is prohibited, ultrasonic inspection may be

utilized with the Engineers permission.
5 All Non-destructive Testing (NDT) procedures shall be submitted for Engineer

approval and shall be qualified individually on the welding procedure qualification
test welds, or when agreed to by the Engineer, on a production weld.
6 All fillet welds shall be inspected using magnetic particle examination.
7 All NDT operators/technicians shall be qualified to ASNT Level II or equivalent

and shall have a minimum of 2 years experience on pipelines working in the NDT
grade qualified.
3.4.2 Radiographic Inspection
1 Contractor shall supply all labour and materials necessary to perform radiographic
inspection. The quality of the film shall comply with the requirements of API 1104
Section 8 and this Specification. Any weld which in the Engineer’s opinion, is not
satisfactory as indicated by radiographic inspection shall be repaired or cut-out and
re-welded at the Contractor’s expense.
2 Procedures shall be qualified using both source and film side penetrameters.
3.4.3 Ultrasonic Inspection
1 Ultrasonic examination is required as follows:
(a) To verify minimum wall thickness after grinding. (e.g. arc strikes)
(b) Initial testing of automatic welds.
(c) Where radiographic inspection does not clearly show compliance of the
weld.
(d) Where radiographic inspection is prohibited for safety concerns.
2 At the commencement of welding with an approved automatic process (other than

SAW) a minimum of 50 welds shall be tested 100% by ultrasonic examination until

the Engineer is satisfied that the process is under complete control with this
specification.
3 Excluding b) and c), acceptance shall be in accordance with the relevant pipe
material specification.
4 Ultrasonic operators shall be certified in accordance with ASNT Level II. Engineer
reserves the right to test proposed UT operators prior to acceptance using the
approved procedures on a test weld.
5 Ultrasonic inspection procedures when required, shall be submitted to the Engineer

for approval, prior to use.
3.4.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection
1 Contractor shall supply a Magnetic Particle Inspection (MT) procedure for review
and approval by Engineer. The prod type technique per ASME Section V, Article
7, T-743 is not permitted.
2 Magnetic particle inspection is required for the following:
(a) Fillet Welds

(b) Any re-bevelling.
(c) On completion of weld repairs.
(d) On removal of arc strikes.
3 M.T. operators shall be qualified in accordance with ASNT Level II.
4 Engineer reserves the right to test proposed MT operators prior to acceptance, using
the approved procedure on a test weld.
3.4.5 Defect Acceptance Levels
1 All acceptance levels specified below are in addition to API Standard 1104:
(a) The internal root penetration shall not exceed 2mm.

(b) The external weld reinforcement shall not exceed 3 mm in height and shall
be uniform and in no area shall the weld cap be lower than the adjacent pipe
wall.
(c) An isolated pore greater than 25 percent of the pipe thickness or 3mm
whichever is the smaller in any direction, shall be considered unacceptable.
(d) Cracks found by non-destructive testing in any form or orientation shall be
unacceptable and shall result in the whole weld being removed, edges cut
back and re-welded.
(e) No arc strikes are permitted outside the weld bead.
(f) Repair of arc strikes shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. When repair
is allowed it shall be done by careful grinding only. The ground area shall
be examined by magnetic particle inspection to ensure freedom from defects
and the remaining wall thickness shall be checked by ultrasonic testing. If

grinding to remove the effects of arc burns reduces the wall thickness below
the specified minimum wall thickness of the pipe, the defective pipe section
shall be cut off.
(g) Tungsten inclusions shall be treated as individual inclusions and shall not
exceed 2 per weld and 3mm in size separated by a minimum distance of 50
mm.
(h) Where Magnetic Particle Inspection is applied on parent pipe, e.g. following
re-bevelling, no linear defects or laminations are permitted. Any indications
revealed by MT shall be investigated and removed by grinding or re-cutting,
and re-bevelling as necessary.
3.5 REPAIR OF WELDS
3.5.1. General
1 The system for reporting defects shall be such that defects can be quickly identified
and accurately located.
2 All repairs shall be carried out in accordance with API 1104 and shall be approved
by the Engineer.
3 All repair of field welds shall be done using low hydrogen electrodes.
4 The decision to proceed with repair in each instance shall be approved by the
Engineer.
5 Defects shall be removed by grinding or machining. Arc-air gouging shall be not

performed.
6 The cavity shall be finished by grinding to a bright and smooth finish with a tapered
entry and exit profile. The length of the cavity shall be 50 mm minimum.
7 The cavity shall be subjected to magnetic particle inspection after grinding and the
entire circumferential weld shall be subject to 100 percent radiographic inspection
when the repair has been completed.
8 The total length of repairs shall be limited to 30% of the pipe circumference. This
shall be limited to 20% for repairs which open the root. Repairs which open the
root shall be undertaken in the presence of Engineer.
9 Only one repair attempt shall be made. Should the repair weld fail to meet the
acceptance requirements the weld shall be cut-out.
10 Weld repairs to the pipe body or to the body of fittings or bevels are not permitted.
11 Single pass repairs are not permitted.
12 Repair to the weld root by welding from the inside of the pipe shall not be
permitted.

13 Individual weld repair procedures are required as illustrated in Attachment Figure

3.
14 Repair procedures shall be qualified in accordance with paragraph 0 of this

specification.
3.6 ATTACHMENTS
3.6.1. Vickers Hardness Measurement Transverses
3.6.2. Impact Testing Requirements
3.6.3. Location of Partial Penetration Weld Repairs

ATTACHMENT 1
VICKERS HARDNESS MEASUREMENT TRAVERSES
The Vickers hardness testing shall be carried out as follows:
 The load shall be 10Kg.

 Indentations shall be located along the axes as shown below.
 At least 6 equally spaced indentations are to be made in the weld metal.
 The heat affected zone shall be checked from base metal to weld metal and
the distance between indentations shall be 0.5mm.
 One heat affected zone indentation shall be within 0.5mm of the fusion line
on each side of the weld.
*Indentations shall also be made on the root side of the weld (weld metal and heat affected
zone).
FIGURE 1

ATTACHMENT 2
IMPACT TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Specimens and notch detail per ASTM A 370
FIGURE 2

ATTACHMENT 3
LOCATION OF PARTIAL PENETRATION WELD REPAIRS
FIGURE 3
END OF PART 3

4. Installation of Chilled Water Pipe ................................................. 3
4.1 General ............................................................................................. 3
4.1.1 Scope ................................................................................................. 3
4.1.3 Reference ........................................................................................... 3
4.1.4 Definitions ......................................................................................... 4
4.1.5 Submittals .......................................................................................... 4
4.1.6 Quality Control .................................................................................. 5
4.1.7 Delivery Storage and Handling ........................................................ 5
4.2 Products ........................................................................................... 6
4.2.1 Pre-Insulated Piping .......................................................................... 6
4.2.2 Epoxy Coating ................................................................................... 6
4.2.3 Foam Insulation for Field Joint ......................................................... 6
4.2.4 Exterior Insulation Jacket/Casing ...................................................... 6
4.2.5 Pipe Bedding Material ....................................................................... 7
4.2.6 Drain Valves ...................................................................................... 7
4.2.7 Isolation Valves (upto and including NPS 2½”) ............................... 7
4.2.8 Isolation Valves (NPS 2½” to NPS24”) ............................................ 7
4.2.9 Automatic Air release Valves ............................................................ 8
4.3 Installation........................................................................................ 9
4.3.1 General Requirements ....................................................................... 9
4.3.2 Earthworks ......................................................................................... 11
4.3.3 Protection of Underground Utilities .................................................. 12
4.3.4 Handling and Stringing of Pipe ......................................................... 12
4.3.5 Pipe Bends ......................................................................................... 13
INSTALLATION OF CHILLED WATER PIPE S36 - Page 1 of 27

4.3.6 Lining up for Welding ....................................................................... 14
4.3.7 Welding of Steel Pipe ........................................................................ 15
4.3.8 Radiographic Inspection .................................................................... 15
4.3.9 Field Joints for Insulation and Outer Jacket ...................................... 15
4.3.10 Lowering of Pipe ............................................................................... 15
4.3.11 Safety Measures Adjacent High Voltage Systems ............................ 16
4.3.12 Close Potential Logging Survey (CPLS) .......................................... 18
4.3.13 Tying-In ............................................................................................. 18
4.3.14 Pipeline Marking/Warning Signs ...................................................... 18
4.4 Cleaning, Testing and (Pre) Commissioning ................................. 18
4.4.1 Pre-cleaning ....................................................................................... 18
4.4.2 Hydrostatic Test ................................................................................ 19
4.4.3 Chemical Cleaning ............................................................................ 19
4.4.4 Chemical Treatment .......................................................................... 19
4.4.5 Pipeline Commissioning .................................................................... 19
4.5 Records ............................................................................................. 20
4.5.1 General............................................................................................... 20
4.5.2 Daily Records .................................................................................... 20
4.5.3 Weekly Records ................................................................................. 20
4.5.4 Monthly Records ............................................................................... 21
4.5.5 As-Built Drawings and Pipe Book .................................................... 21

4. INSTALLATION OF CHILLED WATER PIPE
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
1 This specification covers the requirements for the installation of pre-insulated

chilled water pipe both above and below grade.
2 Section 36 - Part 1 Manufacture of Carbon Steel Pipe.
4.1.3 References
1 Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following
references, unless otherwise stated in the specification or unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
(a) AASHTO: HS20 - Surcharge loading.

(b) BS 6164 - Code of practice for safety in tunnelling in the
construction industry
(c) Pipe Jacking Association, UK - Guide to best Practice for Installation of
Pipe Jacks and Microtunnels.
(d) Pipe Jacking Association, UK - An Introduction to Pipe Jacking and
Microtunnelling design.
2 American National Standards Institute / American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(a) ANSI/ASME B31.4 - Liquid transportation systems for hydro carbons

liquid petroleum gas, Anhydrons Ammonia and
Alcohol’s
(b) ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
(c) ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Iron Steel Butt-welding
Fittings
(a) API Spec 5L - Specification for Line Pipe

(b) API RP 5L1 - Recommended Practice for Railroad Transportation of
Linear Pipe
(c) API RP 5L5 - Recommended Practice for Marine Transportation of
Line Pipe

(d) API Std 1104 - Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related Facilities
4 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
(a) SSPC - SP - Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation
5 International Standards
(a) ISO 8501-1 - Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of

Paints.
4.1.4 Definitions

section.
(a) “CPLS” shall mean Close Potential Logging Survey.

(b) “NOC” shall mean No Objection Certificate.
4.1.5 Submittals
1 Product Approval
(a) The contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer prior to
purchase according to Section 1 Part 7 in order to verify compliance with
the specifications. Such information shall include at least the following:
(i) Manufacturers name.

(ii) Suppliers name.
(iii) Product name (if applicable).
(iv) Product description.
(v) Manufacturers technical data.
(vi) Storage instructions.
(vii) Installation instructions.
2 Material samples shall be submitted as required in the relevant sections within these
specifications or as requested by the Engineer.
3 Method Statements
(a) The Contractor shall submit detailed method statements for approval of the
Engineer meeting the requirements of Section 1 Part 7, for at least the
following activities and/or as requested by the Engineer.
(i) Surveying and staking of pipeline routes.

(ii) Transportation, storage and handling of pre-insulated pipe.
(iii) Dewatering, trenching and bedding.
(iv) Field jointing of insulation.
(v) Pipe laying.
(vi) Chamber construction.

(vii) Pre-cleaning.
(viii) Air/Hydro-testing.
(ix) Chemical cleaning.
(x) Chemical treatment.
(xi) Commissioning.
(b) The Contractor must issue method statements governing cleaning, testing
and commissioning during the detailed design stage to ensure that necessary
features such as pig launcher/catcher, fill/empty points, temporary vents etc.
required for the effective cleaning/testing of the pipeline are incorporated
into the works.
(c) Commencement of pipeline installation will not be allowed until the method
statements covering all aspects of the Cleaning, Testing and Pre-
commissioning are approved, by the Engineer.
(d) In addition to basic requirements, method statements shall also address:
(i) Safety measures.

(ii) How additional thrust loads will be accommodated.
(iii) Safe disposal of waste materials and liquids.
(iv) Record keeping.
(v) Inspection by the Engineer.
4.1.6 Quality Control
1 A written inspection request shall be submitted to the Engineer during the on site
installation work prior to proceeding with the following activities. Minimum
notification time shall be 24 hours.
(a) Pipe testing.
1 Products shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
2 Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner to

avoid product damage.
3 Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or
cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless approved by the Engineer.
4 Do not store products directly on the ground, unless approved by the Engineer.
Ensure adequate timber blocking is utilized to provide sufficient support.
5 Visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the Engineer.
(a) Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be

marked and set aside.

(b) Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing
to the Engineer for approval.
(c) No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted without the Engineer’s
approval.
6 Receipt of Pre-insulated Line Pipe & Fittings
(a) Prior to taking delivery and stringing, the Contractor shall examine the pipes
and fittings and satisfy himself about the condition of the pipe ends and
insulation/HDPE Jacket, etc. Contractor at his option may carry out any
inspection required to this effect. The Contractor shall remain responsible
for care and custody of the pipe and for any repairs to insulation, HDPE
Jacket and/or pipe end bevels.
(b) Transportation of line pipe from the storage yard to the construction site is
the Contractor’s responsibility. All precautions shall be taken to prevent
damage to insulation/HDPE jacket. Suitable wooden saddles with soft
padding shall be provided while transporting. Pipes shall not be stacked
more than 1 level high during transportation & storage.
(c) Any pipes and fittings which have been found damaged, particularly those
which are dented, buckled or otherwise permanently deformed, shall be
marked and set aside. These pipes may only be transported to the site after
the defects have been repaired or eliminated.
(d) Contractor shall be fully responsible for arranging and paying for all storage
areas.
7 Handling of Pre-insulated Pipes and fittings
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for handling, hauling, stockpiling,

storage and stringing the pre-insulated pipes and fittings. Under no
circumstances shall the Contractor allow wire slings or chains to come in
contact with the insulated piping while lifting.
(b) The Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable trucks and
equipment in sufficient quantity to transport the line pipe at the required
rate.
(c) Pipe and fittings shall be stocked, chocked and soft padded, to avoid
insulation damage and secured in position during transportation and during
storage at pipe dumps. Pipes shall not be allowed to drop or strike objects
which may damage the pipes or insulation/Jacket.
(d) Stringing shall be conducted in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Contractor shall use a spreader bar or lifting beams designed to give proper
support to the pipe during lifting and placing.
(e) Lifting hooks, when used, shall be equipped with a plate bent to fit the
curvature of the pipe and shall be fitted with a soft insert to prevent damage
to the insulation/HDPE Jacket or the bevelled ends. Both the end caps/bevel
protectors and lifting hooks should be designed to lift pipes without
removing end caps or bevel protectors. Rolling, skidding or dragging of
pipes shall be strictly forbidden.

(f) Pipes at all times shall be stacked at least 100mm clear above the ground so
that the bottom of the pipe remains free from any surface water. The pipes
shall be stacked at a slope so that rain does not collect inside the pipe.
(g) The insulated pipes and fittings shall be stacked by placing them on wooden
saddles provided with suitable soft padding. The supports shall be spaced in
such a manner as to avoid permanent bending of the HDPE jacket.
(h) The preinsulated pipes and fittings shall not be stacked more than one high.
Each pipe section shall be separated by means of spacers placed at
appropriate intervals for this purpose. Stacks shall consist of pipe sections
having the same diameter, wall thickness, and manufacturer.
(i) Pipes and fittings stacked in open storage yards/dump yards shall be
suitably covered on top to avoid direct exposure to sunlight.
(j) All stanchions of lorries/rail wagons used for transportation shall be covered
by non-abrasive material like rubber belts or the equivalent to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Care shall be exercised to properly cover the
top of the stanchions and convex portions such as reinforcement of the
truck/rail wagon body, rivets, etc., to prevent damage to the
insulation/HDPE Jacket. All trucks or lorries shall be subject to the
Engineer’s inspection prior to loading.
(k) Prior to commencement of handling operations, the Contractor shall submit
for the Engineer’s approval a detailed Method Statement indicating the
manner and equipment to be used for handling and stacking insulated pipes.
4.2 PRODUCTS
4.2.1 Pre-Insulated Piping
1 All pre-insulated piping shall conform to the requirements of Parts 1 & 2 of this
Section.
4.2.2 Epoxy Coating
1 Coating for application to field joints before insulation shall be a self-priming high
solids (65% minimum) two pack epoxy resin.
4.2.3 Foam Insulation for Field Joints
1. Liquid foaming agents for insulation of field joints shall be as supplied by the
factory applicator of the insulation system.
4.2.4 Exterior Insulation Jacket/Casing
1. The exterior insulation jacket (or casing) for field joints shall be “Ray Joint” fully
cross-linked heat shrinkable polyethylene sleeves as manufactured by Ray Chem.
4.2.5 Pipe Bedding Material
1. All bedding & pipe surround material shall be clean imported sand meeting the

following requirements:
(a) Amount passing 5mm sieve – 100%

(b) Amount passing 0.5mm sieve  50%
(c) Amount passing 0.125mm sieve  10%
4.2.6 Drain Valves
1 All drain valves for sizes up to 4” NB shall be ball valves, with flanged ends to
ANSI B 16.5 150 lb, lever operated, 3000 Psig cold rating.
2 Material Specification shall be as follows.
(a) Body - Carbon Steel bar stock material.

(b) Ball / Stem - Stainless Steel 316 (Stem shall be of blow out proof design)
(c) Seats / Seals - RTFE/FDM.
3 Alternative materials shall be used only with specific approval from the Engineer.
4.2.7 Isolation Valves (up to and including NPS 2 ½”)
1 All isolation valves of sizes up to 2 ½” NB shall be ball valves, with flanged ends
to ANSI B 16.5 150 lb, level operated, 1000 WOG rating.
(a) Body - A 105M (Carbon Steel Forged).

(b) Ball / Stem – Stainless Steel 316 (Stem shall be of blow out proof design).
(c) Seats / Seals – RTFE/FDM with O ring.
4.2.8 Isolation Valves (NPS 2 ½” to NPS 24”)
1 All isolation valves of sizes 2 ½” NB to 24” shall be butterfly valves, with flanged
ends to ANSI B 16.5 150 lb, full lug body. Valves shall be designed for bi-
directional service.
(a) Design Code - API 609 and AWWA C 504.

(b) Body - Cast Iron ASTM A126 CLB.
(c) Shaft - Stainless Steel 316 (Shaft shall be of blow out proof design).
(d) Disc - Aluminium Bronze.
(e) Seats / Seals - EPDM extended onto flange face bubble tight shut off at 150
psi.

4 Valves shall have lever actuator with memory stop for sizes NPS 6” and below and
weatherproof worm gear operator for valves sizes 8” and above.
5 Direct buried valves shall have welded ends and shall be supplied with disc
material as A536 Gr 65-45-12, Ni-Cr plated and with extended spindle.
6 Ductile iron castings for the valves shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
536.
7 Valves shall meet the following standards;
(a) ANSI B 16.34 : Valves Flanged and Butt Welded.

(b) API 609 : Butterfly Valves Lug type and wafer type.
(c) AWWA C 504 : Butterfly Valves wafer type.
(d) MSS-SP-25 : Standard marking system for valves.
4.2.9 Automatic Air Release Valves
1 Automatic air release valve shall be installed along the main supply pipeline as
2 Standard construction for these valves shall be used for all locations incorporating
double ball air release (one with large orifice and one with small orifice) and
flanged inlet connection.
3 The air valves shall be installed in a concrete protection box to prevent sand and
other foreign objects from damaging or entering the system. The manhole cover for
the box shall allow adequate ventilation in order to ensure proper operation of the
valve.
4 The nominal size of the air release valves shall be selected according to the
following schedule:
Main Line Size (DN) ARV Size (DN)

300 mm (12”) 80 mm
400 mm (16”) through 500 mm 100 mm
(20”)
600 mm (24”) through 800 mm 150 mm
(32”)
900 mm (36”) through 1200mm 200 mm
(48”)
5 The materials of construction shall conform to the following specification:
Body, cover and baffle : ductile iron to ASTM A 536 Gr 60-40-18

Float : stainless steel 13% chromium or light alloy coated with
EPDM.
Guides, seats, bushings,

Screws and other internals: stainless steel 316

Spindle coating : approved non-toxic fusion bonded epoxy, minimum DFT
300 microns.
6 The air release valve shall be equipped with a drain plug.
4.3 INSTALLATION
1 All works shall be carried out in compliance with the regulations and requirements
of Qatar Cool.
2 Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for providing
a complete installation.
3 Contractor shall, with due care and diligence, execute the work in compliance with
international practice and all local laws, by-laws, ordinances, regulations, etc.;
provide all plant, services and labour, inclusive of supervision thereof; provide all
materials, excluding the materials indicated as materials furnished by Engineer in
the Agreement; and provide all equipment, appliances or other articles required for
the execution of the work, whether of a temporary or permanent nature.
4 Contractor shall take full responsibility for the stability and safety of all operations
carried out and all methods of work adopted. The Contractor shall also take full
responsibility for the stability and safety of all existing facilities/utilities/roads/etc.
affected by any operation, or method adopted when executing the work.
5 Before submitting his bid, the Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected the
work area(s) and their surroundings and to have satisfied himself as to the form and
nature thereof, including sub-surface conditions, hydrological and climatic
conditions, the extent and nature of the work, the materials necessary for the
completion of the work and the means of access to all the work area(s). No claims
either by way of cost or time shall be admissible on account of non-familiarity with
site conditions due to Contractor’s failure to fully access and fully allow for
possible conditions throughout the contract period at the works sites or in gaining
access to them.
6 Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as above

mentioned as to risks, contingencies and all other circumstances, which may
influence the work.
7 Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own cost all lights, safety barriers,
fencing, watchmen (and associate facilities) etc., when and where necessary as
required by Engineer or by any duly constituted authority and/or by the authorities
having jurisdiction thereof for the protection of the work and properties or for the
safety and the convenience of public and/or others.

8 Regardless of the soil type or method of construction indicated in the documents,

the Contractor must use the type of construction required by the actual soil
conditions found at site at no additional cost to the Employer.
9 Responsibility for the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the
Contractor.
10 Contractor is advised to carry out any tests (at his cost) needed to satisfy himself
regarding the soundness of the pipes, fittings and jointing materials prior to
acceptance testing by the Engineer.
11 Pipe materials to be utilized shall be as shown on the drawings or as described in

the specification.
12 Each type of pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
13 Pre-Construction Survey
(a) Prior to any construction activities, the Contractor shall carry out a pre-
construction survey to stake the centreline of pipelines and define the Right-
of-Way or Corridor. Stakes shall be placed at locations where they shall not
be disturbed and from where the boundary of the corridor can be
determined.
(b) Contractor shall stake the entire pipeline route(s) as per the data available on
the alignment drawing(s) in compliance with a Method Statement to be
submitted for approval by the Engineer.
(c) The construction survey control shall be staked at a distance of 25 meters
maximum from each other. The staking shall be based on the markers set
along the pipeline route and construction drawings. Contractor shall
establish a reference point 10 meters offset from pipeline centreline.
(d) The final pipeline alignment shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval
prior to installation of any pipes, or commencement of any construction
activities.
14 Pipeline Corridor
(a) The Pipeline corridor is indicated on (typical) cross section drawings. The
pipeline shall be suitably located within the corridor after obtaining details
of existing services in that corridor and after obtaining local municipality
approval.
(b) Contractor shall co-ordinate with all relevant local authorities and utility
owners to obtain the approval for the corridor.
(c) Prior to any cleaning operation, the Contractor shall make himself familiar
with all provisions pertaining to the land and shall use his best endeavours
to comply with such provisions and to avoid any damage to property,
including other pipeline facilities on or adjacent to the corridor.
(d) Prior to the commencement of any construction activities in an area, the
Contractor shall locate and identify all existing buried facilities, such as

cables, pipelines, water mains, sewers, etc., including those not shown on
the drawings, crossed or at close proximity with the pipeline, by contact
with relevant Authorities, carrying out appropriate surveys and exposing
them by hand excavation, unless exempted in writing by Engineer. Once
located, the underground facilities crossed by the pipeline route or running
parallel to it, within the corridor, shall be clearly marked by methods
approved by Engineer.
(e) Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a detailed proposal for
precautions to be taken for avoiding or damaging existing pipelines,
electrical lines and cables, fences, roads, drainage, and any other existing
above or below ground structures or property of whatsoever nature adjacent
to or crossing the pipeline being constructed.
(f) Contractor shall note that the cutting or removal of trees and plantation is
strictly prohibited.
(g) All work carried out in the vicinity of existing pipelines and associated
installations shall be performed only after obtaining a construction NOC
from the Owners and shall fully comply with Conditions and safety
precautions stipulated in the NOC.
15 Crossings
(a) Crossing of roads, buried services, etc. with equipment and/or personnel
shall only be permitted after the Contractor has obtained written approval
from the authorities having jurisdiction and the Engineer.
(b) It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to acquaint himself with all relevant
requirements and regulations of authorities and governmental bodies having
jurisdiction over highways, roads, pipelines, cables and other services on the
Right-of-Way or crossing the Right-of-Way and to obtain their approval in
writing and all necessary permits before commencing work. Regardless of
the provision of drawings and specifications by Engineer, it shall also be
Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the Work is performed to the
requirements and specifications of the relevant authorities. In the event that
the requirements and specifications of the authorities are more stringent than
the Engineer’s, then the authorities’ requirements shall be performed at no
cost to Engineer.
(c) Highways, Main-Roads and their verges shall not be used for loading,
unloading or stacking of materials and/or equipment. For secondary roads,
such loading/unloading is permitted only after prior approval from the
concerned authorities. Contractor shall not close or divert roads without
prior approval from Engineer and the concerned authorities. Contractor
shall never unnecessarily hamper the users of the roads.
(d) The diversion specifications, if required, shall conform to the approval of
relevant authorities and in accordance with the specifications required by
them.
4.3.2 Earthworks
1 Refer to QCS Section 8 Part 2 Earthworks for general dewatering, trench

excavation, bedding and backfill requirements.

2 Normal Cover and Trench Dimensions
(a) Normally, the trench shall be excavated to a minimum width so as to

provide, on both sides of the installed pipeline, a clearance as specified in
the typical drawings.
(b) The cover shall be measured from the top of the preinsulated pipe to the
level of the original ground (or graded surface where such surface is lower
than the original ground level).
(c) Additional fill requirements as required and as shown in the alignment
sheets shall be carried out. The minimum cover requirements are indicated
in the alignment sheets.
(d) The chilled water pipeline shall be laid to follow the road surface grade and
in no place shall the pipe be laid to less than a minimum grade of 1 in 400
to allow for natural drainage.
3 Extra Depth and Clearances
(a) Contractor shall excavate to additional depth where the pipeline approaches
and crosses other pipelines, sewers, drain pipes, water mains, telephone
conduits, and other underground structures to facilitate the use of elastic
bends.
(b) The pipeline shall be laid with minimum clearance under or adjacent
obstacles as specified on the drawings.
(c) If greater minimum distances are required by authorities having
jurisdiction, than those distances shall be maintained.
(d) Where the pipeline crosses areas or easements which specifically require
greater than normal depths of cover, the trench shall be excavated to extra
depth as required, including any necessary “lead in” and “lead out”.
(e) Contractor shall excavate all such additional depths and dimensions as may
be necessary at tie in joints etc. at no extra cost to the Engineer.
4.3.3 Protection of Underground Utilities
1 As the general route follows existing pipelines and/or cables, the Contractor shall
apply for a construction NOC from the concerned authorities and shall take all
methods to ensure safety and protection of these existing facilities. Close co-
ordination shall be undertaken by Contractor with relevant Operation Departments
during all construction phases and particularly during excavation work.
2 Details of underground utilities, as available, will generally be indicated on the

drawings. However, Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to obtain plans
and full details of all existing and planned underground services from the relevant
Local Authorities and Facility Operators. The Contractor shall follow these plans
closely at all times during the performance of the work. However, the Contractor
shall be responsible for locating and protecting all underground lines and
structures, whether shown on the drawings or not. The Contractor shall use
pipeline locators and any other necessary means including manual excavation for
locating all lines, utilities and substructures as part of his Scope of Work.

3 Where the use of trenching machine/back hoe may result in damage to property
and/or subsurface structures likely to be encountered during excavation, the
Contractor shall only excavate the trench within 1.5m of such structures or as
stipulated in the NOC conditions. Further excavation shall be performed manually
in compliance with approved Procedures, at no extra cost to the Employer.
4 Where the pipeline crosses other underground utilities/structures, the Contractor

shall first manually excavate and expose such utilities/structures, and clearly record
their details and location on as-built drawings i.e. types, diameter, horizontal and
vertical location and angle relative to the new pipeline.
5 Temporary underpinning or any other supports and protective devices necessary to

protect the structure from damage shall be provided by the Contractor at his own
cost.
6 Contractor shall support crossed structures/utilities above and/or below ground.
7 If, despite all precautions, any damage should occur to any structures/utilities, etc.,
the Owner/Authority concerned shall immediately be contacted by the Contractor
and repairs shall be completed at the Contractor’s expense. The repairs shall be
completed under the direction and to the satisfaction of Engineer and the
Owner/Authority. If Contractor fails to complete the repairs within a reasonable
time, Engineer reserves the right to have the repair(s) completed by others at the
cost of the Contractor.
8 Contractor shall also arrange and provide as part of his Scope of Work all
permanent protection measures to cables, pipelines etc. being crossed, as required
by Authorities having jurisdiction. Such works shall not be limited to providing
additional coating, sleeving, concreting, etc.
9 If it is deemed necessary, the Contractor may (with the approval of all relevant
authorities) arrange to re-route obstructing utility lines. Subject to actual
agreement, the re-routing shall be done by the Contractor or an approved
subcontractor designated by the relevant authority. All such costs encountered will
be paid by the Contractor.
4.3.4 Hauling and Stringing of Pipe
1 Pipe shall be unloaded from the stringing trucks by means of suitable equipment
approved by the Engineer onto pipe supports, placed on the ground.
2 The pipes shall be strung in such a way that there is no hinderance to the road or
pedestrian traffic. The stringing of pipes shall be done in such a manner that will
not put the pipe at risk or cause interference with the normal use of access trucks
etc. Gaps shall be left at intervals or wherever requested by other users to permit
the passage of traffic or equipment across the corridor or along public roads or
highways or at service crossings as required. Pipe stringing shall be done in such a
manner as not to cause a hazard to or sustain possible damage from traffic.

3 Contractor shall record the pipe numbers, steel heat numbers, pipe lengths, wall
thickness and location of each piece of pipe, as strung.
4 These records shall be amended “as laid” to include the weld numbers and the
welding operator’s identification numbers, date of welding and shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
5 Pipe ends shall be protected with plastic end covers at all times to prevent sand
from entering the pipe while the pipes are strung along the corridor.
6 The Contractor shall lay out and measure the pipe so that the number of cut off
pieces, less than 1.5 meters long, is held to a minimum.
7 The Contractor shall, as far as possible, make cuts and tie-ins so that any 'off-cuts'
are more than 1.5 meters long. These 'off-cuts' shall be used for welded
connections between positioned line pipes instead of cutting lengths from long pipe
spools for this purpose. Off-cuts shall be carried forward and installed in the line
between full pipe lengths
8 Notwithstanding the above, the minimum distance between any two

circumferential welds shall be 1.5 meters and there shall be no more than three (3)
circumferential welds in eight (8) meters.
9 After the pipes and fittings have been strung along the corridor, they shall be
inspected by the representatives of the Contractor and the Engineer at the same
time. Any defective pipes shall be repaired or rejected as directed by the Engineer.
All pipe repairs and/or replacement for rejected pipes shall be at the Contractor
expense.
4.3.5 Pipe Bends
1 Contractor shall wherever practicable provide for changes of vertical and

horizontal alignment by utilising hot bends. Contractor shall not use cold field
bends. Hot bends shall be provided as indicated on the drawings and as required to
negotiate vertical and horizontal changes in elevation and alignment.
2 Overbends shall be made in such a manner that the centre of the bend clears the
high points of the trench bottom. Sag bends shall fit the bottom of the trench and
side bends shall leave the required clearance to the outside wall of the trench.
3 The minimum allowable radius for elastic bends shall be calculated based on the
properties of the insulation and the HDPE jacket in consultation with the
manufacturer in such a way to prevent damage to the same. The elastic bend shall
be continuously supported over its full length.
4 Contractor shall supply and install hot induction bends where these are specified on
the drawings and as required by the profile and alignment of the pipeline which
shall be finalised after obtaining all the details of existing services and actual site
conditions.

5 Any bends showing buckling, wrinkles, cracks or other visible defects or which are
in any way not complying, in whole or in part, with this Specification shall be
rejected.
6 No mitre bends shall be permitted without the specific approval of Engineer.

Contractor shall cut out and remove any bend or bends which do not meet these
specifications and shall replace the same with satisfactory bends at no additional
cost to the Engineer. The material required for replacement will be furnished by
Contractor.
7 Cutting of factory made bends for any purpose is prohibited.
4.3.6 Lining Up for Welding
1 The pipes shall be lined up in suitable sections such that lowering is possible
without any damage and disruption to the existing utilities and services. Contractor
shall submit a detailed method statement indicating the details of these activities
prior to commencement of any construction.
2 Immediately prior to aligning pipes for welding, each length of pipe shall be
thoroughly cleaned and examined internally/externally to make sure that it is free
from visual defects/damage, corrosion or corrosion pitting, dirt, animals or any
other foreign objects.
(a) Damaged/corroded pipes shall be set aside and not used.

(b) A gauging plate of a size acceptable to the Engineer shall also be pulled
through each length of pipe just before being welded.
3 Prior to welding, a heat shrink sleeve of suitable length to cover the adjacent field
joint shall be carefully placed over the pipe and slid back a sufficient distance to
avoid any damage from welding or other jointing activities.
4 The bevelled ends of each joint of pipe and the area immediately adjacent thereto
(at least 25 mm from the edge on the inside and outside of the pipe) shall be
thoroughly cleaned of paint, rust, mill scale, dirt or other foreign matter by use of
power-driven, wire-buffing brushes, or by other methods approved by Engineer.
5 Any damaged ends of pipe that are bent, cut, or otherwise mutilated, so that, in the
opinion of the Engineer, faulty alignment or unacceptable welding may result, shall
be repaired or cut off and re-bevelled to the correct angle with a bevelling machine
of a type approved by the Engineer.
(a) Dents in bevels with a depth of less than 1 mm shall be removed by the
Contractor during the cleaning and grinding, ahead of the field welding.
(b) The Contractor shall re-bevel dented bevel ends with a depth of dent
between 1 and 3 mm.
(c) Dents over 3 mm shall be repaired by cutting and re- bevelling the section
of pipe.

6 At the end of each day’s work or every time joining and welding operations are
interrupted, the open ends on the welded strings of pipes shall be capped with a
securely-closed cap or plug as approved by Engineer, so as to prevent the entry of
dirt, water, or any foreign matter into the pipeline.
(a) These covers shall not be removed until the work is to be resumed.
(b) The caps/plugs used shall be mechanical “force fit” type and shall not be
attached to pipe by welding or by any other means which may dent, scratch,
scar, or damage the pipe in any way.
7 Whenever the welded strings of pipes are left open at intervals to be tied-in later
after an appreciable time lag, under roads, streams and other crossings etc., and
when directed by Engineer, temporary metal caps approved by Engineer shall be
welded to the ends of the pipe.
4.3.7 Welding of Steel Pipe
1 See Section 36 Part 3.
4.3.8 Radiographic Inspection
1 See Section 36 Part 3.
4.3.9 Field Joints for Insulation and Outer Jacket
1 General
(a) Field joints shall be coated, insulated and sealed in strict accordance with
the insulation applicator’s recommended procedures from the factory.
(b) All Field Jointing procedures shall be approved by the Engineer.
(c) Field jointing shall generally be carried out prior to lowering and
backfilling, but only after all welds are radiographed for pressure tested.
(d) All workers involved in the coating, insulating and sealing of field joints
must be trained and certified by the factory insulation applicator.
(e) All such workers must pass field trials under the Engineers supervision
prior to conducting field jointing works.
2 Coating
(a) All field joints shall first be cleaned free of weld splatter, slag, slivers, scale,
rust or other deleterious materials (by power tools) as described in Part 2
Clause 2.3.2-2 of this Section.
(b) Coating shall also be applied prior to insulation as described in Part 2
Clause 2.3.2-2 of this Section.
3 Heat Shrink Sleeve
(a) After coating is completed, the heat shrinkable sleeve which was placed
prior to welding shall be slid into position.

(b) Ensure the sleeve has sufficient over lap on each end.
(c) Seal and shrink the sleeve in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
directions.
(d) Each heat shrink sleeve shall be subjected to an internal air pressure test
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations prior to foam injection.
4 Insulation
(a) After the heat shrink sleeve has been successfully tested, PU foaming agent
shall be pumped into the sleeve with a temperature controlled portable
dosing unit, which automatically mixes and dispenses the foaming agents in
the correct ratio.
(i) Mixing and pouring with buckets will not be allowed, unless
(b) PU foaming agent shall be stored in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions.
4.3.10 Lowering of Pipe
1 Lowering-in shall follow as soon as possible, after a specific section of pipe is

hydrotested and all field joints are inspected by the Engineer.
2 Before lowering-in, a complete check shall be performed on the exterior HDPE

jacket and field joints, to ensure a 100 percent, damage-free pipeline insulation
system. All points on the pipeline where the insulation had been in contact with
either the skids or with the lifting equipment during laying, shall also be carefully
visually inspected for damages, denting or other defects and shall be completely
repaired. Damages shall be repaired at Contractor’s cost.
3 If, after checking, it becomes necessary to place the pipeline again on supports, the
supports must be padded in such a way as to prevent damage to the insulation and
HDPE Jacket. Before placing the pipe on the trench bottom, a check shall be made
of the HDPE Jacket of all points that were in contact with the supports.
4 The time of the lowering-in operation and the amount of pipe to be lowered in shall
take into account the required backfilling operation and stability of trench walls or
inclement weather. The lowering-in operation may be stopped if it is demonstrated
the required backfilling operation cannot keep up.
5 Lowering-in can start after placement of the sand bedding and removal of any cut-
offs, pipe supports, stones, debris, stakes, rock projections or any other deleterious
materials which could result in damage to the insulation and HDPE Jacket.
6 Wherever the pipeline is laid under tension, as result of an assembly error (for
example, incorrect positioning of bends, either horizontal or vertical), the trench
shall be rectified or, in exceptional cases, a new assembly shall be fabricated, with
the approval of the Engineer so that it fits the excavation and laying bed.

7 Pipe Laying shall be performed in a safe manner, so as to avoid unacceptable

stresses and temporary deformations which may cause damage to the pipeline itself
and/or to the insulation. In areas where the corridor is restricted to less than the
minimum necessary for the transit of mechanical equipment, the laying shall be
carried out using other suitable means, approved by the Engineer.
8 Contractor shall take precautions immediately after lowering-in to prevent the

movement of the pipe in the trench, and shall pad pipeline with suitable padding or
backfill material on the same day on which it is lowered-in, and shall not leave
pipe uncovered overnight, in order to prevent damage to the HDPE jacket from
falling objects.
9 All measurements required for the preparation of “as-built” drawings, to the extent
required, shall be performed immediately on lowering-in and prior to backfilling.
10 The Contractor shall include for the construction of the designated number of thrust
blocks at locations to be identified by the Engineer.
11 In the thrust block location the insulation shall be removed from the pipe and a
puddle flange attached.
12 The Contractor shall submit a full method statement for this work which includes
proposal for ensuring the pipe is fully protected after construction of the thrust
block from moisture ingress which may encourage corrosion of the pipe.
4.3.11 Safety Measures Adjacent High Voltage Systems
1 Pipelines which are constructed adjacent to high voltage lines may be electrically
influenced by these high-voltage lines. High-voltage lines are defined as the lines
which are rated more than 11 kV. The voltage caused by the influence may at times
be so high as to pose a danger to personnel working on the pipeline. It is
imperative, therefore, that the instructions given below should be accurately
observed.
2 It is a prerequisite that all personnel working on the pipeline which is being laid in
any area which may be influenced by the high voltage system be given clear
instructions on measures to be taken.
3 Pipe sections shall be bonded at all times to earth stakes and vehicles and
equipment must be earth-connected. This may be achieved by attaching an un-
insulated cable or chain (which touches the ground) of adequate length to the
underside of the vehicle.
4 For plant and/or materials operating within 50 meters of the centre of a high
voltage system, special measures must be taken to prevent any approach beyond
that distance, unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
5 During thunderstorms or when discharges are observed on insulators, all personnel

are to leave the area of the high voltage line and pipeline.

6 To prevent electrical voltages in a non-buried section of the pipeline from rising to

dangerous values, the length of the pipeline section which has been welded
together before burial must not exceed the length at which the maximum
admissible voltage may be induced. This length may be calculated using an
approved calculation method.
7 Before a pipeline section is lowered into the trench, the structure’s earth electrodes
determined with calculation method must have been installed and connected to
both the pipeline section already buried and to the section which is about to be
buried. The electrical connections which serve the purpose of preventing dangerous
voltages must have a minimum area of 35 mm2.
8 Said connections must not be interrupted until after the permanent, safety earth
connections have been installed and connected to the entire, uninterrupted pipeline.
The earthing arrangement shall be subject to Engineer’s approval.
9 Personnel doing work inside any area influenced by a high-voltage system must
wear electrically insulating foot-wear (e.g. rubber soled boots) and wear untorn
insulating rubber or plastic gloves.
10 If work is performed within 50 meters from the centre of a high voltage system, the
following regulations below must be implemented:
(a) The work must not be started until agreement has been reached with the
authorities which control the high-voltage system, about the
implementation of the safety measures specified in this section.
(b) Measures must be taken to prevent excavating and hoisting equipment from
approaching high-voltage lines.
(c) A safe distance depends on the voltage carried, but for individual
connections, the minimum distance shall be:
1. 0 - 50 kV 3m
2. 40-200 kV 5m
3. 200-380 kV 8 m
(d) The measures taken may be as follows:
(i) Special selection of equipment, or limiting or blocking certain

directions of movement, or limiting the operational area, thereby
making it impossible for any work to be done at a distance from the
high-voltage line of less than the specified minimum.
(ii) In case the measures recommended above are not feasible,
installation of clearly visible markers (line of drums painted bright
red and white) of height and of signage lettering stating “no passage
beyond this point” must prevent any work being done inside the
danger area. Furthermore, an inspector shall be present all times that
work is being performed.

4.3.12 Close Potential Logging Survey (CPLS)
1 After the pipeline is laid and backfilled and after commissioning of Cathodic
Protection System, a CPLS shall be conducted by an independent agency approved
by the Engineer, and arranged and provided by the Contractor at his own cost, to
locate defects, if any, in the insulation of the pipeline..
(a) As an alternate to CPLS, a C scan is also acceptable.
2 The Contractor shall, where necessary, uncover the pipeline and make any
necessary repairs to the pipeline insulation to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All
costs of such repairs shall be to the account of the Contractor.
4.3.13 Tying-In
1 Where sections of the line are to be tied-in after the sections are lowered in and
backfilled, the length of pipeline left un-backfilled shall be kept to the minimum
necessary to facilitate the tying-in.
2 Contractor shall carry out tie-in welding, and other associated operations in
compliance with Part 3 of this Section.
4.3.14 Pipeline Markers/Warning Signs
1 Contractor shall provide and install concrete pipeline markers, along the pipeline
route.
2 Stainless steel plates engraved with details of pipeline shall be embedded in each
concrete marker.
3 Pipeline markers shall be installed at 100 meter intervals throughout the pipeline
route.
4 Pipeline markers shall also be installed at each side of road crossings, at changes in
horizontal directions, and at all electrical test lead locations.
5 Pipeline warning signs shall identify the existence of a buried pipeline and display
the name of the Owner/Company, with an emergency telephone number and the
cumulative distance in kilometres.
6 Details of the markers/warning signs shall be submitted for the Engineer’s

approval.
4.4 CLEANING, TESTING AND (PRE) COMMISSIONING
4.4.1 Pre-cleaning
1 Upon completion of the welding of a complete section of the pipeline, the line shall

be flushed using potable water at a minimum velocity of 1.5 m/sec
2 The Contractor shall provide temporary pumping and strainer facilities for re-
circulating the water in order to achieve the required flushing.
3 Following flushing, the pipework shall be given a final cleaning by pigging using a
brush pig.
4.4.2 Hydrostatic Test (for Carbon Steel Pipe)
1 After installation, the complete pipeline shall be subjected to a final hydro test
using potable water from end to end in one single section to the requirements of
ANSI B 31.4 to a test pressure of 225 to 230 Psi (g) and held under the above
pressure for a period of 24 hours (min).
2 No drop in pressure is allowed during the hold period. In case there is a drop in
pressure, the Contractor shall explain the same using calculations that the drop in
pressure is due to the drop in temperature.
3 The pressure and temperature shall be recorded using chart recorders having valid
calibration certificates.
4 Contractor shall supply all necessary fittings, equipment, facilities, etc. including
test ends and shall comply with the approved Method Statements and procedures.
(a) Contractor shall be responsible for the supply and safe disposal of the hydro
test water in accordance with the local Municipality guidelines.
5 Hydrostatic test for HDPE pipe shall be as specified in Section 33.
4.4.3 Chemical Cleaning
1 When the pressure testing has been completed and accepted the Contractor shall
immediately undertake the chemical cleaning of the total system.
2 The chemical used shall be of an approved pH neutral type specifically produced to

remove preservatives, oil and greases, dirt and general construction debris.
3 Water circulation, chemical addition and bleeding shall continue until the iron
content measurements is no more the 0.5 mg/l above the incoming water level.
4 The Contractor shall arrange to have an approved independent laboratory undertake

the analysis of the samples and also provide the Employer with duplicate samples
so he may undertake his own testing.
4.4.4 Chemical Treatment
1 Immediately after acceptance by the Engineer that chemical cleaning .has been
satisfactorily completed the Contractor shall undertake to provide chemical

treatment to the water in order to prepare the pipeline for connection and
integration to the existing live chilled water distribution system.
2 The chemicals to be dosed shall be a corrosion inhibitor and a micro-biocide of a

type and manufacture to be approved by the Engineer.
3 Chemical treatment shall be continued until the samples taken confirm acceptable
levels in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.
4 The Contractor shall arrange to have an approved independent laboratory undertake

the analysis of the samples and also provide the Employer with duplicate samples
so he may undertake his own testing.
4.4.5 Pipeline Commissioning
1 The contractor shall include for all necessary attendance to assist the Employer to
commission and integrate the new pipeline system with the existing system.
4.5 RECORDS
4.5.1 General
1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer various records and reports on a daily,
weekly and monthly basis during and immediately after the construction. This shall
as a minimum include, but not be limited to the following:
4.5.2 Daily Records
1 Separate progress reports of all crews
2 Daily welding results and repairs (& NDT results as per contract welding spec)
3 Actual weather conditions
4 Application for variations, if any
5 Accidents
6 Damages
7 Activities required from Engineer at short notice
8 Material Receipts
9 Urgently required materials
10 Programme for following day.

4.5.3 Weekly Records
1 Schedule of construction work with shippages (if any) and revised completion
dates.
2 Up to date list of confirmed Site Instructions issued by Engineer
3 Materials Receipts/Delivery
4 Material defects and repairs
5 Outstanding activities of Engineer
6 List of installed markers, chainage
7 Required approvals from Engineer
8 Progress planned
9 Report of manning of all crews, equipment and plant
10 Report of equipment and plant
11 Report of accidents
12 Report of damages
13 Report of Acquired Releases, Permits
14 Required materials for next month, etc.
15 Safety statistics
4.5.4 Monthly Records
1 Progress report for payment, safety report, report of accidents, security report,
health and environment report, material balance, approved variations.
2 Further, the Contractor shall provide (for approval if required) Engineer with
documents such as:
(a) Schedule for construction work

(b) Bio-data of key personnel (including foremen)
(c) (Revised) list of addresses of personnel in particular of medical staff, safety
and security officers
(d) (Revised) list of approved coaters
(e) (Revised) list of approved Subs
(f) Time schedule
(g) Acquired permits and/or approvals from any authorities, endowments

(h) Minutes of meeting with Engineer with comments, if any

(i) Material certificates, material receipts, etc.
(j) Guarantees from Vendors and Subs
(k) Calculations, temporary works, etc.
(l) Drawings issued by Contractor
(m) Vendor drawings
(n) All ‘as built’ drawings including NDT records
(o) Procedures such as surveying, staking, fencing, etc., welding procedures,
welder qualification, coating procedure, installation of crossing, hydrostatic
testing, blasting
(p) Pipe and welding book
(q) Material records and accounting book
(r) Reports such as radiographic examination and other non-destructive testing
(s) Material tests (coating, welding, painting, etc.)
(t) Computerised potential logging test
(u) Water samples
(v) Cleaning, report before hydrostatic test
(w) Hydrostatic test
(x) Calibration test
(y) Equipment certificates (dead weight tester, instruments, vessels, equipment,
etc.)
(z) Installation, operation, and maintenance manuals on all equipment
(aa) Assembly drawings with keyed parts list on all equipment
(bb) Two-year recommended spare parts list on all equipment
(cc) Major road crossings
(dd) Etc.
4.5.5 As-Built Drawings and Pipe Book
1 Contractor shall prepare ‘as built’ drawings of all Engineer issued drawings and of
all Contractor work drawings including vendor drawings, such as, but not limited
to (as applicable):
(a) Route maps

(b) Changes of wall thickness, materials
(c) Location and details of valves, insulating joints, fencing, etc.
(d) Location and details of buried services
(e) Location and details of road, water crossings, etc.
(f) Location and details of casing pipes, vents, etc.
(g) Location and type of insulation
(h) Location and type of weighting, anchoring
(i) Location and type of route markers
(j) Location of further appurtenances (air vents and drains)
(k) Location of Corridor and of pipeline with respect to Corridor
(l) Type of soil
(m) Type of rock
(n) Type of ripping
(o) Sand padding
(p) Type of road pavement

(q) Details of bank or plantation protection, number of insulators, seals, etc.
2 All permanent equipment installed by Contractor shall be provided with

nameplates by Contractor. All texts shall be submitted to Engineer for approval
before plates may be manufactured.
3. Contractor shall maintain a pipe and welding book and shall mention:
(a) Data relevant to the project and section thereof

(b) Sequential pipe number
(c) Length brought forward (for pipes and other materials)
(d) Length to bring forward (for pipes and other materials)
4 Alignment sheet number and at least the location thereon of two welds on every
page of the pipe book.
(a) Diameter of pipeline

(b) Length of each pipe
(c) Wall thickness
(d) Pipe number
(e) Identification number, certificate number
(f) Cut and re-numbered pipe ends
(g) Coating
(h) Date of stringing
(i) Date of welding
(j) Direction of working
(k) Weld number
(l) Welder number
(m) Type of welding, electrode, diameter
(n) Weld treatment
(o) Equipment used for radiography
(p) Limits of valve stations, water crossings, etc.
(q) Test pressure, date and test (hydrostatic)
(r) Length of section per page in line separated in the pipes including field
bends and factory bends and/or other inline fittings
(s) Length to bring forward (pipes and other materials)
(t) Length brought forward (pipes and other materials)
5 In order to achieve this, Contractor shall identify all pipe elements. Sample format
of pipe book shall be submitted for Engineer approval. Final Pipe Book shall be
submitted to Engineer in the form of 1 hard copy (original) and 1 soft copy on
electronic format.
6 Contractor shall provide all pipes, bends, etc., greater than 2 inches with serial
numbers as soon as possible and measure their length and state it on the pipes, etc.
Pipes to be bent shall be measured prior to bending. Identification (i.e. letter,
number and length) shall be indelible. All serial numbers shall be recorded in a list,
which shall also state appurtenant pipe numbers.

7 Beside recording the stamped-in pipe numbers, length of pipe and painted-on serial
numbers, the stamped-in numbers of T-pieces, bends, valves, etc. and the batch
numbers of bends, T-pieces, valves, etc. and the make of valves, shall also be
recorded in said list. Before a pipe length, pipe end, etc., is cut, the painted serial
number and stamped-in pipe number shall be transferred by the Contractor in the
presence of Engineer to either side of the joint which is to be made by cutting, and
the changes shall be recorded in the above-mentioned list stating the (new) length.
8 The result shall be such that all pipes, pups, etc. of diameter greater than 2 inch
bear clear, painted identification marks. Contractor shall explicitly instruct the staff
that parts which cannot be identified must not be removed, except after permission
by Engineer. As a general rule, parts must be marked as described above before
being removed. Under no conditions may unmarked parts be incorporated into the
work.
END OF PART 4

Additions to Qatar Construction Specification (QCS)
The following section shall govern PNEUMATIC SOLID WASTE COLLECTION

NETWORK AND STATIONS on the above referenced project and shall be read in
conjunction with the Qatar Construction Specification (QCS) and amendments thereto:
SECTION 80
PNEUMATIC SOLID WASTE COLLECTION NETWORK AND STATIONS
PNEUMATIC SOLID WASTE COLLECTION NETWORK AND STATIONS S80 - Page 1 of 38

Q18021-0100D-PK2-PD-SPC-ENV-01 REV 0
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Related Sections and/or Parts
1.3 References
1.4 Definitions
1.5 Submittals
1.6 Quality Control
1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling
2. COLLECTION STATION EQUIPMENT

2.1 Collection Station General Description
2.2 Refuse Separator and Rotating Screen
2.3 Refuse Compactor
2.4 Refuse container
2.5 Container conveyer
2.6 Exhausters
2.7 Air Pipes and Allied Equipment
2.8 Compressed Air system
2.9 Dust Filter & Active Carbon Filter Unit
3. TRANSPORT PIPE NET - MILD STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

3.1 General
3.2 Pre-laying building network interfaces
3.3 Refuse transportation pipes
3.4 Straight Pipes, coated
3.5 Standard Bends 508- 528 x 8-15 mm, R= ≥1800, coated
3.6 Standard Bends 508 – 528 x 8 –15 mm, R = ≥1800, incl. 1000 straight pipe, coated
3.7 RAEX Bends 508 – 528 x 8 - 15 mm, R= ≥1800, incl. straight pipe, coated
3.8 Nihard Bends - 500x25 mm, coated or unpainted
3.9 Branch (Y) pipes - 500, 30 deg., coated
3.10 Branch (Y) pipes - 500, 30 deg., coated - site fabrication
3.11 DV connection - 500 - coated - site fabrication
3.12 AV connection - 400 - coated - site fabrication
3.13 Inspection door 500 - shop primer
3.14 External Coating
3.15 Sectioning Valve 500
3.16 Conduit PEL 50/44
3.17 Control cables
3.18 Pneumatic pipes
4. FEEDER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

4.1 Refuse Storage Section with Analog sensor
4.2 Discharge valves
4.3 The out door discharge valve – retail and villas inlets
4.4 Air inlet valves
4.5 Auxiliary Air inlet on Storage section, upper secondary inlet
4.6 Control Unit - Air Inlet Valve and Discharge Valve

5. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

5.1 General
5.2 Inspection and Testing during Construction
5.3 General Commissioning Requirements
5.4 Functional Test
5.5 Performance Test
5.6 Testing and Commissioning for Future Extension
5.7 Submissions

1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1. This Section covers the Manufacture, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of the complete Pneumatic Solid Waste Collection System
(PSWCS) excluding building, electrical and instrumentation (SCADA system)
works. The works specified in this section consist of three main parts as follows:
a) Part 1 covers the following plant and equipment inside the collection station
terminal buildings:
i. Cyclone / Waste separators system with rotating screen.

ii. Waste compactors
iii. Containers
iv. Container conveyor system
v. Compressed air system
vi. Exhausters with non-return valve
vii. Dust filter and silencer
viii. Deodorization equipment
b) Part 2 cover the waste conveyance pipe network including the following:
i. 500 mm dia mild steel pipe net

ii. Special hardened boron steel bends (Raex) and Nihard bends
iii. Inspection openings,
iv. Air Inlet valve and discharge inlet valve connections
v. Sectioning valves
vi. PE conduits
vii. Control cables
viii. Pneumatic compressed air pipes
c) Part 3 include the feeder system including the following items :
i. Mild Steel Temporary Storage Sections

ii. Analog Sensor Equipment
iii. Discharge Valve – Indoor High Rise and Town house Inlets
iv. Discharge Valve – Outdoor and Retail
v. Discharge Valve – Horizontal
vi. Air Inlet Valve – Indoor & outdoor
vii. Auxiliary and Secondary Air inlet valves
viii. Control Panel at Inlet location
ix. External outdoor Inlet Discharge Station
x. All the incidental sundry components necessary for the complete
installation of the feeder system

1.2 Related Sections and/or Parts
1 Section 1 - General
2 Section 10 - Instrumentation, Control and Automation
3 Section 19 - Plumbing Works
4 Section20 - Drainage Works for Buildings
5 Section21 - Electrical Works
6 Section 22 - Air Conditioning, Refrigeration and Ventilation
7 Section 23 - Fire Fighting and Fire Alarm Systems
1.3 References
1. When references to the following capitalized abbreviations are made in these

Specifications, they refer to specifications, standards or methods of the respective
national or international associations; and it implies that other national standards or
internationally accepted standards, which ensure an equal, or higher quality than the
standards mentioned will be accepted. The Contractor shall submit any explanatory
material upon request of the Consultant concerning the standards in conformity of
which his goods will be manufactured.
BS British Standards
ISO International Standardisation Organisation
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers´Assosiation, U.S.A.
ICE International Electrical Commission
1.4 Definitions
1. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilized in this

section:
a) “PSWCS” acronym for pneumatic solid waste collection system.

b) “Pipe net” means mild steel pipes used to transport the waste from the inlet
stations and discharge valves to the collection station.
c) “MS” shall mean Mild Steel Pipes.
d) “NiHard” shall mean special wear resistant, cast steel alloy normally used in
bends and Y sections where high resistance is anticipated.
e) “Y Sections” means mild steel or special alloy steel pipe junction
connection which connects the individual plot waste transport pipe to the
main transport pipe.
f) “Chute” means garbage chute in the building.(By others) to be 500mm dia
to match storage section
g) “Hopper Door” means volumetric controlled inlet door to allow access to
garbage chute for depositing waste.(By others)
h) “Storage Section” means mild steel temporary storage section below the
garbage chute used to collect the waste prior to emptying into the pipe net
for transportation to the collection station. This is connected to the discharge

valve.
i) “Level Sensor” means analog level indicator in temporary storage section to
signal collection station regarding build up of waste in storage section.
When waste has reached maximum storage capacity in the storage section
or inlet station and needs emptying.
j) “DV” shall mean Discharge valve and a valve which prevents waste or
refuse from entering into the pipe net and normally is closed. Disposed
waste is temporarily stored on or behind the valve. The valve is opened
when the waste is collected.
k) “AV” means Air Inlet Valve or Transport air inlet valve which is opened
before the emptying sequence and this valve opens allowing air to be sucked
into the pipe net from the atmosphere creating the negative pressure and
required air speed in the pipe.
l) “Inlet Station” means outdoor or indoor disposal station for retail and villa
residents to deposit waste.
m) “Sectioning Valve” means a valve in the pipe net which divides the pipe net
into different sections.
n) “Transport Air” means the air that moves the waste through the pipe net.
o) “Collection Cycle” means the collection pattern for the installation.
p) “Collection Station” (CS) shall mean the receiving station for the waste
delivered through the pipe system.
q) “Cyclone / Waste Separator” means a type of separator for removal of
material / particles from the air stream. The air laden waste entering the
cyclone from the pipe net is directed to flow in a spiral causing the particles
to fall out and collect at the bottom and the air exits from the top of the
cyclone.
r) “Rotating Screen” means a part of a standard separator which prevents
coarse and solid particles from the waste stream from reaching the
exhausters.
s) “Compactor” means a device which compact the waste into a container.
t) “Trolley” means a transport wagon for container shifting and movement.
u) “Control System” mean all electrical and electronic equipment units in the
collection station. Control cabinets, control boxes, software, cables and
junction boxes are considered part of the control system.
v) “SCADA” shall mean Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. Graphical
presentation.
w) “Deo filter” means a filter which removes odour from the exhaust air.
x) “Silencer” reduces noise from the exhaust air before being let out into the
atmosphere.
y) “System Cycle Time” means the optimum cycle time required to empty all
the inlets with refuse during one whole working day period eg. 24 hours.

z) “Downtime” means the time period when the collection process is stopped
by an alarm situation or regular preventive maintenance.
aa) “ECC” means Electrical Control Centre cabinet with PLC, and instruments.
bb) “
cc) “Exhauster” means radial fan used to create the negative air pressure or
vaccum for the transport of waste .
dd) .
1.5 Submittals
1. Comply with Tender Invitation documents.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general
construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods,
hardware, and installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated.
(a) Submit shop drawings for each system or assembly.
(b) Submit material procurement drawings as required
3. Documented evidence such as calculations of wall thickness and the use of pipe
material for substantiating the minimum required lifetime shall be submitted.
4. Samples: Welders must demonstrate and be certified. Witnessed welding will be
required.
5. Product Approval
(a) The contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer
prior to purchase according to Section 1 Part 7 in order to verify
compliance with the specifications. Such information shall include
at least the following:
(i) Manufacturers name.
(ii) Suppliers name.
(iii) Product name (if applicable).
(iv) Product description.
(v) Manufacturer’s specification and technical data.
(vi) Storage instructions.
(vii) Installation instructions.
6. Material samples shall be submitted as required in the relevant sections within these
specifications or as requested by the Engineer.
7. Method Statements
(a) The Contractor shall submit detailed method statements for approval
of the Engineer meeting the requirements of Section 1 Part 7, for at
least the following activities and/or as requested by the Engineer.
(i) Surveying and staking of pipeline routes

(ii) Transportation, storage and handling of pipe

(iii) Dewatering, trenching and bedding
(iv) Field jointing of insulation
(v) Pipe laying
(vi) Chamber construction
(vii) Pre-cleaning
(viii) Air/Hydro-testing
(ix) Commissioning
(b) The Contractor must issue method statements governing testing and
commissioning during the detailed design stage to ensure that
necessary features required for the effective cleaning/testing of the
pipeline are incorporated into the works.
(c) Commencement of pipeline installation will not be allowed until the
method statements covering all aspects of the Cleaning, Testing and
Pre-commissioning are approved, by the Engineer.
(d) In addition to basic requirements, method statements shall also
address:
(i) Safety measures
(ii) How additional thrust loads will be accommodated
(iii) Safe disposal of waste materials and liquids.
(iv) Record keeping
(v) Inspection by the Engineer
1.6 Quality Control

1. A written inspection request shall be submitted to the Engineer during the on site
installation work prior to proceeding with the following activities. Minimum
notification time shall be 24 hours.
2. Welders Qualifications: In addition to Specification 15063, the following shall
apply:
(a) Welder certificates signed by the Contractor certifying that all
welder operators comply with the latest edition of the Code for
Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 and all addenda.
(b) All welders performing under these specifications shall have been
fully qualified in accordance with the test requirements of Section
IX of the ASME Boiler Code. Each Welder’s certificate of
qualification shall be supplied to the Employer before any. Welding
is performed. Provide welding procedures for each type of weld
joint to be used.
(c) Each welder shall identify his work by stamping each weld with
identification, indicating qualifications. The contractor’s name (in

abbreviation form or initial), shall prefix the welder’s number, thus

identifying entire work.
(d) Welding qualifications shall be performed by welders performing all
welding operations outlined in this project. Contractors shall utilize
the following ASME forms. All copies shall be submitted to the
Employer and Architect for review and final acceptance.
(i) Welding Procedures Specification (WPS) - Form QW-482
(ii) Procedure Qualifications Record (PQR) - Form QW-483
(iii) Welding Operator Qualifications (WPQ) - Form QW-484
(iv) The above qualifications shall apply to welding condensate,
400 psig (27.6 bar gage), 75 psig (5.2 bar gage) and 10 psig
(0.7 bar gage) steam in the G6 position and for P1, GI piping.
The filler rod shall be E60l0. As an alternate method, the
WPS can specify an E6010 root pass and an E70l8 cover
pass. Utilization of E7018 will require the use of a rod oven
to maintain the integrity of the filler rod flux.
3. Delivery on Site of All Piping and Fittings Procedures:
(a) Upon delivery to the site of all pipes, PMC/FM shall verify the
materials received matches the Mill Test Report (MTR) submitted
by the Contractor’s supplier. If there is a discrepancy between the
documentation and the identification markings on the material, the
delivery shall be rejected without any costs to the UDC
(b) The Contractor shall protect pipe and fittings from oxidation due to
the elements or water.
1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling

1. Products shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a
manner to avoid product damage.
3. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps
or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless approved by the
Engineer.
4. Do not store products directly on the ground, unless approved by the
Engineer. Ensure adequate timber blocking is utilized to provide sufficient
support.
5. Visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the
Engineer.
(a) Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall
be marked and set aside.
(b) Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in
writing to the Engineer for approval.

(c) No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted without the

6. Receipt of Pipe & Fittings
(a) Prior to taking delivery and stringing, the Contractor shall examine
the pipes and fittings and satisfy himself about the condition of the
pipe ends and lining, etc. Contractor at his option may carry out any
inspection required to this effect. The Contractor shall remain
responsible for care and custody of the pipe and for any repairs to
coatings and/or pipe end bevels.
(b) Transportation of line pipe from the storage yard to the construction
site is the Contractor’s responsibility. All precautions shall be taken
to prevent damage to lining. Suitable wooden saddles with soft
padding shall be provided while transporting.
(c) Any pipes and fittings which have been found damaged, particularly
those which are dented, buckled or otherwise permanently deformed,
shall be marked and set aside. These pipes may only be transported
to the site after the defects have been repaired or eliminated.
7. Handling of equipment, pipes and fittings
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for handling, hauling,
stockpiling, storage and stringing the equipment, pipes and fittings.
(b) The Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable trucks and
equipment in sufficient quantity to transport the equipment, pipes
and fittings at the required rate.
(c) Equipment, pipes and fittings shall be stocked, chocked and soft
padded, to avoid damage and secured in position during
transportation and during storage. Equipment, pipes and fittings
shall not be allowed to drop or strike objects which may damage
them.
(d) Stringing shall be conducted in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Contractor shall use a spreader bar or lifting beams designed to give
proper support to the pipe during lifting and placing.
(e) Lifting hooks, when used, shall be equipped with a plate bent to fit
the curvature of the pipe and shall be fitted with a soft insert to
prevent damage to the pipes. Both the end caps/bevel protectors and
lifting hooks should be designed to lift pipes without removing end
caps or bevel protectors. Rolling, skidding or dragging of pipes shall
be strictly forbidden.
(f) Pipes at all times shall be stacked at least 100mm clear above the
ground so that the bottom of the pipe remains free from any surface
water.
(g) The pipes and fittings shall be stacked by placing them on wooden
saddles provided with suitable soft padding.
(h) The pipes and fittings shall not be stacked more than four high. Each
pipe section shall be separated by means of spacers placed at

appropriate intervals for this purpose. Stacks shall consist of pipe

sections having the same diameter, wall thickness, and
manufacturer.
(i) Pipes and fittings stacked in open storage yards/dump yards shall be
suitably covered on top to avoid direct exposure to sunlight.
(j) Prior to commencement of handling operations, the Contractor shall
submit for the Engineer’s approval a detailed Method Statement
indicating the manner and equipment to be used for handling and
stacking pipes.

2. COLLECTION STATION EQUIPMENT
2.1 Collection Station General Description
The solid waste collection stations are designed as two floors buildings. The ground
floor includes the fan room, control room, refuse compacting area and loading area.
The first floor includes the refuse separation area, air purification area, storage
room and living sanitation facilities. The air purification area includes the dust
removal, deodorization and silencing facilities.
A solid waste collection station is required at the end of each conveying system to
separate between the refuse and the air carrying it to the station. The refuse will be
pushed into the refuse container after being compressed in the compactor. The air
will be discharged after dust removal and deodorization.
The process flows are summarized as follows:
1 Air-solid separation
After being pumped to the central collection station by the draught, the refuse
will first enter the refuse waste separator to separate it from the air.
2 Refuse flow direction

 Refuse compression: the refuse will be discharged from the unloading outlet
under the separator to the refuse compactor for compression after
separation.
 Refuse loading: compacts the refuse into the empty container connected
with the refuse compactor and will separate from the refuse compactor once
it is full and another empty container will be connected .
 Refuse transportation: the full container will be transported on a standard
flat bed hook lift trucks to the refuse treatment and disposal yard for further
treatment and disposal.
3 Exhaust air flow direction

 Dust removal: the transport air from the refuse separator air pipe outlet will
be routed through exhausters through the dust filter. The dust filter includes
two sections, that is, the front dust removal net and the back dust removal
net. Both the front dust removal net and the back dust removal net are
installed in a special shell.
 Deodorization: use of activated carbon filled media deodorization system, .
 Discharge: the air is discharged through the exhaust outlet after dust
removal and deodorization. The exhaust outlet is located at the roof of Floor
2 of the central collection station.

2.2 Refuse Separator and Rotating Screen
The refuse separator is used to separate the waste and air. It will have a refuse
treatment capacity 150 cubic meters / hour, and is installed on the upper level of the
central collection station.
Refuse and air transported in the transport pipe are separated by the refuse
separator in the collection station. The cyclone refuse separator is used for the
primary separation of waste from transport air. Bolted on top of the cyclone a
rotating separator helps separating light particles from the outgoing air. Rotating
screen or the like shall be provided in the separator for refuse screening and to
prevent refuse build-up at the air outlet. Dust concentration of air discharged
outside central plant shall be less than 0.5 g/ m3.
a) The refuse separator shall be of cyclone-type with a rotating screen, in order to

maximise separation efficiency.
b) The separator casing shall be fabricated of mild steel. Abrasion resistant
material shall be used at the separator inlet.
c) The separator shall be equipped with anti vibration mountings for noise
reduction.
d) The separator shall be equipped with inspection opening and level indicators.
It is equipped with waste level sensors, inspection opening and when mounted on
floor structure, vibration dampers. Via a feeding hopper, it’s lower part is vacuum
tight connected to the waste compactor.
The cyclone is made of primed and painted mild steel, with thickness depending on
size and calculated wear. Weight of a cyclone with t = 8 is approx. 4000 kg.
 Installation position : central collection station.

 Refuse treatment capacity : 150 m3/hr
 Operation air pressure : about 40 kPa (negative pressure)
 Air pressure loss : 1500 Pa
 Total dimension : H 3900 mm Ø2500 mm
 Shell material : mild steel
 Shell thickness : 10 – 12 mm
 Operation weight : 4000 Kg
The rotating screen is situated on top of the cyclone for the separation of light waste
particles and coarse dust from the transport air. The rotating screen protect the
exhauster from building up crust at the impeller and minimise the solid content to
come to the filter or out into the atmosphere. It is driven by an electrical motor. The
upper part is made of primed and painted mild steel and the lower, rotating part is
made in cast aluminium.

2.3 Refuse Compactor
The waste compactor is situated below the cyclone separator and compact the waste
in the container. It’s upper part is connected to the cyclone separator, and one of it’s
lateral parts to the waste container, all vacuum tight. The opening at the top of the
compactor is directly connected to the separator so as to ensure airproof system and
negative pressure. There is a hydraulically operated attachment and locking device
at the compactor outlet to lock the refuse container so as to keep the system airtight
and maintain the negative pressure during operation. The compactor is made of
mild steel and is primed and painted.
When the compactor is engaged with a refuse container, it shall combine

hydraulically its pusher with the container door to feed refuse into the container in
an air tight manner. Hydraulic pusher type refuse compactor(s) shall compress and
pack the refuse collected from the refuse separator(s) into refuse container(s) for
storage after separation in the refuse separator. The refuse compactor has refuse
treatment capacity 260 cubic meters/ hour, is packer plate type, and has maximum
compaction force 280 KN and unit capacity 1.5 cubic meters.
Compactor shall be operated under negative pressure and be equipped with

automatic system for cleaning behind the packer plate. Compaction ratio shall be
designed between two to three times. Completion of compaction shall be detected
by cylinder pressure. Compaction ratio of the refuse compactor shall be set to
ensure that net weight of refuse packed into the container does not exceed 10,000
kg.
 Installation position : central collection station

 Type : packer plate type
 Refuse compacting capacity : 260 m3/hr
 Dimensions : 3648mm(L) x 2195 (H)
 Input Opening : 1300 mm dia
 Output Opening : 1360 mm
 Maximum Width incl arms : 3082 mm
 Packer plate dimensions : W 1360 mm × H 765 mm
 Packer plate material : Hardox 400 (Hardox is a jargon)
 Compacting room internal wall material : Domex 590 (Domex is a
jargon)
 Capacity for each stroke : 1.6 m3
 Maximum compaction force : 280 kN
 Cycle Time : 20 sec
 Pressing Power Normally : 250 kN
 Pressing Power Finishing : 280 kN
 Hydraulics
- Pump : Double Wing Pump
- Flow : 105+/-25 lts/min
- Valves : Electrical directing valves ,
Power limiting valve
Load off valve

- Hydraulic Pressure : Max 18.0 MPa (180 Bar)

 The motor performance parameters are seen as follows:
- rated power : 7.5 kW
- rated velocity : 23 rev/s
- power supply type : 3 Phase 400V 50 Hz
- fuses : Max 25A
 Container door : automatic lift equipment
 Locking : automatic locking equipment
for
connection of container and
compacter
 Sealing requirement : the vacuum sealing shall be realized
when connecting with the container.
2.4 Refuse container
The airtight container works as both a storage and transport unit. It has a vacuum
tight connection to a compactor that pushes and compacts the waste into the
container. It has a frame made to fit on a truck with a hook lift device. Storage
capacity of each refuse container shall not exceed 23 m3. Overall dimensions of the
container shall be approximately 5700 mm(L) x 2460 mm (W) x 2560 mm (H).
Design of the containers shall be "CE" conformance and suitable for handling by a
24-tonne GVW vehicle equipped with "Ampliroll arm" or equivalent for roll-on
and roll-off operation and for transportation by the vehicle without violating any
Road Traffic Regulations. Dimensions of the containers shall be designed to ensure
that the overall height of the collection vehicle, Ampliroll arm and container
assembly does not exceed 5900 mm during tipping operation to unload the refuse.
The refuse containers shall be designed and constructed to prevent spillage of foul
liquid during handling and transportation.
The Contractor shall confirm with the Consultant and relevant Government
Department or refuse collection contractor that the design and construction of the
refuse container is compatible and suitable for use with the collection vehicles
employed prior to manufacture.
Capacity and number of container set provided shall be large enough to handle the
total amount of refuse arrives in one collection cycle so that no pause of operation
is required before the next cycle is initiated taking into account of future extension.
The refuse container is operated in the airproof status with negative pressure. So,
the design shall satisfy the airproof requirement. And the container shall have
sufficient strength to suit the negative pressure during operation. Container shall be
designed to operate under negative pressure of max 40 kPa and to withstand
positive pressure by compaction. In addition, the vacuum pipe refuse collection
system conveys all the collected moistures to the container for storage. So, the
design shall ensure water tightness. To satisfy the demand of the trucks, the
container shall have a metal ring with sufficient strength at the end other of the door
to enable operation of pull arm.

To empty the container you open the gable door and tilt the container, and the
refuse falls out due to gravity. The container is made of primed and painted mild
steel, with a round shape to manage the vacuum better. The weight of an empty 23
m3 container is approx. 3000 kg (empty).
 Installation position : central collection station.

 Dimension : L x B x H = 5700 x 2460 x 2560 mm
 Full-load capacity : 23 m3
 Total refuse weight : 10,000 kg
 Sealing requirements : vacuum sealing.
 Maximum operation pressure : 40 kPa (negative pressure)
 Loading requirement : steel ring for transportation of pull arm
trucks.
2.5 Container conveyer
Transverse type floor mounted container conveyor system shall be provided for
changing refuse containers in the central refuse collection plant if the number of
separator/ compactor set installed does not match with the number of refuse
container provided. The container trolley moves the container from incoming area
(empty container) to the compactor and further to the outgoing area (full container).
The trolley moves sideways on a rail, powered by an electrical motor. When the
control system, via a pressure sensor, alarms for "full container" the system stops.
The container haulage is operated from a control panel. Most of the container
trolley’s parts are made of primed and painted mild steel and the total weight is
approx. 1200 kg.
 Installation position : central collection station

 Conveyance mode : horizontal conveyance,
 Treatment containers quantity : 2 pieces/ per set
 Conveyer load : 10000 kg x 2
 Horizontal conveyance velocity : 0.1 – 0.2 m/s
 Motor performance parameters :
- rated power 1.5
- rated velocity 1,400 rev/s
- power supply type 3 Phase 380V 50 Hz
2.6 Exhausters
Exhausters shall be provided to generate air flow for transporting the waste.
Exhausters of centrifugal type including motors, mounted on steel frames and are
vibration-isolated from the floor. The exhausters are multiple blowers in series with
variable speed and variable frequency drive and shall be lodged in the central
collection station to induce the necessary air flow and cater for changes in pressure
requirements due to differences in the length of waste conveyance pipenet.

Operation of the exhausters in stages, control of the variable speed exhausters or

changeover to standby blower operation shall all be automated without the need of
manual intervention.
(a) Data for airflow, pressure (vacuum), motor/fan speed and required power are
enclosed.
(b) The exhausters shall be connected to obtain the required airflow and vacuum
for the transportation of refuse.
(c) In addition to the exhausters in operation one stand-by exhauster shall be
installed. The exhausters shall be installed so that anyone of the exhausters can
be used as stand-by and automatically replace anyone of the exhausters in
operation.
(d) The exhauster housing shall have a wall thickness of not less than 8 mm and be
provided with inspection openings.
(e) The exhauster impeller shall be electro dynamically balanced.
(f) Electric power supply for the exhauster motor is AC 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
The air fans are for creating the appropriate air flow and partial vacuum in the
waste transport pipes. The exhausters are normally connected in series, to achieve
sufficient negative pressure. The size and number of exhausters has been arrived at
keeping in mind the transport distance of the waste in the transport pipes. One of
the exhausters is normally used as a stand-by unit. The exhausters are connected to
electrical motors via flexible couplings.
 Installation position : central collection station/ exhauster room

 Classification : centrifugal exhauster
 Rated flow rate : 9 m3/s
 Rated wind capacity : 10 kPa /each
 Motor Capacity : 110kW
 Rated velocity : 49 rev/s
 Impeller material : mild steel or aluminum
 Driving mode : direct driving.
 Static weight : 1000 Kg
2.7 Air Pipes and Allied Equipment
Air pipes between components in the collection terminal. Brackets to support the
pipes in terminal will be mounted with a distance not exceeding 5 meters from each
other. The pipe system is provided with all necessary cut-off valves, non-return
valves, pipe sound absorber and sleeves. The air pipes are made of spiral or
longitudinal welded pipes of mild steel. The brackets are made in mild steel. Pipes
and brackets are primed and painted.

Non return valve
The non-return valve is used in installation with several exhausters. The exhausters
are provided with one valve each. When an exhauster is started, a pressure
difference is created that keeps the valve closed. When an exhauster is stopped
while others are running, the valve is opened by the air stream that flows through it.
To check the function of the valve, there is an inspection window. The house of the
valve is made of mild steel and the valve clack of rubber. The non return valve is
primed and painted.
Velocity regulating equipment
The purpose of the air speed regulating system is to maintain the air speed in the
system.
The air speed value is compared with the expected value, and the exhauster speed is
adjusted accordingly. Should the air speed fall below a pre-set value, an alarm is
issued, and the pressure difference switch lights a warning lamp on the front of the
Electric Control Center.
Then the following will happen:

- If there is an extra exhauster available, it is started.
- If no extra exhauster is available, the system is stopped.
Venturi pipe
The Venturi pipe is a part of the pipe system in the collection room. When the air
stream passes the Venturi pipe, a pressure difference is created. The air speed
regulating system uses this pressure difference to calculate the air speed in the
system. The nipples to measure the pressure difference, are mounted on two
different places on the Venturi pipe. The Venturi pipe is made of mild steel, primed
and painted.
Main valve
The main valve unit is operated by the control system. The main valve is used to
facilitate the start-up of the exhausters. It has only two positions: open or closed.
During system start, the main valve stays closed to help the exhausters increase
speed. When this has been achieved, the valve opens.
Pipe sound absorber
The pipe sound absorbers in an air pipe system, are mounted before and after the
exhauster to reduce the level of noise. The sound absorber after the exhauster is
made with central body to increase the reduction of noise. The sound absorbers are
made in mild steel with mineral wool as sound absorbing material. It is primed and
painted.

2.8 Compressed Air system
Compressor system for central supply of compressed air to operate the valves in the
pipe system and necessary equipment in collection terminal and feeder inlet and out
door valves. The compressor shall produce a working pressure of 600- 800 kPa at
appropriate capacity to maintain the required system working pressure. The system
consists of compressor unit, air-dryer, air-cooled after cooler and shall be located
inside the exhauster room. The compressor is a two-piston one step air-cooled
compressor. The compressor is designed to work efficiently up to a pressure of 10
bar. The installation shall include air dryer, after cooler, oil separator, filters, cut-off
valves etc. for a complete compressor installation. The dryer is designed for
continuous operation to dry compressed air by adsorption. The cooler is designed
for continuous operation, and to cool the compressed air, an air cooler with fan is
used, provided with a water separator.
All automatically operated valves such as air inlet valves, discharge valves and
shut-off valves shall be operated by compressed air cylinders.
 Installation position : central collection station/ exhauster room

 Classification : Air cooled piston type compressor
 System operating pressure : 600 - 800 kPa
 System maximum pressure : 1000 kPa
 Air delivered flow rate : 16-24 l/s at 700kPa
 Required Power Source : 380V / 3Ph / 50hz; 220 V / 1Ph / 50 Hz
 Air cooled After Cooler : TD after cooler with water separator
 Dryer : Refrigerant type FD air dryer
 Filter 1st stage DD : Coalescing filters for general purpose
protection
removing liquid to 0.1ppm,Particles down to
1 micron
 Filter 2nd stage PD : Coalescing filters for general purpose
protection
remove liquid to 0.01ppm,Particles down to
0.01 micron
2.9 Dust Filter & Active Carbon Filter Unit
The refuse separator and the rotating filter separate the fine refuses from the
exhaust air. But there will still be some super-fine particles and odours in the
exhaust air. So, there shall be the air purification system in the central refuse
collection station. The air purification system includes the dust removal device and
deodorization device.
The Dust filter shall be installed downstream of the exhausters. The dust filter and
active carbon filter shall be enclosed in an air-tight chamber including acoustic
lined fire doors. The walls of the dust filter room will be lined with insulation doors
to reduce noise levels likely to occur during the operation cycle. The complete dust
filter installation consists of cassette bag type filters for dry filtration, which is
installed on the pressure side of the exhausters. The filter is installed in a concrete
room. There are filters for installation in walls made of concrete. The filters are high

efficiency extended surface filters. This gives a low air flow through the filter
media, which ensures low pressure drop, high dust holding capacity, long lifetime
for the filters. The filter consists of a holding frame and an easily handled cartridge.
The holding frame of galvanised sheet-metal is supplied with internal and external
gaskets and retaining clips to hold the cartridge in place.
Dust filter shall be of bag filter type with filter cartridges mounted in a self-
supporting frame.
The active carbon filter shall be designed to remove odour from the exhaust air.
The active carbon filter shall absorb all the odorous compounds. The mechanism is
by physical absorption i.e. odorous compounds are attached to the pores of the
carbon material in the filters. The exhaust air after going through the process of
passing through the two stage dust filter process stated above and will pass through
two identical banks of active carbon filters in series. Each bank will be made up of
four identical modules assembled side by side. Each module holds 12 identical
filter cells.
 Installation position : upper level of central collection station

 Approx Size( L x W x H) : ~7200 x 2750 x 2850
 Classification : Dust Filter & Active Carbon Filter Chamber
 Dust Filter Sections
- First Stage (Pre Filter) : 16 units extended pleated filters
: Media High loft, non woven cotton /
synthetic blend
: average dust spot efficiency – 25~30%
: average resistance -90%
- Second Stage : 16 units extended surface pocket filters
: media – micro fine synthetic fibers
: average dust spot efficiency – 90%
 Deodorization Sections
- First Stage : 48 cartridges
media–non impregnated coconut shell based
carbon
carbon content ~ 20 kgs / cartridges
- Second Stage : 48 cartridges
media–non impregnated coconut shell based
carbon
carbon content ~ 20 kgs / cartridges
 Air resistance : about 800Pa
 Weight :about 2200kg (including the
framework)

3. TRANSPORT PIPE NET - MILD STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
3.1 General
1. .Based on normal operation in accordance with the design and periodic

replacement of areas of high wear the expected durability of the pipe will be up to
25 years
2. Straight pipes will be manufactured out of mild carbon steel and will be machine
spiral welded.
3. Special bends of Nihard ( cast alloy steel) will be provided as per the pipe design
calculation.
4. Bends will be machine spiral or longitudinal welded The different pipe thicknesses
specified relates to the internal wall thickness of the pipe, which implies that the
outer diameter of the pipe shall remain constant.
5. All pipe bends will be in single piece lengths made of mild steel, cast alloys and no
mitred joints will be allowed. The radius of the bends has been specified as per the
drawings.
6. Y-Pipes are connections from the branch lines to the main transport line (from
individual plot developments and these will all be pre-fabricated from straight
pipes.
7. Connections to waste discharge valves and air inlet valves are provided with
flanges for installation of valves.
8. T connection pipes connecting the main transport line with the outdoor inlets and
retail inlet locations shall be pre-fabricated from straight pipes and welded directly
to the main pipe inlet.
9. Inspection manholes shall be installed near bend locations, confluence portions and
at approx. every 100 m of the straight pipes.
10. Pipe shall be supplied in lengths no shorter than six (6) meters. Each length of pipe
shall bear markings of identify location, type and grade.
11. All transport pipes will be installed buried underground or suspended in basement
(where available) as per the enclosed road profile
12. If very small pipes bend a required to maintain the profile i.e less than 3 degrees,
the same can be chamfered and welded to achieve the bending radius.
13. All piping shall show no evidence of blisters, grooves or other extrusion marks.
14. All pipe joints will be welded to achieve air tightness.
15. The equipment and materials to be installed under this contract shall be finished by
painting and/or protective coating to provide protection from corrosion under the
surrounding conditions. The colour of equipment shall be manufacturer’s standards
subject to the Consultant’s approval.
16. Buried pipes and fittings shall have protective coating of PE coating 1.8~2 mm
thick to DIN 30670.
17. The automated Waste collection system transport pipe refuse collection system
will be used for this project. The primary technical design are as follows:
 Pipe diameter : DN 500 MM

 Pipe thickness : 6 to 12 mm
 Pipe material : carbon steel pipes
 Carrier speed : 70 km/h

 System pressure : not more than negative pressure 40

kPa
 Normal earth-up depth of pipes : 1200 ~1500 mm
 Pipe upward/downward gradients : 20 degrees
 Pipe curve radius : 1.5~1.8m
18. Documentary evidence such as calculations for substantiating structural soundness

and minimum expected service life of ducting shall be submitted to the Consultant
for approval
19. All buried refuse conveyance / air inlet ducting shall be coated externally with
bitumen, PE or the Like, or wrapped with Densol tapes to prevent corrosion.
Ducting installed above ground or in tunnels shall also be properly coated against
corrosion except where stainless steel is used.
20. Welding of all waste conveyance / air inlet ducting shall be carried out by qualified
welders possessing valid welder certificates issued by accredited surveyors or
laboratories in accordance with BS 4871: Part 1. The names of welders together
with their welder certificates shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval
before any welding is carried out.
21. Sectioning valves shall be provided for major duct branches to facilitate system
operation and maintenance/servicing of individual branches without affecting the
operation of other branches. Inspection/service openings shall be provided every
100 meters or less of duct run and at locations where blockage is likely to occur.
22. Underground ducting and services connecting the PCWCS components in different
sections of the development to the central refuse collection plant shall be designed
in such way as to enable operation of the PSWCS in individual sections at the
earliest possible moment once the central refuse collection plant and the works in
the respective sections are completed.
3.2 Pre-laying building network interfaces
connect the building network pipe so as to provide the refuse collection service.
For the convenience of connecting the building network to the primary network in
the future, the sealed end of the pipe shall be set up at the footpath near the
boundary lines of the plot. To ensure normal system operation, the technologies for
the building network interfaces shall match up with the public network. Complete
the installation of each building network system before connecting to the public
network. The system debugging shall be completed under the supervision of the
public network supplier. These interfaces shall include the refuse transportation
pipelines, control cables, pneumatic pipes and lead pipes. The technical
requirements are seen as follows:

3.3 Refuse transportation pipes
The pipe for the feeder building network interfaces shall have the same material as
the public network pipeline, that is, mild carbon steel. The manufacture shall follow
BS3601: 1987. The pipe diameter shall be 508 mm nominal. The pipe wall
thickness shall not be less than the wall thickness at the interfaces to the public
network. The pipe shall have at least 2 mm PE protection coats (DIN30670). Use
international welding modes for pipe collection. The welds shall be protected with
polythene by heating after clearing up. The PE coverage shall be at least 50 mm at
both ends of the pipes.
The interface process is very important. So, the supplier of the network shall send
technical staff to the site for supervisions on the whole construction to avoid the
damages of primary network due to unsatisfactory process or construction. Each
secondary building network system shall be subject to the pipe network pressure
test according to the standards by the primary network supplier with the presence of
the technicians of the primary network supplier before being connected to the
primary network after completion so as to avoid the serious leakage and influence
on the system operation in the future.
3.4 Straight Pipes, coated
The pipe net consists of longitudinal or spiral welded straight pipes. The pipes are
delivered with different thickness of material, depending on where in the pipe
system, it will be installed. The thickness of material depends on the load and the
composition of the waste. The ends of the pipes shall be prepared for welding,
according to the instructions of assembly. The pipes are made in mild steel. The
weight per meter depends on the thickness of material. Ex: A straight pipe with t =
6,3 mm have a weight of approx. 80 kg per meter.
3.5 Standard Bends 508 mm x 8-12 mm, R= ≥1800, coated
The bends will be weld less solid-drawn with the same inner diameter as for
straight pipes. The bends are delivered with different angles and thickness of
material, depending on where in the pipe system it will be installed. The bends will
be single pipes and not mitred joints and bent from a single straight pipe. The
thickness of material depends on the load and the composition of the waste. The
ends of the pipes shall be prepared for welding, according to the instructions of
assembly. The bend is made in mild steel. The weight per meter depends on the
thickness of material. Ex: A standard bend 90 degree 508 with t = 8 mm have a
weight of approx. 330 kg. The locations of these bends are indicated in the drawing
and BOQ.

3.6 Standard Bends 508 mmx 8 –12 mm, R = ≥1800, incl. 1000 straight pipe,
coated
straight pipes. The bends are delivered with different angles and thickness of
material, depending on where in the pipe system it will be installed. The bends will
be single pipes and not mitred joints and bent from a single straight pipe. The
assembly. A straight short pipe is assembled after the bend to make it possible to
assemble a straight pipe, with less thickness of material, than the bend. The bend is
made in mild steel. The weight per meter depends on the thickness of material. Ex:
A standard bend 90 degree 508 with t = 8 mm have a weight of approx. 400 kg. The
locations of these bends are indicated in the drawing and BOQ.
3.7 RAEX Bends 508mm x 8 - 12 mm, R= ≥1800, incl. straight pipe, coated
straight pipes. A short straight pipe in mild steel in both ends of the bend, make
welding possible. The bends are delivered with different angles and thickness of
material, depending on where in the pipe system it will be installed. The thickness
of material depends on the load and the composition of the waste. The ends of the
pipes shall be prepared for welding, according to the instructions of assembly. The
bends are made in special, hardened boron steel to receive a high degree of wear
resistance. The weight depends on the thickness of material. Ex: A 90-degree bend
508 with t = 8 mm have a weight of approx. 430 kg. The locations of these bends
are indicated in the drawing and BOQ.
3.8 Branch (Y) pipes – 508mm, 30 deg., coated
Branch pipe are to be installed and connected to the main straight pipes coming out
of each individual plot boundary, or to connect a new branch to the main pipe. The
branch pipes are delivered with different thickness of material, depending on where
in the pipe system it will be installed. They bends are always accompanied by bent
pipes of radius 60deg to join onto the main pipe net. The thickness of material
depends on the load and the composition of the waste. The ends of the pipes shall
be prepared for welding, according to the instructions of assembly. The weight of a
branch-pipe with t = 8 mm is approx. 400 kg.

3.9 Branch (Y) pipes – 508mm, 30 deg., coated - site fabrication
Branch pipe to be installed on straight pipes, to connect a new branch to the main
pipe, when the thickness of the branch pipe is not thicker than the straight pipe it
will connect to. The branch pipes are delivered with different thickness of material,
depending on where in the pipe system it will be installed. They bends are always
accompanied by bent pipes of radius 60deg to join onto the main pipe net. The
assembly. The weight of a branch-pipe with t = 6,3 mm is approx. 90 kg.
3.10 DV connection – 508mm - coated - site fabrication
Pipe bends with flange to be connected to a Discharge Valve (DV). The bend is cut
to be connected on the upper side of the transport pipe. When needed the bend will
be delivered with a cover that will be screwed to the flange, to prevent construction
waste from entering into the system, before installing the DV. The thickness of the
bend is normally 5 mm. The ends of the bend shall be prepared for welding,
according to the instructions of assembly. The weight of a complete DV connection
is approx. 100 kg. The bend radius for High rise will be 1250mm and low rise
(villas) will be 750mm minimum.
3.11 AV connection – 400mm - coated - site fabrication
Pipe bend with flange to be connected to a Air inlet Valve (AV). The bend is made
with a cone in one end to connect to the transport pipe. When needed the bend will
be delivered with a cover, that will be screwed to the flange, to prevent construction
waste from entering into the system, before installing the AV. The thickness of the
bend is normally 5 mm. The ends of the bend shall be prepared for welding,
according to the instructions of assembly. The weight of a complete AV connection
is approx. 75 kg. The bend radius for High rise will be 1250mm and low rise
(villas) will be 750mm minimum.
3.12 Inspection door 500 - shop primer
For the convenience of inspection on the pipe network, the refuse conveying pipes
are provided with inspection openings at every 100 meters along the straight pipe
sections (The concrete distance is decided based on the on-site conditions. Seen as
overall layout for primary pipe network). Additionally there shall be inspection
openings in front of and behind the pipe curves and in the pre-laid interfaces with
the building network.
The inspection opening shall have plane dimensions 1.5×1.5m. The depth shall be
decided based on the underground pipe depth. There shall be 500×370 mm
observation holes on the pipe sections in the inspection openings. The inspection

openings shall be covered or placed in a concrete chamber. The manhole shall go

through waterproof treatment with sealing material. The manhole size shall be
600×600 mm. The details are seen as the drawing volume. The inspection openings
provide possibility to inspect the pipes and a way to manually clean clogged pipes.
The door is made of mild steel. The weight of a complete inspection door is approx.
45 kg.
3.13 External Coating
Straight pipes and bends for ground installations should be furnished with an
external sheeting of polyethylene. Most commonly this is a so-called 3-layer
sheathing for which a thin epoxy layer is first melted onto the shot blasted steel
pipe and the coats of adhesive and polyethylene are then applied. The polyethylene
is selected according to the service temperature. The coating procedure starts with
the application of primer, a hot flat film extruded sideways onto the pipe which is
rotated as it passes. Overlapping film layers form a primer coat ca 0.3 mm
thickness. The primer coat provides an adhesive layer between steel and
polyethylene. Immediately after the primer, the polyethylene coating is applied-in a
similar process.
The elevated temperature of the pipe surface causes the multiple overlapping film
layers to stick together into a coating of minimum 1.8 to 3.5 mm thickness in
accordance with the manufacturing standard (German Industrial Standards) DIN
30670.
After subsequent water cooling, the pipe ends are prepared for one-site welding by
removing the PE coating a length of 100 to 160 mm at the extremities. The coating
thickness is measured, whereupon the pipes are inspected visually and marked.
Each pipe is checked with a 25 kV appliance for freedom of porosity in the coating.
Apart from the quality control procedure described above, the coating is tested at
regular intervals for faultless adhesion, and also for its resistance to impact and
indentation. In addition, tests are done to determine tensile strength, specific
sheathing resistance and resistance to head and light.
Characteristics:
Material Polyethylene
Minimum thickness =2.0 mm normal
=3.5 mm reinforced
Resistance to impact >10 NM
Resistance to peeling >38Ncm1
Resistance to indentation <0.3 mm
Specific sheathing resistance >102 m2
Density 0.92x103 kg/m3
Smelt index 0.38 g/10 min
Yield strength >12.5 MPa
Tensile strength >18.0 MPa

Elongation due to shearing >600%

Vicat softening point 98° C
Low temperature brittleness -80° C/80% F
Water absorption <0.003%of weight
3.14 Sectioning Valve 500
The sectional valves are installed in the intersections of the main collection pipes.
The parts with troubles can be cut off without influences on the operation of other
parts. The valves are installed in the pipe system to limit the system in chosen
sections. This is made to reduce the connected pipe system with DV:s to a suitable
amount. The section valve is mounted as close to the terminal as the pipe system
allows. The valve will be opened and closed with a pneumatic cylinder. The valve
is made of mild steel. The weight of a complete sectioning valve is approx. 190 kg.
The sectional valve room shall have dimension 2.5×2.5×2.6m and reinforced
concrete structure. The details are seen as the drawing volume. The sectional valve
shall be imported whole-set equipment.
3.15 Conduit PEL 50/44
A HDPE tube to protect the control and distribution cables that is placed along the
pipe system between the control boxes of the valves. The cables to control the
system and the compressed air tubing will be inside this protecting tube. The tube is
made of plastics. Electrical cables for transmitting signals between the collection
station and all valve control boxes shall be laid in 50mm thick plastic conduits
along the pipe net
3.16 Control cables
The primary network has the control communication mode of LONWORK. The
control system of the secondary building network shall have the same
communication mode. The control cables connected to the primary network shall
reach the following indexes to ensure the control system coherence.
The control cables shall have the ELV part and COMMUNICATION part. The
ELV part shall have service voltage less than 50 VAC or 24VDC, insulation PVC
T12, 2*4 mm² copper conductors, thermal resistance 4.98 ohm/km and thermal
insulation performance more than 20 Mohm/km at 20°C.
The Communication part shall have twisted pair , 2X2*0,5 mm copper conductors
with aluminium/PET shield full around with drain conductor, thermal resistance
36.7 ohm/km and thermal insulation performance more than 1000 Mohm/km at
20°C. The capacitance from 1 to 100 khz shall be 35±15% and the resistance from
1 to 100 khzd shall be 100±15%.
The outer cover of the cable is to be made of PE and is to be manufactured for

permanent installation under water

Control cable that will be inside the protecting tubing, along the pipe system. The
control cable is used to connect the control unit for the valves with the electrical
control centre in the terminal.
The lead pipes are used to hold the control cables and the underground mild steel
waste pipes. The lead pipes of the secondary building network shall match up
smoothly with the primary network to avoid the damages of the control cables and
pneumatic pipes by the pipe interfaces. The pipe shall have the same diameter as
that of the primary network. The pipe shall be made of PE. There shall be screw
veins on the structure. The interfaces fittings shall be made of the same material
and have the same screw vein structure.
After the secondary building network interfaces has been completed installation
data shall be notified with data such as the quantities of the discharge valves, air
inlet valves, outdoor disposal inlets, based on which, the primary network will
update the computer data of the vacuum refuse pipe collection system so as to
execute the orders to serve the secondary building network in the future. The data
communication of the primary network and the secondary building network shall be
subject to repeated tests to ensure correctness. The pneumatic pipes shall be
connected in parallel only after satisfactory pressure test.
The secondary building network contractor, consultants and owners shall have a
cooperation promise agreement with UDC and the solid waste contractor for the
abovementioned interaction relationships.
3.17 Pneumatic pipes
Air tube that will be inside the protecting tubing, along the pipe system. The
compressed air tube is used to connect the control unit for the valves with the
compressed air unit in the terminal. On the tube there are needed couplings and
points for control, for trouble-shooting and control of the compressed air
distribution.
The primary network has the pneumatic control mode. The secondary building
network shall have the same pneumatic control mode and have the pneumatic pipes
to connect the primary network. The pneumatic pipe shall be made of PB, shall
have inflection tension 170 kgf/cm², rupture tension 340 kgf/cm², diameter 15 mm
and operation pressure at 40°C 14.6 kgf/cm². Use the simple pressed pipe -fittings
for connection. The pneumatic pipes and interfaces of the secondary building
network shall be subject to the pressure test.
The compressed air pipes shall be provided as necessary to complete the PSWCS
system. Type of pipes shall be proposed by the Contractor for the intended purpose
and submit for approval prior to the installation works.

4. FEEDER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
4.1 Refuse Storage Section with Analog sensor
A refuse storage section made of Mild Steel with the same diameter as the chute
shall be provided by the Contractor below each refuse chute.. Calculations on the
"system cycle time" and "refuse storage capacity" shall be submitted for approval.
An analog level sensor shall be provided in the refuse storage facility for
interlocking with the upper floor disposal inlets and to initiate refuse collection by
the central plant before the storage threshold is reached. The level sensor shall shall
monitor the rising level of the refuse in the storage section to provide data to the
control system through the network interface so that the collection cycle can be
monitored and updated for optimal cycle times.
The refuse storage facility shall be so designed as to allow manual diversion of
falling refuse towards an emergency outlet for connection to conventional refuse
collection bins (provided by others) instead of towards the discharge valve/damper
in the event of system breakdown or blockage. The diverting action shall be
achieved without inserting, removing or replacing any system components. The
emergency outlet shall be capped and sealed under normal circumstances.
Vertical storage pipe with angle deviation, above the DV to store waste before the
DV opens, and the waste falls down in the air-flow of the transport pipe. The
storage pipe is equipped with an inspection opening, and a flexible connection to
the valve. The storage pipe is made of stainless steel / painted mild carbon steel. A
drain outlet will be provided above the Discharge Valve flap to ensure that during
the eventual cleaning of the garbage chute or regular maintenance of the garbage
chute water and debris are not allowed into the pipe transport system. The drain
pipe shall be 50mm~100mm diameter connected to a flexible hose and shall lead
into a drainage point located close by.
Power supply point in the form of a 32A TP&N isolator, lighting, 15 mm water
supply point, floor drains and sprinklers forming part of the building fire hydrant /
hose reel system will be provided by Other Works in accordance with relevant local
regulations.
A spring Air Intake shall be installed in the storage section just above the DV
which is designed to allow air into the storage section during operation of the DV
to increase turbulence in the waste and reduce risk of blockages. To avoid odour the
air inlet is kept closed by a spring which can be calibrated to open at a set pressure

4.2 Discharge valves
The waste discharge valves, which separate the waste transport from the vertical
garbage chutes and storage sections. The valves are normally closed and open only
for 7 to 10 seconds during the discharge cycles, which are programmed to occur two
or three times a day. Only one valve can open at a time. When the valves are closed,
the waste which is falling by gravity within the storage section and is retained by the
closing element of the valve. When a valve opens, the waste falls by gravity/suction
into the air stream in the transport pipe.
This valve is installed in a valve-room or a bunker below ground level. Discharge
valve of liquid tight flap valve type for separation of material in the chute from the
main transport pipe. The valve is opened and closed by a pneumatic cylinder.
Waste from the inlet is temporarily stored in the storage section above the valve
flap. Upon receiving a open order from the control system, the valve opens to let
the waste fall into the horizontal pipe where it is transported to the collection station
by the rapid air stream. The valve closes upon receiving closing order from the
control system. The valve is made in painted mild carbon steel.
The discharge valves shall be airproof and have sufficient strength. The valve in the
valve body shall be flat plate type and there shall be inspection opening outside the
valve body for the convenience of maintenance and maintaining. The valves are
operated by the compressed air generated in the collection terminal, and the closing
elements are actuated by compressed air cylinders.
The operation of the valves is controlled by the computer in the central control panel
in the collection terminal. Electronic terminals in the valve rooms verify and execute
the orders transmitted from the central control panel.
Required refuse discharge valve, air inlet valve, connecting refuse bend, local
control panel, etc. shall all be designed and provided by the contractor. Provision
shall be included in the local control panel for service personnel to initiate locking
up of the upper floor refuse disposal inlets.
Heavy duty refuse discharge valve shall be provided to withstand impacts due to
objects falling down from the upper floors. Conveyance ducting at the bottom of
refuse chute shall also be of adequate thickness and appropriately reinforced to
withstand such impacts.
Two emergency stop buttons shall be provided in the vicinity of the refuse
discharge valve to lock off the refuse discharge valves operation and PSWCS
system operation respectively. Control shall also be provided for the refuse
discharge valves and the central plant in such way that both valves will remain in or
return to the closed position and the central plant will be shut down through the
open actions of two separate dry contacts provided by others.

4.3 The out door discharge valve – retail and villas inlets
The charging stations connect the waste discharge valve. The charging stations which
are only subjected to a slight partial vacuum (maximum 100 mm water gauge) during
the short time the waste discharge valves are open.
The outdoor disposal inlet is the waste disposal reception point on street level and is
connected to the underground refuse conveyance pipe network. Install an outdoor
disposal inlet every 50-100 meters along the urban roads where the vacuum refuse
collection pipe network is laid as indicated in the drawings. The concrete distance
and exact location will be decided upon the actual conditions of the roads. The
shape of the outdoor disposal inlet shall be adjusted according to the design
requirement of the Consultant. The shell shall have ventilation shutters and shall
have sufficient hardness to prevent damages on purpose. The valves at the disposal
inlets shall have sufficient strength and well airproof. The underground part shall
have suitable protection coats to prevent rust.
The outdoor disposal inlets shall have outer dimensions L x B x H =1.00 × 0.80 ×
2.05 m.
PN Valve 500 (outdoor)
This valve is installed below ground level in earth and is connected direct to the
transport pipe. Waste from the inlet is temporarily stored in the storage section
above the valve flap. The valve is opened and closed by a pneumatic cylinder.
Upon receiving an open order from the control system, the valve opens to let the
waste fall into the horizontal pipe where it is transported to the collection station by
the rapid air stream. The valve closes upon receiving closing order from the control
system. The valve is made in painted and special prepared mild carbon steel.
BOTTOM OF PIPE TO FFL IS 2 M (INSTALLED PN3 AT PEARL)
In order to assure an obstruction-free passage of the waste in the charging stations

and in the waste transport pipes, the following measures of the charging stations
should not be exceeded:
a) The inside diameter should not exceed the diameter of the waste discharge
valves.
b) The diameter of the waste loading doors should be 50 mm less than the
discharge valve.
4.4 Air inlet valves
The air inlet valves, situated at the end of each waste transport pipe branch, are
normally installed under the street or basement level in the buildings, in close
connection to the last waste discharge valve of the branch to provide airflow to the
section in operation. The valve is operated automatically by means of compressed
air cylinder. The valve has a disc of steel, sealed with a specially designed rubber
gasket.

The valves are normally closed and opened only for 1 or 2 minutes during the
discharge cycles. Only one valve can open at a time.
The valves are operated by compressed air, and the closing elements are activated
by compressed air cylinders. The operation of the valves is controlled by the central
control panel in the collection terminal, and electronic terminals in the air inlet
valve rooms verify and execute the received orders. The sound level caused by the
air which enters the valve at high speed is considerable, and therefore the valves are
equipped with silencers.
Air inlet(s) at the refuse storage facility shall be provided, as and where necessary,
to facilitate transport of refuse and loosening up of the refuse agglomerate to
prevent system blockage. The inlet(s) shall only be opened during collection of
refuse by the central plant and shall remain air tight at other times to prevent smell
from leaking out of the system.
Acoustic silencer for air inlet valves and acoustic lagging complete with 0.8 mm
Grade 316 stainless steel cladding shall be provided if they are not located within
an acoustically sealed room. If an acoustically sealed room is required, provisions
such as wall lining wrapped in FSD approved type scrim cloth and secured under
perforated GI sheets, silencers, acoustic doors, acoustic louvers, etc. shall all be
provided by the Main Contractor of the individual plot.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all local statutory noise and
health & safety requirements are complied with when the door of the refuse
chamber is closed. However, noise level at 1 m from any air intake louvre outside
the refuse chamber shall in no case exceed 55 dB(A) during operation of the
PSWCS. Calculations to substantiate, compliance shall be submitted for approval.
Acoustic treatment for all air inlets or outlets of the PSWCS facilities shall all be
provided and installed by the contractor. Non-acoustic type external louvers at the
envelope of the building will be provided by Main Contractor.
4.5 Control Unit - Air Inlet Valve and Discharge Valve
This Unit shall be installed adjacent to the discharge valve and shall monitor and
control:
 The air inlet valve
 The discharge valve
 The refuse loading doors.
The Control Units shall be designed to communicate with the Electrical Control
Centre, ECC in the central collection station. The ECC shall interrogate all valve
rooms in a continuous scan. There may be more than one channel and the ECC
communicates these channels simultaneously.
Communication speed shall be selected so that it is possible for the ECC to collect
status from 20 AV/DV units per second. For valves that have received open orders,
the interrogation scan shall collect the information more frequently. Up to 4
communication channels shall be used.

The control unit shall send messages to the control panel of the garbage chute
supplier and send and receive signals with the following commands.
- lock all refuse inlet doors at upper levels when the emptying cycle is in
operation or the DV/ AV is under maintenance
- lock the DV and AV valve from operation when the garbage chute is under
maintenance or if there is fire and smoke in the building
5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
5.1 General
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all tests required to ensure the proper
functions and operations of the PSWCS equipment.
2. The Contractor shall supply the materials and equipment required for all testing as
appropriate and shall furnish and prepare the necessary test pieces for making all
tests on his premises and/ or at Site.
3. All inspections and tests shall be carried out in accordance with the Particular
Specification, the ACMV General Specification and Electrical General
Specification wherever applicable.
4. Inspection, testing and commissioning are also required for temporary works.
5. All tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Consultant and shall be
witnessed by the Consultant and/or their representatives.
5.2 Inspection and Testing during Construction
1. Refuse conveyance / air inlet ducts, compressed air piping and ventilation
ductworks shall be tested against leakage, section by section, during installation and
before cover up. Test pressures, duration and methods shall be as recommended by
the manufacturers and/or in accordance with internationally recognised standards
and submitted for approval by the Consultant before testing.
5.3 General Commissioning Requirements
1. Systems shall be properly commissioned to ensure that all the equipment are
performing the designed duty.
2. Prior to any commissioning taking place, the Contractor shall carry out a systematic
inspection of the PSWCS installation to ensure that commissioning procedures can
be reliably carried out.

3. The Contractor shall ensure that –
(a) Air intake screens, louvres and valves are unobstructed and clean
(b) Refuse separator, compactor, container and other equipment
chambers are clean and free of construction debris.
(c) Exhausters/ fans have been checked for impeller housing clearance
and are free of foreign objects.
(d) Cooling coil condensate trays and drains are clear and water can
drain away satisfactorily.
(e) Floor gulleys and all drainage traps are clear and operational
(f) Ducting, piping and other airways are clean.
(g) All filters and strainers have been cleaned.
(h) All sensing and monitoring equipment are properly fixed and clear
of obstruction.
(i) All air dampers and valves are operational
(j) All fire and volume control dampers are left in the fully open
position
(k) All manual control valves are open or pre-set, as required
(l) All filter media have been installed
(m) All electrical panels have been cleaned of construction dust and
debris and have been checked electrically.
(n) All electrical wiring are properly terminated and circuits (power,
lighting and controls) are completed, or will be completed at the
correct stage during the commissioning sequence.
(o) Insulation tests of motors and cables have been completed.
(p) Permanent power supplies are available at the electrical panels to
enable all the connected equipment to be satisfactorily
commissioned.
(q) All equipment have been checked for
- cleanliness
- lubrication
- belt tension
- motor fixing
- duct flexible connector alignment

- keyway and setscrew tightness .'

- vibration isolation – rotor/ impeller rotation
- normal gear operation - correct amperages and overload
settings
- start-stop, disconnection and circuit interruption device
(r) Lighting systems are operational with illumination level not less
than that specified.
5.4 Functional Test
The PSWCS shall be tested as described in this section to verify that the function of
individual equipment, components and the system as a whole comply with the
stipulated requirements.
1. Verify that the proper control programme is applied to the programmable logic
controller(s).
2. Verify that the personal computer is loaded with proper operating system and
application programmes.
3. Check that the system is configured with the correct parameters
4. Check by manual operation that all motors rotate in the correct direction watch
out for noise or other abnormal performance.
5. Start the compressed air system. Check the system components operation.
Adjust for proper air pressure and note any air leakage.
6. Set the container conveying facility to manual operation mode. Check the
system can operate in all directions.
7. Check operation of refuse separator. –
8. Check operation of the refuse compactor. Operate the pusher forward and
reverse. Check limit switch operation. Check the hydraulic system, oil cooler
and pump for the compactor.
9. Check the compactor operation in automatic mode.
10. Start each exhauster, one by one, and check rotating direction, noise and
vibration. Measure resistance of the air exhauster motor thermostat. Simulate
high motor temperature by a resistor and check that motor stops.
11. Check operation of all valves.
12. Check operation of refuse disposal inlets.
13. Empty each refuse storage facility by manual control.

14. Initiate an emptying programme and check the system operation in automatic
mode.
5.5 Performance Test
1. The PSWCS shall be tested as described in this section to verify that the
performance of individual equipment, components and the system as a whole
comply with the stipulated requirements.
2. The following tests are to be carried out preferably in the sequence indicated
(a) No Load Test
(b) On Load Test
(c) Overall Performance Test
3. In the event of any test indicating failure to comply with the stipulated
requirements, that test and those preceding, of which the results may have been
influenced by the fault indicated, shall be repeated after the fault is rectified
4. No Load Test
The functions of all components of the system shall be tested with the air
exhausters in operation and charging no sample refuse. The test items shall
include, but not be limited to the following
(a) Put wire mesh in refuse conveyance I air inlet ducts and operate air
exhauster to clean up the inside of ducting. Remove wire mesh and
trapped substances afler the cleaning operation.
(b) Measure air temperature, pressure, velocity, noise levels, motor current,
etc, at reference locations and different operating points.
(c) Identify any air leakage at refuse storage facility, discharge valve, air
inlet valve, refuse conveyance ducts, separator, etc. Adjust and tighten
relevant components when air leakage is found.
(d) Verify manual operation of each equipment with air exhauster in

operation.
(e) Verify automatic operation of each equipment with air exhauster in

operation.
5. On Load Test
The functions of all components of the system shall be tested using sample
refuse with the air exhausters in operation. All refuse conveyance routes from
refuse storage facilities and outdoor disposal inlets to the central refuse

collection station shall be checked. The test items shall include, but not be
limited to, the following –
(a) Check manual operation of the system with half load and then full
load refuse sample in each of the refuse storage facilities inside refuse
chambers.
(b) Check automatic continuous operation of the system with half load
and then full load refuse sample in each of the refuse storage facilities
inside refuse chambers.
(c) Measure air temperature, pressure, velocity, noise levels, motor

current;,etc. at reference locations and under different operating
conditions. Adjust air velocity and other operation parameters as
necessary. Measure refuse conveyance time of each flow path and the
system cycle time for automatic continuous operation.
6. Overall Performance Test
The overall performance of the system shall be tested using actual refuse. All
refuse conveyance routes from refuse storage facilities to the central refuse
collection station shall be checked. The test items shall include, but not be
limited to, the following –
(a) Check automatic continuous operation of the system with half load
and then full load refuse in each of the refuse storage facilities inside
refuse chambers.
(b) Measure air temperature, pressure, velocity, noise levels, motor

current, etc. at reference locations and under different operating
conditions. Adjust air velocity and other operation parameters as
necessary. Measure refuse conveyance time of each flow path and the
system cycle time.
(c) Check odour level of refuse conveyance air discharged from carbon
filter under different operating conditions.
5.6 Testing and Commissioning for Future Extension
1. Since the entire PSWCS equipment shall be designed to allow future extension
of the system, the remaining tests shall be carried out once the other buildings
are completed. The Contractor shall ensure that the PSWCS system shall be
compatible for future extension. Operation control of the system shall be re-
programmed or adjusted to include the newly completed section in the
operation sequence and another performance test shall be carried out to verify
the system performance.
2. When the central plant and other sections are already put in use, testing and
commissioning work to be carried out due to the inclusion of a newly

completed extension section shall be programmed and scheduled in such way as

not to affect the existing refuse collection. Provisions for the testing and
commissioning for future extension is deemed to be included in this contract.
3. The Contractor shall provide all necessary information and co-ordinate with the
future PSWCS contractor for detail interfacing works.
5.7 Submissions
1. At least two months prior to the testing or commissioning of any section, the
Contractor shall submit the following information to the Consultant for
approval –
(a) Schedule and programme of testing and commissioning activities

(b) Methods, procedures and standards of testing for individual components
and the whole system.
(c) Proposed formats of testing and commissioning reports
(d) Type, make and models of testing instruments to be used
(e) Calibration methods and operating instructions for instruments.
(f) Accuracy and tolerances of instruments
2. The Contractor shall submit in triplicate the testing and commissioning

report/certificates to the Consultant on completion of the Works.

SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and

maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control
hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water
and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1. Delegated Design: Design dewatering system, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
2. Continuously monitor the drawdown water level to ensure ground water
table is sufficiently lowered below the bottom of excavation level.
3. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of
excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that
damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented.
4. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by bunds, grading, dikes,
or other means.
5. Undertake all necessary temporary works to accomplish dewatering without
damaging existing structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation.
6. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and

details of trenches, pits, wells and well points; locations of risers, headers, filters,
pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control of
sediment, and disposal of water.
1. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring

performance of dewatering system and checks on erosion.
2. Include a written plan for dewatering operations including control
procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise.
B. Method Statement: Provide a detailed narrative describing means, methods and

techniques to be adopted for the dewatering system. The Method Statement shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Control procedures to be adopted,
2. Verification of the sediment load in the discharge water,
3. Details of the pipe network and pumps to collect the discharge water,
4. A scheme of contingency measures in case of dewatering system
breakdown,
5. Pumping tests for determining the ground permeability and the quantity of
flow.
DEWATERING S312319 - Page 1 of 5

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dewatering system indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Other Informational Submittals:
1. Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements

that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations.
2. Apply QCS 2014, when the latter provide more stringent requirements;
provide all submittals and information requested by QCS 2014.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of

dewatering systems and dewatering work.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations

before beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to dewatering including, but not

limited to, the following:
a. Inspection and discussion of condition of site to be dewatered

including coordination with temporary erosion control measures and
temporary controls and protections.
b. Geotechnical report.
c. Proposed site clearing, dredging and excavations.
d. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
e. Coordination for interruption, shutoff, capping, and continuation of
utility services.
f. Construction schedule. Verify availability of Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
g. Testing and monitoring of dewatering system.
h. Safety requirements.
i. Monitoring system.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities on

the Project site or on adjoining properties unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the Engineer no fewer than 2 days in advance of proposed

interruption of utility.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Engineer’s written
permission.
B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project
and is available for information only. The Contractor is responsible for his own
interpretation of the geotechnical data. The Employer will not be responsible for
interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations

necessary for dewatering, at no extra cost.
C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to

survey adjacent existing structures, and site improvements, establishing exact
elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and
record existing elevations.
1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate

log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations.
Promptly notify the Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks,
sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities on or

adjacent to the site from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations.
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering

excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site
and surrounding area.
2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain
or water accumulation.
B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,

walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used

facilities without permission from the Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required

by the Engineer or authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.
D. Monitor dewatering systems continuously.
E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.
F. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, during

dewatering operations.
G. Any grouting works and other measures for reducing and controlling the quantity
of flow.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install dewatering system utilizing bunds, pits, trenches, dikes, wells, well points,
or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps,
filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water
controls.
1. Space dewatering points at intervals required to provide sufficient

dewatering.
2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the
subsurface.
B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place dewatering system into

operation to lower and maintain water to specified levels. Operate system
continuously until structures and utilities have been constructed and until written
authorization to cease dewatering is received from the Engineer.
C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit

excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry
subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata
above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping,
subgrade softening, and slope instability.
D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of

foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 500mm below surface of

excavation.
E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering

public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed.
Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others.

Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by

F. Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate

operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis in the event that any part of
system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied
due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and
foundation soils at no additional expense to the Employer.
1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering.

Plug or fill trenches pits, wells, holes with sand or concrete or other
approved material or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 900 mm below
overlying construction.
G. Damages: Promptly repair and restore to original condition any damages to

adjacent structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities caused by
dewatering operations.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Observation Wells: Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the

minimum number of observation wells or piezometers; additional observation
wells may be required by the Engineer or authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Observe, record and report to the Engineer daily elevation of ground water
and piezometric water levels in observation wells.
2. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive,
damaged, or destroyed. Suspend construction activities in areas where
observation wells are not functioning properly until reliable observations
can be made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to
demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.
3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering
is completed.
B. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being
removed by the dewatering operation.
C. Maintain and continuously operate the dewatering system without any

interruption.
END OF SECTION 312319


03 TT - High Resistance

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

03 TT - High Resistance

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

MASTER PLANNING & INFRASTRUCTURE CONSULTANCY SERVICES

PK2 - INFRASTRUCTURE WORKS

SECTION 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 10

Part 12 Failure By The Contractor To Meet Acceptable Quality Performance

SECTION 3 GROUND INVESTIGATION

SECTION 4 FOUNDATIONS AND RETAINING STRUCTURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 10

Part 20 Personnel Qualifications and Certification

SECTION 7 GREEN CONSTRUCTIONS

SECTION 8 DRAINAGE WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 3 of 10

Part 10 Pipelines Cleaning and Inspection Survey

SECTION 9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

SECTION 10 INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

SECTION 11 HEALTH & SAFETY

SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 4 of 10

SECTION 15 INSULATION OF BUILDINGS

SECTION 16 STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 5 of 10

Part 5 Light Metal Support and Cladding Support

SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY

SECTION 19 PLUMBING WORK

SECTION 20 DRAINAGE WORKS FOR BUILDINGS

SECTION 21 ELECTRICAL WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 6 of 10

Part 13 Telephone Installations

SECTION 22 AIR CONDITIONING, REFRIGERATION AND

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 7 of 10

Part 6 Ductwork and Air-Side Equipment

SECTION 23 FIRE FIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

SECTION 24 FINISHES TO BUILDINGS

SECTION 25 GLASS AND GLAZING

SECTION 26 PAINTING AND DECORATING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 8 of 10

SECTION 27 EXTERNAL WORKS

SECTION 35 FABRICATED STRUCTURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 9 of 10

SECTION 36 PIPEWORK FOR DISTRICT COOLING DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 80 PNEUMATIC SOLID WASTE COLLECTION NETWORK

SECTION 312319 DEWATERING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 10 of 10

2.1.4 Source Approval

Table 2.1 Modify the Following

2.4 Fine Aggregate for concrete and Mortar

3.2 SOURCE APPROVAL

Add the Following:

3.4 QUALITY AND TESTING

Add the Following:

4 The cement shall have a minimum clinker content of 95%.

6 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Types I, II and V or BS EN 197-1 Type CEM I

a- Triple Blend Cement: Moderately Sulfate Resisting Cement, ASTM C150

b- Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150 Type I or BS EN 197-

c- Sulphate resisting cement to ASTM C150 TYPE V or BS EN 197-1 Type

4.3 TESTING AND SAMPLING

b- Sulfates (SO4) shall be limited to 1000 ppm.

8 Third generation admixture, Polycarboxylate Ether shall be used in the concrete

9 Obtain each admixture from the same manufacturer.

PART 6 - PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS

6.2.2 Add Item 6:

6. The exposure of substructure concrete is classified as:

6.4 Grades of Concrete

Table 6.4 “Concrete grades composition requirements” as follows: